BusinessWritersGuide.pdf

2

The Five-Way Access System

The five-way access system of The Business Writer’s Handbook provides readers with multiple ways of retrieving information:

1. Alphabetically Organized Entries

Alphabetically organized entries with color tabs enable readers to find information quickly. Within the entries, terms shown as links refer to other entries that contain definitions of key concepts or further information on related topics.

2. Contents by Topic

The complete “Contents by Topic” on the inside front cover groups entries into categories and serves as a quick reference for finding all topics covered in the book. The “Contents by Topic” allows a writer focusing on a specific task or problem to locate helpful entries; it is also useful for instructors who want to correlate the Handbook with standard textbooks or their own course materials. The list of “Commonly Misused Words and Phrases” (see page 601) extends this topical key by listing all the usage entries in the book.

3. Checklist of the Writing Process

The “Checklist of the Writing Process” (see page xxv) helps readers reference all writing-process–related entries.

4. Comprehensive Index

The user-friendly Index (see page 555) lists all the topics covered in the book—including subtopics and model documents—in an alphabetical arrangement.

5. Model Documents and Figures by Topic

The list of “Model Documents and Figures by Topic” (see page 610)

3

makes it easy for readers to find the abundant real-world examples and sample documents throughout the text that provide models for effective business communication.

Contents by Topic Use this list as a quick reference for finding entries by topic. To

search this book in more detail, see the Index.

Business Writing Documents and Elements Business Plans Description FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) Forms Indexing Instructions Job Descriptions Mission Statements Policies and Procedures Process Explanation Promotional Writing

Brochures Newsletter Articles Newsletters Press Releases Sales Letters

Proposals Grant Proposals

4

Questionnaires Report Components

Abstracts Appendixes Conclusions Executive Summaries Glossaries Introductions Tables of Contents Titles

Reports Annual Reports Feasibility Reports Formal Reports Incident Reports Investigative Reports Progress and Activity Reports Trip Reports

Writing for the Web

Correspondence Acknowledgments Adjustment Messages Collection Letters Complaints Correspondence Cover Messages (or Transmittals) E-mail Form Letters

5

Inquiries and Responses Instant Messaging and Live Chat International Correspondence Letters Memos Reference Letters Refusal Letters Sales Letters Text Messaging

Job Search and Application Acceptances / Refusals (for Employment) Application Cover Letters Interviewing for a Job Job Search Resignation Letters Résumés

Design and Visuals Layout and Design

Forms Headers and Footers Headings Lists

Visuals Drawings Flowcharts Global Graphics

6

Graphs Infographics Maps Organizational Charts Photographs Tables

Presentations and Meetings Listening Meetings Minutes of Meetings Presentations

Research and Documentation Adapting to New Technologies Bibliographies Brainstorming Copyrights, Patents, and Trademarks Documenting Sources Interviewing for Information Note-Taking Paraphrasing Plagiarism Questionnaires Quotations Research

Organization, Writing, and Revision

7

Blogs and Forums Collaborative Writing Description Document Management Ethics in Writing Exposition Global Communication Logic Errors Methods of Development

Cause-and-Effect Chronological Comparison Definition Division-and-Classification General and Specific Order-of-Importance Sequential Spatial

Narration Organization Outlining Persuasion Preparation

Audience Brainstorming Context Purpose Readers Scope Selecting the Medium

8

Proofreading Repurposing Revision Social Media Writing a Draft

Style and Language Style

Affectation Allusions Ambiguity Awkwardness Biased Language Business Writing Style Buzzwords Clarity Clichés Comparison Conciseness Contractions Defining Terms Direct Address Double Negatives Emphasis English, Varieties of Euphemisms Expletives Figures of Speech Gobbledygook

9

Idioms Intensifiers Jargon Nominalizations Pace Parallel Structure Plain Language Point of View Positive Writing Repetition Rhetorical Questions Sentence Variety Subordination Telegraphic Style Tone “You” Viewpoint

Word Choice Abstract / Concrete Words Antonyms Buzzwords Connotation / Denotation Foreign Words in English Functional Shift Malapropisms Synonyms Thesaurus Usage Vague Words

10

Sentences and Paragraphs Sentence Construction

Appositives Clauses Complements Expletives Modifiers Objects Phrases Restrictive and Nonrestrictive Elements Syntax

Sentence Faults Comma Splice Dangling Modifiers Garbled Sentences Mixed Constructions Run-on Sentences Sentence Fragments

Paragraphs Coherence Transition Unity

Parts of Speech and Grammar Grammar

Agreement Case English as a Second Language

11

Gender Mood Number (Grammar) Person Possessive Case Pronoun Reference Tense Voice

Parts of Speech Adjectives Adverbs Articles Conjunctions Functional Shift Interjections Nouns Prepositions Pronouns Verbals Verbs

Punctuation and Mechanics Mechanics

Abbreviations Acronyms and Initialisms Ampersands Capitalization Compound Words Contractions

12

Dates Italics Numbers Prefixes Proofreading Spelling Suffixes

Punctuation Apostrophes Brackets Colons Commas Dashes Ellipses Exclamation Marks Hyphens Parentheses Periods Question Marks Quotation Marks Semicolons Slashes

13

The Business Writer’s Handbook

14

About the Authors Gerald J. Alred is Professor Emeritus of English at the

University of Wisconsin–Milwaukee, where he is a teaching-

award recipient and an adviser to the Professional Writing

Program. He is the author of numerous scholarly articles and

several standard bibliographies on business and technical

communication, and he served as Associate Editor of the

Journal of Business Communication. He is a recipient of the

prestigious Jay R. Gould Award for “profound scholarly and

textbook contributions to the teaching of business and technical

writing.” He developed and manages the Web site

InlandChorus.com .

Charles T. Brusaw served as a faculty member at NCR

Corporation’s Management College, where he developed and

taught courses in professional writing, editing, and

presentation skills for the corporation worldwide. Previously,

he worked in advertising, technical writing, public relations,

and curriculum development. He was also a communications

consultant, an invited speaker at academic conferences, and a

teacher of business writing at Sinclair Community College. He

passed away in 2015.

Walter E. Oliu served as Chief of the Publishing Services Branch

at the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, where he managed

the agency’s printing, graphics, editing, and publishing

programs, as well as the daily operations of the agency’s public

Web site. He is the recipient of the agency’s Meritorious Service

TM

15

Award. He has also taught at Miami University of Ohio, Slippery

Rock State University, Montgomery College, and George Mason

University.

16

The Business Writer’s Handbook Twelfth Edition

Gerald J. Alred

Charles T. Brusaw

Walter E. Oliu

17

For Bedford/St. Martin’s

Vice President, Editorial, Macmillan Learning Humanities:

Edwin Hill

Executive Program Director for English: Leasa Burton

Senior Program Manager: Laura Arcari

Marketing Manager: Laura Arrant

Director of Content Development: Jane Knetzger

Executive Development Editor: Jane Carter

Editorial Assistant: William Hwang

Content Project Manager: Louis C. Bruno Jr.

Senior Workflow Project Supervisor: Joe Ford

Production Supervisor: Robin Besofsky

Media Project Manager: Allison Hart

Director of Media Editoral, Humanities: Adam Whitehurst

Manager of Publishing Services: Andrea Cava

Project Management: Lumina Datamatics, Inc.

Editorial Services: Lumina Datamatics, Inc.

Composition: Lumina Datamatics, Inc.

Text Permission Manager: Kalina Ingham

Text Permissions Researcher: Claire Paschal

Photo Permissions Manager: Angela Boehler

Photo Permissions Researcher: Kerri Wilson, Lumina

Datamatics, Inc.

Director of Design, Content Management: Diana Blume

Text Design: Books By Design, Inc.; Glenna Collett

Cover Design: William Boardman

Cover Image: Malorny / Getty Images

18

Copyright © 2019, 2015, 2012, 2009 by Bedford/St. Martin’s.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by

any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording,

or otherwise, except as may be permitted by law or expressly

permitted in writing by the Publisher.

1 2 3 4 5 6

23 22 21 20 19 18

For information, write: Bedford/St. Martin’s, 75 Arlington

Street, Boston, MA 02116

ISBN: 978-1-319-23418-8(mobi)

Acknowledgments

Copyrights appear on the same page as the art selections they

cover; these copyrights constitute an extension of the copyright

page.

Page 511, Kitty O. Locker. “ ‘As Per Your Request’: A History of

Business Jargon,” Journal of Business and Technical

Communication 1, no. 1 (1987): 27–47. Reprinted by permission

of SAGE Publications.

19

Contents Contents by Topic

Preface

Five Steps to Successful Writing

Checklist of the Writing Process

The Business Writer’s Handbook: Alphabetical Entries

Index

Commonly Misused Words and Phrases

Model Documents and Figures by Topic

20

Preface The Business Writer’s Handbook is the text students and

professionals need to land, navigate, and stand out on the job.

Like previous editions, the twelfth edition is a comprehensive,

easy-access guide that places business writing in a real-world

context, with quick reference to hundreds of topics and scores

of model documents and visuals.

Anticipating the needs of today’s professionals and job

seekers, this edition has been judiciously trimmed, while areas

related to finding a job and using social media as a professional

tool have been updated and expanded, based on expert advice.

Further, LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing provides

online tutorials on today’s most relevant digital writing topics,

from content management to personal branding. This resource

can be packaged with the text at no additional cost.

Helpful Features The Business Writer’s Handbook offers alphabetically arranged

entries on an array of topics crucial to effective business

writing, from “Abbreviations” and “Abstracts” through “Writing

for the Web” and the “‘You’ Viewpoint.” In its focus on the job

search and résumé preparation, it provides up-to-date advice on

how to network using professional and social media and offers

tips on developing application materials that will spark the

interest of prospective employers. Its concise yet

comprehensive coverage of the writing process and in-depth

treatment of grammar and usage provide detailed help for every

21

stage of writing, from preparation, audience analysis, and

research, to drafting, revising, and proofreading.

Real-world samples provide students with authentic models

of business correspondence for a variety of workplace

situations. Up-to-date instruction gives students the latest

advice on writing and designing for the Web, using social media

in business, conducting Internet research, and approaching

new software. An emphasis on the latest workplace

technologies stresses the importance of tailoring every message

— from a formal business e-mail to a quick text — to its purpose,

audience, and medium.

Quick reference features — including Contents by Topic (on

the inside front cover), a comprehensive index, and a list of

model documents and figures — make it easy to navigate.

Checklists help writers tackle complex tasks such as

proofreading and revising, communicating with international

audiences, and evaluating sources. Throughout the text, “Ethics

Notes” and “Professionalism Notes” highlight central concerns

in today’s business world and offer advice for dealing with those

concerns. A thorough discussion of copyright and plagiarism

clarifies what plagiarism is in the digital age and highlights the

ethical aspects of using and documenting sources

appropriately. Guidelines for online and interpersonal

communication and tips on preparing important projects and

presentations offer valuable advice on which students and

professionals can rely.

22

New to This Edition Our focus in revising the handbook for this edition has been on

refining and updating existing entries to provide information

that is especially relevant for securing a job in today’s economy

and for navigating the technologies needed to succeed on the

job. We have made the following additions and improvements:

A new entry on creating an online professional profile helps business writers select the appropriate forum and represent themselves and their accomplishments effectively on sites such as LinkedIn, AngelList, and Academia.edu. A new entry on spreadsheets explains how and why to use them and provides resources for up-to-date help. A thorough updating of the job-search entry includes new coverage of co-ops, service internships, and “gap year” opportunities — crucial information for students and professionals seeking a new career. Updated coverage of interviewing for a job offers more tips on what to do after the interview and includes a new model of a follow-up letter. Updated coverage of documenting sources provides current guidelines for citing sources in CMS style. A new professionalism note on the etiquette of mobile devices helps students move seamlessly between their personal and professional worlds. New instructor support materials, including advice on structuring the class and sample course plans, are available on the instructor’s tab on the book’s catalog page at

23

macmillanlearning.com.

How to Use This Book The Business Writer’s Handbook is made up of alphabetically

organized entries, with colored tabs delineating each letter

section. Within each entry, underlined, boldfaced cross-

references — for example, proposals — link readers to entries

that contain further information. Many entries present advice

and guidelines in the form of convenient “Writer’s Checklists”

and annotated model documents and figures.

The Handbook’s alphabetical organization enables readers to

find specific topics quickly and easily; however, readers with

general questions have several different ways to locate

information in the book.

Contents by Topic. The complete “Contents by Topic” on the inside front cover groups the alphabetical entries into topic categories. This topical key allows a writer focusing on a specific task or problem to browse all related entries; it also helps instructors correlate the Handbook to standard textbooks or to their own course materials. Commonly Misused Words and Phrases. The list of “Commonly Misused Words and Phrases” on pages 601–02 extends the “Contents by Topic” by listing all the usage entries, which appear in italics throughout the book — for example, and/or. Model Documents and Figures by Topic. The topically organized list of “Model Documents and Figures by Topic”

24

on the inside back cover makes it easier to browse the book’s most commonly referenced sample documents and visuals to find specific examples of business writing genres. Checklist of the Writing Process. The checklist on pages xxv–xxvi helps readers reference key entries in a sequence useful for planning and carrying out a writing project. Comprehensive Index. The user-friendly index lists all the topics covered in the book — including subtopics and model documents — in an alphabetical arrangement.

Acknowledgments For their invaluable comments and suggestions for this edition

of The Business Writer’s Handbook, we thank the following

reviewers who responded to our questionnaires: William

Allegrezza, Indiana University Northwest; Jeanne Allison,

University of Missouri–St. Louis; Stevens Amidon, Indiana

University–Purdue University Fort Wayne; Greg Brecht,

University of South Florida, St. Petersburg; Carol Davis,

California State University, Monterey Bay; Sonia

Khatchadourian, University of Wisconsin–Milwaukee; Nancy

Nygaard, University of Wisconsin–Milwaukee; and Teeanna

Rizkallah, California State University, Fullerton. Additional

thanks go out to Sonia Khatchadourian, who kindly let us share

her syllabus on our book’s catalog page, so that other

instructors could benefit from her experience with the book.

For this edition, we’d especially like to thank Richard C. Hay,

founder and CEO of Twenty Six Design, LLC, for his advice on

updating the figures and model documents throughout the

25

book, and especially for his update of the brochure entry,

including the new model brochure. We also owe special thanks

to Traci Gardner, Virginia Tech, for her update of the entries on

social media and for creating an online profile. Finally, we want

to thank Saundra Williams, Human Resources Business Partner

at Macmillan Learning, for her advice on updating the job

search entries. We are indebted to Kenneth J. Cook, president

of Ken Cook Co., for his ongoing support of this and earlier

editions of the Handbook and for his continued permission to

reprint the exemplary company newsletter.

We wish to thank Bedford/St. Martin’s for supporting this

book, especially Edwin Hill, Vice President, Humanities

Editorial; Leasa Burton, Senior Program Director, English;

Laura Arcari, Senior Program Manager, Rhetorics and Business

and Technical Writing; and Lauren Arrant, Marketing Manager.

We are grateful to Andrea Cava, Publishing Services Manager;

Louis Bruno, Content Project Manager; and Robin Besofsky,

Production Supervisor, for their patient management of the

book’s production. We thank Hilary Newman, Director of

Rights and Permissions; Kalina Ingham, Permissions Manager;

Angie Boehler, Permissions Editor; and Claire Paschal,

Permissions Associate, for their help in managing the

permissions process. We thank Billy Boardman, Senior Design

Manager; Diana Blume, Design Director; and Diana’s design

team, as well as Rachel Comerford, Director of Content

Standards, for helping make this book accessible to all readers.

Our gratitude also goes out to William Hwang for his

26

conscientious work on this project. Finally, we wish to thank

Executive Development Editor Jane Carter for her editorial

direction on this always-challenging project.

At Lumina Datamatics, we thank Jana Lewis, Bharathi

Sriram, Sudheer Purushothaman, Kerri Wilson, Jamie Thaman,

and Rebecca Roby for their help in the copyediting,

proofreading, permissions, and production processes.

We offer our heartfelt gratitude to Barbara Brusaw for her

patience and time spent preparing the manuscript for the first

five editions. We also gratefully acknowledge the ongoing

contributions of many students and instructors at the University

of Wisconsin–Milwaukee. Finally, special thanks go to Janice

Alred for her many hours of help in coordinating this project

and for continuing to hold everything together.

With sorrow, we mark the 2015 passing of our esteemed

coauthor, Charles “Ted” Brusaw, and dedicate this edition of

The Business Writer’s Handbook to his memory. Ted began his

professional career as a freelance writer and moved on to a

variety of positions in business and industry as a technical

writer and corporate trainer. For many years, he was manager

of technical publications at the NCR Corporation. Ted

coauthored Practical Writing, The Business Writer’s Handbook,

Handbook of Technical Writing, The Professional Writer, The

Business Writer’s Companion, and Writing That Works. He also

independently authored a well-reviewed book of World War II

27

military history (a Book of the Month Club selection), a Civil

War novel, a biography of Benedict Arnold, and a historical

novel on the Lewis and Clark expedition. Ted was an

accomplished writer, teacher, and mentor (most especially to

both of us), whose standards were simply the highest. We are

grateful to have had the good fortune to work with this

consummate professional, who was also our friend.

Gerald J. Alred and Walter E. Oliu

We’re All In. As Always Bedford/St. Martin’s is as passionately committed to the

discipline of English as ever, working hard to provide support

and services that make it easier for you to teach your course

your way.

Find community support at the Bedford/St. Martin’s English

Community (community.macmillan.com), where you can

follow our Bits blog for new teaching ideas, download titles

from our professional resource series, and review projects in

the pipeline.

Choose curriculum solutions that offer flexible custom

options, combining our carefully developed print and digital

resources, acclaimed works from Macmillan’s trade imprints,

and your own course or program materials to provide the exact

resources your students need. Our approach to customization

makes it possible to create a customized project uniquely suited

for your students, and based on your enrollment size, return

28

money to your department, and raise your institutional profile

with a high-impact author visit through the Macmillan Author

Program (“MAP”).

Rely on outstanding service from your Bedford/St. Martin’s

sales representative and editorial team. Contact us or visit

macmillanlearning.com to learn more about any of the

following options.

LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing: Where Students Learn Launch-Pad provides engaging content and new ways to get the

most out of your book. Get an interactive e-book combined with

assessment tools in a fully customizable course space, then

assign and mix our resources with yours.

Sample documents provide a wide range of effective professional writing models for students to emulate, including e-mails, résumés, cover letters, reports, proposals, brochures, and questionnaires. Tutorials show students how to maximize free online tools to access projects across platforms, design dynamic presentations, develop podcasts, manage their personal brand, and build common citations in APA and MLA styles. Diagnostics provide opportunities to assess areas for improvement and assign additional exercises based on students’ needs. Visual reports show performance by topic, class, and student as well as improvement over time. Prebuilt units — including readings, videos, and quizzes —

29

are easy to adapt by mixing your materials with our high- quality multimedia content and ready-made assessment options, such as LearningCurve adaptive quizzing and Exercise Central. Use LaunchPad on its own or integrate it with your school’s learning management system so that your students are always on the same page.

LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing can be purchased on

its own or packaged with the print book at a significant

discount. An activation code is required. To order LaunchPad

Solo for Professional Writing with the print handbook, use ISBN

978-1-319-23939-8. For more information, go to

launchpadworks.com.

Choose from Alternative Formats of The Business Writer’s Handbook Bedford/St. Martin’s offers a range of formats. Choose what

works best for you and your students:

Spiral-bound edition To order the spiral-bound edition, use ISBN 978-1-319-05849-4. Popular e-book formats For details of our e-book partners, visit macmillanlearning.com/ebooks.

Select Value Packages Add value to your text by packaging Writer’s Help 2.0 with The

Business Writer’s Handbook at a significant discount. Contact

your sales representative for more information. Writer’s Help

30

2.0 is a powerful online writing resource that helps students

find answers, whether they are searching for writing advice on

their own or as part of an assignment.

Smart search. Built on research with more than 1,600 student writers, the smart search in Writer’s Help provides reliable results even when students use novice terms, such as flow and unstuck. Trusted content from our best-selling handbooks. Choose Writer’s Help 2.0, Hacker Version, or Writer’s Help 2.0, Lunsford Version, and ensure that students have clear advice and examples for all of their writing questions. Diagnostics that help establish a baseline for instruction. Assign diagnostics to identify areas of strength and areas for improvement and to help students plan a course of study. Use visual reports to track performance by topic, class, and student as well as improvement over time. Adaptive exercises that engage students. Writer’s Help 2.0 includes LearningCurve, game-like online quizzing that adapts to what students already know and helps them focus on what they need to learn.

Student access is packaged with The Business Writer’s

Handbook at a significant discount. Order ISBN 978-1-319-23941-

1 for Writer’s Help 2.0, Hacker Version, or ISBN 978-1-319-

23945-9 for Writer’s Help 2.0, Lunsford Version, to ensure that

your students have easy access to online writing support.

Students who rent or buy a used book can purchase access;

instructors may request free access at

31

macmillanlearning.com/writershelp2.

Instructor Resources You have a lot to do in your course. We want to make it easy for

you to find the support you need — and to find it quickly.

Suggestions for structuring your course, including sample

course plans, can be downloaded from macmillanlearning.com.

Visit the instructor’s tab for The Business Writer’s Handbook.

32

Five Steps to Successful Writing Successful writing on the job is not the product of inspiration,

nor is it merely the spoken word converted to print; it is the

result of knowing how to structure information using both text

and design to achieve an intended purpose for a clearly defined

audience. The best way to ensure that your writing will succeed  — whether it is a proposal, a résumé, a Web page, or any other

document — is to approach writing using the following steps:

1. Preparation 2. Research 3. Organization 4. Writing 5. Revision

You will no doubt need to follow those steps consciously at first.

The same is true the first time you use new software, interview

a job candidate, or chair a committee meeting. With practice,

the steps become nearly automatic. This is not to suggest that

writing becomes easy — it does not. However, the easiest and

most efficient way to write effectively is to do it systematically.

As you master the five steps, keep in mind that they are

interrelated and often overlap. For example, your readers’

needs and your purpose, which you determine in step 1, will

affect decisions you make in subsequent steps. You may also

need to retrace steps. When you conduct research, for example,

you may realize that you need to revise your initial impression

33

of the document’s purpose and audience. Similarly, when you

begin to organize in step 3, you may discover the need to return

to research (step 2) to gather more information.

The time required for each step varies with different writing

tasks. When writing an informal memo, for example, you might

accomplish the first three steps (preparation, research, and

organization) by simply listing the points in the order you want

to cover them. In such situations, you gather and organize

information mentally as you consider your purpose and

audience. For a formal report, the first three steps require well-

organized research, careful note-taking, and detailed outlining.

For a routine e-mail message to a coworker, the first four steps

merge as you type the information onto the screen. In short, the

five steps expand, contract, and at times must be repeated to fit

the complexity or context of the writing task.

Dividing the writing process into steps is especially useful

when you are writing as a part of a team. In that case, you

typically divide work among team members, keep track of a

project, and save time by not duplicating efforts. When you

collaborate, you can use e-mail to share text and other files,

suggest improvements to one an other’s work, and generally

keep everyone informed of your progress as you follow the

steps in the writing process.

Preparation Writing, like most professional tasks, requires solid

34

preparation. In fact, adequate preparation is as important as

writing a draft. In preparation for writing, your goal is to

accomplish the following four major tasks:

Establish your primary purpose. Assess your audience (or readers) and the context. Determine the scope of your coverage. Select the appropriate medium. See selecting the medium.

Establishing Your Purpose To establish your primary purpose, simply ask yourself what

you want your readers to know, to believe, or to be able to do

after they have finished reading what you have written. Be

precise. Often a writer states a purpose so broadly that it is

almost useless. A purpose such as “to report on possible

locations for a new research facility” is too general. However,

“to compare the relative advantages of Paris, Singapore, and

San Francisco as possible locations for a new research facility

so that top management can choose the best one” is a purpose

statement that can guide you throughout the writing process. In

addition to your primary purpose, consider possible secondary

purposes for your document. For example, a secondary purpose

of the research-facility report might be to make corporate

executive readers aware of the staffing needs of the new facility

so that they can ensure its smooth operation in whichever

location is selected.

Assessing Your Audience and Context The next task is to assess your audience. Again, be precise and

1

35

ask key questions. Who exactly is your reader? Do you have

multiple readers? Who needs to see or to use the document?

What are your readers’ needs in relation to your subject? What

are your readers’ attitudes about the subject? (Are they

skeptical? Supportive? Anxious? Bored?) What do your readers

already know about the subject? Should you define basic

terminology, or will such definitions merely bore, or even

impede, your readers? Are you communicating with

international readers and therefore dealing with issues inherent

in global communication? To be a successful writer in any

language, you must understand the cultural values that underlie

the language in which you are writing. In the United States,

conciseness, coherence, and clarity characterize good writing.

Make sure readers can follow your writing, and say only what is

necessary to communicate your message.

For the research-facility report, the readers are described as

“top management.” Who is included in that category? Will one

of the people evaluating the report be the human resources

manager? That person would likely be interested in the

availability of qualified professionals as well as in the presence

of training, housing, and even recreational facilities available to

potential employees in each city. The purchasing manager

would be concerned with available sources for needed

materials. The marketing manager would give priority to a

facility’s proximity to the primary markets and transportation to

important clients. The chief financial officer would want to

know about land and building costs and about each city’s tax

36

structure. The chief executive officer would be interested in all

this information and perhaps more. As in this example, many

workplace documents have audiences composed of multiple

readers. You can accommodate their needs through one of a

number of approaches described in the entry audience.

Part of knowing the needs and interests of your readers is

learning as much as you can about the context. Simply put,

context is the environment or circumstances in which writers

produce documents and within which readers interpret their

meanings. Everything is written within a context, as is

illustrated in many of the entries and examples throughout this

book. To determine the effect of context on the research-facility

report, you might ask both specific and general questions about

the situation and about your readers’ backgrounds: Is this the

company’s first new facility, or has the company chosen

locations for new facilities before? Have the readers visited all

three cities? Have they already seen other reports on the three

cities? What is the corporate culture in which your readers

work, and what are its key values? What specific factors, such as

competition, finance, and regulation, are recognized as

important within the organization?

Determining the Scope Determining your purpose and assessing your readers and

context will help you decide what to include and what not to

include in your writing. Those decisions establish the scope of

your writing project. If you do not clearly define the scope, you

37

will spend needless hours on research because you will not be

sure what kind of information you need or even how much.

Given the purpose and audience established for the report on

facility locations, the scope would include such information as

land and building costs, available labor force, cultural issues,

transportation options, and proximity to suppliers. However, it

would probably not include the early history of the cities being

considered or their climate and geological features, unless

those aspects were directly related to your particular business.

Selecting the Medium Finally, you need to determine the most appropriate medium

for communicating your message. Professionals on the job face

a wide array of options — from e-mail, text messaging, and

videoconferencing to more traditional means, like letters,

memos, reports, and face-to-face meetings.

The most important considerations in selecting the

appropriate medium are the audience and the purpose of the

communication. For example, if you need to collaborate with

someone to solve a problem or if you need to establish rapport

with someone, written exchanges would be far less efficient

than a phone call or a face-to-face meeting. However, if you

need to use precise wording or you need to provide a record of a

complex message, communicating in writing would be best. If

you need to make information that is frequently revised

accessible to employees at a large company, the best choice

might be to place the information on the company’s intranet

38

site. If reviewers need to make handwritten comments on a

proposal, you may need to provide paper copies that can be

faxed, or you can use collaborative software so that reviewers

can insert comments electronically. The comparative

advantages and primary characteristics of the most typical

means of communication are discussed in selecting the

medium.

Research The only way to be sure that you can write about a complex

subject is to thoroughly understand it. To do that, you must

conduct adequate research, whether that means conducting an

extensive investigation for a major proposal — through

interviewing, library and Internet research, careful note-

taking, and documenting sources — or simply checking a

reputable Web site and jotting down points before you send an

e-mail message to a colleague.

Methods of Research Researchers frequently distinguish between primary and

secondary research, depending on the types of sources

consulted and the method of gathering information. Primary

research refers to the gathering of raw data compiled from

interviews, direct observation, surveys, experiments,

questionnaires, audio and video recordings, and the like. In

fact, direct observation and hands-on experience are the only

ways to obtain certain kinds of information, such as the

behavior of people and animals, certain natural phenomena,

39

mechanical processes, and the operation of systems and

equipment. Secondary research refers to gathering information

that has been analyzed, assessed, evaluated, compiled, or

otherwise organized into accessible form. Such forms or

sources include books, articles, reports, Web documents, e-mail

discussions, and brochures. Use the methods most appropriate

to your needs, recognizing that some projects may require

several types of research and that collaborative projects may

require those research tasks to be distributed among team

members.

Sources of Information As you conduct research, keep in mind all the sources of

information that are available to you:

Your own knowledge and that of your colleagues The knowledge of people outside your workplace, gathered through interviewing for information Internet sources, including Web sites, directories, archives, and discussion groups Library resources, including databases and indexes of articles as well as books and reference works Printed and electronic sources in the workplace, such as brochures, memos, e-mail, and Web documents

The amount of research you will need to do depends on the

scope of your project.

Organization

40

Without organization, the material gathered during your

research will be incoherent to your readers. To organize

information effectively, you need to determine the best way to

structure your ideas; that is, you must choose a primary method

of development.

Methods of Development To choose the development method best suited to your

document, consider your subject, your readers’ needs, and your

purpose. An appropriate method will help focus your

information and make it easy for readers to follow your

presentation.

For example, if you were writing instructions for assembling

office equipment, you might naturally present the steps of the

process in the order readers should perform them: the

sequential method of development. If you were writing about

the history of an organization, your account might naturally go

from the beginning to the present: the chronological method of

development. If your subject naturally lends itself to a certain

method of development, use it — do not attempt to impose

another method on it.

Often you will need to combine methods of development. For

example, a persuasive brochure for a charitable organization

might combine a specific-to-general method of development

with a cause-and-effect method of development. That is, you

could begin with persuasive case histories of individual people

41

in need and then move to general information about the

positive effects of donations on recipients.

Outlining Once you have chosen a method of development, you are ready

to prepare an outline. Outlining breaks large or complex

subjects into manageable parts. It also enables you to

emphasize key points by placing them in the positions of

greatest importance. By structuring your thinking at an early

stage, a well-developed outline ensures that your document will

be complete and logically organized, allowing you to focus

exclusively on writing when you begin the rough draft. An

outline can be especially helpful for maintaining a collaborative

writing team’s focus throughout a large project. However, even

a short letter or memo needs the logic and structure that an

outline provides, whether the outline exists in your mind, on-

screen, or on paper.

At this point, consider layout and design elements that will

be helpful to your readers and appropriate to your subject and

purpose. For example, if visuals such as photographs or tables

will be useful, this is a good time to think about where they may

be deployed and what kinds of visual elements will be effective,

especially if they need to be prepared by someone else while

you write and revise the draft. The outline can also suggest

where headings, lists, and other special design features may be

useful.

42

Writing When you have established your purpose, your readers’ needs,

and your scope, and you have completed your research and

your outline, you will be well prepared to write a first draft.

Expand your outline into paragraphs without worrying about

grammar, usage, or punctuation. Writing and revising are

different activities; refinements come with revision.

Write the rough draft, concentrating entirely on converting

your outline into sentences and paragraphs. You might try

writing as though you were explaining your subject to a reader

sitting across from you. Do not worry about a good opening.

Just start. Do not be concerned in the rough draft about exact

word choice unless it comes quickly and easily — concentrate

instead on ideas.

Even with good preparation, writing the draft remains a

chore for many writers. The most effective way to get started

and keep going is to use your outline as a map for your first

draft. Do not wait for inspiration — you need to treat writing a

draft as you would any on-the-job task. The entry writing a

draft describes tactics used by experienced writers; discover

which ones are best suited to you and your task.

Consider writing the introduction last because then you will

know more precisely what is in the body of the draft. Your

opening should announce the subject and give readers essential

background information, such as the document’s primary

43

purpose. For longer documents, an introduction should serve as

a frame into which readers can fit the detailed information that

follows.

Finally, you will need to write a conclusion that ties the main

ideas together and emphatically makes a final, significant point.

The final point may be to recommend a course of action, make

a prediction or a judgment, or merely summarize your main

points; the way you conclude depends on the purpose of your

writing and your readers’ needs.

Revision The clearer a finished piece of writing seems to the reader, the

more effort the writer has likely put into its revision. If you

have followed the steps of the writing process to this point, you

will have a rough draft that needs to be revised. Revising,

however, requires a different frame of mind than does writing

the draft. During revision, be eager to find and correct faults,

and be honest. Be hard on yourself for the benefit of your

readers. Read and evaluate the draft as if you were a reader

seeing it for the first time.

Check your draft for accuracy, completeness, and

effectiveness in achieving your purpose and meeting your

readers’ needs and expectations. Trim extraneous information:

Your writing should give readers exactly what they need, but it

should not burden them with unnecessary information or

sidetrack them into loosely related subjects.

44

Do not try to revise for everything at once. Read your rough

draft several times, each time looking for and correcting a

different set of problems or errors. Concentrate first on larger

issues, such as unity and coherence; save mechanical

corrections, like spelling and punctuation, for later

proofreading.

Finally, for important documents, consider having others

review your writing and make suggestions for improvement.

For collaborative writing, of course, team members must

review one another’s work on the various segments of the

document as well as the final master draft. Use the “Checklist of

the Writing Process” on pages xxv–xxvi to guide you not only as

you revise but also throughout the writing process. See also

ethics in writing.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Style Guides and Standards organizations and professional associations often follow such guides as The Chicago Manual of Style, MLA Style Manual and Guide to Scholarly Publishing, and United States

Government Publishing Office Style Manual to ensure consistency in their publications on issues of usage, format, and documentation. Because this type of advice often varies from one guide to another, some organizations set their own standards for documents. Where such standards or specific style guides are recommended or required by regulation or policy, be sure to follow those style guidelines.

Throughout this book, words and phrases shown as links — underlined and set in1

45

boldface type — refer to specific entries in the book.

46

Checklist of the Writing Process This checklist arranges key entries of The Business Writer’s

Handbook according to the sequence presented in “Five Steps to

Successful Writing.” This checklist is useful both for following

the steps and for diagnosing writing problems.

Preparation ✓ Establish your purpose ✓ Identify your audience or readers ✓ Consider the context ✓ Determine your scope of coverage ✓ Select the medium

Research ✓ Brainstorm to determine what you already know ✓ Conduct research ✓ Take notes (note-taking) ✓ Interview for information ✓ Create and use questionnaires ✓ Avoid plagiarism ✓ Document sources

Organization ✓ Choose the best methods of development ✓ Outline your notes and ideas ✓ Develop and integrate visuals ✓ Consider layout and design

47

logic errors positive writing voice

✓ Check for ethics in writing biased language copyrights, patents, and trademarks plagiarism

✓ Check for appropriate word choice abstract / concrete words affectation, buzzwords, jargon, and plain language clichés connotation / denotation defining terms

✓ Eliminate problems with grammar

Writing a Draft ✓ Select an appropriate point of view ✓ Adopt an appropriate style and tone ✓ Use effective sentence construction ✓ Construct effective paragraphs ✓ Use quotations and paraphrasing ✓ Write an introduction ✓ Write a conclusion ✓ Choose a title

Revision ✓ Check for unity and coherence

conciseness

48

pace transition

✓ Check for sentence variety emphasis parallel structure subordination

✓ Check for clarity agreement ambiguity awkwardness case modifiers pronoun reference sentence faults

✓ Review mechanics and punctuation abbreviations capitalization contractions dates italics numbers proofreading spelling

49

The Business Writer’s Handbook

50

A

51

a / an A and an are indefinite articles because the noun designated by

the article is not a specific person, place, or thing but one of a

group.

► The insurance agent sold a policy. [This is not a specific policy but an unnamed policy.]

Use a before words or abbreviations beginning with a

consonant or a vowel with a consonant sound. See also

adjectives.

► We were awarded a DMV contract. ► It was a historic event for the organization. [Historic begins

with the consonant h.] ► The year’s activities are summarized in a one-page report.

[One begins with the consonant sound “wuh.”]

Use an before words or abbreviations beginning with a vowel or

a consonant with a vowel sound.

► He seems an unlikely candidate for the job. ► The applicant arrived an hour early. [Hour begins with a

silent h.] ► She received an SBA loan. [SBA begins with the vowel

sound “ess.”]

52

a lot A lot is often incorrectly written as one word (alot). The phrase

a lot is informal and often too vague for business writing. Use

many or numerous for estimates, or give a specific number or

amount.

53

abbreviations DIRECTORY

Using Abbreviations Writer’s Checklist: Using Abbreviations Forming Abbreviations

Abbreviations are shortened versions of words or combinations

of the first letters of words (Corp./Corporation, URL/ Uniform

Resource Locator). If used appropriately, abbreviations can be

convenient for both the reader and the writer. Like symbols,

they can be important space savers in business writing.

Abbreviations that are formed by combining the initial letter

of each word in a multiword term are called initialisms.

Initialisms are pronounced as separate letters (SEC/Securities

and Exchange Commission). Abbreviations that combine the

first letter or letters of several words — and can be pronounced

— are called acronyms (PIN/personal identification number,

LAN/local area network).

Using Abbreviations The most important consideration in the use of abbreviations is

whether they will be understood by your audience. The same

abbreviation, for example, can have two different meanings

(NEA stands for both National Education Association and the

54

National Endowment for the Arts). Like jargon, shortened forms are easily understood within a group of specialists;

outside the group, however, shortened forms might be

incomprehensible. In fact, abbreviations can be easily

overused, either as an affectation or in a misguided attempt to

make writing concise, even with instant messaging and live

chat, where abbreviations are often appropriate. Remember

that memos, e-mail, or reports addressed to specific people

may be read by others, so consider those secondary audiences

as well. A good rule to follow: “When in doubt, spell it out.”

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Abbreviations

✓ Except for commonly used abbreviations (U.S., a.m.), spell out a term to be abbreviated the first time it is used, followed by the abbreviation in parentheses. Thereafter, the abbreviation may be used alone.

✓ In long documents, repeat the full term in parentheses after the abbreviation at regular intervals to remind readers of the abbreviation’s meaning. For digital texts, consider linking abbreviations to a glossary or providing a pop-up definition that appears when the cursor hovers over an abbreviation.

✓ Do not add an additional period at the end of a sentence that ends with an abbreviation. (“The official name of the company is DataBase, Inc.”)

✓ For abbreviations specific to your profession or discipline, use a style guide recommended by your professional organization or company.

✓ Write acronyms in capital letters without periods. The only

55

exceptions are acronyms that have become accepted as common nouns, such as scuba (self-contained underwater breathing apparatus).

✓ Generally, use periods for lowercase initialisms (a.k.a., p.m.) but not for uppercase ones (GDP, IRA). Exceptions include geographic names (U.S., E.U.) and the traditional expression of academic degrees (B.A., M.B.A.).

✓ Form the plural of an acronym or initialism by adding a lowercase s. Do not use an apostrophe (CARs, DVDs).

✓ Do not follow an abbreviation with a word that repeats the final term in the abbreviation (ATM location, not ATM machine location).

✓ Avoid creating your own abbreviations; they will confuse readers.

Forming Abbreviations Names of Organizations A company may include in its name a term such as Brothers,

Incorporated, Corporation, Company, or Limited Liability

Company. If the term is abbreviated in the official company

name that appears on letterhead stationery or on its Web site,

use the abbreviated form: Bros., Inc., Corp., Co., or LLC. If the

term is not abbreviated in the official name, spell it out in

writing, except in addresses, footnotes, bibliographies, and

lists where abbreviations may be used. Likewise, use an

ampersand (&) only if it appears in the official company name.

For names of divisions within organizations, terms such as

Department and Division should be abbreviated only when

space is limited (Dept. and Div.).

56

Measurements Except for abbreviations that may be confused with words (in.

for inch and gal. for gallon), abbreviations of measurement

terms do not require periods (yd for yard and qt for quart).

Abbreviations of units of measure are identical in the singular

and plural: 1 cm and 15 cm (not 15 cms). Some abbreviations

can be used in combination with symbols (°F for degrees

Fahrenheit and ft for square feet).

For a listing of abbreviations for the basic units used in the

International System of Units (SI), see

http://physics.nist.gov/cuu/Units/units.html. For additional

definitions and background, search the National Institute of

Standards and Technology Web site at www.nist.gov and

generally online for units of information. For information on

abbreviating dates and time, see numbers.

Personal Names and Titles Personal names should generally not be abbreviated: Thomas

(not Thos.) and William (not Wm.). An academic, civil,

religious, or military title should be spelled out and lowercase

when it does not precede a name. (“The captain checked the

orders.”) When preceding names, some titles are customarily

abbreviated (Dr. Smith, Mr. Mills, Ms. Katz). See also Ms. / Miss

/ Mrs.

An abbreviation of a title may follow the name; however, be

certain that it does not duplicate a title before the name

2

57

(Angeline Martinez, Ph.D., or Dr. Angeline Martinez). When

addressing correspondence and including names in other

documents, you should normally spell out titles (The Honorable

Mary J. Holt; Professor Charles Matlin).

Common Scholarly Abbreviations and Terms The following is a partial list of abbreviations commonly used in

reference books and for documenting sources in research

papers and reports. Other than in such documents, generally

avoid these abbreviations.

anon. anonymous

bibliog. bibliography, bibliographer, bibliographic

ca., c. circa, “about” (used with approximate dates: ca. 1756)

cf. confer, “compare”

chap. chapter

diss. dissertation

ed., eds. edited by, editor(s), edition(s)

e.g. exempli gratia, “for example” (see e.g. / i.e.)

esp. especially

et al. et alii, “and others”

etc. et cetera, “and so forth” (see etc.)

f., ff. and the following page(s) or line(s)

GPO Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

i.e. id est, “that is”

MS, MSS manuscript, manuscripts

n., nn. note, notes (used immediately after page number: 56n., 56n.3, 56nn.3–5)

N.B., n.b.

nota bene, “take notice, mark well”

n.d. no date (of publication)

58

n.p. no place (of publication); no publisher; no page

p., pp. page, pages

proc. proceedings

pub. published by, publisher, publication

rev. revised by, revised, revision; review, reviewed by (spell out “review” where “rev.” might be ambiguous)

rpt. reprinted by, reprint

sec., secs.

section, sections

sic so, thus; inserted after a misspelled or misused word in quotations ([sic]) (see brackets)

supp., suppl.

supplement

trans. translated by, translator, translation

UP University Press (used in MLA style, as in Oxford UP)

viz. videlicet, “namely”

vol., vols.

volume, volumes

vs., v. versus, “against” (v. preferred in titles of legal cases)

59

above Avoid using above to refer to a preceding passage or visual,

because its reference is vague and often an affectation. The

same is true of afore-said and aforementioned. (See also former

/ latter.) To refer to something previously mentioned, repeat

the noun or pronoun, or construct your paragraph so that your

reference is obvious.

60

absolutely Absolutely means “definitely,” “entirely,” “completely,” or

“unquestionably.” Avoid it as a redundant intensifier to mean

“very” or “much.”

61

abstract / concrete words Abstract words refer to general ideas, qualities, conditions, acts,

or relationships — intangible things that cannot be detected by

the five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, and smell), such as

learning, leadership, and technology. Concrete words identify

things that can be perceived by the five senses, such as diploma,

manager, and keyboard.

Abstract words must often be further defined or described.

Abstract words are best used with concrete words to help make

intangible concepts specific and vivid.

► Public transportation [abstract] in Chicago includes buses [concrete] and commuter trains [concrete].

See also context, purpose, and word choice.

62

abstracts An abstract summarizes and highlights the major points of a

formal report, journal article, dissertation, or other long work.

Its primary purpose is to enable readers to decide whether to

read the work in full. For a discussion of how summaries differ

from abstracts, see executive summaries.

Although abstracts, typically 200 to 250 words long, are

published with the longer works they condense, they can also

be published separately in periodical indexes, by abstracting

services, and in introductory sections of online journals (see

research). For this reason, an abstract should be readable apart

from the original document and contain appropriate key search

terms for researchers using online databases.

Types of Abstracts Depending on the kind of information they contain, abstracts

are often classified as descriptive or informative (see Figure A–

1). A descriptive abstract summarizes the purpose, scope, and

methods used to arrive at the reported findings. It is a slightly

expanded table of contents in sentence and paragraph form. A

descriptive abstract need not be longer than several sentences.

An informative abstract is an expanded version of the

descriptive abstract, including a summary of any results,

conclusions, and recommendations. The informative abstract

retains the tone and essential scope of the original work while

omitting its details. The first two paragraphs of the abstract

63

shown in Figure A–1 alone would be descriptive; with the

addition of the paragraphs that detail the findings and

conclusions of the report, the abstract becomes informative.

FIGURE A–1. Informative Abstract (from a Report)

64

The type of abstract you should write depends on your

audience and the organization or publication for which you are

writing. Informative abstracts work best for wide audiences that

need to know conclusions and recommendations; descriptive

abstracts work best for compilations, such as proceedings and

progress reports that do not contain conclusions or

recommendations.

Writing Strategies Write the abstract after finishing the report or document.

Otherwise, the abstract may not accurately reflect the longer

work. Begin with a topic sentence that announces the subject

and scope of your original document. Then, using the major

and minor headings of your outline or table of contents to

distinguish primary ideas from secondary ones, decide what

material is relevant to your abstract. (See outlining.) Write with

clarity and conciseness, eliminating unnecessary words and

ideas. Do not, however, become so terse that you omit articles

(a, an, or the) and important transitional words and phrases

(however, therefore, but, next). Write complete sentences, but

avoid stringing together a group of short sentences end to end;

instead, combine ideas by using subordination and parallel

structure. Spell out all but the most common abbreviations. In

a report, an abstract follows the title page and is numbered page

iii.

65

accept / except Accept is a verb meaning “consent to,” “agree to take,” or

“admit willingly.” (“I accept the responsibility.”) Except is

normally used as a preposition meaning “other than” or

“excluding.” (“We agreed on everything except the schedule.”)

66

acceptances / refusals (for employment) When you decide to accept a job offer, you can notify your new

employer by telephone or in a meeting — but to make your

decision official, you should send an acceptance in writing.

What you include in your message and whether you send a

letter or an e-mail depends on your previous conversations

with your new employer. See also correspondence. Figure A–2

shows an example of a job acceptance written by a graduating

student. (See his résumé in Figure R–8 on Page 470.)

FIGURE A–2. Acceptance (for Employment)

When you decide to reject a job offer (Figure A–3), send a

written job refusal to make that decision official, even if you

67

have already notified the employer during a meeting or on the

phone. Writing to an employer is an important goodwill

gesture. For general advice on handling refusals and negative

messages, see refusal letters.

FIGURE A–3. Refusal (for Employment)

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Be especially tactful and courteous — the employer you are refusing has spent time and effort interviewing you and may have counted on your accepting the job. Remember, you may want to apply for another job at that company in the future.

68

acknowledgments When a colleague or client sends you something or makes a

request, you should acknowledge what was sent, respond to the

request, or explain that you cannot immediately respond to the

request in a short, polite note. Send a message, like the one

shown in Figure A–4, in the medium used or preferred by your

reader, whether a letter, an e-mail, or a text message. See also

correspondence.

FIGURE A–4. Acknowledgment

69

acronyms and initialisms (see abbreviations)

70

active voice (see voice)

71

ad hoc Ad hoc is Latin for “for this” or “for this particular occasion.” An

ad hoc committee is one set up temporarily to consider a

particular issue. The term is not italicized. See foreign words in

English.

72

adapt / adept / adopt Adapt is a verb meaning “adjust to a new situation.” Adept is an

adjective meaning “highly skilled.” Adopt is a verb meaning

“take or use as one’s own.”

► The company will adopt a policy of finding executives who are adept managers and who can adapt to new situations.

73

adapting to new technologies When faced with a new technology, ask “How much do I need

to know about the specific technology to do my work?” What

you need to learn will depend on your workplace context.

Sometimes you may need only basic knowledge to accomplish

specific and limited tasks. Other times, you may need much

more in-depth knowledge — even expert knowledge — to serve

as an adviser or as a resource for your colleagues. See also

selecting the medium.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Strategies for Learning a New Technology

✓ Experiment. Acquaint yourself with a new technology simply by using it until it becomes familiar.

✓ Conduct careful Internet searches. Make terminology precise by including the name of the tool and keywords that describe your specific problem.

✓ Consult IT staff and trusted colleagues. Seek help from your organization’s technology specialists and trainers as well as your tech-savvy colleagues.

✓ Use built-in help and official help manuals. Use tutorials, digital or printed instructional materials, and links to searchable online help sites.

✓ Take product workshops and online tutorials. Workshops teach everything from the basics to advanced functions of devices and software, and you benefit from the experiences of other

74

attendees. Check for product vendor workshops and tutorials before looking for free and paid tutorials from such sites as Lynda.com, PCWorld, and YouTube.

✓ Refer to third-party help manuals. These documents often simplify information with full-color printing, photos, and a casual, friendly tone.

75

adjectives DIRECTORY

Limiting Adjectives Comparison of Adjectives Placement of Adjectives Use of Adjectives

An adjective is any word that modifies a noun or pronoun.

Descriptive adjectives identify a quality of a noun or pronoun

(hot surface). Limiting adjectives impose boundaries on the

noun or pronoun (three phone lines).

Limiting Adjectives Limiting adjectives include the following categories:

Articles (a, an, the) Demonstrative adjectives (this, that, these, those) Possessive adjectives (my, your, his, her, its, our, their) Numeral adjectives (two, first) Indefinite adjectives (all, none, some, any)

Articles Articles (a, an, the) are traditionally classified as adjectives

because they modify nouns by either limiting them or making

them more specific. See also a / an, articles, and English as a

second language.

76

Demonstrative Adjectives A demonstrative adjective points to the thing it modifies,

specifying the object’s position in space or time. This and these

specify a closer position; that and those specify a more remote

position.

► This version is more current than that version, which was produced last month.

► These test reports are more recent than those reported last week.

Demonstrative adjectives often cause problems when they

modify the nouns kind, type, and sort. Demonstrative adjectives

used with those nouns should agree with them in number.

► this kind, these kinds; that type, those types

Confusion often develops when the preposition of is added (this

kind of, these kinds of ) and the object of the preposition does

not conform in number to the demonstrative adjective and its

noun. See also agreement and prepositions.

Avoid demonstrative adjectives like kind, type, and sort that can

easily lead to vagueness. Be more specific. See also kind of /

sort of.

77

Possessive Adjectives Because possessive adjectives (my, your, his, her, its, our, their)

directly modify nouns, they function as adjectives, even though

they are pronoun forms (my idea, her plans, their projects). See

also functional shift.

Numeral Adjectives Numeral adjectives identify quantity, degree, or place in a

sequence. They always modify count nouns. Numeral adjectives

are divided into two subclasses: cardinal and ordinal. A cardinal

adjective expresses an exact quantity (one pencil, two

computers); an ordinal adjective expresses degree or sequence

(first quarter, second edition).

In most writing, an ordinal adjective should be spelled out if

it is a single word (tenth) and written in figures if it is more than

one word (312th). Ordinal numbers can also function as

adverbs. (“John arrived first.”) See also first / firstly and

numbers.

Indefinite Adjectives Indefinite adjectives do not designate anything specific about

the nouns they modify (some monitors, all designers). The

articles a and an are included among the indefinite adjectives (a

chair, an application).

Comparison of Adjectives Most adjectives in the positive form (for example, long) show

78

the comparative form with the suffix -er (longer) for two items

and the superlative form with the suffix -est (longest) for three

or more items. Many two-syllable adjectives and most three-

syllable adjectives are preceded by the word more or most to

form the comparative or the superlative.

► The new media center is more impressive than the old one. It is the most impressive in the county.

A few adjectives have irregular forms of comparison (much,

more, most; little, less, least). Some adjectives (round, unique,

exact, accurate) — often called absolute words — are not

logically subject to comparison. See also equal / unique /

perfect.

Placement of Adjectives When limiting and descriptive adjectives appear together, the

limiting adjectives precede the descriptive adjectives, with the

articles usually in the first position.

► The ten yellow taxis were sold at auction. [article (The), limiting adjective (ten), descriptive adjective (yellow)]

Within a sentence, adjectives may appear before the nouns they

modify (the attributive position) or after the nouns they modify

(the predicative position).

► The small jobs are given priority. [attributive position] ► The exposure is brief. [predicative position]

79

Use of Adjectives Nouns often function as adjectives to clarify the meaning of

other nouns.

► The accident report prompted a product redesign.

When adjectives modifying the same noun can be reversed and

still make sense or when they can be separated by and or or,

they should be separated by commas.

► The company seeks bright, energetic, creative managers.

Notice that there is no comma after creative. Never use a

comma between a final adjective and the noun it modifies.

When an adjective modifies a phrase, no comma is required.

► We need an updated Web-page design. [Updated modifies the phrase Web-page design.]

Writers sometimes string together a series of nouns used as

adjectives to form a unit modifier, thereby creating stacked

(jammed) modifiers, which can confuse readers.

► Your staffing-level authorization reassessment plan should result in a major improvement.

See also word choice.

Do not add -s or -es to an adjective to make it plural: the long

trip, the long trips.

80

Capitalize adjectives of origin (city, state, nation, continent):

Venetian canals, Texas longhorn steer, French government,

African deserts.

In English, verbs of feeling (bore, interest, surprise) have two

adjectival forms: the present participle (-ing) and the past

participle (-ed). Use the present participle to describe what

causes the feeling. Use the past participle to describe the person

who experiences the feeling.

► We heard the surprising election results. [The election results cause the feeling.]

► Only the losing candidate was surprised by the election results. [The candidate experienced the feeling of surprise.]

Adjectives follow nouns in English in only two cases: when

the adjective functions as a subjective complement (“That

project is not finished”) and when an adjective phrase or clause

modifies the noun (“The project that was suspended

temporarily”). In all other cases, adjectives are placed before

the noun.

When a sentence has multiple adjectives, it is often difficult

to know the right order. The guidelines illustrated in the

following example would apply in most circumstances, but

there are exceptions. (Normally, do not use a phrase with so

many stacked modifiers.) See also adverbs and articles.

81

82

adjustment messages An adjustment letter or e-mail is written in response to a

complaint and tells a customer or client what your organization

intends to do about the complaint. Although sent in reply to a

complaint, an adjustment message actually provides an

excellent opportunity to build goodwill for your organization.

An effective adjustment message, such as the examples shown

in Figures A–5 and A–6, can not only repair any damage done

but also restore the customer’s confidence in your company.

Consider that while an e-mail may allow you to respond more

quickly, a printed or an attached letter with organizational

letterhead may carry more weight.

83

84

FIGURE A–5. Adjustment (When Company Takes Responsibility)

FIGURE A–6. Partial Adjustment

No matter how unreasonable the complaint, the tone of your

response should be positive and respectful. Avoid emphasizing

the problem, but do take responsibility for it when appropriate.

Focus your response on what you are doing to correct the

problem. Settle such matters quickly and courteously, and lean

toward giving the customer or client the benefit of the doubt at

a reasonable cost to your organization. See also refusal letters

and “you” viewpoint.

85

Full Adjustments Before granting an adjustment to a claim for which your

company is at fault, first determine what happened and what

you can do to satisfy the customer. Be certain that you are

familiar with your company’s adjustment policy — and be

careful with word choice.

► We have just received your letter of May 7 about our defective gas grill.

Saying something is “defective” could be ruled in a court of law

as an admission that the product is in fact defective. When you

are in doubt, seek legal advice.

Grant adjustments graciously: A settlement made grudgingly

will do more harm than good. Not only must you be gracious,

but you must also acknowledge the error in such a way that the

customer will not lose confidence in your company. Emphasize

early what the reader will consider good news.

► Enclosed is a replacement for the damaged part. ► Yes, you were incorrectly billed for the delivery. ► Please accept our apologies for the error in your account.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

If an explanation will help restore your reader’s confidence, explain what caused the problem. You might point out any steps you are taking to prevent a recurrence of the problem. Explain that customer feedback

86

helps your firm keep the quality of its product or service high. Close

pleasantly, looking toward the future, and avoid recalling the problem in your closing (do not write, “Again, we apologize . . .”).

Partial Adjustments You may sometimes need to grant a partial adjustment — even if

a claim is not really justified — to regain the lost goodwill of a

customer or client. If, for example, a customer incorrectly uses

a product or service, you may need to help that person better

understand the correct use of that product or service. In such a

circumstance, remember that your customer or client believes

that his or her claim is justified. Therefore, you should give the

explanation before granting the claim — otherwise, your reader

may never get to the explanation. If your explanation

establishes customer responsibility, do so tactfully. Figure A–6

is an example of a partial adjustment message. See also

correspondence.

87

adverbs An adverb modifies the action or condition expressed by a verb.

► The wrecking ball hit the side of the building hard. [The adverb tells how the wrecking ball hit the building.]

An adverb can also modify an adjective, another adverb, or a

clause.

► The brochure design used remarkably bright colors. [Remarkably modifies the adjective bright.]

► The redesigned brake pad lasted much longer than the previous version. [Much modifies the adverb longer.]

► Surprisingly, the engine failed. [Surprisingly modifies the clause the engine failed.]

Use adverbs sparingly in business writing. Because they are

often subjective (hot/cold, hard/soft, long/short), consider

providing specifics that define them or provide context. How

hot? (Give the temperature.) How fast? (State the speed or rate.)

How short or long? (State the length.) How expensive or

efficient? (Compare relative costs or provide data on time

savings.)

Types of Adverbs A simple adverb can answer one of the following questions:

Where? (adverb of place)

88

► Move the display forward slightly.

When? or How often? (adverb of time)

► Replace the thermostat immediately. ► I worked overtime twice this week.

How? (adverb of manner)

► Add the deductions cautiously.

How much? (adverb of degree)

► The nearly completed report was sent to the director.

An interrogative adverb can ask a question (Where? When?

Why? How?).

► How many hours did you work last week? ► Why was the hard drive reformatted?

A conjunctive adverb can modify the clause that it introduces as

well as join two independent clauses with a semicolon. The

most common conjunctive adverbs are however, nevertheless,

moreover, therefore, further, then, consequently, besides,

accordingly, also, and thus.

► I rarely work on weekends; however, this weekend will be an exception.

In this example, note that a semicolon precedes and a comma

follows however. The conjunctive adverb (however) introduces

89

the independent clause (this weekend will be an exception) and

indicates its relationship to the preceding independent clause (I

rarely work on weekends). See also transition.

Comparison of Adverbs Most one-syllable adverbs (such as fast) show comparison with

the suffixes -er (faster, comparative form) and -est (fastest,

superlative form).

Most adverbs with two or more syllables end in -ly, and most

adverbs ending in -ly are compared by inserting the

comparative more or less or the superlative most or least in

front of them.

► The patient recovered more quickly than the staff had expected.

► Most surprisingly, the engine failed during the final test phase.

A few irregular adverbs require a change in form to indicate

comparison (well, better, best; badly, worse, worst; far, farther,

farthest).

► The training program functions well. ► Our training program functions better than most others in

the industry. ► Many consider our training program the best in the

industry.

90

Placement of Adverbs An adverb should usually be placed in front of the verb it

modifies.

► The pilot methodically performed the preflight check.

An adverb may, however, follow the verb (or the verb and its

object) that it modifies.

► The system failed unexpectedly. ► They replaced the battery quickly.

In a verb phrase, the adverb is typically placed between the

helping verb and the main verb.

► In this temperature range, the pressure will quickly drop.

Adverbs such as only, nearly, almost, just, and hardly should be

placed immediately before the words they limit. See also

modifiers and only.

91

affect / effect Affect is a verb that means “influence.” (“The decision could

affect the company’s stock value.”) Effect can function as a

noun that means “result” (“The decision had a positive effect”)

or as a verb that means “bring about” or “cause.” However,

avoid using effect as a verb when you can replace it with a less

formal word, such as make or produce.

92

affectation Affectation is the use of language that is more formal, technical,

or showy than necessary to communicate information to the

reader. Affectation is a widespread writing problem in the

workplace because many people feel that it lends a degree of

authority to their writing. In fact, affectation can alienate

customers, clients, and colleagues because it forces readers to

work harder to understand the writer’s meaning.

Affected writing typically contains inappropriately abstract,

highly technical, or foreign words and is often liberally

sprinkled with trendy buzzwords.

ETHICS NOTE

Jargon and euphemisms can become affectation, especially if their purpose is to hide relevant facts or give a false impression of competence. See ethics in writing.

Writers easily slip into affectation through the use of long

variants — words created by adding prefixes and suffixes to

simpler words (orientate for orient; utilization for use).

Unnecessarily formal words (such as penultimate for next to

last), created words using -ese (such as managementese), and

outdated words (such as aforesaid) can produce affectation.

(See also above.) Elegant variation — attempting to avoid

repeating a word within a paragraph by substituting a

93

pretentious synonym — is also a form of affectation. Either

repeat the term or use a pronoun.

Another type of affectation is gobbledygook, which is wordy,

roundabout writing with many legal- and technical-sounding

terms (such as wherein and morphing). See also clichés,

conciseness, nominalizations, and word choice.

94

affinity Affinity refers to the attraction of two persons or things to each

other. Affinity should not be used to mean “ability” or

“aptitude.”

95

agreement DIRECTORY

Subject-Verb Agreement Compound Subjects Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement

Grammatical agreement is the correspondence in form between

different elements of a sentence to indicate number, person,

gender, and case.

A subject and its verb must agree in number.

► The design is acceptable. [The singular subject, design, requires the singular verb, is.]

► The new products are going into production soon. [The plural subject, products, requires the plural verb, are.]

A subject and its verb must agree in person.

► I am the designer. [The first-person singular subject, I, requires the first-person singular verb, am.]

► They are the designers. [The third-person plural subject, they, requires the third-person plural verb, are.]

A pronoun and its antecedent must agree in person, number,

gender, and case.

► The employees report that they are more efficient in the

96

new facility. [The third-person plural subject, employees, requires the third-person plural pronoun, they.]

► Kaye McGuire will meet with the staff on Friday, when she will assign duties. [The third-person singular subject, Kaye McGuire, requires she, the third-person feminine pronoun, in the subjective case.]

See also sentence construction.

Subject-Verb Agreement Subject-verb agreement is not affected by intervening phrases

and clauses.

► One in 20 hard drives we receive from our suppliers is faulty. [The verb, is, must agree in number with the subject, one, not hard drives or suppliers.]

The same is true when nouns fall between a subject and its

verb.

► Only one of the emergency lights was functioning. [The subject of the verb is one, not lights.]

► Each of the managers supervises a very large region. [The subject of the verb is each, not managers.]

Note that one and each are normally singular.

Indefinite pronouns such as some, none, all, more, and most

may be singular or plural, depending on whether they are used

with a mass noun (“Most of the oil has been used”) or with a

97

count noun (“Most of the drivers know why they are here”).

Mass nouns are singular, and count nouns are plural. Other

words, such as type, part, series, and portion, take singular

verbs even when they precede a phrase containing a plural

noun.

► A series of meetings was held to develop a marketing strategy.

► A large portion of most annual reports is devoted to promoting the corporate image.

Modifying phrases can obscure a simple subject.

► The advice of two engineers, one lawyer, and three executives was obtained before making a commitment. [The subject of the verb was is advice.]

Inverted word order can cause problems with agreement.

► From this work have come several important improvements. [The subject of the verb is improvements, not work.]

The number of a subjective complement does not affect the

number of the verb — the verb must always agree with the

subject.

► The topic of his report is employee benefits. [The subject of the sentence is topic, not benefits.]

A subject that expresses measurement, weight, mass, or total

98

often takes a singular verb even when the subject is plural in form. Such subjects are treated as a unit.

► Four weeks is the normal duration of the training program.

A verb following the relative pronoun who or that agrees in

number with the noun to which the pronoun refers (its

antecedent).

► This is one of those management problems that require careful analysis. [That refers to problems.]

► She is one of those employees who are rarely absent. [Who refers to employees.]

The word number sometimes causes confusion. When used to

mean a specific number, it is singular.

► The number of committee members was six.

When used to mean an approximate number, it is plural.

► A number of people were waiting for the announcement.

Relative pronouns (who, which, and that) may take either

singular or plural verbs, depending on whether the antecedent

is singular or plural. See also who / whom.

► He is a manager who seeks the views of others. ► He is one of those managers who seek the views of others.

Some abstract nouns are singular in meaning but plural in

99

form: mathematics, news, physics, and economics.

► News of the merger is on page 4 of the Chronicle.

Some words, such as the plural jeans and scissors, cause special

problems.

► The scissors were ordered last week. [The subject is the plural scissors.]

► A pair of scissors is on order. [The subject is the singular pair.]

A book with a plural title takes a singular verb.

► Accounting Essentials is an essential resource.

A collective noun (committee, faculty, class, jury) used as a

subject takes a singular verb when the group is thought of as a

unit and a plural verb when the individuals in the group are

thought of separately.

► The committee is unanimous in its decision. ► The committee are returning to their offices.

A clearer way to emphasize the individuals would be to use a

phrase.

► The committee members are returning to their offices.

Compound Subjects A compound subject is composed of two or more elements

100

joined by a conjunction such as and, or, nor, either . . . or, or

neither . . . nor. When the elements are connected by and, the

subject is usually plural and requires a plural verb.

► Writing skill and technical aptitude are prerequisites for this position.

One exception occurs when the elements connected by and

form a unit or refer to the same thing. In that case, the subject is

regarded as singular and takes a singular verb.

► Bacon and eggs is a high-cholesterol meal. ► Our greatest challenge and business opportunity is the

Internet.

A compound subject with a singular element and a plural

element joined by or or nor requires that the verb agree with

the closer element.

► Neither the director nor the project assistants were available.

► Neither the project assistants nor the director was available.

If each or every modifies the elements of a compound subject,

use the singular verb.

► Each manager and supervisor has a production goal to meet.

► Every manager and supervisor has a production goal to meet.

101

Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement Every pronoun must have an antecedent — a noun to which it

refers. See also pronoun reference.

► When employees are hired, they must review the policy manual. [The pronoun they refers to the antecedent employees.]

Gender A pronoun must agree in gender with its antecedent.

► Mr. Swivet in the accounting department acknowledges his share of responsibility for the misunderstanding, just as Ms. Barkley in the research division must acknowledge hers.

Traditionally, a masculine, singular pronoun was used to agree

with such indefinite antecedents as anyone and person. (“Each

may stay or go as he chooses.”) Because such usage ignores or

excludes women, use alternatives when they are available. One

solution is to use the plural. Another is to use both feminine and

masculine pronouns, although that combination is clumsy

when used too often.

Do not attempt to avoid expressing gender by resorting to a

102

plural pronoun when the antecedent is singular. An acceptable

alternative is to avoid the pronoun entirely.

Avoid gender-related stereotypes in general references, as in

“the nurse . . . she” or “the doctor . . . he.” What if the nurse is

male or the doctor female? See also biased language.

Number A pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number. Many

problems of agreement are caused by expressions that are not

clear in number.

Use singular pronouns with the antecedents everybody and

everyone unless to do so would be illogical because the

meaning is obviously plural. See also everybody / everyone.

► Everyone pulled his or her share of the load. ► Everyone thought my plan should be revised, and I really

couldn’t blame them.

Collective nouns may use a singular or plural pronoun,

depending on the meaning.

► The committee agreed to the recommendations only after it had deliberated for days. [committee thought of as

103

collective singular] ► The committee quit for the day and went to their respective

offices. [committee thought of as plural]

Demonstrative adjectives sometimes cause problems with

agreement of number. This and that are used with singular

nouns, and these and those are used with plural nouns.

Demonstrative adjectives often cause problems when they

modify the nouns kind, type, and sort. When used with those

nouns, demonstrative adjectives should agree with them in

number.

► this kind, these kinds; that type, those types

Confusion often develops when the preposition of is added

(this kind of, these kinds of ) and the object of the preposition

does not agree in number with the demonstrative adjective and

its noun.

Avoid that error by remembering to make the demonstrative

adjective, the noun, and the object of the preposition — all three

— agree in number. The agreement makes the sentence not

only correct but also more precise. Using demonstrative

adjectives with words like kind, type, and sort can easily lead to

vagueness. See kind of / sort of.

Compound Antecedents

104

A compound antecedent joined by or or nor is singular if both

elements are singular and plural if both elements are plural.

► Neither the engineer nor the technician could do his job until he understood the new concept.

► Neither the executives nor the directors were pleased at the performance of their company.

When one of the antecedents connected by or or nor is singular

and the other is plural, the pronoun agrees with the closer

antecedent.

► Either the computer or the printers should have their serial numbers registered.

► Either the printers or the computer should have its serial number registered.

A compound antecedent with its elements joined by and

requires a plural pronoun.

► Seon Ju and Juanita took their layout drawings with them.

If both elements refer to the same person, however, use the

singular pronoun.

► The noted economist and author departed from her prepared speech.

105

allegedly / supposedly Allegedly refers to an unproved assertion and is used

appropriately for accusations or suspicions of illegal or

undesirable behavior. (“He allegedly participated in the

embezzlement.”) Supposedly refers to something assumed to be

true but for which there is some doubt. (“The new process will

supposedly prevent delays.”)

106

all ready / already All ready is a two-word phrase meaning “completely prepared.”

Already is an adverb that means “before this time” or

“previously.” (“They were all ready to cancel the order;

fortunately, we had already corrected the shipment.”)

107

all right All right means “all correct.” (“The answers were all right.”) In

workplace writing, it should not be used to mean “good” or

“acceptable.” It is always written as two words; alright is

nonstandard.

108

all together / altogether All together means “all acting together” or “all in one place.”

(“The new employees were all together at the orientation.”)

Altogether means “entirely” or “completely.” (“The trip was

altogether unnecessary.”)

109

allude / elude / refer Allude means to make an indirect reference to something.

(“The report simply alluded to the problem, rather than stating

it explicitly.”) Elude means to escape notice or detection. (“The

discrepancy in the account eluded the auditor.”) Refer is used to

indicate a direct reference to something. (“She referred to the

merger during her presentation.”)

110

allusion / illusion An allusion is an indirect reference to something not

specifically mentioned. (“He made an allusion to metal fatigue

in the airframe.”) An illusion is a mistaken perception or a false

image. (“The manager is under the illusion that the

reorganization will cost very little.”)

111

allusions An allusion is an indirect reference to something from past or

current events, literature, or other familiar sources. The use of

allusion promotes economical writing because it is a shorthand

way of referring to a body of material in a few words or of

helping to explain a new and unfamiliar process in terms of one

that is familiar. In the following example, the writer sums up a

description with an allusion to a well-known story. The allusion,

with its implicit reference to “right standing up to might,”

concisely emphasizes the writer’s point.

► As it currently exists, the review process involves the consumer’s attorney sitting alone, usually without adequate technical assistance, faced by two or three government attorneys, two or three attorneys from AccroSystems, and large teams of experts who support the government and the corporation. The process is a classic David versus Goliath confrontation.

Be sure, of course, that your reader is familiar with the material

to which you allude. Allusions should be used with restraint,

especially in international correspondence. If overdone,

allusions can lead to affectation or can be viewed merely as

clichés. See also business writing style.

112

also Also is an adverb that means “additionally.” (“Two 5,000-gallon

tanks are on-site, and several 2,500-gallon tanks are also

available.”) Also should not be used as a connective in the sense

of “and.”

Avoid starting sentences with also. It is a weak transitional word

that suggests an afterthought rather than planned writing.

113

ambiguity A word or passage is ambiguous when it can be interpreted in

two or more ways yet provides the reader with no certain basis

for choosing among the alternatives. Ambiguity can take many

forms, as in ambiguous pronoun reference.

AMBIGUOUS Inadequate quality-control procedures have resulted in more equipment failures. This is our most serious problem at present. [Does this refer to inadequate quality-control procedures or to equipment failures?]

SPECIFIC Inadequate quality-control procedures have resulted in more equipment failures. These failures are our most serious problem at present.

SPECIFIC Inadequate quality-control procedures have resulted in more equipment failures. Quality control is our most serious problem at present.

Incomplete comparison and missing or misplaced modifiers

(including dangling modifiers) cause ambiguity.

The placement of some modifiers enables them to be

interpreted in either of two ways.

► She volunteered immediately to deliver the bad news.

By moving the word immediately, the meaning can be clarified.

114

► She immediately volunteered to deliver the bad news. ► She volunteered to deliver the bad news immediately.

Imprecise word choice (including faulty idioms) can cause

ambiguity.

Various forms of awkwardness also can cause ambiguity.

115

amount / number Amount is used with things that are thought of in bulk and that

cannot be counted (mass nouns), as in “the amount of

electricity.” Number is used with things that can be counted as

individual items (count nouns), as in “the number of

employees.”

116

ampersands The ampersand (&) is sometimes used to represent the word

and, especially in the names of organizations (Rubin &

Associates). When you are writing the name of an organization

in sentences, addresses, or references, spell out the word and

unless the ampersand appears in the organization’s official

name on its letterhead stationery or Web site.

117

and / or And/or means that either both circumstances are possible or

only one of two circumstances is possible. This term is awkward

and confusing because it makes the reader stop to puzzle over

your distinction.

AWKWARD Use A and/or B.

IMPROVED Use A or B or both.

118

annual reports The corporate annual report is, in effect, a state-of-the-

company message, which publicly traded companies and some

nonprofits are legally required to publish annually. Written

primarily for shareholders, the report also addresses other

audiences and stakeholders, such as employees, bankers, labor

unions, the financial media, and local elected officials. An

annual report usually covers the high points of the previous

year’s operations and finances, and forecasts the coming year’s

operations. It may also explain the company’s current direction

and highlight its strengths. If weaknesses have developed or

failures have occurred, the annual report may analyze them and

explain the efforts being made to overcome them.

Begin with a study of your company’s annual reports of the

past several years for content, style, and format. Then review

and use the steps of the writing process outlined in the

“Checklist of the Writing Process” on pages xxv–xxvi. Finally,

collaborate closely with your company’s (or outside

contractor’s) graphic designers and production staff. Learn

their file-format requirements, schedule photographs, and

determine milestones for producing print and digital versions

of the report. See also business plans, collaborative writing,

mission statements, selecting the medium, and writing for the

Web.

Structure and Parts 119

Some annual reports are lavishly produced publications that

present the company and its operations in glowing terms;

others are spartan financial summaries that merely meet the

legal requirements for annual financial reporting. For details,

visit http://www.sec.gov/fast-answers/answers-

annrephtm.html. Most are a combination of both. Annual

reports vary greatly in organization, but they typically include

five major sections:

Financial highlights A statement to the shareholders or a letter from the president A narrative section on the company’s operations A financial statement A listing of the company’s board of directors and officers

Financial Highlights The financial highlights section is a brief review of the

company’s sales and earnings that usually precedes the

statement to the stockholders, sometimes even appearing on

the inside of the front cover. This section often compares sales

and earnings for three years and typically includes the

percentage of change from year to year.

Statement to Shareholders This section is a direct statement to shareholders from the

company’s president or the chair of the board of directors. It

sets the stage for the rest of the report. This section should not

repeat the financial facts already cited in the financial

120

highlights; instead, it should interpret the entire year’s

performance, touch on plans and future directions, and give the

company’s explanations for any failures.

This statement may be an in-depth review of the company’s

operations during the past year or a brief summary of the entire

report. A brief summary is sometimes followed by a question-

and-answer section in which the president of the company

reviews the past year’s operations.

Narrative Section The narrative section of the annual report is normally used to

present company operations and new products or

developments in a positive light. Topics for this section might

include the following:

Major profit factors in the last year’s performance Prospects for increasing stock dividends Significant new products or services The company’s performance compared with that of its competition Outlook for next year (for the company as a whole or by divisions) Major acquisitions and restructuring Significant organizational changes Research and development Global operations and economic climate (when appropriate) Service and support operations

121

Social responsibilities (such as environmental responsibility and community service)

Financial Statement The financial statement should be uncluttered and inviting.

Most annual reports include a comparison of financial results

from the past three years. Most financial statements include the

following topics:

A company balance sheet A statement of income Changes in financial position An independent auditor’s statement Footnotes, as necessary

Financial statement footnotes should be simple and direct,

avoiding technical accounting terms; the auditor’s statement

should be no more than one-third of a page.

Board of Directors and Company Officers The final part of the annual report lists the company’s board of

directors and their corporate affiliations. Many annual reports

also include a photograph of each director, as well as a listing of

the company’s officers by name and title — often with

photographs that personalize what is essentially a financial

report. The officers generally include the chair of the board of

directors, the president, vice presidents, the secretary, the

treasurer, and legal counsel.

122

Preparing the Report First, interview the president of the company to determine the

general direction of the report. Next, interview vice presidents

or division heads to determine the proper emphasis to place on

each division’s performance (but stay within the general

direction established by the president or chair). See

interviewing for information.

Compose a list of primary topics, as previously described,

and allot space as necessary to each division or subsidiary in

order to make decisions such as these:

Whether to show sales and earnings as a company total only or by division as well What should be included in charts and graphs How lavish or spartan the report should be in appearance and cost What media should be used to publish and distribute the report

Tone is critical in writing and designing an annual report.

The annual report should convey the image your company has

established or wants to establish.

Design and Visuals Typography, graphics, and design communicate a message

about a company as strongly as words do. Select visual elements

that enhance your company’s image and accurately reflect your

industry. See layout and design and visuals.

123

Use photographs and visuals liberally, although

purposefully, in the narrative section to enhance the company’s

image, and complement the photographs and visuals with

informative and well-written captions. Choose only those

photographs and illustrations that will make the maximum

contribution to the report’s theme. Both photographs and their

captions are critical in enlivening your annual report and

putting a human face on your company. Colorful photographs

that are carefully composed and show action or people enjoying

themselves attract favorable interest.

Charts and graphs enable readers to grasp numerical

material quickly and easily, provided that they are not so

complex that they defeat the purpose. Subjects that most easily

lend themselves to graphs and charts, usually shown in a three-

year comparison arrangement, are the following:

Assets Capital expenditures Dividends Earnings (by product groups or divisions) Industry growth Inventories Liabilities Net worth Price trends Reserves Sales (by product groups or divisions) Source and disposition of funds (taxes, wages, working

124

capital)

The following information is normally printed on the inside

front and back covers of the annual report: (1) notice of the

annual meeting; (2) corporate address; and (3) names of

transfer agents, registrar, and stock exchange. Some annual

reports use the inside front cover solely for the announcement

of the annual meeting.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Annual Reports

✓ Review past annual reports for their content, style, and format. ✓ Review the annual reports of organizations similar to yours (see

www.annualreports.com). ✓ Interview senior company officials to learn which issues they wish

to highlight. ✓ Allocate topics and space to reach your company’s target

audiences. ✓ Adopt a writing style and a layout and design consistent with your

company’s image. ✓ Consider available enhancements and applications for digital

versions of the report. ✓ Work closely with the graphic designers and your production staff

to ensure that the report is professionally designed and produced on schedule.

125

antonyms An antonym is a word with a meaning opposite that of another

word (good/bad, wet/dry, fresh/stale). Many pairs of words that

look as if they are antonyms, such as limit/delimit, are not. See

also dictionaries, synonyms, and word choice.

126

apostrophes An apostrophe (’) is used to show possession or to indicate the

omission of letters. Sometimes it is also used to avoid confusion

with certain plurals of words, letters, and abbreviations.

Showing Possession An apostrophe is used with an s to form the possessive case of

some nouns (the report’s title). For further advice on using

apostrophes to show possession, see possessive case.

Indicating Omission An apostrophe is used to mark the omission of letters or

numbers in a contraction or a date (can’t, I’m, I’ll, the class of

’17).

Forming Plurals An apostrophe can be used in forming the plurals of letters,

words, or lowercase abbreviations if confusion might result

from using s alone and thus forming a word.

► The search program does not find a’s and i’s ► Do not replace all of which’s in the document. ► I’s need to be distinguished from the number 1. ► The prescription included several bid’s. [Bid is an

abbreviation used for “twice daily medications”.]

In general, however, add only s in roman (or regular) type when

127

referring to words as words or capital letters. See also italics.

► Five ands appear in the first sentence. ► The applicants received As and Bs in their courses.

Do not use an apostrophe for plurals of abbreviations with all

capital letters (PDFs) or a final capital letter (ten PhDs) or for

plurals of numbers (7s, the late 1990s).

128

appendixes An appendix — located at the end of a formal report, a

proposal, or another long document — supplements or clarifies

the information in the body of the document. Appendixes (or

appendices) can provide information that is too detailed or

lengthy for the primary audience of the document. For

example, an appendix could contain such material as maps,

statistical analyses, résumés of key personnel involved in a

proposed project, or other documents needed by secondary

readers.

A document may have more than one appendix, with each

providing only one type of information. When you include more

than one appendix, arrange them in the order they are

mentioned in the body of the document. List the titles and

beginning page numbers of the appendixes in the table of

contents. Begin each appendix on a new page, and identify

each with a letter, starting with the letter A (Appendix A:

Sample Questionnaire). If you have only one appendix, title it

simply “Appendix.”

129

application cover letters Job applications require both a résumé and a cover letter, even

if it is a relatively short e-mail (or e-note) with an attached

résumé. The application cover letter is essentially a sales letter

in which you demonstrate how your skills, knowledge, and

experience will benefit an employer by meeting the

requirements of a position. See also cover letters, letters, and

persuasion.

The letter must quickly capture the employer’s attention,

allow readers to easily skim the contents, and point to the

attached or enclosed résumé. It should (1) introduce you as a

candidate with the skills that can contribute to the particular

organization, (2) explain what particular job interests you and

why, (3) highlight for the reader specific qualifications in your

résumé that match the position, and (4) provide the opportunity

for an interview. See job search and interviewing for a job.

The job ad in Figure A–7 seeks someone with experience in a

professional design environment for a natural history museum.

Figure A–8 (page 38) shows a cover letter for a résumé that

responds to the job ad in Figure A–7. (The applicant’s résumé is

shown in Figure R–8 on page 470.)

130

FIGURE A–7. Partial Job Ad (Description and Requirements)

131

FIGURE A–8. Application Cover Letter (Graduate Applying for a Graphic Design Job)

The sample application letters shown in Figures A–9 (page

39) and A–10 (page 40) also follow the guidelines described in

132

this entry. In each sample, the emphasis, tone, and style are

tailored to fit the employer’s need and highlight the applicant’s

qualifications. Note that the letter shown in Figure A–10

matches the résumé in Figure R–9 (Robert Mandillo) on pages

471–72.

FIGURE A–9. Application Cover Letter Sent as an E-mail (College Student Applying for an Internship)

133

FIGURE A–10. Application Cover Letter (Applicant with Years of Experience)

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Tailoring a Cover Letter to a Job Ad

134

✓ Read the job ad carefully, and follow the instructions precisely. ✓ Provide context by referring to the job ad or mentioning how you

learned about a possible opening. ✓ Match the tone of your letter to the language of the ad. ✓ Show how the job is appropriate for you while using vocabulary

from the ad. See word choice. ✓ Avoid copying sections of text verbatim from the job ad. ✓ Show that you meet or exceed the employer’s minimum

requirements. ✓ Describe how you are upgrading your skills in any areas in which

you fall short.

Opening In the opening paragraph, provide context by indicating how

you heard about the position, and name the specific job title or

area. If you have been referred to a company by an employee, a

career counselor, a professor, or someone else, be sure to say so

(“I understand from Mr. John Smith, Director of Operations,

that your agency . . .”). Show enthusiasm by explaining why you

are interested in the job, and demonstrate your initiative as well

as your knowledge of the organization by relating your interest

to some facet of the organization, as in Figure A–8.

Body In the middle paragraphs, use specific examples to

demonstrate that you are qualified for the job. Aim for

conciseness, and limit the content by focusing on one clearly

stated basic point in each topic sentence. For example, your

135

second paragraph might focus on educational achievements,

and your third paragraph might focus on work experience. Do

not just tell readers that you are qualified—show them by

including examples and details. (“Most recently, as an intern at

SJX Engineering, I assisted in the infrastructure design for a

multimillion-dollar seaside resort.”) Highlight a notable

achievement that portrays your value, and refer the reader to

your enclosed résumé. Do not simply list information found in

your résumé rather, indicate how your talents can make

valuable contributions to the company.

Closing In the final paragraph, request an interview. Let the reader

know how to reach you by including your phone number and

professional e-mail address (see Writer’s Checklist: Maintaining

Professionalism on pages 168–69). End with a statement of

goodwill, as shown in the examples in this entry.

Proofreading and Follow-up Proofread your letter carefully. Research shows that many

employers eliminate candidates from consideration when they

notice even one spelling, grammatical, or mechanical error.

Such errors give employers the impression that you are careless

in the way you present yourself professionally. See

proofreading.

After a reasonable period, consider following up with a

136

reminder.(“I wrote to you a week ago about your graphic design

position, and I wonder if that position is still available.”) Your

initiative will portray your sincere interest in the opportunity.

This approach may also provoke a need for action in the

reviewer—for example, the need to pass your application to the

hiring authority.

137

appositives An appositive is a noun or noun phrase that follows and

amplifies another noun or noun phrase. It has the same

grammatical function as the noun it complements.

► George Thomas, the noted economist, summarized the president’s speech in a confidential memo.

► The noted economist George Thomas summarized the president’s speech in a confidential memo.

For detailed information on the use of commas with

appositives, see restrictive and nonrestrictive elements.

If you are in doubt about the case of an appositive, check it

by substituting the appositive for the noun it modifies. See also

pronouns.

138

articles Articles (a, an, the) function as adjectives because they modify

the items they designate by either limiting them or making

them more specific. Articles may be indefinite or definite.

The indefinite articles, a and an, denote an unspecified item.

► A package was delivered yesterday. [not a specific package]

The choice between a and an depends on the sound rather than

on the letter following the article, as described in the entry a /

an. The definite article, the, denotes a particular item.

► The package was delivered yesterday. [one specific package]

Do not omit all articles from your writing in an attempt to be

concise. Including articles costs nothing; eliminating them

makes reading more difficult. (See also telegraphic style.)

However, do not overdo it. An article can be superfluous.

► I’ll meet you in a half an hour. [Choose one article and eliminate the other.]

Whether to use a definite or an indefinite article is determined

by what you can safely assume about your audience’s

knowledge. In both the following sentences, you can safely

assume that the reader can clearly identify the noun. Therefore,

use a definite article.

139

► Did you know that yesterday was the coldest day of the year so far? [The modified noun refers to yesterday.]

► The man who left his briefcase in the conference room was in a hurry. [The relative phrase who left his briefcase in the conference room restricts and therefore identifies the man.]

In the following sentence, however, you cannot assume that the reader can clearly identify the noun.

► A package is on the way. [It is impossible to identify specifically what package is meant.]

A more important question for some people is when not to use

articles. These generalizations will help. Do not use articles

with the following:

Singular proper nouns

► Utah, Main Street, Harvard University, Mount Hood

Plural nonspecific count nouns (when making

generalizations)

► Helicopters are the new choice of transportation for the rich and famous.

Singular mass nouns

► She loves coffee.

Plural count nouns used as complements

140

► Those women are physicians.

See also English as a second language.

141

as / because / since As, because, and since are commonly used to mean “because.”

To express cause, because is the strongest and most specific

connective for unequivocally stating a causal relationship.

(“Because she did not have an MBA, she was not offered the

job.”)

Since is a weak substitute for because as a connective to

express cause. However, since is an appropriate connective

when the emphasis is on circumstance, condition, or time

rather than on cause and effect. (“Since it went public, the

company has earned a profit every year.”)

As is the least definite connective to indicate cause; its use for

that purpose is best avoided. See also subordination.

Avoid colloquial, nonstandard, or wordy phrases sometimes

used instead of as, because, or since. See also as much as /

more than, as such, as well as, conciseness, and due to /

because of.

PHRASE REPLACE WITH

being as, being that because, since

inasmuch as, insofar as since, because

on account of because

on the grounds of / that because

due to the fact that because, since

142

as much as / more than The phrases as much as and more than are sometimes

incorrectly combined, especially when separated by

intervening phrases.

143

as such The phrase as such is seldom useful and should be omitted.

144

as well as Do not use as well as with both. The two expressions have

similar meanings; use one or the other, and adjust the verb as

needed.

145

audience Considering the needs of your audience is crucial to achieving

your purpose. When you are writing to a specific reader, for

example, you may find it useful to visualize a reader sitting

across from you as you write. (See correspondence.) Likewise,

when writing to an audience composed of relatively

homogeneous readers, you might create an image of a

composite reader and write for that reader. In such cases, using

the “you” viewpoint and an appropriate tone will help you meet

the needs of your readers as well as achieve an effective

business writing style. For meeting the needs of an audience

composed of listeners, see presentations.

Analyzing Your Audience’s Needs Determine the readers’ needs relative to your purpose and goals

by asking key questions during preparation.

Who specifically is your reader? Do you have multiple readers? Who needs to see or use the document? What do your readers already know about your subject? What are your readers’ attitudes about the subject? (Are they skeptical? Supportive? Anxious? Bored?) What particular information about your readers (experience, training, and work habits, for example) might help you write at the appropriate level of detail? (See scope.) What does the context or medium suggest about meeting the readers' expectations for content? (See layout and

146

design and selecting the medium.) Do you need to adapt your message for international readers? If so, see global communication, global graphics, and international correspondence.

In the workplace, your readers are often less familiar with the

subject than you are. You have to be careful, therefore, when

writing on a topic that is unique to your area of specialization.

Be sensitive to the needs of those whose training or experience

lies in other areas; provide definitions of nonstandard terms

and explanations of principles that you, as a specialist, take for

granted. See also defining terms.

Writing for Varied and Multiple Audiences In writing to a broad or varied audience, such as when writing

for the Web, visualize a few readers who have different

backgrounds but who share purpose or need in reading your

text. For documents aimed at multiple audiences with different

needs, consider segmenting the document for different groups

of readers: an executive summary for top managers, an

appendix with detailed data for technical specialists, and a body

for those readers who need to make decisions based on a

detailed discussion. See also formal reports and proposals.

When you have multiple audiences with various needs but

cannot segment your document, first determine your primary,

or most important, readers — such as those who will make

147

decisions based on your content — and be sure to meet their

needs. Then meet the needs of secondary readers, such as those

who need only some of the document’s contents, making sure

not to sacrifice the needs of your primary readers. See also

persuasion and “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

148

augment / supplement Augment means to increase or magnify in size, degree, or

effect. (“Our retirees can augment their incomes through

consulting.”) Supplement means to add something to make up

for a deficiency. (“This patient should supplement his diet with

Vitamin D3.”)

149

average / median / mean The average (or arithmetic mean) is determined by adding two

or more quantities and dividing the sum by the number of items

totaled. For example, if one report is 10 pages, another is 30

pages, and a third is 20 pages, their average length is 20 pages. It

is incorrect to say that “each report averages 20 pages” because

each report is a specific length.

The median is the middle number in a sequence of numbers.

For example, the median of the series 1, 3, 4, 7, 8 is 4.

150

awhile / a while The adverb awhile means “for a short time.” The preposition

for should not precede awhile because for is inherent in the

meaning of awhile. The two-word noun phrase a while means

“a period of time.”

151

awkwardness Any writing that strikes readers as awkward — that is, as forced

or unnatural — impedes their understanding. The following

checklist and the entries indicated will help you smooth out

most awkward passages.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Eliminating Awkwardness

✓ Strive for clarity and coherence during revision. ✓ Check for organization to ensure that your writing develops

logically. ✓ Keep sentence construction as direct and simple as possible. ✓ Use subordination appropriately, and avoid needless repetition. ✓ Correct any logic errors within your sentences. ✓ Revise for conciseness, and avoid expletives where possible. ✓ Use the active voice unless you have a justifiable reason to use

the passive voice. ✓ Eliminate jammed or misplaced modifiers, and for particularly

awkward constructions, apply the tactics in garbled sentences.

152

B

153

bad / badly Bad is the adjective form that follows such linking verbs as feel

and look. (“We don’t want to look bad at the meeting.”) Badly is

an adverb. (“The shipment was badly damaged.”) To say “I feel

badly” would mean, literally, that your sense of touch is

impaired.

154

balance / remainder One meaning of balance is “a state of equilibrium”; another

meaning is “the amount of money in a bank account after

deposits and withdrawals have been credited and debited.”

Remainder, in all applications, means “what is left over.”

155

beside / besides Besides, meaning “in addition to” or “other than,” should be

carefully distinguished from beside, meaning “next to” or “apart

from.” (“Besides two of us from Marketing, three people from

Production stood beside the president during the ceremony.”)

156

between / among Between is normally used to relate two items or persons.

(“Preferred stock offers a middle ground between bonds and

common stock.”) Among is used to relate more than two. (“The

subcontracting was distributed among three firms.”)

157

between you and me The expression between you and I is incorrect. Because the

pronouns are objects of the preposition between, the objective

case of the personal pronoun (me) must be used.

158

bi- / semi- When used with periods of time, bi- means “two” or “every

two,” as in published biweekly, meaning “once in two weeks.”

The prefix semi- means “half of” or “occurring twice within a

period of time,” as in published semimonthly, meaning “twice a

month.” Because these prefixes often cause confusion,

substitute expressions like every two months or twice a month

where possible. Normally bi- and semi- are joined with the

following element without a space or hyphen.

159

biannual / biennial In conventional usage, biannual means “twice during the year,”

and biennial means “every other year.” See also bi- / semi-.

160

biased language Biased language refers to words and expressions that offend

because they make inappropriate assumptions or stereotypes

about gender, ethnicity, physical or mental disability, age, or

sexual orientation. Even if used unintentionally, biased

language can damage your credibility.

Sexist Language Sexist language can be an outgrowth of sexism—the arbitrary

stereotyping of men and women—that can breed and reinforce

inequality. To avoid sexism in your writing, treat men and

women equally and use nonsexist occupational descriptions.

INSTEAD OF CONSIDER

chairman, chairwoman chair, chairperson

man-hours staff hours, worker hours

policeman, policewoman police officer

salesman, saleswoman salesperson

Use parallel terms to describe men and women.

INSTEAD OF USE

ladies and men ladies and gentlemen, women and men

Ms. Jones and Bernard Weiss

Ms. Jones and Mr. Weiss, Mary Jones and Bernard Weiss

One common way of handling pronoun references that

could apply equally to a man or a woman is to use the

161

expression his or her. Repeated use of this phrase, however,

can be awkward; to avoid overuse, try rewriting the sentence in

the plural. See also he / she.

Another solution is to omit pronouns completely if they are not

essential to the meaning of the sentence.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

The easiest way to avoid bias is simply not to mention differences among people unless the differences are relevant to the discussion. Keep current with accepted usage and, if you are unsure of the appropriateness of an expression or the tone of a passage, have several colleagues assess the material. See also ethics in writing.

162

bibliographies A bibliography is an alphabetical list of books, articles, online

sources, and other works that have been consulted in preparing

a document or that are useful for reference purposes. A

bibliography provides a convenient list of sources in a

standardized form for readers interested in getting further

information on the topic or in assessing the scope of the

research.

A list of references or works cited refers to works actually

cited in the text; a bibliography also includes works consulted

for general background information. For information on using

various citation styles, see documenting sources.

Entries in a bibliography are listed alphabetically by the

author’s last name. If an author is unknown, the entry is

alphabetized by the first word in the title (other than A, An, or

The). Entries also can be arranged by subject and then ordered

alphabetically within those categories.

An annotated bibliography includes complete bibliographic

information about a work (author, title, place of publication,

publisher, and publication date) followed by a brief description

or evaluation of what the work contains. The following is an

annotation of a historical bibliography:

Alred, G. J., Reep, D. C., & Limaye, M. R. (1981). Business and technical writing: An annotated bibliography of books, 1880–

163

1980. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow.

This 240-page bibliography annotates books that “deal

significantly with writing or the analysis of writing, either

for business or in technical and professional contexts”

from 1880 through 1980. The nine-page “Introduction”

surveys and assesses the collected works. Each 100- to 250-

word annotation describes the purpose of the book, its

scope, primary and unusual topics covered, pedagogical

materials, and historical interest. Included are 27 previous

bibliographies (books and articles), 847 books in the main

section, and 230 items in unannotated lists (“Industry and

Society Style Guides”; “Government Style Guides”;

“Publishing”; “Oral Communication”; and “Style, Language,

and Readability”). The book concludes with coauthor, title,

and subject indexes.

164

blogs and forums A blog (from Web log) is a Web-based journal in which an

individual or a blogger team post entries (displayed from the

most recent to the earliest posting) that document experiences,

express opinions, provide information, and respond to other

bloggers on subjects of mutual interest. A blog should have a

well-defined focus (or subject), audience, and purpose. You

will also need to establish and maintain a regular posting

schedule. As you plan a blog, survey such popular blogging

platforms as WordPress (www.wordpress.com) and Tumblr

(www.tumblr.com) and consult with your information

technology and marketing staff on how a blog might contribute

to your organization.

Although blogs may allow readers to post comments, a forum

typically fosters a wider “conversation” in which site visitors

can not only respond to the posts of others but also begin new

topics or discussion threads. Organizations often use forums for

customer or technical support; therefore, monitoring and

responding to messages is crucial. If your Web site features a

forum, you must promote it, contribute content, and solicit

content from users; otherwise, the forum will quickly lose its

usefulness and fade. See also social media and writing for the

Web.

Organizational Uses Organizations create blogs and forums to help meet such goals

165

as attracting and retaining clients or customers, promoting

goodwill, obtaining valuable feedback on their products and

services, providing support to clients or customers, and

developing a sense of community among their customers and

employees. Blogs and forums can be both external and internal.

External sites are publicly available on the Internet both for

an organization’s customers or clients and for executives,

spokespeople, or employees to share their views. Blogs and

forums can help build loyalty for a company because customers

can make a direct connection with the organization’s

representatives and with other customers. They can also

exchange current information that may not be available in

published documents or elsewhere online. Internal sites are

usually created for an organization’s employees and can be

accessed only through the company’s intranet. Internal blogs

may serve as interactive newsletters that help build a sense of

community within an organization or as a way to share

“breaking news” about product development, employee

benefits, or new team members.

Writing Style Write blog or forum entries in an informal, conversational style

that uses contractions, first person, and active voice. (See style

and clarity.)

BLOG POSTING

Check out the latest concept for our new Toyota Camry dashboards— we’ve added enough space to hold your coffee and a digital device by moving the air ducts. Tell us what you think.

166

FORUM POSTING

I’m new to this thread, but I’m surprised no one’s discussed the issue of confidentiality. My experience has been that Facebook’s recent changes in privacy settings are just confusing. Have I missed something?

Keep your sentences and paragraphs concise. Use bulleted lists,

italics, and other design elements, such as boldface and white

space if possible. (See layout and design and visuals.) Doing so

can help readers scan the postings or text to find information

that is interesting or relevant to them. Keep headlines short,

meaningful, and direct to catch readers’ attention and increase

visual appeal and readability. Where helpful, provide links to

other sites and resources that participants might find useful.

When blogs expand or forums become popular, you may need

to organize them using categories (links to discussion topics) or

tags (keywords for searching the site’s postings).

ETHICS NOTE

Because organizations expect employees to assume full responsibility for the content they post on a company blog or forum, you must maintain high ethical standards. See also ethics in writing.

Do not post information that is confidential, proprietary, or sensitive to your employer. Do not attack competitors or use abusive language toward other participants while making strong points on topics. Do not post content that is profane, libelous, or harassing, or that violates the privacy of others. See also biased language. Be aware that everything you post becomes permanently accessible to a wide public audience, especially for external sites. Obtain permission before using any material that is protected by

167

copyright, patents, and trademarks, and identify sources for quotations. See also plagiarism.

168

both . . . and Statements using the both . . . and construction should always

be balanced grammatically and logically. See also parallel

structure.

169

brackets The primary use of brackets ([ ]) is to enclose a word or words

inserted by the writer or editor into a quotation.

► The text stated, “Web sites can be categorized as either static [non-changing] or interactive [responding to user activity].”

Brackets are used to set off a parenthetical item within

parentheses.

► We must credit Emanuel Foose (and his brother Emilio [1912–1982]) for founding the institute.

Brackets are also used to insert the Latin word sic, indicating

that a writer has quoted material exactly as it appears in the

original, even though it contains a misspelled or wrongly used

word. See also abbreviations and quotations.

► The contract states, “Tinted windows will be installed to protect against son [sic] damage.”

170

brainstorming Brainstorming, a form of free association used to generate ideas

about a topic, can be done individually or in groups.

Brainstorming can stimulate creative thinking and reveal fresh

perspectives and new connections. When brainstorming alone,

jot down as many random ideas as you can think of about the

topic. When working in a group, designate a person to record

ideas the group suggests. Do not stop to analyze ideas or hold

back, looking for only the “best” ideas; just note everything that

comes to mind. After compiling a list of initial ideas, ask what,

when, who, where, how, and why for each idea, then list

additional details that those questions bring to mind. When you

run out of ideas, analyze each one you recorded, discarding

those that are redundant or not relevant. Then group the

remaining items in the most logical order, based on your

purpose and the needs of the audience, to create a tentative

outline of the document. Although the outline will be sketchy

and incomplete, it will show where further brainstorming or

research is needed and provide a framework for any new details

that additional research yields. (See outlining.)

Many writers find a technique called clustering (also called

mind mapping), as shown in Figure B–1, helpful in recording

and organizing ideas created during a brainstorming session.

To cluster, begin on a blank page, a flip chart, or an outline tool

such as a Bubbl.us mind map. Think of a key term that best

characterizes your topic, and put it in a boxed or bubbled area

171

at the center of the page. Figure B–1 shows brainstorming about

the best way to communicate with customers, so the chosen

topic was “Customer communication.” Then think of subtopics

most closely related to the main topic. In Figure B–1, the main

topic (“Customer communication”) led to such subtopics as

“Advertising,” “Internet,” and “Direct mail.” Place the subtopics

in boxes or bubbles, connecting each to the center topic like

spokes to a wheel hub. Repeat the exercise for each subtopic. In

Figure B–1, for example, the subtopic “Internet” stimulated the

additional subtopics “E-mail,” “Web site,” and “Social media.”

Continue the process until you map all possible ideas.

172

FIGURE B–1. Cluster Map from a Brainstorming Session

173

brochures Brochures are short publications, typically printed and folded

into pamphlets or leaflets, that promote a business and its

products and services to a target audience. The purpose of a

brochure is to inform, persuade, or both. Compared with flyers,

brochures typically allow information to be better

compartmentalized and presented in a smaller space.

Brochures may be distributed in paper or online, typically as

PDF files. See also selecting the medium, persuasion, and

promotional writing.

Types of Brochures The two major types of brochures are sales brochures and

informational brochures. Sales brochures are created

specifically to sell a company’s products and services. For

example, a brochure for a manufacturing company might

showcase the company’s equipment, capabilities, and

certifications, whereas a brochure for a consulting company

might describe the company’s specific services and available

seminars. Informational brochures are created to inform and

educate the reader without attempting to sell a product or

service directly. A counseling clinic, for example, might create a

brochure describing how to recognize depression in teenagers.

Designing a Brochure Before you begin to write, determine your brochure’s specific

174

purpose and audience. For example, is your goal to provide

information about a new service to existing customers, market a

product to prospective customers, or educate new employees

about their insurance options?

Next, consider the amount of information you need to

present in terms of the type of brochure you plan to create. For

example, a trifold brochure might be the best choice for

presenting sales information about a company’s multiple

products, since it provides six distinct panels, whereas a bifold

brochure might be more appropriate for showing detailed

product schematics, since it provides four larger panels.

Develop a style and design that is consistent with the

established brand image of your organization. Make sure that

written and graphical content is clear and consistent in its

presentation and makes sense in its placement. For example, a

brochure for a cruise line might feature photos of passengers

and a short title on the front panel, a brief discussion of the

line’s history on the first inside panel, details on the company’s

ships on subsequent panels, and contact information on the

back panel. See Figures B–2 and B–3, which showcase a

company’s capabilities through the use of graphs, bulleted lists,

and images.

175

FIGURE B–2. Front and Back Panels of a Bifold Brochure

176

FIGURE B–3. Center Panels of a Bifold Brochure

Cover Panel The main goal of the front cover panel is to gain the audience’s

attention and to show the purpose of the brochure clearly. It

should identify the organization or product being promoted

through a headline, logo, and carefully selected image. Keep the

177

amount of text to a minimum. Reserve the back cover panel for

your organization’s complete contact information and any

necessary legal or copyright disclaimers. If your audience needs

to locate your company, include a map.

First Inside Panel The first inside panel of a brochure should again identify the

organization and attract the reader with headlines and brief,

readable content. This panel is typically used to tell an

organization’s “story,” to highlight its history and

accomplishments, or to describe how material will be presented

in subsequent panels.

Subsequent Panels Subsequent panels should describe the product or service from

the reader’s point of view, clearly stating any benefits or

solutions it offers. Include relevant and accurate supporting

facts, testimonials, and visuals, such as photographs and

cutaway drawings. Use subheadings and bulleted lists to break

up the text and highlight key points. In the final panel, be clear

about the action you want the reader to take, such as calling to

arrange a quote, placing an order using the included discount

code, or following the included map to visit your showroom.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Designing a Brochure

✓ Evaluate your content to ensure that the information you provide

178

is consistent and logical. ✓ Stimulate your thinking by examining brochures for products or

services similar to yours. ✓ Create a thumbnail sketch for each panel to help you decide on

the number of panels needed, place text, and select visuals. See layout and design.

✓ Experiment with margins, spacing, and the amount of text on each panel. You may need to edit content to allow for adequate white space for readability and to ensure that the most important information is visually highlighted and easily found.

✓ Experiment with fonts and formatting, such as using a different font for short testimonials or headlines, but do not overuse unusual fonts or alternative styles.

✓ Choose colors coordinated with your brand, but consider that while color may be worth the cost for high-end products or services, economical black-and-white printing may be more appropriate for internal documents.

✓ Evaluate the selection of images: Do they accurately portray the subject? Are they high quality and properly licensed? (See copyrights, patents, and trademarks.) Refrain from using clip art unless it fits with your purpose.

✓ Consider ways to repurpose your brochure for digital accessibility and for use on social media.

179

bulleted lists (see lists)

180

business plans A business plan is a proposal that allows potential supporters to

evaluate ideas for a new business venture. Business plans are

written primarily for bankers and other outside funders or

consultants and sometimes for internal audiences (mostly

senior management). Usually readers are targeted to provide

funding, resources, cooperation, or, in the context of a large

corporation, approval or financial support for an operational

plan.

Purposes and Audience A business plan can fulfill a single purpose or several purposes.

The most common include the following:

To persuade potential investors or lenders to finance a business venture. A comprehensive business plan allows investors to review objectively the company’s assumptions, facts, and future outlook. To allow reviewers (usually senior management) within a company to assess the profitability and goals of a new internal business venture. They typically want to evaluate economic forecasts and determine future profitability and perhaps provide creative direction.

Before you write a business plan, identify and analyze your

audience. The purposes of a business plan can differ

dramatically, depending on which audience you are trying to

convince. If you are addressing a banker, the central purpose of

181

the business plan is to obtain funding for the new venture; to

accomplish that, you need to demonstrate credibility by

documenting a solid history of financial success. If you are

addressing senior management, the central purpose is to

demonstrate how the venture is likely to add value to the

company. See also persuasion.

When writing a business plan, find out which issues are of

most interest to your audience, and respond directly to those

issues. If you are writing for multiple audiences with diverse

interests and needs, be comprehensive in addressing all

interests and needs in your plan.

Format, Length, and Sections Because the audiences and purposes of business plans vary, the

lengths and designs of the plans vary as well. Business plans

can be as brief as one page, but they typically run between four

and ten pages. The length also depends on the nature and

complexity of the proposed business ideas.

The contents and sections will vary, but many plans (like

formal reports) include a title page, a table of contents, and an

executive summary. Most plans cover the following topic areas

in subsequent sections: company description and strategy,

market analysis and strategy, marketing plan, financial

analysis, and supporting documents.

Company Description and 182

Strategy The first section of a business plan typically describes the

company’s functions, products, and services; its overall strategy

in a vision or mission statement; its goals and milestones; and

its management team and key members.

Business Description A business plan should begin with a concise but complete

description of the type of organization, its products, and its

services, as well as a brief mention of the company’s place in

the market.

Identify the company’s legal name and status. Explain exactly what the company does. Define the percentage and growth opportunity of each product or service, and describe the customer base. Describe current products or services and what makes them unique and competitive. Mention products and services in development.

Use this section to describe the company’s competitive

advantage and the cost versus benefits of its current and

anticipated expenses.

Vision and Mission Statements Vision and mission statements can be the same; however, they

often are written separately and serve different purposes.

Vision statements broadly describe the perceived future of the

183

company, and mission statements usually summarize the

purpose of the business. Vision and mission statements may

vary in length from one sentence to multiple pages. When both

are included, a mission statement usually precedes a vision

statement.

Goals and Milestones State short-term as well as long-term goals, with a timetable

showing when the company expects to achieve specific

milestones. Be realistic, especially when defining and setting

short-term goals. Identify in specific, measurable terms what

the company can reasonably achieve within a specified time

frame.

Management and Key Team Members Identify all members of management. Describe their strengths,

including any experiences or skills that particularly contribute

to the business or to a specific venture.

Identify those who will work closely with management, such

as accountants, lawyers, insurance agents, and partners. Briefly

describe their backgrounds and qualifications. If you are

proposing that new positions be added to the company,

mention that in the plan and describe basic elements of a

human resources policy, such as working hours, wages,

vacation time, and sick leave. You can include résumés of

candidates for the new positions in appendixes, along with

other supporting documents.

184

Market Analysis and Strategy Perhaps most important, the business plan needs to define and

analyze the market and the competitive climate in which the

writer proposes to launch the business venture. Once you have

demonstrated a solid understanding of the market, describe the

new venture or the new product or service, and propose your

strategy for launching the venture and managing it over time to

contribute to overall profits.

This section of the business plan also needs to identify and

analyze the major competitors and describe how the company

will address the competition to ensure that its products and

services will make a strong entry into the marketplace. See also

research.

Marketing Plan Provide a specific plan for advertising and promoting products

or services. Indicate the specific actions the company will take

to achieve its sales and promotional objectives. This section is

often written by a marketing director and includes discussions

of promotional strategies and costs in different market

channels, as well as sales projections for each market segment.

See also collaborative writing.

Financial Analysis In one or more subsections, present the company’s financial

plan and financial statements, especially if the business plan’s

185

purpose is to obtain venture capital. Provide historical

information about financial status as well as projections about

the company’s financial growth. Identify both strengths and

weaknesses, including new opportunities for growth, areas

where the company can control costs, and ways of restructuring

to make the company more efficient. Predict problems and

describe the company’s strategy to prevent or minimize their

effects. These sections often benefit from strategically placed

graphs and tables.

Provide complete and detailed financial statements (perhaps

in an appendix). Bankers and other investors typically want to

see a balance sheet, profit-and-loss statements, a three-year

cash-flow projection, and source and use-of-funds statements.

Until the business venture is up and running, the company

might be able to provide only projections of profit-and-loss

statements or balance sheets. Also describe the company’s

liability and property insurance. Make estimates of calculations

conservative by using slightly low or low-end sales and margin

figures and by slightly overstating expected costs.

Supporting Documents In appendixes, provide résumés of key members of

management and any other supporting information that

demonstrates the company’s potential and management’s

credibility. Other documents might include positive reviews of a

new product, service, or venture, or positive articles about the

company from industry or the popular press. Finally, provide

186

copies of contracts with impressive clients (with the clients’

permission) or information that would demonstrate

relationships between the company and such clients. For

further information, go to www.sba.gov and search for

“business plans.”

187

business writing style Business writing has evolved from a formal and elaborate style

to one that is more personal and direct. Business writing today

varies from the casual style you might use in a text message to

the formal, legalistic style found in contracts. For most e-mails,

letters, and memos, a style between those two extremes is

generally appropriate. Writing that is too formal can alienate

your audience. But an inappropriate attempt to be informal

may strike readers as insincere and unprofessional, especially

clients or those you do not know well.

The use of personal pronouns is important in

correspondence. In fact, one way you can make your business

writing natural and persuasive is through the use of the “you”

viewpoint, which often uses the pronoun you to place the

reader’s interest foremost.

ETHICS NOTE

Be careful when you use the pronoun we in writing to clients and others outside your organization because you are committing your organization to what you have written. In general, when a statement is your opinion, use I; when it is company policy, use we. Do not refer to yourself in the third person by using one or the writer. It is perfectly

188

natural and appropriate to refer to yourself as I and to the reader as you. In a report, however, you may be writing to more than one reader and may not necessarily want to refer to collective readers as you. See also ethics in writing, persuasion, and point of view.

The best writers strive to write in a style that is so clear that

their message cannot be misunderstood. In fact, you cannot be

persuasive without being clear. One way to achieve clarity,

especially during revision, is to eliminate overuse of the passive

voice. Although the passive voice is sometimes necessary, often

it not only makes your writing dull but also makes it ambiguous,

indirect, or overly impersonal.

You can also achieve clarity with conciseness. Proceed

cautiously here, however, because business writing should not

be an endless series of short, choppy sentences that are blunt or

deliver too little information to be helpful to the reader. (See

also sentence variety and telegraphic style.) Appropriate and

effective word choice is also essential to clarity. Finally, the

careful use of punctuation can promote clarity. See also “Five

Steps to Successful Writing.”

189

buzzwords Buzzwords are popular words or phrases that, because of an

intense period of overuse, tend to lose their freshness and

precision. They often become popular through their association

with technology, popular culture, or even sports. See also

jargon and word choice.

► action items, face time, F2F meeting, impact [as a verb], same page, takeaway [as a noun], touch base, 24/7, win/win

Obviously, the words in this example are appropriate when

used in the right context. See also interface.

We include buzzwords in our vocabulary because they seem

to give force and vitality to our language. Actually, they often

sound like an affectation in business writing.

190

C

191

can / may In writing, can refers to capability (“I can have the project

finished today”). May refers to possibility (“I may be in Boston

on Monday”) or permission (“May I leave early?”).

192

cannot Cannot is one word (“We cannot meet today”).

193

capital / capitol Capital refers either to financial assets or to the city that hosts

the government of a state or a nation. Capitol refers to the

building in which a state or national legislature meets. Capitol is

often written with a small c when it refers to a state building,

but it is always capitalized when it refers to the home of the U.S.

Congress in Washington, D.C.

194

capitalization DIRECTORY

Proper Nouns Common Nouns First Words Specific Groups Specific Places Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts Titles of Works Professional and Personal Titles Abbreviations and Letters Miscellaneous Capitalizations

The use of capital, or uppercase, letters is determined by

custom. Capital letters are used to call attention to certain

words, such as proper nouns and the first word of a sentence.

Use capital letters carefully because they can affect a word’s

meaning (march / March, china / China) and because many

spell checkers would fail to identify such an error.

Proper Nouns Capitalize proper nouns that name specific persons, places, or

things (Pat Wilde, Peru, Business Writing 205, Microsoft). When

in doubt, consult a general or subject-area dictionary.

Common Nouns 195

Common nouns name general classes or categories of people,

places, things, concepts, or qualities rather than specific ones

and are not capitalized (person, country, business writing class,

company).

First Words The first letter of the first word in a sentence is always

capitalized. (“Of the plans submitted, ours is best.”) The first

word after a colon is capitalized when the colon introduces two

or more sentences (independent clauses) or when the colon

precedes a formal statement or question.

► The meeting will address only one issue: What is the firm’s role in environmental protection?

If a subordinate element follows the colon or if the thought is

closely related, use a lowercase letter following the colon.

► We kept working for one reason: the approaching deadline.

The first word of a complete sentence in quotation marks is

capitalized.

► Peter Drucker said, “The most important thing in communication is to hear what isn’t being said.”

The first word in the salutation (Dear Mr. Smith:) and in the

complimentary close (Sincerely yours,) are capitalized, as are

the names of the recipients. See also letters.

196

Specific Groups Capitalize the names of ethnic groups, religions, and

nationalities (Native American, Christianity, Mongolian). Do not

capitalize the names of social and economic groups (middle

class, unemployed).

Specific Places Capitalize the names of all political divisions (Ward Six,

Chicago, Cook County, Illinois) and geographic divisions

(Europe, Asia, North America, the Middle East). Do not

capitalize geographic features unless they are part of a proper

name.

► The mountains in some areas, such as the Great Smoky Mountains, make cell-phone reception difficult.

The words north, south, east, and west are capitalized when

they refer to sections of the country. They are not capitalized

when they refer to directions.

► I may relocate further west, but my family will remain in the South.

Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts Capitalize the names of institutions, organizations, and

associations (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services).

197

An organization usually capitalizes the names of its internal

divisions and departments (Aeronautics Division, Human

Resources Department). Types of organizations are not

capitalized unless they are part of an official name (a business

communication association, Association for Business

Communication). Capitalize historical events (the Great

Depression of the 1930s). Capitalize words that designate

holidays, specific periods of time, months, or days of the week

(Labor Day, the Renaissance, January, Monday). Do not

capitalize seasons of the year (spring, summer, autumn, winter)

unless they are used in a title (Winter Semester Schedule).

Titles of Works Capitalize the initial letters of the first, last, and major words in

the title of a book, an article, a play, or a film. Do not capitalize

articles, coordinating conjunctions, or prepositions unless

they begin or end the title (The Wealth of Nations). Capitalize

prepositions within titles when they contain five or more letters

(Between, Within, Until, After) unless you are following a style

that recommends otherwise. The same rules apply to the

subject lines of e-mails or memos. However, various citation

styles may have different requirements for using capital letter

in titles in references or footnotes. See documenting sources.

Professional and Personal Titles Titles preceding proper names are capitalized (Ms. Berger,

Senator King). Appositives following proper names are not

198

normally capitalized (Angus King, senator from Maine).

However, the word president is often capitalized when it refers

to the chief executive of a national government. See

appositives.

Job titles used with personal names are capitalized (H. S.

Kim, Division Manager). Job titles used without personal names

are not capitalized. (“The division manager will meet us

tomorrow.”) Use capital letters to designate family relationships

only when they occur before a name (my uncle, Uncle Fred).

Abbreviations and Letters Capitalize abbreviations if the words they stand for would be

capitalized, such as MBA (Master of Business Administration).

Capitalize letters that serve as names or indicate shapes

(vitamin B, U-turn).

Miscellaneous Capitalizations The first word of a complete sentence enclosed in dashes,

brackets, or parentheses is not capitalized when it appears as

part of another sentence.

► We must improve our safety record this year (accidents last year were up 10 percent).

When specifically identified by number, certain units, such as

parts and chapters of books and rooms in buildings, are

capitalized (Chapter 5, Ch. 5; Room 72, Rm. 72). Minor divisions

199

within such units are not capitalized unless they begin a

sentence (page 11, verse 14, seat 12).

200

case DIRECTORY

Subjective Case Objective Case Possessive Case Appositives Determining the Case of Pronouns

Grammatical case indicates the functional relationship of a

noun or a pronoun to the other words in a sentence. Nouns

change form only in the possessive case; pronouns may change

form in the subjective, objective, or possessive case.

The case of a noun or pronoun is always determined by its

function in a phrase, clause, or sentence. If it is the subject of a

phrase, clause, or sentence, it is in the subjective case; if it is an

object in a phrase, clause, or sentence, it is in the objective

case; if it reflects possession or ownership and modifies a noun,

it is in the possessive case. Figure C–1 is a chart of pronouns in

the subjective, objective, and possessive cases. See also

sentence construction.

201

FIGURE C–1. Pronoun-Case Chart

The subjective case can indicate the person or thing acting

(“He sued the vendor”), the person or thing acted on (“He was

sued by the vendor”), or the topic of description (“He is the

vendor”). The objective case can indicate the thing acted on

(“The vendor sued him”) or the person or thing acting but in the

objective position (“The vendor was sued by him”). (See also

voice.) The possessive case indicates the person or thing

owning or possessing something (“It was his company”). See

also modifiers.

Subjective Case A pronoun is in the subjective case (also called nominative case)

when it represents the person or thing acting or is the receiver

of the action even though it is in the subject position.

► I wrote a proposal.

A linking verb links a pronoun to its antecedent to show that

they identify the same thing. Because they represent the same

202

thing, the pronoun is in the subjective case even when it follows

the verb, which makes it a subjective complement.

► She is the new manager. [subject] ► The new manager is she. [subjective complement]

The subjective case is used after the words than and as because

of the understood (although unstated) portion of the clauses in

which those words appear.

► George is as good a designer as I [am]. ► Our subsidiary can do the job better than we [can].

Objective Case A pronoun is in the objective case (also called the accusative

case) when it indicates the person or thing receiving the action

that is expressed by a verb in the active voice.

► The company promoted me in July.

Pronouns that follow action verbs (which excludes all forms of

the verb be) must be in the objective case. Do not be confused

by an additional name (“The company promoted John and me

in July”).

A pronoun is in the objective case when it is the object of a

preposition or gerund or the subject of an infinitive.

► Between you and me, his facts are questionable. [objects of a preposition]

203

► Training him was the best thing I could have done. [object of a gerund]

► We asked them to return the deposit. [subject of an infinitive]

English does not differentiate between direct objects and

indirect objects; both require the objective form of the pronoun.

See also complements.

► The interviewer seemed to like me. [direct object] ► They wrote me a letter. [indirect object]

Possessive Case A noun or pronoun is in the possessive case when it represents

a person, place, or thing that possesses something. To make a

singular noun possessive, add ’s (the manufacturer’s robotic

inventory system). With plural nouns that end in s, show the

possessive by placing an apostrophe after the s that forms the

plural (a managers’ meeting). For other guidelines, see

possessive case.

Appositives An appositive is a noun or noun phrase that follows and

amplifies the meaning of another noun or noun phrase.

Because it has the same grammatical function as the noun it

complements, an appositive should be in the same case as the

noun it complements.

► Two auditors, Jim Knight and I, were asked to review the

204

books. [subjective case] ► The group leader selected two members to represent the

department—Mohan Pathak and me. [objective case]

Determining the Case of Pronouns One test to determine the proper case of a pronoun is to try it

with a transitive verb, such as resembled or hit. If the pronoun

would logically precede the verb, use the subjective case; if it

would logically follow the verb, use the objective case.

► She [He, They] resembled her father. [subjective case] ► Angela resembled him [her, them]. [objective case]

In the following example, try omitting the noun to determine

the case of the pronoun. The proper pronoun will sound

correct.

SENTENCE (We / Us) pilots fly our own airplanes.

INCORRECT Us fly our own airplanes.

CORRECT We fly our own airplanes.

To determine the case of a pronoun that follows as or than,

mentally add the words that are omitted but understood.

► The other sales representative is not paid as well as she [is paid]. [You would not write “Her is paid.”]

► His partner was better informed than he [was informed]. [You would not write “Him was informed.”]

205

If pronouns in compound constructions cause problems, try

using them singly to determine the proper case.

SENTENCE (We / Us) and the clients are going to lunch.

CORRECT We are going to lunch.

For advice on when to use who and whom, see who / whom.

206

cause-and-effect method of development The cause-and-effect method of development is a common

strategy to explain why something happened or why you think

something will happen. The goal is to make as plausible as

possible the relationship between a situation and either its

cause or its effect. The conclusions you draw about the

relationships should be based on evidence you have gathered.

Like all methods, this one is often used in combination with

others. If you were examining a problem with multiple causes,

for example, you might combine this method of development

with the order-of-importance method of development as you

examine each cause and its effect.

Evaluating Evidence Because not all the evidence you gather will be of equal value,

keep in mind the following guidelines:

Your facts and arguments should be relevant to your topic. Be careful not to draw a conclusion that your evidence does not support. For example, you may have researched some statistics showing that an increasing number of Americans are licensed to fly small airplanes cannot be used as evidence for a decrease in new car sales in the United States. Your evidence should be sufficient. Not having enough evidence can lead to false conclusions.

207

► Driver-training classes do not help prevent auto accidents. Two people I know who completed driver- training classes were involved in accidents.

A thorough investigation of the usefulness of driver-training

classes in keeping down the accident rate would require more

than one or two examples. It would require a systematic

comparison of the driving records for a representative sample

of drivers who had completed driver training and those who

had not.

Your evidence should be representative. If you conduct a survey to obtain your evidence, do not solicit responses from only individuals or groups whose views are identical to yours; be sure you obtain responses from a diverse population. Your evidence should be demonstrable. Two events that occur close to each other in time or place may or may not be causally related. For example, the fact that new traffic signs were placed at an intersection and the next day an accident occurred does not prove that the signs caused the accident. You must demonstrate the relationship between the two events with pertinent facts and arguments. See logic errors.

Linking Causes to Effects To show a true relationship between a cause and an effect, you

must demonstrate that the existence of the one requires the

existence of the other. It is often difficult to establish beyond

208

any doubt that one event was the cause of another event. More

often, a result will have more than one cause. As you research a

subject, your task is to determine which cause or causes are

most plausible.

When several probable causes are equally valid, report your

findings accordingly, as in the following excerpt from an article

on the use of an energy-saving device called a furnace-vent

damper. The damper is a metal plate that fits inside the flue or

vent pipe of a furnace to allow poisonous gases to escape up the

flue. Tests run on several dampers showed a number of

probable causes for their malfunctioning.

► One damper was sold without proper installation instructions, and another was wired incorrectly. Two of the units had slow-opening dampers (15 seconds) that prevented the [furnace] burner from firing. And one damper jammed when exposed to a simulated fuel temperature of more than 700 degrees.

— Don DeBat, “Save Energy but Save Your Life, Too,” Family

Safety

The investigator located more than one cause of damper

malfunctions and reported on them. Without such a thorough

account, recommendations to prevent malfunctions would be

based on incomplete evidence.

209

center on Use the phrase center on in writing, not center around. (“The

experiments center on the new discovery.”) Often, however, the

idea intended by center on is better expressed by other words.

210

chronological method of development The chronological method of development arranges the events

under discussion in sequential order, as in Figure C–2,

emphasizing time as it begins with the first event and continues

chronologically to the last. Trip reports, instructions, work

schedules, some minutes of meetings, and certain incident

reports are among the types of writing in which information is

organized chronologically. Chronological order is typically used

in narration.

211

212

FIGURE C–2. Chronological Method of Development

In the e-mail shown in Figure C–2, a retail store manager

describes the steps taken over a one-year period to reduce

shoplifting at his store. After providing important background

information, the writer presents the steps taken in

chronological order.

213

cite / sight / site Cite means “acknowledge” or “quote an authority.” (“The

speaker cited several famous economists.”) Sight is the ability to

see. (“He feared that he might lose his sight.”) Site is a plot of

land (a construction site) or the place where something is

located (a storage site).

214

clarity Clarity is essential to effective communication with your

readers. You cannot achieve your purpose or a goal like

persuasion without clarity.

A logical method of development and an outline will help

you avoid presenting your reader with a jumble of isolated

thoughts. A method of development and an outline that puts

your thoughts into a logical, meaningful sequence brings

coherence as well as unity to your writing. Clear transition

contributes to clarity by providing the smooth flow that enables

the reader to connect your thoughts with one another without

conscious effort. See also outlining.

Proper emphasis and subordination are mandatory if you

want to achieve clarity. If you do not use those two

complementary techniques wisely, all your clauses and

sentences will appear to be of equal importance; your reader

will only be able to guess which are most important, which are

least important, and which fall somewhere in between. The

pace at which you present your ideas is also important to

clarity; if the pace is not carefully adjusted to both the topic and

the reader, your writing will appear cluttered and unclear.

Point of view establishes through whose eyes or from what

vantage point the reader views the subject. A consistent point of

view is essential to clarity; if you inappropriately switch from

the first person to the third person in midsentence, you are

215

certain to confuse your reader.

Precise word choice contributes to clarity and helps

eliminate ambiguity and awkwardness. Vague words, clichés,

poor use of idioms, and inappropriate usage detract from

clarity. That conciseness is a requirement for clear writing

should be evident to anyone who has ever attempted to

decipher a product liability or privacy statement. For clarity,

remove unnecessary words from your writing. See also plain

language.

216

clauses A clause is a group of words that contains a subject and a

predicate. (See sentence construction.) Every sentence must

contain at least one independent, that is, a clause that can stand

alone as a sentence: “The scaffolding fell when the rope broke.”

A dependent clause must be attached to an independent clause:

“I was at the St. Louis branch when the decision was made. If a

dependent clause is not attached to an independent clause, it

becomes a sentence fragment.

Dependent (or subordinate) clauses are useful in making the

relationship between thoughts clearer and more succinct than

if the ideas were presented in a choppy series of simple

sentences or in a compound sentence. Dependent clauses are

especially effective for expressing thoughts that describe or

explain another statement.

CHOPPY The recycling facility is located between Millville and Darrtown. Both villages use it. [The two thoughts are of approximately equal importance.]

SUBORDINATED The recycling facility, which is located between Millville and Darrtown, is used by both villages. [One thought is subordinated to the other.]

Too much subordination, however, can be confusing and foster

wordiness. See also conciseness.

217

A clause can be connected to the rest of its sentence by a

coordinating conjunction, a subordinating conjunction, a

relative pronoun, or a conjunctive adverb.

► It was 500 miles to the facility, so we made arrangements to fly. [coordinating conjunction]

► Drivers will need to be alert because snow may cause hazardous conditions near the entrance to the warehouse. [subordinating conjunction]

► Robert M. Fano was the scientist who developed the earliest multiple-access computer system at MIT. [relative pronoun]

► We arrived in the evening; nevertheless, we began the tour of the facility. [conjunctive adverb]

218

clichés Clichés are expressions that have been used for so long they are

no longer fresh but come to mind easily because they are so

familiar. Clichés are often wordy and vague, and they can be

confusing, especially to speakers of English as a second

language. A better, more direct word or phrase is given for each

of the following clichés.

INSTEAD OF USE

all over the map scattered, unfocused

the game plan strategy, schedule

last but not least last, finally

Some writers use clichés in a misguided attempt to appear

casual or spontaneous, just as other writers try to impress

readers with buzzwords. Although clichés may come to mind

easily while you are writing a draft, eliminate them during

revision. See also affectation, conciseness, and international

correspondence.

219

coherence Writing is coherent when the relationships among ideas are

clear to readers. The major components of coherent writing are

a logical sequence of related ideas and clear transitions between

those ideas. See also clarity and organization.

Presenting ideas in a logical sequence is the most important

requirement in achieving coherence. The key to achieving a

logical sequence is a good outline. (See outlining.) An outline

forces you to establish a beginning, a middle, and an end. That

structure contributes greatly to coherence by enabling you to

experiment with sequences and lay out the most direct route to

your purpose without digressing.

Thoughtful transition is also essential; without it, your

writing cannot achieve the smooth flow from sentence to

sentence and paragraph to paragraph that results in coherence.

During revision, check your draft carefully for coherence. If

possible, have someone else review it to see how well it

expresses the relationships among ideas. See also unity.

220

collaborative writing Collaborative writing occurs when two or more writers work

together to produce a single document for which they share

responsibility and decision-making authority. Collaborative

writing teams are formed when (1) the size of a project or the

time constraints imposed on it require a joint effort, (2) the

project involves multiple areas of expertise, or (3) the project

requires the melding of divergent views into a single

perspective that is acceptable to the whole team or to another

group. Many types of collaborations are possible, from the

collaboration of a primary writer with a variety of contributors

and reviewers to a highly interactive collaboration in which

everyone on a team plays a relatively equal role in shaping the

document.

Tasks of the Collaborative Writing Team The collaborating team strives to achieve a compatible working

relationship by dividing the work in a way that uses each

writer’s expertise and experience to its advantage. The team

should also designate a coordinator, who will guide the team

members’ activities, organize the project, and ensure

coherence and consistency within the document. The

coordinator’s duties can be determined by mutual agreement,

assigned by management, or assigned on a rotating basis if the

team often works together.

221

Planning The team members collectively identify the audience, purpose,

context, and scope of the project. See also meetings and “Five

Steps to Successful Writing.”

At this stage, the team establishes a project plan that may

include guidelines for communication among team members,

version control (naming, dating, and managing document

drafts), review procedures, and writing style standards that

team members are expected to follow. The plan includes a

schedule with due dates for completing initial research tasks,

outlines, drafts, reviews, revisions, and the final document.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Deadlines must be met because team members rely on one another, and one missed deadline can delay the entire project. A missed project deadline can result in a lost opportunity or, in the case of proposals, disqualify an application. Individual writers must adjust their schedules and focus on their own writing process to finish drafts and meet the deadline.

Research and Writing The team next completes initial research tasks, elicits

comments from team members, creates a broad outline of the

document (see outlining), and assigns writing tasks to

individual team members based on their expertise. Depending

on the project, each team member further researches an

222

assigned segment of the document, expands and develops the

broad outline, and produces a draft from the detailed outline.

See also writing a draft.

Reviewing Keeping the audience’s needs and the document’s purpose in

mind, each team member critically yet diplomatically reviews

the other team members’ drafts, from the overall organization

to the clarity of each paragraph, and offers advice to help

improve the writers’ work. Team members can easily solicit

feedback by sharing files and then working with track and

comment features that allow reviewers to suggest changes

without deleting the original text.

Revising In this final stage, individual writers evaluate their colleagues’

reviews and accept, reject, or build on their suggestions. Then

the team coordinator can consolidate all drafts into a final

master copy and maintain and evaluate it for consistency, tone,

and coherence. See also revision.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

As you collaborate, be ready to tolerate some disharmony, but temper it with mutual respect. Team members may have differing perspectives that can easily lead to conflict, ranging from minor differences to major showdowns. However, creative differences resolved respectfully can energize the team and actually strengthen a finished document by compelling writers to reexamine assumptions and issues in

223

unanticipated ways. See listening.

Using Collaborative Writing Software Software and online systems help teams work together on a

common writing task whether they are in the same office or in

different countries. Online synchronous whiteboards, for

example, allow teams to collaborate online and discuss and edit

texts in real time. Many such technologies also make it easy to

conduct live chat sessions, share documents, track changes

from one version of a document to the next, alert collaborators

when a document is altered, and export documents for offline

editing. Word processing; Web-based file sharing; and

collaborative systems like wikis, Google Docs, and Microsoft

Word Online enable team members to draft, review, edit, and

comment with text or voice on their collective work. Project

management programs can also help organize and manage

schedules as well as track versions and deadlines. See also

document management.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Collaboratively

✓ Designate one person as the team coordinator. ✓ Identify the audience, purpose, context, and scope of the project. ✓ Create a project plan, including a schedule and style or format

standards.

224

✓ Create a working outline of the document. ✓ Assign sections or tasks to each team member. ✓ Research and write drafts of each document section. ✓ Use the agreed-upon standards for style and format. ✓ Exchange sections for team member reviews. ✓ Revise sections as needed. ✓ Meet the established deadlines for drafts, revisions, and final

versions. ✓ Consider using online tools to facilitate working with team

members.

225

collection letters Collection letters serve two purposes: (1) collecting an overdue

bill and (2) preserving the customer relationship. In some

states, legal requirements may force you to use an attorney to

write such letters. See also correspondence and letters.

Most companies use a series of collection letters like those

shown in Figures C–3 through C–5, in which the letters become

increasingly demanding and urgent. All letters should be

courteous and show a genuine interest in the customer as well

as concern for whatever problems may be preventing prompt

payment. See also “you” viewpoint.

226

FIGURE C–3. First-Stage Collection Letter

227

FIGURE C–4. Second-Stage Collection Letter

228

FIGURE C–5. Third-Stage Collection Letter

The first stage should include reminders stamped on the

invoice (“overdue”), form letters, or brief personal notes. These

early reminders should maintain a friendly tone, as shown in

Figure C–3.

In the second stage, your tone should be firm, but it should

never be rude, sarcastic, or threatening. Ask directly for

payment, and inquire whether some circumstances are

preventing payment. Make it easy for the customer to respond,

as shown in Figure C–4.

Third-stage collection letters reflect a sense of urgency

because the customer has not responded to your previous

letters. Although your tone should remain courteous, make

your demand for payment explicit, as shown in Figure C–5.

Point out how reasonable you have been, and urge the customer

to pay at once to avoid a collection service or legal action.

229

colons The colon (:) is a mark of introduction that alerts readers to the

close connection between the preceding statement and what

follows.

Colons in Sentences A colon links independent clauses to words, phrases, clauses,

or lists that identify, rename, emphasize, amplify, explain, or

illustrate the sentence that precedes the colon.

► Two topics will be discussed: the new accounting system and the new bookkeeping procedures. [phrases that identify]

► Only one thing will satisfy Mr. Sturgess: our finished report. [appositive (renaming) phrase for emphasis]

► Any organization is confronted with two separate, though related, information problems: It must maintain an effective internal communication system and an effective external communication system. [clause to amplify and explain]

► Heart patients should make key lifestyle changes: stop smoking, exercise regularly, eat a low-fat diet, and reduce stress. [list to identify and illustrate]

Colons with Salutations, Titles, Citations, and Numbers A colon follows the salutation in formal correspondence, even

230

when the salutation refers to a person by first name.

► Dear Professor Jeffers: or Dear Mary:

Colons separate titles from subtitles and separate references to

sections of works in citations. See also documenting sources.

► “ ‘We Regret to Inform You’: Toward a New Theory of Negative Messages”

► International Journal of Business Communication 51:279– 303 [volume 51, pages 279–303]

Colons separate numbers in time references and indicate

numerical ratios.

► 9:30 a.m. [9 hours and 30 minutes] ► The cement is mixed with water and sand at a ratio of 5:3:1.

[The colon is read as the word to.]

Punctuation and Capitalization with Colons A colon always goes outside quotation marks.

► This was the real meaning of the manager’s “suggestion”: Cooperation within our department must improve.

As this example shows, the first word after a colon may be

capitalized if the statement following the colon is a complete

sentence and functions as a formal statement or question. If the

element following the colon is subordinate, however, use a

231

lowercase letter to begin that element. See also capitalization.

► We have only one way to stay within our present budget: to reduce expenditures for research and development.

Unnecessary Colons Do not place a colon between a verb and its objects.

Likewise, do not use a colon between a preposition and its

objects.

Do not insert a colon after including, such as, or for example to

introduce a simple list.

One common exception is made when a verb or preposition is

followed by a stacked list; however, it may be possible to

introduce the list with a complete sentence instead.

232

comma splice A comma splice is a grammatical error in which two

independent clauses are joined by only a comma.

INCORRECT It was 500 miles to the facility, we arranged to fly.

A comma splice can be corrected in several ways.

1. Substitute a semicolon, a semicolon and a conjunctive adverb followed by a comma, or a comma and a coordinating conjunction.

It was 500 miles to the facility; we arranged to fly. [semicolon] It was 500 miles to the facility; therefore, we arranged to fly. [conjunctive adverb] It was 500 miles to the facility, so we arranged to fly. [coordinating conjunction]

2. Create two sentences. It was 500 miles to the facility. We arranged to fly.

3. Subordinate one clause to the other. (See subordination.) Because it was 500 miles to the facility, we arranged to fly.

See also sentence construction and sentence faults.

233

commas DIRECTORY

Linking Independent Clauses Enclosing Elements Introducing Elements Separating Items in a Series Clarifying and Contrasting Showing Omissions Using with Numbers and Names Using with Other Punctuation Avoiding Unnecessary Commas

Like all punctuation, the comma (,) helps readers understand

the writer’s meaning and prevents ambiguity. Notice how the

comma helps make the meaning clear in the second example.

AMBIGUOUS To be successful managers with MBAs must continue their education.

CLEAR To be successful, managers with MBAs must continue their education.

Do not follow the old myth that you should insert a comma

wherever you would pause if you were speaking. Effective use

of commas depends on an understanding of sentence

construction.

Linking Independent Clauses Use a comma before a coordinating conjunction (and, but, or,

234

nor, and sometimes so, yet, and for) that links independent clauses.

► The new microwave disinfection system was delivered, but the installation will require an additional week.

However, if two independent clauses are short and closely

related — and there is no danger of confusing the reader — the

comma may be omitted. Both of the following examples are

correct.

► The cable snapped and the power failed. ► The cable snapped, and the power failed.

Enclosing Elements Commas are used to enclose nonessential information in

nonrestrictive clauses, phrases, and parenthetical elements. See

also restrictive and nonrestrictive elements.

► Our new factory, which began operations last month, should add 25 percent to total output. [nonrestrictive clause]

► The accountant, working quickly and efficiently, finished early. [nonrestrictive phrase]

► We can, of course, expect their lawyer to call us. [parenthetical element]

Yes and no are set off by commas.

► Yes, I think we can finish by the deadline.

235

A direct address, as well as an interjection (oh, well, indeed,

yes, no), should be enclosed in commas.

► You will note, Jeff, that the budget figure matches our estimate. [direct address]

► We must, indeed, rethink the proposal. [interjection]

If the direct address or interjection appears at the beginning of

the sentence, only one comma following the direct address or

interjection is needed.

An appositive phrase (which reidentifies another expression

in the sentence) is enclosed in commas.

► Our company, NT Insurance Group, won several awards last year.

Interrupting parenthetical and transitional words or phrases

are usually set off with commas. See also transition.

► The report, therefore, needs to be revised.

Commas are omitted when the word or phrase does not

interrupt the continuity of thought.

► I therefore recommend that we begin construction.

For other means of punctuating parenthetical elements, see

dashes and parentheses.

236

Introducing Elements Clauses and Phrases Generally, place a comma after an introductory clause or

phrase, especially if it is long, to identify where the introductory

element ends and the main part of the sentence begins.

► Because we have not yet reached our hiring goals for the Sales Division, we recommend the development of an aggressive recruiting program.

A long modifying phrase that precedes the main clause should

always be followed by a comma.

► During the first series of field-performance tests at our Colorado proving ground, the new engine failed to meet our expectations.

When an introductory phrase is short and closely related to the

main clause, the comma may be omitted.

► In two seconds a decision was reached.

A comma should always follow an absolute phrase, which

modifies the whole sentence.

► The presentation completed, we returned to our offices.

Words and Quotations Certain types of introductory words are followed by a comma.

237

One example is a transitional word or phrase that connects the preceding clause or sentence with the thought that follows.

► Furthermore, we should include college job fairs in our recruiting plans, provided our budget is approved.

► For example, this change will make us more competitive in the global marketplace.

Use a comma to separate a direct quotation from its

introduction.

► Morton and Lucia White said, “People live in cities but dream of the countryside.”

Do not use a comma when giving an indirect quotation.

► Morton and Lucia White said that people dream of the countryside, even though they live in cities.

When an adverb closely modifies the verb or the entire

sentence, it should not be followed by a comma.

► Perhaps we can still solve the high turnover problem. Certainly we should try. [Perhaps and certainly closely modify each statement.]

Separating Items in a Series Although the comma before the last item in a series is

sometimes omitted, it is generally clearer to include it.

► Random House, Bantam, Doubleday, and Dell were once

238

separate publishing companies. [Without the final comma, “Doubleday and Dell” might refer to one company or two.]

Phrases and clauses in coordinate series are also punctuated

with commas.

► Plants absorb noxious gases, act as receptors of dirt particles, and cleanse the air of other impurities.

When phrases or clauses in a series contain commas, use

semicolons rather than commas to separate the items.

► Among those present were John Howard, President of the Howard Paper Company; Thomas Martin, CEO of AIR Recycling, Inc.; and Larry Stanley, President of Northland Papers.

When adjectives modifying the same noun can be reversed and

make sense, or when they can be separated by and, they should

be separated by commas.

► The aircraft featured a modern, sleek, swept-wing design.

When an adjective modifies a phrase, no comma is required.

► She investigated the damaged inventory-control system. [The adjective damaged modifies the phrase inventory- control system.]

Never separate a final adjective from its noun.

► He is a conscientious, honest, reliable, worker.

239

Clarifying and Contrasting Use a comma to separate two contrasting thoughts or ideas.

► The project was finished on time, but not within the budget.

Use a comma after an independent clause that is only loosely

related to the dependent clause that follows it or that could be

misread without the comma.

► I should be able to finish the plan by July, even though I lost time because of illness.

Showing Omissions A comma sometimes replaces a verb in certain elliptical

constructions.

► Some were punctual; others, late. [The comma replaces were.]

It is better, however, to avoid such constructions in business

writing.

Using with Numbers and Names Commas are conventionally used to separate distinct items. Use

commas between the elements of an address written on the

same line (but not between the state and the ZIP Code).

► Kristen James, 4119 Mill Road, Dayton, Ohio 45401

240

A full date that is written in month-day-year format uses a

comma preceding and following the year.

► November 30, 2025, is the payoff date.

Do not use commas for dates in the day-month-year format,

which is used in many parts of the world and by the U.S.

military.

► Note that 30 November 2025 is the payoff date.

Do not use commas when showing only the month and year or

month and day in a date.

► The target date of May 2020 is optimistic, so I would like to meet on March 4 to discuss our options.

Use commas to separate the elements of large arabic numbers.

► 1,528,200 feet

In many countries, the comma is a decimal marker, with

periods or spaces used for large numbers (1.528.200 meters or 1

528 200 meters).

A comma may be substituted for the colon in the salutation of

a personal letter or e-mail. Do not, however, use a comma in

the salutation of a formal business letter or e-mail, even if you

use the person’s first name.

► Dear Marie, [personal letter or e-mail]

241

► Dear Marie: [formal business letter or e-mail]

Use commas to separate the elements of geographic names.

► Toronto, Ontario, Canada

Use a comma to separate names that are reversed (Smith,

Alvin), and use commas with professional abbreviations.

► Jim Rogers Jr., M.D., chaired the conference. [ Jr. or Sr. does not require a comma.]

Using with Other Punctuation Conjunctive adverbs (however, nevertheless, consequently, for

example, on the other hand) that join independent clauses are

preceded by a semicolon and followed by a comma. Such

adverbs function both as modifiers and as connectives.

► The idea is good; however, our budget is not sufficient.

As shown earlier in this entry, use semicolons rather than

commas to separate items in a series when the items

themselves contain commas.

When a comma should follow a phrase or clause that ends

with words in parentheses, the comma always appears outside

the closing parenthesis.

► Although we left late (at 7:30 p.m.), we arrived on time.

242

Commas always go inside quotation marks.

► The status display indicates “ready,” but the unit requires an additional warm-up period.

Except with abbreviations, a comma should not be used with a

dash, an exclamation mark, a period, or a question mark.

Avoiding Unnecessary Commas A number of common writing errors involve placing commas

where they do not belong. As stated earlier, such errors often

occur because writers assume that a pause in a sentence should

be indicated by a comma.

Do not place a comma between a subject and a verb or

between a verb and its object.

Do not use a comma between the elements of a compound

subject or a compound predicate consisting of only two

elements.

243

Do not include a comma after a coordinating conjunction such

as and or but.

Do not place a comma before the first item or after the last item

of a series.

Do not use a comma to separate a prepositional phrase from the

rest of the sentence unnecessarily.

244

compare / contrast When you compare things, you point out similarities or both

similarities and differences. (“We should compare both brands

before making our choice.”) When you contrast things, you

point out only the differences. (“Their speaking styles contrast

sharply.”) In either case, you compare or contrast only things

that are part of a common category.

When compare is used to establish a general similarity, it is

followed by to. (“He compared our receiving the grant to

winning a marathon.”) When compare is used to indicate a

close examination of similarities or differences, it is followed by

with. (“We compared the features of the new copier with those

of the current one.”)

Contrast is normally followed by with. (“The new policy

contrasts sharply with the earlier one.”) When the noun form of

contrast is used, one speaks of the contrast between two things

or of one thing being in contrast to the other.

245

comparison When you are making a comparison, be sure that both or all of

the elements being compared are clearly evident to your

reader.

The things being compared must be of the same kind.

Be sure to point out the parallels or differences between the

things being compared. Do not assume your reader will know

what you mean.

A double comparison in the same sentence requires that the

first comparison be completed before the second one is stated.

Do not attempt to compare things that are not comparable.

246

comparison method of development As a method of development, comparison points out

similarities and differences between the elements of your

subject. The comparison method of development can help

readers understand a difficult or unfamiliar subject by relating

it to a simpler or more familiar one.

You must first determine the basis for the comparison. For

example, if you were comparing bids from contractors for a

remodeling project at your company, you would most likely

compare such factors as price, previous experience, personnel

qualifications, availability, and completion date. Once you have

determined the basis or bases for comparison, you can

determine the most effective way to structure your comparison:

whole by whole or part by part.

In the whole-by-whole method, all the relevant

characteristics of one item are examined before all the relevant

characteristics of the next item. The descriptions of typical

woodworking glues in Figure C–6 are organized according to the

whole-by-whole method. This document would be useful for

those readers who wish to learn about all types of wood glues.

247

FIGURE C–6. Whole-by-Whole Method of Comparison

If your purpose is to help readers consider the various

characteristics of all the glues, the information might be

arranged according to the part-by-part method of comparison,

in which the relevant features of the items are compared one by

one (as shown in Figure C–7). The part-by-part method could

accommodate further comparison — such as temperature

ranges, special warnings, and common use.

248

FIGURE C–7. Part-by-Part Method of Comparison

Comparisons can also be made effectively with the use of

tables, as shown in Figure C–8. The advantage of a table is that

it provides a quick reference, allowing readers to see and

compare all the information at once. The disadvantage is that a

table cannot convey as much related detailed information as a

narrative description can.

249

FIGURE C–8. Comparison Using a Table to Illustrate Key Differences

250

complaints A complaint message, sent by e-mail or letter, describes a

problem that the writer requests the recipient to solve. The tone

of the message is important: If your message is angry and

belligerent, you may not be taken seriously. Likewise,

immediately posting a complaint to a company’s social media

site or to a public forum might be seen as an attack rather than

an honest attempt to work out a problem and reach a

resolution. Assume that the recipient will be conscientious in

correcting the problem. However, anticipate reader reactions

or rebuttals. See audience and correspondence.

► I reviewed my user manual’s “Safe Operating Guidelines” carefully before I installed the device. [This assures readers you followed instructions.]

Without such explanations, readers may be tempted to dismiss

your complaint. Figure C–9 shows a complaint message that

details a billing problem. Although the circumstances and

severity of the problem may vary, you should generally do the

following when composing an effective complaint message:

1. Identify the problem or faulty item(s), and include relevant invoice numbers, part names, and dates.

2. Explain logically, clearly, and specifically what went wrong, especially for a problem with a service. (Avoid guessing why you think some problem occurred.)

3. State what you expect the reader to do to solve the problem.

251

4. Include or attach a copy of the receipt, bill, or contract, or perhaps photographs of damaged parts, and keep the original(s) for your records.

FIGURE C–9. Complaint Message (Sent as E-mail)

Be sure to check the company’s Web site for any instructions on

submitting a complaint. When you cannot find specific

instructions, you may address your complaint to Customer

Service for large organizations. In smaller organizations, you

might write to a vice president in charge of sales or service, or

directly to the owner. Often, a well-written e-mail, followed if

necessary by a letter sent through standard mail, will elicit the

252

best response. If you do not receive a timely response to your

complaint, try sending it to a different person in the company.

See also adjustment messages and refusal letters.

253

complement / compliment Complement means “anything that completes a whole” (see also

complements). It is used as either a noun or a verb.

► A complement of four employees would bring our staff up to its normal level. [noun]

► The two programs complement one another perfectly. [verb]

Compliment means “praise.” It too is used as either a noun or a

verb.

► The manager’s compliment boosted staff morale. [noun] ► The manager complimented the staff on its proposal.

[verb]

254

complements A complement is a word, phrase, or clause used in the

predicate of a sentence to complete the meaning of the

sentence.

► Pilots fly airplanes. [word] ► To invest is to risk losses. [phrase] ► John knew that he would be late. [clause]

Four types of complements are generally recognized: direct

object, indirect object, objective complement, and subjective

complement. See also sentence construction.

A direct object is a noun or noun equivalent that receives the

action of a transitive verb; it answers the question What? or

Whom? after the verb.

► I designed a Web site. [noun phrase] ► I like to work. [verbal] ► I like it. [pronoun] ► I like what I saw. [noun clause]

An indirect object is a noun or noun equivalent that occurs with

a direct object after certain kinds of transitive verbs, such as

give, wish, cause, and tell. It answers the question To whom or

what? or For whom or what?

► We should buy the office a scanner. [Scanner is the direct object, and office is the indirect object.]

255

An objective complement completes the meaning of a sentence

by revealing something about the object of its transitive verb.

An objective complement may be either a noun or an adjective.

► They call him a genius. [noun phrase] ► We painted the building white. [adjective]

A subjective complement, which follows a linking verb rather

than a transitive verb, describes the subject. A subjective

complement may be either a noun or an adjective.

► His sister is a consultant. [noun phrase follows linking verb is]

► His brother is ill. [adjective follows linking verb is]

256

compose / constitute / comprise Compose and constitute both mean “make up the whole.” The

parts compose or constitute the whole. (“The nine offices

compose the division. Unethical activities constitute cause for

dismissal.”) Comprise means “include,” “contain,” or “consist

of.” The whole comprises the parts. (“The division comprises

nine offices.”)

257

compound words A compound word is made from two or more words that

function as a single concept. A compound may be hyphenated,

written as one word, or written as separate words (low-level,

underestimate, post office).

If you are not certain whether a compound word should use a

hyphen, check a dictionary.

Be careful to distinguish between compound words

(greenhouse) and words that simply appear together but do not

constitute compound words (green house). For plurals of

compound words, generally add s to the last letter (bookcases

and Web sites). However, when the first word of the compound

is more important to its meaning than the last, the first word

takes the s (editors in chief ). Possessives are formed by adding

’s to the end of the compound word (the editor in chief’s desk,

the pipeline’s diameter, the post office’s hours). See also

possessive case.

258

conciseness Concise writing is free of unnecessary words, phrases, clauses,

and sentences without sacrificing clarity or appropriate detail.

Conciseness is not a synonym for brevity; a long report may be

concise, while its abstract may be brief and concise.

Conciseness is always desirable, but brevity may or may not be

desirable in a given passage, depending on the writer’s

purpose. (See also text messaging.) Although concise

sentences are not guaranteed to be effective, wordy sentences

always sacrifice some of their readability and coherence.

Causes of Wordiness Modifiers that repeat an idea present or implicit in the word

being modified contribute to wordiness by being redundant.

See also reason is [because].

basic essentials completely finished

final outcome present status

Coordinated synonyms that merely repeat each other

contribute to wordiness.

each and every basic and fundamental

finally and for good first and foremost

Excess qualification also contributes to wordiness.

perfectly clear completely accurate

259

Expletives, relative pronouns, and relative adjectives,

although they have legitimate purposes, often result in

wordiness.

WORDY There are [expletive] many Web designers who [relative pronoun] are planning to attend the conference, at which [relative adjective] time the committee should meet.

CONCISE Because many Web designers plan to attend the conference, the committee should meet then.

Circumlocution (a long, indirect way of expressing things) is a

leading cause of wordiness. See also gobbledygook.

WORDY The payment to which a subcontractor is entitled should be made promptly so that in the event of a subsequent contractual dispute we, as general contractors, may not be held in default of our contract by virtue of nonpayment.

CONCISE Pay subcontractors promptly. Then, if a contractual dispute occurs, we cannot be held in default of our contract because of nonpayment.

Balance is important. When conciseness is overdone, writing

can become choppy and ambiguous. (See also telegraphic

style.) Too much conciseness can produce a style that is not

only too brief but also too blunt, especially in correspondence.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Achieving Conciseness Wordiness is understandable when you are writing a draft, but it should not survive revision.

✓ Use subordination to achieve conciseness.

260

✓ Avoid affectation by using simple words and phrases.

WORDY It is the policy of the company to provide Internet access to enable employees to conduct the online communication necessary to discharge their responsibilities; such should not be utilized for personal communications or nonbusiness activities.

CONCISE Employee Internet access should be used only for appropriate company business.

✓ Eliminate redundancy.

WORDY Post-installation testing, which is offered to all our customers at no further cost to them whatsoever, is available with each Line Scan System One purchased from this company.

CONCISE Free post-installation testing is offered with each purchase of a Line Scan System One.

✓ Change the passive voice to the active voice and the indicative mood to the imperative mood whenever possible.

WORDY Bar codes are normally used when an order is intended to be displayed on a monitor, and inventory numbers are normally used when an order is to be placed with the manufacturer.

CONCISE Use bar codes to display the order on a monitor, and use inventory numbers to place the order with the manufacturer.

✓ Eliminate or replace wordy introductory phrases or pretentious words and phrases (in the case of, it appears that, needless to say).

REPLACE WITH

in order to, with a view to to

due to the fact that, for the reason that, owing to the fact that, the reason for

because

by means of, by using, in connection with, through the use of by, with

at this time, at this point in time, at present, at the present now, currently

✓ Do not overuse intensifiers, such as very, more, most, best, quite,

261

great, really, and especially. Instead, provide specific and useful details.

✓ Use the search-and-replace command to locate and revise wordy expressions, including to be, and unnecessary helping verbs, such as will.

262

conclusions The conclusion of a document ties the main ideas together and

can even clinch a final significant point. This final point may,

for example, make a prediction or offer a judgment, summarize

key findings, or recommend a course of action. Figure C–10 is a

conclusion from a proposal to reduce a company’s health-care

costs by having the employer sponsor employee health-club

memberships. Notice that it summarizes key points, points to

the benefits, and makes a recommendation.

263

FIGURE C–10. conclusion

The way you conclude depends on your purpose, the needs

of your audience, and the context. For example, a lengthy sales

proposal might conclude persuasively with a summary of the

proposal’s salient points and the company’s relevant strengths.

The following examples are typical concluding strategies.

264

RECOMMENDATION Our findings suggest that you need to alter your marketing

to adjust to the changing demographics for your products.

We recommend that your placement of ads include . . .

SUMMARY As this report describes, we would attract more recent

graduates with the following strategies:

1. Establish our presence on social media to reach college students before they graduate.

2. Increase our attendance at college career fairs. 3. Establish more internships and work-study programs.

JUDGMENT Based on the scope and degree of the storm’s damage, the

current construction code for roofing on light industrial

facilities is inadequate.

IMPLICATION Although our estimate calls for a substantially higher

budget than in the three previous years, we believe that it is

reasonable given our planned expansion.

PREDICTION Although I have exceeded my original estimate for

equipment, I have reduced my labor costs; therefore, I will

easily stay within the original bid.

265

The concluding statement may merely present ideas for

consideration, call for action, or deliberately provoke thought.

IDEAS FOR CONSIDERATION The new prices become effective the first of the year. Price

adjustments are routine for the company, but some of your

customers will not consider them acceptable. Please bear

in mind the needs of both your customers and the company

as you implement these price adjustments.

CALL FOR ACTION Please make a payment of $250 now if you wish to keep

your account active. If you have not responded to our

previous letters because of some special hardship, I will be

glad to work out a solution with you.

THOUGHT-PROVOKING STATEMENT Can we continue to accept the losses incurred by

inefficiency? Or should we take the necessary steps to

control it now?

Be especially careful not to introduce a new topic when you

conclude. A conclusion should always relate to and reinforce

the ideas presented earlier in your writing. Moreover, the

conclusion must be consistent with what the introduction

promised the report would examine (its purpose) and how it

would do so (its method).

For guidance about the location of the conclusions section in

266

a report, see formal reports. For short closings, see

correspondence and entries on specific types of documents

throughout this book.

267

conjunctions A conjunction connects words, phrases, or clauses and can also

indicate the relationship between the elements it connects.

Coordinating conjunctions join two sentence elements that

have identical functions. The coordinating conjunctions are

and, but, or, for, nor, yet, and so.

► Nature and technology affect petroleum prices. [joins two nouns]

► To hear and to listen are two different things. [joins two phrases]

► I would like to include the survey, but that would make the report too long. [joins two clauses]

Coordinating conjunctions in the titles of books, articles,

plays, and movies should not be capitalized unless they are the

first or last word in the title.

► Our library contains Consulting and Financial Independence as well as So You Want to Be a Consultant?

Occasionally, a conjunction may begin a sentence; in fact,

conjunctions can be strong transitional words and at times can

provide emphasis. See also transition.

► I realize that the project is more difficult than expected and that you have encountered staffing problems. But we must meet our deadline.

268

Correlative conjunctions are used in pairs. The correlative

conjunctions are either . . . or, neither . . . nor, not only . . . but

also, both . . . and, and whether . . . or.

► The auditor will arrive on either Wednesday or Thursday.

Subordinating conjunctions connect sentence elements of

different relative importance, normally independent and

dependent clauses. Frequently used subordinating conjunctions

are so, although, after, because, if, where, than, since, as,

unless, before, that, though, and when.

► I left the office after I had finished the report.

Conjunctive adverbs function as conjunctions because they join

two independent clauses. The most common conjunctive

adverbs are however, moreover, therefore, further, then,

consequently, besides, accordingly, also, and thus.

► The engine performed well in the laboratory; however, it failed under road conditions.

269

connotation / denotation The denotations of a word are its literal meanings, as defined in

a dictionary. The connotations of a word are its meanings and

associations beyond its literal definitions. For example, the

denotations of Hollywood are “a district of Los Angeles” and

“the U.S. movie industry as a whole”; for many people, its

connotations are “glamour, opulence, and superficiality.”

Often words have particular connotations for audiences

within professional groups and organizations. Choose words

with both the most accurate denotations and the most

appropriate connotations for the context. See also defining

terms and word choice.

270

consensus Because consensus means “harmony of opinion” among most of

those in a group, the phrases consensus of opinion and general

consensus defeat conciseness. The word consensus can be used

to refer only to a group.

271

context Context is the environment or circumstances in which writers

produce documents and within which readers interpret the

meanings of those documents, whether they are reports or

correspondence. This entry considers the significance of

context for workplace writing and suggests how you can be

aware of it as you write. See also audience.

The context for any document is determined by interrelated

events or circumstances both inside and outside an

organization. For example, when you write a proposal to fund a

project within your company, the economic condition of that

company is part of the context that will determine how your

proposal is received. If the company has recently laid off a

dozen employees, its management may not be inclined to

approve a proposal to expand its operations — regardless of

how well the proposal is written.

When you correspond with someone, the events that

prompted you to write shape the context of the message and

affect what you say and how you say it. If you write to a

customer in response to a complaint, for example, the tone and

approach of your message will be determined by the context —

what you find when you investigate the issue. Is your company

fully or partly at fault? Has the customer incorrectly used a

product? contributed to a problem? (See also adjustment

messages.) If you write instructions for staff members who

272

must use high-volume document-processing equipment, other

questions will reveal the context. What are the lighting and

other physical conditions near the equipment? Will these

physical conditions affect the layout and design of the

instructions? What potential safety issues might the users

encounter?

Assessing Context Each time you write, the context needs to be clearly in your

mind so that your document will achieve its purpose. The

following questions are starting points to help you become

aware of the context, how it will influence your approach and

your readers’ interpretation of what you have written, and how

it will affect the decisions you need to make during the writing

process. See also “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

What is your professional relationship with your readers, and how might that affect the tone, style, and scope of your writing? What is “the story” behind the immediate reason you are writing — that is, what series of events or perhaps previous documents led to your need to write? What is the preferred medium of your readers, and which medium is best suited to your purpose? See also selecting the medium. What specific factors (such as competition, finance, and regulation) are important to your organization or department? What is the corporate culture in which your readers work,

273

and what are the key values found in its mission statement? What current events within or outside an organization or a department may influence how readers interpret your writing? What national cultural differences might affect your readers’ expectations or interpretations of the document? See also global communication.

As these questions suggest, context is specific each time you

write and often involves the history of a specific organization or

your past dealings with individual readers.

Signaling Context Because context is so important, remind your reader in some

way of the context for your writing, as in the following opening

for a cover message to a proposal. (See cover messages.)

► During our meeting last week on improving quality, you mentioned that we have previously required usability testing only for documents going to high-profile clients because of the costs involved. The idea occurred to me that we might try less extensive usability testing for many of our other clients. Because you asked for suggestions, I have proposed in the attached document a method of limited usability testing for a broad range of clients in order to improve overall quality while keeping costs at a minimum.

Of course, as described in introductions, providing context for

a reader may require only a brief background statement or

274

short reminders.

► Several weeks ago, a financial adviser noticed a recurring problem in the software developed by CGF Systems. Specifically, error messages repeatedly appeared when, in fact, no specific trouble . . .

► Jane, as I promised in my e-mail yesterday, I’ve attached the personnel budget estimates for the next fiscal year.

As the last example suggests, provide context for attachments to

e-mail.

275

continual / continuous Continual implies “happening over and over” or “frequently

repeated.” (“Writing well requires continual practice.”)

Continuous implies “occurring without interruption” or

“unbroken.” (“The continuous roar of the machinery was

deafening.”)

276

contractions A contraction is a shortened spelling of a word or phrase, with

an apostrophe substituting for the missing letter or letters

(cannot / can’t; have not / haven’t; it is / it’s). Contractions are

often used in speech and informal writing; they are generally

not appropriate in reports, proposals, and formal

correspondence. See also business writing style.

277

copyrights, patents, and trademarks This entry offers advice for writers both in the classroom and in

the workplace related to copyrights, patents, and trademarks.

See also plagiarism and visuals.

Copyrights Copyright establishes legal protection for original works of

authorship, including literary, dramatic, musical, artistic, and

other intellectual works in printed or electronic form; it gives

the copyright owner exclusive rights to reproduce, distribute,

perform, or display a work. Copyright protects all original

works of authorship from the moment of their creation,

regardless of whether they are published or contain a notice of

copyright (©).

ETHICS NOTE

If you plan to reproduce copyrighted material in your own publication or on your Web site, you must obtain permission from the copyright holder unless one of the following exceptions applies. To do otherwise is a violation of U.S. law.

Permissions To seek permission to reproduce copyrighted material, you

must contact the copyright holder. In some cases, it is the

278

author; in other cases, it is the publisher of the work. For Web

sites, read the site’s “terms-of-use” information (if available),

and e-mail your request to the appropriate party. State

specifically which portion of the work you wish to reproduce

and how you plan to use it. The copyright holder has the right to

charge a fee and specify conditions and limits of use.

Exceptions Some material — including text, visuals, and digital forms —

may be reproduced without permission. The rules governing

copyright can be complex, so it is prudent to carefully check the

copyright status of anything you plan to reproduce.

Fair use. A small amount of material from a copyrighted source may be used for educational purposes (such as classroom handouts), commentary, criticism, news reporting, and scholarly reports without permission or payment as long as the use satisfies the “fair-use” criteria, as described at the U.S. Copyright Office Web site, www.copyright.gov. Whether a particular use qualifies as fair use depends on all the circumstances. Company boilerplate. In the workplace, employees often borrow material freely from in-house manuals and reports, as well as other company documents, to save time and ensure consistency. Using such “boilerplate,” or “repurposed,” material is not a copyright violation because the company is considered the author of works prepared by its employees on the job. See also repurposing. Public domain material. Works created by or for the U.S.

279

government and not classified or otherwise protected are in the public domain — that is, they are not copyrighted. The same is true for older written works when their copyright has lapsed or never existed. Be aware that some otherwise public domain works may include “value-added” features — such as introductions, visuals, and indexes — that may be copyrighted separately from the original work and thus may require permission. Copyleft Web material. Some public access Web sites, such as Wikipedia, follow the “copyleft” principle and grant permission to freely copy, distribute, or modify material so long as the modified material is also made freely available on the same basis.

ETHICS NOTE

The Internet has changed the face of copyright, creating an illusion of universal access to online material, when in fact permission is often required to alter or use it in any way. Alternative forms of permissions — like those offered by Creative Commons — allow users to freely incorporate specific content into their documents and to license their own original content. Still, even when you use material that may be reproduced or published without permission, you must give appropriate credit to the source from which the material was taken, as described in documenting sources and plagiarism.

Patents The United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) defines

a patent as an intellectual property right granted by the U.S.

1

280

government to an inventor for a limited time in exchange for

public disclosure of the invention when the patent is granted.

U.S. patents differ from copyright in that they protect

inventions rather than written, musical, and artistic works.

The USPTO grants three types of patents.

Design patents cover the invention of new designs for manufactured items (for example, a design for a mobile phone, desk chair, or car hood) and are valid for fourteen years. Plant patents cover inventions for new plant varieties (for example, an ornamental shrub or a disease-resistant orange tree) and are valid for twenty years. Utility patents cover inventions of machinery, manufacturing processes, or new materials (for example, a personal three-dimensional printer, composite material for a car bumper, or a technique to mine the seabed for minerals) and are valid for twenty years.

To obtain information about international patents, links to

patent offices around the world, and tutorials on patent laws in

different countries and regions, visit the global online patent

resource the Lens at www.lens.org.

Trademarks A trademark is a word, phrase, graphic symbol, logo, or some

other device that identifies and distinguishes the goods of one

merchant or manufacturer from those of others. The two

281

primary marks are trademarks and service marks.

Trademarks identify physical commodities (automobiles, computers, shoes) distributed through interstate commerce. Service marks identify services (the preparation and sale of food, the provision of transportation or lodging, the sale of life or health insurance).

The term trademark is often used to refer to both trademarks

and service marks.

Trademarks for goods and services registered with the

USPTO include the ® symbol or the phrase “Reg. U.S. Pat. & TM

off.” The phrase “Patent Pending” on a manufactured item

means that the inventor has applied for a patent on the item.

Before trademarks are registered with the USPTO, service

providers commonly use the superscript symbol SM.

Trademark names must be capitalized. When citing a

trademark, include the superscript trademark symbol ® if it’s

used in the trademark name.

2

282

FIGURE C–11. Sample Trademarks

To obtain additional information about patents and

trademarks, go to the FAQ page of the U.S. Patent and

Trademark Office Web site at www.uspto.gov/learning-and-

resources/general-faqs.

“Copyleft” is a play on the word copyright and is the effort to free materials from many of the restrictions of copyright. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Copyleft.

The USPTO registers other less frequently used types of marks that have different registration requirements than trademarks and service marks: certification marks, collective marks, collective trademarks, and collective service marks. These are described at www.uspto.gov.

1

2

283

correspondence DIRECTORY

Audience and Writing Style Openings and Closings Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint Writer’s Checklist: Using Tone to Build Goodwill Direct and Indirect Patterns Clarity and Emphasis Writer’s Checklist: Correspondence and Accuracy

Correspondence in the workplace — whether through e-mail,

letters, memos, or another medium — requires many of the

steps described in “Five Steps to Successful Writing.” As you

prepare even a simple e-mail, for example, you might study

previous messages (research) and then list or arrange the

points you wish to cover (organization) in an order that is

logical for your readers. See also selecting the medium.

Corresponding with others in the workplace also requires

that you focus on both establishing and maintaining a positive

working relationship with your readers and conveying a

professional image of yourself and your organization. See also

audience.

Audience and Writing Style Effective correspondence uses an appropriate conversational

284

style. To achieve that style, imagine your reader sitting across from you and write to the reader as if you were talking face to

face. Take into account your reader’s needs and feelings. Ask

yourself, “How might I feel if I received this letter or e-mail?”

and then tailor your message accordingly. Remember, an

impersonal and unfriendly message to a customer or client can

tarnish the image of you and your business, but a thoughtful

and sincere one can enhance it.

Whether you use a formal or an informal writing style

depends entirely on your reader and your purpose. You might

use an informal (or casual) style, for example, with a colleague

you know well and a formal (or restrained) style with a client

you have not met.

CASUAL It worked! The new process is better than we had dreamed.

RESTRAINED You will be pleased to know that the new process is more effective than we expected.

You will probably find yourself using the restrained style more

frequently than the casual style. Remember that an overdone

attempt to sound casual or friendly can sound insincere.

However, do not adopt so formal a style that your writing reads

like a legal contract. Affectation not only will irritate and baffle

readers but also can waste time and produce costly errors.

AFFECTED Per yesterday’s discussion, we no longer possess an original copy of the brochure requested. Please be advised that a PDF copy is attached herewith to this e-mail.

IMPROVED We are out of printed copies of the brochure we discussed yesterday, so I am attaching a PDF copy to this e-mail.

285

The improved version is not only clearer and less stuffy but also

more concise. See also business writing style and conciseness.

Openings and Closings The opening of any correspondence should identify the subject

and often the main point of the message.

► Attached is the final installation report, which I hope you can review by Monday, December 14. You will notice that the report includes . . .

When your reader is not familiar with the subject or

background of a problem, you may provide an introductory

paragraph before stating the main point of the message. Doing

so is especially important in correspondence that will serve as a

record of crucial information. Generally, long or complex

subjects benefit most from more thorough introductions.

However, even when you are writing a short message about a

familiar subject, remind readers of the context. In the following

example, words that provide context are shown in italics.

► As Maria recommended, I reviewed the office reorganization plan. I like most of the features; however, the location of the receptionist and assistant . . .

Do not state the main point first when (1) readers are likely to

be highly skeptical or (2) key readers, such as managers or

clients, may disagree with your position. In those cases, a more

286

persuasive tactic is to state the problem or issue first, then

present the specific points supporting your final

recommendation, as is discussed under the heading “indirect

pattern” (page 114). See also persuasion.

Your closing can accomplish many important tasks, such as

building positive relationships with readers, encouraging

colleagues and employees, letting recipients know what you will

do or what you expect of them, and stating any assignment

deadlines.

► I will discuss the problem with the marketing consultant and let you know by Wednesday (August 5) what we are able to change.

Routine statements are sometimes unavoidable. (“If you have

further questions, please let me know.”) However, try to make

your closing work for you by providing specific prompts to

which the reader can respond. See also conclusions.

► Thanks again for the report, and let me know if you want me to send you a copy of the test results.

Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint Write concisely, but do not be so blunt that you risk losing the

reader’s goodwill. Responding to a vague written request with

“Your request was unclear” or “I don’t understand” could offend

287

your reader. Instead, establish goodwill to encourage your

reader to provide the information you need.

► I will be glad to help, but I need additional information to locate the report you requested. Specifically, can you give me the report’s title, release date, or number?

Although this version is a bit longer, it is more tactful and will

elicit a helpful response. See also telegraphic style.

You can also build goodwill by emphasizing the reader’s

needs or benefits. Suppose you received a refund request from

a customer who forgot to include the receipt with the request.

In a response to that customer, you might write the following:

WEAK We must receive the sales receipt before we can process a refund. [The writer’s needs are emphasized: “We must.”]

If you consider how to keep the customer’s goodwill, you could

word the request this way:

IMPROVED Please send the sales receipt so that we can process your refund. [Although polite, the sentence still focuses on the writer’s needs: “so that we can process.”]

You can put the reader’s needs and interests foremost by

writing from the reader’s perspective. Often, doing so means

using the words you and your rather than we, our, I, and mine

— a technique called the “you” viewpoint. Consider the

following revision:

288

EFFECTIVE So that you can receive your refund promptly, please mail or fax the sales receipt. [The reader’s needs are emphasized with you and your.]

This revision stresses the reader’s benefit and interest. By

emphasizing the reader’s needs, the writer will be more likely to

accomplish the purpose: to get the reader to act. See also

positive writing.

If overdone, however, goodwill and the “you” viewpoint can

produce writing that is fawning and insincere. Messages that

are full of excessive praise and inflated language may be

ignored — or even resented — by the reader.

EXCESSIVE PRAISE

You are just the kind of astute client that deserves the finest service that we can offer — and you deserve our best deal. Understanding how carefully you make decisions, I know you’ll think about the advantages of using our consulting service.

REASONABLE From our earlier correspondence, I understand your need for reliable service. We strive to give all our priority clients our full attention, and after you have reviewed our proposal, I am confident you will appreciate our “five-star” consulting option.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Tone to Build Goodwill Use the following guidelines to achieve a tone that builds goodwill with your recipients.

✓ Be respectful, not demanding.

DEMANDING Submit your answer in one week.

RESPECTFUL I would appreciate your answer within one week.

✓ Be modest, not arrogant.

289

ARROGANT My attached report is thorough, and I’m sure that you won’t be able to continue without it.

MODEST The attached report contains details of the refinancing options that I hope you will find useful.

✓ Be polite, not sarcastic.

SARCASTIC I just now received the shipment we ordered six months ago. I’m sending it back — we can’t use it now. Thanks a lot!

POLITE I am returning the shipment we ordered on March 12. Unfortunately, it arrived too late for us to be able to use it.

✓ Be positive and tactful, not negative and condescending.

NEGATIVE Your complaint about our prices is way off target. Our prices are definitely not any higher than those of our competitors.

TACTFUL Thank you for your suggestion concerning our prices. We believe, however, that our prices are comparable to those of our competitors.

Direct and Indirect Patterns Direct Pattern The direct pattern is effective in workplace correspondence

because readers appreciate messages that get to the main point

quickly. The direct pattern shown in the following list also

accomplishes the goals described on pages 110–11.

1. Main point of message 2. Explanation of facts or details 3. Goodwill closing

The direct pattern is especially appropriate for presenting good

news, as shown in Figure C–12. This message presents the good

290

news in the opening (the main point), follows with an

explanation of the facts, and closes by looking toward the future

(goodwill). The direct pattern may also be appropriate for

negative messages in situations where little is at stake for the

writer or reader and the reasons for the negative message are

relatively unimportant.

FIGURE C–12. A Direct-Pattern Message (Good News)

► Dear Mr. Coleman: We do not have the part you requested currently in stock,

but we hope to have it within the next month. Our supplier,

who has been reliable in the past, assures us that the

manufacturer that produces those parts will be able . . .

[Continues with details and goodwill closing.]

291

Indirect Pattern The indirect pattern delays stating the main point and may be

effective when you need to present especially sensitive or

negative messages. Research has shown that people form their

impressions and attitudes very early when reading

correspondence. For this reason, presenting bad news, refusals,

or sensitive messages indirectly is often more effective than

presenting negative information directly, especially if the stakes

are high. See also refusal letters.

As with any type of writing, imagine how your audience will

react to your message. Consider the thoughtlessness in the job

rejection that follows:

► Dear Ms. Mauer: Your application for the position of Records Administrator

at Southtown Dental Center has been rejected. We found

someone more qualified than you.

Sincerely,

Although the message is concise and uses the pronouns you and

your, the writer has not considered how the recipient will feel

as she reads the message. The message is, in short, rude. The

pattern of this message is (1) bad news, (2) curt explanation, (3)

close.

The indirect pattern for such bad-news correspondence

allows the explanation or details to lead logically and tactfully to

3

292

the negative message, as in the following pattern:

1. Context of message 2. Explanation or details 3. Bad news or negative message 4. Goodwill closing

The opening (traditionally called a “buffer”) should provide a

context for the subject and establish a professional tone.

However, it must not mislead the reader to believe that good

news may follow, and it must not contain irrelevant

information.

The body should provide an explanation by reviewing the

details or facts that led to the negative decision or refusal. Give

the negative message simply, based on the facts; do not belabor

the bad news or provide an inappropriate apology. Neither the

details nor an overdone apology can turn bad news into

something positive. Your goal should be to establish for the

reader that the writer or organization has been reasonable

given the circumstances. To accomplish this goal, you need to

organize the explanation carefully and logically.

The closing should establish or reestablish a positive

relationship through goodwill or helpful information. Consider,

for example, the revised bad-news message, shown in Figure C–

13. This message carries the same disappointing news as the

message in the preceding example, but the writer of this

message begins by not only introducing the subject but also

4

293

thanking the reader for her time and effort. Then the writer

explains why Ms. Mauer was not accepted for the job and offers

her encouragement by looking toward a potential future

opportunity. Bad news is never pleasant; however, information

that either puts the bad news in perspective or makes the bad

news reasonable maintains respect between the writer and the

reader. The goodwill closing reestablishes an amicable

professional relationship.

FIGURE C–13. A Courteous Indirect-Pattern Message (Bad News)

The indirect pattern can also be used in relatively short e-

mail messages and memos. Consider the unintended secondary

message a manager conveys in the following notice:

WEAK It has been decided that the office will be open the day after Thanksgiving.

“It has been decided” not only sounds impersonal but also

294

communicates an authoritarian, management-versus-employee

tone. The passive voice also suggests that the decision maker

does not want to say “I have decided” and thus accept

responsibility for the decision. One solution is to remove the

first part of the sentence.

IMPROVED The office will be open the day after Thanksgiving.

The best solution, however, would be to suggest that there is a

good reason for the decision and that employees are privy to (if

not a part of) the decision-making process.

EFFECTIVE Because we must meet the December 15 deadline for submitting the Bradley Foundation proposal, the office will be open the day after Thanksgiving.

By describing the context of the bad news first (the need to meet

the deadline), the writer focuses on the reasoning behind the

decision to work. Employees may not necessarily like the

message, but they will at least understand that the decision is

not arbitrary and is tied to an important deadline.

Clarity and Emphasis A clear message is one that is adequately developed and

emphasizes your main points. The following example illustrates

how adequate development is crucial to the clarity of your

message.

VAGUE Be more careful on the loading dock.

DEVELOPED To prevent accidents on the loading dock, follow these

295

procedures:

1. Check to make sure . . . 2. Load only items that are rated . . . 3. Replace any defective parts . . .

Although the first version is concise, it is not as clear and

specific as the “developed” revision. Do not assume your

readers will know what you mean: vague messages are easily

misinterpreted.

Lists Vertically stacked words, phrases, and other items

distinguished with numbers or bullets can effectively highlight

such information as steps in sequence, materials or parts

needed, key or concluding points, and recommendations. As

described in lists, provide context and be careful not to overuse

lists. A message that consists almost entirely of lists is difficult

to understand because it forces readers to connect separate and

disjointed items. Further, lists lose their impact when they are

overused.

Headings Headings are particularly useful because they call attention to

main topics, divide material into manageable segments, and

signal a shift in subject. Readers can scan the headings and read

only the section or sections appropriate to their needs.

Subject Lines Subject lines for e-mails, memos, and some letters announce

296

the topic and focus of the correspondence. Because they also

aid filing and later retrieval, they should be specific and

accurate.

VAGUE Subject: Tuition Reimbursement

VAGUE Subject: Time-Management Seminar

SPECIFIC Subject: Tuition Reimbursement for Time-Management Seminar

Capitalize all major words in a subject line. Lowercase articles,

prepositions, and conjunctions with fewer than five letters

unless they are the first or last words. Remember that the

subject line should not substitute for an opening that provides

context for the message. See also titles.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Correspondence and Accuracy

✓ Begin by establishing your purpose, analyzing your reader’s needs, determining your scope, and considering the context.

✓ Prepare an outline, even if it is only a list of points to be covered in the order you want to cover them. (See outlining.)

✓ Write the first draft. (See writing a draft.) ✓ Allow for a cooling-off period prior to revision or seek a

colleague’s advice, especially for correspondence that addresses a problem.

✓ Revise the draft, checking for key problems in clarity and coherence.

✓ Use the appropriate or standard format for letters, memos, and so forth.

✓ Check for accuracy: make sure that all facts, figures, and dates are

297

correct. ✓ Use effective proofreading techniques to check your

punctuation, grammar, spelling, and appropriate usage. ✓ Consider who should receive a copy of the message and in what

order the names or e-mail addresses should be listed (alphabetize if rank does not apply).

✓ Remember that when you send a message or sign a letter, you are accepting responsibility for it.

Alred, G. J. (1993). “We regret to inform you”: Toward a new theory of negative messages. In B. R. Sims (Ed.), Studies in technical communication (pp. 17–36). Urbana, IL: U of North Texas & NCTE.

Locker, K. O. (1999). Factors in reader responses to negative letters: Experimental evidence for changing what we teach. Journal of Business and Technical

Communication, 13(1), 29.

3

4

298

cover messages (or transmittals) A cover e-mail, memo, or letter accompanies a document (such

as a proposal), a digitial file, or other material. It identifies an

item that is being sent, the person to whom it is being sent, the

reason that it is being sent, and any content that should be

highlighted for readers. (See purpose.) A cover message (or

transmittal) provides a permanent record for both the writer

and the reader. For cover messages accompanying résumés,

see application cover letters.

The cover message shown in Figure C–14 is concise, but it

also includes such details as how the information for the report

was gathered.

299

FIGURE C–14. Cover Message

300

credible / creditable Something is credible if it is believable. (“The statistics in this

report are credible.”) Something is creditable if it is worthy of

praise or credit. (“The accountant did a creditable job.”)

301

critique A critique is a written or an oral evaluation of something. Avoid

using critique as a verb meaning “criticize.”

302

D

303

dangling modifiers Phrases that do not clearly and logically refer to the correct

noun or pronoun are called dangling modifiers. Dangling

modifiers usually appear at the beginning of a sentence as an

introductory phrase.

DANGLING While eating lunch, the computer malfunctioned. [Who was eating lunch?]

CORRECT While I was eating lunch, the computer malfunctioned.

Dangling modifiers can appear at the end of the sentence as

well.

DANGLING The program gains efficiency by eliminating the superfluous coding. [Who eliminates the superfluous coding?]

CORRECT The program gains efficiency when you eliminate the superfluous coding.

To correct a dangling modifier, add the appropriate subject to

either the dangling modifier or the main clause.

DANGLING After finishing the research, the proposal was easy to write. [The appropriate subject is I, but it is not stated in either the dangling phrase or the main clause.]

CORRECT After I finished the research, the proposal was easy to write. [The pronoun I is now the subject of an introductory clause.]

CORRECT After finishing the research, I found the proposal easy to write. [The pronoun I is now the subject of the main clause.]

For a discussion of misplaced modifiers, see modifiers.

304

dashes The em dash (—), usually called just the “dash,” can perform all

the punctuation duties of linking, separating, and enclosing.

The dash is indicated by two consecutive hyphens that may

auto-correct to a dash, depending on the program settings.

Use the dash cautiously to indicate more emphasis,

informality, or abruptness than the other punctuation marks

would show. A dash can emphasize a sharp turn in thought.

► The project will end May 13—unless we receive additional funding.

A dash can indicate an emphatic pause.

► The project will begin—after we are under contract.

Sometimes, to emphasize contrast, a dash is used with but.

► We completed the survey quickly—but the results were not accurate.

A dash can be used before a final summarizing statement or

before repetition that has the effect of an afterthought.

► It was hot near the heat-treating ovens—steaming hot.

Such a statement may also complete the meaning of the clause

preceding the dash.

1

305

► We try to write as we speak—or so we believe.

Dashes set off parenthetical elements more sharply and

emphatically than commas do. Unlike dashes, parentheses

tend to deemphasize what they enclose. Compare the following

sentences:

► Only one person—the president—can authorize such activity.

► Only one person, the president, can authorize such activity.

► Only one person (the president) can authorize such activity.

Dashes can be used to set off parenthetical elements that

contain commas. The first word after a dash is capitalized only

if it is a proper noun.

► Three of the applicants—John Evans, Rosalita Fontiana, and Kyong-Shik Choi—seem well qualified for the job.

The dash can also indicate the omission of letters. (“Mr. A—

admitted his error.”)

Another type of dash is the en dash (–), which is used

between letters and numbers to indicate to or through (pages

84–92, the years 2015–2018, the letters A–Z, the Detroit–Toledo

Expressway).

In publishing and HTML coding, the term em dash and other terms or codes are often used for dashes, hyphens, and related special characters. For detailed

1

306

discussions, see The Chicago Manual of Style, Seventeenth Edition (sections 6.75–

6.94), or a reputable HTML guide, such as the Web Style Guide, Fourth Edition (Yale University Press, 2016).

307

data In formal and scholarly writing, data is generally used as a

plural, with datum as the singular form. In much informal

writing, however, data is considered a collective singular noun.

Base your usage on whether your readers are likely to consider

the data as a single collection or as a group of individual facts.

Whatever you use, be sure that your pronouns and verbs agree

in number with the selected usage. See also agreement.

► These data are persuasive. They indicate a need for additional research questions. [formal]

► The attached data is confidential. It is the result of a survey of employee records. [less formal]

308

dates In the United States, full dates are generally written in the

month-day-year format, with a comma preceding and following

the year.

► November 30, 2025, is the payoff date.

Do not use commas in the day-month-year format, which is

used in many parts of the world and by the U.S. military.

► Note that 30 November 2025 is the payoff date.

No commas are used when showing only the month-year or

month-day in a date.

► The target date of May 2020 is optimistic, so I would like to meet on March 4 to discuss our options.

When writing days of the month without the year, use the

cardinal number (“March 4”) rather than the ordinal number

(“March 4th”). Of course, in speech or presentations, use the

ordinal number (“March fourth”).

Avoid the strictly numerical form for dates (11/6/18) because

the date is not always immediately clear, especially in

international correspondence. In many countries, 11/6/18

means June 11, 2018, rather than November 6, 2018. Writing out

the name of the month makes the entire date immediately clear

to all readers.

309

Centuries often cause confusion with numbers because their

spelled-out forms, which are not capitalized, do not correspond

to their numeral designations. The twentieth century, for

example, is the 1900s: 1900–1999.

When the century is used as a noun, do not use a hyphen

between the number and the word century.

► During the twenty-first century, technology transformed business practices.

When the centuries are written as adjectives, however, use

hyphens.

► Twenty-first-century technology relies on innovation.

310

de facto / de jure De facto means that something exists or is a fact and therefore

is accepted for practical purposes. De jure means that

something legally exists.

► The law states that no signs should be erected along Highway 127. Storeowners have disregarded that law, and many signs exist along Highway 127. The presence of the signs along Highway 127 is de facto but not de jure—their presence is “a fact,” but it is not “lawful.”

Limit the use of Latin and legal terms because they can easily

become an affectation.

311

defective / deficient If something is defective, it is faulty. (“The wiring was

defective.”) If something is deficient, it is lacking or is

incomplete in an essential component. (“The firm was deficient

in meeting its legal obligations.”)

312

defining terms Defining key terms and concepts is often essential for clarity.

Terms can be defined either formally or informally, depending

on your purpose, your audience, and the context.

A formal definition is a form of classification. You define a

term by placing it in a category and then identifying the

features that distinguish it from other members of the same

category.

TERM CATEGORY DISTINGUISHING FEATURES

An auction is

a public sale

in which property passes to the highest bidder through successively increased offers.

An informal definition explains a term by giving a more

familiar word or phrase as a synonym.

► Businesses can have symbiotic, or mutually beneficial, relationships with their competitors and partners.

State definitions positively; focus on what the term is rather

than what it is not.

NEGATIVE In a legal transaction, real property is not personal property.

POSITIVE Real property is legal terminology for the right or interest a person has in land and the permanent structures on that land.

For a discussion of when negative definitions are appropriate,

see definition method of development.

313

Avoid circular definitions, which merely restate the term to

be defined.

CIRCULAR Spontaneous combustion is fire that begins spontaneously.

REVISED Spontaneous combustion is the self-ignition of a flammable material through a chemical reaction.

In addition, avoid “is when” and “is where” definitions. Such

definitions fail to include the category and are too indirect.

314

definite / definitive Definite and definitive both apply to what is precisely defined,

but definitive more often refers to what is complete and

authoritative. (“Once we receive a definite proposal, our

attorney can provide a definitive legal opinion.”)

315

definition method of development Definition is often essential to clarity and accuracy. Although

defining terms may be sufficient, sometimes definitions need

to be expanded through (1) extended definition, (2) definition

by analogy, (3) definition by cause, (4) definition by

components, (5) definition by exploration of origin, and (6)

negative definition. See also methods of development.

Extended Definition When you need more than a simple definition to explain an

idea, use an extended definition, which explores a number of

qualities of the item being defined. How an extended definition

is developed depends on your audience and on the complexity

of the subject. Readers familiar with a topic might be able to

handle a long, fairly complex definition, whereas readers less

familiar with a topic might require simpler language and more

basic information.

The easiest way to give an extended definition is with specific

examples. Examples give readers easy-to-picture details that

help them see and thus understand the term being defined.

► Form, which is the shape of landscape features, can best be represented both by small-scale features, such as trees and shrubs, and by large-scale elements, such as mountains

316

and mountain ranges.

Definition by Analogy An analogy can help a nonspecialist understand an unfamiliar

term by showing its similarities with a more familiar term. In

the following description of “management by objective,” notice

how the writer develops an analogy to make a point.

► Management by objective has been quite popular, but the key to its success is carefully selecting objectives. Think, for example, of a golfer who wishes to improve by hitting the ball farther. Every decision the golfer makes is governed by that goal—hitting the ball as far as possible. The golfer is thus managing the game by objective. However, the golfer is shortsighted because golf is as much a game of accuracy as it is of hitting balls for distance. In fact, some of the decisions the golfer makes to hit the ball farther might well be counterproductive to achieving the larger goal of obtaining the lowest possible score. Likewise, when a company decides to use a management-by-objective strategy, it must be certain that the objective is appropriate for achieving the desired results.

Definition by Cause Some terms are best defined by an explanation of their causes,

as the following explanation of the term stagflation illustrates.

► Traditional economic theory says that a decline in business activity and employment causes the rate of inflation to

317

decrease. However, in the 1970s, because of massive increases in energy prices, the economy stagnated while higher energy prices worked their way into the cost of virtually everything, and the currency inflated. To describe that condition, economist Paul Samuelson coined the term stagflation.

Definition by Components Sometimes a formal definition of a concept can be made

simpler by breaking the concept into its component parts. In

the following example, the formal definition of fire is given in

the first paragraph, and the component parts are given in the

second.

FORMAL DEFINITION

Fire is the visible heat energy released from the rapid oxidation of a fuel. A substance is “on fire” when the release of heat energy from the oxidation process reaches visible light levels.

COMPONENT PARTS

The classic fire triangle illustrates the elements necessary to create fire: oxygen, heat, and burnable material (fuel). Air provides sufficient oxygen for combustion; the intensity of the heat needed to start a fire depends on the characteristics of the burnable material. A burnable substance is one that will sustain combustion after an initial application of heat to start the combustion.

Definition by Exploration of Origin Under certain circumstances, the meaning of a term can be

clarified and made easier to remember by an exploration of its

origin. Medical terms, because of their sometimes unfamiliar

Greek and Latin roots, especially benefit from an explanation of

318

this type. Tracing the derivation of a word can also be useful

when you want to explain why a word has favorable or

unfavorable associations, particularly if your goal is to

influence your reader’s attitude toward an idea or activity. See

also persuasion.

► Efforts to influence legislation generally fall under the head of lobbying, a term that once referred to people who prowled the lobbies of houses of government, buttonholing lawmakers and trying to get them to take certain positions. Lobbying today is all of this, and much more, too. It is a respected—and necessary—activity. It tells the legislator which way the winds of public opinion are blowing, and it helps inform [legislators] of the implications of certain bills, debates, and resolutions [that they must face].

—Bill Vogt, How to Build a Better Outdoors

Negative Definition In some cases, it is useful to point out what something is not in

order to clarify what it is. A negative definition is effective only

when the reader is familiar with the item with which the

defined item is being contrasted. In a crane operator’s manual,

for instance, a negative definition is used to show that, for

safety reasons, a hydraulic crane cannot be operated in the

same manner as a lattice boom crane.

► A hydraulic crane is not like a lattice boom crane [a friction machine] in one very important way. In most cases, the

319

safe lifting capacity of a lattice boom crane is based on the weight needed to tip the machine. Therefore, operators of friction machines sometimes depend on signs that the machine might tip to warn them of impending danger. This practice is very dangerous with a hydraulic crane.

—Operator’s Manual (Model W-180), Harnischfeger

Corporation

320

description The key to effective description is the accurate presentation of

details, as in Figures D–1 and D–2. In Figure D–1, notice that the

simple description contained in the purchase order includes

five specific details (in addition to the part number), structured

logically.

FIGURE D–1. Simple Description

321

FIGURE D–2. Illustrated Description

SOURCE: Federal Emergency Management Agency, www.fema.gov.

Complex descriptions, of course, involve more details. In

describing a mechanical device, for example, describe the

whole device and its function before giving a detailed

description of how each part works. The description should

322

conclude with an explanation of how each part contributes to

the functioning of the whole.

In descriptions intended for an audience unfamiliar with the

topic, details are crucial. Details help readers visualize the

specifics of the new image, object, or idea that the writer wants

to convey. In the following description of a company’s

headquarters, notice the detailed discussion of colors, shapes,

and features. The writer assumes that the reader knows such

terms as colonial design and haiku fountain.

► Their company’s headquarters, which reminded me of a rural college campus, are located north of the city in a 90- acre lush, green wooded area. The complex consists of five three-story buildings of redbrick colonial design. The buildings are spaced about 50 feet apart and are built in a U- shape surrounding a reflection pool that frames a striking haiku fountain.

You can also use analogy, as described in figures of speech, to

explain unfamiliar concepts in terms of familiar ones, such as

“U-shape” in the previous example.

Visuals can be powerful aids in descriptive writing,

especially when they show features too intricate to explain

completely in words. The example in Figure D–2 on page 127

illustrates a storm-shutter installation that small businesses can

use to protect windows from windborne-debris damage. Note

that the description concentrates on the types of shutters

323

available and their function. The illustration, with call-outs

highlighting important features, largely eliminates the need for

extensive written details to describe their relationship to one

another and their function.

324

design (see layout and design)

325

differ from / differ with Differ from suggests that two things are not alike. (“Our earlier

proposal differs from the current one.”) Differ with indicates

disagreement between persons. (“The architect differed with

the contractor on the proposed site.”)

326

different from / different than In formal writing, the preposition from is used with different.

(“The product I received is different from the one I ordered.”)

Different than is used when it is followed by a clause. (“The

actual cost was different than we estimated in our proposal.”)

327

direct address Direct address refers to a sentence or phrase in which the

person being spoken or written to is explicitly named. It is often

used in presentations and in e-mail messages. Notice that the

person’s name in a direct address is set off by commas: (“Jane,

call me when you arrive.”)

328

discreet / discrete Discreet means “having or showing prudent or careful

behavior.” (“Because the matter was personal, he asked Bob to

be discreet.”) Discrete means something is “separate, distinct,

or individual.” (“Plans for the corporate headquarters include

five discrete buildings.”)

329

disinterested / uninterested Disinterested means “impartial, objective, unbiased.”

► Like good judges, researchers should be passionately interested in the problems they tackle but completely disinterested when they seek to solve those problems.

Uninterested means simply “not interested.”

► Despite Asha’s enthusiasm, her manager remained uninterested in the project.

330

division-and-classification method of development An effective method of development for a complex subject is

either to divide it into manageable parts and then discuss each

part separately (division) or to classify (or group) individual

parts into appropriate categories and then discuss each

category separately (classification). See also instructions and

process explanation.

Division You might use division to describe a physical object, such as the

parts of a copy machine; to examine an organization, such as a

company; or to explain the components of a system, such as the

Internet. The emphasis in division as a method of development

is on breaking down a complex whole into a number of like

units—it is easier to consider smaller units and to examine the

relationship of each to the other than to attempt to discuss the

whole. The basis for division depends, of course, on your

subject and your purpose.

If you were a financial planner describing the types of

mutual funds available to your investors, you could divide the

variety available into three broad categories: money-market

funds, bond funds, and stock funds. Such division would be

accurate, but it would be only a first-level grouping of a

complex whole. The three broad categories could, in turn, be

331

subdivided into additional groups based on investment strategy,

as follows:

MONEY-MARKET FUNDS

• Taxable money market • Tax-exempt money market

BOND FUNDS

• Taxable bonds • Balanced (mix of stocks and bonds)

• Tax-exempt bonds

STOCK FUNDS

• Balanced • International growth

• Equity income • Small capitalization

• Domestic growth • Aggressive growth

• Growth and income • Specialized

Specialized stock funds could be further subdivided as follows:

SPECIALIZED STOCK FUNDS

• Communications • Health services

• Energy • Technology

• Environmental services • Utilities

• Financial services • Worldwide capital goods

• Gold

Classification The process of classification is the grouping of a number of

units (such as people, objects, or ideas) into related categories.

Consider the following list:

triangular file steel tape ruler needle-nose pliers

vise pipe wrench keyhole saw

332

mallet tin snips C-clamps

rasp hacksaw plane

glass cutter ball-peen hammer steel square

spring clamp claw hammer utility knife

crescent wrench folding extension ruler slip-joint pliers

crosscut saw tack hammer utility scissors

To group the items in the list, you would first determine what

they have in common. The most obvious characteristic they

share is that they all belong in a carpenter’s tool chest. With that

starting point, you can begin to group the tools into related

categories. Pipe wrenches belong with slip-joint pliers because

both tools grip objects. The rasp and the plane belong with the

triangular file because all three tools smooth rough surfaces. By

applying this kind of thinking to all the items in the list, you can

group (classify) the tools according to function (Figure D–3).

333

FIGURE D–3. Classification (Tools Placed into Categories)

To classify a subject, you must first sort the individual items

into the largest number of comparable groups. For explaining

the functions of carpentry tools, the classifications (or groups)

334

in Figure D–3 (smoothing, hammering, measuring, gripping,

and cutting) are excellent. For recommending which tools a

new homeowner should buy first, however, those classifications

are not helpful—each group contains tools that a new

homeowner might want to purchase right away.

Once you have established the basis for the classification,

apply it consistently, putting each item in only one category.

For example, it might seem logical to classify needle-nose pliers

as both a tool that cuts and a tool that grips because most

needle-nose pliers have a small section for cutting wires.

However, the primary function of needle-nose pliers is to grip.

So listing them only under “tools that grip” would be consistent

with the basis used for listing the other tools.

335

document management Document management refers to processes and programs that

allow for the organized storage and quick retrieval of digital

documents. These procedures allow organizations to track a

document’s changes and contributors, and provide tools

designed to quickly locate a single document within a larger

archive. Unlike content-management systems designed to allow

for the easy creation, modification, and display of data within a

final document or Web site, document-management systems

are designed to keep track of the full life cycle of a single

document. See content management.

Document-Management Systems Various technologies exist to help organizations and individuals

manage their documents, and each system provides different

but overlapping capabilities:

Search tools. Many document-management programs, including those found on most personal computers, allow a document to be quickly located through a keyword search. These tools often rely on metadata to help locate the correct document quickly. “Metadata” refers to extra information that a writer includes with a document, such as a short description of the document, a series of keywords, the document’s collaborators, or information on the document’s purpose and relationship to a larger project. Workflow and version management. Document- management programs can simplify the workflow

336

necessary to move a draft to publication by tracking a document as it is edited and passed from employee to employee. In doing so, these systems automatically record changes to the document as progressing “versions,” complete with data on who made changes, when changes were made, and who is next responsible for working on the document. Some systems allow writers to temporarily check out, or lock, a document in order to prevent others from working with that document at the same time. Other systems automatically restrict access to specific documents or to all documents at specific points in the composing or revision process. Document capture and linking. Document-management systems can also house large collections of documents and related items, and allow documents (such as those related to a single project) to be easily linked together and categorized. For example, product photographs, competitor sales sheets, topical e-mails, and scanned magazine or journal articles can be stored with the document generated from that information.

Regardless of the tools or programs available within your

organization, consistency and ease of use are key to successful

document management. Take the time to carefully learn and

follow your organization’s best practices. See also adapting to

new technologies.

If your organization does not have a dedicated process or

program in place, consider implementing your own document-

337

management practices. For example, consistency in a file’s

name and placement within a folder hierarchy or document

group allows members of an organization to quickly locate the

latest version of a given document. When setting your

document’s filename and location, consider where it will

appear in an existing list of documents. Construct filenames

from left to right, beginning with the most general category and

ending with the most specific detail. For example, the

introduction to the second version of an annual report could be

named “AnnualReport-Introduction-2019-V2.pdf.” Since most

systems automatically store creation and revision dates, a

filename with substantial details allows for a specific document

to be found quickly through an electronic search or by scanning

a directory either alphabetically or chronologically.

338

documenting sources DIRECTORY

APA Documentation APA In-Text Citations APA Documentation Models APA Sample Pages

CMS Documentation CMS Footnotes and Endnotes CMS Documentation Models CMS Sample Pages

MLA Documentation MLA In-Text Citations MLA Documentation Models MLA Sample Pages

Documenting sources achieves three important purposes:

It allows readers to locate and consult the sources used and to find further information on the subject. It enables writers to support their assertions and arguments in such documents as proposals, reports, and trade journal articles. It helps writers give proper credit to others and thus avoid plagiarism by identifying the sources of facts, ideas, visuals, quotations, and paraphrases. See also paraphrasing.

This entry shows citation models and sample pages for three

339

principal documentation systems: American Psychological Association (APA), Chicago Manual of Style (CMS), and Modern

Language Association (MLA). The following examples compare

these three styles for citing a book by one author: Work Smarter

with LinkedIn by Alexandra Samuel, which was published in

2017 by Harvard Business Review in Boston, Massachusetts.

The APA system of citation is often used in the social sciences. It is referred to as an author-date method of documentation because parenthetical in-text citations and a reference list (at the end of the paper) in APA style emphasize the author(s) and date of publication so that the currency of the research is clear. The Chicago Manual of Style (CMS) is widely used in publishing and various academic specialties. It presents two systems of documentation: the notes and bibliography system and the author-date system. The author-date system uses in-text citations similar to those in MLA style (see page 135) and bibliography entries similar to those in APA style (except that the publication date is not given in parentheses). This text shows the notes and bibliography system, which uses the more traditional footnotes (at the bottom of the page) or endnotes (at the end of the document) and a bibliography.

340

The Chicago Manual of Style (CMS) offers two options:

1. A full bibliography with shortened footnotes (or endnotes) 2. A selected bibliography (most important works cited) with

footnotes providing full bibliographic information for all sources at first mention and shortened footnotes thereafter

341

The MLA system is used in literature and the humanities. MLA style uses parenthetical in-text citations and a list of works cited and places greater importance on the pages on which cited information can be found than on the publication date.

These systems are described in full detail in the following style

manuals:

Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. 6th ed., American Psychological Association, 2010. See also www.apastyle.org.

The Chicago Manual of Style. 17th ed., University of Chicago Press, 2010. See also www.chicagomanualofstyle.org.

MLA Handbook. 8th ed., Modern Language Association, 2016. See also www.mla.org/style.

See also bibliographies and research.

APA Documentation APA In-Text Citations Generally, cite the author or authors in a signal phrase (the

342

authors’ names plus an appropriate verb), with the publication

date in parentheses following the name(s). If you do not cite the

author(s) in a signal phrase, include a parenthetical citation

including the author’s (or authors’) surname(s) followed by the

publication date. Include a page reference for all quotations.

SIGNAL PHRASE Slade (2012) claims that “we look to machines to perform human functions: They provide communications, calculations, care, and company” (p. 9).

PARENTHETICAL CITATION

Technology that once remedied loneliness may now lead to feelings of seclusion and sadness (Slade, 2012).

When APA parenthetical citations are needed midsentence,

place them after the closing quotation marks and continue with

the rest of the sentence.

► In short, these “prosthetic substitutes” (Slade, 2012, p. 13) replace the flesh-and-blood friends in our lives.

If the APA parenthetical citation follows a block quotation,

place it after the final punctuation mark.

► . . . a close collaboration with the marketing staff and the development group is essential. (Thompson, 2010)

When a work has two authors, cite both names joined by the

word and in a signal phrase or an ampersand (&) in a

parenthetical citation:

► Barlett and Steele (2012) argue that . . . ► (Barlett & Steele, 2012)

343

For the first citation of a work with three, four, or five

authors, include all names. For subsequent citations and for

works with more than five authors, include only the last name

of the first author followed by “et al.” (not italicized and with a

period after “al.”). When two or more works by different

authors are cited in the same parentheses, list the citations

alphabetically and use semicolons to separate them: (Bartlett &

Steele, 2012; Dauch, 2012).

APA Documentation Models In reference lists, APA requires that the first word of book and

article titles and subtitles be capitalized and all other words—

except proper nouns (Einstein) and proper adjectives

(Cartesian, French)—be lowercased. In titles of periodicals,

capitalize all major words.

For online versions of books and articles, include retrieval

information at the end of the citation. If a DOI (digital object

identifier, a permanent code) is available, include that; if not,

include the URL. (No periods follow DOIs or URLs.) If no date is

available, use “(n.d.).” Include a retrieval date only if the

content could be changed later.

BOOKS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)

Single Author

Wheeler, A. (2012). Designing brand identity: An essential guide for the whole branding team. Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.

Kranich, N. (2004). The information commons. New York,

344

NY: Brennan Center for Justice. Retrieved from http://brennancenter.org/publication/information- commons

Multiple Authors

Kaye, B., & Giulioni, J. W. (2012). Help them grow or watch them go: Career conversations employees want. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler.

Corporate Author

Standard and Poor’s. (2012). Standard and Poor’s 500 guide. New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.

Edition Other Than First

Mongan, J., Giguere, E., & Kindler, N. (2013). Programming interviews exposed: Secrets to landing your next job (3rd ed.). Indianapolis, IN: Wiley.

Multivolume Work

Kozlowski, S. W. J. (Ed.). (2012). The Oxford handbook of organizational psychology (Vols. 1–2). New York, NY: Oxford University Press.

Work in an Edited Collection

Snider, L. (2013). The technological advantages of stock market traders. In S. Will, S. Handelman, & D. C. Brotherton (Eds.), How they got away with it: White collar criminals and the financial meltdown (pp. 151–

345

170). New York, NY: Columbia University Press.

Encyclopedia or Dictionary Entry

Satterwhite, M. (2014). Decision making. In Encyclopedia of business and finance (3rd ed., Vol. 1, pp. 202–203). Farmington Hills, MI: Macmillan Reference. Retrieved from http://go.galegroup.com/ps/i.do? p=GVRL&v=2.1&it=r&id=GALE%7CCX3727500091&asid=9ca00312919e3480a72e988bf3652b9b

ARTICLES IN PERIODICALS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)

Magazine Article

Paul, I. (2012, September). Spotify takes on Pandora. Macworld, 29(9), 71.

Haney, M. (2016, March). Boldly go: Space is cold, vast, empty, and deadly; here is how we’ll get there anyway. Wired, 24(3), 58–67. Retrieved from https://www.wired.com

Journal Article

Moriarty, J. (2010). Participation in the workplace: Are employees special? Journal of Business Ethics, 92(3), 373–384.

Boiral, O., Henri, J.-F., & Talbot, D. (2012). Modeling the impacts of corporate commitment on climate change. Business Strategy and the Environment, 21(8), 495–516. doi:10.1002/bse.723

Newspaper Article

346

Jones, R. (2012, December 4). Nations meet to discuss web rules. Wall Street Journal, p. B7.

Metz, Cade. (2017, August 16). Microsoft teaches autonomous gliders to make decisions on the fly. The New York Times. Retrieved from https://nyti.ms/2v0DSJc

Article with an Unknown Author

What sold, for how much, and why? (2009, Fall). Modern, 1(2), 22.

OTHER ELECTRONIC AND MULTIMEDIA SOURCES

Entire Web Site

Association for Business Communication. (2014). Retrieved from http://www.businesscommunication.org

Short Work from a Web Site, with an Author

Marshall, R. (2009, August 18). IBM bolsters green sensor portfolio. Retrieved from http://www.businessgreen.com/business- green/news/2248007/ibm-bolsters-smart-grid

Short Work from a Web Site, with a Corporate or an Organizational Author

General Motors. (2009). Company profile. Retrieved from http://www.gm.com/corporate/about/company.jsp

Short Work from a Web Site, with an Unknown Author

Women owned businesses. (2009, July 20). Retrieved from

347

http://www.sba.gov/business-guide/grow/women- owned-businesses-programs

E-mail Message

E-mail messages are not cited in an APA reference list.

They can be cited in the text as follows: “According to A.

Kalil (personal communication, January 12, 2014), Web

pages need to reflect . . .”

Online Messages and Posts (Lists, Forums, Discussion Boards)

Articles posted on Wikis and electronic discussion sources

—including text messages, postings to electronic mailing

lists, online forums, and discussion groups—are seldom

cited in formal publications because they are not

considered scholarly material. Authors may not be experts,

and authorship may be difficult to determine; versions may

vary over time; and sources may be difficult to retrieve. If

you do include one of these sources, provide the real name

of an author if given; otherwise, provide the screen name.

Follow the name with the date of the posting, the subject

line of the message, and any identifiers for the message in

brackets after the title. If the source is likely to change (as

with wikis), include a retrieval date.

Article Posted on a Wiki

Artificial neural network. (2017, September 3). Retrieved September 7, 2017, from https://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php? title=Artificial_neural_network&action=history

348

Online Forum Entry

Senior scholar. (2009, March 15). Re: Surviving the job search [Online forum comment]. Retrieved from http://chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.msg1221730.html#msg1221730

Blog Entry

Chang, J. (2009, August 17). Sharing with Google groups [Web log post]. Retrieved from http://googleblog.blogspot.com/2009/08/sharing-with- google-groups.html

Film or Video

Chiu, K. (2012, November 15). Trends in mobile gaming [Video file]. Retrieved from http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zPD1ZyrilNw

Radio or Television Program or Podcast

Winkler, A. (Producer). (2009, February 11). Battle brewing over electronic books [Radio program]. In All things considered. Retrieved from http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php? storyId=100584020

Bettag, T. (Producer). (2009, February 28). The fast lane [Television series episode]. In Koppel: People’s republic of capitalism. Washington, DC: Discovery Channel.

Hirsch, P. (2009, February 10). Write-downs [Video podcast]. In APM: Marketplace whiteboard. Retrieved from https://www.youtube.com/watch?

349

v=GEB1KgNUNQo

OTHER SOURCES

Published Interview

Barro, R. (2009, February 5). Interview by C. Clarke. Retrieved from http://www.theatlantic.com

Personal Communications

Personal communications such as lectures, letters,

interviews, and e-mail messages are generally not cited in

an APA reference list because they are not accessible to

others. Instead, you can cite them in the text.

According to Elizabeth Andersen (personal

communication, October 2, 2018), Web pages need to

reflect . . .

Brochure or Pamphlet

U.S. Department of the Interior, National Park Service. (2012). Historic preservation tax incentives [Brochure]. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.

Government Document

U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics. (2016). Highlights of women’s earnings in 2015. Retrieved from https://www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens- earnings/2015/home.htm

350

Report

World Bank. (2015, September 14). Global financial development report 2015/2016: Long-term finance. Retrieved from http://www.worldbank.org/en/publication/gfdr/report

APA Sample Pages

351

352

FIGURE D–4. APA Sample Page (from a Report)

353

354

FIGURE D–5. APA Sample List of References

CMS Documentation CMS Footnotes and Endnotes CMS footnote and endnote citations use superscript numerals in

the text with corresponding numbered footnotes (at the bottom

of the page where referenced) or endnotes (on a separate page

at the end of the paper). The CMS recommends footnotes for

the reader’s ease. However, if you have numerous long

footnotes that are difficult to fit on their respective pages,

consider using endnotes.

Place superscript numbers at the end of the summary,

paraphrase, quotation, or sentence, after the punctuation

marks. Indent the first line of the footnote or endnote entry half

an inch. Use the number (followed by a period) corresponding

to the number in the text, but do not make it superscript.

Include the author’s name (first name first); the title of the

source (in quotation marks for shorter works, such as article

titles, and in italics for longer works, such as books); the title (in

italics) of the longer work in which the source appeared (if any);

the city of publication and publisher (separated by a colon) and

the year of publication, enclosed in parentheses; page

number(s) of the passage cited; and the URL (if the cited work is

digital), all separated by commas.

355

► Holder’s memo was nonetheless written in the wake of a year of fairly vigorous prosecutions of companies that had committed crimes like theft, fraud, and market manipulation.

► 4. Matt Taibbi, The Divide: American Injustice in the Age of the Wealth Gap (New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2014), 47.

If the bibliography contains all the works cited in the notes,

or if the work has been cited in full previously, you may

abbreviate the note to eliminate duplication of information. Use

the author’s last name, a shortened version of the title (the first

few important words in the same order as the title), and the

page number(s) of the material cited.

► 4. Taibbi, Divide, 47.

The CMS recommends that references to online sources, in

addition to the usual content, also provide a URL, preferably a

URL that includes a digital object identifier (DOI, a permanent

code) or another permalink. If a direct link will not be

accessible to your readers, include the name of the database

through which you accessed the source. For online books, you

may include the URL, the name of the database, or the format

(such as Kindle), whichever is most likely to help readers locate

and assess the source. If the source is unpaginated or if it

repaginates in response to changes in the screen or font size,

include the section heading, chapter number (for example,

chap. 5), paragraph number (for example, para. 6, par. 6, or ¶6)

if available, or even a descriptive phrase, so readers can more

4

356

readily locate the section you refer to. If you cite an online

source with no publication or “last update” date, include an

access date in its place, immediately before the URL.

CMS Documentation Models BOOKS (PRINTED AND ELECTRONIC)

Single Author

1. Nassim Nicholas Taleb, Antifragile: Things That Gain

from Disorder (New York: Random House, 2012), 29.

Taleb, Nassim Nicholas. Antifragile: Things That Gain from Disorder. New York: Random House, 2012.

2. Willard Eugene Hotchkiss, Higher Education and

Business Standards (Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1918), chap.

2, http://gutenberg.org/ebooks/29674.

Hotchkiss, Willard Eugene. Higher Education and Business Standards. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin, 1918, http://gutenberg.org/ebooks/29674.

3. Peter W. Cardon, Business Communication:

Developing Leaders for a Networked World (New York:

McGraw-Hill, 2014), Kindle.

Cardon, Peter W. Business Communication: Developing Leaders for a Networked World. New York: McGraw- Hill, 2014. Kindle.

357

Two or Three Authors

4. Beverly Kaye and Julie Winkle Guilioni, Help Them

Grow or Watch Them Go: Career Conversations Employees

Want (San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler, 2012), 120.

Kaye, Beverly, and Julie Winkle Guilioni. Help Them Grow or Watch Them Go: Career Conversations Employees Want. San Francisco: Berrett-Koehler, 2012.

Four or More Authors

5. Bruce Jefferson et al., Urban Water Recycling:

Techniques and Applications (Burlington, MA:

Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013), 277.

Jefferson, Bruce, Paul Jeffrey, Claire Diaper, and James Crook. Urban Water Recycling: Techniques and Applications. Burlington, MA: Butterworth-Heinemann, 2013.

Multiple Books by Same Author

6. Suze Orman, Suze Orman’s 2009 Action Plan: Keeping

Your Money Safe and Sound (New York: Spiegel & Grau,

2009), 54.

7. Suze Orman, The Money Class: How to Stand in Your

Truth and Create the Future You Deserve (New York:

Spiegel & Grau, 2012), 212.

In the bibliography, list the works alphabetically by title.

Orman, Suze. The Money Class: How to Stand in Your

358

Truth and Create the Future You Deserve. New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2012.

———. Suze Orman’s 2009 Action Plan: Keeping Your Money Safe and Sound. New York: Spiegel & Grau, 2009.

Corporate Author

8. J. K. Lasser Institute, J. K. Lasser’s Your Income Tax

2010: For Preparing Your 2009 Tax Return (New York:

Wiley, 2009), 65.

J. K. Lasser Institute. J. K. Lasser’s Your Income Tax 2010: For Preparing Your 2009 Tax Return. New York: Wiley, 2009.

Edition Other Than First

9. James M. Kouzes and Barry Z. Posner, The Leadership

Challenge: How to Make Extraordinary Things Happen in

Organizations, 5th ed. (New York: Jossey-Bass, 2012), 17.

Kouzes, James M., and Barry Z. Posner. The Leadership Challenge: How to Make Extraordinary Things Happen in Organizations. 5th ed. New York: Jossey-Bass, 2012.

Multivolume Work

10. Standard and Poor’s, Standard and Poor’s Register of

Corporations, Directors, and Executives (New York:

Standard and Poor’s, 2010), 2:128.

Standard and Poor’s. Standard and Poor’s Register of Corporations, Directors, and Executives. 2 vols. New York: Standard and Poor’s, 2010.

359

Work in an Edited Collection

11. Laureen Snider, “The Technological Advantages of

Stock Market Traders,” in How They Got Away with It:

White Collar Criminals and the Financial Meltdown, ed.

Susan Will, Stephen Handelman, and David C. Brotherton

(New York: Columbia University Press, 2013), 155.

Snider, Laureen. “The Technological Advantages of Stock Market Traders.” In How They Got Away with It: White Collar Criminals and the Financial Meltdown, edited by Susan Will, Stephen Handelman, and David C. Brotherton, 151–70. New York: Columbia University Press, 2013.

Encyclopedia or Dictionary Entry

12. World Book Encyclopedia, 2007 ed., s.v. “particle

detector.”

13. Wikipedia, s.v. “Labor Theory of Value,” last

modified September 19, 2017, 21:08,

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Labor_theory_of_value.

Well-known reference books, such as encyclopedias and

dictionaries, are not included in the bibliography. The titles

of reference Web sites with no print counterpart, like

Wikipedia, are generally not italicized. For Web sites that

do not indicate when they were published or most recently

updated, include an access date. For sites that are updated

frequently (again, like Wikipedia), include the date the

entry was last modified along with a time stamp.

360

ARTICLES IN PERIODICALS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)

Magazine Article

14. Nathan Heller, “Mark as Read: What Do We Learn

When Our Private E-mail Becomes Public,” New Yorker,

July 24, 2017, 28–31.

Heller, Nathan. “Mark as Read: What Do We Learn When Our Private E-mail Becomes Public.” New Yorker, July 24, 2017, 28–31.

15. Mariette DiChristina, “Designing the City of

Tomorrow Today,” Scientific American, July 2017, 4,

http://www.scientificamerican.com/article/designing-the-

city-of-tomorrow-today/.

DiChristina, Mariette. “Designing the City of Tomorrow Today.” Scientific American, July 2017, 4. http://www.scientificamerican.com/article/designing- the-city-of-tomorrow-today/.

Journal Article

16. Jeffrey Moriarty, “Participation in the Workplace:

Are Employees Special?” Journal of Business Ethics 92, no.

3 (2010): 373.

Moriarty, Jeffrey. “Participation in the Workplace: Are Employees Special?” Journal of Business Ethics 92, no. 3 (2010): 373–84.

17. Honor J. Passow and Christian H. Passow, “What

361

Competencies Should Undergraduate Engineering Programs Emphasize? A Systematic Review,” Journal of

Engineering Education 106, no. 3 (2017): 475–526, Academic

Search Complete.

Passow, Honor J., and Christian H. Passow. “What Competencies Should Undergraduate Engineering Programs Emphasize? A Systematic Review.” Journal of Engineering Education 106, no. 3 (2017): 475–526. Academic Search Complete.

18. Oliver Boiral, Jean-François Henri, and David Talbot,

“Modeling the Impacts of Corporate Commitment on

Climate Change,” Business Strategy and the Environment

21, no. 8 (2012): 497, https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.723.

Boiral, Oliver, Jean-François Henri, and David Talbot. “Modeling the Impacts of Corporate Commitment on Climate Change.” Business Strategy and the Environment 21, no. 8 (2012): 495–516. https://doi.org/10.1002/bse.723.

Newspaper Article

19. Rory Jones, “Nations Meet to Discuss Web Rules,”

Wall Street Journal, December 4, 2012, sec. B.

20. Cade Metz, “Chips Off the Old Block: Computers Are

Taking Design Cues from Human Brains,” New York Times,

September 18, 2017, https://nyti.ms/2y5xcLS.

362

The CMS notes that newspaper articles are typically cited in

the text or notes, not in the bibliography. If a bibliography

entry were needed, however, it would look like this:

Metz, Cade. “Chips Off the Old Block: Computers Are Taking Design Cues from Human Brains.” New York Times, September 18, 2017. https://nyti.ms/2y5xcLS.

Article with an Unknown Author

21. “What Sold, for How Much, and Why?” Modern, Fall

2009, 22.

“What Sold, for How Much, and Why?” Modern, Fall 2009, 22.

OTHER ELECTRONIC SOURCES AND MULTIMEDIA SOURCES

Unlike online magazines and journals, less formally

published online sources, such as Web content (including

Web sites and Web pages, blogs, and social media), are

typically cited only in the text or notes. If a bibliography

entry is needed, begin with the author or site sponsor. (In a

note, the site sponsor follows the title of the Web site; in a

bibliography entry, if needed, the site sponsor appears in

the author position.) Include as much information as you

would for any other source, but be aware that full

bibliographic information may not be available. If readers

will not recognize the source type, include the relevant

label (Web site, blog) in parentheses following the title.

Titles of Web sites are not italicized. If a site is frequently

updated (as with a blog or a wiki), include a time stamp

363

along with the date last modified. If a blog is part of another publication, include that title as well. If you cite

comments on a blog post, include the date the comment

was posted following the name of the commenter. If an

author publishes under a pseudonym but you know the

writer’s actual name, you may include it following the

pseudonym in square brackets ([ ]).

Entire Web Site

22. Association for Business Communication (Web site),

accessed September 19, 2014,

http://www.businesscommunication.org.

Web sites are typically sited only in the notes. However, if a

bibliography entry is needed, it would look like this:

Association for Business Communication (Web site). Accessed September 19, 2014. http://www.businesscommunication.org.

Short Work from a Web Site, with an Author

23. Michael Calore, “Personalize Your Map with a

Custom Map Marker,” Webmonkey, October 7, 2010,

http://www.webmonkey.com/2010/10/personalize-your-

map-with-a-custom-map-marker.

Calore, Michael. “Personalize Your Map with a Custom Map Marker.” Webmonkey, October 7, 2010. http://www.webmonkey.com/2010/10/personalize-your- map-with-a-custom-map-marker.

364

Short Work from a Web Site, with a Corporate or an Organizational Author

24. “Global Diversity and Inclusion,” Microsoft, last

modified 2017, https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/diversity.

Microsoft. “Global Diversity and Inclusion.” Last modified 2017. https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/diversity.

Short Work from a Web Site, with an Unknown Author

25. “Women-Owned Business,” U.S. Small Business

Administration, last modified July 20, 2009,

http://www.sba.gov/business-guide/grow/women-owned-

businesses-programs.

U.S. Small Business Administration. “Women-Owned Business.” Last modified July 20, 2009. http://www.sba.gov/business-guide/grow/women- owned-businesses-programs.

Article Posted on a Wiki

26. “Labor Theory of Value,” Wikipedia, Wikimedia

Foundation, last modified September 19, 2017, 21:08,

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/labor_theory_of_value.

E-mail Message and Other Personal Communications

27. Ari Kalil, “Customer Satisfaction Survey,” e-mail

message to author, January 12, 2014.

E-mail messages and other personal communications, such

as letters and text messages, are usually cited in the text but

are omitted from bibliographies.

365

Online Posting (Lists, Forums, Discussion Boards)

28. Senior scholar, “Re: Surviving the Job Search,”

Chronicle Forums, Chronicle of Higher Education, March

15, 2009,

http://www.chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.msg1221730.html#msg1221730.

Blog Posts and Comments on Blog Posts

29. Barbara Brynko, “Weathering Turbulent Times,”

Infotoday Blog, November 30, 2009,

http://www.infotodayblog.com/2009/11/30/weathering-

turbulent-times.

Brynko, Barbara. “Weathering Turbulent Times.” Infotoday Blog, November 30, 2009. http://www.infotodayblog.com/2009/11/30/weathering- turbulent-times.

30. OllyPye [Lynne Forbes], December 12, 2015,

comment on Graham Readfern, “Paris Agreement a Victory

for Climate Change and Ultimate Defeat for Fossil Fuels,”

Planet Oz (blog), Guardian,

http://www.theguardian.com/environment/planet-

oz/2015/dec/12/paris-agreement-a-victory-for-climate-

science-and-ultimate-defeat-for-fossil-fuels#comments-

64993862.

OllyPye [Lynne Forbes]. December 12, 2015. Comment on Graham Readfern, “Paris Agreement a Victory for Climate Change and the Ultimate Defeat for Fossil Fuels.” Planet Oz (blog). Guardian.

366

http://www.theguardian.com/environment/planet- oz/2015/dec/12/paris-agreement-a-victory-for-climate- science-and-ultimate-defeat-for-fossil-fuels#comments- 64993862.

Film or Video

31. Ken Chiu, “Trends in Mobile Gaming,” China 2.0

Conference, Stanford Program on Regions of Innovations

and Entrepreneurship, September 28, 2012, Stanford CA,

video, 01:53, http://www.youtube.com/watch?

v=zPD1ZyrilNw.

Chiu, Ken. “Trends in Mobile Gaming.” China 2.0 Conference, September 28, 2012. Stanford Program on Regions of Innovations and Entrepreneurship, Stanford, CA. Video, 01:53. http://www.youtube.com/watch? v=zPD1ZyrilNw.

Radio or Television Program, or Podcast

32. “Dobbs Law,” Lou Dobbs Tonight, CNN, May 14,

2013.

“Dobbs Law.” Lou Dobbs Tonight. CNN. May 14, 2013.

33. Felix Salmon, Anna Szymanski, and Jordan

Weissman, “The Bad Eggs Edition,” episode 167, July 29,

2017, on Slate Money, produced by Daniel Schroeder,

podcast audio, 1:14:19,

http://www.slate.com/articles/podcasts/slate_money/2017/07/

anthony_scaramucci_productivity_and_hampton_creek_s_eggless_mayo

367

_on_slate.html.

Salmon, Felix, Anna Szymanski, and Jordan Weissman. “The Bad Eggs Edition.” Episode 167. Produced by Daniel Schroeder. Slate Money, July 29, 2017. Podcast audio, 1:14:19. http://www.slate.com/articles/podcasts/slate_money/2017/07/ anthony_scaramucci_productivity_and_hampton_creek_s_eggless_mayo_on _slate.html.

OTHER SOURCES

Visual from a Secondary Source

The CMS classifies visuals as tables and illustrations (such

as paintings, photographs, drawings, maps, and charts). If

a table or an illustration is under copyright, follow the

citation requirements of the copyright owner. If a table or

an illustration is not under copyright, include a source note

following the caption or directly under the illustration.

Include the artist or author (if known), the title of the work,

publication details including the copyright date, and any

original figure or table unnumber.

Source: Reproduced by permission of the publisher from Neil Lindeman, “Subjectivized Knowledge and Grassroots Advocacy: An Analysis of an Environmental Controversy in Northern California,” Journal of Business and Technical Communication 27, no. 1 (2014): 77, table 1, © 2014 by SAGE Publications.

Source: “Global Warming Effects” [map], National

368

Geographic, n.d., accessed October 2, 2014, http://green.nationalgeographic.com/environment/global- warming/gw-impacts-interactive.html.

If the illustration is cited in the bibliography, then you may

abbreviate the credit line in the source note.

Source: Table from Lindeman (2014).

Lindeman, Neil. “Subjectivized Knowledge and Grassroots Advocacy: An Analysis of an Environmental Controversy in Northern California.” Journal of Business and Technical Communication 27, no. 1 (2014): 77, table 1.

Published Interview

34. Robert Barro, “Interview with Robert Barro,”

interview by Conor Clarke, Atlantic, February 5, 2009,

https://www.theatlantic.com/politics/archive/2009/02/an-

interview-with-robert-barro/370/.

Barro, Robert. “Interview with Robert Barro.” By Conor Clarke. Atlantic, February 5, 2009. https://www.theatlantic.com/politics/archive/2009/02/an- interview-with-robert-barro/370/.

Personal Communications

35. Mahmood Sariolghalam, interview by the author,

January 29, 2010.

36. Monica Pascatore, text message to the author, April

10, 2017.

369

Personal communications are generally not included in

bibliographies.

Brochure or Pamphlet

37. Library of Congress, Copyright Basics, U.S. Copyright

Office, 2012, 4, https://www.copyright.gov/circs/circ01.pdf.

Library of Congress. Copyright Basics. U.S. Copyright Office, 2012. https://www.copyright.gov/circs/circ01.pdf.

Government Document

38. “Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015,” BLS

Reports, no. 1064, U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of

Labor Statistics, November 2016,

https://www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens-

earnings/2015/pdf/home.pdf.

“Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015,” BLS Reports. U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics. “Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015.” BLS Reports, no. 1064. November 2016. https://www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens- earnings/2015/pdf/home.pdf.

Report

39. World Development Report: Governance and the

Law, World Bank, 2017,

https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/25880.

World Bank. World Development Report: Governance and the Law. 2017.

370

https://openknowledge.worldbank.org/handle/10986/25880.

CMS Sample Pages

371

372

FIGURE D–6. CMS Sample Page (from a Report)

373

374

FIGURE D–7. CMS Sample Bibliography

MLA Documentation MLA In-Text Citations The MLA parenthetical citation within the text of a paper gives a

brief citation listing the author and relevant page number(s),

separated only by a space.

► Achieving results is one thing while maintaining results is another because “like marathon runners, companies hit a performance wall” (Studer 3).

When no author is named, provide a shortened title of the work

(the first noun and any modifiers) in parentheses.

► As Studer writes, the poor performance of a few employees will ultimately affect the performance—and the morale—of all employees (8).

If the author is cited in the text, include only the page

number(s) in parentheses. If no page reference is available, as

with a work from a Web site, use a paragraph or section

number if provided; do not create your own.

► In 1810, Peter Durand invented the can, which was later used to provide soldiers and explorers with canned rations and ultimately “saved legions from sure starvation” (“Forgotten Inventors”).

375

If the parenthetical citation refers to a long, indented quotation

(more than four lines when run in), set the quotation as a block

indented half an inch, and place the parenthetical citation

outside the punctuation of the last sentence.

► Frank Sprague, a naval officer and inventor, devised a new electric motor that transformed American subway systems:

[His engine] produced no sparks. It could operate at a

constant speed for long stretches, whether it was pulling 20

pounds, 200 pounds, or more. When Sprague’s idol and

mentor Thomas Edison visited the exhibition and saw

Sprague’s motor, he had one thing to say: “His is the only

true motor.” (“Forgotten Hero”)

If you are using more than one work by the same author, give a

shortened version of the title in the parenthetical citation unless

you name the title in the text (a “signal phrase”). A citation for

Quint Studer’s book Results That Last: Hardwiring Behaviors

That Will Take Your Company to the Top would appear as

(Studer, Results 93).

MLA Documentation Models The MLA Handbook, Eighth Edition, encourages writers to

think of citations as being made up of three core elements—the

author, the title of the source, and the “container” in which the

source appears. The container might be a magazine, a

newspaper, a journal, or an anthology. (Note: If the source is a

book, the source is self-contained, and the publication

376

information follows the title.) Follow each of these main

sections with a period. Other information that you should

include about the container includes the following:

names of the editors version or edition number number (volume and issue for a journal, volume number for a multivolume work) name of the publisher (omit business words or abbreviations, such as Company or Inc.) publication date location information (page unnumbers, URL, or DOI)

Follow each bit of information about the container with a

comma, except the last. End the citation with a period.

If a source appears in multiple containers, add information

about the second following that of the first. For example, if you

access an article in a journal via a database, the journal is

container 1, and the database is container 2; if you download a

selection from a book from an online database, the book is

container 1, and the database is container 2.

In the case of books, which are self-contained, follow the title

of the source with a period, then add the publication

information. MLA style no longer requires that you include the

city of publication.

BOOKS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)

377

Single Author

Wheeler, Alina. Designing Brand Identity: An Essential Guide for the Whole Branding Team. John Wiley and Sons, 2012.

Dolbear, A. E. The Machinery of the Universe: Mechanical Conceptions of Physical Phenomena. E. and J. B. Young, 1897. Project Gutenberg, www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/29444.

Multiple Authors

Kaye, Beverly, and Julie Winkle Giulioni. Help Them Grow or Watch Them Go: Career Conversations Employees Want. Berrett, 2012.

Corporate Author

Standard and Poor’s. Standard and Poor’s 500 Guide. McGraw-Hill Education, 2013.

Edition Other Than First

Mongan, John, Eric Giguere, and Noah Kindler. Programming Interviews Exposed: Secrets to Landing Your Next Job. 3rd ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2013.

Multivolume Work

Kozlowski, Steve W. J., editor. The Oxford Handbook of Organizational Psychology. Oxford UP, 2012. 2 vols.

D. E. Knuth. The Art of Computer Programming. vol. 4, Addison-Wesley, 2009.

378

Work in an Edited Collection

Snider, Laureen. “The Technological Advantages of Stock Market Traders.” How They Got Away with It: White Collar Criminals and the Financial Meltdown, edited by Susan Will, Stephen Handelman, and David C. Brotherton, Columbia UP, 2013, pp. 151–70.

Encyclopedia or Dictionary Entry

“Agent Technology.” Wiley Encyclopedia of Computer Science and Engineering, edited by B. W. Wah, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.

Brunblecombe, P. “Air Pollution Episodes.” Encyclopedia of Environmental Health, edited by Jerome O. Nriagu, vol. 1, Elsevier, 2011, pp. 39–45. Gale Virtual Reference Library, go.galegroup.com/ps/retrieve.do? resultlisttype=9780444522726&prodid=gvrl&Isetoc=true&docid=gale|cx1503700016.

ARTICLES IN PERIODICALS (PRINT AND ELECTRONIC)

Magazine Article

Heller, Nathan. “Mark as Read: What Do We Learn When Our Private E-mail Becomes Public.” The New Yorker, 24 July 2017, pp. 28–31.

DiChristina, Mariette. “Designing the City of Tomorrow Today.” Scientific American, July 2017, p. 4, www.scientificamerican.com/article/designing-the-city- of-tomorrow-today/.

Journal Article

379

Moriarty, Jeffrey. “Participation in the Workplace: Are Employees Special?” Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 92, no. 3, 2010, pp. 373–84.

Passow, Honor J., and Christian H. Passow. “What Competencies Should Undergraduate Engineering Programs Emphasize? A Systematic Review.” Journal of Engineering Education, vol. 106, no. 3, July 2017, pp. 475–526. Academic Search Complete, doi:10.1002/jee.20171.ONLINE.

Shrestha, Maria E. I., et al. “Urban Energy Scenario: The Case of the Kathmandu Valley.” Journal of Engineering and Technological Sciences, vol. 49, no. 2, 2017, pp. 210– 24, journals.itb.ac.id/index.php/jets/article/view/5073/2810.

Newspaper Article

Jones, Rory. “Nations Meet to Discuss Web Rules.” The Wall Street Journal, 4 Dec. 2012, p. B7.

Metz, Cade. “Chips Off the Old Block: Computers Are Taking Design Cues from Human Brains.” The New York Times, 18 Sept. 2017, nyti.ms/2y5xcLS.

Article with an Unknown Author

“What Sold, for How Much, and Why?” Modern, vol. 1, no. 2, 2009, p. 22.

OTHER ELECTRONIC AND MULTIMEDIA SOURCES

Entire Web Site

380

Society for Technical Communication. 2017, www.stc.org.

Short Work from a Web Site, with an Author

Marshall, Rosalie. “IBM Bolsters Green Sensor Portfolio.” BusinessGreen, 18 Aug. 2009, www.businessgreen.com/bg/news/1802285/ibm-bolsters- green-sensor-portfolio.

Short Work from a Web Site, with an Unknown Author

“Women-Owned Businesses.” U.S. Small Business Administration, 20 July 2009, www.sba.gov/business- guide/grow/women-owned-businesses-programs.

Article Posted on a Wiki

“Labor Theory of Value.” Wikipedia, 2 Sept. 2017, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Labor_theory_of_value.

Online Posting and Comments (Lists, Forums, Discussion Boards, Blogs)

trabb. “Surviving the Job Search.” Chronicle Forums, 15 Mar. 2009, Chronicle of Higher Education, www.chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.0.html.

scamster. “Re Surviving the Job Search,” by trabb. Chronicle Forums, 17 Aug. 2017, Chronicle of Higher Education, www.chronicle.com/forums/index.php/topic,40486.1230.html.

E-mail Message

Kalil, Ari. “Customer Satisfaction Survey.” Received by

381

Gerald Alred, 12 Jan. 2018.

Map or Chart

“Australia.” Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection, U of Texas, 1999, www.lib.utexas.edu/maps/australia/australia_pol99.jpg.

Film or Video

Chiu, Ken. “Trends in Mobile Gaming.” Stanford U, 15 Nov. 2012, www.youtube.com/watch?v=zPD1ZyrilNw.

Radio or Television Program

“Obama’s Failures Have Made Millennials Give Up Hope.” The Rush Limbaugh Show, hosted by Rush Limbaugh, Premiere Radio Networks, 14 Apr. 2014, www.rushlimbaugh.com/daily/2014/04/14/obama_s_failures_have_made_millennials_give_up_hope.

“Hacks or Malfunction, US Election Infrastructure Still Vulnerable.” The Rachel Maddow Show, hosted by Rachel Maddow, MSNBC, 1 Sept. 2017, www.msnbc.com/rachel-maddow-show.

Podcast

McDougall, Christopher. “How Did Endurance Help Early Humans Survive?” TED Radio Hour, National Public Radio, 20 Nov. 2015, www.npr.org/2015/11/20/455904655/how-did-endurance- help-early-humans-survive.

382

Broadcast Interview

Russell, David O. Interview by Terry Gross. Fresh Air, WNYC, 20 Feb. 2014.

Personal Interview

Andersen, Elizabeth. Personal interview, 29 Nov. 2014.

Brochure or Pamphlet

Historic Preservation Tax Incentives. United States, Department of the Interior, National Park Service, 2016, www.nps.gov/tps/tax-incentives.htm.

Government Document

Highlights of Women’s Earnings in 2015. Bureau of Labor Statistics, U.S. Department of Labor, Nov. 2016, www.bls.gov/opub/reports/womens- earnings/2015/home.htm.

Report

World Development Report: Governance and the Law. World Bank, 2017, hdl.handle.net/10986/25880.

MLA Sample Pages

383

384

FIGURE D–8. MLA Sample Page (from a Report)

385

386

FIGURE D–9. MLA Sample List of Works Cited

387

double negatives A double negative is the use of an additional negative word to

reinforce an expression that is already negative. In writing and

speech, avoid such constructions.

UNCLEAR We don’t have none. [This sentence literally means that we have some.]

CLEAR We have none.

Barely, hardly, and scarcely cause problems when writers do

not recognize that the words are already negative.

Not unfriendly, not without, and similar constructions are not

double negatives because in such constructions two negatives

are meant to suggest the gray area between negative and

positive meanings. Be careful how you use such constructions;

they can be confusing to the reader and should be used only if

they serve a purpose.

► He is not unfriendly. [He is neither hostile nor friendly.] ► It is not without regret that I offer my resignation. [I have

mixed feelings rather than only regret.]

The correlative conjunctions neither and nor may appear

together in a clause without creating a double negative, so long

as the writer does not attempt to use the word not in the same

clause.

388

Negative forms are full of traps that often entice writers into

logic errors, as illustrated in the following example:

ILLOGICAL The book reveals nothing that has not already been published in some form, but some of it is, I believe, relatively unknown.

In this sentence, “some of it” can logically refer only to “nothing

that has not already been published.” The sentence can be

corrected by stating the idea in more positive writing.

LOGICAL Everything in the book has been published in some form, but some of it is, I believe, relatively unknown.

389

drawings A drawing can depict an object’s appearance and illustrate the

steps in procedures or instructions. It can emphasize the

significant parts or functions of a device or product, omit what

is not significant, and focus on details or relationships that a

photograph cannot reveal. Think about your need for drawings

during your preparation and research. Include the drawings in

your outline, indicating approximately where each should be

placed (“drawing of . . .” enclosed in brackets). For advice on

integrating drawings into your text, see outlining and visuals.

Consider your medium, as well as your purpose and

audience, when choosing the type of drawing to include. For

example, publishing to an online digital format (such as a Web

page) could allow you to include a line drawing that can be

enlarged, automatically breaking into labeled cutaway parts.

See also infographics and selecting the medium.

The types of drawings discussed in this entry are

conventional line drawings, exploded-view drawings, cutaway

drawings, and clip-art images.

A conventional line drawing is appropriate if your audience

needs an overview of a series of steps or an understanding of an

object’s appearance or construction, as in Figure D–10.

390

FIGURE D–10. Conventional Line Drawing

An exploded-view drawing, like that in Figure D–11, can be

useful when you need to show the proper sequence in which

parts fit together or to show the details of individual parts.

Figure D–11 shows owners of a Xerox WorkCentre copier how

to safely unpack the machine and its key parts.

391

FIGURE D–11. Exploded-View Drawing

SOURCE: Xerox Corporation.

392

A cutaway drawing, like the one in Figure D–12, can be useful

when you need to show the internal parts of a device or

structure and illustrate their relationship to the whole.

FIGURE D–12. Cutaway Drawing

If you need only general-interest images to illustrate

newsletters and brochures or to create presentation slides,

consider using free noncopyrighted clip-art drawings from

online specialty sources. You may also consider purchasing

images from online stock-image companies.

393

ETHICS NOTE

Do not use drawings from the Web or other copyrighted sources without proper documentation; if you intend to publish your work, seek permission from the copyright holder. See also copyrights, patents and trademarks, documenting sources, and plagiarism.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Creating and Using Drawings

✓ Seek the help of graphics specialists for drawings that require a high degree of accuracy and precision.

✓ Show equipment and other objects from the point of view of the person who will use them.

✓ When illustrating a subsystem, show its relationship to the larger system of which it is a part.

✓ Draw the parts of an object in proportion to one another, and identify any parts that are enlarged or reduced.

✓ When a sequence of drawings is used to illustrate a process, arrange them from left to right or from top to bottom on the page.

✓ Label parts in the drawing so that the text references to them are clear and consistent.

✓ Depending on the complexity of what is shown, label the parts themselves, as in Figure D–11, or use a key, as in Figure G–11 on page 244.

394

due to / because of Due to (meaning “caused by”) is acceptable following a linking

verb.

► His absence was due to a work-related injury.

Due to is not acceptable, however, when it is used with a

nonlinking verb to replace because of.

395

E

396

each When each is used as a subject, it takes a singular verb or

pronoun. (“Each of the reports is to be submitted ten weeks

after it is assigned.”) When each refers to a plural subject, it

takes a plural verb or pronoun. (“The reports each have

company logos on their title pages.”)

397

economic / economical Economic refers to the production, development, and

management of material wealth. (“Tax rates have an economic

impact on communities.”) Economical simply means “not

wasteful or extravagant.” (“Employees should be as economical

as possible in their equipment purchases.”)

398

editing (see revision and proofreading)

399

e.g. / i.e. The abbreviation e.g. stands for the Latin exempli gratia,

meaning “for example”; i.e. stands for the Latin id est, meaning

“that is.” Because the English expressions (for example and that

is) are clear to all readers, avoid the Latin e.g. and i.e.

abbreviations except to save space in notes and visuals. If you

must use i.e. or e.g., do not italicize either of them. If i.e. or e.g.

connects two independent clauses, a semicolon should precede

the abbreviation, and a comma should follow it.

► The conference reflected international viewpoints; e.g., speakers included Germans, Italians, Japanese, Chinese, and Americans.

If i.e. or e.g. connects a noun and an appositive, a comma

should precede it and follow it.

► The conference included speakers from five countries, i.e., Germany, Italy, Japan, China, and the United States.

400

ellipses An ellipsis is the omission of words from quoted material; it is

indicated by three spaced periods called ellipsis points (. . .).

When you use ellipsis points, omit original punctuation marks

unless they are necessary for clarity or the omitted material

comes at the end of a quoted sentence.

ORIGINAL TEXT

“Promotional material sometimes carries a fee, particularly in high- volume distribution to schools, although prices for these publications are much lower than the development costs when all factors are considered.”

WITH OMISSION AND ELLIPSIS POINTS

“Promotional material sometimes carries a fee . . . although prices for these publications are much lower than the development costs. . . .”

Notice in the preceding example that the final period is retained

and what remains of the quotation is grammatically complete.

When the omitted part of the quotation is preceded by a period,

retain the period and add the three ellipsis points after it, as in

the following example.

ORIGINAL TEXT

“Of the 172 major ethics cases reported, 57 percent were found to involve unsubstantiated concerns. Misinformation was the cause of unfounded concerns of misconduct in 72 cases. Forty-four cases, or 26 percent of the total cases reported, involved incidents partly substantiated by ethics officers as serious misconduct.”

WITH OMISSION AND ELLIPSIS POINTS

“Of the 172 major ethics cases reported, 57 percent were found to involve unsubstantiated concerns. . . . Forty-four cases, or 26 percent of the total cases reported, involved incidents partly substantiated by ethics officers as serious misconduct.”

401

Do not use ellipsis points when the beginning of a quoted

sentence is omitted. Notice in the following example that the

comma is dropped to prevent a grammatical error. See also

quotations.

► The ethics report states that “26 percent of the total cases reported involved incidents partly substantiated by ethics officers as serious misconduct.”

402

e-mail DIRECTORY

Review and Confidentiality Writer’s Checklist: Maintaining Professionalism Writing and Design Writer’s Checklist: Managing Your E-mail and Reducing Overload

E-mail (or email) functions in the workplace as a primary

medium to exchange information and share electronic files

with colleagues, clients, and customers. E-mail messages range

from short, informal notes to longer, more formal

communications. For general writing strategy and appropriate

professional style, see correspondence. See also letters,

memos, and selecting the medium.

Review and Confidentiality Avoid the temptation to send the first draft of a message without

rereading it for clarity and appropriateness. As with all

correspondence, your message should include all crucial details

and be free of grammatical and factual errors, ambiguities, and

unintended implications. See proofreading and spelling.

Keep in mind that e-mails are easily forwarded and are never

truly deleted. Most companies back up and save all their e-mail

messages and are legally entitled to monitor e-mail use.

403

Companies can be compelled, depending on circumstances, to provide e-mail and digital messaging logs in response to legal

requests. Consider the content of all your messages in the light

of these possibilities, and carefully review your message before

you click “Send.”

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Be especially careful when sending messages to superiors in your organization or to people outside the organization. Spending extra time reviewing your e-mail can save you the embarrassment caused by a carelessly written message. One helpful strategy is to write the draft and revise your e-mail before filling in the “To” line with the address of your recipient.

FIGURE E–1. E-mail Signature Block

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

404

Maintaining Professionalism

✓ Review your organization’s policy regarding the appropriate use of e-mail.

✓ Do not forward jokes or spam, discuss office gossip, or use biased language.

✓ Do not send flames (e-mails that contain abusive, obscene, or derogatory language) to attack someone. See also blogs and forums.

✓ Avoid abbreviations (BTW for by the way, for example), emoticons, and emojis used in personal e-mail, discussion forums, text messaging, and instant messaging and live chat.

✓ Use typographical features (like bold or colors) carefully to provide emphasis. Do not write in all lowercase letters or in ALL UPPERCASE LETTERS.

✓ Base your personal e-mail username on your personal name (smith123@domain.com). Avoid clever names (sushilover@domain.com), since you may need to use your account for professional or job search purposes.

✓ Write a cover message when including attachments (“Attached is a copy of . . .”), and double-check that it is indeed attached. See cover letters.

✓ Always sign the e-mail and use a signature block (see Figure E–1 on page 170); doing so is both polite and a way to avoid possible confusion.

✓ Send a “courtesy response” informing the sender when you need additional time to reply or when you need to confirm that you have received a message or an attachment.

✓ When absent, use “out of office” autoresponder messages that state the dates you will be unavailable or an alternative way to reach you and who to contact in your absence. Add a reminder to your calendar to remove the message the day you return.

405

Writing and Design Make the main point early and use short paragraphs to avoid

dense blocks of text. For longer and more detailed messages,

provide a brief paragraph overview at the beginning. Adapt

forwarded messages by revising the subject line to reflect the

current content and cut irrelevant previous text or highlight key

text, based on your purpose and context.

Provide a specific subject line, as described on page 117, after

composing the message so that your topic is precise and clear to

the reader. An empty subject line is unprofessional and may be

interpreted as spam and thus routed to junk mail.

Adapt your salutation and complimentary closing to your

audience and the context.

When e-mail functions as a traditional business letter, consider the standard salutation (Dear Ms. Tucker: or Dear Docuform Customer:) and closing (Sincerely, or Best wishes,). When you send e-mail to individuals or small groups inside an organization, you may wish to adopt a more personal greeting (Dear Andy, or Dear Project Colleagues,) and closing (Regards, or Good luck). When e-mail functions as a personal note to a friend or close colleague, you can use an informal greeting (Hi, Mike, or Hello, Jenny) or only a first name and a closing (Take care, or Best,).

406

Be aware that in some cultures, professionals do not refer to

recipients or colleagues by their first names. See international

correspondence.

Many companies and professionals include signature blocks

(also called signatures) at the bottom of their messages.

Signatures, which are set to appear at the end of every e-mail,

supply information traditionally provided on company

letterhead. Many organizations provide graphic signature forms

or formatting standards. If yours does not, consider the

following guidelines for formatting text-based signatures:

Keep line length to sixty characters or fewer to avoid unpredictable line wraps. Test your signature block in plain-text e-mail systems to verify your format. Avoid using quotations, aphorisms, proverbs, or other sayings from popular culture, religion, or poetry in professional signatures.

The pattern shown in Figure E–1 is typical.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Managing Your E-mail and Reducing Overload

✓ Avoid becoming involved in an e-mail exchange if a phone call or meeting would be more efficient.

✓ Consider whether an e-mail message could prompt an unnecessary response from the recipient, and make clear to the recipient whether you expect a response.

407

✓ Send a copy (“cc:”) of an e-mail only when the person copied needs or wants the information, and don’t expect a response.

✓ Review all messages on a subject before responding to avoid dealing with issues that are no longer relevant.

✓ Set priorities for reading e-mail by skimming sender names and subject lines as well as where you appear (in the “to” or “cc:” line).

✓ Check the e-mail address before sending an e-mail to make sure it is correct.

✓ Determine the best way to organize e-mails in your system: using flags to highlight topics, search commands to find topics, or folders to group e-mails. You may want to save important e-mails as PDFs in an appropriate folder.

✓ Check your in-box regularly, and try to either clear it or categorize it and file new messages by the end of each day.

ETHICS NOTE

The blind-copy (bcc:) function allows writers to send copies of a message to someone without the primary receiver’s knowledge. Use the bcc: notation with great care. Sending sensitive or confidential information to a third party as a blind copy without the original recipient’s knowledge is unethical when used to play office politics. The blind-copy function is both ethical and useful, however, when used to protect the privacy of the e-mail addresses of a large group of recipients. Keep in mind that such addresses might be visible to your supervisors or your company’s IT team.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Double-check your “To” box addressees carefully before hitting the

408

“Send” button. The auto-fill feature in e-mail programs automatically fills in the names of recipients and other information in your “To” box based on the first few letters you type. Although it is a convenient feature, be aware that your e-mail can easily wind up in the wrong in- box when the names of people in your address book are similar (Donna/Donnie) or when two people share the same last name. The result can lead to embarrassing misunderstandings or to confidential information being sent to the wrong people.

409

emphasis Emphasis in writing means highlighting the facts and ideas you

consider important and subordinating those of secondary

importance. You can achieve emphasis with any of these

techniques: position, climactic order, sentence length, sentence

type, active voice, repetition, intensifiers, direct statements,

long dashes, and typographical devices.

Achieving Emphasis Position Place the idea in a conspicuous position. The first and last

words of a sentence, paragraph, or document stand out.

► Moon craters are important to understanding the earth’s history because they reflect geological history.

The term moon craters is emphasized because it appears at the

beginning of the sentence, and geological history is emphasized

because it appears at the end of the sentence. See also

subordination.

Climactic Order List the ideas or facts within a sentence in sequence from least

to most important, as in the following example. See also lists.

► Discontinuation of the HGX212 line of circuit boards would cause some technicians to be relocated to other cities, some

410

to be reclassified to a lower grade, and some to lose their jobs.

Sentence Length Vary sentence length strategically. A short sentence that follows

a long sentence or a series of long sentences stands out in the

reader’s mind, as in the short sentence that ends the following

paragraph (“We must cut costs.”). See sentence construction.

► We have already reviewed the problem the accounting department has experienced during the past year. We could continue to examine the causes of our problems and point an accusing finger at all the culprits beyond our control, but in the end it all leads to one simple conclusion. We must cut costs.

Sentence Type Vary sentences by the strategic use of a compound sentence, a

complex sentence, or a simple sentence. See sentence variety.

► The report submitted by the committee was carefully illustrated, and it covered five pages of single-spaced copy. [This compound sentence carries no special emphasis; it contains two coordinate independent clauses.]

► The committee’s report, which was carefully illustrated, covered five pages of single-spaced copy. [This complex sentence emphasizes the size of the report.]

► The carefully illustrated report submitted by the committee covered five pages of single-spaced copy. [This simple sentence emphasizes that the report was carefully

411

illustrated.]

Active Voice Use the active voice to emphasize the performer of an action:

Make the performer the subject of the verb.

► Our department designed the new system. [This sentence emphasizes our department, which is the performer and the subject of the verb, designed.]

Repetition Repeat key terms, as in the use of the word remains and the

phrase come and go in the following sentence.

► Similarly, atoms come and go in a molecule, but the molecule remains; molecules come and go in a cell, but the cell remains; cells come and go in a body, but the body remains; persons come and go in an organization, but the organization remains.

— Kenneth Boulding, Beyond Economics

Intensifiers Although you can use intensifiers (most, much, very) for

emphasis, this technique is so easily abused that it should be

used with caution.

► The final proposal is much more persuasive than the first one. [The intensifier much emphasizes the contrast.]

412

Direct Statements Use direct statements, such as “most important,” “foremost,” or

someone’s name in a direct address.

► Most important, keep in mind that everything you do affects the company’s bottom line.

► John, I believe we should rethink our plans.

Long Dashes Use a dash to call attention to a particular word or statement.

► The job will be done—after we are under contract.

Typographical Devices Use italics, bold type, underlining, color, and CAPITAL

LETTERS—but use them sparingly because overuse can create

visual clutter and cause readers to ignore truly important

information. See also capitalization, italics, and layout and

design.

413

English as a second language

DIRECTORY

Count and Mass Nouns Articles and Modifiers Gerunds and Infinitives Adjective Clauses Present Perfect Verb Tense Present Progressive Verb Tense

Learning to write well in a second language takes a great deal of

effort and practice. The most effective way to improve your

command of written English is to read widely beyond the

reports and professional articles your job requires, such as

magazines, newspapers, articles, novels, biographies, and any

other writing that interests you. In addition, listen carefully to

native speakers on television, on the radio, on podcasts, and in

person. Do not hesitate to consult a native speaker of English—

especially for important writing tasks, such as e-mails, memos,

and reports. Focus on those particular areas of English that give

you trouble. This entry covers several areas often confusing to

nonnative speakers and writers of English. See also global

communication.

Count and Mass Nouns 414

Count nouns refer to things that can be counted (tables, pencils,

projects, employees). Mass nouns (also called noncount nouns)

identify things that cannot be counted (electricity, air, loyalty,

information). This distinction can be confusing with words like

electricity and water. Although we can count kilowatt-hours of

electricity and bottles of water, counting becomes

inappropriate when we use the words electricity and water in a

general sense, as in “Water is an essential resource.” Following

is a list of typical mass nouns.

advice equipment news technology

biology furniture oil transportation

business honesty precision waste

education money research work

The distinction between something that can and something that

cannot be counted determines the form of the noun to use

(singular or plural), the kind of article that precedes it (a, an,

the, or no article), and the kind of limiting adjective it requires

(such as fewer or less and much or many). (See also fewer /

less.) Notice that count and mass nouns are always common

nouns; they are not proper nouns, such as the names of people.

Articles and Modifiers Every singular count noun must be preceded by an article (a,

an, or the), a demonstrative adjective (this, that, these, or

those), a possessive adjective (my, your, her, his, its, our, their,

or whose), or some expression of quantity (one, two, several,

415

many, a few, a lot of, some, no). The article, adjective, or

expression of quantity appears either directly in front of the

noun or in front of the whole noun phrase.

► Beth read a report last week. [article] ► Those reports Beth read were long. [demonstrative

adjective] ► Their report was long. [possessive adjective] ► Some reports Beth read were long. [indefinite adjective]

The articles a and an are used with count nouns that refer to

one item of the whole class of like items.

► Matthew has a pen. [Matthew could have any pen.]

The article the is used with nouns that refer to a specific item

that both the reader and the writer can identify.

► Matthew has the pen. [Matthew has a specific pen that is known to both the reader and the writer.]

When making generalizations with count nouns, writers can

either use a or an with a singular count noun or use no article

with a plural count noun. Consider the following generalization

using an article.

► An egg is a good source of protein. [any egg, all eggs, eggs in general]

However, the following generalization uses a plural count noun

with no article.

416

► Eggs are a good source of protein. [any egg, all eggs, eggs in general]

When you are making a generalization with a mass noun, do not

use an article in front of the mass noun.

► Sugar is bad for your teeth.

Gerunds and Infinitives Nonnative writers of English are often puzzled about whether to

use a gerund or an infinitive as a direct object of a verb (see

verbals) because no structural rule exists for distinguishing

which form to use. Any particular verb may take an infinitive as

its object, others may take a gerund, and still others take either

an infinitive or a gerund. At times, even the base form of the

verb is used.

► He enjoys working. [gerund as a complement] ► She promised to fulfill her part of the contract. [infinitive

as a complement] ► The president had the manager assign her staff to another

project. [basic verb form as a complement]

To make such distinctions accurately, rely on what you hear

native speakers use or what you read. You might also consult a

reference book for ESL students.

Adjective Clauses Because of the variety of ways adjective clauses are constructed

417

in different languages, they can be particularly troublesome.

The following guidelines will help you form adjective clauses

correctly.

Place an adjective clause directly after the noun it modifies.

The adjective clause who is standing across the room modifies

woman, not company, and thus should come directly after

woman.

Avoid using a relative pronoun with another pronoun in an

adjective clause.

Present Perfect Verb Tense In general, use the present perfect tense to refer to events

completed in the past that have some implication for the

present.

PRESENT PERFECT

She has performed the experiment three times. [She might perform it again.]

When a specific time is mentioned, however, use the simple

past tense.

SIMPLE PAST

I wrote the letter yesterday morning. [The action, wrote, does not affect the present.]

418

Use the present perfect with a since or for phrase to describe

actions that began in the past and continue in the present.

► This company has been in business for fifteen years. ► This company has been in business since 2000.

Present Progressive Verb Tense The present progressive tense is especially difficult for those

whose native language does not use this tense. The present

progressive tense is used to describe some action or condition

that is ongoing (or in progress) in the present and may continue

into the future.

PRESENT PROGRESSIVE

I am searching for an error in the document. [The search is occurring now and may continue.]

In contrast, the simple present tense more often relates to

routine actions.

SIMPLE PRESENT

I search for errors in my documents. [I regularly search for errors, but I am not necessarily searching now.]

419

English, varieties of Written English includes two broad categories: standard and

nonstandard. Standard English is used in business, industry,

government, education, and all professions. It has rigorous and

precise criteria for capitalization, punctuation, spelling, and

usage. Nonstandard English does not conform to such criteria;

it is often regional in origin, or it reflects the special usages of a

particular ethnic or social group. As a result, although

nonstandard English may be vigorous and colorful, its

usefulness as a means of communication is limited to certain

contexts and to people already familiar and comfortable with it

in those contexts. It rarely appears in printed material except

for special effect. Nonstandard English is characterized by

inexact or inconsistent Capitalization., punctuation, spelling,

diction, and usage choices.

Colloquial English Colloquial English is spoken English or writing that uses words

and expressions common to casual conversation. (“We need to

get him up to speed.”) Colloquial English is appropriate in some

kinds of writing (personal letters, notes, some e-mail) but not in

most workplace writing.

Dialectal English Dialectal English is a social or regional variety of the language

that is comprehensible to people of that social group or region

420

but may be incomprehensible to outsiders. Dialect, which is

usually nonstandard English, involves distinct word choice,

grammatical forms, and pronunciations. For example, residents

of southern Louisiana who descended from French colonists

speak a dialect often referred to as Cajun.

Localisms A localism is a regional wording or phrasing. For example, a

large sandwich on a long split roll is known in various regions

of the United States as a sub, hero, hoagie, grinder, poor boy, or

torpedo. Localisms should normally be avoided in workplace

writing, unless the writer is confident that all readers will be

familiar with a term.

Slang Slang is an informal vocabulary composed of figures of speech

and colorful words used in humorous or extravagant ways.

There is no objective test for slang, and many standard words

are given slang applications. For instance, slang may be a

familiar word used in a new way (chill meaning “relax”) or a

completely new word (selfie meaning “an informal photograph

taken of oneself”).

Most slang is short lived and has meaning only for a narrow

audience. Sometimes, however, slang becomes standard

because the word fills a legitimate need. Skyscraper and date

(as in “go on a date”), for example, were once considered slang

421

expressions. Nevertheless, although slang may be valid in

informal and personal writing or fiction, it should generally be

avoided in workplace writing. See also jargon and business

writing style.

422

equal / unique / perfect Logically, equal (meaning “having the same quantity or value as

another”), unique (meaning “one of a kind”), and perfect

(meaning “a state of highest excellence”) are words with

absolute meanings and therefore should not be compared.

However, colloquial usage of more and most as modifiers of

equal, unique, and perfect is so common that an absolute

prohibition on such use is impossible.

► Our system is more unique [or more perfect] than theirs.

Some writers try to overcome the problem by using more nearly

(more nearly equal, more nearly unique, more nearly perfect).

When clarity and preciseness are critical, the use of

comparative degrees with equal, unique, and perfect can be

vague. It is best to avoid using comparative degrees with

absolute terms. See also comparison.

VAGUE Ours is a more equal percentage split than theirs.

PRECISE Our percentage split is 51–49; theirs is 54–46.

423

etc Etc. is an abbreviation for the Latin et cetera, meaning “and

others” or “and so on.” Therefore, do not use the redundant

phrase and etc. Likewise, do not use etc. at the end of a series

introduced by the phrases such as and for example—those

phrases already indicate unnamed items of the same category.

Use etc. with a logical progression (1, 2, 3, etc.) and when at

least two items are named. Do not italicize etc.

► The sorting machine processes coins (pennies, nickels, etc.) and then packages them for redistribution.

Otherwise, avoid etc. because the reader may not be able to

infer what other items a list might include.

VAGUE He will bring notepads, paper clips, etc., to the trade show.

CLEAR He will bring notepads, paper clips, and other office supplies to the trade show.

424

ethics in writing Ethics refers to the choices we make that affect others for good

or ill. Ethical issues are inherent in writing and speaking

because what we write and say can influence others. Further,

how we express ideas affects our audience’s perceptions of us

and our organization’s ethical stance. See also audience.

ETHICS NOTE

No book can describe how to act ethically in every situation, but this entry describes some typical ethical lapses to watch for during revision. In other entries throughout this book, ethical issues are highlighted using the symbols surrounding this paragraph.

Avoid language that attempts to evade responsibility. Some

writers use the passive voice because they hope to avoid

responsibility or to obscure an issue: “It has been decided”

(Who has decided?) or “Several mistakes were made” (Who

made them?).

Avoid deceptive language. Do not use words with more than

one meaning to circumvent the truth. Consider the company

document that stated, “A nominal charge will be assessed for

using our facilities.” When clients objected that the charge was

actually very high, the writer pointed out that the word nominal

means “the named amount” in addition to “very small.” In that

situation, clients had a strong case in charging that the

1

425

company was attempting to be deceptive. The use of various

abstract words, technical and legal jargon, and euphemisms is

unethical when those words and phrases are used to mislead

readers or to hide a serious or dangerous situation, even though

technical or legal experts could interpret those words and terms

as accurate. See also word choice.

Do not deemphasize or suppress important information. Not

including information that a reader would want to have, such as

potential safety hazards or hidden costs for which a customer

might be responsible, is unethical and possibly illegal.

Likewise, do not hide information in dense paragraphs of

gobbledygook with small type and little white space, as is

common in credit-card contracts. Use such layout and design

features as legible type sizes, bulleted or numbered Lists, and

footnotes to highlight information that is important to readers.

Do not mislead with partial or self-serving information. For

example, avoid the temptation to highlight a feature or service

that readers would find attractive but that is available only with

certain product models or at extra cost. (See also logic errors

and positive writing.) Readers could justifiably object that you

have given them a false impression to sell them a product or

service, especially if you also deemphasize the extra cost or

other special conditions.

In general, treat others—individuals, companies, groups—

with fairness and with respect. Avoid language that is biased,

426

racist, or sexist or that perpetuates stereotypes. See also biased

language.

Finally, be aware that both plagiarism and violations of

Copyright not only are unethical but also can have serious

professional and legal consequences for you in the classroom

and on the job.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Ethically Ask yourself the following questions:

✓ Am I willing to take responsibility, publicly and privately, for what I have written? Make sure you can stand behind what you have written.

✓ Is the document or message honest and truthful? Scrutinize findings and conclusions carefully. Make sure that the data support them.

✓ Am I acting in my employer’s, my client’s, the public’s, or my own best long-term interest? Have an impartial and appropriate outsider review and comment on what you have written.

✓ Does the document or message violate anyone’s rights? If information is confidential and you have serious concerns, consider a review by the company’s legal staff or an attorney.

✓ Am I ethically consistent in my writing? Consistently apply the principles outlined here and those you have assimilated throughout your life.

✓ How will your reader interpret your message? If you were the intended reader, consider whether the message is acceptable and respectful.

427

If the answers to these questions do not come easily, consider asking a trusted colleague to review and comment on what you have written.

Information from Sims, B. R. (1993). Linking ethics and language in the technical communications classroom. Technical communication quarterly 2(3): 285–99.

1

428

euphemisms A euphemism is an inoffensive substitute for a word or phrase

that could be distasteful, offensive, or too blunt: passed away

for died; previously owned or preowned for used; lay off or

downsize for fire or terminate employees. Used judiciously,

euphemisms can help you avoid embarrassing or offending

someone.

ETHICS NOTE

Euphemisms can also hide the facts of a situation (incident or event for accident) or be a form of affectation if used carelessly. Avoid them especially in international correspondence and other forms of global communication where their meanings could be not only confusing but also misleading. See also ethics in writing.

429

everybody / everyone Both everybody and everyone are usually considered singular

and take singular verbs and pronouns.

► Everyone here leaves at 4:30 p.m. ► Everybody at the meeting presented his or her individual

assessment.

However, their meaning can be obviously plural.

► Everyone thought the plan should be rejected, and I really couldn’t blame them.

Although normally written as one word, they can be written as

two words if you wish to emphasize each individual in a group.

(“Every one of the team members contributed to this

discovery.”) See also agreement.

430

everyday / every day Everyday (one word) is an adjective that means

“commonplace,” “normal,” or “ordinary.” Every day (two

words) means “each day.”

► We now purchase everyday office supplies from MCL Products.

► I need to travel to the construction site every day this week.

431

exclamation marks The exclamation mark (!) indicates strong feeling, urgency,

elation, or surprise (“Hurry!” “Great!” “Wow!”). (See also

interjections.) However, it cannot make an argument more

convincing, lend force to a weak statement, or call attention to

an intended irony.

An exclamation mark can be used after a whole sentence or

an element of a sentence.

► This meeting—please note it well!—concerns our budget deficit.

When used with quotation marks, the exclamation mark goes

outside unless what is quoted is an exclamation.

► The paramedic shouted, “Don’t touch the victim!” The bystander then, according to a witness, “jumped like a kangaroo”!

In instructions, the exclamation mark is often used in cautions

and warnings (“Danger!” “Stop!”) or enclosed within a triangle

. See also emphasis.

432

executive summaries An executive summary consolidates the principal points of a

formal report or another long document. Executive summaries

differ from abstracts in that readers scan abstracts to decide

whether to read the work in full. An executive summary may be

the only section of a longer work read by many readers, so it

must accurately and concisely represent the original document.

It should restate the document’s purpose, scope, methods,

findings, conclusions, and recommendations, as well as

summarize how results were obtained or the reasons for the

recommendations. Executive summaries tend to be about 10

percent of the length and generally follow the same sequence of

the documents they summarize.

Write the executive summary so that it can be read

independently of the report or proposal it summarizes.

Executive summaries may occasionally include a figure, table,

or footnote—if that information is essential to the summary.

However, do not refer by number to figures, tables, or

references contained elsewhere in the document. See the

sample executive summary in Figure F–6 (pages 207–8).

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Executive Summaries

✓ Write the executive summary after you have completed the original document.

433

✓ Avoid or define terminology that may not be familiar to your intended audience.

✓ Spell out all uncommon symbols and abbreviations. ✓ Make the summary concise, but do not omit transitional words

and phrases (however, moreover, therefore, for example, next). ✓ Include only information discussed in the original document. ✓ Place the executive summary at the beginning of the body of the

report, as described in formal reports.

434

expletives An expletive is a word that fills the position of another word,

phrase, or clause. It and there are common expletives.

► It is certain that he will be promoted.

In the example, the expletive it occupies the position of subject

in place of the real subject, that he will be promoted. Expletives

are sometimes necessary to avoid awkwardness, but they are

commonly overused, and most sentences can be better stated

without them.

In addition to its grammatical use, the word expletive means a

profane exclamation or oath.

435

explicit / implicit An explicit statement is one expressed directly, with precision

and clarity.

► He gave us explicit directions to the Wausau facility.

An implicit meaning is one that is not directly expressed.

► Although the CEO did not mention the lawsuit directly, the company’s commitment to ethical practices was implicit in her speech.

436

exposition Exposition, or expository writing, refers to writing intended

primarily to inform readers by presenting facts and ideas in

direct and concise language; it usually relies less on colorful or

figurative language than writing meant to be expressive or

persuasive. It is aimed at readers’ understanding rather than at

their imagination or emotions. For this reason, exposition is

widely used in reports, Memos, and other types of technical

and workplace writing. Expository writing aims to provide

accurate, complete information and to analyze it for readers. As

with all workplace writing, include only enough information to

meet your readers’ needs and your purpose. See also audience

and business writing style.

437

F

438

fact Expressions containing the word fact (“due to the fact that,”

“except for the fact that,” “as a matter of fact,” or “because of

the fact that”) are often wordy substitutes for more accurate

terms. See conciseness and logic errors.

Do not use the word fact to refer to matters of judgment or

opinion.

The word fact is, of course, valid when facts are what is meant.

► Our study uncovered numerous facts to support your conclusion.

439

FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) An FAQ is a List of questions, paired with their answers, that

readers will likely ask about products, services, or other

information presented on a Web site or in customer-oriented

documents. By presenting commonly sought information in one

place, FAQs save readers from searching through an entire Web

site or document to find what they need.

A well-planned FAQ list can help create a positive impression

with customers or clients because the writer acknowledges that

the reader’s time is valuable. An FAQ list also helps a company

spend less time responding to questions. However, an FAQ list

is not a substitute for solving problems with a product or

service.

ETHICS NOTE

If customers are experiencing numerous problems because of a product design or programming flaw, you need to work with your company’s product developers to correct the problem rather than attempting to avoid the issue by burying it within an FAQ.

Questions to Include Develop the list of questions and their answers by

brainstorming with colleagues who are regularly in contact with

440

customers. If customers frequently ask about company stock

information and request annual reports, for example, your

FAQ list could include the question “How do I obtain a copy of

your latest annual report?” This question can be followed with a

brief answer that includes the Web address from which the

annual report can be downloaded or the name, phone number,

and e-mail address of the person who distributes the annual

reports. See also writing for the Web.

Organization Organize the list so that readers can find the information they

need quickly and easily. List your questions in decreasing order

of importance for your readers so that they can obtain the most

important information first. If you have a number of questions

that are related to a specific topic, such as investor relations,

product returns, or completing forms, group them into

categories and identify each category with a heading, such as

“Investor Relations,” “Shipping,” and “Forms.” You may also

want to create a table of contents at the top of the FAQ page so

that readers can quickly find the topics relevant to their

interests.

Study other FAQ lists for products or services similar to

yours. Analyze them for their approach and organization: Can

you find answers quickly, or do you need to scroll through

many pages to find them? Are the questions plus answers

separated into logical categories or listed in random order? Is it

easy to differentiate a question from its answer? Do the answers

441

provide too little or too much information? Does the FAQ list

offer specialized search tools to help readers find information

for longer FAQs?

Placement The location of your FAQ list should enable readers to find

answers quickly. On Web sites, an FAQ page is usually linked

from the homepage. In small printed documents, such as

brochures, FAQs are usually highlighted and placed after the

body of the document.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Developing FAQs

✓ Focus on your reader. Write your questions and answers from a “you” viewpoint and with a positive, conversational tone.

✓ Separate long FAQ lists into groups. Group related questions under topic headings. For long online FAQ lists, consider listing only questions and include links to separate pages, each containing an individual question and answer.

✓ Distinguish questions from answers. Use boldface for questions and use white space to separate questions from answers. Be sparing in your use of multiple colors, italics, or other formatting styles that can make the list difficult to read.

✓ Keep questions and answers concise. If a question has a long answer, add a link to a separate Web page or refer to an appropriate page number in a printed document.

✓ Keep the list updated. Review and update FAQs at least monthly — or more frequently if your content changes often.

✓ Give readers the opportunity to respond. Provide an e-mail link for

442

existing and potential customers to submit questions they would like to see added to the FAQ list.

✓ Consider available tools for automating the process. Many content- management systems, for example, have built-in FAQ-writing software.

443

feasibility reports When organizations consider a new project — developing a new

product or service, purchasing equipment, or moving

operations — they first try to determine the project’s chances

for success. A feasibility report presents evidence about the

practicality of a proposed project based on specific criteria, as

in Figure F–1. It answers such questions as the following: Is new

construction or development necessary? Is sufficient staff

available? What are the costs? Is funding available? What are

the legal or regulatory ramifications? Based on the findings of

this analysis, the report offers logical conclusions and

recommends whether the project should be carried out. When

feasibility reports stress specific steps that should be taken as a

result of a study of a problem or an issue, they are often

referred to as recommendation reports. In the condensed

feasibility report shown in Figure F–1, a consultant conducts a

study to determine how to upgrade a company’s computer

system and Internet capability.

444

445

FIGURE F–1. Feasibility Report

Before beginning to write a feasibility report, analyze the

needs of the audience as well as the context and purpose of the

study. Then write a purpose statement, such as “The purpose of

this study is to determine the feasibility of expanding our

Pacific Rim operations,” to guide you or a collaborative team.

See also brainstorming and collaborative writing.

446

Report Sections Every feasibility report should contain an introduction, a body,

a conclusion, and a recommendation. See also proposals and

formal reports.

Introduction The introduction states the purpose of the report, describes the

circumstances that led to the report, and includes any pertinent

background information. It may also discuss the scope of the

report, any procedures or methods used in the analysis of

alternatives, and any limitations of the study.

Body The body of the report presents a detailed review of the

alternatives for achieving the goals of the project. Examine each

option according to specific criteria — such as cost and

financing, availability of staff, and other relevant requirements

— identifying the subsections with headings to guide readers.

Conclusion The conclusion interprets the available options and leads to one

option as the best, or most feasible.

Recommendation The recommendation section clearly presents the writer’s (or

team’s) opinion on which alternative best meets the criteria as

summarized in the conclusion.

447

few / a few In certain contexts, few carries more negative overtones than

does the phrase a few.

NEGATIVE The report offers few helpful ideas.

POSITIVE The report offers a few helpful ideas.

448

fewer / less Fewer refers to items that can be counted (count nouns).

(“Fewer employees retired than we expected.”) Less refers to

mass quantities or amounts (mass nouns). (“We had less rain

this year than forecasts predicted.”) See also English as a

second language.

449

figuratively / literally Literally means “actually” and is often confused with

figuratively, which means “metaphorically.” To say that

someone “literally turned green with envy” would mean that the

person actually changed color.

► In the winner’s circle the jockey was, figuratively speaking, ten feet tall.

► When he said, “Let’s bury our competitors,” he did not mean it literally.

Avoid the use of literally to reinforce the importance of

something.

450

figures of speech A figure of speech is an imaginative expression that often

compares two things that are basically not alike but have at

least one thing in common. For example, if a device is cone

shaped and has an opening at the narrow end, you might say

that it looks like a volcano.

Figures of speech can clarify the unfamiliar by relating a new

concept to one with which readers are familiar. In that respect,

they help establish understanding between the specialist and

the nonspecialist. (See audience.) Figures of speech can help

translate the abstract into the concrete; in the process of doing

so, they can also make writing more colorful and graphic. (See

also abstract / concrete words.) A figure of speech must make

sense, however, to achieve the desired effect.

ILLOGICAL Without the fuel of tax incentives, our economic engine would operate less efficiently. [An engine would not operate at all without fuel.]

Figures of speech must also be consistent to be effective.

A figure of speech should not overshadow the point the writer is

trying to make. It is better to use no figure of speech at all than

to use a trite one. A surprise that comes “like a bolt out of the

blue” seems stale and not much of a surprise. See also clichés

and idioms.

451

Types of Figures of Speech Analogies are comparisons that show the ways in which two

objects or concepts are similar and are often used to make one

of them easier to understand. The following example explains a

computer search technique by comparing it to the use of

keywords in a dictionary.

► Indexed sequential processing on a computer works the same way as searching for a word in a dictionary. You might scan the keywords located at the top of each dictionary page that identify the first and last words on each page until you find the keywords that encompass the word you seek. Indexed sequential processing works the same way with computer files.

Hyperboles are gross exaggerations used to achieve an effect or

emphasis.

► We were dead after working all night on the grant proposal.

Litotes are understatements, for emphasis or effect, achieved

by denying the opposite of the point you are making.

► Over 1,600 pages is no small size for a book.

Metaphors are figures of speech that point out similarities

between two things by treating them as though they were the

same thing.

452

► The astronaut’s umbilical cord carries life-sustaining oxygen for spacewalking.

Metonyms are figures of speech that use one aspect of a thing to

represent it, such as the blue for the sky and wheels for a car.

► The economist predicted a decrease in hard-hat jobs.

Personification is a figure of speech that attributes human

characteristics to nonhuman things or abstract ideas. We might

refer, for example, to the birth of a planet or apply emotions to

machines.

► She said that she was frustrated with the stubborn security system.

Similes are direct comparisons of two essentially unlike things,

linking them with the word like or as.

► Reconstructing the plane’s fuselage following the accident was like piecing together a jigsaw puzzle.

Avoid figures of speech in global communication and

international correspondence because people in other cultures

may translate figures of speech literally and be confused by

their meanings.

453

fine When used in expressions such as “I feel fine” or “a fine day,”

fine is colloquial and, like the word nice, is often too vague for

business writing. Use the word fine to mean “refined,”

“delicate,” or “pure.”

► A fine film of oil covered the surface of the water. ► Fine crystal is made in Austria. ► The court made a fine distinction between the two statutes.

454

first / firstly First and firstly are both adverbs. Avoid firstly in favor of first,

which sounds less stiff than firstly. See also numbers.

455

flowcharts A flowchart is a diagram using symbols, words, or pictures to

show the stages of a process in sequence from beginning to end.

A flowchart provides an overview of a process and allows the

reader to identify its essential steps quickly and easily.

Flowcharts can take several forms. The steps might be

represented by labeled blocks, as shown in Figure F–2; pictorial

symbols, as shown in Figure F–3; or ISO (International

Organization for Standardization) symbols, as shown in Figure

F– 4. Useful tools for constructing flowcharts include Microsoft

PowerPoint, Visio, SmartDraw, and Lucidchart.

FIGURE F–2. Flowchart Using Labeled Blocks

456

457

FIGURE F–3. Flowchart Using Pictorial Symbols

SOURCE: http://portlandrealestateblog.com/short-sales/.

FIGURE F–4. Common ISO Flowchart Symbols (with Annotations)

For advice on integrating flowcharts into your text, see

visuals. See also global graphics and infographics.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Creating Flowcharts

458

✓ Label each step in the process or identify each step with labeled blocks, pictorial representations, or standardized symbols.

✓ Follow the standard flow directions: left to right and top to bottom. Indicate any nonstandard flow directions with arrows.

✓ Include a key (or callouts) to define symbols your audience may not understand.

✓ Use standardized symbols for flowcharts that document computer programs and other information-processing procedures, as detailed in Information Processing — Documentation Symbols and Conventions for Data, Program and System Flowcharts, Program Network Charts, and System Resources Charts, ISO 5807: 1985. (Publication available at www.iso.org.)

459

footnotes (see documenting sources)

460

forceful / forcible Although forceful and forcible are both adjectives meaning

“characterized by or full of force,” forceful is usually limited to

persuasive ability and forcible to physical force.

► John made a forceful presentation at the committee meeting.

► Firefighters must often make forcible entries into buildings.

461

foreign words in English The English language has a long history of borrowing words

from other languages. Most borrowing occurred so long ago

that we seldom recognize the borrowed terms (also called loan

words) as being of foreign origin (kindergarten from German,

animal from Latin, church from Greek).

Words not fully assimilated into the English language are set

in italics and use appropriate diacritical marks (sine qua non, in

camera, piñata, coup de grâce). Even when they have been fully

assimilated, some retain their diacritical marks for clarity

(résumé versus resume), while others are either optional (café

or cafe) or dropped (facade, apropos). As foreign words are

absorbed into English, their plural forms give way to English

plurals (agenda becomes agendas and formulae becomes

formulas). Most dictionaries offer guidance, although you

should also be guided by the context.

Foreign expressions should be used only if they serve a real

need. (See also e.g. / i.e. and etc.) The overuse of foreign words

in an attempt to impress your reader is affectation. Effective

communication can be accomplished only if your readers

understand what you write, so choose foreign expressions only

when they make an idea clearer or when there is no English

substitute (schadenfreude for “pleasure taken from someone

else’s misfortune”).

462

foreword / forward Although the pronunciation is the same, the spellings and

meanings of these two words are quite different. The word

foreword is a noun meaning “introductory statement at the

beginning of a book or other work.”

► The director wrote a foreword for the report.

The word forward is an adjective or adverb meaning “at or

toward the front.”

► Sliding the throttle to the forward position [adjective] will cause the boat to move forward. [adverb]

463

form letters A form letter or message is a type of correspondence (including

letters and e-mail) in which the identical (or near identical)

message is sent to more than one person; only the name and

address of the recipient differ. The recipients’ names,

addresses, and other information may be stored and merged

with the text of the message.

When to Use Form Letters Form letters and e-mails are ideal for simultaneously reaching

hundreds or thousands of customers, clients, or employees with

announcements and other information. In fact, sales letters are

usually mass-produced. Form letters and e-mails are also useful

for situations that occur regularly, such as responses to

inquiries, standard orders, acknowledgments of orders, and

early-stage collection letters. (See also acknowledgments and

inquiries and responses.) Of course, if a particular situation

calls for an individual response (such as an adjustment

message in response to a complaint), a form letter is not the

best choice. Most people resent obviously impersonal treatment

when they believe they deserve individual attention.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

For routine circumstances, few readers object to an obvious form letter or message, especially if the information is clear and the tone is positive. For example, a computer company may send purchasers a

464

brief form letter or e-mail to let them know their orders have been shipped and when to expect delivery.

Writing Form Letters By using the principles of correspondence and the “you”

viewpoint, you can produce a form letter or e-mail tailored to

your potential audience and to your purpose. Even though your

readers know they are reading a form letter or message, you

should personalize the message to fit the recipients’ situation as

much as possible.

PERSONAL If you have a question about your MAX-PC and cannot find the answer in the User’s Guide, visit our Web site or get 24-hour personal assistance at our customer help number. [This sentence seems aimed more at the individual reader.]

Be careful about using first names to personalize messages —

the name that appears in a database might be different from the

name familiar to the recipient’s friends (William/Bill or

Kimberly/Kim). Further, many cultures avoid first names when

addressing all but those closest to them. (See also international

correspondence.)

Form letters and e-mails that do not need to be personalized

often use a “headline lead” to replace the standard salutation, as

shown in Figure F–5. By “talking” directly to the reader, you can

make form letters and messages less stiff and impersonal. Some

form letters can be personalized by adding a typed or

handwritten postscript.

465

FIGURE F–5. Headline Lead

Repurposing Form Letters Paragraphs from previously used form letters and messages can

be combined with newly written paragraphs that are tailored to

fit a specific context. Repurposed paragraphs are ideal for use

in recurring circumstances that require more personal and

varied responses than form letters or e-mails provide. (See

repurposing.) They are useful, for example, when you wish

either to adapt parts of the correspondence for particular

readers or to construct sets of messages from standardized

parts, as in application cover letters, reference letters, refusal

letters, and some memos. Be sure to provide adequate

transition and proofread carefully.

466

formal reports Formal reports are usually written accounts of major projects

that require substantial research, and they often involve more

than one writer. See also collaborative writing.

Most formal reports are divided into three primary parts —

front matter, body, and back matter — each of which contains a

number of elements. The number and arrangement of the

elements vary depending on the subject, the length of the

report, and the kinds of material covered. Many organizations

have a preferred style for formal reports and furnish guidelines

for report writers. If you are not required to follow a specific

style, use the format recommended in this entry. The following

list includes most of the elements a formal report might

contain, in the order they typically appear. (The items shown

with page numbers appear in the sample formal report on

pages 203–19.) Often, a cover message or memo precedes the

front matter and identifies the report by title, the person or

persons to whom it is sent, the reason it was written, the scope,

and any information that the audience considers important, as

shown on page 203.

FRONT MATTER

Title Page (204)

Abstract (205)

467

Table of Contents (206)

List of Figures

List of Tables

Foreword

Preface

List of Abbreviations and Symbols

BODY

Executive Summary (207)

Introduction (209)

Text (including headings) (212)

Conclusions (217)

Recommendations (217)

Explanatory Notes

References (or Works Cited) (219)

BACK MATTER

Appendixes

468

Bibliography

Glossary

Index

Front Matter The front matter serves several functions: It explains the

writer’s purpose, describes the scope and type of information

in the report, and lists where specific information is covered in

the report. Not all formal reports include every element of front

matter described here. A title page and table of contents are

usually mandatory. But the scope of the report and its context,

as well as the intended audience, determine whether the other

elements are included.

Title Page Although the formats of title pages may vary, they often include

the following:

The full title of the report. The title describes the topic, scope, and purpose of the report, as discussed in titles. The name of the writer(s), principal investigator(s), or compiler(s). Sometimes contributors identify themselves by their job title or role on the project (Olivia Jones, Principal Investigator). The date(s) of the report. For one-time reports, use the date the report is distributed. For reports issued periodically (monthly, quarterly, or yearly), the subtitle shows the

469

period that the report covers, and the distribution date is shown elsewhere on the title page, as shown in Figure F–6 on page 203. The name of the organization for which the writer(s) works. The name of the organization to which the report is being submitted. Include this information if the report is written for a customer or client.

Front-matter pages are numbered with roman numerals. The

title page should not be numbered, as in the example on page

204, but it is considered page i for subsequent pagination. The

back of the title page, which is left blank and unnumbered, is

considered page ii, so the abstract falls on page iii. The body of

the report begins with arabic number 1, and a new chapter or

large section typically begins on a new right-hand (odd-

numbered) page. Reports with printing on only one side of each

sheet can be numbered consecutively regardless of where new

sections begin. Center page numbers at the bottom of each page

throughout the report.

Abstract An abstract, which normally follows the title page, highlights

the major points of the report, as shown on page 205, enabling

readers to decide whether to read the report.

Table of Contents A table of contents lists all the major sections or headings of

the report in their order of appearance, as shown on page 206,

along with their page numbers. If the report is distributed

470

electronically, link headings in the table of contents (as well as

figure numbers and titles in a list of figures, and table numbers

and titles in a list of tables) to the relevant sections of the report.

List of Figures All visuals contained in the report — drawings, photographs,

maps, charts, and graphs — are labeled as figures. When a

report contains more than five figures, list them, along with

their page numbers, in a separate section, beginning on a new

page immediately following the table of contents. Number

figures consecutively with arabic numbers.

List of Tables When a report contains more than five tables, list them, along

with their titles and page numbers, in a separate section

immediately following the list of figures (if there is one).

Number tables consecutively with arabic numbers.

Foreword A foreword is an optional introductory statement about a formal

report or publication that is written by someone other than the

author(s). The foreword author is usually an authority in the

field or an executive of the organization sponsoring the report.

The foreword author’s name and affiliation appear at the end of

the foreword, along with the date it was written. The foreword

provides background information about the publication’s

significance, and places it in the context of other works in the

field. The foreword precedes the preface when a work has both.

471

Preface The preface, another type of optional introductory statement, is

written by the author(s) of the formal report. It may announce

the work’s purpose, scope, and context (including any special

circumstances leading to the work). A preface may also specify

the audience for a work, those who helped in its preparation,

and permissions obtained for the use of copyrighted works. See

also copyrights, patents, and trademarks.

List of Abbreviations and Symbols When a report uses numerous abbreviations and symbols that

readers may not be able to interpret, the front matter may

include a section listing symbols and abbreviations with their

meanings.

Body The body is the section of the report that provides context for

the report, describes in detail the methods and procedures used

to generate the report, demonstrates how results were obtained,

describes the results, draws conclusions, and, if appropriate,

makes recommendations.

Executive Summary The body of the report begins with the executive summary,

which provides a more complete overview of the report than

the abstract does. See an example on pages 207–208, and review

the abstract entry cross-referenced earlier.

472

Introduction The introduction gives readers any general information — such

as the report’s purpose, scope, and context — necessary to

understand the detailed information in the report (see pages

209–211).

Text The text of the body presents, as appropriate, the details of how

the topic was investigated, how a problem was solved, what

alternatives were explored, and how the best choice among

them was selected. This information is enhanced by the use of

visuals, tables, headings, and references that both clarify the

text and persuade the reader. See also persuasion.

Conclusions The conclusions section pulls together the results of the

research and interprets the findings of the report, as shown on

page 217.

Recommendations Recommendations, which are sometimes combined with

conclusions, state what course of action should be taken based

on the earlier arguments and conclusions of the study, as

shown on pages 217–218.

Explanatory Notes Occasionally, reports contain notes that amplify terms or points

that might interrupt the text of the report. Such notes may be

473

included as footnotes, or they may appear in a “Notes” section

at the end of the report.

References (or Works Cited) A list of references or works cited appears in a separate section

if the report refers to or quotes directly from research sources.

If your employer has a preferred reference style, follow it;

otherwise, use one of the guidelines provided in the entry

documenting sources. For a relatively short report, place a

reference or works-cited section at the end of the body of the

report, as shown on page 219. For a report with a number of

sections or chapters, place a reference or works-cited section at

the end of each major section or chapter. In either case, begin

the reference or works-cited section on a new page. If a

particular reference appears in more than one section or

chapter, repeat it in full in each appropriate reference section.

ETHICS NOTE

Always identify the sources of any facts, ideas, quotations, and paraphrases you include in a report. Even if unintentional, plagiarism is unethical and may result in formal academic misconduct charges in a college course. On the job, it can result in legal action or even dismissal. Repurposed in-house material (“boilerplate”) may not require a citation — see repurposing.

Back Matter The back matter of a formal report contains supplementary

474

material, such as where to find additional information about the

topic (bibliography), and expands on certain subjects

(appendixes). Other back-matter elements define special terms

(glossary) and provide information on how to easily locate

information in the report (index). For very large formal reports,

back-matter sections may be individually numbered or labeled

(Appendix A, Appendix B).

Appendixes An appendix clarifies or supplements the report with

information that is too detailed or lengthy for the primary

audience but is relevant to secondary audiences.

Bibliography A bibliography lists alphabetically all the sources that were

consulted to prepare the report — not just those cited in the

report — and suggests additional resources that readers might

want to consult.

Glossary A glossary is an alphabetical list of specialized terms used in

the report and their definitions.

Index An index is an alphabetical list of all the major topics and

subtopics discussed in the report. It cites the page numbers

where discussion of each topic can be found, allowing readers

to find information on topics quickly and easily. The index is

475

always the final section of a report. Most word-processing

programs can save you time by creating an index automatically

based on keywords that you mark while composing the report.

See also indexing.

Sample Formal Report Figure F–6 shows the typical sections of a formal report. Keep in

mind that the number and arrangement of the elements vary

depending on the context, especially the requirements of an

organization or a client.

476

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Cover Memo)

477

478

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Title Page)

479

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Abstract)

480

481

482

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Table of Contents)

483

484

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Executive Summary)

485

486

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Executive Summary)

487

488

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Introduction)

489

490

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Introduction)

491

492

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Introduction)

493

494

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)

495

496

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)

497

498

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)

499

500

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)

501

502

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Body Text)

503

504

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Conclusions and Recommendations)

505

506

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Conclusions and Recommendations)

507

508

FIGURE F–6. Formal Report (Works Cited)

509

format Format refers to both the organization of information in a

document and the physical arrangement of information on the

page.

In one sense, format refers to the conventions that govern

the scope and placement of information in such job-related

writing as formal reports, proposals, and various types of

correspondence. For example, in formal reports, the table of

contents precedes the preface but follows the title page and the

abstract. Likewise, although variations exist, parts of letters —

such as inside address, salutation, and complimentary closing

— are arranged in standard patterns. See also e-mail and

memos.

Format also refers to the general physical appearance of a

finished document. You can use styles and templates in word-

processing programs to automate the design of headings,

paragraphs, lists, and visuals. (Using styles and templates also

helps make word-processing documents accessible to screen

readers.) See also layout and design and writing for the Web.

510

former / latter Former refers to the first and latter refers to the last of two

items in a sentence or paragraph. Because these terms make

the reader look to previous material to identify the reference,

they complicate reading and are best avoided.

511

forms Forms are used widely to gather data and information from

respondents in a standardized design. Figure F–7 shows an

example of a typical form used for a medical claim. See also

questionnaires.

512

FIGURE F–7. Form (for a Medical Claim)

513

An effective form makes it easy for one person to supply

information and for another person to retrieve, record, and

interpret that information. Ideally, a form should be self-

explanatory to someone seeing it for the first time. When

preparing a form, determine the kind of information you are

seeking, and arrange the requests for information or questions

in a logical order. To ensure the usability of the form, test it

with people from your target audience or others before

distributing the final version.

ETHICS NOTE

Information gathered on forms can be sensitive, personal, or subject to confidentiality laws, so make sure to request information in a way that is not invasive or illegal. Unless otherwise indicated on the form, the person filling out the form should have the expectation of confidentiality. If you are concerned about issues of confidentiality or legality, check your organization’s policy; in a classroom seek your instructor’s advice.

Choosing Paper or Digital You can develop forms as printed documents or interactive

digital versions. Printed forms can help individuals in some

manufacturing and service industries. Printed forms can also be

useful at conferences or other in-person events. Digital forms,

however, are especially well suited for conference or seminar

registrations, job applications, and various order forms. Digital

forms not only standardize respondents’ interfaces but also link

514

to databases that tabulate and interpret data. A digital form can

be encrypted for security and programmed to ensure that all

necessary fields are completed correctly before the form can be

successfully submitted. See also writing for the Web.

Designing a Form At the top of the form, clearly indicate preliminary information,

such as the name of your organization, the title of your form,

and any reference number. Place instructions at the beginning

of the form or at the beginning of each section of the form and

use headings or other design elements, such as the boldface

type and shaded text boxes in Figure F–7. Place instructions for

submitting printed forms or distributing the copies of multiple-

copy forms at the bottom of each page. For printed forms, allow

space for elements such as signatures and dates.

You can design digital forms specific to your needs with

form-design software, word-processing software, or markup

languages (such as HTML or PHP/MySQL). At the end of digital

forms, include a “submit” button to record the data, to open a

new page, or to send a confirming e-mail reporting successful

completion. See also layout and design.

Entry Lines and Fields A print form can be designed so that the person filling it out

provides information on a writing line, in a writing block, or in

square boxes. A writing line is simply a rule with a caption, such

as the line for “Employee Name” shown in Figure F–7. A writing

515

block is essentially the same as a writing line, except that each

entry is enclosed in a ruled block, making it unlikely for the

respondent to associate a caption with the wrong line.

When it is possible to anticipate all likely responses, you can

make the form easy to fill out by writing the question on the

form, supplying a labeled box for each anticipated answer, and

asking the respondent to check the appropriate boxes. Such a

design also makes it easy to tabulate the data.

For digital forms, these functions are accomplished with

form fields such as text boxes, option (or radio) buttons, drop-

down menus, lists, and check boxes, which can be aligned using

table cells or grouping. Each form field should have a label

prompting users to type information or to select from a list of

options. Labels for text boxes, drop-down menus, and lists

should be positioned to the left; labels for radio buttons and

check boxes should be positioned to the right. Be sure also to

indicate required form fields.

Sequencing Entries The main portion of the form includes the entries that are

required to obtain the necessary data. Arrange entries in an

order that will be the most logical to the person filling out the

form.

Open with questions that are easy for respondents to complete or answer. Sequence entries to fit the subject matter. A form

516

requesting travel reimbursement would logically be organized chronologically from the beginning to the end of the appropriate period. If the response to one item is based on the response to another item, be sure the items appear in the correct order. Group requests for related information together whenever possible.

Writing Questions Forms should ask questions in ways that are best suited to the

types of data you hope to collect. The two main types are open-

ended questions and closed-ended questions.

Open-ended questions allow respondents to answer questions in their own words. Such questions are most appropriate if you wish to elicit responses you may not have anticipated (as in a complaint form) or if there are too many possible answers to use a multiple-choice format. However, the responses to open-ended questions can be difficult to tabulate and analyze. Closed-ended questions provide a list of options from which the respondent can select, limiting the range of possible responses. When you want to make sure you receive a standardized, easy-to-tabulate response, use any of the types of closed-ended questions that follow:

Multiple choice: Choose one (or sometimes more than one) response from a preset list of options. Ranked choice: Rank items according to preference, such as selecting vacation days or choosing job

517

assignments. Forced choice: Choose between two preset options, such as yes/no or male/female. Likert choice: Choose among a range of options on a numerically defined scale, such as 1 = very unsatisfied, 3 = neither satisfied nor unsatisfied, or 5 = very satisfied.

Be sure your questions are both simple and specific, and

provide enough space for an adequate response.

► Would your department order another X2L Copier? Yes ☐ No ☐

Questions are often worded as captions. Keep captions brief and

to the point; avoid wordy repetition by combining related

information under an explanatory heading.

WORDY What make of car (or vehicle) do you drive? ___________

What year was it manufactured? __________________

What model is it? _______________________________

What is the body style? _________________________

CONCISE Vehicle Information

Make ___________ Year ___________

Model _______________ Body Style _______________

Make captions (Make, Model, Year, Body Style) as specific as

possible. If a requested date is other than the date on which the

form is being filled out, the caption should read, for example,

“Effective date” or “Date issued,” rather than simply “Date.” As

518

in all writing, put yourself in your reader’s place and imagine

what sort of requests would be clear.

For detailed and up-to-date information on designing paper

and digital forms, see

www.stcsig.org/usability/topics/forms.html.

519

forums (see blogs and forums)

520

fragments (see sentence fragments)

521

functional shift Many words shift easily from one part of speech to another,

depending on how they are used. When they do, the process is

called a functional shift, or a shift in function.

► It takes ten minutes to walk from the sales office to the accounting department. However, the long walk reduces efficiency. [Walk shifts from verb to noun.]

► I talk to Jim in the Chicago office on the phone every day. He was concerned about the office phone expenses. He will phone the home office from London. [Phone shifts from noun to adjective to verb.]

► After we discuss the project, we will begin work. After lengthy discussions, we began work. The partners worked well together forever after. [After shifts from conjunction to preposition to adverb.]

Jargon is often the result of functional shifts. In hospitals, for

example, an attending physician is often referred to simply as

the “attending” (a shift from an adjective to a noun). Likewise,

in nuclear plant construction, a reactor containment building is

called a “containment” (a shift from an adjective to a noun). Do

not shift the function of a word indiscriminately merely to

shorten a phrase or an expression. See also affectation,

audience, and conciseness.

522

G

523

garbled sentences A garbled sentence is one that is so tangled with structural and

grammatical problems that it cannot be repaired. Garbled

sentences often result from an attempt to squeeze too many

ideas into one sentence.

► My job objectives are accomplished by my having a diversified background which enables me to operate effectively and efficiently, consisting of a degree in computer science, along with twelve years of experience, including three years in Staff Engineering-Packaging sets a foundation for a strong background in areas of analyzing problems and assessing economical and reasonable solutions.

Do not try to patch such a sentence; rather, analyze the ideas it

contains, list them in a logical sequence, and then construct one

or more entirely new sentences. The preceding example

contains the following five ideas:

My job requires that I analyze problems to find economical and workable solutions. My diversified background helps me accomplish my job. I have a computer science degree. I have twelve years of job experience. Three of these years have been in Staff Engineering- Packaging.

Using those five ideas — together with parallel structure,

524

sentence variety, subordination, and transition — the writer

might have described the job as follows:

► My job requires that I analyze problems to find economical and workable solutions. Both my education and experience help me achieve this goal. Specifically, I have a computer- science degree and twelve years of job experience, three of which have been in the Staff Engineering-Packaging Department.

See also clarity, mixed constructions, and sentence

construction.

525

gender In English grammar, gender refers to the classification of

nouns and pronouns as masculine, feminine, and neuter. The

gender of most words can be identified only by the choice of the

appropriate pronoun (he, she, it). Only these pronouns and a

select few nouns (man/woman, buck/doe) or noun forms

(heir/heiress) reflect gender. Many such nouns have been

replaced by single terms that apply to both sexes. See also

agreement and he / she.

Writers must make sure that nouns and pronouns within a

grammatical construction agree in gender. A pronoun, for

example, must agree with its noun antecedent in gender. We

refer to a woman as she or her, not as it; to a man as he or him,

not as it; to a building as it, not as he or she.

Nonnative speakers of English may be confused if their

native language assigns gender because the English language

has so few gender distinctions. Be sure to follow the guidelines

for nonsexist writing under biased language.

526

general and specific methods of development General and specific methods of development organize

information either from general points to specific details

(Figure G–1) or from specific details to a general conclusion

(Figure G–2). As with all methods of development, most writers

blend and use combinations of methods.

FIGURE G–1. General-to-Specific Method of Development

527

General to Specific The general-to-specific method of development is especially

useful for teaching readers about something with which they

are not familiar because you can begin with generally known

information and progress to new and increasingly specific

details. This method can also be used to support a general

statement with facts or examples that validate the statement.

For example, if you begin your writing with the general

statement “Companies that diversify are more successful than

those that do not,” you could follow that statement with

examples and statistics that prove to the reader that companies

that diversify are, in fact, more successful than companies that

do not.

A memo or short report organized entirely in a general-to-

specific sequence discusses only one point. All other

information in the document supports the general statement, as

illustrated in Figure G–1 (on page 228) from a memo about

locating additional computer-chip suppliers.

Specific to General Specific-to-general development is especially useful when you

wish to persuade skeptical readers of a general principle with

an accumulation of specific details and evidence that reach a

logical conclusion. It carefully builds its case, often with

examples and analogies in addition to facts or statistics, and it

does not actually make its point until the end. (See also order-

528

of-importance method of development.) Figure G–2 is an

example of the specific-to-general method of development.

FIGURE G–2. Specific-to-General Method of Development

529

global communication The continual expansion of the global marketplace and the

growing need for many businesses to participate globally means

that the ability to communicate with international audiences

from varied backgrounds is essential. See audience.

Many entries in this book, such as meetings and résumés,

are based on dominant cultural patterns in the United States.

The treatment of such topics might be very different in other

cultures, where leadership styles, persuasive strategies, and

even legal constraints differ.

As illustrated in the entry for international correspondence,

organizational patterns, forms of courtesy, and ideas about

efficiency can vary significantly from culture to culture. What

might be seen as direct and efficient in the United States could

be considered blunt and even impolite in other cultures. The

explanations for these differing ways of viewing

communication are complex. Researchers often measure

cultural differences through such concepts as the importance of

honor or saving face, perceptions of time, and preferences for

avoiding uncertainty. Because cultures evolve and global

communication affects cultural patterns, you must be able to

adapt to cultural variations. Figure G–3 (on page 230) shows an

ineffective global business communication, whereas Figure G–4

(on page 231) demonstrates an effective global business

communication. The checklist that follows offers useful

530

approaches that can help you adapt. See also global graphics.

531

532

FIGURE G–3. Ineffective Global Business Communication

533

FIGURE G–4. Effective Global Business Communication

534

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Communicating Globally

✓ Discuss the differing cultures within your company or region to reinforce the idea that people can interpret verbal and nonverbal communications differently.

✓ Invite global and intercultural communication experts to speak at your workplace. Companies in your area may have employees who could be resources for cultural discussions.

✓ Understand that the key to effective communication with global audiences is recognizing that cultural differences, despite the challenges they may present, offer opportunities for growth for both you and your organization.

✓ Consult with someone from your intended audience’s culture. Many phrases, gestures, and visual elements are so subtle that only someone from that culture can explain the effect they may have on others from that culture. See also global graphics.

✓ Intercultural Press is a source for “intercultural, multicultural and cross-cultural studies and informative country guides to help you do business and form strong relationships in foreign countries.” See www.hodder.co.uk/Nicholas%20Brealey/Nicholas%20Brealey.page. Geert Hofstede, a leading researcher in national and organizational culture, also offers cultural comparison tools and other resources on his Web site. See geert-hofstede.com/.

535

global graphics In a global business and technology environment, graphs and

other visuals require the same careful attention given to other

aspects of global communication. The complex cultural

connotations of visuals challenge writers to think beyond their

own experience when they are aiming for audiences outside

their own culture.

Symbols, images, and even colors are not free from cultural

associations — they depend on context, and context is culturally

determined. For instance, in North America, a red cross is

commonly used as a symbol for first aid or a hospital. In

Muslim countries, however, a cross (red or otherwise)

represents Christianity, whereas a crescent (usually green)

signifies first aid or a hospital. A manual for use in Honduras

could indicate “caution” by using a picture of a person touching

a finger below the eye. In France, however, that gesture means

“You can’t fool me.”

Figure G–5 shows two different graphics depicting weight

lifters. The drawing on the left may be appropriate for U.S.

audiences and others. However, that graphic would be highly

inappropriate in many cultures, where the image of a partially

clothed man and woman in close proximity would be contrary

to deeply held cultural beliefs and even laws about the public

depiction of men and women. The drawing at the right in

Figure G–5, however, depicts a weight lifter with a neutral icon

536

that avoids the connotations associated with more realistic

images of people.

FIGURE G–5. Graphics for U.S. (left) and Global (right) Audiences

These examples suggest why the International Organization

for Standardization (ISO) established agreed-upon symbols,

such as those shown in Figure G–6, for public signs,

guidebooks, and manuals.1

537

FIGURE G–6. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) Symbols

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Appropriate Global Graphics

✓ Consult with an expert or test your use of graphics with individuals from your intended audience’s country who understand the effect that visuals may have on that audience. See also presentations.

✓ Organize visual information for the intended audience. Some culture groups read visuals from left to right in clockwise rotation; others read visuals from right to left in counterclockwise rotation.

✓ Be sure that your graphics have no unintended political or religious implications.

✓ Carefully consider how you depict people in visuals — body exposure, positions, and clothing (see Figure G–5).

✓ Use outlines or neutral abstractions to represent human beings. Consider stick figures, as in Figure G–6.

✓ Choose neutral colors (or those you know are appropriate) or gray scale, which carries no connotation, for your graphics. In some cultures, red symbolizes good fortune or joy; in others, red indicates danger.

✓ Check your use of punctuation marks, which are as language

538

specific as symbols. For example, in North America, the question mark generally represents the need for information or help. In many countries, that symbol has no meaning at all.

✓ Create simple visuals with universal shapes, as illustrated in Figure G–6.

✓ Explain the meaning of icons or symbols that cannot be changed, such as a company logo.

Learn more through the useful illustrations in “The International Language of ISO Graphical Symbols” at www.iso.org/publication/PUB100243.html.

1

539

glossaries A glossary is an alphabetical list of definitions of specialized

terms used in a formal report, a manual, or another long

document. You may want to include a glossary if some readers

in your audience are not familiar with specialized or technical

terms you use.

Keep glossary entries concise, and be sure they are written in

language that all the readers of your document can understand.

► Amortize: To write off an expenditure by prorating it over a specific period of time.

Arrange the terms alphabetically, with each entry beginning on

a new line. The definitions then follow the terms, dictionary

style. In a formal report, the glossary begins on a new page and

appears after the appendix(es) and bibliography.

Including a glossary does not relieve you of the responsibility

of defining terms that your reader will not know when those

terms are first mentioned in the text.

540

gobbledygook Gobbledygook is writing that suffers from an overdose of traits

guaranteed to make it stuffy, pretentious, and wordy. Such

traits include the overuse of big and mostly abstract words,

affectation (especially long variants), buzzwords, clichés,

euphemisms, inappropriate jargon, stacked modifiers, and

vague words. (See also abstract / concrete words.)

Gobbledygook is writing that attempts to sound official

(officialese), legal (legalese), or scientific. Consider the

following statement from an auto-repair release form.

LEGALESE I hereby authorize the above repair work to be done along with the necessary material and hereby grant you and/or your employees permission to operate the car or truck herein described on streets, highways, or elsewhere for the purpose of testing and/or inspection. An express mechanic’s lien is hereby acknowledged on above car or truck to secure the amount of repairs thereto.

DIRECT You have my permission to do the repair work listed on this work order and to use the necessary material. You may drive my vehicle to test its performance. I understand that you will keep my vehicle until I have paid for all repairs.

See also clarity, conciseness, plain language, and word

choice.

541

good / well Good is an adjective, and well is an adverb.

ADJECTIVE Janet presented a good plan.

ADVERB She presented the plan well.

Well can also be used as an adjective to describe health (a well

child, wellness programs). See also bad / badly.

542

grammar Grammar is the systematic description of the way words work

together to form a coherent language. In that sense, it is an

explanation of the structure of a language. However, grammar

is popularly taken to mean the set of rules that governs how a

language ought to be spoken and written. In that sense, it refers

to the usage conventions of a language.

Those two meanings of grammar are easily confused. To

clarify the distinction, consider the expression ain’t. Unless

used intentionally to add colloquial flavor, ain’t is unacceptable

because its use is considered nonstandard. Yet taken strictly as

a part of speech, the term functions perfectly well as a verb.

Whether it appears in a declarative sentence (“I ain’t going”) or

an interrogative sentence (“Ain’t I going?”), it conforms to the

normal pattern for all verbs in the English language. Although

readers may not approve of its use, they cannot argue that it is

ungrammatical in such sentences.

To achieve clarity, you need to know grammar both as a

description of the way words work together and as the

conventions of usage. Knowing the conventions of usage helps

you select the appropriate over the inappropriate word or

expression. (See also word choice.) A knowledge of grammar

helps you diagnose and correct problems arising from how

words and phrases function in relation to one another.

Understanding dangling modifiers, for example, helps you

543

avoid or correct a construction that obscures the intended

meaning. For a complete list of grammar entries, see the

Contents by Topic on the inside front cover.

544

grant proposals Grant proposals are written to nonprofit and government

organizations to request the approval of and funding for

projects that solve a problem or fulfill a need. A scientist, for

example, may write a grant proposal to the National Institutes

of Health requesting a specific sum of money to study a new

cancer therapy, or the executive director of Habitat for

Humanity may write a grant proposal to a local government

requesting funding to purchase supplies to construct new

housing for disadvantaged families in the area.

The advice in the entry proposals for assessing audience and

purpose, writing persuasively, maintaining ethics in writing,

and managing a project within a tight deadline applies as well to

writing grant proposals. This entry focuses on the particular

needs of grant-proposal writers.

Granting organizations typically post opportunities, along

with detailed application guidelines, on their Web sites and

specify their requirements for the format and content of

proposals. Most federal, state, and large nonprofit government

grants are now submitted electronically, and various sections

may have imposed word, character, or content limits that are

enforced electronically. When preparing a proposal document,

always organize its elements in the exact order described or

required in the request for proposals (RFP) or in the grant

maker’s guidelines. Although application guidelines and

545

processes may differ from one organization to another, grant

proposals generally require the following sections at a

minimum:

Cover message Title page Application form Introduction (summary) Literature review (if needed) Project narrative

Project description Project outcomes Budget narrative Task schedule

Organization description Conclusion Attachments

Cover Message Usually one page long, the cover message (or letter) should

identify who you are and your professional affiliation. It should

specify the grant that you are applying for, summarize the

proposed project, and include the amount of funding you are

requesting.

Title Page On a single page, show the title of the project, the names of

project staff and their affiliations, the date submitted, and the

546

name of the recipient’s organization. This page serves as the

cover of the grant proposal.

Application Form Especially in online grant applications, an application form may

replace the cover message or letter and title page. This form

may be one or more pages and may require you to check boxes,

fill in blanks, or insert brief descriptions or other information

into text boxes or blank spaces. A word or character limit

(typically 250 – 400 words) may be imposed or enforced. An

official signature (or its electronic equivalent) is often required.

This form may request detailed information about the applicant

organization, such as the staff’s or board of directors’

demographic composition or the organization’s human

resources policies.

Introduction The introduction or summary is your proposal at a glance — it

briefly describes (within a given limit) the problem to be solved

and projects the expected outcomes of your grant proposal. If

substantial research is involved, you may also describe your

proposed research methods (interviews, questionnaires, videos,

observations, and so on) in a separate paragraph. See also

abstracts.

Literature Review The literature review lists the relevant research sources you

547

consulted in preparing your proposal. Also called a References

or Works Cited section, it allows reviewers of your proposal to

assess your familiarity with current research in the field. Is your

research up to date? Thorough? Pertinent? Be selective: Include

only relevant journal articles, books, interviews, broadcasts,

blogs and forums, and other sources. In nonresearch proposals

(those not based on secondary or formal research), a limited

number of citations are frequently included within the project

narrative or as footnotes or endnotes.

Project Narrative The heart of the proposal, the project narrative describes in

detail the scope of the work, expected outcomes, a list of tasks,

a project activity schedule from start to finish, and estimated

costs. Be specific and thorough.

Project Description The project description includes an overview of the project and

details of how the research project or program will be

conducted (its methodology). In nonresearch proposals, include

a succinct statement of need — also called a case statement —

which presents the facts and evidence that support the need for

the project. The information presented can come from

authorities in the field as well as from your organization’s own

experience or research. A logical and persuasive statement of

need demonstrates that your company or nonprofit

organization sufficiently understands the situation and is

therefore capable of addressing it satisfactorily. Clearly indicate

548

why or how your solution improves on existing or previous

ones, and cite evidence to support this. Emphasize the benefits

of the proposed activities for the grant maker’s intended

constituency or target population, and explain why your

solution to the problem or plan to fulfill the need should be

approved. Most RFPs and grant-maker guidelines provide a list

of specific questions for applicants to answer or required topics

that must be persuasively addressed in this section.

Project Outcomes Having described the preparations and justification for the

program, the grant writer must describe the outcomes or

deliverables of the proposal — what the funding organization

can expect as a result of the time, labor, and financial support it

has invested in the program. Outcomes are stated as

quantifiable objectives—improvements in reading scores,

volume of carbon emission reductions, aerobic fitness

measures, and so on. Grant proposals, especially those solicited

by government agencies, must also provide detailed plans for

collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data to evaluate the

success or failure of the research or program in achieving the

stated outcomes.

Budget Narrative Next, include a budget-narrative section that provides a detailed

listing of costs for personnel, equipment, building renovations,

and other grant-related expenses. This information must be

clear, accurate, and arranged in an easily understood format for

549

those evaluating the data (usually in a table). Many granting

organizations, including government agencies, require that

specified budget forms be used. If your proposal is approved,

you are being entrusted with funds belonging to someone else,

and you are accountable for them. Your cost estimates may also

be subject to changes over which you have no control, such as

price increases for equipment, software, or consulting

assistance. The project may also require ongoing funding

following completion of the grant’s tasks. Either provide an

estimate of such costs, or note that they will appear in a Future

Funding or Sustainability section.

Task Schedule Next, prepare a schedule of tasks that need to be performed in

order to implement the program or complete the project.

Arrange them as bulleted points in sequence from first to last,

with due dates for each, or present them in a table or perhaps in

a Gantt chart, as described in graphs.

Organization Description The organization description may follow the Introduction or it

may be placed just prior to the Conclusion, depending on RFP

requirements or the granting organization’s guidelines.

Describe the applicant organization briefly in terms of mission,

history, qualifications, and credibility (significant, related

accomplishments), taking care to include all information

requested in the RFP or grant guidelines. Granting

organizations consider not only the merits of the proposed

550

program or research but also your organization’s standing in

the community and similar advantages.

Conclusion This brief wrap-up section emphasizes the benefits or

advantages of your project. This section affords you one more

opportunity to give the funding organization a reason why your

proposal merits its support. Emphasize the benefits of the

research, program, or other activities for the grant maker’s

intended constituency or target population. Finally, express

your appreciation for the opportunity to submit the proposal,

and close with a statement of your willingness to provide

further information.

Attachments Funding organizations request supporting information, such as

nonprofit-status documentation, copies of legal documents (for

example, articles of incorporation or bylaws), or lists of

information that you may need to design and compose yourself.

Provide a comprehensive list of attachments, and clearly label

each item to guide the grant reviewer in evaluating the proposal

package. See also appendixes.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Grant Proposals

✓ Analyze the granting organization’s RFP or guidelines carefully to

551

best formulate your request to match its funding interests and priorities.

✓ Review the descriptions of proposal contexts, strategies, and types in the proposals entry.

✓ Respond to every question or address every topic requested. ✓ Strive for conciseness in the narrative without sacrificing clarity

— make every word count. ✓ Emphasize the benefits of your proposal to the granting

organization and its constituents. ✓ Follow all instructions meticulously, because failure to include

requested information or to observe format requirements may be grounds for rejection or lack of review.

✓ Review the final grant proposal carefully. Because many online submission systems do not have a spell-check function, draft sections in a word-processing program, then paste them into the electronic form.

552

graphs A graph presents numerical or quantitative data in visual form

and offers several advantages over presenting data within the

text or in tables. Trends, movements, distributions,

comparisons, and cycles are more readily apparent in graphs

than they are in tables. However, although graphs present data

in a more comprehensible form than tables do, they are often

less precise. For that reason, some audiences may need graphs

to be accompanied by tables that give exact data. The types of

graphs described in this entry include line graphs, bar graphs,

pie graphs, and picture graphs. For advice on integrating

graphs within text, see visuals; for information about using

presentation graphics, see presentations. For combining

graphs with other elements, see infographics.

Line Graphs A line graph shows the relationship between two variables or

sets of numbers by plotting points in relation to two axes drawn

at right angles (Figure G–7). The vertical axis usually represents

amounts, and the horizontal axis usually represents increments

of time. Line graphs that portray more than one set of variables

(double-line graphs) allow for comparisons between two sets of

data for the same period of time. You can emphasize the

difference between the two lines by shading the space between

them, as shown in Figure G–7.

553

FIGURE G–7. Double-Line Graph (with Shading)

ETHICS NOTE

Be especially careful to proportion the vertical and horizontal scales so that they present the data precisely and free of visual distortion. To do otherwise is not only inaccurate but potentially unethical. (See ethics in writing.) In Figure G–8 (on page 242), the graph at the left gives the appearance of a slight decline followed by a steady increase in investment returns because the scale is compressed, with some years selectively omitted. The graph at the right represents the trend more accurately because the years are evenly distributed without omissions.

554

FIGURE G–8. Distorted (left) and Distortion-Free (right) Expressions of Data

Bar Graphs Bar graphs consist of horizontal or vertical bars of equal width,

scaled in length to represent some quantity. They are

commonly used to show (1) quantities of the same item at

different times, (2) quantities of different items at the same

time, and (3) quantities of the different parts of an item that

make up a whole (in which case, the segments of the bar graph

must total 100 percent). The horizontal bar graph in Figure G–9

shows the quantities of different items for the same period of

time.

555

FIGURE G–9. Bar Graph (Quantities of Different Items During a Fixed Period)

Bar graphs can also show the different portions of an item

that make up the whole, as shown in Figure G–10. Such a bar

graph is divided according to the appropriate proportions of the

subcomponents of the item. This type of graph, also called a

column graph when constructed vertically, can indicate

multiple items. Where such items represent parts of a whole, as

in Figure G–10, the segments in the bar graph must total 100

percent. Note that in addition to labels, each subdivision of a

bar graph must be marked clearly by color, shading, or

crosshatching, with a key or labels that identify the subdivisions

represented. Be aware that three-dimensional graphs can make

sections seem larger than the amounts they represent.

556

FIGURE G–10. Bar (Column) Graph (Showing the Parts That Make Up the Whole)

A Gantt chart is a type of horizontal bar graph designed to

plan and track the status of projects from beginning to end. As

shown in Figure G–11 (on page 244), the horizontal axis

represents the length of a project divided into time increments

— days, weeks, or months. The timeline usually runs across the

top of the chart. The vertical axis represents the individual tasks

that make up the project and can include a second column

listing the staff responsible for each task. The horizontal bars in

557

the body of the chart identify each task and show its beginning

and end dates. Gantt charts are often prepared with spreadsheet

or project-management software. See also collaborative

writing.

FIGURE G–11. Gantt Chart Showing Project Schedule

Pie Graphs A pie graph presents data as wedge-shaped sections of a circle.

The circle equals 100 percent, or the whole, of some quantity,

and the wedges represent how the whole is divided. Many

times, the data shown in a bar graph could also be depicted in a

pie graph. For example, Figure G–10 shows percentages of a

whole in bar-graph form. Figure G–12 shows the same data

converted into a pie graph, dividing “Your Municipal Tax

Dollars” into wedge-shaped sections that represent percentages,

558

with salaries emphasized. Pie graphs provide a quicker way of

presenting information than can be shown in a table, yet a more

detailed breakdown of the same information often accompanies

a pie graph.

FIGURE G–12. Pie Graph (Showing Percentages of the Whole)

Picture Graphs Picture graphs are modified bar graphs that use pictorial

symbols of the item portrayed. Each symbol corresponds to a

specified quantity of the item, as shown in Figure G–13 (on page

559

246). Note that for precision and clarity, the picture graph

includes the total quantity following the symbols.

FIGURE G–13. Picture Graph

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Creating Graphs FOR ALL GRAPHS

✓ Give your graph a descriptive title that is accurate and concise. ✓ Use, as needed, a key or legend that lists and defines symbols (see

Figure G–7). ✓ Include a source line under the graph at the lower left when the

data come from another source.

560

✓ Place explanatory footnotes directly below the figure caption or label (see Figures G–10 and G–12).

FOR LINE GRAPHS

✓ Indicate the zero point of the graph (the point where the two axes intersect).

✓ Insert a break in the scale if the range of data shown makes it inconvenient to begin at zero.

✓ Divide the vertical axis into equal portions, from the least amount (or zero) at the bottom to the greatest amount at the top.

✓ Divide the horizontal axis into equal units from left to right, and label the units to show what they represent.

✓ Make all lettering read horizontally if possible, although the caption or label for the vertical axis is usually positioned vertically (see Figure G–7).

FOR BAR GRAPHS

✓ Differentiate among the types of data each bar or part of a bar represents by color, shading, or crosshatching.

✓ Avoid three-dimensional graphs when they make bars seem larger than the amounts they represent.

FOR PIE GRAPHS

✓ Make sure that the complete circle is equivalent to 100 percent. ✓ Sequence the wedges clockwise from largest to smallest,

beginning at the 12 o’clock position, whenever possible. ✓ Limit the number of items in the pie graph to avoid clutter and to

ensure that the wedges are thick enough to be clear. (Some software allows users to open and examine wedges in greater detail.)

✓ Give each wedge a distinctive color, pattern, shade, or texture. ✓ Label each wedge with its percentage value, and keep all callouts

561

(labels that identify the wedges) horizontal. ✓ Detach a wedge, as shown in Figure G–12, if you wish to draw

attention to a particular segment of the pie graph.

FOR PICTURE GRAPHS

✓ Use picture graphs to add interest to presentations and documents (such as newsletters) that are aimed at wide audiences.

✓ Choose symbols that are easily recognizable. See also global graphics.

✓ Let each symbol represent the same number of units. ✓ Indicate larger quantities by using more symbols instead of larger

symbols, because relative sizes are difficult to judge accurately. ✓ Indicate the total quantity following the symbols, as shown in

Figure G–13. ✓ Indicate the zero point of the graph when appropriate.

562

H

563

he / she The use of either he or she to refer to both sexes excludes half

of the population. (See also biased language.) To avoid this

problem, you could use the phrases he or she and his or her.

(“Whoever is appointed will find his or her task difficult.”)

However, he or she and his or her are clumsy when used

repeatedly, as are he/she and similar constructions. One

solution is to reword the sentence to use a plural pronoun; if

you do, change the nouns or other pronouns to match the

plural form.

In other cases, you may be able to avoid using a pronoun

altogether.

Of course, a pronoun cannot always be omitted without

changing the meaning of a sentence.

Another solution is to omit troublesome pronouns by using

the imperative mood.

564

headers and footers A header in a formal report or other document appears at the

top of each page, and a footer appears at the bottom of each

page. The header and footer shown in Figure H–1 are typical.

The header or footer should include at least the page number

but may also include the document title, the topic (or subtopic)

of a section, the date of the document, the names of the author

or recipients, and other identifying information to help readers

keep track of where they are in the document. Keep your

headers and footers concise, because too much information in

them can create visual clutter. For examples of headers used in

correspondence, see letters and memos. See also layout and

design and writing for the Web.

565

FIGURE H–1. Header and Footer

566

headings Headings (also called heads) are titles or subtitles that highlight

main topics and signal topic changes within the body of a

document, whether an e-mail, a memo, a report, or a Web

page. (See also writing for the Web.) Headings help readers

find information and divide the material into comprehensible

segments. Some documents, such as formal reports and

proposals, may need several levels of headings (as shown in

Figure H–2 (on page 250)) to indicate major divisions,

subdivisions, and even smaller units. If possible, avoid using

more than four levels of headings. See also layout and design.

Headings typically represent the major topics of a document.

In a short document, you can use the major divisions of your

outline as headings; in a longer document, you may need to use

both major and minor divisions.

General Heading Style No one format for headings is correct. Often an organization

settles on a standard format, which everyone in that

organization follows. Sometimes a client for whom a report or

proposal is being prepared requires a particular format. In the

absence of specific guidelines, follow the system illustrated in

Figure H–2.

567

FIGURE H–2. Headings Used in a Document

568

Decimal Numbering System The decimal numbering system uses a combination of numbers

and decimal points to differentiate among levels of headings.

Some documents, such as policies and procedures, benefit

from the decimal numbering system for ease of cross-

referencing sections. For an example of the decimal numbering

system of headings, see outlining.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Headings

✓ Use headings to signal a new topic. Use a lower-level heading to indicate a new subtopic within the larger topic.

✓ Make headings concise but specific enough to be informative, as in Figure H–2.

✓ Avoid too many or too few headings or levels of headings; too many clutter a document, and too few fail to provide recognizable structure.

✓ Ensure that headings at the same level are of relatively equal importance and have parallel structure.

✓ Subdivide sections only as needed; when you do, try to subdivide them into at least two lower-level headings.

✓ Do not allow a heading to substitute for discussion; the text should read as if the heading were not there.

✓ Do not leave a heading as the final line of a page. If two lines of text cannot fit below a heading, start the section at the top of the next page.

569

hyphens The hyphen (-) is used primarily for linking and separating

words and parts of words. The hyphen often improves clarity

(as in re-sign and resign). The hyphen is sometimes confused

with the dash (—), which has many other functions.

Hyphens with Compound Words Some compound words are formed with hyphens (able-bodied,

over-the-counter). Hyphens are also used with multiword

numbers from twenty-one through ninety-nine and fractions

when they are written out (three-quarters). Most current

dictionaries indicate whether compound words are

hyphenated, written as one word, or written as separate words.

Hyphens with Modifiers Two- and three-word modifiers that express a single thought

are hyphenated when they precede a noun.

► It was a well-written report.

However, a modifying phrase is not hyphenated when it follows

the noun it modifies.

► The report was well written.

If each of the words can modify the noun without the aid of the

other modifying word or words, do not use a hyphen (a new

laser printer). If the first word is an adverb ending in -ly, do not

570

use a hyphen (a privately held company). A hyphen is always

used as part of a letter or number modifier (A-frame house, 22-

inch monitor).

In a series of unit modifiers that all have the same term

following the hyphen, the term following the hyphen need not

be repeated throughout the series; for greater smoothness and

brevity, use the term only at the end of the series.

► The third-, fourth-, and fifth-floor laboratories were inspected.

Hyphens with Prefixes and Suffixes A hyphen is used with a prefix when the root word is a proper

noun (pre-Columbian, anti-American, post-Newtonian). A

hyphen may be used when the prefix ends and the root word

begins with the same vowel (re-enter, anti-inflammatory). A

hyphen is used when ex- means “former” (ex-dean, ex-CEO) and

may be used to emphasize a prefix. (“He is anti-change.”) The

suffix-elect is hyphenated (president-elect).

Hyphens and Clarity The presence or absence of a hyphen can alter the meaning of a

sentence.

AMBIGUOUS We need a biological waste management system.

571

That sentence could mean one of two things: (1) We need a

system to manage “biological waste” or (2) We need a

“biological” system to manage waste.

CLEAR We need a biological-waste management system. [1]

CLEAR We need a biological waste-management system. [2]

To avoid confusion, some words and modifiers should always

be hyphenated. Re-cover does not mean the same thing as

recover, for example; the same is true of un-ionized and

unionized.

Other Uses of the Hyphen Hyphens are used between letters to show how a word is

spelled.

► In his e-mail, he misspelled believed as b-e-l-e-i-v-e-d.

The en dash (see dashes) is preferred in ranges (pages 44–46,

letters A–L), but hyphens are used when the en dash is not

available as a special character.

Hyphens are commonly used in telephone numbers (800-555-

1212), Web addresses (computer-parts.com), filenames (report-

15.doc), and similar number/symbol combinations. See also

dates.

Hyphens are also used to divide words at the end of a line,

especially for full-justified margins within small columns. The

572

following are standard guidelines for using hyphens to divide

words at the end of lines.

Do not divide one-syllable words. Divide words at syllable breaks, which you can determine with a dictionary. Do not divide a word if only one letter would remain at the end of a line or if fewer than three letters would start a new line. Do not divide a word at the end of a page; carry the word over to the next page. If a word already has a hyphen in its spelling, divide the word at the existing hyphen. Do not use a hyphen to break a URL or an e-mail address at the end of a line.

573

I

574

idioms An idiom is a group of words that has a special meaning apart

from its literal meaning. Someone “runs for political office” in

the United States, for example, while a candidate “stands for

office” in the United Kingdom. Because such expressions are

specific to a culture, nonnative speakers must memorize them.

Idioms are often constructed with prepositions that follow

adjectives (similar to), nouns (need for), and verbs (approve

of). Some idioms can change meaning slightly with the

preposition used, as in agree to (“consent”) and agree with (“in

accord”). The following are typical idioms that give nonnative

speakers trouble.

call off [cancel] hand in [submit]

call on [visit a client] hand out [distribute]

drop in on [visit unexpectedly] look up [research a subject]

find out [discover information] run into [meet by chance]

get through with [finish] run out of [deplete supply]

give up [quit] watch out for [be careful]

Idioms often provide helpful shortcuts. In fact, they can make

writing more natural and lively. Avoid them, however, if your

writing is to be translated into another language or read in other

English-speaking countries. Because no language system can

fully explain such usages, a reader must check dictionaries or

usage guides to interpret the meaning of idioms. See also

English as a second language, global communication, and

575

international correspondence.

576

illustrations (see visuals)

577

imply / infer If you imply something, you hint at or suggest it. (“Her e-mail

implied that the project would be delayed.”) If you infer

something, you reach a conclusion based on evidence or

interpretation. (“The manager inferred from the e-mail that the

project would be delayed.”)

578

in / into In means “inside of”; into implies movement from the outside

to the inside. (“We were in a meeting when the intern brought

copies of the contract into the conference room.”)

579

in order to Most often, in order to is a meaningless filler phrase that is

dropped into a sentence without thought. See also conciseness.

However, the phrase in order to is sometimes essential to the

meaning of a sentence.

► The committee will need to leave by 3 p.m. in order to make the 5 p.m. flight.

In order to also helps control the pace of a sentence, even when

it is not essential to the meaning of the sentence.

► The committee must know the estimated costs in order to evaluate the feasibility of the project.

580

in terms of When used to indicate a shift from one kind of language or

terminology to another, the phrase in terms of can be useful.

► In terms of gross sales, the year has been relatively successful; however, in terms of net income, it has been discouraging.

When simply dropped into a sentence because it easily comes to

mind, in terms of is meaningless affectation. See also

conciseness.

581

incident / incidence Incident refers to a particular occurrence or event. (“The

incident went unreported.”) Incidence refers to the rate of

occurrence of something. (“We found a high incidence of type 2

diabetes.”)

582

incident reports The incident report is used to analyze such events as accidents,

failures, or health emergencies. For example, the report shown

in Figure I–1 describes an accident involving personal injury.

The report assesses the causes of the problem and suggests

changes necessary to prevent its recurrence. Because it is

usually an internal document, an incident report normally

appears as a memo or on a standard incident report form.

583

584

FIGURE I–1. Incident Report

In the subject line, state the precise problem you are

reporting. Then, in the body of the report, provide a detailed,

precise description of the event. What happened? Where and

when did the problem occur? Was anybody hurt? Was there any

property damage? Was there a work stoppage?

In your conclusion, state what has been or will be done to

correct the conditions that led to the event. That may include,

for example, recommendations for training in safety practices,

using improved equipment, and wearing protective clothing.

See also reports.

ETHICS NOTE

Because insurance claims, workers’ compensation awards, and even lawsuits may hinge on the information contained in an incident report, be sure to include precise times, dates, locations, treatment of injuries, names of any witnesses, and any other crucial information. (Notice the careful use of language and factual detail in Figure I–1.) Be thorough and accurate in your analysis of the problem, and support any judgments or conclusions with facts. Be objective: Always use a neutral tone, and avoid assigning blame. If you speculate about the cause of the problem, make it clear to your readers that you are speculating. See also ethics in writing.

585

indexing An index is an alphabetical list of all the major topics and

subtopics in a written work. It cites the pages where each topic

can be found and allows readers to find particular topics

quickly and easily, as shown in Figure I–2. The index comes at

the very end of the work. Do not attempt to compile an index

until pages are finalized, because terminology and page

numbers will not be accurate before then.

FIGURE I–2. Index Entry (with Main Entry, Subentries, and Sub-subentries)

The key to compiling a useful index is selectivity. Instead of

listing every possible reference to a topic, select references to

passages where the topic is fully discussed or significantly

mentioned. For index entries like those in Figure I–2, choose

key terms that best represent a topic. Key terms are those words

or phrases that a reader would most likely look for in an index.

For example, the key terms in a reference to the development of

586

legislation about environmental impact statements would

probably be legislation and environmental impact statement,

not development. In selecting index terms, use chapter or

section titles only if they include such key terms. For index

entries on tables and visuals, use the words from their titles

that will function as key terms a reader might seek.

Most word-processing programs include tools that provide a

quick and efficient way to create an alphabetical subject index

of your document. The index generated by your word-

processing software will still need careful review, but using the

software to create the first draft can save time. If you need to

index a highly complex document, you may want to consider

specialized indexing software, designed for use by professional

indexers and publishers.

587

indiscreet / indiscrete Indiscreet means “lacking in prudence or sound judgment.”

(“His public discussion of the proposed merger was

indiscreet.”) Indiscrete means “not divided or divisible into

parts.” (“The separate departments, once combined, become

indiscrete.”) See also discreet / discrete.

588

infographics Infographics are visual forms of communication that make

complex information understandable by combining text,

numbers, icons, graphs, flowcharts, drawings, and other

visuals into a unified whole, as shown in Figure I–3. They are

often used to educate wide audiences and can be especially

useful for instructions and presentations. Infographics might

be used to show an overview of a process (how to take out a

personal loan), a natural phenomenon (the evolution of an

animal species), an accident (the anatomy of a train wreck), or a

project plan (public transportation options in a city and

projected passenger use). Each of these subjects might prove

difficult to illustrate concisely with text or with images alone.

See also tables.

589

FIGURE I–3. Infographic

SOURCE: Department of Energy, https://www.energy.gov/eere/bioenergy/bioenergizeme-infographic-challenge- travel-future-bioenergy

590

Infographics can be static, noninteractive visuals intended

for public display, print publication, or high-resolution online

download. They can also take digital, interactive forms,

including such tools as mouseover pop-ups that reveal

additional details or animated elements that showcase multiple

cause-and-effect scenarios.

They are frequently created by graphic designers who

collaborate with subject-area experts on the content. However,

professionals without a formal design background can also

create infographics for the workplace using a range of free

online tools. Search for “tools for creating infographics,” or visit

such sites as piktochart.com, infogr.am, and creately.com. See

Writer’s Checklist: Creating Infographics (on page 260).

Note the infographic in Figure I–3 depicting how bioenergy

fuels transportation. It combines explanatory text, typographic

devices, images, and data, all organized into a unified overview

of this growing trend. It also cites the source information for

the infographic. This process could have been described in a

text-dense article, but the impact and explanatory power of the

graphic are striking.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Creating Infographics

✓ Use images appropriate to the topic, purpose, and audience. ✓ Select images (illustrations and icons), where possible, that are

591

self-explanatory. ✓ Arrange text and images in the appropriate sequence to illustrate

a process. ✓ Do not use dated or obsolete images or icons. ✓ Use culturally neutral images for international audiences (see

global graphics). ✓ Use design elements—logo, typeface, colors—consistent with

your organization’s branding practices. ✓ Ensure that all types of data, graphics, and illustrations are

uniform in color and design (see layout and design). ✓ Check the text for conciseness, clarity, and accuracy. ✓ Cite your sources of information appropriately (see plagiarism).

592

inquiries and responses The purpose of writing inquiry messages is to obtain responses

to requests or to specific questions, as in Figure I–4, which

shows a college student’s request for information from an

official at a power company. Inquiries may benefit either the

reader (as in requests for information about a product that a

company sells) or the writer (as in the student’s inquiry in

Figure I–4). Inquiries that primarily benefit the writer require

the use of persuasion and special consideration of the needs of

the audience. See also correspondence.

593

FIGURE I–4. Inquiry

Respond to an inquiry by answering promptly, and be sure to

answer every inquiry or question asked, as shown in Figure I–5.

How long and how detailed your response should be depends

on the nature of the question and the information the writer

provides. If you have received an inquiry that you feel you

cannot answer, find out who can and forward the inquiry to that

person. The person who replies to a forwarded inquiry should

594

state in the first paragraph of the response who has forwarded

the original inquiry, as shown in Figure I–5.

FIGURE I–5. Response to an Inquiry

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Inquiries and Responding

✓ Make your questions specific, clear, and concise to receive a prompt, helpful reply.

595

✓ Phrase your request so that the reader will know immediately the type of information you are seeking, why you need it, and how you will use it.

✓ Present questions in a numbered or bulleted list, if possible, to make it easy for your reader to respond.

✓ Keep the number of questions to a minimum to improve your chances of receiving a prompt response.

✓ Offer some incentive for the reader to respond, if possible, such as sharing the results of your research. See “you” viewpoint.

✓ Promise to keep responses confidential, when appropriate. ✓ Provide a date by which you need a response. ✓ Close by thanking the reader for taking the time to respond, and

provide your contact information, as shown in Figure I–4. ✓ Respond to an inquiry promptly if you have the information and

authority. ✓ Check organizational policy and special issues related to your

response. ✓ Notify the writer if you need to forward the inquiry to someone

else for response.

596

inside / inside of In the phrase inside of, the word of is redundant and should be

omitted.

Using inside of to mean “in less time than” is colloquial and

should be avoided in writing.

597

instant messaging and live chat Instant messaging and live chat are communications media that

allow both real-time text communications and the transfer of

text or other files, such as an image or a document. (See also

text messaging.) Instant messaging and live chat are especially

useful to those who are working in an environment that

demands near-instant, brief written exchanges between two or

more participants. See also e-mail and selecting the medium.

When writing instant messages or chat, keep your responses

simple and to the point, covering only one subject in each

message to prevent confusion and inappropriate responses.

Because screen space is often limited and speed is essential,

many who communicate this way use abbreviations and

shortened spellings (“u” for “you”). Be sure that your reader will

understand such abbreviations; when in doubt, avoid them.

ETHICS NOTE

Be sure to follow your employer’s policies, such as those concerning confidentiality. If no specific policy exists, check with your management before using these media.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

598

Privacy and Security with Instant Messaging and Chat

✓ Set up distinct business and professional contact lists (or accounts) to avoid inadvertently sending a personal message to a business associate.

✓ Learn the options (such as away messages) and security limitations, and set the preferences that best suit your use of the system.

✓ Save significant exchanges (or logs) for future reference. ✓ Be aware that instant messages and chats can be saved by your

recipients and may be archived by your employer. (See the Professionalism Note on page 168.)

✓ Do not use professional IM or chat for office gossip or inappropriate exchanges.

599

instructions Business writers often prepare many kinds of instructions for

coworkers. (See also policies and procedures.) Instructions

that are clear and easy to follow can build goodwill because they

help readers complete tasks efficiently and prevent

miscommunication. To write effective instructions, you must

thoroughly understand the process or system you are

describing. Keep in mind that the most effective instructions

often combine written elements and visual elements that

reinforce each other. See also process explanation.

Writing Instructions Consider the level of knowledge of primary and secondary

readers in your audience. If all your readers have good

backgrounds in the topic, you can use fairly specialized terms.

If that is not the case, use plain language or include a glossary

of specialized terms that you cannot avoid. See also

repurposing.

Clear and easy-to-follow instructions are written as

commands in the imperative mood, active voice, and

(whenever possible) present tense.

Although conciseness is important in instructions, clarity is

essential. You can make sentences shorter by leaving out some

600

articles (a, an, the), some pronouns (you, this, these), and

some verbs, but such sentences may result in telegraphic style

and be harder for the reader to understand. For example, the

first version of the following instruction for submitting a

medical claim is confusing.

CONFUSING Submit negotiated claim to HR with statement from attending.

CLEAR Submit the negotiated claim to the Human Resources Office with the statement of the attending physician who prescribed the treatment.

One good way to make instructions easy to follow is to divide

them into short, simple steps in their proper sequence. Steps

can be organized with words (first, next, finally) that indicate

time or sequence.

► First, determine the problem the customer is having with the computer. Next, observe the system in operation. At that time, question the customer until you are sure that the problem has been explained completely. Then analyze the problem and make any necessary adjustments.

You can also use numbers, as in the following:

1. Open

601

the top cover and remove the toner cartridge.

2. Use the green handle to lift the paper access plate.

3. Slowly and carefully pull the jammed paper out of the

printer.

Consider using the numbered- or bulleted-list feature of your

word-processing software to create sequenced steps. See lists.

Plan ahead for your reader. If the instructions in step 2 will

affect a process in step 9, say so in step 2. Sometimes your

instructions have to make clear that two operations must be

performed simultaneously. Either state that fact in an

introduction to the specific instructions, or include both

operations in one step.

CONFUSING 1. Hold down the CONTROL key. 2. Press the RETURN key before releasing the CONTROL key.

CLEAR 1. While holding down the CONTROL key, press the RETURN key.

Alert your readers to any potentially hazardous actions before

they reach the applicable step.

If your instructions involve many steps, break them into

stages, each with a separate heading so that each stage begins

again with step 1. Using headings as dividers is especially

important if your reader is likely to be performing the operation

as he or she reads the instructions.

602

Illustrating Instructions Illustrations should be developed together with the text,

especially for complex instructions. Using drawings,

flowcharts, infographics, maps, photographs, and other

visuals fosters clarity by enabling your readers to identify

relationships more easily than they would from long

explanations.

Consider the layout and design of your instructions to most

effectively integrate visuals. Highlight important visuals and

text by making them stand out from the surrounding text.

Consider using boxes and boldface or distinctive headings.

Experiment with font style, size, and color to determine which

devices are most effective.

The instructions in Figure I–6 (page 266) guide the reader

through the steps of streaking a saucer-sized disk of material

(called agar) used to grow bacteria colonies. The purpose is to

thin out the original specimen (the inoculum) so that the

bacteria will grow in small, isolated colonies. This section could

be part of other, larger instructional documents for which

streaking is only one step among others.

603

FIGURE I–6. Illustrated Instructions

Finally, to test the accuracy and clarity of your instructions,

604

ask someone who is not familiar with the task to follow your

directions. A first-time user can spot missing steps or point out

passages that should be worded more clearly.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Instructions

✓ Use the imperative mood and the active voice. ✓ Use short sentences and simple present tense as much as

possible. ✓ Avoid jargon that your readers might not know, including

undefined abbreviations. ✓ Do not use elegant variation (two different words for the same

thing). See also affectation. ✓ Eliminate any ambiguity. ✓ Use effective visuals and highlighting devices. ✓ Test your instructions by having someone follow them while you

observe. ✓ Provide a warning before any potentially hazardous steps.

605

insure / ensure / assure Insure, ensure, and assure all mean “make secure or certain.”

Assure refers to people, and it alone has the connotation of

setting a person’s mind at rest. (“I assure you that the

equipment will be available.”) Ensure and insure mean “make

secure from harm.” Only insure is widely used in the sense of

guaranteeing the value of life or property.

► We need all the data to ensure the success of the project. ► We should insure the contents of the warehouse.

606

intensifiers Intensifiers are adverbs that emphasize degree, such as very,

quite, rather, such, and too. Although intensifiers serve a

legitimate and necessary function, unnecessary intensifiers can

weaken your writing. Eliminate those that do not make an

obvious contribution, or replace them with specific details. See

also conciseness, emphasis.

Some words (such as perfect, impossible, and final) do not

logically permit intensification because, by definition, they do

not allow degrees of comparison. Although usage often ignores

that logical restriction, avoid such comparisons in business

writing. See also adjectives, conciseness, and equal / unique /

perfect.

607

interface An interface is a surface that provides a common boundary

between two bodies or areas. The bodies or areas may be

conceptual or physical (“the interface of a computer and an

external storage device”). Do not use interface as a substitute

for the verbs cooperate, interact, or even work with. See also

affectation and buzzwords.

608

interjections An interjection is a word or phrase standing alone or inserted

into a sentence to exclaim or to command attention.

Grammatically, it has no connection to the sentence. An

interjection can be strong (Hey! Ouch! Wow!) or mild (oh, well,

indeed). A strong interjection is followed by an exclamation

mark.

► Wow! Profits more than doubled last quarter.

A weak interjection is followed by a comma.

► Well, we need to rethink the proposal.

An interjection inserted into a sentence usually requires a

comma before it and after it.

► We must, indeed, rethink the proposal.

Because they get their main expressive force from sound,

interjections are more common in speech than in writing. Use

them sparingly.

609

international correspondence Business correspondence varies among national cultures.

Organizational patterns, persuasive strategies, forms of

courtesy, levels of comfort with uncertainty, and ideas about

efficiency differ from country to country. For example, in the

United States, direct, concise correspondence usually

demonstrates courtesy by not wasting the reader’s time. In

many other countries, however, such directness and brevity

may suggest to readers that the writer is dismissive or lacking in

manners. (See audience and tone.) Similarly, a U.S. writer

might consider one brief letter or e-mail sufficient to

communicate a request, while a writer in another country

might expect an exchange of three or four e-mails to pave the

way for action.

Cultural Differences in Correspondence When you read correspondence from businesspeople in other

cultures or countries, be alert to variations in such features as

customary expressions, openings, and closings. For example,

business writers in some cultures traditionally use indirect

openings that may express good wishes about the recipient’s

family or compliment the reader’s success or prosperity.

Consider deeper issues as well, such as how writers from other

610

cultures express bad news. Some cultures traditionally express

negative messages, such as refusals, indirectly to avoid

embarrassing the recipient. Such differences in

correspondence are often based on cultural perceptions of

time, face-saving, and other traditions. The features and

communication styles of specific national cultures are complex;

the entries global communication and global graphics provide

information and resources for cross-cultural study.

Cross-Cultural Examples Figures I–7 and I–8 show a draft and a final version of a letter

written by an American businessperson to a Japanese

businessperson. The opening and closing of the draft in Figure

I–7 do not include enough of the politeness strategies that are

important in Japanese culture, and the informal salutation

inappropriately uses the recipient’s first name (Dear Ichiro:).

This draft also contains idioms and figures of speech (looking

forward, company family), jargon (transport), contractions

(I’m, don’t), informal language (just e-mail or fax, Cheers), and

humor and allusion (“ptomaine palace” across from our main

offices).

611

612

FIGURE I–7. Inappropriate International Correspondence (Draft Marked for Revision)

613

614

615

FIGURE I–8. Appropriate International Correspondence

Compare that letter to the one in Figure I–8, which is written

in language that is courteous, literal, and specific. This revised

letter begins with concern about the recipient’s family and

prosperity because that opening honors traditional Japanese

patterns in business correspondence. The letter is free of slang,

idioms, and jargon. The sentences are shorter than in the draft;

in addition, the writer uses bulleted lists to break up the

paragraphs, avoids contractions, spells out months, and uses

twenty-four-hour–clock time.

When writing for international readers, rethink the

ingrained habits that define how you express yourself, learn as

much as you can about the cultural expectations of others, and

focus on politeness strategies that demonstrate your respect for

readers. Doing so will help you achieve clarity and mutual

understanding with international readers.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing International Correspondence

✓ Observe the guidelines for courtesy, such as those in the Writer’s Checklist: Using Tone to Build Goodwill on page 112.

✓ Write clear and complete sentences: Unusual word order or rambling sentences will frustrate and confuse readers. See garbled sentences.

✓ Avoid an overly simplified style that may offend or any

616

affectation that may confuse the reader. See also English as a second language.

✓ Avoid humor, irony, and sarcasm; they are easily misunderstood outside their cultural context.

✓ Do not use idioms, jargon, slang expressions, unusual figures of speech, or allusions to events or attitudes particular to life in the United States. See clarity and style.

✓ Consider whether necessary technical terminology can be found in abbreviated English-language dictionaries; if it cannot, carefully define such terminology.

✓ Do not use contractions or abbreviations that may not be clear to international readers.

✓ Avoid inappropriate informality, such as using first names too quickly.

✓ Write out dates, whether in the month-day-year style (June 11, 2018, not 6/11/18) used in the United States or the day-month-year style (11 June 2018, not 11/6/18) used in many other parts of the world.

✓ Specify time zones or refer to international standards, such as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).

✓ Use international measurement standards, such as the metric system (18 °C, 14 cm, 45 kg), where possible.

✓ Consult local laws concerning e-mail to ensure that you are in compliance with those regulations, particularly marketing messages. For example, some countries require businesses to have an individual’s express consent before sending that person any e-mail messages.

✓ Ask someone from your intended audience’s culture or with appropriate expertise to review your draft before you complete your final proofreading.

617

interviewing for information Interviewing others who have knowledge of your subject is

often an essential method of research in business writing.

Determining the Proper Person to Interview Many times, your subject or purpose logically points to the

proper person to interview for information. For example, if you

were writing a feasibility report about marketing consumer

products in India, you would want to interview someone with

extensive experience in that area. The following sources can

help you determine the appropriate person to interview: (1)

workplace colleagues or faculty in appropriate academic

departments, (2) local chapters of professional societies, (3)

“Contact” and “About” sections on organizational Web sites, and

(4) targeted Internet searches.

Preparing for the Interview Before the interview, learn as much as possible about the

person you are going to interview and the organization for

which he or she works.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

618

When you contact the prospective interviewee, explain who you are, why you would like an interview, the subject and purpose of the interview, the best setting or medium for the interview (in person, phone, videoconference, e-mail), and approximately how much time it will take. You should also ask permission if you plan to record the interview, and let your interviewee know that you will allow him or her to review your draft.

After you have made the appointment, prepare a list of

questions to ask your interviewee. Avoid vague, general

questions. A question such as “Do you think the Web would be

helpful for you?” is too general to elicit useful information. It is

better to ask specific but open-ended questions, such as the

following: “Many physicians in your specialty are using the Web

to answer routine patient questions. How might providing such

information on your Web site affect your relationship with your

patients?”

Conducting the Interview Arrive promptly or connect on time if videoconferencing, and

be prepared to guide the discussion. During the interview, take

only memory-jogging notes that will help you recall the

conversation later; do not ask your interviewee to slow down so

that you can take detailed notes. As the interview is reaching a

close, take a few moments to skim your notes and ask the

interviewee to clarify anything that is ambiguous.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

619

If you plan to conduct an interview using videoconferencing, find an environment that is quiet and allows you to focus on the interview. Be mindful of your surroundings, personal appearance, and the appearance of your videoconferencing platform because all will be conveyed to the person you are interviewing. Make sure that you can take notes in a way that allows you to maintain your focus on your subject, as described in listening. Finally, ensure that you are using high-quality, reliable software and connections.

Expanding Your Notes Soon After the Interview Immediately after leaving the interview, use your memory-

jogging notes to help you mentally review the interview and

expand those notes. Do not postpone this step; otherwise, you

risk forgetting important points. See also note-taking.

Interviewing by Phone or E-mail When an interviewee is not available for a face-to-face meeting

or video-conference, consider a phone interview. Most of the

principles for conducting face-to-face interviews apply to phone

interviews; be aware, however, that phone calls do not offer the

important nonverbal cues of face-to-face or video meetings.

Consider using a high-quality headset or speakerphone to make

note taking easier.

Another alternative is to consider an e-mail interview, in

which you exchange a number of back-and-forth messages.

620

Such an interview, however, lacks the spontaneity and the

immediacy of an in-person, a video, or a phone conversation.

Before you send any questions, make sure that your contact is

willing to participate and respond to follow-up clarifications. As

a courtesy, give the respondent a general idea of the number of

questions you plan to ask and the level of detail you expect.

When you send the questions, ask for a reasonable deadline

from the interviewee (“Would you be able to send your

response by . . . ?”).

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Interviewing Successfully

✓ Be pleasant but purposeful. You are there to get information, so don’t be timid about asking leading questions on the subject.

✓ Use the list of questions you have prepared, starting with the less complex topics to get the conversation started and moving toward the more challenging ones.

✓ Let your interviewee do most of the talking. Remember that the interviewee is the expert.

✓ Be objective. Do not offer your opinions on the subject. You are there to get information, not to debate.

✓ Ask additional questions as they arise. ✓ Do not get sidetracked. If the interviewee strays too far from the

subject, ask a specific question to direct the conversation back on track.

✓ If you use audio or video recording, do not let it lure you into relaxing so that you neglect to ask crucial questions.

✓ After thanking the interviewee, ask permission to contact him or her again to clarify a point or two as you complete your interview

621

notes. ✓ A day or two after the interview, send a thank-you note to the

interviewee.

622

interviewing for a job Job interviews can take place in person, by phone, or by Skype

or a similar program and may last thirty minutes to several

hours. Sometimes an initial job interview is followed by a series

of additional interviews. Often just one or two people conduct

the interview, but on occasion a group or panel of four or more

attend. Because it is impossible to know exactly what to expect,

it is important to be well prepared. See also job search.

Before the Interview Before the interview, learn everything you can about the

organization, drawing on both internal, company-produced

materials—including Web sites, annual reports, and corporate

advertisements—and external sources—such as newspaper

articles about an organization and industry reports ranking a

company alongside its competitors. Ask yourself questions such

as the following:

What kind of organization (profit, nonprofit, government) is it? What are the mission, goals, and objectives of the organization? What types of services or products does the company provide? What is the organization’s history, and what sort of reputation has it built over time? Does the company operate locally, regionally, or

623

internationally? Is the company privately owned or employee owned? How many employees are there? Is the company a subsidiary of a larger operation? How long has the company been in business? How does the company differentiate itself from its competitors?

How does it advertise its mission, expectations, and benefits to potential employees? What strategies does it employ to market its products and services to clients or consumers?

Where and how will I fit in? Does there appear to be opportunity for advancement?

You can obtain information from current employees, the

company’s Web site, press releases, prospectuses, annual

reports, business articles about the company, and local news

sources. The company’s Web site in particular may help you

learn about the company’s size, sales volume, product line,

credit rating, branch locations, subsidiary companies, new

products and services, expansion plans, and similar

information. Careful Internet research can provide important

background information, but do not hesitate to seek help from a

librarian for sources accessible through a library, such as Dun

& Bradsteet’s Million Dollar Directory, Standard & Poor’s

Register of Corporations, Directors and Executives, and

Thomas’ Register.

Try to anticipate the questions an interviewer might ask, and

624

think through your answers in advance. Be sure you understand

a question before answering it, and avoid responding too

quickly with a rehearsed reply. The most appealing tone to

adopt for interviews is conversational, which will allow you to

come across as natural and relaxed as opposed to overly

rehearsed. The following are traditional questions you might be

asked during an interview:

What are your short-term and long-term occupational goals? Where do you see yourself five years from now? What are your major strengths and weaknesses? Do you work better with others or alone? What academic or career accomplishment are you particularly proud of? Describe it. Why are you leaving your current job? May we contact your previous employer? Why do you want to work for this organization? What will you bring to the organization? What salary and benefits do you expect? (see page 280 for salary negotiations) What is an example of a mistake from which you learned something valuable? What is your greatest accomplishment? Why?

Some employers, however, rather than ask straightforward

questions, use behavioral interviews that focus on asking the

candidate to provide examples or respond to hypothetical

situations. Interviewers who use behavior-based questions are

625

looking for specific examples from your experience. Prepare for

the behavioral interview by recollecting challenging situations

or problems that you successfully resolved. Examples of

behavior-based questions include the following:

Tell me about a time when you experienced conflict while on a team. If I were your boss and you disagreed with a decision I made, what would you do? How have you used your leadership skills to bring about change? Tell me about a time when you failed and what you learned from the experience.

Other kinds of interviews are also becoming more common.

For example, airline companies have routinely interviewed

multiple applicants for onboard positions simultaneously in

group settings. Surrounded by job applicants, individuals are

positioned to respond to a crisis with a passenger (played by an

actor) or a technical failure. As they respond, individuals or

groups with the authority to make hiring decisions evaluate

applicants’ decision-making choices and group dynamics. It is

important in such settings to consider which outcomes are most

in line with the organization’s goals and values.

Organizations are sometimes willing to share information

about their interviewing approach when scheduling applicants.

Feel free to inquire about the type of interview process you

might expect beforehand, and ask whether it would be

626

appropriate to bring particular materials with you to the

interview (see the following section, “During the Interview”) or

whether you might be better prepared in other ways. Maintain a

confident and enthusiastic tone when asking questions about

what to expect during the interview, since the goal should be to

communicate your desire to make a professional impression on

the interviewer and other members of the organization.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Plan to arrive ten to fifteen minutes early to the interview; never be late. Always bring extra copies of your résumé, a note pad, samples of your work or portfolio (if applicable), and a list of references with contact information. Turn off any electronic devices prior to your arrival. If you are asked to complete an application form, read it carefully before you write and proofread it when you are finished. The form provides a written record for company files and indicates to the company how well you follow directions and complete a task.

During the Interview The interview enables a potential employer to learn about you,

and it allows you to learn how you might fit into that

organization. The interview actually begins when you arrive.

What you wear and how you act make a first impression. In

general, dress professionally and in a manner that is

appropriate for working in the particular organization and in

the position for which you are applying. Usually, it is wise to

dress simply and conservatively, avoid extremes in fragrance

627

and cosmetics, and be well groomed. Also, be polite to other

employees you meet. Think of the interview from start to finish

as your first day on the job. First impressions matter. The

development of a professional identity begins early—if not

when you enter college, then by the time you start taking

courses in your major area of study—and continues to take

shape as you start your career.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Be aware that visible tattoos and body piercings are not acceptable in many white-collar and service-industry positions. Employers are within their legal rights to maintain such a policy if they believe your appearance might negatively affect the image of the organization. Act prudently if you suspect tattoos and piercings are not acceptable— cover tattoos and remove piercings.

Behavior After introductions, thank the interviewer for his or her time,

express your pleasure at meeting him or her, and remain

standing until you are offered a seat. Sit up straight (good

posture suggests self-assurance), maintain eye contact with the

interviewer, and try to appear relaxed and confident. During

the interview, use nervous energy to your advantage by

channeling it into the alertness that you will need to listen and

respond effectively. Do not attempt to take extensive notes. You

can jot down a few facts, but keep your focus on the

interviewer. Do not use an electronic device (laptop or tablet)

628

unless you need to showcase a portfolio. See also listening.

Responses When you answer questions, stay on topic. Respond directly to

the question, and then provide concrete evidence to support

your answer. For example, if you reveal to the interviewer that

you do not have formal leadership experience, refer to a

specific officer position that you were elected to in an

organization, or describe your responsibilities as a trainer for

other employees at your part-time job during college. Avoid

simple yes or no answers—they usually do not allow the

interviewer to learn enough about you. Some interviewers allow

a silence to fall just to see how you will react. The burden of

conducting the interview is the interviewer’s, not yours—and he

or she may interpret your rush to fill a void in the conversation

as a sign of insecurity. If such a silence makes you

uncomfortable, be ready to ask an intelligent question about the

company, drawing on the research you have done about the

organization and the particular position to which you are

applying.

If the interviewer overlooks important points, bring them up.

Let the interviewer mention salary first. Doing so yourself may

indicate that you are more interested in the money than in the

work. Make sure, however, that you are aware of prevailing

salaries and benefits in your field and geographic region.

Interviewers look for a degree of self-confidence and an

629

applicant’s understanding of the field, as well as genuine

interest in the field, the company, and the job. Ask questions to

communicate your interest in the job and the company.

Interviewers respond favorably to applicants who can

communicate and present themselves well.

ETHICS NOTE

Questions that seem personal, appear to breach legal ethics, or otherwise make you uncomfortable not only can be hard to answer but also can quickly erode the confidence you worked so hard to build during your preparation. Remaining composed and remembering that the employer’s objective is simply to determine whether you are the best candidate for the position will help you respond appropriately to difficult questions. Be brief, concise, and truthful in your answers. Common questions that may broach sensitive subjects may include the following:

Have you ever experienced a layoff or been terminated? Why did you stay with previous employers on average for just a year? Why do you have such a large gap of employment between these dates?

Salary Salary negotiations can take place at the end of a job interview,

after a formal job offer, or over the course of several

conversations. Prepare by determining salary ranges in your

field by checking Web sites, such as salary.com, payscale.com,

630

and glassdoor.com. If you are on campus, check with your career-development office, which can advise you on local salary

ranges.

Remember that you are negotiating a package and not just a

starting salary. Some employers have excellent benefits

packages that can balance a lower base salary, as the following

possibilities suggest:

Tuition reimbursement for continued education Payment of relocation costs Paid personal leave or paid vacations Overtime potential and compensation Flexible hours and work-from- home options

Health, dental, optical, and disability coverage Retirement and pension plans Profit sharing: investment or stock options Bonuses or cost-of-living adjustments Commuting or parking-cost reimbursement Family leave or elder-care benefits

If you do not wish to provide a specific salary requirement

during a job interview, you can respond with a salary range that

you know would be reasonable for someone at your level in

your line of work in that region of the country. For example,

you could say, “I would hope for a salary somewhere between

$35,000 and $45,000, but of course this is negotiable.” The salary

range you provide should be in line with the industry average

(see job search). Throughout this process, focus on what is

most important to you (not others) and on what you would find

acceptable.

If you decide to request a salary on the higher end of the

631

average range in the particular industry to which you are

applying, be prepared to offer specific, concrete evidence of

experiences and skills you have developed that warrant a higher

salary. Once you have gained some work experience in the

industry, you will be in a better position to make such a request.

In the meantime, though, you may refer to projects you have

completed in college courses, computer software programs

with which you have gained expertise, or internships in the

field.

Conclusion At the conclusion of the interview, thank the interviewer for his

or her time. Be sure to make note of each interviewer’s name,

or request business cards if convenient. Reiterate your interest

in the position, and try to get an idea of when the company

expects to make a final decision. Reaffirm friendly contact with

a firm handshake.

After the Interview After you leave the interview, jot down the pertinent

information you obtained, as it may be helpful in comparing job

offers. As soon as possible following a job interview, send the

interviewer(s) a thank-you note or e-mail. Many interviewers

and other employees you have met will appreciate a

handwritten note that mentions a personal detail about your

time at the organization, for example, thanking an individual

who recommended a particularly good restaurant for lunch.

Such messages also often include the following:

632

Your thanks for the interview and to individuals or groups that gave you special help or attention during the interview The name of the specific job for which you interviewed Your impression of the opportunity Your confidence that you can perform the job well An offer to provide further information or to answer further questions

Figure I–9 shows a typical example of follow-up

correspondence.

633

FIGURE I–9. Follow-up Correspondence

If you are offered a job you want, accept the offer verbally

and write a brief letter of acceptance as soon as possible—

certainly within a week. If you do not want the job, write a

634

refusal letter or e-mail, as described in acceptances / refusals.

In some instances, you may be interested in accepting a

position but are more enthusiastic about a competing

organization with which you have interviewed but that has not

yet made you an offer. If you face this situation, it is appropriate

to notify the interviewer with whom you spoke at the competing

organization to let him or her know that you have been offered

a position elsewhere but are still interested in pursuing a

position with his or her organization.

635

introductions DIRECTORY

Routine Openings Opening Strategies

Objective Problem Statement Scope Background Summary Interesting Detail Definition Anecdote Quotation Forecast Persuasive Hook

Full-Scale Introductions

Every document must have either an opening or an

introduction. Usually an opening simply focuses the reader’s

attention on your topic and then proceeds to the body of your

document. A full-scale introduction, discussed later in this

entry, sets the stage by providing information necessary to

understand the discussion that follows in the body. In general,

correspondence and routine reports need only an opening;

formal reports, major proposals, and other complex

documents need a full-scale introduction. For a discussion of

comparable sections for Web sites, see writing for the Web. See

636

also conclusions.

Routine Openings When your audience is familiar with your topic or if what you

are writing is brief or routine, then a simple opening will

provide adequate context, as shown in the following examples.

LETTER

Dear Mr. Ignatowski:

You will be happy to know that we corrected the error in

your bank balance. The new balance shows . . .

E-MAIL

Jane, as I promised in my e-mail yesterday, I’ve attached

the human resources budget estimates for fiscal year 2018.

MEMO

To date, 18 of the 20 specimens your department submitted

for analysis have been examined. Our preliminary analysis

indicates . . .

Opening Strategies Opening strategies are aimed at focusing readers’ attention and

motivating them to read the entire document.

637

Objective You might open with a statement of a project’s objective so that

readers have a basis for judging the results.

► The primary goal of this project was to develop new techniques to solve the problem of waste disposal. Our first step was to investigate . . .

Problem Statement To give readers the perspective of your report, briefly describe

the problem that led to the study or project being reported.

► Several weeks ago a manager noticed a recurring problem in the software developed by Datacom Systems. Specifically, error messages repeatedly appeared when, in fact, no specific trouble . . .  After an extensive investigation, we found that Datacom Systems . . .

For proposals or formal reports, of course, problem statements

may be more elaborate and part of the full-scale introduction,

which is discussed later in this entry.

Scope You may present the scope of your document in your opening.

By providing the parameters of your material, the limitations of

the subject, or the amount of detail to be presented, your

readers can determine whether they want or need to read your

document.

► This pamphlet provides a review of the requirements for

638

obtaining a private pilot’s license. It is not intended as a textbook to prepare you for the examination itself; rather, it outlines the steps you need to take and the costs involved.

Background The background or history of a subject may provide interest,

perspective, or insight into a subject. Consider the following

example from a newsletter describing the process of oil drilling:

► From the bamboo poles the Chinese used when the pyramids were young to today’s giant rigs drilling in deep water, there has been considerable progress in the search for oil. But whether in ancient China or a modern city, underwater or on a mountaintop, the objective of drilling has always been the same—to manufacture a hole in the ground, inch by inch.

Summary You can provide a summary opening by describing in

abbreviated form the results, conclusions, or recommendations

of your article or report. Be concise: Do not begin a summary by

writing “This report summarizes . . . ”

CHANGE This report summarizes the advantages offered by the photon as a means of examining the structural features of the atom.

TO As a means of examining the structure of the atom, the photon offers several advantages.

Interesting Detail Often an interesting detail will attract the readers’ attention and

639

pique their curiosity. Readers of an annual report for a

manufacturer of telescopes and scientific instruments, for

example, may be persuaded to invest if they believe that the

company is developing innovative, cutting-edge products.

► The rings of Saturn have puzzled astronomers ever since they were discovered by Galileo in 1610 using the first telescope. Recently, even more rings have been discovered.

Our company’s Scientific Instrument Division designs

and manufactures research-quality, computer-controlled

telescopes that promise to solve the puzzles of Saturn’s

rings by enabling scientists to use multicolor differential

photometry to determine the rings’ origins and

compositions.

Definition Although a definition can be useful as an opening, do not define

something with which your audience is familiar or provide a

definition that is obviously a contrived opening (such as

“Webster defines technology as . . .”). A definition should be

used as an opening only if it offers insight into what follows.

► Risk is often a loosely defined term. In this report, risk refers to a qualitative combination of the probability of an event and the severity of the consequences of that event. In fact, . . .

Anecdote An anecdote can be used to attract and build interest in a

640

subject that may otherwise be mundane; however, this strategy

is best suited to longer documents and presentations.

► In his poem “The Calf Path” (1895), Sam Walter Foss tells of a wandering, wobbly calf trying to find its way home at night through the lonesome woods. It made a crooked path, which was taken up the next day by a lone dog. Then “a bellwether sheep pursued the trail over vale and steep, drawing behind him the flock, too, as all good bellwethers do.” This forest path became a country lane that bent and turned and turned again. The lane became a village street, and at last the main street of a flourishing city. The poet ends by saying, “A hundred thousand men were led by a calf near three centuries dead.”

Many companies today follow a “calf path” because they

react to events rather than planning.

Quotation You can use a quotation to stimulate interest in your subject. To

be effective, however, the quotation must be pertinent—not any

loosely related quotation you find.

► Richard Smith, founder of PCS Corporation, recently said, “I believe that managers need to be more ‘people smart’ than ever before. The management style of today involves much more than just managing the operations of a department—it requires understanding the personalities that comprise a corporation.” His statement represents a growing feeling among corporate leaders that . . .

641

Forecast Sometimes you can use a forecast of a new development or

trend to gain the audience’s attention and interest.

► In the not-too-distant future, we may be able to use a handheld medical diagnostic device similar to those in science fiction to assess the physical condition of accident victims. This project and others are now being developed at Seldi Group, Inc.

Persuasive Hook Although all opening strategies contain persuasive elements,

the hook uses persuasion most overtly. A Web site touting the

newest innovation in tax-preparation software might address

readers as follows:

► Welcome to the newest way to do your taxes! TaxPro EZ ends the headache of last-minute tax preparation with its unique TaxPro app.

Full-Scale Introductions The purpose of a full-scale introduction is to give readers

enough general information about the subject to enable them to

understand the details in the body of the document. (See Figure

F–6, pages 203–19.) An introduction should accomplish any or

all of the following:

State the subject. Give background information, such as definition, history, or theory, to provide context for your

642

readers. State the purpose. Make your readers aware of why the document exists and whether the material provides a new perspective or clarifies an existing perspective. State the scope. Tell readers the amount of detail you plan to cover. Preview the development of the subject. Especially in a longer document, outline how you plan to develop the subject. Providing such information allows readers to anticipate how the subject will be presented and helps them evaluate your conclusions or recommendations.

Consider writing an opening or introduction last. Many writers

find that only after they have drafted the body of the document

do they have a full enough perspective on the subject to

introduce it adequately.

643

investigative reports An investigative report offers a precise analysis of a workplace

problem or issue in response to a need for information. The

investigative report shown in Figure I–10, for example,

evaluates whether a company should adopt a program called

Basic English to prepare documentation for and to train non–

English-speaking readers.

644

645

FIGURE I–10. Investigative Report

Open an investigative report with a statement of its primary

and any secondary purposes, then define the scope of your

investigation. If the report includes a survey of opinions, for

example, indicate the number of people surveyed and other

identifying information, such as income categories and

occupations. (See also questionnaires.) Include any

information that is pertinent in defining the depth of the

investigation. Then report your findings and discuss their

significance with your conclusions.

Sometimes the person requesting the investigative report

may need to make recommendations based on your findings. In

that case, the report may be referred to as a recommendation

report. See also feasibility reports and incident reports.

646

italics Italics is a style of type used to denote emphasis and to

distinguish book titles, foreign expressions, and certain other

elements. You may need to italicize words that require special

emphasis in a sentence. (“Contrary to projections, sales have

not improved.”) Do not overuse italics for emphasis, however.

(“This will hurt you more than me.”)

Foreign Words and Phrases Foreign words and phrases are italicized: bonjour, guten tag,

the sign said “Se habla español.” Foreign words that have been

fully assimilated into English need not be italicized: cliché,

etiquette, vis-à-vis, de facto, résumé. When in doubt about

whether to italicize a word, consult a current dictionary.

Titles Italicize the titles of separately published documents (print or

electronic), such as books, Web and blog sites, periodicals,

newspapers, pamphlets, brochures, and legal cases.

► Turning Workplace Conflicts into Collaboration [book] was reviewed in the New York Times [newspaper].

► CNN Money [Web site] reports that “written communication skills remain a top priority for U.S. businesses.”

Abbreviations of such titles are italicized if their spelled-out

647

forms would be italicized.

► The NYT is one of the nation’s oldest newspapers.

Italicize the titles of CDs, DVDs, movies, plays, long poems,

paintings, sculptures, and long musical works.

DVD Computer Security Tutorial

PLAY Arthur Miller’s Death of a Salesman

LONG POEM T. S. Eliot’s The Wasteland

MUSICAL WORK Gershwin’s Porgy and Bess

Use quotation marks for parts of publications, such as chapters

of books and sections within larger works.

► Small Business Trends (smallbiztrends.com) [blog] posted “Microbusiness Economic Trends: Into the Future.” [article]

Proper Names The names of ships, trains, and aircraft (but not the companies

or governments that own them) are italicized: U.S. aircraft

carrier Independence, Amtrak’s passenger train Coast Starlight.

Craft that are known by model or serial designations are not

italicized: DC-7, Boeing 747.

Words, Letters, and Figures Words, letters, and figures discussed as such are italicized.

► The word inflammable is often misinterpreted.

648

► The S and 6 keys on my keyboard do not function.

Subheads Subheads in a report are sometimes italicized.

► Training Managers. We are leading the way in developing first-line managers who not only are professionally competent but . . .

Exceptions Some titles are not set off by italics, quotation marks, or

underlining, although they are capitalized.

► Professional Writing [college course title], the Constitution, the Bible, Lincoln’s Gettysburg Address, the Lands’ End Catalog.

Keep in mind your context, especially as you prepare material

for screen display, as in writing for the Web. See also headings

and layout and design.

649

its / it’s Its is a possessive pronoun and does not use an apostrophe. It’s

is a contraction of it is.

See also expletives and possessive case.

650

J

651

jargon Jargon is a specialized slang that is unique to an occupational or

a professional group. For example, human resource personnel

use the term headhunter to describe specialists who recruit

professional and executive personnel. Jargon is at first

understood only by insiders; over time, it may become known

more widely and become a buzzword. If all your readers are

members of a particular occupational group, jargon may

provide an efficient means of communicating. However, if you

have any doubt that your entire audience is part of such a

group, avoid using jargon. See also affectation, functional

shift, gobbledygook, and plain language.

652

job descriptions Most companies use formal job descriptions to specify the

duties of and requirements for many of the positions in the

organization. Job descriptions fulfill several important

functions: They provide information on which equitable salary

scales can be based, they help management determine whether

all functions within a company are adequately supported, and

they let both prospective and current employees know exactly

what is expected of them. Together, all the job descriptions in a

company present a picture of the organization’s structure. The

job description shown in Figure J–1 is typical. It never mentions

the person holding the job described; instead, it focuses on the

job and the qualifications required to fill the position.

1

653

FIGURE J–1. Job Description

Although job-description formats vary from organization to

654

organization, they commonly contain the following sections:

The accountability section identifies, by title only, the person to whom the employee reports. The scope of responsibilities section provides an overview of the primary and secondary functions of the job and states, if applicable, who reports to the employee. The specific duties section gives a detailed account of the particular duties of the job as concisely as possible. The requirements section lists the required or preferred education, training, experience, and licensing for the job.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Job Descriptions

✓ Before attempting to write your job description, list all the different tasks you do in a week or a month. Otherwise, you will almost certainly leave out some of your duties.

✓ Focus on content. Remember that you are describing your job, not yourself.

✓ List your duties in the decreasing order of importance. Knowing how your various duties rank in importance makes it easier to set valid job qualifications.

✓ Begin each statement of a duty with a verb, and be specific. Write “Orient new staff members to the department” rather than “New staff orientation.”

✓ Review existing job descriptions that are considered well written.

Job descriptions are sometimes called position descriptions, a term also used for formal announcements of openings for professional or administrative positions.

1

655

job search Individuals seek jobs for a number of reasons, including to

Gain experience in a particular field. Develop contacts with professionals, and strengthen networking skills. Build concrete evidence of skills and knowledge for inclusion in a professional portfolio. Diversify skills and knowledge to help set a job seeker apart from the competition. Explore another career option prior to a career shift or an opportunity that complements current employment (for instance, a freelance career that can be developed on the side). Participate in activities that support personal values and character traits.

Whether you are applying for your first job or want to change

careers entirely, begin by assessing your knowledge, skills,

interests, and abilities through brainstorming. Next, consider

your career goals and values. For instance, do you prefer

working independently or collaboratively? Do you enjoy public

settings? Do you like meeting people? How important are career

stability and location? What would you most like to be doing in

the immediate future? In two years? In five years? Be honest:

What kinds of tasks and responsibilities, big and small, would

you like to occupy your days?

2

656

Once you have narrowed your goals and identified a

professional area that is right for you, consider the following

sources to locate the job and work environment you are

seeking. It is important to consult both internal sources

(documents and other kinds of evidence produced by the

organization to which you are applying) and external sources

(perspectives on the organization written by an outside party).

Some examples of sources from each perspective follow:

Internal Sources:

Informational interviews with organizational insiders Published job ads announcing current position openings Organizational Web sites Annual reports Corporate ads speaking to the identity and reputation of an organization Employees currently working for an organization

External Sources:

Newspaper articles about an organization Industry reports that speak to the successes and failures of several organizations, including the one to which you are applying Unpaid reviews of an organization’s products and services Forecasts by investment and workforce experts

Organization is key to a successful job search. Keep files,

preferably electronic and hard copy, for potential jobs, and

657

include in each file copies of job ads, application letters,

résumés, follow-up correspondence, and contact information.

Consider logging your job-search activity on a spreadsheet or

any other accessible format so that you can always easily

determine who you have contacted and why. Whatever system

you use, keeping track of names and what you have sent to

potential employers is crucial.

In an era when multiple communications are sent daily

through e-mail, texting, and a variety of social-media outlets, it

is crucial to record the names and positions of individuals from

an organization with whom you have corresponded in any

form. Set up file folders for e-mail exchanges. For example,

keep all messages you exchange with an organization’s human

resources director and any other individuals from the

organization in one place for easy reference.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Personal branding is a concept introduced by business guru Tom Peters that has increasingly gained in popularity. Businesses work to establish a positive image and a reputation for high-quality products and the successful execution of services. Personal branding is the idea of marketing a positive image or reputation of yourself. For example, if you are a consultant who sells products or services, your consistently professional and successful execution of services will be remembered as a core part of your brand. By learning how to influence other people’s perceptions of your brand, you will gain an immediate advantage over the competition. See “Seven Things You Can Do to

658

Build an Awesome Personal Brand” by Shama Hyder at www.forbes.com.

Many components of the job search discussed in this entry

can help you establish a strong personal brand. As you evaluate

the opportunities of networking, social media, and internships,

for example, keep in mind the core message you would like to

send about yourself. Every interaction provides opportunities to

enhance your visibility through a full suite of job-search

materials. These materials may include a video résumé,

business cards, a narrative biography, LinkedIn and other

social media profiles, a personal Web site, a portfolio,

reference letters, and testimonials. As you prepare these

materials, project a consistent and unified branding message

across all media outlets.

To achieve consistency of your brand and to enter a job or

career that is personally and professionally satisfying, you must

be honest with yourself about what you bring to the workplace

and how you self-identify. Avoid trying to maintain a personal

brand that sounds like a good fit for a particular organization

but that does not genuinely reflect your values, interests, and

goals.

Along with “personal branding,” consider the way in which

you “package” yourself for the job search. Qualified applicants

for a position will likely possess many of the same credentials

(for instance, an undergraduate degree in a relevant discipline

659

or a required license for entering a particular field) and similar

experiences (for example, an internship during college). It is

important to consider, then, what unique traits or experiences

set you apart from your competitors. These can include

anything from a meaningful mission trip in which you

participated to a passion you have for painting to a significant

feature of your upbringing. By combining your unique feature

with qualifications that employers expect to see in applicants’

materials, you can set yourself apart. For example, each of the

following statements reflects effective applicant packaging:

In addition to bringing knowledge of current marketing theory and practice to this position, my experiences of watching my parents grow their dry cleaning business in our small town taught me much about the importance of building relationships in the community. My grades in my civil engineering courses and the leadership roles I played in group projects reveal my commitment to the field. It was my summer work for Habitat for Humanity, though, that taught me the importance of using my training to serve the community.

Networking and Informational Interviews Career-development experts agree that many open positions are

filled through networking. Networking involves communicating

with people who can provide useful advice or who may know of

potential jobs in your interest areas. Your network may include

660

people already working in your chosen field, contacts in

professional organizations, professors, family members, or

friends. Discussion groups and networking sites, such as

LinkedIn, can be helpful in this process. In general, you should

always be networking, even when you do not need assistance.

Even a simple gesture, such as providing a reference for a

recently unemployed colleague, can go a long way toward

expanding your network.

Informational interviews are appointments you schedule

with working professionals who can give you “insider” views of

an occupation or industry. These brief meetings (usually 20 to

30 minutes) also offer you the chance to learn about

employment trends as well as leads for employment

opportunities. Because you ask the questions, these interviews

allow you to participate in an interview situation that is less

stressful than the job interview itself. To make the most of

informational interviews, prepare carefully and review both

interviewing for information and interviewing for a job.

Campus Career Services A visit to a college career-development center is another good

way to begin your job search. Government, business, and

industry recruiters often visit campus career offices to

interview prospective employees; recruiters also keep career

counselors aware of their companies’ current employment

needs and provide them with job descriptions. Career

counselors not only help you select a career but also put you in

661

touch with the best and most current resources — identifying

where to begin your search and saving you time. Career-

development centers often hold workshops on résumé

preparation and offer other job-finding resources on their Web

sites.

Strategic Web Searches In addition to professional and social-networking sites, you can

use the Web in several ways to enhance your job search.

Consult sites that give advice about careers, job seeking, and résumé preparation like www.careerbuilder.com. Learn about businesses and organizations that may hire employees in your field by visiting their Web sites. Such company sites often describe the company’s culture, list job openings, provide instructions for applicants, and offer an overview of employee benefits. You can learn about jobs in your field and post your résumé for prospective employers at privately owned or government-sponsored online employment databases. For instance, among the many resources found at CareerOneStop (www.careeronestop.org), a job seeker can research salary ranges for a particular region or career field. This tool is particularly valuable when you are moving to a new location, considering a career transition, or determining a valid salary and benefits range for negotiating compensation packages.

Social Media 662

Social-media sites, such as LinkedIn, allow you to connect with

people of like-minded interests both on an individual level and

in a broad forum. Social media provides the opportunity to

develop a positive image of your work through comments,

personal and professional profiles, résumés, associations to

which you belong, and your connections. These components of

your social-media presence can help enhance your reputation

and personal brand.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Surveys show that employers and employment recruiters peruse social media and search engines before recruiting candidates, so carefully consider the material that you post online when using such media as LinkedIn, Facebook, and Twitter. Keep in mind that many software packages allow prospective employers to compile an overview of a job seeker’s online presence. Share online only what you would comfortably share with your boss, and regularly check the privacy settings on any sites that you use. It is important to remain consistent to your personal brand in any communications you share online, which is all the more reason to articulate a brand that is genuine.

Job Advertisements Many employers advertise job openings on their Web sites, job

boards, social-media sites, and newspapers. Because job listings

can differ, search in both the printed and Web editions of local

and big-city newspapers under employment or job market. Use

the search options they provide or the general strategies for

663

database searches discussed in the entry research.

A human-relations specialist interested in training, for

example, might find the specialty listed under “Human

Resources” or “Consulting Services.” Depending on a company’s

or government agency’s needs, the listing could be even more

specific, such as “Software Education Specialist” or “Learning

and Development Coordinator.”

Set up job alerts on job-aggregator sites, such as indeed.com

and simplyhired.com, and scour job boards, company Web

sites, and newspaper listings for jobs that meet your criteria and

send you e-mail notifications. As you read the ads, take notes on

salary ranges, job locations, job duties and responsibilities, and

even the terminology used in the ads to describe the work.

Not all organizations publish job ads. Rather, they rely on

current employees to spread news of any hiring needs to

contacts in their personal and professional networks. It is

appropriate to send a “prospecting” application letter and

résumé to an organization to let the human resources director

or other appropriate representative know that you are

interested in working with the organization and in what

capacities.

Remember, too, that job ads are often wish lists —

descriptions of ideal candidates for a position. Not everyone

who applies will meet all the requirements listed, nor may the

individual who is ultimately selected for the position. Pay

664

attention to the language used in an ad to determine which

qualifications are “required” as opposed to “desired” or

“preferred.”

Trade and Professional Journal Listings Many industry associations publish periodicals of interest to

people working in the industry. Such periodicals often contain

job listings. To learn about the trade or professional

associations for your occupation, consult online resources

offered by your library or campus career office. Also, head to

the central office for your major to see what kinds of resources

are available for students pursuing careers in related fields.

Often, those who are on the forefront of the discipline will be in

the loop regarding which industries and organizations are

seeking employees, are in the process of expanding, or are

interested in taking on students for internships or co-ops.

Employment Agencies (Private, Temporary, Government) Private employment agencies are organizations that are in

business to help people find jobs. Be sure you understand who

is paying the agency’s fee. Often the employer pays the agency’s

fee; however, if you have to pay, make sure you know exactly

how much. As with any written agreement, read the fine print

carefully.

665

A staffing agency or temporary placement agency could

match you with an appropriate temporary or permanent job in

your field. Temporary work for an organization for which you

might want to work permanently is an excellent way to build

your network while continuing your job search. Choose an

employment or a temporary-placement agency carefully. Some

are well established and reputable; others are not. Check with

your local Better Business Bureau and your college career office

before you sign any agreements.

Recruitment firms (sometimes called headhunters) are hired

by organizations to fill general needs or specific positions.

Especially if you have experience in a field, it is a good idea to

make connections with recruiters on networking sites like

LinkedIn. You can also search online for recruiters who

specialize in your career field, and send your résumé to them

through their Web-site form or by e-mail. Even if there is no

suitable job opportunity, a résumé submitted to a recruitment

firm could turn up in a future database search.

Local, state, and federal government agencies also offer

many free or low-cost employment services. Locate local

government agencies in Web or telephone directories under the

name of your city, county, or state. For information on

occupational trends, see the Occupational Outlook Handbook at

www.bls.gov/oco. For information on jobs with the federal

government, see the U.S. Office of Personnel Management at

www.opm.gov or USAJOBS, the federal government’s official

666

jobs site, at www.usajobs.gov. For information on salary

negotiations, see page 280.

Internships and Co-ops As you evaluate job options, consider taking an internship or a

co-op. Internships typically last from six weeks to an entire

semester (if not longer), whereas co-ops (or cooperatives) are

often taken on by a student while in school, with the

understanding that the position may become full time once the

student completes his or her education. An internship or a co-

op provides you with the chance to gain experience in a field

through a variety of career opportunities. It enables you to

Try a position without making a permanent commitment. Explore a field to clarify your career goals. Develop skills and gain experience in a new field or industry. Evaluate a prospective employer or firm. Acquire a mentor in the workplace. Establish networking contacts and professional references. Position yourself for a future job offer with the employer.

Ask if the internship is paid or unpaid during your interview. If

it is not paid, find out how the internship will benefit you based

on recent legal criteria for unpaid internships. (See “Fact Sheet

#71: Internship Programs Under The Fair Labor Standards Act”

on the U.S. Department of Labor’s Web site, www.dol.gov.) For-

profit employers are required to pay interns at least the

minimum wage unless the internship experience is designed for

667

the benefit of the intern, such as training that would be given in

an educational environment. When this condition is met, the

employer is not required to pay the intern for the internship.

To locate internship opportunities, begin with your campus

career-development office. Such offices usually post internship

opportunities on their Web site, but you can also make

appointments with counselors or take advantage of walk-in

hours. Finally, try www.internships.com, a site that lists

internships by type of employer, location, means of

compensation (paid or unpaid), and whether the work is full or

part time.

Service Internship and “Gap Year” Opportunities Not all internships involve working for an organization that is in

your chosen field. Increasingly, students are choosing to spend

a period of time following graduation working in a position

sponsored by organizations like Teach for America.

One option that many college graduates consider before

pursuing full-time employment in a field that dovetails with

their major and career goals is to apply for a position with

AmeriCorps or the Peace Corps. These governmental

organizations seek volunteers for a limited amount of time

(usually between one and two years) to help improve the lives of

individuals in the United States and abroad.

668

AmeriCorps offers opportunities for Americans who are

interested in contributing their talents to “nonprofits, schools,

public agencies, and community and faith-based groups across

the country” (www.nationalservice.gov/programs/americorps).

A specific example of an AmeriCorps program is City Year,

which requires selected applicants to work for one year in an

urban school that lacks sufficient resources.

Working for the Peace Corps can take volunteers to all

corners of the world, on such missions as rebuilding structures

damaged by tsunamis in places like Thailand or helping farmers

in developing countries like Nepal attempt new techniques in

agriculture.

There are advantages to spending a gap year (or more) in

these kinds of positions. In addition to learning new skills,

interacting with people from different locales and backgrounds,

and having the opportunity in some cases to acquire another

language, governmental programs like these will often assist in

the repayment of student loans.

Direct Inquiries If you would like to work for a particular firm, peruse the

organization’s Web site to see if any openings for individuals

with your qualifications are advertised. You may also e-mail or

call the human resources director or the head of a particular

division to which you are interested in applying. Remember

that all correspondence, even a simple phone call, should be

669

professional, because every interaction with an organization

reflects your identity. Such contacts work best if you have

networked, as described earlier in this entry.

A related strategy is to prepare a prospecting letter — a highly

targeted letter that outlines why your skills and credentials

would be valuable to the employer. Before writing the letter,

research the employer to find out about any upcoming plans,

goals, and even obstacles to its success. Your prospecting letter

can show that you understand the challenges the employer is

facing and you want to be part of the solution. Describe what

you expect to accomplish, both short term and long term, if

given the opportunity.

Other Application Genres Other kinds of documents, print and digital, are used for

pursuing positions in the contemporary workplace.

Application forms: Some organizations ask applicants to complete online or print application forms, providing information about work history in an accessible and standard format. When completing these forms, be sure to answer all questions, targeting the word count specified in the instructions. If a specific word count is not provided, gauge the preferred length for responses according to the amount of space provided. LinkedIn profile: LinkedIn is an online site for managing professional profiles and networking with individuals in related fields. Many employers will check LinkedIn profiles

670

as a first step in the screening process. Check your LinkedIn profile frequently to see what comments have been added by those who visit your page and to ensure that all information is updated. Digital (and print) portfolios: Throughout college, it is important to keep a careful record of your accomplishments, whether academic achievements (for example, being named to the dean’s list or earning awards for work in a particular class) or participation in campus organizations and clubs. A digital or print (usually bound) portfolio will offer evidence of the knowledge, skills, and personal traits that you claim to possess when applying for a position. In addition to a résumé and a reflective statement, which will unify the other materials in your portfolio, include samples of your work in classes and jobs, images of events or programs in which you participated, letters of reference, and any other evaluations of your work. Video résumés: Applicants are increasingly producing more sophisticated multimedia résumés in addition to traditional print versions. Like digital portfolios, video résumés provide extras — for example, short taped statements by the applicant to further demonstrate an item listed on the résumé or a link to supporting images.

ETHICS NOTE

Providing false information on your job application can result in a dismissal and will reflect poorly on your character. Be honest and keep in mind that if you are wrong for a position and lie to obtain it, the

671

employer can just as easily discover this after you are hired.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Completing Job Applications: Print and Online

✓ Read the entire application, and keep your résumé at hand before you begin.

✓ Copy and paste responses to online applications, as appropriate, from your current résumé.

✓ Provide all requested information, and complete irrelevant entries with N/A (for “not applicable”).

✓ List a specific job title for the “Position Seeking” entry — entries “any” or “open” receive less consideration.

✓ List salary requirements as “negotiable,” or give a range commensurate with the industry and region.

✓ Use positive phrases if asked why you left a previous employer: “relocation,” “seeking new challenge,” “career advancement,” or possibly “will discuss at interview.”

✓ List references (with their permission) who can speak to your professionalism, character, or work ethic.

✓ Attach a brief cover letter and résumé with your completed job application, if possible.

✓ Proofread for accuracy and consistency: Review the instructions, and check all entries or fields, dates, position titles, links, grammar, and spelling.

✓ Make sure you date, sign (if print), and submit or post the application by the deadline.

✓ Save for your records a copy or screen capture of your completed application.

672

ETHICS NOTE

When faced with questions that are sensitive, you must carefully consider your response. If the question does not seem to raise a problem, you can choose to answer it. If you feel the question is inappropriate, you can respond with N/A or another response (such as a line through the blank); this will indicate that you have read the content.

Understanding that many employers conduct background checks on candidates to protect their interests will help you determine the validity of a question. For example, a banking institution might be concerned about a candidate’s credit history, current debts, or bankruptcy status, or a government organization might be concerned about citizenship or ties to foreign countries.

A good source for stimulating your thinking is the most recent edition of What Color

Is Your Parachute? A Practical Manual for Job-Hunters & Career-Changers by Richard N. Bolles, published by Ten Speed Press. Also, it is a good idea to head to your university’s career services office to ask for current information about industries in which you have interest as well as any positions that have been listed with the office. While you are there, you might inquire about the possibility of signing up to take a personality test, like the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator, or a career aptitude test; both can provide clues to the types of work and work environments in which you might be most successful.

2

673

K

674

kind of / sort of The phrases kind of and sort of should be used only to refer to a

class or type of things.

► We require a special kind of training to ensure employee safety

Do not use kind of or sort of to mean “rather,” “somewhat,” or

“somehow.” That usage can lead to vagueness; it is better to be

specific.

VAGUE It was kind of a bad year for the company.

SPECIFIC The company’s profits fell 10 percent last year.

675

know-how The informal term know-how, meaning “special competence or

knowledge,” should be avoided in formal writing style.

676

L

677

lay / lie Lay is a transitive verb — a verb that requires a direct object to

complete its meaning — that means “place” or “put.”

► We will lay the foundation one section at a time.

The past-tense form of lay is laid.

► We laid the first section of the foundation last month.

The perfect-tense form of lay is also laid.

► Since June, we have laid all but two sections of the foundation.

Lay is frequently confused with lie, which is an intransitive verb

— a verb that does not require an object to complete its meaning

— that means “recline” or “remain.”

► People in shock should lie down with their legs slightly elevated.

The past-tense form of lie is lay (not lied). This form causes the

confusion between lie and lay.

► The injured employee lay still for approximately five minutes.

The perfect-tense form of lie is lain.

► The injured employee had lain still for five minutes before

678

the EMTs arrived.

679

layout and design DIRECTORY

Design Principles Grouping Contrast Repetition

Typography Typeface and Type Size Type Style and Emphasis

Page-Design Elements Justification Headings Headers and Footers Lists Columns White Space Color

Visuals Icons Captions Rules

Page Layout and Thumbnails

Thoughtful layout and design can make even the most complex

information accessible and give readers a favorable impression

of the writer and the organization. To accomplish those goals, a

design should help readers find information easily; offer a

simple and uncluttered presentation; and highlight structure,

680

hierarchy, and order. The design must also fit the purpose of the document and its context. For example, clients paying a

high price for consulting services might expect a more

sophisticated, polished design, while employees aware of

pressing deadlines and budgets are likely to accept — or even

expect — a standard, functional design for internal documents.

Design Principles Readers are quick to make inferences based on the pattern,

form, and organization of document elements. When creating

documents and visuals, use those instincts to your advantage by

keeping in mind three major principles of design: grouping,

contrast, and repetition.

Grouping Grouping highlights relationships among items on a page or

screen, which helps readers grasp how information is organized

and what is important. Grouping can occur in three different

ways.

Proximity: Items that are close together seem like part of a group, while items that are far apart seem dissimilar. Related items (for example, a heading and the paragraph that follows it) should be closer together than less closely related items (a heading and the paragraph above the heading). Similarity: Items that share qualities (such as size, shape, or color) are viewed as similar and tend to be associated as

681

part of a group. Alignment: Items that are aligned tend to be seen as part of a group. If the items in a bulleted list are aligned with one another and indented from the rest of the text, for example, readers immediately recognize them as related.

Contrast Contrast sets items apart and helps readers quickly grasp which

items are different from one another. For example, to

emphasize one data bar in a graph, you might give it a different

color or pattern from the other bars. To give readers an easy

way to navigate a long docu-ment, you might contrast the

headings from the body text by making them larger or a

different color from the surrounding text.

Repetition Repetition communicates consistency and predictability

through repeated patterns of design elements whether on a

page, screen, table, or visual. Inconsistencies in these patterns

are confusing and distracting. If like items on a page (headings,

footers, bulleted lists) vary slightly from one another in their

design, readers will not know whether the items are supposed

to be part of a related group. Consistency ensures that the

patterns in a document or visual are clear and unambiguous.

Repetition thus allows the users of a document to focus on the

things the writer wishes to emphasize.

Typography 682

Typography refers to the style and arrangement of type on a

page. A complete set of all the letters, numbers, and symbols

available in one typeface (or style) is called a font. The letters in

a typeface have a number of distinctive characteristics, as

shown in Figure L–1.

FIGURE L–1. Primary Components of Letter Characters

Typeface and Type Size For most on-the-job writing, select a typeface primarily for its

legibility. Avoid typefaces that make text difficult to read or that

may distract readers. Instead, choose popular typefaces with

which readers are familiar, such as Times New Roman or Arial.

Avoid using more than two typefaces in the text of a document.

For documents like brochures and newsletters, however, you

may wish to use distinctively different typefaces for contrast

among various elements, such as headlines, headings, inset

quotations, and sidebars. Experiment before making final

decisions, keeping in mind your audience.

683

One way typefaces are characterized is by the presence or

absence of serifs. Serif typefaces have projections, as shown in

Figure L–1; sans serif styles do not. (Sans is French for

“without.”) The text of this book is set in Sabon, a serif typeface.

Although sans serif type has a clean and uncluttered look, serif

type is easier to read in print, especially in the smaller sizes.

Sans serif, however, works well for headings (like the entry

titles in this book) and for Web sites and documents read on-

screen.

Ideal font sizes for the main text of paper documents range

from 10 to 12 points. However, for some elements or

documents, you may wish to select typeface sizes that are

smaller (as in footnotes) or larger (as in headlines for

brochures). See Figure L–2 for a comparison of type sizes in a

serif typeface.

FIGURE L–2. Type Sizes (6- to 14-Point Type)

Your readers and the distance from which they will read a

document should help determine type size. For example,

1

684

instructions that will rest on a table at which the reader stands

require a larger typeface than a document that will be read up

close. For presentations and writing for the Web, preview your

document to see the effectiveness of your choice of point sizes

and typefaces.

Type Style and Emphasis One method of achieving emphasis through typography is to

use uppercase letters. HOWEVER, LONG STRETCHES OF ALL

UPPERCASE LETTERS ARE DIFFICULT TO READ. (See also e-

mail.) Use all uppercase letters only in short spans, such as in

headings. Likewise, use italics sparingly, because continuous

italic type reduces legibility and thus slows readers. Of course,

italics are useful if your aim is to slow readers, as in cautions

and warnings. Highlighting in color may be useful to call

attention to individual words or brief sections. Boldface, used

in moderation, may be the best cuing device because it is

visually different yet retains the customary shape of letters and

numbers.

Page-Design Elements Thoughtfully used design elements can provide not only

emphasis but also visual logic within a document by

highlighting organization. The following typical elements can

make your document accessible and effective: justification,

headings, headers and footers, lists, columns, white space, and

color. Some of these elements are illustrated in the formal

report.

685

Justification Left-justified (ragged-right) margins are generally easier to read

than full-justified margins, especially for text using wide

margins on 8½ × 11” pages. Left justification is also better if full

justification causes your word-processing or desktop-publishing

software to insert irregular spaces between words, producing

unwanted white space or unevenness in blocks of text. Full-

justified text is more appropriate for publications aimed at a

broad audience that expects a more formal, polished

appearance. Full justification is also useful with narrow,

multiple-column formats because the spaces between the

columns (called alleys) need the definition that full justification

provides. The body text of this book is full justified.

Headings Headings reveal the organization of a document and help

readers decide which sections they need to read. Provide

typographic contrast between headings and the body text with

either a different typeface or a different style (bold, italic, CAPS,

and so on). Headings are often effective in boldface sans serif

typeface that contrasts with a body text in a serif typeface.

Headers and Footers A header in a report, a letter, or another document appears at

the top of each page (as in this book), and a footer appears at

the bottom of each page. Document pages may have headers or

footers (or both) that include such elements as the topic or

subtopic of a section, the date the document was written, the

686

page number, and the document name. Keep your headers and

footers concise, because too much information in them can

create visual clutter. However, a multipage document should, at

a minimum, include the page number in a header or footer. For

headers used in letters and memos, see correspondence.

Lists Vertically stacked words, phrases, and other items with

numbers or bullets can effectively highlight such information

as steps in sequence, materials or parts needed, key or

concluding points, and recommendations. For further detail,

see lists.

Columns Consider how columns may improve the readability of your

document. A single-column format works well with larger

typefaces, double-spacing, and left-justified margins. For

smaller typefaces and single-spaced lines, the two-column

structure keeps text columns narrow enough so that readers

need not scan back and forth across the width of the entire page

for every line. Columns of different size can separate main text

from secondary material. Avoid a single word or line carried

over to the top of the next column or page; likewise, avoid

opening a paragraph or stranding a word at the end of a column

or page.

White Space The area on a page or screen that is free of text or design

687

elements is called white space. It is an important element of

design because it visually frames text and other elements, and

breaks pages into manageable chunks. For example, white

space between paragraphs or sections can serve as a visual cue

to signal the ending or beginning of a topic or section.

Color Color and screening (shaded areas on a page) can distinguish

one part of a document from another or unify a series of

documents. They can set off sections within a document,

highlight examples, or emphasize warnings. In tables,

screening can highlight column titles or sets of data to which

you want to draw the reader’s attention.

Visuals Readers notice visuals before they notice text, and they notice

larger visuals before they notice smaller ones. Thus, the size of

an illustration suggests its relative importance. For newsletter

articles and publications aimed at wide audiences, consider

especially the proportion of the visual to the text. Magazine

designers have traditionally used the three-fifths rule: Page

layout is more dramatic and appealing when the major element

(photograph, drawing, or other visual) occupies three-fifths

rather than one-half of the available space.

Visuals can be gathered in one place (for example, at the end

of a report), but placing them in the text closer to their

accompanying explanations makes them more effective.

688

Illustrations in the text also provide visual relief. For advice on

the placement of visuals, see the Writer’s Checklist: Creating

and Integrating Visuals on pages 542–43.

Icons Icons are simplified pictorial or symbolic representations that

are used online as links to programs (as in apps), commands, or

files. In a printed document, icons can indicate a recurring

feature or quality, such as a special cross-reference. Icons must

be simple and easily recognized without accompanying text. For

example, on the Web, national flags might symbolize different

language versions of a document. For advice on using icons that

are culturally appropriate, see global graphics.

Captions Captions are titles that highlight or describe visuals. Captions

often appear below figures and above tables; they may be

aligned with the visual to the left, or they may be centered.

Rules Rules are vertical or horizontal lines used to enclose material in

a box or to divide one area of the page from another. For

example, rules and boxes set off visuals from surrounding

explanations or highlight warning statements from the steps in

instructions.

Page Layout and Thumbnails Page layout involves combining typography, design elements,

689

and visuals on a page to make a coherent whole. The flexibility

of your design is affected by your design software, your method

of printing the document, your budget, and whether your

employer or client requires you to use a template.

Before you spend time positioning actual text and visuals on

a page, especially for visually complex documents such as

brochures, you may want to create a thumbnail sketch, in

which blocks of simulated text and visuals indicate the

placement of elements. You can go further by roughly

assembling all the thumbnail pages to show the size, shape,

form, and general style of a large document. Such a mock-up,

called a dummy, allows you to see how a finished printed

document will look.

A point is a unit of type size equal to 0.01384 inch, or approximately 1/72 of an inch.1

690

lend / loan Both lend and loan can be used as verbs, but lend is more

common. (“The bank can lend [or loan] them the money.”)

Unlike lend, loan can be a noun. (“The bank approved our

loan.”)

691

letters Business letters — normally written for those outside an

organization — are often the most appropriate choice for formal

communications with professional associates or customers.

Letters may be especially effective for those people who receive

a high volume of e-mail and other electronic messages. Letters

printed on organizational letterhead communicate formality,

respect, and authority. See correspondence for advice on

writing strategy and style. See also selecting the medium.

Although templates are available to format business letters,

they may not provide the appropriate dimensions and elements

you need. The following sections offer specific advice on

formatting and related etiquette for business letters.

Letter Format If your employer requires a particular letter format, use it.

Otherwise, follow the design guidelines shown in Figure L–3,

which illustrates the popular full-block style. In this format, the

entire letter is aligned at the left margin. To achieve a

professional appearance, center the letter on the page vertically

and horizontally. Regardless of the default margin provided by

a template, it is more important to establish a picture frame of

blank space surrounding the text of the letter. When you use

organizational stationery with letterhead at the top of the page,

consider the bottom of the letterhead as the top edge of the

paper. The right margin should be approximately as wide as the

2

692

left margin. To give a fuller appearance to short letters,

increase both margins to about an inch and a half. Use your

full-page or print-preview feature to check for proportion.

693

694

FIGURE L–3. Full-Block-Style Letter (with Letterhead)

Heading Unless you are using letterhead stationery, place your full

return address and the date in the heading. Because your name

appears at the end of the letter, it need not be included in the

heading. Spell out words such as street, avenue, first, and west

rather than abbreviating them. You may either spell out the

name of the state in full or use the standard postal service

abbreviation. The date usually goes directly beneath the last

line of the return address. Do not abbreviate the name of the

month. Begin the heading about two inches from the top of the

page. If you are using letterhead that gives the company

address, enter only the date, about three lines below the last

line of the letterhead.

Inside Address The inside address includes the recipient’s full name, title, and

address. Place the inside address two to six lines below the date,

depending on the length of the letter. The inside address should

be aligned with the left margin, and the left margin should be at

least one inch wide.

Salutation Place the salutation, or greeting, two lines below the inside

address, and align it with the left margin. In most business

695

letters, the salutation contains the recipient’s personal title

(Mr., Ms., Dr.) and last name, followed by a colon. If you are on

a first-name basis with the recipient, use only the first name in

the salutation.

Address women as Ms. unless they have expressed a

preference for Miss or Mrs. However, professional titles

(Professor, Senator, Major) take precedence over Ms. and

similar courtesy titles.

When a person’s first name could refer to either a woman or

a man, one solution is to use both the first and last names in the

salutation (Dear Pat Smith:).

For multiple recipients, the following salutations are

appropriate:

► Dear Professor Allen and Dr. Rivera: [two recipients] ► Dear Ms. Becham, Ms. Moore, and Mr. Stein: [three

recipients] ► Dear Colleagues: [Members, or other suitable collective

term]

Subject Line An optional element in a letter is a subject line, which should

follow the salutation. Insert one blank line above and one blank

line below the subject line. The subject line in a letter functions

as it does for e-mail and other correspondence: as an aid in

focusing the topic and filing the letter. (For more information,

696

see the subsection on creating subject lines on page 117.)

Subject lines are especially useful if you are writing to a large

company and do not know the name or title of the recipient. In

such cases, you may address a letter to an appropriate

department or identify the subject in a subject line and use no

salutation.

► National Medical Supply Group 501 West National Avenue Minneapolis, MN 55407

Attention: Customer Service Department

Subject: Defective Cardio-100 Stethoscopes

I am returning six stethoscopes with damaged diaphragms

that . . .

In other circumstances in which you do not know the

recipient’s name, use a title appropriate to the context of the

letter, such as Dear Customer or Dear IT Professional.

Body The body of the letter should begin two lines below the

salutation (or any element that precedes the body, such as a

subject or an attention line). Single-space within and double-

space between paragraphs, as shown in Figure L–3. To provide

a fuller appearance to a very short letter, you can increase the

side margins or increase the font size. You can also insert extra

697

space above the inside address, the writer’s signature block, and

the initials of the person typing the letter — but do not exceed

twice the recommended space for each of these elements.

Complimentary Closing Type the complimentary closing two spaces below the body.

Use a standard expression, such as Sincerely, Sincerely yours,

or Yours truly. (If the recipient is a friend as well as a business

associate, you can use a less formal closing, such as Best wishes

or Best regards or simply Best.) Capitalize only the initial letter

of the first word, and follow the expression with a comma.

Writer’s Signature Block Type your full name four lines below and aligned with the

complimentary closing. On the next line, include your business

title, if appropriate. The following lines may contain your

individual contact information, such as a telephone number or

an e-mail address, if not included in the letterhead or the body

of your letter. Sign the letter in the space between the

complimentary closing and your name.

End Notations Business letters sometimes require additional information that

is placed at the left margin, two spaces below the typed name

and title of the writer in a long letter, four spaces below in a

short letter.

698

Reference initials show the letter writer’s initials in capital

letters, followed by a slash mark (or colon), and then the initials

of the person typing the letter in lowercase letters, as shown in

Figure L–3. When the writer is also the person typing the letter,

no initials are needed.

Enclosure notations indicate that the writer is sending

material (such as an invoice or an article) along with the letter.

Note that you should mention the enclosure in the body of the

letter. Enclosure notations may take several forms:

► Enclosure: Final Safety Report ► Enclosures (2) ► Enc. or Encs.

Copy notation (“cc:”) tells the reader that a copy of the letter

is being sent to the named recipient(s) (see Figure L–3). Use a

blind-copy notation (“bcc:”) when you do not want the

addressee to know that a copy is being sent to someone else. A

blind-copy notation appears only on the copy, not on the

original (“bcc: Dr. Brenda Shelton”). See the Ethics Note in e-

mail.

Continuing Pages If a letter requires a second page (or, in rare cases, more),

always carry at least two lines of the body text over to that page.

Use plain (nonletterhead) paper of quality equivalent to that of

the letterhead stationery for the second page. It should have a

699

header with the recipient’s name, the page number, and the

date. Place the header text in the upper left-hand corner or

across the page, as shown in Figure L–4.

FIGURE L–4. Alternative Headers for the Second Page of a Letter

For additional details on letter formats and design, you may wish to consult a guide such as Sabin, W. A. (2010). The Gregg reference manual (11th ed.). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.

2

700

like / as To avoid confusion between like and as, remember that like is a

preposition and as (or as if ) is a conjunction. Use like with a

noun or pronoun that is not followed by a verb.

► The supervisor still behaves like a novice.

Use as before clauses, which contain verbs.

► He responded as we hoped he would. ► The presentation seemed as if it would never end.

Like and as are used in comparisons: Like is used in

constructions that omit the verb, and as is used when the verb is

retained.

► He adapted to the new system like a duck to water. ► He adapted to the new system as a duck adapts to water.

701

listening Effective listening enables the listener to understand the

directions of an instructor, the message in a speaker’s

presentation, the goals of a manager, and the needs and wants

of customers. Above all, it lays the foundation for productive

communication.

Fallacies About Listening Most people assume that because they can hear, they know how

to listen. In fact, hearing is passive, whereas listening is active.

Hearing voices in a crowd or a ringing telephone requires no

analysis and no active involvement — we have no choice but to

hear such sounds. Listening, however, requires actively

focusing on a speaker, interpreting the message, and assessing

its worth. Listening also requires that you consider the context

of messages and the differences in meaning that may be the

result of differences in the speaker’s and the listener’s

occupation, education, culture, sex, race, or other factors. See

also biased language, connotation / denotation, English as a

second language, and global communication.

Active Listening To become an active listener, you need to take the following

steps:

Step 1: Make a Conscious Decision

702

The first step to active listening is simply making up your mind

to listen. Active listening requires a conscious effort. This well-

known precept offers good advice: “Seek first to understand and

then to be understood.”

Step 2: Define Your Purpose Knowing why you are listening can go a long way toward

managing the most common listening problems: letting your

attention drift, formulating your response while the speaker is

still talking, and interrupting the speaker. To help you define

your purpose for listening, ask yourself these questions:

What kind of information do I hope to get from this exchange, and how will I use it? What kind of message do I want to send while I am listening? (Do I want to portray understanding, determination, flexibility, competence, or patience?) What factors — boredom, daydreaming, anger, impatience — might interfere with listening during the interaction? How can I keep these factors from placing a barrier between the speaker and me?

Step 3: Take Specific Actions Becoming an active listener requires a willingness to become a

responder rather than a reactor. A reactor simply says the first

thing that comes to mind or draws a conclusion without

checking to make sure that he or she accurately understands

the message. In contrast, a responder waits to be certain that he

or she understands the speaker’s intended message before

3

703

responding. Take the following actions to help you become a

responder and not a reactor.

Make a conscious effort to be impartial when evaluating a message. For example, do not dismiss a message because you dislike the speaker or are distracted by the speaker’s appearance, mannerisms, or accent. Slow down the communication by asking for more information or by paraphrasing the message received before you offer your thoughts. Paraphrasing lets the speaker know you are listening, gives the speaker an opportunity to clear up any misunderstanding, and keeps you focused. Listen with empathy by putting yourself in the speaker’s position. When people feel they are being listened to empathetically, they tend to respond with appreciation and cooperation, thereby improving the communication. Take notes, when possible, to help you stay focused on what a speaker is saying. Note-taking not only communicates your attentiveness to the speaker but also reinforces the message and helps you remember it.

Step 4: Adapt to the Situation The requirements of active listening differ from one situation to

another. For example, when you are listening to a lecture, you

may be listening only for specific information. However, if you

are working on a team project that depends on everyone’s

contribution, you need to listen at the highest level so that you

can gather information as well as pick up on nuances the other

704

speakers may be communicating. See also collaborative

writing.

Covey, S. R. (2004). The seven habits of highly effective people: Powerful lessons in

personal change (15th ed.). New York, NY: Free Press.

3

705

lists Vertically stacked lists of words, phrases, and other items are

often highlighted with bullets, numbers, or letters to set them

apart from surrounding text. Lists can save readers time by

allowing them to see at a glance specific items or key points.

They also help readers by breaking up complex statements and

by focusing on such information as steps in sequence, materials

or parts needed, questions or concluding points, and

recommendations, as shown in Figures L–5 and I–1.

FIGURE L–5. Bulleted List in a Paragraph

As Figure L–5 also shows, you should provide context for a

706

list with an introductory sentence followed by a colon (or no

punctuation for an incomplete sentence). Ensure coherence by

following the list with some reference to the list or the

statement that introduced it.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Lists Follow your organization’s practices, or use these guidelines for consistency and formatting.

CONSISTENCY

✓ Do not overuse lists or create extended lists in documents or in presentation slides.

✓ List only comparable items, such as tasks or equipment, that are balanced in importance (as in Figure L–5).

✓ Begin each listed item in the same way — whether with nouns, verbs, or other parts of speech — and maintain parallel structure throughout.

✓ List bulleted items in a logical order, keeping your audience and purpose in mind. See also methods of development and persuasion.

FORMATTING

✓ Capitalize the first word in each listed item, unless doing so is visually awkward.

✓ Use periods or other ending punctuation when the listed items are complete sentences.

✓ Avoid commas or semicolons following items, and do not use the conjunction and before the last item in a list.

707

✓ Use numbers to indicate sequence or rank. ✓ Follow each number with a period. ✓ Use bullets (round, square, arrow) when you do not wish to

indicate rank or sequence. ✓ When lists need subdivisions, use letters with numbers (see

outlining).

708

logic errors Logic is the study of the principles of reasoning. In most

writing, especially in writing intended to persuade an audience,

logic is essential to demonstrating that your conclusions are

valid. This entry describes typical errors in logic that can

undermine the point you are trying to communicate and your

credibility. See also persuasion.

ETHICS NOTE

Many logic errors occur unintentionally. However, when they are used intentionally to mislead readers, that practice is unethical. See also ethics in writing.

Lack of Reason When a statement is contrary to the reader’s common sense,

that statement is not reasonable. If, for example, you stated,

“New York City is a small town,” your reader might immediately

question your statement. However, if you stated, “Although

New York City’s population is over eight million, it is composed

of neighborhoods that function as small towns,” your reader

could probably accept the statement as reasonable.

Sweeping Generalizations Sweeping generalizations are statements that are too broad or

all-inclusive to be supportable. They are statements that

709

disregard exceptions: A flat statement such as “Management is

never concerned about employees” ignores evidence that many

managers are in fact concerned for their employees. Such

generalizations weaken your credibility.

Non Sequiturs A non sequitur is a statement that does not logically follow a

previous statement.

► I cleared off my desk, and the report is due today.

The missing link in these statements is that the writer cleared

his or her desk to make space for materials to help finish the

report that is due today. Avoid non sequiturs by making sure

you explicitly state the logical connections of ideas and facts in

your writing.

False Cause A false cause (also called post hoc, ergo propter hoc) refers to

the logical fallacy that because one event followed another

event, the first somehow caused the second.

► I didn’t bring my umbrella today. No wonder it is now raining.

► Because we now have our board meetings at the Education Center, our management turnover rate has declined.

Such errors in reasoning can happen when the writer hastily

concludes that two events are related without examining

710

whether a causal connection between them actually exists.

Biased or Suppressed Evidence A conclusion reached as a result of biased or suppressed

evidence — self-serving data, questionable sources, purposely

omitted or incomplete facts — is both illogical and unethical.

Suppose you are preparing a report on the acceptance of a new

policy among employees. If you distribute questionnaires only

to those who think the policy is effective, the resulting evidence

will be biased. Intentionally ignoring relevant data that might

not support your position not only produces inaccurate results

but is unethical.

Fact Versus Opinion Distinguish between fact and opinion. Facts include verifiable

data or statements; opinions are personal conclusions that may

or may not be based on facts. For example, it is verifiable that

distilled water boils at 100 °C; that it tastes better or worse than

tap water is an opinion. Distinguish facts from opinions so that

readers can draw their own conclusions.

Loaded Arguments When you include an opinion in a statement and then reach

conclusions that are based on that statement, you are loading

the argument. Consider the following opening for a memo:

► I have several suggestions to improve the poorly written

711

policy manual. First, we should change ...

Unless everyone agrees that the manual is poorly written,

readers may reject a writer’s entire message because they

disagree with this loaded premise. Conclusions reached with

loaded statements are weak and can produce negative reactions

in readers who detect the loading.

712

loose / lose Loose is an adjective meaning “not fastened” or “unrestrained.”

(“He discovered a loose wire.”) Lose is a verb meaning “be

deprived of” or “fail to win.” (“I hope we do not lose the

contract.”)

713

M

714

malapropisms A malapropism is a word that sounds similar to the one

intended but is ludicrously wrong in the context.

INCORRECT Our employees are less sedimentary now that we have a fitness center.

CORRECT Our employees are less sedentary now that we have a fitness center.

Intentional malapropisms are sometimes used in humorous

writing; unintentional malapropisms can confuse readers and

embarrass a writer. See also figures of speech.

715

maps Maps are often used to show specific geographic areas and

features (such as roads, mountains, and rivers). They can also

illustrate geographic distributions of populations, climate

patterns, corporate branch office locations, and so forth. The

map in Figure M–1, from an environmental assessment, shows

the overlapping geographic areas served by three electric

utilities in Missouri, Iowa, and Illinois. Note that the map

contains a figure number and title, scale of distances, key (or

legend), compass, and distinctive highlighting for emphasis.

Maps are often used in reports, proposals, brochures,

environmental impact statements, and other documents in

which readers need to know the location or geographic

orientation of natural and human-constructed features. For

maps and cartographic resources, see

www.lib.utexas.edu/maps.

716

FIGURE M–1. Map

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Creating and Using Maps

✓ Follow the guidelines discussed in visuals for placement of maps. ✓ Label each map clearly, and assign each map a figure number if it

717

is one of a number of illustrations. ✓ Clearly identify all significant boundaries while eliminating those

unnecessary for your purposes. ✓ Eliminate unnecessary information that may clutter a map. For

example, if the purpose of the map is to show population centers, do not include mountain elevations, rivers, or other physical features.

✓ Include a scale of miles/kilometers or feet/meters to give your readers an indication of the map’s proportions.

✓ Indicate which direction is north with an arrow or a compass symbol.

✓ Emphasize key features by using color, shading, dots, crosshatching, or other appropriate symbols.

✓ Include a key, or legend, that explains what the different colors, shadings, or symbols represent.

✓ Consider copyright and potential plagiarism when incorporating maps found online into your documents.

718

maybe / may be Maybe (one word) is an adverb meaning “perhaps.” (“Maybe

the legal staff can resolve this issue.”) May be (two words) is a

verb phrase. (“It may be necessary to hire a specialist.”)

719

media / medium Media is the plural of medium and requires a plural verb.

► Many communication media are available today. ► The Internet is a multifaceted medium.

720

meetings Meetings enable people to share information and collaborate

more productively than exchanges of multiple messages or

conversations allow. Like a presentation, a successful meeting

requires planning and preparation. See also selecting the

medium.

Planning a Meeting Begin by determining the focus of the meeting, deciding who

should attend, and choosing the best time and place to hold it.

Prepare an agenda for the meeting, and determine who should

take the minutes.

Determine the Purpose of the Meeting The first step in planning a meeting is to focus on the desired

outcome by asking questions to help you determine the

meeting’s purpose: What should participants know, believe, or

be able to do as a result of attending the meeting? Once you’ve

narrowed your focus, write a purpose statement for the meeting

that answers the questions what and why.

► The purpose of this meeting is to gather ideas from the sales force [what] in order to create a successful sales campaign for our new Model PN-4 tablet computer [why].

Decide Who Should Attend Determine first the key people who need to attend the meeting.

721

If a meeting must be held without some key participants, ask

for their contributions prior to the meeting or invite them to

participate by speakerphone, videoconference, or other remote

methods.

Choose the Meeting Time Schedule a meeting for a time when all or most key people can

attend. Consider other factors, such as time of day and length of

the meeting, that can influence its outcome:

Monday morning is often a time people use to prepare for the coming week’s work. Friday afternoon is often when people focus on completing the current week’s tasks. Long meetings may need to include breaks to allow participants to respond to messages and take restroom breaks. Meetings held during the last fifteen minutes of the day will be quick, but few people will remember what happened. Remote participants may need consideration for their time zones.

Choose the Meeting Location Having a meeting at your own location can give you an

advantage: You feel more comfortable than your guests, who

are new to the surroundings. Holding the meeting on someone

else’s premises, however, can signal cooperation. For balance,

especially when people are meeting for the first time or are

discussing sensitive issues, meet at a neutral site, where no one

722

gains an advantage and attendees may feel freer to participate.

Establish the Agenda A tool for focusing the group, the agenda is an outline of what

the meeting will address, as shown in Figure M–2. Always

prepare an agenda, even if it is only an informal list of main

topics. Ideally, the agenda should be distributed to attendees a

day or two before the meeting. For a longer meeting in which

participants are required to make a presentation, try to

distribute the agenda a week or more in advance.

FIGURE M–2. Meeting Agenda

The agenda should list the attendees, the meeting time and

place, and the topics you plan to discuss. If the meeting

723

includes presentations, list the time allotted for each speaker.

Finally, indicate an approximate length for the meeting so that

participants can plan the rest of their day.

If the agenda is distributed in advance of the meeting, it

should be accompanied by a memo or an e-mail informing

people of the following:

The purpose of the meeting The date and place of the meeting The meeting start and stop times The names of the people invited Instructions on how to prepare for the meeting

Figure M–3 shows a cover message to accompany an agenda.

724

FIGURE M–3. E-mail Announcing a Meeting with an Attached Agenda

Assign the Minute-Taking Delegate the minute-taking to someone other than the leader.

The minute-taker should record major decisions and assigned

tasks. To avoid misunderstandings, clarify that the minute-taker

needs to record each assignment, the person responsible for it,

725

and its due date. If the minute-taker will need to follow any

legal or organizational rules for recording the minutes,

establish that in advance of the meeting. The minute-taker is

responsible for distributing the minutes to everyone, including

appropriate nonattendees. For a standing committee, it is best

to rotate the responsibility of taking minutes. See also minutes

of meetings and note-taking.

Conducting the Meeting Assign someone to write on a board or project an image of

information that needs to be viewed by everyone present.

During the meeting, keep to your agenda; however, create a

productive environment by allowing room for differing views

and fostering an environment in which participants listen

respectfully to one another.

Consider the feelings, thoughts, ideas, and needs of others —do not let your own agenda blind you to other points of view. Help other participants feel valued and respected by listening to them and responding to what they say. Respond positively to the comments of others whenever possible. Consider communication styles and approaches that are different from your own, particularly those from other cultures. See also global communication.

Deal with Conflict

726

Despite your best efforts, conflict is inevitable. However,

conflict is potentially valuable; when managed positively, it can

stimulate creative thinking by challenging complacency and

showing ways to achieve goals more efficiently or economically.

See collaborative writing.

Members of any group are likely to vary in their personalities

and attitudes, and you may encounter people who approach

meetings differently. Consider the following tactics for the

interruptive, negative, rambling, overly quiet, and territorial

personality types.

The interruptive person rarely lets anyone finish a sentence and may intimidate the group’s quieter members. Tell that person in a firm but nonhostile tone to let the others finish in the interest of getting everyone’s input. By addressing the issue directly, you signal to the group the importance of putting common goals first. The negative person has difficulty accepting change and often considers a new idea or project from a negative point of view. Such negativity, if left unchecked, can demoralize the group and suppress enthusiasm for new ideas. If the negative person brings up a valid point, however, ask for the group’s suggestions to remedy the issue being raised. If the negative person’s reactions are not valid or are outside the agenda, state the necessity of staying focused on the agenda and perhaps recommend a separate meeting to address those other issues. The rambling person cannot collect his or her thoughts

727

quickly enough to verbalize them succinctly. Restate or clarify this person’s ideas. Try to strike a balance between providing your own interpretation and drawing out the person’s intended meaning. The overly quiet person may be timid or may just be deep in thought. Ask for this person’s ideas, being careful not to embarrass the person. In some cases, you can have a quiet person jot down his or her ideas and give them to you later. The territorial person fiercely defends his or her group against real or perceived threats and may refuse to cooperate with members of other departments, companies, and so on. Point out that although such concerns may be valid, everyone is working toward the same overall goal, and that goal should take precedence.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Many businesses discourage or do not allow smartphones and digital devices in meetings. If your organization allows such devices, meeting attendees should keep them on silent or on vibrator mode and out of sight so that they do not interrupt the meeting. If you are expecting a crucial call, inform the meeting chair and leave the room to respond. The best practice is to have a colleague or your assistant take the call or bring a note to you in the meeting when the call comes in.

Close the Meeting Just before closing the meeting, review all decisions and

assignments. Paraphrase each to help the group focus on what

individual participants have agreed to do and to ensure that the

728

minutes will be complete and accurate. Now is the time to raise

questions and to clarify any misunderstandings. Set a date by

which everyone at the meeting can expect to receive copies of

the minutes. Finally, thank everyone for participating, and

close the meeting on a positive note.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Planning and Conducting Meetings

✓ Develop a purpose statement for the meeting to focus your planning.

✓ Invite only those essential to fulfilling the purpose of the meeting. ✓ Select a time and place convenient to all those attending. ✓ Create an agenda, and distribute it at least a day or two before the

meeting. ✓ Assign someone to take meeting minutes. ✓ Ensure that the minutes record key decisions; assignments; due

dates; and the date, time, and location of any follow-up meeting. ✓ Follow the agenda to keep everyone focused. ✓ Respect the views of others and how they are expressed. ✓ Use the strategies in this entry for handling conflict and attendees

whose style of expression may make it difficult to get everyone’s best thinking.

✓ Close the meeting by reviewing key decisions and assignments.

729

memos Memos use a standard format (To:, From:, Date:, Subject:). Even

for organizations in which e-mail messages are used for routine

communication and other internal documents, a printed or an

attached memo with organizational letterhead can

communicate with formality and authority. In addition, a memo

can offer the full range of word-processing features for short

reports and proposals. Paper memos are also useful in

manufacturing and service industries, as well as in other

businesses where employees do not have easy access to e-mail.

For a discussion of writing strategies for memos, see

correspondence. See also selecting the medium.

Memo Format The memo shown in Figure M–4 illustrates a typical memo

format. As this example illustrates, the use of headings and lists

foster clarity by providing emphasis and highlighting

organization. See also letters. For a discussion of subject lines,

see page 117.

730

731

FIGURE M–4. Typical Memo Format (Printed or Attached to E-mail)

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

As with e-mail, be alert to the practices of addressing and distributing memos in your organization. Consider who should receive or needs to be copied on a memo and in what order—senior managers, for example, take precedence over junior managers. If rank does not apply, alphabetizing recipients by last name is safe.

Some organizations ask writers to initial or sign formal

memos that are printed (hard copy) to verify that the writer

accepts responsibility for a memo’s content.

732

methods of development A logical method of development satisfies the readers’ need for

shape and structure in a document, whether it is an e-mail, a

report, or a Web page. It helps you as a writer move smoothly

and logically from the introduction to a conclusion. Choose the

method or combination of methods that best suits your subject,

audience, and purpose. Following are the most common

methods.

Cause-and-effect method of development begins with either the cause or the effect of an event. This approach can be used to develop a report that offers a solution to a problem, beginning with the problem and moving on to the solution, or vice versa. Chronological method of development emphasizes the time element of a sequence, as in an incident report that traces events as they occurred in time. Comparison method of development is useful when writing about a new topic that is in many ways similar to another topic that is more familiar to your readers. Definition method of development extends definitions with details, examples, comparisons, or other explanatory devices. See also defining terms. Division-and-classification method of development either separates a whole into component parts and discusses each part separately (division) or groups parts into categories that clarify the relationship of the parts (classification). General and specific methods of development proceed

733

either from general information to specific details or from specific information to a general conclusion. Order-of-importance method of development presents information in either decreasing order of importance, as in a proposal that begins with the most important point, or increasing order of importance, as in a presentation that ends with the most important point. Sequential method of development emphasizes the order of elements in a process and is particularly useful when writing step-by-step instructions. Spatial method of development describes the physical appearance of an object or area from top to bottom, inside to outside, front to back, and so on.

Rarely does a writer rely on only one of these methods.

Documents often blend methods of development. For example,

in a report that describes the organization of a company, you

might use elements from three methods of development. You

could divide the larger topic (the company) into operations

(division and classification), arrange the operations according

to what you see as their impact within the company (order of

importance), and present their manufacturing operations in the

order they occur (sequential). When outlining a document, you

may base your major division on one primary method of

development appropriate to your purpose and then subordinate

other methods to it.

734

minutes of meetings Organizations and committees refer to official records of their

meetings as minutes. Because minutes are often used to record

decisions and to settle disputes, they must be accurate,

complete, and clear. When approved, minutes of meetings are

official and can be used as evidence in legal proceedings. A

section from the minutes of a meeting is shown in Figure M–5.

FIGURE M–5. Minutes of a Meeting (Partial Section)

735

Keep your minutes brief and to the point. Except for

recording formally presented motions, which must be

transcribed word for word, summarize what occurs and

paraphrase discussions. To keep the minutes concise, follow a

set format, and use headings for each major point discussed.

See also note-taking.

Avoid abstractions and generalities; always be specific. Refer

to everyone in the same way—a lack of consistency in titles or

names may suggest deference to one person at the expense of

another. Avoid adjectives and adverbs that suggest good or bad

qualities, as in “Mr. Sturgess’s capable assistant read the

comprehensive report to the subcommittee.” Minutes should be

objective and impartial.

If a member of the committee is to follow up on something

and report back to the committee at its next meeting, clearly

state the person’s name and the responsibility he or she has

accepted.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Items to Include in Minutes of Meetings

✓ The name of the group or committee holding the meeting ✓ The topic of the meeting ✓ The kind of meeting (a regular meeting or a special meeting called

to discuss a specific subject or problem) ✓ The number of members present and, for committees or boards of

ten or fewer members, the names of those present and absent

736

✓ The place, time, and date of the meeting ✓ A statement that the chair and the secretary were present or the

names of any substitutes ✓ A statement that the minutes of the previous meeting were

approved or revised ✓ A list of any reports that were read and approved ✓ All the main motions that were made, with statements as to

whether they were carried, defeated, or tabled (vote postponed), and the names of those who made and seconded the motions (motions that were withdrawn are not mentioned)

✓ A full description of resolutions that were adopted and a simple statement of any that were rejected

✓ A record of all ballots, indicating the number of votes cast for and against resolutions

✓ The time the meeting was adjourned (officially ended) and the place, time, and date of the next meeting

✓ The recording secretary’s signature and typed name and, if desired, the signature of the chairperson

737

mission statements A mission statement articulates an organization’s unique reason

for being and attempts to motivate its stakeholders (employees,

customers, and stockholders) to pursue common goals. (See

audience.) A good mission statement can achieve a focused

allocation of organizational resources by answering questions

such as the following: Why do we exist? What is our business?

What are we trying to accomplish? A good mission statement

can foster the success of an organization.

Mission statements can be distributed in an organization’s

annual report, framed for display, or repurposed for the Web

and social media applications. (See also repurposing.) Figure

M–6 shows a typical mission statement.

738

FIGURE M–6. Mission Statement

Writing a Mission Statement Most mission statements have certain elements in common,

739

such as a statement of purpose; a description of the

organization’s line of business; and an acknowledgment of the

organization’s stakeholders, including customers, employees,

and stockholders. Following is a list of various goals that

mission statements may be aimed to achieve:

Reflect an organization’s purpose, function, and primary reason for existing Guide the development and execution of organizational strategies Offer benchmarks toward which long-range goals can be targeted and against which progress can be measured Build and communicate company values over periods of time, thus providing an organization and its employees with a sense of identity Distinguish an organization from others of the same type, and identify the scope of the organization’s operations in product and market terms

Before beginning to write a mission statement, get approval

of your general approach from top management. Then

determine who will write the draft. In a small organization, the

top person normally writes it. In a large organization, it is often

written by a committee made up of representatives from key

stakeholder groups.

Gather as much information as possible about your

organization and its goals by interviewing top management and

researching annual reports and other company documents. If

740

you have a committee to assist you, use brainstorming to

answer the following questions, which will help you understand

the context of the mission statement:

Why was our organization established? Who are our customers and clients? What needs do we meet? What image do we want our products and services to project? What message do we want to send the community, customers, stockholders, and employees about the organization? Where do we see our organization in five or ten years? What does our organizational culture need to be to get us there?

Next, create an outline (see outlining) and then write a draft

(see writing a draft). As you write, try to find words and phrases

that capture the essence of the organization’s purpose and

goals. Avoid jargon, buzzwords, platitudes, meaningless

superlatives, overuse of the word quality, and other language

that can move readers to cynicism. A mission to “Be the best

computer manufacturer in the world” sounds good, but “To

develop products that adapt to the ever-changing needs of our

customers” is a good deal more definable, measurable, and

actionable—and it is motivational.

When you are satisfied with your draft, circulate it to selected

reviewers (involving as many employees, customers, and

741

stockholders as possible, to give everyone a sense of

ownership). Then revise the draft based on the feedback you

receive.

Format and Length The format and length may vary, from a pithy one-sentence

statement—such as a pet-food company’s concise “To enhance

the well-being of dogs and cats”—to a longer document that

includes the company’s vision, values, philosophy, objectives,

and strategies. Avoid a lengthy mission statement because

readers will more readily remember a shorter statement and

incorporate its values into their daily business activities and

planning. You can find mission statements at organizational

Web sites as well as at general sites, such as

www.missionstatements.com. See also business plans.

742

mixed constructions A mixed construction is a sentence in which the elements do

not sensibly fit together. The problem may be a grammar error,

a logic error, or both.

The original sentence mixes a subordinate clause (because the

copier wouldn’t start) with a verb (explains) that attempts to

incorrectly use the subordinate clause as its subject. The

revision correctly uses the pronoun we as the subject of the

main clause. See also sentence construction.

743

modifiers Modifiers are words, phrases, or clauses that expand, limit, or

make more specific the meaning of other elements in a

sentence. Although we can create sentences without modifiers,

we often need the detail and clarification they provide.

WITHOUT MODIFIERS Production decreased.

WITH MODIFIERS Glucose production decreased rapidly.

Most modifiers function as adjectives or adverbs. Adjectives

describe qualities or impose boundaries on the words they

modify.

► noisy machinery, ten files, this printer, a workstation

An adverb modifies an adjective, another adverb, a verb, or an

entire clause.

► Under test conditions, the brake pad showed much less wear than it did under actual conditions. [The adverb much modifies the adjective less.]

► The redesigned brake pad lasted much longer. [The adverb much modifies another adverb longer.]

► The wrecking ball hit the wall of the building hard. [The adverb hard modifies the verb hit.]

► Surprisingly, the motor failed even after passing all those durability and performance tests. [The adverb surprisingly modifies an entire clause.]

744

Adverbs are intensifiers when they increase the impact of

adjectives (very fine, too high) or adverbs (very slowly, rather

quickly). Be cautious using intensifiers; their overuse can lead

to vagueness and a resulting lack of precision.

Stacked (Jammed) Modifiers Stacked (or jammed) modifiers are strings of modifiers

preceding nouns that make writing unclear or difficult to read.

► Your staffing-level authorization reassessment plan should result in a major improvement.

The noun plan is preceded by three long modifiers, a string that

forces the reader to slow down to interpret its meaning. Stacked

modifiers often result from the overuse of buzzwords or

jargon. See how breaking up the stacked modifiers makes the

example easier to read.

► Your plan for reassessing the staffing-level authorizations should result in a major improvement.

Misplaced Modifiers A modifier is misplaced when it applies to the wrong word or

phrase. A misplaced modifier can cause ambiguity.

► We almost lost all the files. [The files were almost lost but were not.]

► We lost almost all the files. [Most of the files were in fact lost.]

745

Note the two meanings possible when the phrase is shifted in

the following sentences:

► The equipment without the accessories sold the best. [Different types of equipment were available, some with and some without accessories.]

► The equipment sold the best without the accessories. [One type of equipment was available, and the accessories were optional.]

To avoid ambiguity, place clauses as close as possible to the

words they modify.

REMOTE We sent the brochure to several local firms that had four-color art.

CLOSE We sent the brochure that had four-color art to several local firms.

Squinting Modifiers A squinting modifier is one that can be interpreted as modifying

either of two sentence elements simultaneously, thereby

confusing readers about which is intended.

► We agreed on the next day to make the adjustments. [Did they agree to make the adjustments on the next day? Or on the next day, did they agree to make the adjustments?]

A squinting modifier can sometimes be corrected simply by

changing its position, but often it is better to rewrite the

sentence.

► We agreed that on the next day we would make the

746

adjustments. [The adjustments were to be made on the next day.]

► On the next day, we agreed that we would make the adjustments. [The agreement was made on the next day.]

See also dangling modifiers.

747

mood The grammatical term mood refers to the verb functions that

indicate whether the verb is intended to make a statement, ask

a question, give a command, or express a hypothetical

possibility.

The indicative mood states a fact, gives an opinion, or asks a

question.

► The setting is correct. / Is the setting correct?

The imperative mood expresses a command, suggestion,

request, or plea. In the imperative mood, the implied subject

you is not expressed. (“Install the system today.”)

The subjunctive mood expresses something that is contrary

to fact or that is conditional, hypothetical, or purely

imaginative; it can also express a wish, a doubt, or a possibility.

In the subjunctive mood, were is used instead of was in clauses

that speculate about the present or future, and the base form

(be) is used following certain verbs, such as propose, request, or

insist. See also progressive tense.

► If we were to close the sale today, we would meet our monthly goal.

► The senior partner insisted that she [I, you, we, they] be the project leader.

The most common use of the subjunctive mood is to express

748

that the writer considers a condition to be contrary to fact. If the

condition is not considered to be contrary to fact, use the

indicative mood.

SUBJUNCTIVE If I were president of the firm, I would change several hiring policies.

INDICATIVE Although I am president of the firm, I don’t control every aspect of its policies.

749

Ms. / Miss / Mrs. Ms. is used in business and public life to address or refer to a

woman. Some women may indicate a preference for Ms., Miss,

or Mrs., which you should honor. If a woman has an academic

or a professional title, use the appropriate form of address

(Doctor, Professor, Captain) instead of Ms., Miss, or Mrs. See

also biased language.

750

mutual / common Common is used when two or more persons (or things) share

something or possess it jointly.

► We have a common desire to make the program succeed. ► Our departments have common office space.

Mutual may also mean “shared” (mutual friend, of mutual

benefit), but it usually implies something given and received

reciprocally and is used with reference to only two persons or

parties.

► Evans respects Roth, and from my observations, the respect is mutual. [Roth also respects Evans.]

751

N

752

narration Narration is a writing that describes a series of events in a

prescribed (often chronological) sequence. Much narrative

writing explains how something happened: a laboratory

procedure, a site visit, an accident, a decision reached at an

important meeting. See also chronological method of

development, trip reports, and incident reports.

Effective narration rests on two key writing techniques: a

careful, accurate sequencing of events and a consistent point of

view on the part of the narrator. Narrative sequence and

essential shifts in the sequence are signaled in three ways:

chronology (clock and calendar time), transitional words

pertaining to time (before, after, next, first, while, then), and

verb tenses that indicate whether something has happened

(past tense) or is under way (present tense). The point of view

indicates the writer’s relation to the information being narrated

as reflected in the use of person. Narration usually expresses a

first or third-person point of view. First-person narration

indicates that the writer is a participant, and third-person

narration indicates that the writer is writing about what

happened to someone or something else.

The narrative shown in Figure N–1 tells the story of a train

accident at the Chicago Loop in detail so that any lessons

learned could be used to improve safety. Although narration

often exists in combination with other forms of discourse

753

(description, exposition, persuasion), avoid interrupting a

narrative with lengthy explanations or analyses. Explain only

what a reader would need to follow the events. See audience.

754

FIGURE N–1. Narration from an Accident Report

SOURCE: National Transportation Safety Board, “Railroad Accident Brief:

755

Chicago Transit Authority, DCA-02-FR-005, Chicago, Illinois, February 26, 2002.” www.ntsb.gov/investigations/AccidentReports/Reports/RAB0304.pdf

756

nature Nature, when used to mean “kind” or “sort,” is vague. Avoid this

usage in your writing. Say exactly what you mean.

757

needless to say The phrase needless to say sometimes occurs in speech and

writing. Eliminate the phrase, or replace it with a more

descriptive word choice.

758

newsletter articles If your organization publishes a newsletter, you may be asked

to contribute an article on a subject in your area of expertise. In

fact, an article is a good way to promote your work or your

department.

Before you begin to write, consider the traditional questions

of journalism (Who did it? What was done? Where was it done?

When was it done? Why was it done?) and then add how, which

may be of as much interest to your colleagues as any of the five

w’s. Next, determine whether the company or management has

an official policy toward or attitude about your subject. If it

does, adhere to it as you prepare your article. See also audience

and context.

Review several fairly recent issues of the newsletter, and

study the style and tone of the writing and the approach used

for various kinds of subjects. Then ask yourself the following

question about your subject: What is its significance to the

organization and to my coworkers? The answer to that question

should help you establish the style, tone, and approach for your

article and also heavily influence your conclusion.

Research for a newsletter article frequently consists of

interviewing for information. Interview key personnel

concerned with your subject. Get all available information and

all points of view. Be sure to give maximum credit to the

maximum number of people by quoting statements from those

759

involved in projects and naming those who have developed

initiatives. See also quotations.

Figure N–2 shows an article written for Connection, a

newsletter produced by Ken Cook Company and distributed to

current and prospective clients. This article describes how the

company employed a third-party expert to perform an audit of

the company’s Quality Management System (designed to

comply with ISO 9001:2000 standards). Notice the inset

quotation (sometimes called a pull quote), which draws readers

to the article and gives them a sense of the article’s content. By

describing this process, the article aims to demonstrate Ken

Cook Company’s “commitment to quality.”

760

FIGURE N–2. Newsletter Article

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

761

Writing Newsletter Articles

✓ Write an intriguing title to catch the audience’s attention; rhetorical questions often work well.

✓ Include as many eye-catching photographs or visuals as appropriate to entice your audience to read the lead paragraph of your introduction. See also layout and design.

✓ Fashion a lead (or lede), or first paragraph, that will encourage further reading. The first paragraph generally makes the transition from the title to the body of the article.

✓ Offer a well-developed presentation of your subject to hold readers’ interest to the end of the article.

✓ Write a conclusion that emphasizes the significance of your subject to your audience and stresses the points you want your readers to retain. See emphasis.

✓ Follow the steps listed in the “Checklist of the Writing Process” as you prepare your newsletter article.

762

newsletters Newsletters are designed to inform and to create and sustain

interest and membership in an organization. They can also be

used to sell products and services. We show an example of a

newsletter in the entry newsletter articles. The Web site for the

American Marketing Association also provides a number of

sample e-newsletters

(www.ama.org/publications/eNewsletters/Pages/default.aspx).

See also blogs and forums.

Types of Newsletters Organizational newsletters, like the one shown in Figure N–2,

are sent to employees, clients, or members of an association to

keep them informed about issues regarding their company or

group, such as the development of new products or policies or

the accomplishments of individuals or teams. Stories in

organizational newsletters can both enhance the group’s image

and foster pride among employees of the organization’s

products or services. For example, Figure N–2 shows how

important quality management is to Ken Cook Company.

Subscription newsletters are designed to attract and build a

readership interested in buying specific products or services or

in learning more about a specific subject. Subscribers are

buying information, and they expect value for their money. For

example, a person with experience in the stock market could

create a financial newsletter and charge subscribers a monthly

763

fee for the investing advice in that newsletter; a person who

collects movie memorabilia could create an online newsletter

that includes stories about ways to find and sell rare movie

posters.

Developing Newsletters Before you begin to develop a newsletter, decide on its purpose

and the specific audience you will target; then make sure the

newsletter’s appearance and content reflect the shared interests

and values of the readership. Newsletters often involve

collaborative writing in which different individuals work on

design, content, and project management. See also persuasion

and promotional writing. If you are asked to contribute an

article to a newsletter, see newsletter articles.

You will need to develop a contact list of your readers and

decide on the most strategic way to get the newsletter to these

readers: postal mail, interoffice mail, e-mail, or Web or blog

posting. Consider using a list-hosting service.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Update your subscriber lists regularly to be sure you are contacting only those who wish to continue receiving your newsletter. You risk damaging your reputation and that of your company if you badger former customers or current clients with unwanted mail or e-mail. Include an opt-out waiver with each newsletter sent, giving subscribers the opportunity to remove themselves from your mailing list. If sending a newsletter electronically, be sure to include opt-out instructions to

1

764

ensure compliance with such laws as the CAN-SPAM Act of 2003.

Your research should include a review of trade journals,

industry blogs, business and technology magazines, Web news

sites, and other sources to find specific angles for the articles

that will appeal to your select audience. Attempt to provide

content that your readers will not find elsewhere — for

example, by interviewing and profiling customers, association

members, or employees. Check your facts meticulously —

newsletter readers are generally specialists in their fields.

Because newsletters are often distributed to branches and

clients abroad, see global communication and global graphics.

See also interviewing for information.

As shown in Figure N–2, a newsletter’s format should be

simple and consistent yet visually appealing to your readership.

Use the active voice and a conversational tone. Use headings

and bullets to break up the text, and make the newsletter easy to

read. Keep your sentences simple and your paragraphs short.

See conciseness and layout and design.

Using desktop-publishing or Web-development software,

create newspaper columns and one or two visuals per page that

complement the text. On the front page, identify the

organization and include the date, volume and issue numbers,

and a contents box. For Web newsletters, follow the principles

of good Web design. See also photographs and writing for the

Web.

765

E-mail list-hosting services have their own servers and provide commercial delivery of premium e-mail that often contains graphic and other digital forms used for advertising.

1

766

nominalizations A nominalization is a noun form of a verb that is often

combined with vague and general (or “weak”) verbs, like make,

do, give, perform, and provide. Avoid nominalizations when

you can use specific verbs that communicate the same idea

more directly and concisely.

If you use nominalizations solely to make your writing sound

more formal, the result will be affectation. See also business

writing style, conciseness, plain language, and voice.

767

none None can be either a singular or a plural pronoun, depending

on the context. See also agreement.

► None of the material has been ordered. [Always use a singular verb with a singular noun—in this case, “material.”]

► None of the clients has been called yet. [Use a singular verb even with a plural noun (clients) if the intended emphasis is on the idea of not one.]

► None of the clients have been called yet. [Use a plural verb if you intend none to refer to all clients.]

For emphasis, substitute no one or not one for none and use a

singular verb.

768

nor / or Nor always follows neither in sentences with continuing

negation. (“They will neither support nor approve the plan.”)

Likewise, or follows either in sentences. (“The firm will accept

either a short-term or a long-term loan.”)

Two or more singular subjects joined by or or nor usually

take a singular verb. However, when one subject is singular and

one is plural, the verb agrees with the subject nearer to it. See

also conjunctions and parallel structure.

SINGULAR Neither the architect nor the client was happy with the design.

PLURAL Neither the architect nor the clients were happy with the design.

SINGULAR Neither the architects nor the client was happy with the design.

769

note-taking The purpose of note-taking is to summarize and record

information you extract during research. The challenge in

taking notes is to condense someone else’s thoughts into your

own words without distorting the original thinking. As you

extract information, let your knowledge of the audience and the

purpose of your writing guide you. For taking notes at a

meeting, see minutes of meetings.

ETHICS NOTE

Resist copying your source word for word as you take notes; instead, paraphrase the author’s idea or concept. If you only change a few words from a source and incorporate that text into your document without giving credit to your source, you will be guilty of plagiarism. See also paraphrasing.

If an expert source states something that is especially

precise, striking, or noteworthy or that reinforces your point,

you can justifiably quote the source directly and incorporate it

into your document. If you use a direct quotation, enclose the

material in quotation marks in your notes. In your finished

writing, document the source of your quotation. You will rarely

need to quote anything longer than a paragraph. See also

documenting sources and quotations.

When taking notes on abstract ideas, as opposed to factual

770

data, do not sacrifice clarity for brevity—notes expressing

concepts can lose their meaning if they are too brief. The test is

whether you can understand the note a week later and recall the

significant ideas of the passage.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Taking Notes

✓ Ask yourself the following questions: What information do I need to fulfill my purpose? What are the needs of my audience?

✓ Record only the most important ideas and concepts. Be sure to record all vital names, dates, and definitions.

✓ When in doubt about whether to take a note, consider the difficulty of finding the source again should you want it later.

✓ Use direct or indirect quotations when sources state something that is precise, striking, or noteworthy, or that succinctly reinforces a point you are making.

✓ Photocopy, scan, or download pages, and highlight passages that you intend to quote.

✓ Give proper credit. Record the author; title; publisher; place; page number; URL; and date of publication, posting, or retrieval. (On subsequent notes from the same source, include only the author and page number or URL.)

✓ Record notes in a way that you find efficient and useful for outlining, whether using the latest note-taking software or traditional index cards.

✓ Check your notes for accuracy against the original material before moving on to another source.

771

nouns DIRECTORY

Types of Nouns Noun Functions Collective Nouns Plural Nouns

A noun is a part of speech that names a person, a place, a thing,

a concept, an action, or a quality.

Types of Nouns The two basic types of nouns are proper nouns and common

nouns. Proper nouns, which are capitalized, name specific

people, places, and things (H. G. Wells, Boston, United Nations,

Nobel Prize). See also capitalization.

Common nouns, which are not capitalized unless they begin

sentences or appear in titles, name general classes or

categories of persons, places, things, concepts, actions, and

qualities (writer, city, organization, award). Common nouns

include concrete nouns, abstract nouns, collective nouns, count

nouns, and mass nouns.

Concrete nouns are common nouns used to identify those

things that can be discerned by the five senses (paper,

keyboard, glue, nail, grease).

772

Abstract nouns are common nouns that name ideas,

qualities, or concepts that cannot be discerned by the five

senses (loyalty, pride, valor, peace, devotion).

Collective nouns are common nouns that indicate a group or

collection. They are plural in meaning but singular in form

(audience, jury, staff, committee). (See “Collective Nouns” for

advice on using singular or plural forms with collective nouns.)

Count nouns are concrete nouns that identify things that can

be separated into countable units (desks, envelopes, printers,

pencils, books).

Mass nouns are concrete nouns that identify things that

cannot be separated into countable units (water, air, electricity,

oil, cement). See also English as a second language.

Noun Functions Nouns function as subjects of verbs, direct and indirect objects

of verbs, objects of prepositions, subjective and objective

complements, or appositives.

► The metal failed during the test. [subject] ► The bricklayer cemented the blocks efficiently. [direct

object of a verb] ► The state presented our department a safety award.

[indirect object] ► The event occurred within the year. [object of a

preposition]

773

► A dynamo is a generator. [subjective complement] ► The regional manager was appointed chairperson.

[objective complement] ► Philip Garcia, the treasurer, gave his report last.

[appositive]

Words normally used as nouns can also be used as adjectives

and adverbs.

► It is company policy. [adjective] ► He went home. [adverb]

Collective Nouns When a collective noun refers to a group as a whole, it takes a

singular verb and pronoun.

► The staff was divided on the issue and could not reach its decision until May 15.

When a collective noun refers to individuals within a group, it

takes a plural verb and pronoun.

► The staff have returned to their offices after the conference.

A better way to emphasize the individuals on the staff would be

to use the phrase the staff members.

► The staff members have returned to their offices after the conference.

774

Treat organization names and titles as singular.

► LRM Associates has grown 30 percent in the last three years; it will move to a new facility in January.

Plural Nouns Most nouns form the plural by adding s (desk/desks, pen/pens).

Nouns ending in ch, s, sh, x, and z form the plural by adding es.

► search/searches, glass/glasses, wish/wishes, six/sixes, buzz/buzzes

Nouns that end in a consonant plus y form the plural by

changing the y to ies (delivery/deliveries). Some nouns ending

in o add es to form the plural, but others add only s

(tomato/tomatoes, dynamo/dynamos). Some nouns ending in f

or fe add s to form the plural; others change the f or fe to ves.

► cliff/cliffs, cafe/cafes, hoof/hooves, knife/knives

Some nouns require an internal change to form the plural.

► woman/women, man/men, mouse/mice, goose/geese

Some nouns do not change in the plural form.

► many fish, several deer, fifty sheep

Some nouns remain in the plural form whether singular or

plural.

775

► headquarters, means, series, crossroads

Hyphenated and open compound nouns form the plural in the

main word.

► sons-in-law, high schools, editors in chief

Compound nouns written as one word add -s to the end (two

tablespoonfuls).

If you are unsure of the proper usage, check a dictionary. See

possessive case for a discussion of how nouns form

possessives.

776

number (grammar) Number is the grammatical property of nouns, pronouns, and

verbs that signifies whether one thing (singular) or more than

one thing (plural) is being referred to. (See also agreement.)

Nouns normally form the plural by simply adding -s or -es to

their singular forms.

► Partners in successful businesses are not always personal friends.

Some nouns require an internal change to form the plural.

► woman/women, man/men, goose/geese, mouse/mice

All pronouns except you change internally to form the plural.

► I/we, he/they, she/they, it/they

By adding s or es, most verbs show the singular of the third

person, present tense, indicative mood.

► he stands, she works, it goes

The verb be normally changes form to indicate the plural.

SINGULAR I am ready to begin work.

PLURAL We are ready to begin work.

777

numbers DIRECTORY

Numerals or Words Plurals Measurements Fractions Money Time Dates Addresses Documents

The standards for using numbers vary; however, unless you are

following an organizational or a professional style manual,

observe the following guidelines.

Numerals or Words Write numbers from zero through nine as words, and write

numbers ten and above as numerals.

► I rehearsed my presentation three times. ► The association added 152 new members.

Spell out numbers that begin a sentence, however, even if they

would otherwise be written as numerals.

► One hundred and fifty-two new members joined the

778

association.

If spelling out such a number seems awkward, rewrite the

sentence so that the number does not appear at the beginning

(“We added 152 new members.”).

Spell out approximate and round numbers.

► We’ve had more than a thousand requests this month.

In most writing, spell out ordinal numbers under nine (first

through ninth) and use numerals over nine (10th, 11th, and so

on) or when they modify a century (the twenty-first century).

However, avoid ordinal numbers in dates (use March 30 or 30

March, not March 30th). In mathematical copy or in copy with

lots of numbers, it may be less awkward to use numerals

consistently, except at the beginning of a sentence.

Plurals Indicate the plural of numerals by adding s (7s, the late 1990s).

Form the plural of a written number (like any noun) by adding s

or es or by dropping the y and adding ies (elevens, sixes,

twenties). See also apostrophes.

Measurements Express units of measurement as numerals (3 miles, 45 cubic

feet, 9 meters). When numbers run together in the same

phrase, write one as a numeral and the other as a word.

779

Generally give percentages as numerals and write out the word

percent. (“Approximately 85 percent of the land has been sold.”)

However, in a table, use a numeral followed by the percent

symbol (85%).

Fractions Express fractions as numerals when they are written with whole

numbers (27½ inches, 4¼ miles). Spell out fractions when they

are expressed without a whole number (one-fourth, seven-

eighths). Always write decimal numbers as numerals (5.21

meters).

Money In general, use numerals to express exact or approximate

amounts of money.

► We need to charge $28.95 per unit. ► The new system costs $60,000.

Use words to express indefinite amounts of money.

► The printing system may cost several thousand dollars.

Use numerals and words for rounded amounts of money over

one million dollars.

► The contract is worth $6.8 million.

780

Use numerals for more complex or exact amounts.

► The corporation paid $2,452,500 in taxes last year.

For amounts under a dollar, use numerals and the word cents

(“The pens cost 75 cents each”) unless other numerals that

require dollar signs appear in the same sentence.

► The business-card holders cost $10.49 each, the pens cost $.75 each, and the pencil cup holders cost $6.49 each.

Time Divide hours and minutes with colons when a.m. or p.m.

follows (7:30 a.m., 11:30 p.m.). Do not use colons with the 24-

hour system (0730, 2330). Spelled-out time is not followed by

a.m. or p.m. (seven o’clock in the evening).

Dates In the United States, dates are usually written in a month-day-

year sequence (August 11, 2018). Never use the strictly

numerical form for dates (8/11/18) because the date is not

immediately clear, especially in international correspondence.

Addresses Spell out numbered streets from one through ten unless space

is at a premium (East Tenth Street). Write building numbers as

numerals. The only exception is the building number one (One

East Monument Street). Write highway numbers as numerals

781

(U.S. 40, Ohio 271, I-94).

Documents Page numbers are written as numerals in manuscripts (page

37). Chapter and volume numbers may appear as numerals or

words (Chapter 2 or Chapter Two, Volume 1 or Volume One),

but be consistent. Express figure and table numbers as

numerals (Figure 4, Table 3).

Do not follow a word representing a number with a numeral

in parentheses that represents the same number. Doing so is

redundant.

782

O

783

objects Objects are nouns or noun equivalents: pronouns, verbals, and

noun phrases or clauses. The three kinds of objects are direct

objects, indirect objects, and objects of prepositions. See also

complements.

A direct object answers the question what? or whom? about a

verb and its subject.

► We sent a full report. [We sent what?] ► Michelle e-mailed the client. [Michelle e-mailed whom?]

An indirect object is a noun or noun equivalent that occurs with

a direct object after certain kinds of transitive verbs, such as

give, wish, cause, and tell. The indirect object answers the

question to whom or what? or for whom or what? The indirect

object always precedes the direct object.

► We sent the general manager a full report. [Report is the direct object; the indirect object, general manager, answers the question, “We sent a full report to whom?”]

The object of a preposition is a noun or pronoun that is

introduced by a preposition, forming a prepositional phrase.

► At the meeting, the district managers approved the contract. [Meeting is the object, and at the meeting is the prepositional phrase.]

784

OK / okay The expression okay (also spelled OK) is common in informal

writing, but it should be avoided in most business writing.

785

on / onto / upon On is normally used as a preposition meaning “attached to” or

“located at.” (“Install the shelf on the north wall.”) On also

stresses a position of rest. (“The victim lay on the stretcher.”)

Onto implies movement to a position on or movement up and

on. (“The commuters surged onto the platform.”) Upon is a

formal word for on, whose use is unnecessary in most contexts.

Upon is the correct choice, however, when referring to when

something happened or needs to happen. (“The report is due

upon completion of the project.”)

786

one When used as an indefinite pronoun, one may help you avoid

repeating a noun. (“We need a new plan, not an old one.”) One

is often redundant in phrases in which it restates the noun, and

it may take the proper emphasis away from the adjective.

One can also be used in place of a noun or personal pronoun in

a statement. (“One cannot ignore one’s physical condition.”)

Using one in that way is formal and impersonal; in any but the

most formal writing, you should address your reader directly

and personally as you. (“You cannot ignore your physical

condition.”) See also point of view.

787

one of those . . . who A dependent clause beginning with who or that and preceded

by one of those takes a plural verb. See also agreement.

► She is one of those managers who are concerned about their writing.

In this example, who refers to a plural antecedent (managers)

and thus takes a plural verb (are).

If the phrase one of those is preceded by the only, however,

the verb should be singular.

► She is the only one of those managers who is concerned about her writing. [The verb is singular because its subject, who, refers to a singular antecedent, one. If the sentence were reversed, it would read, “Of those managers, she is the only one who is concerned about her writing.”]

788

online professional profile Online professional profiles — such as those on LinkedIn,

AngelList, and Academia.edu, and in Figure O–1 — can help you

in your job search as well as in your efforts to network with

colleagues, clients, and customers. Online profiles can often be

posted on community sites for professional associations, like

IEEE’s Collabratec. They typically include information on

education, skills and abilities, work history, certifications,

recommendations, awards and honors, and interests. Accessed

through Web browsers or mobile devices, these sites include

tools to communicate and network with colleagues and friends,

including the ability to recommend one another for particular

skills or knowledge and to connect with others through status

updates (see also social media) and private messaging. In

addition, some sites, like LinkedIn, have profiles for

companies, nonprofit organizations, and other groups.

789

FIGURE O–1. Online Profile

790

As a job seeker, you can use your online professional profile

to share your qualifications and interests with potential

employers and colleagues. Employment agencies and human

resources staff often search these profile sites to find possible

candidates for job openings. You can also ask friends and

colleagues to review your online profile to see if it matches any

job openings or needs in their workplaces.

Personally, you can use your online profile to network with

others in the same career or field as you. These personal

connections can help you solve problems, share industry news,

and collaborate on projects. Although these are personal uses,

be sure to stick with professional information in your updates

and on your online profile. Post more personal information on

other sites, such as Facebook, rather than on professional

networking sites.

Choosing the Appropriate Site When choosing a site, consider the information it allows you to

share and the fields and careers of those already on the site.

Consider, too, your audience and purpose for the profile: Do

you want to connect with potential employers? Are you hoping

to network with others in the field? Do you plan to build a

portfolio where you can archive your work? Your answers to

questions like these will help you decide which site is best for

you. For example, an engineering or accounting student looking

for a job after graduation would probably choose LinkedIn,

where she can post information about her education and skills

791

using keywords that will attract and interest potential

employers. An undergraduate student interested in entering

graduate school might build a profile on Academia.edu, which

will allow her to post papers she has written and her curriculum

vitae (CV) along with basic personal information. A student

interested in cutting-edge technology or product development

might create a profile on AngelList, which is a network for

startups.

Writing Style and Tips The writing style for your online profile is similar to the style

for your résumé and other job-search documents. Focus on

composing a professional and honest statement of your

education, experience, and other details. In addition, pay close

attention to the context, purpose, and audience of your

message, ensuring that your message is clear, precise, and free

of grammatical errors. See proofreading.

The information that you publish on your online profile is

immediately available to the public and can have long-lasting

effects. Do not post anything on your profile that you would not

want to follow you throughout your career. You can, of course,

update your profile as necessary, but once information has

been published, it can be archived or printed so that readers

can still access what you have written. If the site that you

choose allows you to create a personalized link to your profile,

use the name that you go by professionally.

792

Personal Information and Overview As on a résumé, include some personally identifying

information, such as your name and location, but omit

specifics, such as street address, phone number, or e-mail

address. Include a strong description of your skills and

experience in the opening summary. Beyond the basic

identifying information at the top of your profile, these opening

descriptions are critical to making a good first impression. Most

profiles allow you to add links to your Web site or to upload

examples of your work. Add supporting materials that illustrate

your skills and capabilities.

In particular, pay attention to sections such as the summary

on LinkedIn or the biography on Academia.edu, which allow

you to include descriptive details of your qualifications,

interests, personal brand, and career goals. Leaving these

sections blank or writing only a sentence or brief phrase

reduces the power of your profile. Use the full space to tell

readers why they should connect with you.

These sites include a place for a profile photo. Look at the

profiles of others in your field to determine whether self-

portraits are typically used in your industry. If you decide to

include a photograph, choose a professional and current image.

(Remember that photographs may not be appropriate in all

professions.) You should be shown wearing the clothes that you

might wear to an interview or when on the job. Ensure that

there are no distractions or unnecessary objects in the

793

background of the image. Finally, choose an image that is

specifically for your professional profile. This is not the place to

use an image from which you have cut out family members or

friends.

Experience, Education, and Skills Outline your experience, just as you would on your résumé. Be

sure that the details on your profile (such as the dates of

employment) are consistent with your résumé and other job-

search documents but not necessarily identical. Concentrate on

representing your personal brand (see job search) with the

information that you share.

In addition to listing the details of your experience, provide a

description of your duties and accomplishments. These

specifics will help potential employers and colleagues visualize

your experience. Take advantage of the description area in the

education section by listing specific courses or

accomplishments (such as scholarships or the dean’s list). List

your skills, using industry-specific terms, tools, or software. For

example, rather than stating “image editing” as a skill, state

exactly what software you are proficient with. If you have

industry certifications, list that information as well.

794

only The word only should be placed immediately before the word or

phrase it modifies. See also modifiers.

Be careful with the placement of only because it can change the

meaning of a sentence.

► Only he said that he was tired. [He alone said that he was tired.]

► He only said that he was tired. [He actually was not tired, although he said he was.]

► He said only that he was tired. [He said nothing except that he was tired.]

► He said that he was only tired. [He said that he was nothing except tired.]

795

order-of-importance method of development The order-of-importance method of development is a

particularly effective and common organizing strategy. This

method can use one of two ordering strategies — decreasing

order (Figure O–2), which is often best for written documents,

and increasing order, which is especially effective for oral

presentations.

796

FIGURE O–2. Decreasing Order-of-Importance Method of Development

797

Decreasing Order Decreasing order begins with the most important fact or point,

then moves to the next most important, and so on, ending with

the least important. This order is especially appropriate for a

memo or other correspondence addressed to a busy decision

maker (see Figure O–2), who may be able to reach a decision

after considering only the most important points. If you’re

addressing a report to various readers, some of whom may be

interested in only the major points and others who may need all

the information, decreasing order may be ideal for your

purpose.

The advantages of decreasing order are that it (1) gets the

reader’s attention immediately by presenting the most

important point first, (2) makes a strong initial impression, and

(3) ensures that even the most hurried reader will not miss the

most important point.

Increasing Order Increasing order begins from the least important point or fact,

then progresses to the next more important, and builds finally

to the most important or strongest point.

In workplace contexts, increasing order of importance can

be effective in writing but is more often used in oral

presentations in which (1) you want to save your strongest

798

points until the end or (2) you need to build the ideas point by

point to an important conclusion.

Many oral presentations benefit especially from increasing

order because it leaves the audience with the strongest points

freshest in their minds. For example, consider an oral

presentation to an audience of managers in which you must

present the benefits of a new quality management system. You

might begin with a benefit that is valid but of the least value to

the organization generally and build to the benefit that is most

valuable to all operations within the organization. The

disadvantage of increasing order, especially for written

documents, is that it begins weakly, and the reader may become

impatient or distracted before reaching your main point.

799

organization Organization is essential to the success of a formal report, a

Web page, or an effective presentation. Good organization is

achieved by outlining and by using a logical and appropriate

method of development that suits your subject, your audience,

and your purpose.

During the organization stage of the writing process,

consider a layout and design that will highlight structure,

hierarchy, and order, and determine the format appropriate to

your subject and purpose. If you intend to include visuals with

your writing, consider them as you create your outline,

especially if they need to be prepared by someone else while

you are writing and revising the draft. See also “Five Steps to

Successful Writing.”

800

organizational charts An organizational chart shows how the various divisions or

units of an organization are related to one another. This type of

visual is useful when you want to give readers an overview of

an organization or to display the lines of authority within it, as

in Figure O–3.

FIGURE O–3. Organizational Chart

The title of each organizational component (office, section,

division) is placed in a separate box. The boxes are then linked

to a central authority. If readers need the information, include

the name of the person and position title in each box.

801

outlining An outline is the skeleton of the document you are going to

write; at the least, it should list the main topics and subtopics of

your subject in a logical method of development.

Advantages of Outlining An outline provides structure to your writing by ensuring that it

has a beginning (introduction), a middle (main body), and an

end (conclusion). Using an outline offers many other benefits:

Larger and more complex subjects are easier to handle because an outline breaks them into manageable parts. Like a road map, an outline indicates a starting point and keeps you moving logically so that you do not lose your way before you arrive at your conclusion. Parts of an outline are easily moved around so that you can choose the most effective arrangement of your ideas. (The outline feature in your word-processing program is useful for checking the organization of a document before revising.) Creating a good outline frees you from concerns of organization while you are writing a draft. An outline enables you to provide coherence and transition so that one part flows smoothly into the next without omitting important details. Logic errors are much easier to detect and correct in an outline than in a draft. An outline helps with collaborative writing because it

802

enables a team to refine a project’s scope, divide responsibilities, and maintain focus.

Types of Outlines Two types of outlines are most common: short topic outlines

and lengthy sentence outlines. A topic outline consists of short

phrases arranged to reflect your primary method of

development. A topic outline is especially useful for short

documents, such as e-mails, letters, or memos. See also

correspondence.

For a large writing project, create a topic outline first, and

then use it as a basis for creating a sentence outline. A sentence

outline uses a complete sentence for each idea that may become

the topic sentence for a paragraph. If most of your notes can be

shaped into topic sentences for paragraphs in your rough draft,

you can be relatively sure that your document will be well

organized. See also note-taking and research.

Creating an Outline For large and complex subjects with many pieces of

information, the first step is to group your research notes into

related categories. Sort your notes by major and minor division

headings. For example, the major divisions for this discussion

of outlining could be as follows:

I. Advantages of outlining II. Types of outlines

803

III. Creating an outline

The second step is to establish your minor divisions within each

major division. Using a method of development, create your

minor points and arrange them under their major division, then

label them with capital letters.

You will sometimes need more than two levels of headings. If

your subject is complicated, you may need three or four levels

of headings to better organize all your ideas in proper

relationship to one another. In that event, use the following

numbering scheme:

I. First-level heading A. Second-level heading

1. Third-level heading a. Fourth-level heading

The third step is to mark each of your notes with the

appropriate roman numeral and capital letter. Arrange the

notes logically within each minor heading, and mark each with

the appropriate sequential arabic number. As you do, make

sure your organization is logical and your headings have

parallel structure. For example, all the second-level headings

804

under “III. Creating an outline” are complete sentences in the

active voice.

Treat visuals as an integral part of your outline, and plan

approximately where each should appear. Either include a

rough sketch of the visual, or write “illustration of . . .” at each

location. As with other information in an outline, freely move,

delete, or add visuals as needed.

Another outlining format is the decimal numbering system,

as shown in the following example:

1. FIRST-LEVEL HEADING 1.1 Second-level heading 1.2 Second-level heading

1.2.1 Third-level heading 1.2.2 Third-level heading

1.2.2.1 Fourth-level heading 1.2.2.2 Fourth-level heading

1.3 Second-level heading 2. FIRST-LEVEL HEADING

This system should not go beyond the fourth level because the

numbers get too cumbersome beyond that point. In many

documents, such as policies and procedures, the decimal

numbering system is carried over from the outline to the final

version of the document for ease of cross-referencing sections.

Create your draft by converting your notes into complete

sentences and paragraphs. If you have a sentence outline, the

805

most difficult part of the writing job is over. However,

remember that any outline is flexible; it may need to change as

you write the draft, but it should always be your point of

departure and return.

806

outside [of] In the phrase outside of, the word of is redundant.

Do not use outside of to mean “aside from” or “except for.”

807

over [with] In the expression over with, the word with is redundant; such

words as completed or finished often better express the

thought.

808

P

809

pace Pace is the speed at which you present ideas to the reader. Your

goal should be to achieve a pace that fits your audience,

purpose, and context. The more knowledgeable the reader is

about the subject, the faster your pace can be. Be careful,

though, not to lose control of the pace. In the following

example, the first version piles facts on top of each other at a

rapid pace. The second version presents the same facts at a

controlled pace in two more easily assimilated sentences. In

addition, the second version achieves a different and more

desirable emphasis.

RAPID The corporate records database (CRD) contains each employee’s full name, mailing address, social security number, and current job classification and is intended to help individual departments and offices process records for every one of the 21,000 employees worldwide.

CONTROLLED The corporate records database (CRD) contains identifying information for every one of the 21,000 employees worldwide. The CRD enables individual departments and offices to process employee records, and it contains each employee’s full name, mailing address, social security number, and current job classification.

810

paragraphs A paragraph performs three functions: It (1) develops the unit

of thought stated in the topic sentence; (2) provides a logical

break in the material; and (3) creates a visual break on the page,

which signals a new topic.

Topic Sentence A topic sentence states the paragraph’s main idea; the rest of

the paragraph supports and develops that statement with

related details. The topic sentence, which is often the first

sentence, tells the reader what the paragraph is about.

► The cost of training new employees is high. In addition to the cost of classroom facilities and instructors, an organization must pay employees their regular salary while they sit in the classroom. For the companies to break even on this investment in their professional employees, those employees must stay in the job for which they have been trained for at least one year.

The topic sentence is usually most effective early in the

paragraph, but a paragraph can lead to the topic sentence,

which is sometimes done to achieve emphasis.

► Energy does far more than simply make our daily lives more comfortable and convenient. Suppose someone wanted to stop — and reverse — the economic progress of this nation. What would be the surest and quickest way to

811

do it? Simply block the nation’s ability to produce energy! The nation would face a devastating economic crisis. Our economy, in short, is energy based.

On rare occasions, the topic sentence may logically fall in the

middle of a paragraph.

► It is time to insist that science does not progress by carefully designed steps called “experiments,” each of which has a well-defined beginning and end. Science is a continuous and often a disorderly and accidental process. We shall not do the young psychologist any favor if we agree to reconstruct our practices to fit the pattern demanded by current scientific methodology.

— B. F. Skinner, “A Case History in Scientific Method”

Paragraph Length A paragraph should be just long enough to deal adequately with

the subject of its topic sentence. A new paragraph should begin

whenever the subject changes significantly. A series of short,

undeveloped paragraphs can indicate poor organization by

breaking a single idea into several pieces. A series of long

paragraphs, however, can fail to provide the reader with

manageable subdivisions of thought. Paragraph length should

aid the reader’s understanding of ideas.

Occasionally, a one-sentence paragraph is acceptable if it is

used as a transition between longer paragraphs or as a one-

812

sentence introduction or conclusion in correspondence.

Writing Paragraphs Careful paragraphing reflects the writer’s logical organization

and helps the reader follow the writer’s thoughts. A good

working outline makes it easy to group ideas into appropriate

paragraphs. (See also outlining.) The following partial topic

outline plots the course of the subsequent paragraphs:

TOPIC OUTLINE (PARTIAL)

I. Advantages of Chicago as location for new facility A. Transport infrastructure

1. Rail 2. Air 3. Truck 4. Sea (except in winter)

B. Labor supply 1. Engineering and scientific personnel

a. Similar companies in area b. Major universities

2. Technical and manufacturing personnel a. Community college programs b. Custom programs

RESULTING PARAGRAPHS Probably the greatest advantage of Chicago as a location for

our new facility is its excellent transport facilities. The city

is served by three major railroads. Both domestic and

813

international air-cargo service are available at O’Hare

International Airport; Midway Airport’s convenient

location adds flexibility for domestic air-cargo service.

Chicago is a major hub of the trucking industry, and most

of the nation’s large freight carriers have terminals there.

Finally, except in the winter months, when the Great Lakes

are frozen, Chicago is a seaport, accessible through the St.

Lawrence Seaway.

Chicago’s second advantage is its abundant labor force.

An ample supply of engineering and scientific staff is

assured not only by the presence of many companies

engaged in activities similar to ours but also by the

presence of several major universities in the metropolitan

area. Similarly, technicians and manufacturing personnel

are in abundant supply. The colleges in the Chicago City

College system, as well as half a dozen other two-year

colleges in the outlying areas, produce graduates with

associate’s degrees in a wide variety of technical specialties

appropriate to our needs. Moreover, three of the outlying

colleges have expressed an interest in developing off-

campus courses attuned specifically to our requirements.

Paragraph Unity and Coherence A good paragraph has unity and coherence as well as adequate

development. Unity is singleness of purpose, based on a topic

sentence that states the core idea of the paragraph. When every

sentence in the paragraph develops the core idea, the

814

paragraph has unity. Coherence is holding to one point of view,

one attitude, one tense; it is the joining of sentences into a

logical pattern. Transitional words tie ideas together and lead to

coherence, as shown by the boldfaced italicized words in the

following paragraph.

TOPIC SENTENCE

Over the past several months, I have heard complaints about the Merit Award Program. Specifically, many employees feel that this program should be linked to annual salary increases. They believe that salary increases would provide a much better incentive than the current $500 to $700 cash awards for exceptional service. In addition, these employees believe that their supervisors consider the cash awards a satisfactory alternative to salary increases. Although I don’t think this practice is widespread, the fact that the employees believe that it is justifies a reevaluation of the Merit Award Program.

Simple enumeration (first, second, then, next, and so on) also

provides effective transition within paragraphs. Notice how the

boldfaced italicized words and phrases give coherence to the

following paragraph.

► Most adjustable office chairs have nylon tubes that hold metal spindle rods. To keep the chair operational, lubricate the spindle rods occasionally. First, loosen the set screw in the adjustable bell. Then, lift the chair from the base. Next, apply the lubricant to the spindle rod and the nylon washer. When you have finished, replace the chair and tighten the set screw.

815

parallel structure Parallel structure requires that sentence elements that are alike

in function be alike in grammatical form as well. This structure

achieves an economy of words, clarifies meaning, expresses the

equality of the ideas, and achieves emphasis. Parallel structure

assists readers because it allows them to anticipate the meaning

of a sentence element on the basis of its construction.

Parallel structure can be achieved with words, phrases, or

clauses.

► If you want to benefit from the jobs training program, you must be punctual, courteous, and conscientious. [parallel words]

► If you want to benefit from the jobs training program, you must recognize the importance of punctuality, of courtesy, and of conscientiousness. [parallel phrases]

► If you want to benefit from the jobs training program, you must arrive punctually, you must behave courteously, and you must study conscientiously. [parallel clauses]

Correlative conjunctions (either ... or, neither ... nor, not

only ... but also) should always join elements that use parallel

structure. Both parts of the pairs should be followed

immediately by the same grammatical form: two similar words,

two similar phrases, or two similar clauses.

► Viruses carry either DNA or RNA, never both. [parallel words]

816

► Clearly, neither serological tests nor virus isolation studies alone would have been adequate. [parallel phrases]

► Either we must increase our production efficiency or we must decrease our production goals. [parallel clauses]

To make a parallel construction clear and effective, it is often

best to repeat an article, a pronoun, a helping verb, a

preposition, a subordinating conjunction, or the mark of an

infinitive (to).

► The association has a mission statement and a code of ethics. [article]

► The software is popular because it is compatible across platforms and because it is easily customized. [subordinating conjunction]

Parallel structure is especially important in creating lists,

outlines, tables of contents, and headings because it lets

readers know the relative value of each item. See also outlining.

Faulty Parallelism Faulty parallelism results when joined elements are intended to

serve equal grammatical functions but do not have equal

grammatical form.

Faulty parallelism sometimes occurs because a writer tries to

compare items that are not comparable.

NOT PARALLEL

The company offers special college training to help hourly employees move into professional careers, like engineering management, software

817

development, service technicians, and sales trainees. [Notice faulty comparison of occupations — engineering management and software development — to people — service technicians and sales trainees.]

To avoid faulty parallelism, make certain that each element in a

series is similar in form and structure to all others in the same

series.

PARALLEL The company offers special college training to help hourly employees move into professional careers, like engineering management, software development, technical services, and sales.

818

paraphrasing Paraphrasing is restating or rewriting the essential ideas of

another writer in your own words. The following example is an

original passage and a paraphrased version that accurately

restates the essential information in a form appropriate for a

report.

ORIGINAL Generally, the goals of workplace professionals demand that they think in specific, practical, and immediately applicable ways; those of us in the academy must think in terms that are more abstract, conceptual, and long-term. It is understandable, then, that works that might be highly valued by either practitioners or academics can seem entirely irrelevant to the other.

— Gerald J. Alred, “Bridging Cultures: The Academy and the Workplace,” Journal of Business Communication

PARAPHRASE Practitioners who value specific, practical goals and academics who need to think in abstract, long-term ways understandably value different works (Alred, 2006).

ETHICS NOTE

Because paraphrasing does not quote a source word for word, quotation marks are not used. However, paraphrased material should be credited because the ideas are taken from someone else. See also note-taking, plagiarism, and quotations.

819

parentheses Parentheses are used to enclose explanatory or digressive

words, phrases, or sentences. Material in parentheses often

clarifies or defines the preceding text without altering its

meaning.

► She severely bruised her tibia (or shinbone) in the accident.

Parenthetical information may not be essential to a sentence (in

fact, parentheses deemphasize the enclosed material), but it

may be helpful to some readers.

Parenthetical material does not affect the punctuation of a

sentence, and any punctuation (such as a comma or period)

should appear following the closing parenthesis.

► She could not fully extend her knee because of a torn meniscus (or cartilage), and she suffered pain from a severely bruised tibia (or shinbone).

When a complete sentence within parentheses stands

independently, the ending punctuation is placed inside the final

parenthesis.

► The project director listed the problems her staff faced. (This was the third time she had complained to the board.)

For some constructions, however, you should consider using

820

subordination rather than parentheses.

Parentheses are also used to enclose numerals or letters that

indicate sequence.

► The following sections deal with (1) preparation, (2) research, (3) organization, (4) writing, and (5) revision.

Do not follow spelled-out numbers with numerals in

parentheses representing the same numbers.

Use brackets to set off a parenthetical item that is already

within parentheses.

► We should be sure to give Emanuel Foose (and his brother Emilio [1912–1982]) credit for his part in founding the institute.

See also documenting sources and quotations.

821

parts of speech The term parts of speech describes the class of words to which a

particular word belongs, according to its function in a sentence.

PART OF SPEECH FUNCTION

noun, pronoun naming / referring

verb acting / asserting

adjective, adverb describing / modifying

conjunction, preposition joining / linking

interjection exclaiming

Many words can function as more than one part of speech. See

also functional shift.

822

party In legal language, party refers to an individual, a group, or an

organization. (“The injured party sued my client.”) The term

party is inappropriate in all but legal writing; when you are

referring to a person, use the word person.

Party is appropriate when it refers to a group. (“Jim arranged a

tour of the facility for the members of our party.”)

823

per When per is used to mean “for each,” “by means of,” “through,”

or “on account of,” it is appropriate (per gallon, per capita, per

diem). When used to mean “according to” (per your request, per

your order), the expression is jargon and should be avoided.

824

percent / percentage The word percent is normally used instead of the symbol %

(“only 15 percent”), except in tables, where space is at a

premium. Percentage, which is never used with numbers,

indicates a general size (“only a small percentage”).

825

periods A period is a mark of punctuation that usually indicates the end

of a declarative or an imperative sentence. Periods are also used

to end questions that are actually polite requests, or instructions

to which an affirmative response is assumed. (“Will you call me

as soon as he arrives.”) See also sentence construction.

Periods, or dots, when used to indicate omissions are called

ellipses, and rows of dots that link topics with page numbers

are called leaders in tables of contents.

Periods in Quotations Use a comma, not a period, after a declarative sentence that is

quoted in the context of another sentence.

► “There is every chance of success,” she stated.

A period is placed inside quotation marks. See also quotations.

► He stated clearly, “My vote is yes.”

Periods with Parentheses Place a period outside the final parenthesis when a

parenthetical element ends a sentence.

► The institute was founded by Harry Denman (1902–1972).

Place a period inside the final parenthesis when a complete

sentence stands independently within parentheses.

826

► The project director listed the problems her staff faced. (This was the third time she had complained to the board.)

Other Uses of Periods Use periods following the numerals in a numbered list and

following the complete sentences in a list.

1. Enter

your name and PIN.

2. Enter your address with ZIP Code.

3. Enter your home telephone number.

Use periods after initials in names (Wilma T. Grant, J. P.

Morgan). Use periods as decimal points with numbers (27.3

degrees Celsius, $540.26, 6.9 percent). Use periods to indicate

certain abbreviations (Ms., Dr., Inc.). When a sentence ends

with an abbreviation that ends with a period, do not add

another period. (“Please meet me at 3:30 p.m.”)

Period Faults When a period is inserted prematurely, the result is a sentence

827

fragment.

FRAGMENT After a long day at the office, during which we finished the quarterly report. We left hurriedly for home.

SENTENCE After a long day at the office, during which we finished the quarterly report, we left hurriedly for home.

When two independent clauses are joined without any

punctuation, the result is a fused, or run-on, sentence. Adding a

period between the clauses is one way to correct a run-on

sentence.

RUN-ON Bill was late for ten days in a row Ms. Sturgess had to dismiss him.

CORRECT Bill was late for ten days in a row. Ms. Sturgess had to dismiss him.

Other options are to add a comma and a coordinating

conjunction (and, but, for, or, nor, so, or yet) between the

clauses, to add a semicolon, or to add a semicolon with a

conjunctive adverb — such as therefore or however — followed

by a comma.

828

person Person refers to the form of a personal pronoun that indicates

whether the pronoun represents the speaker, the person

spoken to, or the person or thing spoken about. A pronoun

representing the speaker is in the first person. (“I could not find

the answer in the manual.”) A pronoun that represents the

person or people spoken to is in the second person. (“You will

be a good manager.”) A pronoun that represents the person or

people spoken about is in the third person. (“They received the

news quietly.”) The following list shows first-, second-, and

third-person pronouns. See also case, number, and one.

PERSON SINGULAR PLURAL

First I, me, my, mine we, us, our, ours

Second you, your, yours you, your, yours

Third he, him, his, she, her, hers, it, its they, them, their, theirs

829

personal / personnel Personal is an adjective meaning “of or pertaining to an

individual person” (a personal problem). Personnel is a noun

meaning “a group of people engaged in a common job” (military

personnel). Be careful not to use personnel when the word you

need is persons, people, or a more descriptive word.

830

persons / people The word persons is used to refer to a specific category or

number of people, often in legal or official contexts.

(“Admittance is limited to persons 18 and over.”) In all other

contexts, use people. (“We need more qualified people to fill the

vacant positions.”)

831

persuasion Persuasive writing attempts to convince an audience to adopt

the writer’s point of view or take a particular action. Workplace

writing often uses persuasion to reinforce ideas that readers

already have, to convince readers to change their current ideas,

or to lobby for a particular suggestion or policy (as in Figure P–

1). You may find yourself advocating for safer working

conditions, justifying the expense of a new program, or writing

a proposal for a large purchase. See also context and purpose.

In persuasive writing, you must support your appeal with logic

and a sound presentation of facts, statistics, and examples. See

also logic errors. A writer also gains credibility, and thus

persuasiveness, through the readers’ impressions of the

document’s appearance. For this reason, consider carefully a

document’s layout and design.

832

833

FIGURE P–1. Persuasive Memo

ETHICS NOTE

Never make false claims. You should also acknowledge any real or potentially conflicting opinions; doing so allows you to anticipate and overcome objections and builds your credibility. See also ethics in writing and promotional writing.

The memo shown in Figure P–1 was written to persuade the

marketing staff to participate actively in a change to a new

server. Notice that not everything in this memo is presented in a

positive light. Change brings disruption and challenges — and

the writer acknowledges that fact.

A persuasive technique that places the focus on your reader’s

interest and perspective is discussed in the entry “you”

viewpoint. See also correspondence.

834

photographs Photographs are effective in catching the readers’ attention and

adding personal relevance to brochures, newsletters, annual

reports, presentations, and other promotional writing.

Photographs are also an effective way to illustrate products in

print and online catalogs. They are often used for instructions

to show the appearance of an object, although they cannot

depict the internal workings of a mechanism or below-the-

surface details of objects or structures. Such details are better

represented in drawings. See also readers.

Figure P–2 shows a photograph from an interactive Web

presentation for buyers of corporate aircraft. This photograph

is one in a series that simulates a pilot’s “walk-around” — a

procedure in which pilots visually examine an aircraft in a 360-

degree safety inspection prior to takeoff. In this photo, the stair

steps are lowered to show the relative size of the aircraft.

835

FIGURE P–2. Photo (of Aircraft Door)

For reports, treat photographs as you do other visuals,

giving them figure numbers, callouts (labels) to identify key

features, and captions, if needed. Position the figure number

and caption so that readers can view them and the photograph

from the same orientation.

ETHICS NOTE

Be careful to avoid plagiarism by appropriately documenting sources for photographs and by obtaining permission from the copyright

836

holder if you plan to publish photographs that you do not take yourself. For such photos, you should provide a source line, as shown in Figure P–2. For stock images obtained through services like Getty Images (www.gettyimages.com), you will need to obtain a license and pay a fee, depending on the final use. If you do take your own photographs, be sure to get the full name, contact information, and permission of any persons featured before publishing.

837

phrases DIRECTORY

Prepositional Phrases Participial Phrases Infinitive Phrases Gerund Phrases Verb Phrases Noun Phrases

A phrase is a meaningful group of words that does not make a

complete statement because it lacks both a subject and a

predicate, as opposed to clauses. Phrases, which are based on

nouns, nonfinite verb forms, or verb combinations, provide

context within a clause or sentence in which they appear. See

also sentence construction.

► She reassured her staff by her calm confidence. [phrase]

A phrase may function as an adjective, an adverb, a noun, or a

verb.

► The subjects on the agenda were all discussed. [adjective] ► We discussed the project with great enthusiasm. [adverb] ► Working hard is her way of life. [noun] ► The human resources director should have been notified.

[verb]

Even though phrases function as adjectives, adverbs, nouns, or

838

verbs, they are normally named for the kind of word around

which they are constructed — preposition, participle, infinitive,

gerund, verb, or noun. A phrase that begins with a preposition

is a prepositional phrase, a phrase that begins with a participle

is a participial phrase, and so on. For typical verb phrases and

prepositional phrases that can cause difficulty for speakers of

English as a second language, see idioms.

Prepositional Phrases A preposition is a word that shows relationship and combines

with a noun or pronoun (its object) to form a modifying phrase.

A prepositional phrase, then, consists of a preposition plus its

object and the object’s modifiers.

► After the meeting, the district managers adjourned to the cafeteria.

Prepositional phrases, because they normally modify nouns or

verbs, usually function as adjectives or adverbs. A prepositional

phrase may function as an adverb of motion (“Turn the dial four

degrees to the left”) or an adverb of manner (“Answer

customers’ questions in a courteous fashion”). A prepositional

phrase may also function as an adverb of place and may appear

in different places in the sentence.

► In home and office computer systems, security is essential. ► Security is essential in home and office computer systems.

Prepositional phrases may function as adjectives; when they do,

839

they follow the nouns they modify.

► Food waste with a high protein content can be processed into animal food.

Be careful when you use prepositional phrases, because

separating a prepositional phrase from the noun it modifies can

cause ambiguity.

AMBIGUOUS The woman standing by the security guard in the gray suit is our division manager.

CLEAR The woman in the gray suit who is standing by the security guard is our division manager.

Watch as well for the overuse of prepositional phrases where

modifiers would be more economical.

OVERUSED The man with gray hair in the blue suit with pinstripes is the former president of the company.

ECONOMICAL The gray-haired man in the blue pin-striped suit is the former company president.

Participial Phrases A participle is any form of a verb that is used as an adjective. A

participial phrase consists of a participle plus its object and its

modifiers.

► The division having the largest sales increase will win the award.

The relationship between a participial phrase and the rest of the

840

sentence must be clear. For that reason, every sentence

containing a participial phrase must have a noun or pronoun

that the participial phrase modifies; if it does not, the result is a

dangling participial phrase.

Dangling Participial Phrases A dangling participial phrase occurs when the noun or pronoun

that the participial phrase is meant to modify is not stated but

only implied. See also dangling modifiers.

DANGLING Being unhappy with the job, his efficiency suffered. [His efficiency was not unhappy with the job; what the participial phrase really modifies — he — is not stated but merely implied.]

CORRECT Being unhappy with the job, he grew less efficient. [In this version, what the participial phrase modifies — he — is explicitly stated.]

Misplaced Participial Phrases A participial phrase is misplaced when it is too far from the

noun or pronoun it is meant to modify and so appears to modify

something else.

MISPLACED We saw a large warehouse driving down the highway.

CORRECT Driving down the highway, we saw a large warehouse.

Infinitive Phrases An infinitive is the basic form of a verb (go, run, talk), without

the restrictions imposed by person and number. An infinitive is

generally preceded by the word to (which is usually a

preposition but in this use is called the sign, or mark, of the

infinitive). An infinitive phrase consists of the word to plus an

841

infinitive and any objects or modifiers.

► To improve as a writer, you must be willing to accept criticism.

Do not confuse a prepositional phrase beginning with to with an

infinitive phrase. In an infinitive phrase, to is followed by a

verb; in a prepositional phrase, to is followed by a noun or

pronoun.

PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE

We went to the building site.

INFINITIVE PHRASE Our firm tries to provide a comprehensive training program.

The implied subject of an introductory infinitive phrase should

be the same as the subject of the sentence. If it is not, the

phrase is a dangling modifier. In the following example, the

implied subject of the infinitive is you or one, not practice.

Gerund Phrases A gerund is a verbal ending in ing that is used as a noun. A

gerund phrase consists of a gerund plus any objects or

modifiers and always functions as a noun.

SUBJECT Preparing an annual report is a difficult task.

DIRECT OBJECT She liked chairing the committee.

842

Verb Phrases A verb phrase consists of a main verb and its helping verb.

► He is [helping verb] working [main verb] hard this summer.

Words can appear between the helping verb and the main verb

of a verb phrase. (“He is always working.”) The main verb is

always the last verb in a verb phrase.

Questions often begin with a verb phrase. (“Will he audit

their account?”) The adverb not may be appended to a helping

verb in a verb phrase. (“He did not work today.”)

Noun Phrases A noun phrase consists of a noun and its modifiers. (“Have the

two new employees fill out these forms.”)

843

plagiarism Plagiarism is the use of someone else’s unique ideas without

acknowledgment or the use of someone else’s exact words

without quotation marks and appropriate credit. Plagiarism is

considered to be the theft of someone else’s creative and

intellectual property and can result in legal action, academic

sanctions, and serious professional consequences. See also

copyright, ethics in writing, and research.

Citing Sources Quoting a passage — including cutting and pasting a passage

from an Internet source into your work — is permissible only if

you enclose the passage in quotation marks and properly cite

the source. For detailed guidance on quoting correctly, see

quotations. If you intend to publish, reproduce, or distribute

material that includes quotations from published works,

including Web sites, you may need to obtain written permission

from the copyright holders of those works.

Even Web sites that grant permission to copy, distribute, or

modify material under the “copyleft” principle, such as

Wikipedia, nonetheless caution that you must give appropriate

credit to the source from which material is taken (see

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipedia:Citing_Wikipedia).

Paraphrasing the words and ideas of another also requires

that you cite your source, even though you do not enclose

844

paraphrased ideas or materials in quotation marks. (See also

documenting sources.) Paraphrasing a passage without citing

the source is permissible only when the information

paraphrased is common knowledge.

Common Knowledge Common knowledge generally refers to information that is

widely known and readily available in handbooks, manuals,

atlases, and other references. For example, the “law of supply

and demand” is common knowledge and is found in nearly

every economics textbook.

Common knowledge also refers to information within a

specific field that is generally known and understood by most

others in that field — even though it is not widely known by

those outside the field.

An indication that something is common knowledge is its

appearance in multiple sources without citation. However,

when in doubt, cite the source.

ETHICS NOTE

In the workplace, employees often borrow material freely from in- house manuals, reports, and other company documents. Using or repurposing such material is neither plagiarism nor a violation of copyright. For information on the use of public domain and government material, see copyright.

845

plain language Plain language is writing that is logically organized and

understandable on the first reading. Such writing avoids

unnecessary jargon, affectation, and technical terminology.

Even with the best of intentions, however, you cannot always

avoid using specialized terms and concepts. Therefore, assess

your audience carefully to ensure that your language connects

with their level of knowledge. Replace jargon and complex legal

wording with familiar words or terms when possible.

COMPLEX The systems integration specialist must be able to visually perceive the entire directional response module.

PLAIN LANGUAGE

The operator must be able to see the entire control panel.

If you are a health-care provider, for example, use the

appropriate plain-language equivalent for medical terminology

with patients in conversations and written guidelines: bleeding

instead of hemorrhaging, heart attack instead of myocardial

infarction, stitches instead of sutures. If a plain-language

alternative does not exist, define or explain a technical term on

its first use and use visuals where necessary.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Plain Language

✓ Identify your average reader’s level of technical knowledge. ✓ Avoid unnecessary jargon and legal language.

846

✓ Avoid confusing terms and constructions. Define necessary abbreviations and acronyms. Use the same words consistently for the same things. Do not give an obscure meaning to a word.

✓ Use the active voice for directness and for identifying the doer of an action.

✓ Use the second person (you / yours) or imperative mood to write directly to the reader.

✓ Write coherent sentences. Aim for one message in each sentence. Break up complex information into smaller, easier-to- understand units. Use positive writing and the present tense as much as possible.

✓ Select word placement carefully. Keep subjects and objects close to their verbs. Put only, always, and other conditional words next to the words they modify.

Plain-language principles are especially useful when writing

international correspondence. For format and visual elements

that promote clarity, see layout and design and lists. See also

English as a second language. For information on plain-

language laws and practices, see

www.plainlanguage.gov/site/about.cfm and

plainlanguagenetwork.org.

847

point of view Point of view is the writer’s relation to the information

presented, as reflected in the use of grammatical person. The

writer usually expresses the point of view in first-, second-, or

third-person personal pronouns. Use of first person indicates

that the writer is a participant or an observer. Use of second or

third person indicates that the writer is giving directions,

instructions, or advice or is writing about other people or

something impersonal.

FIRST PERSON

I scrolled down to find the settings option.

SECOND PERSON

You need to scroll down to find the settings option. [You is explicitly stated.]

Scroll down to find the settings option. [You is understood in such an instruction.]

THIRD PERSON

He scrolled down to find the settings option.

Consider the following sentence, revised from an impersonal to

a more personal point of view. Although the essential meaning

of the sentence does not change, the revision indicates that

people are involved in the communication.

848

Some people think they should avoid the pronoun I in business

writing, but doing so often leads to awkward sentences, with

people referring to themselves in the third person as one or as

the writer instead of as I.

However, do not use the personal point of view when an

impersonal point of view would be more appropriate or more

effective because you need to emphasize the subject matter

over the writer or the reader. In the following example, it does

not help to personalize the situation; in fact, the impersonal

version may be more tactful.

PERSONAL I received objections to my proposal from several of your managers.

IMPERSONAL Several managers have raised objections to the proposal.

Whether you adopt a personal or an impersonal point of view

depends on the purpose and the audience of the document. For

example, in an informal e-mail to an associate, you would most

likely adopt a personal point of view. However, in a report to a

large group or in global communications, you would probably

emphasize the subject and avoid sounding impolite by using an

impersonal point of view. (In some cultures, stating an opinion

in writing may be considered impolite or unnecessary.) See also

plain language.

ETHICS NOTE

849

Avoiding the first person may convey the impression that the writer is evading responsibility (See voice.) When using the first person, think carefully about whether to use the singular I or the plural we. In company correspondence, using the pronoun we may be interpreted as reflecting company policy, whereas I clearly reflects personal opinion. Which pronoun to use should be decided according to whether you are speaking for yourself (I) or for the company (we).

► I understand your frustration with the price increase, but we must now add the import tax to the sales price.

850

policies and procedures A policy states an organization’s position on a subject; a

procedure may describe the steps or provide instructions for

carrying out the policy. Policies and procedures are often

written at the same time, usually by top or middle managers.

Policies and procedures are subjected to a careful review

process, often by legal staff. Writing these documents requires

careful planning as well as precise language and word choice

so that the policies and procedures are clear and

understandable. See also plain language.

Policies A statement of policy may be preceded by an explanation of the

policy’s purpose or rationale. Specific details then follow in

numbered sections, as in the following company policy

regarding tuition refunds.

1. TUITION REIMBURSEMENT POLICY 1.1 The Tuition Reimbursement Plan is available only to full-time staff. 1.2 To receive a reimbursement, an individual must be employed by the company at the time of enrollment and at the time of completion of the course. Should an individual’s employment be terminated because of a reduction of staff, fees will be refunded for approved courses upon their satisfactory completion. 1.3 Satisfactory completion means that the employee has completed the course work and has achieved a grade at

851

least one level above passing. If a course is not satisfactorily completed, reimbursement may be deferred if the employee, upon completion of the degree, attains a cumulative grade average of at least C (B for most graduate- degree programs).

Policies may be kept in loose-leaf binders or posted on an

organization’s internal Web site so that they can be easily

referred to and updated.

Procedures Procedures provide a step-by-step explanation of how to carry

out a policy. They often provide instructions not only for

employees but also for managers, who must ensure that the

company’s policy is properly implemented.

To prepare for writing procedures, keep track of who must

do what. An easy and effective way is to create a chart, as shown

in Figure P–3. Draw a vertical line down a page. Label the left

column “Actor” and the right column “Directions.” Under

“Actor,” list who must perform the action in each step; under

“Directions,” describe each step of the procedure fully and in

the correct sequence. In effect, the list serves as an outline for

the procedure you will write. The draft created from the chart

in Figure P–3 might look like this:

1. PROCEDURES 1.1 Tuition Reimbursement Approval

1.1.1 An employee who meets school requirements and

852

is interested in receiving tuition reimbursement should gain the approval of his or her manager and submit the request to the Human Resources (HR) Department. HR may ask the manager to justify, in writing, the benefits of the academic work, if the reason is not obvious. 1.1.2 After reaching an agreement, the employee should complete Sections I and II of Form F-6970. After HR has obtained two levels of management approval — from the employee’s supervisor and the head of the department — it approves the employee’s enrollment in the course or degree program. 1.1.3 The employee who has been granted approval must submit to HR proof of enrollment and payment of appropriate fees to receive tuition reimbursement.

FIGURE P–3. Procedures Chart

853

positive writing Presenting positive information as though it were negative is

confusing to readers.

NEGATIVE If the error does not involve data transmission, the backup function will not be used.

In this sentence, the reader must reverse two negatives to

understand the exception that is being stated. (See also double

negatives.) The following sentence presents the exception in a

positive and straightforward manner. See also plain language.

POSITIVE The backup function is used only when the error involves data transmission.

ETHICS NOTE

Negative facts or conclusions, however, should be stated negatively; stating a negative fact or conclusion positively is deceptive because it can mislead the reader.

DECEPTIVE In the first quarter of this year, employee exposure to airborne lead averaged within 10 percent of acceptable state health standards.

ACCURATE In the first quarter of this year, employee exposure to airborne lead averaged 10 percent below acceptable state health standards.

See also ethics in writing.

Even if what you are saying is negative, do not state it more

negatively than necessary.

854

NEGATIVE We are withholding your shipment because we have not received your payment.

POSITIVE We will forward your shipment as soon as we receive your payment.

See also correspondence and “you” viewpoint.

855

possessive case A noun or pronoun is in the possessive case when it represents

a person, place, or thing that possesses something. Possession

is generally expressed with an apostrophe and an s (“the

report’s title”), with a prepositional phrase using of (“the title of

the report”), or with the possessive form of a pronoun (“our

report”).

Practices vary for some possessive forms, but the following

guidelines are widely used. Above all, be consistent.

Singular Nouns Most singular nouns show the possessive case with ’s.

► the hospital’s medical staff an employee’s paycheck the witness’s testimony the bus’s schedule

When pronunciation with ’s is difficult or when a multisyllable

noun ends in a z sound, you may use only an apostrophe.

► New Orleans’ convention hotels

Plural Nouns Plural nouns that end in s or es show the possessive case with

only an apostrophe.

856

► the managers’ reports the employees’ paychecks the companies’ joint project the witnesses’ testimony

Plural nouns that do not end in s show the possessive with ’s.

► children’s clothing, women’s resources, men’s shoes

Apostrophes are not always used in official names (“Consumers

Union”) or for words that may appear to be possessive nouns

but function as adjectives (“a computer peripherals supplier”).

Compound Nouns Compound nouns form the possessive with ’s following the final

letter.

► the attorney general’s decision, the editor-in-chief’s desk, the pipeline’s diameter

Plurals of some compound expressions are often best expressed

with a prepositional phrase (“presentations of the editors in

chief”).

Coordinate Nouns Coordinate nouns show joint possession with ’s following the

last noun.

► Fischer and Goulet’s partnership was the foundation of their business.

857

Coordinate nouns show individual possession with ’s following

each noun.

► The difference between Barker’s and Washburne’s test results was not statistically significant.

Possessive Pronouns The possessive pronouns (its, whose, his, her, our, your, my,

their) do not require apostrophes. (“Even good systems have

their flaws.”) Only the possessive form of a pronoun should be

used with a gerund (a noun formed from an ing verb).

► The safety officer insisted on our wearing protective clothing. [Wearing is the gerund.]

Possessive pronouns are also used to replace nouns. (“The

responsibility was theirs.”) See also its / it’s.

Indefinite Pronouns Some indefinite pronouns (all, any, each, few, most, none,

some) form the possessive case with the preposition of.

► We tested both packages and found bacteria on the surface of each.

Other indefinite pronouns (everyone, someone, anyone, no

one) use ’s.

► Everyone’s contribution is welcome.

858

prefixes A prefix is a letter or group of letters placed in front of a root

word that changes the meaning of the root word. When a prefix

ends with a vowel and the root word begins with a vowel, the

prefix is often separated from the root word with a hyphen (co-

opt, anti-inflammatory). Some words with the double vowel are

written without a hyphen (cooperate) and others with or

without a hyphen (re-elect or reelect).

Prefixes, such as neo- (derived from a Greek word meaning

“new”), are often hyphenated when used with a proper noun

(neo-Keynesian). Such prefixes are not normally hyphenated

when used with common nouns, unless the base word begins

with the same vowel (neonatal, neo-orthodoxy).

A hyphen may be necessary to clarify the meaning of a

prefix; for example, reform means “correct” or “improve,” and

re-form means “change the shape of.” When in doubt, check a

current dictionary.

859

preparation The preparation stage of the writing process is essential. By

determining the needs of your audience, your purpose, the

context, and the scope of coverage, you will come to

understand what information you need to gather during

research. See also collaborative writing and “Five Steps to

Successful Writing” (pages xvii–xxiv).

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Preparing to Write

✓ Determine who your readers are, and learn certain key facts about them — their knowledge, attitudes, expectations, and needs relative to your subject.

✓ Determine the document’s primary purpose: What exactly do you want your readers to know, believe, or do when they have finished reading your document?

✓ Consider the context of your message and how it should affect your writing.

✓ Establish the scope of your document — the type and amount of detail you must include — not only by understanding your readers’ needs and purpose but also by considering any external constraints, such as word limits for trade journal articles or how you might need to compress text, as in writing for the Web.

✓ Select the medium appropriate to your readers and purpose. See also selecting the medium.

860

prepositions A preposition is a word that links a noun or pronoun to another

sentence element by expressing such relationships as direction

(to, into, across, toward), location (at, in, on, under, over,

beside, among, by, between, through), time (before, after,

during, until, since), or position (for, against, with). Together,

the preposition, its object (the noun or pronoun), and the

object’s modifiers form a prepositional phrase, which acts as a

modifier.

► Answer help-line questions in a courteous manner. [The prepositional phrase in a courteous manner modifies the verb answer.]

The object of a preposition (the word or phrase following the

preposition) is always in the objective case. When the object is a

compound expression, both nouns and pronouns should be in

the objective case. For example, the phrase “between you and

me” is frequently and incorrectly written as “between you and

I.” Me is the objective form of the pronoun, and I is the

subjective form.

Many words that function as prepositions also function as

adverbs. If the word takes an object and functions as a

connective, it is a preposition; if it has no object and functions

as a modifier, it is an adverb.

PREPOSITIONS The thermostat is behind the column in the conference room.

861

ADVERBS The customer lagged behind; then he came in and sat down.

Certain verbs, adverbs, and adjectives are normally used with

certain prepositions (interested in, aware of, equated with,

adhere to, capable of, object to, infer from). See also idioms.

Prepositions at the End of a Sentence A preposition at the end of a sentence can be an indication that

the sentence is awkwardly constructed.

However, if a preposition falls naturally at the end of a

sentence, leave it there. (“I don’t remember which file name I

saved it under.”)

Prepositions in Titles Capitalize prepositions in titles when they are the first or last

words, or when they contain five or more letters (unless you are

following a style that recommends otherwise). See also

capitalization.

► The newspaper column “In My Opinion” included a review of the article “New Concerns About Distance Education.” [In and About are prepositions.]

862

Preposition Errors Do not use redundant prepositions, such as “off of,” “in back

of,” “inside of,” and “at about.”

Avoid unnecessarily adding the preposition up to verbs.

Do not omit necessary prepositions.

See also conciseness and English as a second language.

863

presentations DIRECTORY

Determining Your Purpose Analyzing Your Audience Gathering Information Structuring the Presentation Using Visuals Writer’s Checklist: Using Visuals in a Presentation Delivering a Presentation Writer’s Checklist: Preparing for and Delivering a Presentation

To prepare an effective presentation, determine your purpose

and analyze your audience. Then research your subject and

logically organize the information that supports your point of

view or proposal. Presentations differ from written documents

because your spoken delivery requires as much attention as

your content, and your organization and visuals must be

adapted to the audience that will view your presentation.

Determining Your Purpose Determine your primary purpose by asking the following

question: What do I want the audience to know, believe, or do

when I have finished the presentation? Based on the answer to

that question, write a purpose statement that answers the what?

and why? questions.

864

► The purpose of my presentation is to convince my company’s senior management of the need to hire a full- time social-media marketing coordinator [what] so that they will be persuaded to allocate additional funds in the budget for this position in the next fiscal year [why].

Analyzing Your Audience Once you have determined the desired end result of the

presentation, ask yourself these questions about your audience

so that you can tailor your presentation to their needs.

What is their level of experience or knowledge about your topic? What are their educational levels, ages, and other demographics? What is their attitude toward your topic and — based on that attitude — what are their possible concerns, fears, or objections? Are there subgroups in the audience with different concerns or needs? What questions might audience members ask about this topic?

Gathering Information Once you have focused the presentation, you need to find the

facts and arguments that support your point of view or the

action you propose. As you gather information, keep in mind

that you should give the audience only what will accomplish

865

your goals; too much detail will overwhelm them, and too little

will not adequately inform your listeners or support your

recommendations.

Structuring the Presentation Focus on your audience as listeners. Listeners are freshest at

the outset and refocus their attention near the end. Take

advantage of that pattern. Give your audience a brief overview

of your presentation at the beginning, use the body to develop

your ideas, and end with a summary of what you covered and, if

appropriate, a call to action. See also listening and methods of

development.

The Introduction Include in the introduction an opening that focuses your

audience’s attention, as in the following examples:

► [Definition of a problem] “You have to write an important report, and you’d like to incorporate lengthy handwritten notes from several meetings. But handwriting all those pages seems an incredible waste of time! Have I got a solution for you.”

► [An attention-getting statement] “As many as 70 million Americans have high blood pressure.”

► [A rhetorical question] “Would you be interested in a full- size computer keyboard that’s waterproof, noiseless, and rolls up like a rubber mat?”

► [A personal experience] “On a recent business trip, my rental car’s navigation system had me on the wrong

866

highway — and thirty miles in the wrong direction! After I managed to head in the right direction, I realized: we need a mobile alert app.”

► [An appropriate quotation] “According to researchers at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, ‘Garlic and its cousin, the onion, confer major health benefits — including fighting cancer, infections, and heart disease.’”

Following your opening, use the introduction to provide an

overview of the presentation. An overview can include general

or background information that will be needed to understand

the detailed information that follows, or it can preview how you

have organized the material.

► This presentation analyzes three high-volume, networked on-demand printers for us to consider purchasing. Based on a comparison of all three, I will recommend the one I believe best meets our needs. To do so, I’ll discuss the following five points:

1. Why we need a networked high-volume printer [the problem]

2. The basics of networked on-demand technology [general information]

3. The criteria I used to compare the three printer models [comparison]

4. The printer models I compared and why [possible solutions]

5. The printer I propose we buy [proposed solution]

The Body

867

If your goal is to persuade, present the evidence that will

convince the audience to accept your conclusions and act on

them. (See persuasion.) If you are discussing a problem,

demonstrate that it exists and offer a solution or range of

possible solutions. For example, if your introduction stated that

the problem for a company is low profits, high costs, or

outdated technology, you could use the following approach:

1. Prove your point. Strategically organize the facts and data you need. Present the information using easy-to-understand visuals.

2. Offer solutions. Increase profits by lowering production costs. Cut overhead to reduce costs, or abolish specific programs or product lines. Replace outdated technology, or upgrade existing technology.

3. Anticipate questions (“How much will it cost?”) and objections (“We’re too busy now — when would we have time to learn the new software?”), and incorporate the answers into your presentation.

Transitions Planned transitions should appear between the introduction

and the body, between major points in the body, and between

the body and the closing. Transitions are simply a sentence or

two to let the audience know that you are moving from one

topic to the next. They also prevent a choppy presentation and

868

provide the audience with assurance that you know where you

are going and how to get there.

► Before getting into the specifics of each printer I compared, I’d like to present the benefits of networked on- demand printers in general. That information will provide you with the background you’ll need to compare the differences among the printers and their capabilities, which I discuss in this presentation.

It is also a good idea to pause for a moment after you have

delivered a transition between topics to let your listeners shift

gears with you. Remember, they do not know your plan.

The Closing Your closing is what your audience is most likely to remember,

so use that time to be strong and persuasive. If your purpose is

to motivate the listeners to take action, ask them to do what you

want them to do. If it is to open your listeners’ minds, conclude

by stating why your position is viable. Consider the following

typical closing.

► Based on all the data, I believe that the Worthington TechLine 5510 Production Printer best suits our needs. It produces 40 pages per minute more than its closest competitor and provides modular systems that can be upgraded to support new applications. The Worthington is also compatible with our current network, and staff training at our site is included with our purchase. Although the initial cost is higher than that for the other two models,

869

the additional capabilities, compatibility with most standard environments, lower maintenance costs, and strong customer-support services make it a better value.

I recommend we allocate the funds necessary for this

printer by the fifteenth of this month to be well prepared

for the production of next quarter’s customer publications.

This closing brings the presentation full circle and asks the

audience to fulfill the purpose of the presentation — exactly

what a conclusion should do.

Using Visuals Well-planned visuals can add interest, focus, and emphasis to

your presentation. Charts, graphs, and illustrations can greatly

increase audience understanding and retention of information,

especially for complex issues and technical information that

could otherwise be misunderstood or overlooked.

ETHICS NOTE

Be sure to provide credit for any visual taken from a print or an online source. You can include a citation either on an individual visual (such as a slide) or in a list of references or works cited that you distribute to your audience. For information on citing visuals, see documenting sources.

You can create and present the visual components of your

presentation by using a variety of media — flip charts,

870

whiteboards or chalkboards, or presentation software. See also

layout and design.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

If your presentation contains a lot of details or complex drawings, prepare handouts for your audience, on which they can jot down notes for future reference.

Flip Charts Flip charts, usually on easels, are ideal for use with smaller

groups in a conference room or classroom and work well for

brainstorming with your audience.

Whiteboards or Chalkboards The whiteboards or chalkboards common to classrooms are

convenient for creating sketches and for jotting down notes

during your presentation.

Presentation Software Presentation software, such as Microsoft Power-Point, Prezi,

and open-source products, helps you integrate text, audio,

images, links, and video content into your presentation. These

programs and others that offer various collaborative and file-

sharing capabilities constantly evolve and require that you keep

current with the latest versions and enhancements. (See

adapting to new technologies.) Avoid using too many

enhancements, which may distract your audience from your

871

message. Figure P– 4 shows well-balanced slides for a

presentation based on the sample formal report in Figure F–6.

FIGURE P–4. Presentation Slides

872

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Be sure to prepare for potential technical difficulties. Should you encounter a technical snag during the presentation, stay calm and give yourself time to solve the problem. If you cannot solve the problem, move on without the technology. As a precaution, always carry a printout of your slides and copies for your audience, and save a backup copy of your digital presentation file.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Visuals in a Presentation

✓ Limit each visual to a number of words that can be quickly read by your audience.

✓ Use a font size readable to audience members at the back of the room.

✓ Limit the number of items in lists to no more than five or six per visual, and use numbers if sequence is important and bullets if not.

✓ Create lists with parallel structure and balanced content. ✓ Make your visuals consistent in font style, size, and spacing. ✓ Consider the contrast between your content and the background

to ensure that text and images are clear to those in the audience. ✓ Use only one or two illustrations per visual (or slide) to avoid

clutter. ✓ Use graphs, charts, and infographics to show data trends. ✓ Avoid overloading your presentation with so many visuals that

you distract or tax the audience’s concentration: One visual for every two minutes is a common guideline.

✓ Avoid using sound or visual effects in presentation software that distract from the content or may seem unprofessional.

873

✓ Do not read the text on your visual word for word. Your audience can read the visuals; they look to you to develop the key points.

✓ Match your delivery of the content to your visuals. Do not put one visual on the screen and talk about the previous visual or the next one.

Delivering a Presentation Once you have outlined and drafted your presentation and

prepared your visuals, you are ready to practice your

presentation and delivery techniques. See also outlining.

Practice Familiarize yourself with the sequence of the material — major

topics, notes, and visuals — in your outline. Once you feel

comfortable with the content, you are ready to practice the

presentation (in front of others if possible).

PRACTICE ON YOUR FEET AND OUT LOUD. Try to practice

on-site to get the feel of the room: the lighting, the equipment,

the seating, the location of outlets and switches, and so forth.

Practice out loud to gauge the length of your presentation, to

uncover problems (such as awkward transitions), and to

eliminate verbal tics (for example, “um,” “you know,” and

“like”).

PRACTICE WITH YOUR VISUALS AND TEXT. Integrate your

visuals into your practice sessions to help your presentation go

more smoothly. Operate the equipment (computer or

874

presentation system) until you are comfortable with it.

Delivery Techniques That Work Your delivery is both aural and visual. In addition to your words

and message, your nonverbal communication affects your

audience. Be animated — your words have impact and staying

power when they are delivered with physical and vocal

animation. If you want listeners to share your point of view,

show enthusiasm for your topic. The most common delivery

techniques include making eye contact; using movement and

gestures; and varying voice inflection, projection, and pace.

EYE CONTACT. The best way to establish rapport with your

audience is through eye contact. In a large audience, directly

address those who seem most responsive to you in different

parts of the room. Doing so also gives you important visual cues

about how your message is being received. Do the listeners

seem engaged? Based on your observations, you may need to

adjust your pace.

MOVEMENT. Animate the presentation with physical

movement. Take a step or two to one side after you have been

talking for a minute or so. That type of movement is most

effective at transitional points in your presentation, such as

between major topics or after pauses or emphases. Too much

movement, however, can be distracting, so try not to pace.

Another way to integrate movement into your presentation is

to walk to the screen and point to the visual as you discuss it.

875

Touch the screen with the pointer and then turn back to the

audience before beginning to speak (remember the three t’s:

touch, turn, and talk).

GESTURES. Gestures both animate your presentation and

help communicate your message. Most people gesture naturally

when they talk; nervousness, however, can inhibit gesturing

during a presentation. Keep one hand free, and use that hand to

gesture.

VOICE. Your voice can be an effective tool in communicating

your sincerity, enthusiasm, and command of your topic. Vocal

inflection is the rise and fall of your voice at different times,

such as the way your voice naturally rises at the end of a

question (“You want it when?”). Conversational delivery and eye

contact promote the feeling among audience members that you

are addressing them directly. Use vocal inflection to highlight

differences between key and subordinate points.

PROJECTION. Most presenters think they are speaking

louder than they are. Remember that your presentation will be

ineffective for anyone in the audience who cannot hear you.

Correct projection problems by practicing out loud with

someone listening from the back of the room.

PACE. Be aware of the speed at which you deliver your

presentation. If you speak too fast, your words will run

together, making it difficult for your audience to follow. If you

speak too slowly, your listeners will become impatient and

876

distracted.

Presentation Anxiety Everyone experiences nervousness before a presentation.

Instead of letting fear inhibit you, channel your nervous energy

into a helpful stimulant. The best way to master anxiety is to

know your topic thoroughly — knowing what you are going to

say and how you are going to say it will help you gain

confidence and reduce anxiety as you become immersed in

your subject.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Preparing for and Delivering a Presentation

✓ Prepare a set of notes that will trigger your memory during the presentation.

✓ Make as much eye contact as possible with your audience to establish rapport and maximize opportunities for audience feedback.

✓ Animate your delivery by integrating movement, gestures, and vocal inflection into your presentation. However, keep your movements and speech patterns natural.

✓ Speak loudly and slowly enough to be heard and understood. ✓ Review Writer’s Checklist: Using Visuals in a Presentation (pages

400–401) as well as this entry’s advice on presentation delivery.

For tips on communicating with cross-cultural audiences, see

global communication, global graphics, and international

correspondence.

877

press releases The purpose of a press release (or news release) is both to

inform the public about the company and its products and

services, and to enhance the organization’s brand identity.

Large corporations and institutions usually have their own

public relations staff or use outside agencies. However, if you

work for a small company without public relations resources,

you may be called on to write a press release.

The press release should be clear, concise, and written with

particular attention to the five w’s: who, what, where, when,

and why. Begin the first paragraph with the place and date of

the announcement, as shown in Figure P–5. Put all critical

information in the first paragraph, then use the decreasing

order-of-importance method of development to organize the

following paragraphs. Use the final paragraph to provide a brief

overview of the organization as well as its products, services,

and locations. Make sure your facts are accurate, and be careful

to define any unfamiliar terms.

878

FIGURE P–5. Press Release

News releases are usually distributed through online outlets

as well as by local newspapers and television and radio stations.

879

Organizations also post versions of releases on their own Web

sites or social media sites, and distribute them to trade and

professional associations. See also blogs and forums and

newsletter articles.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Preparing Press Releases

✓ Use company stationery with a minimum of one-inch margins. ✓ Use boldface type for the headlines and double-space paragraphs

for easy reading and copying. ✓ Consider including a professional photograph of a new hire (head

shot) or product. ✓ Use “-more-” centered at the bottom of the page when you need

to indicate that another page follows. ✓ Allow one blank line, then center “# # #” or “-30-” or “-End-” to

indicate where the press release ends. ✓ Send the release to a specific person, such as a business or

technology editor or blogger.

880

principal / principle Principal, meaning “an amount of money on which interest is

earned or paid” or “a chief official in a school or court

proceeding,” is sometimes confused with principle, which

means “a basic truth or belief.”

► The bank will pay 3.5 percent on the principal. ► He sent an e-mail to the principal of the high school. ► She objected to the idea on principle.

Principal is also an adjective, meaning “main” or “primary.”

(“My principal objection is that it will be too expensive.”)

881

process explanation A process explanation may describe the steps in a process, an

operation, or a procedure, such as the steps necessary to start a

small business. The introduction often presents a brief

overview of the process or lets readers know why it is

important for them to become familiar with the process you are

explaining. Be sure to define terms that readers might not

understand and provide visuals to clarify the process. See also

defining terms and instructions.

In describing a process, use transitional words and phrases

to create unity within paragraphs, and select headings to

provide a transition from one step to the next. The example of a

“Tuition Reimbursement Approval” describes a step-by-step

process.

882

progress and activity reports Progress reports provide details on the tasks completed for

major workplace projects, whereas activity reports focus on the

ongoing work of individual employees. Both are sometimes

called status reports. Although many organizations use

standardized templates and others use Web-based report forms,

the content and structure shown in Figures P– 6 and P–7 are

typical. See also reports.

Progress Reports A progress report provides information to decision-makers

about the status of a project — whether it is on schedule and

within budget. Progress reports are often submitted by a

contracting company to a client company, as shown in Figure

P– 6. They are used mainly for projects that involve many steps

and are issued at regular intervals to describe what has been

done and what remains to be done. Progress reports help

projects run smoothly by helping managers assign work, adjust

schedules, allocate budgets, and order supplies and equipment.

All progress reports for a particular project should have the

same format.

883

884

FIGURE P–6. Progress Report (Using Letter Format)

The introduction to the first progress report should identify

the project, methods used, necessary materials, expenditures,

and completion date. Subsequent reports summarize the

progress achieved since the preceding report and list the steps

that remain to be taken. The body of the progress report should

describe the project’s status, including such details as schedules

and costs, a statement of the work completed, and perhaps an

estimate of future progress. The report ends with conclusions

and recommendations about changes in the schedule,

materials, techniques, and other information important to the

project.

Activity Reports Within an organization, employees often submit activity reports

to managers on the status of ongoing projects. Managers may

combine the activity reports of several individuals or teams into

larger activity reports and, in turn, submit those larger reports

to their own managers. The activity report shown in Figure P–7

was submitted by a manager (Wayne Tribinski) who supervises

11 employees; the reader of the report (Kathryn Hunter) is

Tribinski’s manager.

885

FIGURE P–7. Activity Report (Using E-mail Format)

886

Because the activity report is issued periodically (usually

monthly) and contains material familiar to its readers, it

normally needs no introduction or conclusion, although it may

need a brief opening to provide context. Although the format

varies from company to company, these sections are typical:

Current Projects, Current Problems, Plans for the Next Period,

and Current Staffing Level (for managers).

887

promotional writing Promotional writing is vital to the success of any company or

organization; high-quality, state-of-the-art products or services

are of little value if customers and clients do not know they

exist. Although you may not be a marketing or public relations

specialist, you may be asked to prepare promotional (or

marketing) materials, especially if you work for a small

organization or are self-employed. Even at a large company,

you may contribute to Web sites, brochures, newsletters,

press releases, sales letters, blogs and forums, or social

media feeds. See also collaborative writing and writing for the

Web.

Many other documents described in this book often include

the additional or secondary purpose of promoting an

organization. For example, adjustment letters, which are

usually concerned with resolving a specific problem, offer

opportunities to promote your organization.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Promotional Writing

✓ Analyze the needs, interests, concerns, makeup, and activities of your audience.

✓ Conduct adequate research to understand your audience, especially by talking to those with firsthand knowledge of the product or service. (See interviewing for information.)

✓ Use the principles of persuasion to gain attention, build interest,

888

reduce resistance, and motivate readers to act. ✓ Optimize your keywords, phrases, and search tags to reach the

greatest number of interested readers. ✓ Make information visually appealing through strong

organization, layout and design, and visuals that are well integrated with the text.

✓ Write with clarity, coherence, and conciseness to help your readers understand the message and to achieve your purpose.

ETHICS NOTE

Because readers are persuaded only if they believe the source is credible, do not overstate claims and avoid possible logic errors. See also ethics in writing.

889

pronoun reference A pronoun should refer clearly to a specific antecedent. Avoid

vague and uncertain references.

For coherence, place pronouns as close as possible to their

antecedents — distance increases the likelihood of ambiguity.

A general (or broad) reference or one that has no real

antecedent is a problem that often occurs when the word this is

used by itself.

Another common problem is a hidden reference, which has

only an implied antecedent.

Do not repeat an antecedent in parentheses following the

pronoun. If you feel you must identify the pronoun’s antecedent

in that way, rewrite the sentence.

AWKWARD The senior partner first met Bob Evans when he (Evans) was a trainee.

890

IMPROVED Bob Evans was a trainee when the senior partner first met him.

IMPROVED When the senior partner first met Bob Evans, Bob was a trainee.

For advice on avoiding pronoun-reference problems with

gender, see biased language.

891

pronouns DIRECTORY

Case Gender Number Person

A pronoun is a word that is used as a substitute for a noun (the

noun for which a pronoun substitutes is called the antecedent).

Using pronouns in place of nouns relieves the monotony of

repeating the same noun over and over. See also pronoun

reference.

Personal pronouns refer to the person or people speaking (I,

me, my, mine; we, us, our, ours); the person or people spoken

to (you, your, yours); or the person, people, or thing(s) spoken

of (he, him, his; she, her, hers; it, its; they, them, their, theirs).

See also person and point of view.

► If their figures are correct, ours must be in error.

Demonstrative pronouns (this, these, that, those) indicate or

point out the thing being referred to.

► This is my desk. These are my coworkers. That will be a difficult job. Those are incorrect figures.

892

Relative pronouns (who, whom, which, that) perform a dual

function: (1) They take the place of nouns, and (2) they connect

and establish the relationship between a dependent clause and

its main clause.

► The department manager decided who would be hired.

Interrogative pronouns (who, whom, what, which) are used to

ask questions.

► What is the trouble?

Indefinite pronouns specify a class or group of persons or

things rather than a particular person or thing (all, another,

any, anyone, anything, both, each, either, everybody, few,

many, most, much, neither, nobody, none, several, some,

such).

► Not everyone liked the new procedures; some even refused to follow them.

A reflexive pronoun, which always ends with the suffix self or

selves, indicates that the subject of the sentence acts upon

itself. See also sentence construction.

► The electrician accidentally shocked herself.

The reflexive pronouns are myself, yourself, himself, herself,

itself, oneself, ourselves, yourselves, and themselves. Myself is

not a substitute for I or me as a personal pronoun.

893

Intensive pronouns are identical in form to the reflexive

pronouns, but they perform a different function: Intensive

pronouns emphasize their antecedents.

► I myself asked the same question.

Reciprocal pronouns (one another, each other) indicate the

relationship of one item to another. Each other is commonly

used when referring to two persons or things, and one another

when referring to more than two.

► Lashell and Kara work well with each other. ► The crew members work well with one another.

Case Pronouns have forms to show the subjective, objective, and

possessive cases.

SINGULAR SUBJECTIVE OBJECTIVE POSSESSIVE

First person I me my, mine

Second person you you your, yours

Third person he, she, it him, her, it his, her, hers, its

PLURAL SUBJECTIVE OBJECTIVE POSSESSIVE

First person we us our, ours

Second person you you your, yours

894

Third person they them their, theirs

A pronoun that functions as the subject of a clause or sentence

is in the subjective case (I, we, he, she, it, you, they, who). The

subjective case is also used when the pronoun follows a linking

verb.

► She is my boss. ► My boss is she.

A pronoun that functions as the object of a verb or preposition

is in the objective case (me, us, him, her, it, you, them, whom).

► Ms. Davis hired Tom and me. [object of verb] ► Between you and me, she’s wrong. [object of preposition]

A pronoun that expresses ownership is in the possessive case

(my, mine, our, ours, his, her, hers, its, your, yours, their,

theirs, whose).

► He took his notes with him on the business trip. ► We took our notes with us on the business trip.

A pronoun appositive takes the case of its antecedent.

► Two systems analysts, Joe and I, were selected to represent the company. [Joe and I is in apposition to the subject, two systems analysts, and must therefore be in the subjective case.]

► The manager selected two representatives — Joe and me. [Joe and me is in apposition to two representatives, which is

895

the object of the verb, selected, and therefore must be in the objective case.]

If you have difficulty determining the case of a compound

pronoun, try using the pronoun singly.

► In his letter, Eldon mentioned him and me.In his letter, Eldon mentioned him.In his letter, Eldon mentioned me.

► They and we must discuss the terms of the merger.They must discuss the terms of the merger.We must discuss the terms of the merger.

When a pronoun modifies a noun, try it without the noun to

determine its case.

► [We / Us] pilots fly our own planes.We fly our own planes. [You would not write, “Us fly our own planes.”]

► He addressed his remarks directly to [we / us] technicians. He addressed his remarks directly to us. [You would not write, “He addressed his remarks directly to we.”]

Gender A pronoun must agree in gender with its antecedent. A problem

sometimes occurs because the masculine pronoun has

traditionally been used to refer to both sexes. To avoid the

sexual bias implied in such usage, use he or she or the plural

form of the pronoun, they.

896

As in this example, when the singular pronoun (he) changes to

the plural (they), the singular indefinite pronoun (each) must

also change to its plural form (all). See also agreement and

biased language.

Number Number is a frequent problem with a few indefinite pronouns

(each, either, neither, and those ending with body or one, such

as anybody, anyone, everybody, everyone, nobody, no one,

somebody, and someone) that are normally singular and thus

require singular verbs and corresponding singular pronouns.

► As each member arrives for the meeting, please hand him or her a copy of the confidential report. Everyone must return the copy before he or she leaves. Everybody on the committee understands that neither of our major competitors is aware of the new process we have developed.

Person Third-person personal pronouns usually have antecedents.

► Gina presented the report to the members of the board of directors. She [Gina] first summarized it [the report] for them [the directors] and then asked for questions.

897

First- and second-person personal pronouns do not normally

require antecedents.

► I like my job. ► You were on vacation at the time. ► We all worked hard on the project.

898

proofreading Proofreading is essential whether you are writing a brief e-mail

or a high-stakes résumé. Grammar checkers and spell checkers

are important aids to proofreading, but they can make writers

overconfident. If a typographical error results in a legitimate

English word (for example, coarse instead of course), the spell

checker will not flag the misspelling. You may find some of the

tactics discussed in revision useful when proofreading; in fact,

you may find passages during proofreading that will require

further revision.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Proofreading not only demonstrates that you respect readers (who can be distracted, irritated, or misled by errors in writing) but also reflects that you are professional in the way you approach your work.

Whether the material you proofread is your own writing or

that of someone else, proofread in several stages. Although you

need to tailor the stages to the specific document and to your

own problem areas, the following Writer’s Checklist should

provide a useful starting point.

Traditional handwritten proofreaders’ marks are illustrated

in the Chicago Manual of Style, 17th edition, Figures 2.6 and 2.7.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

899

Proofreading in Stages FIRST-STAGE REVIEW

✓ Appropriate format, as for reports or correspondence ✓ Consistent style, including headings, terminology, spacing, and

fonts ✓ Correct numbering of figures and tables

SECOND-STAGE REVIEW

✓ Specific grammar and usage problems ✓ Appropriate punctuation ✓ Correct and consistent abbreviations and capitalization ✓ Correct spelling (including names and places) ✓ Accurate Web, e-mail, or other addresses ✓ Accurate data in tables, figures, and lists ✓ Cut-and-paste errors; for example, a result of moved or deleted

text and numbers

FINAL-STAGE REVIEW

✓ Review of your overall goals: audience needs and purpose ✓ Appearance of the document (see layout and design) ✓ Review by a trusted colleague, especially for crucial documents

(see collaborative writing)

900

proposals DIRECTORY

Proposal Strategies Audience and Purpose Project Management

Proposal Context and Types Writer’s Checklist: Writing Persuasive Proposals Internal Proposals

Informal Internal Proposals Formal Internal Proposals

External Proposals Solicited Proposals Unsolicited Proposals Sales Proposals

Grant Proposals (see entry grant proposals)

A proposal is a document written to persuade readers that what

is proposed will benefit them by solving a problem or fulfilling

a need. When you write a proposal, therefore, you must

convince readers that they need what you are proposing, that it

is practical and appropriate, and that you are the right person

or organization to provide the proposed product or service. See

also persuasion and “you” viewpoint.

Proposal Strategies For any proposal, support your assertions with relevant facts,

statistics, and examples. Your supporting evidence must lead

901

logically to your proposed plan of action or solution. Cite relevant sources that provide strong credibility to your

argument. Do not wander from your main point or make false

claims. See ethics in writing.

Audience and Purpose Proposals often require more than one level of approval, so take

into account all the readers in your audience and their levels of

technical knowledge. For example, if your primary reader is an

expert on your subject but an executive who must approve the

proposal is not, provide an executive summary written in

nontechnical language. You might also include a glossary of

terms used in the body of the proposal or an appendix that

explains highly detailed information in nontechnical language.

If your primary reader is not an expert, write the proposal with

the nonexpert in mind but include an appendix that contains

the technical details.

Writing a persuasive proposal can be simplified by

composing a concise statement of purpose — the exact problem

or opportunity that your proposal is designed to address.

Composing a purpose statement first will also help you and any

collaborators understand the direction, scope, and goals of your

proposal.

Project Management Proposal writers are often faced with writing high-quality,

persuasive proposals under tight organizational deadlines.

902

Dividing the task into manageable parts is the key to

accomplishing your goals, especially when proposals involve

substantial collaborative writing. For example, you might set

deadlines for completing various proposal sections or stages of

the writing process. Proposal-management software allows

businesses to automate the more routine tasks while easily

tracking multiple versions.

Proposal Context and Types Understanding the context of the proposal will help you

determine the most appropriate writing strategy. In general, to

persuade those within your organization to make a change or an

improvement or perhaps to fund a project, you would write an

internal proposal. To persuade those outside your company to

agree to a plan or take a course of action, you would write an

external proposal.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Persuasive Proposals

✓ Analyze your audience carefully to determine how to best meet your readers’ needs or requirements.

✓ Write a concise purpose statement at the outset to clarify your proposal’s goals.

✓ Divide the writing task into manageable segments, and develop a time line for completing tasks.

✓ Review the descriptions of proposal contexts, structure, and types in this entry.

✓ Focus on the proposal’s benefits to readers, and anticipate their

903

questions or objections. ✓ Incorporate evidence to support the claims of your proposal. ✓ Select an appropriate, visually appealing format (unless one is

defined by the request for proposals). See layout and design. ✓ Use a confident, positive tone throughout the proposal.

Internal Proposals The purpose of an internal proposal is to suggest a change or an

improvement within the writer’s organization. It is addressed to

a superior who has the authority to accept or reject the

proposal. Internal proposals are typically reviewed by one or

more departments for cost, practicality, and potential benefits,

so take account of all relevant audience members. Two

common types of internal proposals — informal and formal —

are often distinguished from each other by the frequency with

which they are written and by the degree of change they

propose.

Informal Internal Proposals Informal internal proposals are the most common type of

proposal and typically include small spending requests,

requests for permission to hire new employees or increase

salaries, and requests to attend conferences or purchase new

equipment. In writing informal or routine proposals, highlight

any key benefits to be realized.

Formal Internal Proposals Formal internal proposals usually involve requests to commit

904

large sums of money or to recommend large-scale

reorganizations. They are usually organized into sections that

describe a problem, propose a solution, and offer to implement

the suggested recommendation. The body, in turn, is further

divided into sections to reflect the subject matter. The proposal

may begin with a section describing the background or history

of an issue and go on to discuss options for addressing the issue

in separate sections.

The introduction of your internal proposal should establish

that a problem exists and needs a solution. If the audience is not

convinced that there is a problem, your proposal will not

succeed. After you identify the problem, summarize your

solution and indicate its benefits and estimated total cost.

Notice how the introduction in Figure P–8 states the problem

directly and then summarizes the proposed solution.

905

FIGURE P–8. Special-Purpose Internal Proposal (Introduction and Body)

906

The body of your internal proposal should offer a practical

solution to the problem and provide the details necessary to

inform and persuade your readers. In the body, describe the

problem for which you are offering a solution; the methodology

of your proposed solution; details about equipment, materials,

and staff; cost breakdowns; and a comprehensive schedule.

Figure P–8 provides a section from the body of an internal

proposal.

The conclusion of your internal proposal should tie

everything together, restate your recommendation, and close

with a spirit of cooperation (offering to set up a meeting, supply

additional information, or provide any other assistance that

might be needed). Keep your conclusion brief, as in Figure P–8.

See conclusions.

907

FIGURE P–8. Special-Purpose Internal Proposal (Conclusion)

If your proposal cites information that you obtained through

research, such as published reports, government statistics, or

interviews, follow the conclusion with a list of works cited that

provides complete publication information for each source.

External Proposals External proposals are prepared for clients and customers

908

outside your company. They are either submitted in response to

a request for goods and services from another organization (a

solicited proposal) or sent to an organization without a prior

request (an unsolicited proposal). The grant proposal is a type

of external proposal. Such proposals are usually submitted to

nonprofit or government organizations to request funding.

Solicited Proposals These proposals seek the most qualified company to help an

organization reach its goals by issuing a request for proposals

(RFP) or an invitation for bids (IFB) to companies that compete

for the work.

An RFP often defines a need or problem and allows those

who respond to propose possible solutions. The procuring

organization generally distributes an RFP to several

predetermined vendors. The RFP usually outlines the specific

requirements for the ideal solution. For example, if an

organization needs a new accounting system, it may require the

proposed system to create customized reports. The RFP also

may define specific formatting requirements, such as page

length, font type and size, headings, and sections. Some large

organizations require that proposals be submitted entirely

online with specific requirements. When responding to RFPs,

follow their requirements exactly — proposals that do not are

usually considered “noncompliant” and immediately rejected.

In contrast to an RFP, an IFB is commonly issued by federal,

909

state, and local government agencies to solicit bids on clearly

defined products or services. An IFB is restrictive, binding the

bidder to produce an item or a service that meets the exact

requirements of the organization issuing the IFB. The goods or

services are defined in the IFB by references to performance

standards stated in technical specifications. Bidders must be

prepared to prove that their product will meet all requirements

of the specifications. The procuring organization generally

publishes its IFB online, either on its own Web site or on others,

such as Federal Business Opportunities at www.fbo.gov. Like

RFPs, IFBs usually define specific format requirements;

proposals that do not follow the required format can be rejected

without review.

Unsolicited Proposals Unsolicited proposals are those submitted to a company

without a prior request. Companies often operate for years with

a problem they have never recognized (unnecessarily high

maintenance costs, for example, or poor inventory-control

methods). Many unsolicited proposals are preceded by a letter

of inquiry that specifies the problem or unmet need to

determine potential interest. A positive response would prompt

a detailed study of the prospective client’s needs. A formal

proposal would then be prepared based on the results of the

study.

Sales Proposals The sales proposal is a company’s offer to provide specific

910

goods or services to a potential buyer within a specified period

of time and for a specified price. The primary purpose of a sales

proposal is to demonstrate that the prospective customer’s

purchase of the seller’s products or services will solve a

problem, improve operations, or offer other benefits.

Sales proposals can be a page or two written by one person;

many pages written collaboratively by several people; or

hundreds of pages written by a proposal-writing team. Many

sales proposals note that the offer is valid for a limited period

(often 90 days). See also collaborative writing.

ETHICS NOTE

Once submitted, a sales proposal is a legally binding document that promises to offer goods or services within a specified time and for a specified price.

Simple sales proposals typically follow the introduction-

body-conclusion pattern. Long sales proposals must

accommodate a greater variety of information and are

organized to include some or all of the following sections

specified in the RFP:

Cover message Title page Executive or project summary General description of products Detailed solution or rationale Cost analysis Delivery schedule or work plan

Site-preparation description Training requirements Statement of responsibilities Description of vendor Organizational sales pitch Conclusion Appendixes

911

COVER MESSAGE. A long sales proposal begins with a cover

message expressing appreciation for the opportunity to submit

the proposal and offering thanks for any assistance received.

The letter should acknowledge any previous positive association

with the customer. Then it should summarize the

recommendations offered in the proposal and express

confidence that they will satisfy the customer’s needs. Cover

messages often list the documents attached or enclosed to help

readers keep the associated documents together.

TITLE PAGE. The title page contains the title of the proposal,

the date of submission, the company to which it is being

submitted, your company’s name, and any symbol or logo that

identifies your company.

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY. An executive summary—

sometimes called a project summary—follows the title page.

Intended for the decision-maker who will ultimately accept or

reject the proposal, it should summarize in nontechnical

language how you plan to approach the work.

DESCRIPTION. If your proposal offers products as well as

services, it should include a general description of the products.

In many cases, product descriptions will already exist as

company boilerplate; be sure to check your company’s files

before drafting a description from scratch.

912

ETHICS NOTE

Using “boilerplate” is neither plagiarism nor a violation of copyright. See also repurposing.

RATIONALE. Following the executive summary and general

description of products, explain exactly how you plan to do

what you are proposing. This section, called the detailed

solution or rationale, will be read by specialists who can

understand and evaluate your plan. It usually begins with a

statement of the customer’s problem, follows with a statement

of the solution, and concludes with a statement of the benefits

to the customer. In some proposals, the headings “Problem”

and “Solution” are used for this section.

COST ANALYSIS. A cost analysis itemizes the estimated cost

of all the products and services that you are offering.

DELIVERY SCHEDULE. The delivery schedule—also called a

work plan—is a commitment to meet a specific timetable for

providing agreed-upon products and services.

SITE PREPARATION. If your recommendations include

modifying your customer’s physical facilities by moving walls,

adding increased electrical capacity, and the like, include a site-

preparation description that details the modifications required.

In some proposals, the headings “Facilities” and “Equipment”

are used for this section.

913

TRAINING. If the products and services proposed require

training the customer’s employees, specify the required

training and its cost.

RESPONSIBILITIES. To prevent misunderstandings about

what your and the customer’s responsibilities will be, draw up a

statement of responsibilities that explains in detail the tasks

that are solely your responsibility and those that are solely the

customer’s responsibility.

VENDOR DESCRIPTION. The description-of-vendor section

gives a profile of your company, its history, and its present

position in the industry. The description-of-vendor section

typically includes a list of people or subcontractors and the

duties they will perform. The résumés of key personnel may

also be placed here or in an appendix.

SALES PITCH. An organizational sales pitch usually follows

the description-of-vendor section and is designed to sell the

company and its general capability in the field. The sales pitch

promotes the company and concludes the proposal on an

upbeat note.

CONCLUSION. Some long sales proposals include a

conclusion section that summarizes the proposal’s salient

points, stresses your company’s strengths, and includes

information about whom the potential client can contact for

further information. It may also end with a request for the date

the work will begin should the proposal be accepted.

914

APPENDIXES. Some proposals include appendixes made up

of statistical analyses, maps, charts, tables, and résumés of the

principal staff assigned to the project. Appendixes to proposals

should contain only supplemental information.

Figure P–9 shows sections from a major sales proposal.

915

916

Figure P–9. Sales Proposal (Cover Message)

917

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Executive Summary)

918

919

920

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (General Description of Products)

921

922

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Detailed Solution)

923

924

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Cost Analysis and Delivery Schedule)

925

926

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Site Preparation)

927

928

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Training)

929

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Statement of Responsibilities)

930

931

932

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Vendor Description and Organizational Sales Pitch)

933

FIGURE P–9. Sales Proposal (Conclusion)

934

935

pseudo- / quasi- As a prefix, pseudo-, meaning “false or counterfeit,” is joined to

the root word without a hyphen unless the root word begins

with a capital letter (pseudoscience, pseudo-Keynesian).

Pseudo- is sometimes confused with quasi-, meaning

“somewhat” or “partial.” Unlike semi-, quasi- means

“resembling something” rather than “half.” Quasi- is usually

hyphenated in combinations (quasi-marketing initiatives).

936

punctuation Punctuation helps readers understand the meaning and

relationships of words, phrases, clauses, and sentences. Marks

of punctuation link, separate, enclose, indicate omissions,

terminate, and classify. Most punctuation marks can perform

more than one function. See also sentence construction.

The use of punctuation is determined by grammatical

conventions and the writer’s intention. Understanding

punctuation is essential for writers because it enables them to

communicate with clarity and precision. See also grammar.

Detailed information on each mark of punctuation is given in

its own entry. The following are the 13 marks of punctuation.

apostrophe ’ parentheses ( )

brackets [ ] period .

colon : question mark ?

comma , quotation marks “ ”

dash — semicolon ;

exclamation mark ! slash /

hyphen -

See also abbreviations, capitalization, contractions, dates,

ellipses, italics, and numbers.

937

purpose The primary purpose, or objective, of a writing task is the

answer to the following question: What do you want your

readers to know, believe, or do once they have read your

document? Be careful not to state a purpose too broadly. A

statement of purpose such as “to explain continuing-education

standards” is too general to be helpful during the writing

process. In contrast, “to explain to members of the American

Association of Critical-Care Nurses (AACN) how to determine if

a continuing-education course meets AACN professional

standards” is a specific purpose that will help you focus on the

needs of your audience and what your document should

accomplish. See also context.

The writer’s primary purpose is often more complex than

simply “to explain” something, as shown in the previous

paragraph. Ask yourself not only why you are writing the

document but also what you want your reader to believe or do

after reading it. Suppose a writer for a newsletter has been

assigned to write an article about cardiopulmonary

resuscitation (CPR). In answer to the question what? the writer

could state the purpose as “to emphasize the importance of

CPR.” To the question why? the writer might respond, “to

encourage employees to sign up for evening CPR classes.”

Putting the answers to the two questions together, the writer’s

purpose might be stated as, “To write a document that will

emphasize the importance of CPR and encourage employees to

938

sign up for evening CPR classes.” The primary purpose of this

document is to persuade the readers of the importance of CPR,

and the secondary goal is to motivate them to register for a

class. Secondary goals often involve such abstract notions as to

motivate, reassure, or inspire. See also persuasion.

If you answer the questions what? and why? and put the

answers into writing as a stated purpose that includes both

primary and secondary goals, you will simplify your writing

task and more likely achieve your purpose. For a collaborative

writing project, it is especially important to collectively write a

statement of your purpose to ensure that the document

achieves its goals. Do not lose sight of that purpose as you

become engrossed in the other steps of the writing process. See

also “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

939

Q

940

question marks The question mark (?) most often ends a sentence that is a direct

question or request.

► Where did you put the tax report? [direct question] ► Will you e-mail me if your shipment does not arrive by

June 10? [request]

Use a question mark to end a statement that has an

interrogative meaning — a statement that is declarative in form

but asks a question.

► The tax report is finished? [question in declarative form]

Question marks may follow a series of separate items within an

interrogative sentence.

► Do you remember the date of the contract? Its terms? Whether you signed it?

Use a question mark to end an interrogative clause within a

declarative sentence.

► It was not until July (or was it August?) that we submitted the report.

Retain the question mark in a title that is being cited, even

though the sentence in which it appears has not ended.

► Can Investments Be Protected? is the title of her book.

941

Never use a question mark to end a sentence that is an indirect

question.

When a question is a polite request or an instruction to which

an affirmative response is assumed, a question mark is not

necessary.

► Will you call me as soon as he arrives. [polite request]

When used with quotations, the placement of the question

mark is important. When the writer is asking a question, the

question mark belongs outside the quotation marks.

► Did she actually say, “I don’t think the project should continue”?

If the quotation itself is a question, the question mark goes

inside the quotation marks.

► She asked, “Do we have enough funding?”

If both cases apply — the writer is asking a question and the

quotation itself is a question — use a single question mark inside

the quotation marks.

► Did she ask, “Do we have enough funding?”

942

questionnaires A questionnaire is a research tool consisting of a series of

questions on a particular topic sent to a targeted group of

individuals in an easy-totabulate form. It may be distributed on

paper, as an e-mail attachment, or as an online digital form. As

you prepare a questionnaire, keep in mind your purpose and

your intended audience. See also interviewing for

information.

Questionnaires have several advantages over the personal

interview as well as several disadvantages.

ADVANTAGES

A questionnaire allows you to gather information from more people than you could by conducting personal interviews. A questionnaire enables you to obtain responses from people who are difficult to reach or who are in various geographic locations. A questionnaire gives respondents more time to think through their answers than a personal interview would. A questionnaire may yield more objective data than an interview because an interviewer’s tone of voice, facial expressions, or mere presence might influence an answer. The cost of distributing and tabulating a questionnaire is lower than the cost of conducting numerous personal interviews.

943

DISADVANTAGES

Results may be slanted in favor of those people who have strong opinions on a subject because they are more likely to respond to a questionnaire than are those with only moderate views. A questionnaire does not allow specific follow-up questions to answers. Distributing questionnaires and receiving responses may take longer than conducting personal interviews.

A sample cover e-mail message with a link to an online

questionnaire is shown in Figure Q–1. The e-mail message and

questionnaire were sent to employees in a large organization

who had participated in a six-month pilot program of flexible

working hours.

944

FIGURE Q–1. Questionnaire (Cover Message)

945

946

FIGURE Q–1. Questionnaire

947

948

FIGURE Q–1. Questionnaire

Selecting the Recipients Selecting the proper recipients for your questionnaire is crucial

if you are to gather representative and usable data. Depending

on the topic, you may need to include people from different

geographic areas, occupations, genders, and educational

backgrounds. Only by using a representative sample of your

target population can you make a generalized statement based

on your findings from the sample. (The best sources of

information on sampling techniques are market-research and

statistics texts.)

Preparing the Questions Keep the questionnaire as brief as possible to maximize the

return rate. Ask questions that are easy to understand;

confusing questions will yield confusing results. Ideally,

recipients should be able to answer most questions with a “yes”

or “no” or by selecting one choice from among several options.

Such answers are easy to tabulate and require minimum effort

on the part of the respondent, thus increasing your chances of

obtaining a response. For help with designing online surveys as

well as collecting and analyzing the results, visit such sites as

surveymonkey.com and surveygizmo.com. See also forms.

ETHICS NOTE

949

Questions should be neutral; they should not be worded in such a way as to lead respondents to give a particular answer, which can result in inaccurate or skewed data.

LEADING Would you prefer the freedom of a four-day workweek?

NEUTRAL Would you choose to work a four-day workweek, ten hours a day, with every Friday off?

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Designing a Questionnaire

✓ Prepare a cover message or an introductory statement explaining who you are, the questionnaire’s purpose, the response deadline, and how or where to send the completed questionnaire.

✓ Frame most questions in ways that are easy to tabulate; keep openresponse questions to a minimum.

✓ Review the software settings for electronic forms so the survey meets your needs, such as limiting response length and ensuring anonymity.

✓ Select the appropriate response type: check box (allowing one or more choices), forced choice with radio buttons (allowing one choice from options provided), single response (such as “yes/no”).

✓ Include a section on the questionnaire for additional comments where the recipient may clarify his or her overall attitude toward the subject.

✓ Include questions about the respondent’s demographics (such as age, gender, education, occupation) only if such information is essential.

✓ State whether the information provided as well as the recipient’s

950

identity will be kept confidential. ✓ Include your contact information (mailing address, phone

number, and e-mail address) and be sure to thank respondents for participating.

✓ Consider offering a copy of the results or a customer discount for those who answer the questionnaire by the deadline.

951

quid pro quo Quid pro quo is Latin for “one thing for another” or “this for

that” in a relationship between two groups or individuals. The

term may be appropriate in business and legal contexts if you

are sure your readers understand its meaning. (“Before

approving the plan, we insisted on a fair quid pro quo.”) See

also foreign words in English.

952

quotation marks Quotation marks (“ ”) are used to enclose a direct quotation of

spoken or written words. Quotation marks have other special

uses, but they should not be used for emphasis.

Direct Quotations Enclose in quotation marks anything that is quoted word for

word (a direct quotation) from speech or written material.

► The contract was explicit: “Monthly deliverables for the duration of this contract are due by close of business on the last workday of each month.”

Do not enclose indirect quotations — usually introduced by the

word that — in quotation marks. Indirect quotations are

paraphrases of a writer’s or speaker’s words or ideas. See also

paraphrasing.

► The contract stated that deliverables are due the last workday of each month.

ETHICS NOTE

When you use quotation marks to indicate that you are quoting word for word, do not make any changes or omissions inside the quoted material unless you clearly indicate what you have done. For further information on incorporating quoted material and inserting comments, see plagiarism and quotations.

953

Use single quotation marks (‘ ’) to enclose a quotation that

appears within a quotation.

► John said, “Jane told me that she was going to ‘stay with the project if it takes all year.’”

Words and Phrases Use quotation marks to set off a special word or term if you

need to point out that the term is being used for a unique or

special purpose (that is, in the sense of the term so-called).

► A remarkable chain of events caused the sinking of the “unsinkable” Titanic on its maiden voyage.

Slang, colloquial expressions, and attempts at humor, although

infrequent in workplace writing, should seldom be set off by

quotation marks.

Titles of Works Use quotation marks to enclose titles of reports, short stories,

articles, essays, single episodes of radio and television

programs, and short musical works (including songs). However,

do not use quotation marks for titles of books and periodicals,

which should appear in italics.

► “Effects of Government Regulations on Motorcycle Safety” [report] cited “No-Fault Insurance and Motorcycles”

954

[article], published in American Motorcyclist [periodical].

Use quotation marks for parts of publications, such as chapters

of books and sections within larger works.

► “Microbusiness Economic Trends: Into the Future” [article] appeared in Small Business Trends (smallbiztrends.com) [blog].

Some titles are not set off by quotation marks, italics, or

underlining, although they are capitalized.

► Professional Writing [college course title], the Constitution, the Bible, Lincoln’s Gettysburg Address, the Lands’ End Catalog

Punctuation Commas and periods always go inside closing quotation marks.

► “Reading Computer World gives me the insider’s view,” he says, adding, “It’s like a conversation with the top experts.”

Semicolons and colons always go outside closing quotation

marks.

► He said, “I will pay the full amount”; this statement surprised us.

All other punctuation follows the logic of the context: If the

punctuation is part of the material quoted, it goes inside the

quotation marks; if the punctuation is not part of the material

955

quoted, it goes outside the quotation marks.

956

quotations Using direct and indirect quotations is an effective way to

support a point and strengthen the credibility of your writing.

But do not rely too heavily on the use of quotations, and avoid

quoting anything that is longer than one paragraph.

ETHICS NOTE

When you use a quotation (or an idea of another writer), cite your source properly. If you do not, you will be guilty of plagiarism. See also note-taking and research.

Direct Quotations A direct quotation is a word-for-word copy of the text of an

original source. Choose direct quotations (which can be of a

word, a phrase, a sentence, or even a paragraph) carefully, and

use them sparingly. Enclose direct quotations in quotation

marks, and separate them from the rest of the sentence by a

comma or colon. Use the initial capital letter of a quotation if

the quoted material originally began with a capital letter.

► The economist stated, “Regulation cannot supply the dynamic stimulus that in other industries is supplied by competition.”

When dividing a quotation, set off the material that interrupts

the quotation with commas, and use quotation marks around

957

each part of the quotation.

► “Regulation,” the economist said in a recent interview, “cannot supply the dynamic stimulus that in other industries is supplied by competition.”

Indirect Quotations An indirect quotation is a paraphrased version of an original

text. It is usually introduced by the word that and is not set off

from the rest of the sentence by punctuation marks. See also

paraphrasing.

► In a recent interview, he said that regulation does not stimulate the industry as well as competition does.

Deletions or Omissions Deletions or omissions from quoted material are indicated by

three ellipsis points (. . .) within a sentence and a period plus

three ellipsis points (. . . .) at the end of a sentence. See ellipses.

► “If monopolies could be made to respond . . . we would be able to enjoy the benefits of . . . large-scale efficiency. . . .”

When a quoted passage begins in the middle of a sentence

rather than at the beginning, ellipsis points are not necessary;

the fact that the first letter of the quoted material is not

capitalized tells the reader that the quotation begins in

midsentence.

958

► Rivero goes on to conclude that “coordination may lessen competition within a region.”

In omitting material, be careful not to change the author’s

original meaning, which would be unethical as well as

inaccurate.

Inserting Material into Quotations When it is necessary to insert a clarifying comment within

quoted material, use brackets.

► “The industry is an integrated system that serves an extensive [geographic] area, with divisions existing as islands within the larger system’s sphere of influence.”

When quoted material contains an obvious error or might be

questioned in some other way, insert the expression sic (Latin

for “thus”) in italic type and enclose it in brackets ([sic])

following the questionable material to indicate that the writer

has quoted the material exactly as it appeared in the original.

► The contract states, “Tinted windows will be installed to protect against son [sic] damage.”

Incorporating Quotations into Text Quote word for word only when a source with particular

959

expertise states something that is especially precise, striking, or

noteworthy, or that may reinforce a point you are making.

Quotations must also logically, grammatically, and syntactically

match the rest of the sentence and surrounding text. Notice in

Figure Q–2 that the quotation blends with the content of the

surrounding text, which uses transition to introduce and

comment on the quotation.

FIGURE Q–2. Long Quotation (APA Style)

Depending on the citation system, the style of incorporating

quotations varies. For examples of two different styles, see

documenting sources. Figure Q–2 shows APA style for a long

quotation (forty or more words).

960

R

961

raise / rise Both raise and rise mean “move to a higher position.” However,

raise is a transitive verb and always takes an object (“raise

crops”), whereas rise is an intransitive verb and never takes an

object (“heat rises”).

962

readers The first rule of effective writing is to help your readers. If you

overlook this commitment, your writing will not achieve its

purpose, either for you or for your business or organization.

For meeting the needs of both individual and multiple readers,

see audience.

963

really Really is an adverb meaning “actually” or “in fact.” Although

both really and actually are often used as intensifiers for

emphasis or sarcasm in speech, avoid such use in formal and

professional writing.

964

reason is [because] Replace the redundant phrase the reason is because with the

reason is that or simply because. See also conciseness.

965

reference letters Writing a reference (or recommendation) letter can range from

completing an online form to composing a detailed description

(see Figure R–1) of professional accomplishments and personal

characteristics for someone seeking employment. In Figure R–

1, a former employer has written a letter for someone seeking

an advanced position as a researcher.

966

FIGURE R–1. Reference Letter (Printed on Letterhead Stationery)

967

To write an effective letter of recommendation, you must be

familiar enough with the applicant’s abilities and performance

to offer an evaluation. Keep in mind the following:

Identify yourself by name, title or position, employer, and contact information. Explain the circumstances and how long you have known the applicant, as in Figure R–1. Respond directly to the inquiry, carefully addressing the specific questions asked. Describe specifically the applicant’s skills, abilities, knowledge, and character, guided by the person’s résumé when possible. Communicate truthfully and without embellishment.

Mention, providing as much evidence as possible, one or two

outstanding characteristics of the applicant. Organize the

details in your letter using the decreasing order-of-importance

method of development. Conclude with a brief summary of the

applicant’s qualifications and a clear statement of

recommendation. See also correspondence.

ETHICS NOTE

When you are asked to serve as a reference or to supply a letter of reference, be aware that applicants have a legal right to examine what you have written about them unless they sign a waiver.

968

refusal letters A refusal delivers a negative message (or bad news) in the form

of a letter, a memo, or an e-mail. The ideal refusal says no in

such a way that you not only avoid antagonizing your reader but

also maintain goodwill. See also audience and “you” viewpoint.

The refusal in Figure R–2 declines an invitation to speak at a

meeting, and the stakes for the writer are relatively low;

however, the writer wishes to acknowledge the honor of being

asked.

969

FIGURE R–2. Refusal with Low Stakes

When the stakes are high, you must convince your reader

that the bad news is based on reasons that are logical or at least

understandable (see also correspondence). Stating a negative

message in your opening may cause readers to react too quickly

and dismiss your explanation. The pattern shown in Figure R–3

is an effective way to handle this problem.

970

FIGURE R–3. Refusal with High Stakes

1. Context. In the opening, introduce the subject, but do not provide irrelevant information or mislead the reader that good news may follow.

2. Explanation. Review the facts or details that lead logically to the bad news, trying to see things from your reader’s point of view.

3. Bad news. State your refusal or negative message, based on

971

the facts, concisely and without apology. 4. Goodwill. In the closing, establish or reestablish a positive

relationship by providing an alternative if possible, assure the reader of your high opinion of his or her product or service, offer a friendly remark, or simply wish the reader success.

Your opening should provide an appropriate context and

establish a professional tone by, for example, expressing

appreciation for a reader’s time, effort, or interest.

► The Screening Procedures Committee appreciates the time and effort you spent on your proposal for a new security- clearance procedure.

Next, review the circumstances of the situation sympathetically

by placing yourself in the reader’s position. Clearly detail the

reasons you cannot do what the reader wants — even though

you have not yet said you cannot do it. A good explanation

should ideally detail the reasons for your refusal so thoroughly

that the reader will accept the negative message as a logical

conclusion, as shown in the following example.

► We reviewed the potential effects of implementing your proposed security-clearance procedure company-wide. We not only asked the Security Systems Department to review the data but also surveyed industry practices, sought the views of senior management, and submitted the idea to our legal staff. As a result of this process, we have reached the following conclusions:

972

The cost savings you project are correct only if the procedure were required throughout the company. The components of your procedure are legal, but most are not widely accepted by our industry. Based on our survey, some components could alienate employees who would perceive them as violating an individual’s rights. Enforcing company-wide use would prove costly and impractical.

Do not belabor the negative message — state your refusal

quickly, clearly, and as positively as possible.

► For those reasons, the committee recommends that divisions continue their current security-screening procedures.

Close your message in a way that reestablishes goodwill — do

not repeat the bad news. (Avoid writing “Again, we are sorry we

cannot use your idea.”) Ideally, provide an alternative, as in the

following:

► Because some components of your procedure may apply in certain circumstances, we would like to feature your ideas in the next issue of The Guardian. I have asked the editor to contact you next week. On behalf of the committee, thank you for the thoughtful proposal.

For responding to a complaint, see adjustment messages. For

refusing a job offer, see acceptances / refusals.

973

regarding / with regard to In regards to and with regards to are incorrect idioms for in

regard to and with regard to. Both as regards and regarding are

acceptable variants.

974

regardless Always use regardless instead of the nonstandard irregardless,

which expresses a double negative. The prefix ir- renders the

base word negative, but regardless — meaning “unmindful” — is

already negative.

975

repetition The deliberate use of repetition to build a sustained effect or to

emphasize a feeling or an idea can be a powerful device. See

also emphasis.

► Similarly, atoms come and go in a molecule, but the molecule remains; molecules come and go in a cell, but the cell remains; cells come and go in a body, but the body remains; persons come and go in an organization, but the organization remains.

— Kenneth Boulding, Beyond Economics

Repetition of keywords from a previous sentence or paragraph

can also be used effectively to achieve transition.

► For many years, oil has been a major industrial energy source. However, oil supplies are limited, and other sources of energy must be developed.

Be consistent in the word or phrase you use to refer to

something. In business writing, it is generally better to repeat a

word or use a clear pronoun reference (so readers know that

you mean the same thing) than to use synonyms to avoid

repetition. See also affectation.

SYNONYMS Several recent analyses support our conclusion. These studies cast doubt on the feasibility of long-range forecasting. The reports, however, are strictly theoretical.

CONSISTENT Several recent studies support our conclusion. These studies cast

976

TERMS doubt on the feasibility of long-range forecasting. They are, however, strictly theoretical.

Purposeless repetition, however, makes a sentence awkward

and hides its key ideas. See also conciseness.

977

reports A report is an organized presentation of factual information,

often aimed at multiple audiences, that may present the results

of an investigation, a trip, or a research project. For any report,

assessing the readers’ needs is essential. Following is a list of

report entries in this book:

annual reports

feasibility reports

formal reports

incident reports

investigative reports

progress and activity reports

trip reports

Formal reports often present the results of long-term projects

or those that involve multiple participants. (See also

collaborative writing.) Formal reports generally follow a

precise format and include such elements as abstracts and

executive summaries. Such projects may be done either for

your own organization or as a contractual requirement for

another organization. See also proposals.

978

Informal and short reports normally run from a few

paragraphs to a few pages and ordinarily include only an

introduction, a body, a conclusion, and (if necessary)

recommendations. Because of their brevity, informal reports

are customarily written as correspondence, including e-mails,

letters, and memos.

The introduction of any report announces the subject of the

report, states its purpose, and gives any essential background

information. The body presents a clearly organized account of

the report’s subject — the results of a test, the status of a project,

and other details readers may need. The amount of detail to

include depends on your reader’s knowledge, your scope, and

the complexity of the subject.

The conclusion summarizes your findings and interprets

their significance. In some reports, a final, separate section

gives recommendations; in others, the conclusions and the

recommendations are combined into one section. This final

section suggests a course of action based on the data you have

presented. See also persuasion.

979

repurposing Repurposing is the copying or converting of existing content,

such as written text and visuals, from one document or medium

into another for a different purpose. For example, if you are

preparing a promotional brochure, you may be able to reuse

material from a product description that is currently published

on your organization’s Web site. The brochure might then be

printed or placed on the Web site for downloading. See also

selecting the medium.

In the workplace, this process saves time because content

that often requires substantial effort to develop need not be re-

created for each new application. The process of repurposing

may be as simple as copying and pasting content from one

document into another or as complex as automatically

formatting and updating multiple documents, such as

brochures and Web sites, through a content-management

system. See also form letters.

Content can be repurposed exactly as it is written only if it

fits the scope, audience, and purpose of the new document. If

the content alters these areas, you must adapt that content to fit

its new context, as described in the following sections.

The reuse of standard texts or content in technical publications is often referred to as “single-source publishing” or simply “single sourcing.” Traditionally, such reuse of standard texts has been referred to as “boilerplate.”

1

1

980

Repurpose for the Context Staying focused on the purpose of your new document is

critical, especially when repurposing content between different

media. If you are writing a sales proposal, for example, and you

only need to describe the specifications for a product, it may be

useful to repurpose the specification list from your

organization’s Web site. However, the purpose of the Web-site

content may be to inform customers about your products,

whereas the purpose of a proposal is to persuade customers to

buy your products. To effectively use the repurposed content in

your proposal, you may need to adapt the tense, voice, tone,

grammar, and point of view to make the repurposed content

more persuasive and fit within the context of a sales proposal.

Repurpose for the Medium The best style and format of content written for a specific

medium, such as a brochure or fact sheet, may not work as

effectively when repurposed for a different medium, such as a

Web site. Solid blocks of text may be easy to read in a brochure,

but Web readers often need blocks of text to be separated into

bulleted lists or short paragraphs because readers process

information differently when reading on a screen. Adapt the

layout and design of the repurposed content to accommodate

your readers’ needs for the medium. See writing for the Web.

ETHICS NOTE

981

In the workplace, repurposing content within an organization does not violate copyright because an organization owns the information it creates and can share it across the company. Likewise, a writer in an organization may use and repurpose material in the public domain and, with proper attribution, content that is licensed under Creative Commons (see creativecommons.org/about).

In the classroom, of course, the use of content or someone else’s unique ideas without acknowledgment or the use of someone else’s exact words without quotation marks and appropriate credit is plagiarism.

982

research DIRECTORY

Primary Research Secondary Research Library Research Strategies Web Research Strategies Writer’s Checklist: Using Search Engines and Keywords Evaluating Sources Writer’s Checklist: Evaluating Print and Online Sources

Research is the process of investigation — the discovery of

information. To be focused, research must be preceded by

preparation, especially consideration of your audience,

purpose, and scope. Effective note-taking is essential for a

coherent organization that strategically integrates your ideas,

supporting facts, and any well-selected quotations into an

effective draft and final document. See also documenting

sources, outlining, and “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

In an academic setting, your preparatory resources include

having conversations with your instructors, fellow students,

and reference librarians, as well as reading a Wikipedia entry or

another general reference source entry on your topic and

conducting searches on the Internet. On the job, your main

resources are your own knowledge and experience and that of

your colleagues. In business, the most important sources of

983

information may also include market research, questionnaires and surveys, focus groups, shareholder meetings, and the like.

In this setting, begin by brainstorming with colleagues about

what sources will be most useful to your topic and how you can

find them.

Primary Research Primary research is the gathering of raw data from such sources

as firsthand experience, interviews, direct observation, surveys

and questionnaires, focus groups, and meetings. In fact, direct

observation and interaction are often the only ways to obtain

certain kinds of information on such topics as human behavior

and the functioning of organizations, as in ethnographic

research. You can also conduct primary online research by

participating in discussion groups and online forums and by e-

mailing requests for information to specific audiences. When

conducting primary research, focus on keeping accurate,

complete records that indicate date, time of day, observation

duration, and so on, saving interpretations for a later time. See

also blogs and forums, interviewing for information, and

listening.

ETHICS NOTE

If you conduct research that involves observation or a questionnaire at your university or college, ask your instructor whether your methods or questions are appropriate, whether you need to file an application with your school’s Institutional Review Board (IRB), and the best way to

984

obtain permission from your study subjects.

Secondary Research Secondary research is the gathering of information that has

been previously analyzed, assessed, evaluated, compiled, or

otherwise organized into accessible form. Sources include

books, articles, online sources, audio and video recordings,

podcasts, correspondence, minutes of meetings, brochures,

and various reports. The following two sections — Library

Research Strategies and Web Research Strategies — provide

methods for finding secondary sources.

Recent periodicals and newspapers — as well as academic

(.edu in the U.S.), government (.gov), and frequently updated

corporate (.com) Web sites — can be good sources of current

information and include the latest published interviews,

articles, papers, and conference proceedings.

Wikipedia may also be a useful source for your initial

research, but be sure to check the references and confirm when

the document was last updated. Be aware, however, that some

instructors may not accept Wikipedia as an appropriate source

for a college research project because it is collaboratively

written and the qualifications of the writers are unclear. See

Writer’s Checklist: Evaluating Print and Online Sources (page

462).

When a resource seems useful, read it carefully and take

985

notes that include additional questions about your topic. Some

of your questions may eventually be answered in other sources;

those that remain unanswered can guide you to further

research, both primary and secondary. See paraphrasing and

plagiarism.

Library Research Strategies The library provides organized paths into scholarship and

specialized resources — such as subscription-only databases,

indexes, catalogs, and directories — that are not accessible

through standard Web searches. The first step in using library

resources, either in an academic institution or in a workplace,

is to develop a search strategy appropriate to the information

needed for your topic. Begin by asking a reference librarian for

help (in person or by phone, live chat, or e-mail) to find the best

print or online resources for your topic. In addition, use your

library’s homepage for access to its catalogs and various

databases.

Your search strategy depends on the kind of information you

are seeking. For example, if you need the latest data offered by

government research, check the Web, as described later in this

entry. If you need a current scholarly article on a topic, search

an online database (such as EBSCOhost’s Academic Search

Premier) subscribed to by your library. For historical

background, your best resources are books, journals, and

primary documents (such as a labor contract).

986

Online Catalogs (Locating Library Holdings) An online catalog allows you to search a library’s licensed

holdings, indicates an item’s location and availability, and may

allow you to arrange an interlibrary loan.

You can search a library’s online catalog by author, title,

keyword, or subject. The most common ways of searching for a

specific topic are by subject or keyword. If your search turns up

too many results, you can usually narrow it by using the “limit

search” or “advanced search” option.

Online Databases and Indexes (Locating Articles) Most libraries subscribe to online databases, sometimes called

periodical indexes, which are available only through a login to

the library’s Web site:

EBSCOhost’s Academic Search Premier: a large multidisciplinary database, providing full text for nearly 4,500 periodicals, including more than 7,400 abstracted and indexed peer-reviewed journals Gale’s Expanded Academic ASAP: a large database covering general-interest and scholarly journals plus business, law, and health-care publications (many in full text) ERIC (Educational Resources Information Center): a U.S. Department of Education database providing access to journals and reports in education JSTOR: a full-text, archival collection of journals in the humanities, social sciences, and sciences

987

LexisNexis Academic: a collection of databases that is particularly strong for news, business, legal, and corporate and financial information (most articles in full text), as well as congressional, statistical, and government resources

Databases offer various ways to save your results. You may be

able to save your searches and note-taking within the database

itself by creating a personal account, by sending selected

references and full-text articles to an e-mail account, or by

exporting them to citation-management software, such as

RefWorks, Evernote, or Zotero. These programs allow you to

build your own database of references from multiple sources,

sort them into folders, and generate bibliographies in the

format of your choice. Database search tools will vary from

library to library, so contact a reference librarian at your school

for guidance.

These databases are excellent resources for articles

published within the last 10 to 20 years. Many include

descriptive abstracts and full texts of articles. To find older

articles, you may need to consult a print index, such as the

Readers’ Guide to Periodical Literature and the New York Times

Article Archive, both of which have been digitized and may be

available in some libraries.

Reference Works In addition to articles, books, and online sources, you may want

to consult reference works such as encyclopedias, dictionaries,

and manuals for a brief overview of your subject. Ask your

988

reference librarian to recommend works and bibliographies

that are most relevant to your topic. Many are available online

and can be accessed through your library’s homepage.

ENCYCLOPEDIAS. Encyclopedias are comprehensive

collections of articles arranged alphabetically. General

encyclopedias, such as the Encyclopaedia Britannica, cover a

wide range of subjects, while subject-specific encyclopedias —

such as The Encyclopedia of Careers and Vocational Guidance,

17th ed. (Chicago, IL: Ferguson, 2017) — focus on specialized

areas of study. The free online encyclopedia Wikipedia is a

useful starting point for your research, but keep in mind that

users continually update entries (with varying degrees of expert

oversight).

DICTIONARIES. Specialized dictionaries define terms used

in a particular field, such as computer science, architecture, or

consumer affairs, and they offer detailed definitions of field-

specific terms, usually written in straightforward language.

HANDBOOKS AND MANUALS. Handbooks and manuals are

typically one-volume compilations of frequently used

information in a particular field. They offer brief definitions of

terms or concepts, standards for presenting information,

procedures for documenting sources, and visuals to illustrate

principles.

BIBLIOGRAPHIES. Bibliographies list books, periodicals, and

other re-search materials published in areas such as business,

989

medicine, the humanities, and the social sciences.

OTHER LIBRARY RESOURCES. Many libraries offer special

kinds of research information. For example, a library may

provide subject guides that aggregate resources in topic areas

popular with students. Some libraries may provide access to

data that can be downloaded into statistical packages, such as

SPSS (Statistical Package for the Social Sciences), for

manipulation. Others offer GIS (geographic information

systems) software that links data to spatial information,

allowing the researcher to create detailed maps that show such

factors as income, ethnicity, or purchasing habits.

Web Research Strategies The Web varies widely in its completeness and accuracy, so you

need to evaluate Internet sources critically by following the

advice in Writer’s Checklist: Evaluating Print and Online

Sources.

Search Engines Search engines use words or combinations of words that you

specify to locate the documents or files that contain one or

more of those words in their titles, descriptions, or text.

Common search engines beyond Google include DuckDuckGo,

Bing, and Yahoo! Some search engines have specialized

interfaces for searching academic texts (scholar.google.com).

As comprehensive as search engines and directories may

990

seem, none are complete or objective. Some, for example, may

not index PDF files or Usenet newsgroups, and many cannot

index databases and other non–HTML-based content. Search

engines rank the sites they believe will be relevant to your

search based on a number of criteria. Although they vary in

what and how they search, you can navigate them all with

strategies described in the following Writer’s Checklist.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Using Search Engines and Keywords

✓ Check any search tips available in the engine you use, and consider any additional search phrases the search engine may suggest.

✓ Enter precise keywords and phrases that are specific to your topic, such as nuclear power rather than just the term nuclear, which would also list nuclear family, nuclear medicine, and other unrelated topics.

✓ Try several search engines to get more varied and relevant results. ✓ Consider using a metasearch engine, such as Dogpile

(www.dogpile.com), which displays results from multiple search engines.

✓ Refine and narrow your terms as you evaluate the results of each search.

Web Subject Directories A subject directory organizes information by broad subject

categories (business, entertainment, health, sports) and related

subtopics (marketing, finance, investing). A subject-directory

991

search eventually produces a list of specific sites that contain information about the topics you request. Directories like these

can help you conduct selective, scholarly research on the Web:

IPL2 www.ipl.org

The WWW Virtual Library www.vlib.org

Some directories and sites are devoted to specific subject areas,

such as the following resources for researching a business

topic:

CIO’s Resource Centers www.cio.com (use search function)

globalEDGE http://globaledge.msu.edu

Inc.com Articles by Topic www.inc.com (use search function)

LSU Libraries Federal Agency Directory www.lib.lsu.edu/gov/index.html

FedStats www.usa.gov/statistics

Evaluating Sources The easiest way to ensure that information is valid is to obtain it

from a reputable source. For online sources, be especially

concerned about the validity of the information provided.

Because anyone can publish on the Web, it is sometimes

difficult to determine authorship of a document, and frequently

a person’s qualifications for speaking on a topic are absent or

questionable. The online versions of established, reputable

journals in medicine, management, engineering, computer

992

software, and the like merit the same level of trust as the

printed versions. The following domain abbreviations may help

you determine an Internet site sponsor:

.aero aerospace industry .info general use

.biz business .mil U.S. military

.com commercial .name individual

.coop business cooperative .net network

.edu educational institution .org general organization

.gov U.S. government .pro professionals

But note that only a few (such as .edu and .gov) restrict who can

register a Web site with a given domain, and a student may be

just as likely as an expert to have a .edu domain.

As you move away from established, reputable sites, be

especially wary of wikis and unmoderated Web sites, where the

author or source cannot be determined. Wikis, collectively

generated Web sites such as Wikipedia, often make no

guarantee of the validity of information on their sites.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Evaluating Print and Online Sources Keep in mind the following four criteria when evaluating sources: authority, accuracy, bias, and currency.

993

FOR ALL SOURCES

✓ Is the resource up to date and relevant to your topic? Is it readily available?

✓ Who is the intended audience? Is it the mainstream public? A small group of professionals?

✓ Who is the author? Is the author an authority on the subject? ✓ Does the author provide enough supporting evidence and

document sources so that you can verify the information’s accuracy?

✓ Is the information presented in an objective, unbiased way? Are any biases made clear? Are opinions clearly labeled? Are viewpoints balanced, or are opposing opinions acknowledged?

✓ Are the language, tone, and style appropriate and cogent?

FOR A BOOK

✓ Does the preface or introduction indicate the author’s or book’s purpose?

✓ Does the table of contents relate to your topic? Does the index contain terms related to your topic?

✓ Are the chapters useful? Skim through one chapter that seems related to your topic — notice especially the introduction, headings, and closing.

FOR AN ARTICLE

✓ Is the publisher of the magazine or other periodical well known? ✓ What is the article’s purpose? For an academic article, read the

abstract; for a newspaper article, read the headline and opening sentences.

✓ Does the article contain informative diagrams or other visuals that indicate its scope?

FOR A WEB SITE

994

✓ Does a reputable individual, group, or organization sponsor or maintain the site?

✓ Are the purpose and scope of the site clearly stated? Check the “Mission Statement” or “About Us” pages. Does the site carry any disclaimers?

✓ Is the site updated and current? Are the links functional and up to date?

✓ Is the documentation authoritative and credible? Check the links to other sources, and cross-check facts at other reputable Web sites.

✓ Is the site well designed? Is the material well written and error- free?

995

resignation letters Resignation messages, as shown in Figures R–4 and R–5, should

be as positive as possible, regardless of the reason you are

leaving a job. As in refusals (see acceptances / refusals), a

resignation offers the opportunity to establish a record of

positive performance that can benefit your career in the long

term.

996

FIGURE R–4. Resignation Letter (to Accept a Better Position)

997

FIGURE R–5. Resignation Memo (Under Negative Conditions)

You usually write a resignation letter (memo or e-mail) to

your supervisor or to an appropriate person in the Human

Resources Department. Use the following guidelines:

Start on a positive note, regardless of the circumstances under which you are leaving. Consider pointing out how you have benefited from working for the company or say something complimentary about the company. Comment on something positive about the people with whom you have been associated.

998

Explain why you are leaving in an objective, factual tone. Avoid angry recriminations, because your resignation will remain on file with the company and could haunt you in the future should you need references.

Your message should give enough notice to allow your

employer time to find a replacement. It might be no more than

two weeks, or it might be enough time to enable you to train

your replacement. Some organizations may ask for a notice

equivalent to the number of weeks of vacation you receive.

Check the policy of your employer before you begin your letter.

The sample resignation letter in Figure R–4 is from an

employee who is leaving to take a job offering greater

opportunities. The memo of resignation in Figure R–5 is written

by an employee who is leaving because her position has been

reclassified and her supervisor has not supported her

advancement, but no personal conflict is mentioned. Notice

that it opens and closes positively and that the reason for the

resignation is stated without apparent anger or bitterness. For

strategies concerning negative messages, see correspondence.

999

respective / respectively Respective is an adjective that means “pertaining to two or

more things regarded individually.” (“The committee members

returned to their respective offices.”) Respectively is the adverb

form of respective, meaning “singly, in the order designated.”

► The first, second, and third prizes in the sales contest were awarded to Maria Juarez, Dan Wesp, and Simone Luce, respectively.

Respective and respectively are unnecessary if the meaning of

individuality is clear.

1000

restrictive and nonrestrictive elements Modifying phrases and clauses may be either restrictive or

nonrestrictive. A nonrestrictive phrase or clause provides

additional information about what it modifies, but it does not

restrict the meaning of what it modifies. A nonrestrictive

phrase or clause can be removed without changing the essential

meaning of the sentence. It is a parenthetical element that is set

off by commas to show its loose relationship with the rest of the

sentence.

NONRESTRICTIVE The annual report, which was distributed yesterday, shows that sales increased 20 percent last year.

A restrictive phrase or clause limits, or restricts, the meaning of

what it modifies. If it were removed, the essential meaning of

the sentence would change. Because a restrictive phrase or

clause is essential to the meaning of the sentence, it is never set

off by commas.

RESTRICTIVE All employees wishing to donate blood may take Thursday afternoon off.

Writers need to distinguish between nonrestrictive and

restrictive elements. The same sentence can take on two

entirely different meanings depending on whether a modifying

element is set off by commas (because it is nonrestrictive) or is

not (because it is restrictive). A slip by the writer can not only

1001

mislead readers but also embarrass the writer.

MISLEADING He gave a poor performance evaluation to the staff members who protested to the Human Resources Department. [This suggests he gave the poor evaluation because the staff members had protested.]

ACCURATE He gave a poor performance evaluation to the staff members, who protested to the Human Resources Department. [This suggests that the staff members protested because of the poor evaluation.]

Use which to introduce nonrestrictive clauses and that to

introduce restrictive clauses.

NONRESTRICTIVE After John left the restaurant, which is one of the finest in New York, he came directly to my office.

RESTRICTIVE Companies that diversify usually succeed.

1002

résumés DIRECTORY

Sample Résumés Analyzing Your Background Returning Job Seekers Organizing Your Résumé (Sections) Digital Formats and Media

A résumé is a key component of an effective job search and

the foundation for your application cover letter. Prospective

employers use the information in the résumé and application

cover letter to screen applicants and select candidates for job

interviews. During a job interview, the content of your résumé

and application cover letter can provide the interviewer with a

guideline for developing specific questions. See also

interviewing for a job.

Because résumés affect a potential employer’s first

impression, make sure that yours is well organized, carefully

designed, consistently formatted, easy to read, and free of

errors. Most important, target your résumé to the specific job so

that the employer can easily see that you are a perfect fit.

Organize the résumé in a way that highlights your strengths and

fits your goals, as suggested by the examples shown in this

entry. Your résumé should be concise, but its length should

depend on the credentials, skills, and abilities that are a

2

1003

compelling match to the particular position. Proofreading is essential: Verify the accuracy of the information, and have

someone else review it.

ETHICS NOTE

Be truthful. Many employers use outside agencies to check references and stated experience, rejecting applicants with résumés that are even slightly inaccurate or embellished. If you are hired based on false information, you may later be dismissed or even face a lawsuit for the deception. See also ethics in writing.

Sample Résumés The sample résumés in this entry provide starting points that

you can use to tailor your résumé to your own job search.

Before you design and write your résumé, look at as many

samples as possible, and then organize and format your own to

best highlight your strengths, present your professional goals,

and make the most persuasive case to your target employers.

See also persuasion.

Figure R–6 presents a conventional student résumé in which the student is seeking an entry-level position.

1004

FIGURE R–6. Student Résumé (for an Entry-Level Position)

1005

Figure R–7 shows a résumé with a variation in the design and placement of conventional headings to highlight professional credentials.

1006

1007

FIGURE R–7. Résumé (Highlighting Professional Credentials)

Figure R–8 presents a résumé for a recent graduate in a format that is appropriately unconventional for the purpose of demonstrating the student’s skill in graphic design. This résumé includes a tagline, a brief description of the target job, and one or two impressive qualifications to grab the potential employer’s attention. It matches the application cover letter in Figure A–8.

1008

1009

FIGURE R–8. Recent Graduate Résumé (for Graphic Design Job)

Figure R–9 depicts a résumé that incorporates a qualifications summary, or profile, and focuses on the applicant’s management experience. This résumé matches the application letter in Figure A–10.

1010

1011

FIGURE R–9. Résumé (Applicant with Management Experience)

Figure R–10 reflects the résumé of a candidate seeking to switch career fields. It uses a job title and immediately states a goal, followed by credentials.

1012

FIGURE R–10. Résumé (Experienced Applicant Seeking Career Change)

1013

Figure R–11 illustrates how an applicant can organize a résumé by combining functional and chronological elements.

1014

1015

1016

FIGURE R–11. Advanced Résumé (Combining Functional and Chronological Elements)

Analyzing Your Background In preparing to write your résumé, determine what kind of job

you are seeking. Rarely can you construct a one-size-fits-all

résumé: Potential employers will all look for something

different, and you will gain increasingly diverse experiences as

1017

you progress in your career. You may benefit from preparing a

few résumés with different emphases, and you may need to

create a unique résumé for a single position, using the language

of a particular job description as your guide. Review your

credentials and consider the following as you gather

information:

Schools you attended, degrees you hold, your major field of study, academic honors you were awarded, your grade point average, selected academic projects that reflect your best work, continuing education, conferences or seminars you have attended Jobs you have held, your principal and secondary duties in each job, when and how long you held each job, promotions you received, skills you developed in your jobs that a potential employer may value and seek in the ideal candidate, projects or accomplishments that reflect important contributions Other experiences and skills you have developed that would be of value for the job you seek: extracurricular activities that have contributed to your learning experience, leadership assignments you have accepted, interpersonal and communication skills you have developed (speeches, presentations, classes given), collaborative work you have performed, publications you have contributed to, computer skills you have acquired or specialized programs in which you are proficient, languages you speak, notable awards or other types of recognition

Use this information to brainstorm further details and personal

1018

attributes. Then, based on all the details, decide which to

include in your résumé and how you can most effectively

present your qualifications.

Returning Job Seekers If you are returning to the workplace after an absence, most

career experts say that it is important to acknowledge the gap in

your career. If you are reentering the workforce because you

have devoted a full-time period to care for children or

dependent adults, do not undervalue such work. Although

unpaid, this experience often develops important time-

management, problem-solving, organizational, and

interpersonal skills. Although gaps in employment can be

explained in the application cover letter, the following

examples illustrate how you might reflect such experiences in a

résumé. These samples would be especially appropriate for an

applicant seeking employment in a field related to child or

health care.

► Primary Child-Care Provider, 2015–2017 Provided full- time care to three preschool children at home. Facilitated early learning activities; taught basic academic skills, nutrition, arts, and swimming. Organized schedules and events, managed the household, and served as Neighborhood-Watch Captain.

► Home Caregiver, 2015–2017 Provided 60 hours per week in-home care for Alzheimer’s patient. Coordinated health- care and medical appointments, developed and supervised

1019

exercise programs, completed and processed complex medical forms, administered medications, organized and maintained budgets, and managed home environment.

If you have performed volunteer work during such a period, list

that experience. Volunteer work often results in the same

experience as does full-time, paid work, a fact that your résumé

should reflect, as in the following example:

► School Association Coordinator, 2015–2017 Managed special activities of the high school Parent-Teacher Association. Planned and coordinated meetings, scheduled events, and supervised fund-drive operations. Raised $70,000 toward refurbishing the school auditorium.

Organizing Your Résumé (Sections) The following résumé sections and section headings are typical

and, depending on the subject matter, may use alternative

terminology, as shown in the following list. The sections you

choose and the order in which you list them should depend on

your experience, your goals, the employer’s needs, and any

standard practices in your profession.

Heading (name and contact information) Job Objective vs. Headline Qualifications Summary (Professional Profile, Key Attributes) Education (Academic Background, Certifications)

1020

Employment Experience (Career History, Career Chronology) Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities (Professional Affiliations, Volunteer Work, Networking Assets) Honors and Activities (Awards, Recognition, Notable Contributions, Volunteer Work, Publications, Affiliations) References and Portfolios

There really is no right or wrong way to organize your résumé,

and any number of organizational patterns can be effective. For

example, whether you place “education” before “employment

experience” depends on the job you are seeking. Organize your

information in the sequence that emphasizes the credentials

that will strengthen your résumé. A recent graduate without

much work experience should list education first. A candidate

with many years of job experience, including jobs directly

related to the target position, may decide to list employment

experience first. When you list information in the education

and employment sections, use a reverse chronological order:

most recent employer or credential first, the next most recent

experience second, and so on.

Heading At the top of your résumé, include your name, the best number

where you can be reached, professional e-mail address, and

links to social-media sites where you have a professional

presence. Make sure that your name stands out on the page. If

you are in transition, list the city, state, and ZIP codes of your

1021

residence(s), along with relevant telephone numbers and e-mail

addresses underneath your name (see Figure R-6). You can omit

your street address for privacy reasons.

Job Objective vs. Headline Hiring managers spend mere seconds for the initial résumé

review, so your career goal should be immediately evident. Job

objectives and résumé headlines (or taglines) both introduce

the material and help the reader quickly understand your

reason for seeking a certain position. An objective is a narrative

statement about the type of job that interests you, and it can

include your career level and credentials. A headline is similar

to a newspaper headline and is meant to quickly grab the

employer’s attention. A headline contains a brief description of

your job target and one or two of your strongest qualifications.

A headline can provide visual impact, especially if it appears as

a banner near the top of your résumé (see Figure R–8). The

following examples illustrate the difference between objectives

and headlines.

SAMPLE OBJECTIVE STATEMENTS

► A computer-science position aimed at solving online security vulnerabilities.

► A position involving meeting the concerns of women, such as family planning, career counseling, or crisis management.

► A programming internship requiring software- development and debugging skills.

1022

SAMPLE JOB TITLE AND HEADLINE COMBINATIONS

► FINANCIAL SERVICES / BANKING PROFESSIONAL Ensuring the Financial Success of Customers, Clients, and Communities

► MECHANICAL ENGINEER Developing Innovative, Efficient, Environmentally Friendly Energy Solutions

► FIREFIGHTER / EMT Prevention, Mitigation, Response or Protecting Life, Property, and the Environment

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

If you include an objective on your résumé, avoid using clichés, such as “seeking a challenging opportunity with potential for advancement” and other overused statements.

Qualifications Summary Include a brief summary of your qualifications to persuade

hiring managers to select you for an interview. Sometimes

called a professional profile, summary statement, or career

summary, a qualifications summary can include skills,

expertise, experience, or personal qualities that make you

especially well suited to the position. You may give this section

a unique heading or simply use a job title, as shown in Figures

R–10 and R–11.

Education List the school(s) you have attended, the degree(s) you received

and the dates you received them, your major field(s) of study,

1023

and any academic honors you have earned. Most career-

development professionals recommend that you include your

grade point average (GPA) only if it is 3.0 or higher. Omit your

GPA if you earned your degree long ago and are focusing on

experience rather than education. List individual courses if they

are unusually impressive, if they provide the opportunity to

include keywords, if they are relevant to your career goals, or if

your résumé is otherwise sparse (see Figure R–8). Consider

including any special skills developed or projects completed in

your course work. Mention high school only if you do not

possess higher education or if you want to call attention to

special high school achievements, awards, projects, programs,

internships, or study abroad.

Employment Experience Organize your employment experience in reverse chronological

order, starting with your most recent job and working backward

under a single heading. You can also organize your experience

functionally, by clustering similar types of jobs into several

sections with specific section headings, such as “Management,”

“Leadership,” “Administration,” or “Logistics.”

Depending on the situation, one type of arrangement might

be more persuasive than the other. For example, if you are

applying for an accounting job but have no employment

experience in accounting, simply list past and present jobs in

reverse chronological order (most recent to least recent). If you

are applying for a supervisory position and have had three

1024

supervisory jobs in addition to two nonsupervisory positions,

you could create a section heading called “Supervisory

Experience” and list the three supervisory jobs, followed by

another section labeled “General Experience” to include the

nonsupervisory jobs.

In general, consider the following guidelines when working

on the “Experience” section of your résumé:

Include jobs or internships when they relate directly to the position you are seeking. Including such experiences can make a résumé more persuasive if they have helped you develop relevant skills. Include extracurricular experiences, such as taking on a leadership position in a college organization or directing a community-service project, if they demonstrate the skills valued by a potential employer. List military service as a job, even though the occupational specialties may not be directly applicable to the positions for which you are applying. Give the dates served, the duty specialty, and the rank at discharge. Discuss military duties if they relate to the job you are seeking, and translate military terminology to be easily understood by hiring managers. For each job or experience, list both the job title and the employer name. Throughout each section, consistently begin with either the job or the company name, depending on which will likely be more impressive to potential employers. Under each job or experience, provide a concise

1025

description of your accomplishments. By listing your accomplishments and quantifying them with numbers, percentages, or monetary value, you will let the employer know what separates you from the competition. That said, do not omit job duties entirely; employers still want to see the scope of your responsibilities. A good strategy for organizing both duties and responsibilities is to create a brief paragraph outlining your responsibilities, followed by a bulleted list of your strongest accomplishments in the position. Focus as much as possible on your achievements in your work history. (“Increased employee retention rate by 16 percent by developing a training program.”) Employers will picture themselves as benefiting from the same types of accomplishments. Use action verbs (“managed,” “supervised,” “developed,” “achieved,” “analyzed”). Be consistent when using past or present tense. Even though the résumé is about you, do not use “I” (for example, instead of “I was promoted to Section Leader,” use “Promoted to Section Leader”).

Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities Employers are interested in hiring applicants with a variety of

skills or the ability to learn new ones quickly. Depending on the

position, you might list such items as fluency in foreign

languages, writing and editing abilities, specialized technical

knowledge, or computer skills (including knowledge of specific

languages, software, and hardware).

1026

Honors and Activities List any honors and unique activities near the end of your

résumé unless they are exceptionally notable or would be more

persuasive for a particular objective. Include items such as

student or community activities, professional or club

memberships, awards received, and published works. Do not

duplicate information given in other categories, and include

only information that supports your employment objective. Use

a heading for this section that fits its contents, such as

“Activities,” “Honors,” “Professional Affiliations,”

“Memberships,” or “Publications.”

References and Portfolios Avoid specifying on your résumé that references are available

unless that is standard practice in your profession or your

résumé is sparse. Employers assume that a well-prepared job

seeker will provide a list of professional references. Create a

separate list of references in the same format design and layout

as your résumé, and be ready to provide this page to

prospective employers during the interview. Always seek

permission from anyone you list.

A portfolio is a collection of samples in a binder or on a Web

site of your most impressive work and accomplishments. The

portfolio can include successful documents you have produced,

letters of praise from employers, copies of awards and

certificates, and samples of your work. You can include the

phrase “Portfolio available on request” in your résumé. If

1027

portfolios are standard in your profession, you might even

include a small section that outlines the contents of your

portfolio.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Avoid listing your desired salary on the résumé. You could price yourself out of a job you want if the salary you list is higher than a potential employer is willing to pay, or you might not get the best possible offer if you list a low one.

Digital Formats and Media Once you have developed a strong résumé, consider adapting it

for multiple media and digital formats.

E-mail–Attached Résumés An employer may request that you submit a résumé attached to

an e-mail. If a file-format preference is not specified, send the

résumé in Adobe PDF or MS Word format. Then attach the file,

and treat the e-mail-message body as your cover letter.

Applicant Tracking System Résumés When you submit your résumé via e-mail or to an employer’s

Web site, it may be added to an electronic applicant tracking

system (ATS). These systems parse, store, manage, and rank

résumés based on criteria specified by the hiring manager.

Although these systems vary, some guidelines are universal:

1028

Avoid fancy graphics and icons, because they will not be readable. Choose common titles for headers, such as “Professional Experience” and “Education.” Incorporate keywords that are relevant to your career field in descriptions, but avoid a separate “Keyword” section that wastes valuable space. Use a consistent format in the placement of employer names and job titles.

In general, when developing your résumé for an ATS, try

thinking like a computer, and focus on logic and consistency.

Plain-Text Résumés Some employers request ASCII or plain-text résumés via e-mail

or their Web site, enabling the file to be easily added to résumé

databases. ASCII résumés allow employers to read the file no

matter what type of software they are using. You can copy and

paste a plain-text résumé directly into the body of an e-mail

message. To create an ASCII résumé, look for an option to “Save

as” plain text in your word-processing program. After you save

as a text file with a .txt extension, reopen the file in a text editor

(such as Notepad for PCs or TextWrangler for Macs) and clean

up the file as needed. For more, visit resumepower.com/ascii-

resumes.html.

Scannable Résumés A scannable-résumé format is a paper document that you mail

to the employer. After it is received, the document will be

1029

scanned into an automated program and then downloaded into

the company’s searchable database. For such résumés, avoid

decorative fonts, underlining, shading, letters that touch each

other, or other features that will not scan easily. Before

sending, scan the résumé yourself to make sure that it is legible.

Web-Posted Résumés You can use a personal Web site to post your résumé and

display other items that portray your value as a candidate, such

as awards and samples of your work. You can list a link to your

Web site in your candidate documents and correspondence

with prospective employers. For such Web sites, keep the

following in mind:

Follow the general advice for writing for the Web, and view your résumé and materials on several browsers. Consider building a multipage site for displaying a work portfolio, publications, reference letters, and other related materials. Provide just below your name a series of internal page links to such important categories as “experience” and “education.” Do not include your phone number or home address on the Web site — include an e-mail “contact link” that prospective employers and recruiters can use to reach you. Do not advertise that you are actively seeking a job if you are currently employed; if your employer learns about your search, your job could be in jeopardy. Post copies of your résumé in various file formats so that

1030

employers can select the best format for their needs.

If you do not have your own Web site, you can upload your files

to an online cloud storage service, such as Dropbox

(www.dropbox.com), and send employers the link to your

folder.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

When applying for a position within the U.S. government, America’s largest employer, make sure your résumé’s content and style are suitable for a federal application. Protocol for your federal résumé varies depending on the specific agency you are targeting, but your résumé must address how your qualifications match the requirements outlined in the vacancy announcement. Kathyrn Troutman provides excellent resources for preparing federal résumés (visit www.resume- place.com/fedresblog/federal-resume-writing). See also job search.

A detailed résumé for someone in an academic or a scientific area is often called a curriculum vitae (also vita or c.v.). It may include education, publications, projects, grants, and awards, as well as a full work history. Outside the United States, the term curriculum vitae is often used to mean résumé.

2

1031

revision When you revise your draft, read and evaluate it primarily from

the point of view of your audience. In fact, revising requires a

different frame of mind than writing a draft. To achieve that

frame of mind, experienced writers have developed the

following tactics:

Allow a “cooling period” between writing the draft and revising in order to evaluate the draft objectively. Read your draft aloud — often, hearing the text will enable you to spot problems that need improvement. Revise in passes by reading through your draft several times, each time searching for and correcting a different set of problems.

When you can no longer spot improvements, you may wish to

give the draft to a colleague for review — especially for projects

that are crucial for you or your organization as well as for

collaborative projects, as described in collaborative writing.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Revising Your Draft

✓ Completeness. Does the document achieve its primary purpose? Will it fulfill the readers’ needs? Your writing should give readers exactly what they need but not overwhelm them.

✓ Appropriate introduction and conclusion. Check to see that your introduction frames the rest of the document and that your

1032

conclusion ties the main ideas together. Both should account for revisions to the content of the document.

✓ Accuracy. Look for any factual inaccuracies in your draft. ✓ Unity and coherence. Check to see that sentences and ideas are

closely tied together (coherence) and contribute directly to the main idea expressed in the topic sentence of each paragraph (unity). Provide transitions where they are missing, and strengthen those that are weak.

✓ Consistency. Make sure that layout and design and visuals are consistent. Refer to the same items with the same terms throughout.

✓ Conciseness. Prune unnecessary words, phrases, sentences, and even paragraphs. Use the search-and-replace command to find and revise wordy phrases and unnecessary helping verbs. See conciseness.

✓ Awkwardness. Look for awkwardness in sentence construction — especially any garbled sentences.

✓ Ethical writing. Check for ethics in writing, and eliminate biased language.

✓ Active voice. Use the active voice unless the passive voice is more appropriate.

✓ Word choice. Check word choice, and eliminate affectation, clichés, vague words, and unnecessary intensifiers. Check for unclear pronoun references.

✓ Jargon. If you are unsure that all your readers will understand any jargon or special terms you have used, eliminate or define those words or terms.

✓ Grammar. Check for grammatical errors. Treat grammar checker recommendations as suggestions only.

✓ Typographical errors. Check your final draft for typographical errors both with your spell checker and with thorough proofreading.

1033

rhetorical questions A rhetorical question does not require a specific answer

because it is intended to make an audience think about the

subject from a different perspective. The answer to a rhetorical

question such as “Is space exploration worth the cost?” may not

be a simple yes or no; it might be a detailed explanation of the

pros and cons of space exploration.

Rhetorical questions can serve as effective titles or openings.

The writer or speaker may answer such questions in a

presentation, newsletter article, or blog. (See blogs and

forums.) However, rhetorical questions should be used

judiciously in other, more formal documents. A rhetorical

question, for example, would not be appropriate for the title of

a report or an e-mail addressed to a manager who needs to

quickly understand the subject and purpose of the document or

message.

1034

run-on sentences A run-on sentence, sometimes called a fused sentence, is two or

more sentences without punctuation to separate them. The

term is also sometimes applied to a pair of independent clauses

separated by only a comma, although this variation is usually

called a comma splice. See also sentence construction and

sentence faults.

1035

S

1036

sales letters A sales letter — print or digital correspondence that promotes a

product, service, or business — requires both a thorough

knowledge of the product or service and an understanding of

the potential customer’s needs.

An effective sales letter (1) catches readers’ attention, (2)

engages their interest, (3) convinces them that your product or

service will fulfill a need or desire, and (4) confidently asks

them to take the course of action you suggest. See also

persuasion, promotional writing, and tone.

Your first task in writing a sales letter is to determine to

whom your message should be sent. One good source is a list of

your customers or clients. Other sources are lists of people who

may be interested in similar products or services. Companies

that specialize in marketing compile lists from professional

associations, trade shows, and the like. Because outside lists

may be expensive, select them with care.

Sales letters sent by e-mail are often more economical than

print options, especially for large groups of potential and

existing customers. If you choose e-mail as a medium, however,

consider laws related to e-mail marketing, such as the CAN-

SPAM act (www.ftc.gov/tips-advice/business-

center/guidance/can-spam-act-compliance-guide-business).

Consider as well that e-mail offers the ability to include

multimedia (such as video and purchase links), but it also

1037

requires that content be kept targeted and short. See also

selecting the medium.

Once you determine who is to receive your sales letter, learn

as much as you can about your readers so that you can

effectively tell them how your product or service will satisfy

their needs. Knowledge of your audience — their gender, age,

vocation, geographic location, educational level, financial

status, and interests — will help determine your approach.

Analyze your product or service carefully to determine your

strongest psychological sales points. Psychological selling

involves stressing a product’s benefits, which may be

intangible, rather than its physical features. Select the most

important psychological selling point about your product or

service, and build your sales message around it. Show how your

product or service will make your readers’ jobs easier, increase

their status, make their personal lives more pleasant, and so on.

Then describe the physical features of your product in terms of

their benefit to your readers. Use photos and Web links to help

your readers imagine themselves using and enjoying your

product or service. See also “you” viewpoint.

ETHICS NOTE

Be certain that any claim you make in a sales message is valid. To claim that a product is safe guarantees its absolute safety; therefore, say that the product is safe “provided that normal safety precautions are taken.” Further, although you can highlight differences, do not

1038

exaggerate or speak negatively about a competitor. For further ethical and legal guidelines, visit the Data & Marketing Association Web site at thedma.org. See also ethics in writing.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing Sales Letters

✓ Attract your readers’ attention and pique their interest in the opening — for example, by describing a product’s feature that would appeal strongly to their needs. See also introductions.

✓ Convince readers that your product or service is everything you say it is through case histories, free-trial use, money-back guarantee, or testimonials and endorsements. (For advice, see www.ftc.gov.)

✓ Suggest ways readers can make immediate use of the product or service. Include a brochure or a Web link with photos or videos.

✓ Minimize the negative effect price can have on readers.

Mention the price along with a reminder of the benefits of the product. State the price in terms of units rather than sets ($20 per item, not $600 per set). Identify the daily, monthly, or even yearly cost based on the estimated life of the product. Suggest a series of payments rather than one total payment. Compare the cost of your product with that of something readers accept readily. (“This entire package costs no more than a dinner and a concert.”)

✓ Make it easy and worthwhile for customers to respond: Include instructions for ordering online or by phone, information about

1039

free delivery, or special discount codes. ✓ Include links to social media, and invite readers to become part

of the conversation and community surrounding the product, service, or brand.

1040

scope Scope is the depth and breadth of detail you include in a

document as defined by your audience’s needs, your purpose,

and the context. (See also audience.) For example, if you write

a trip report about a routine visit to a company facility, your

readers may need to know only the basic details and any

unusual findings. However, if you prepare a trip report about a

visit to a division that has experienced problems and your

purpose is to suggest ways to solve those problems, your report

will contain many more details, observations, and even

recommendations.

You should determine the scope of a document during the

preparation stage of the writing process, even though you may

refine it later. Defining your scope will expedite your research

and can help determine team members’ responsibilities in

collaborative writing.

Your scope will also be affected by the type of document you

are writing, as well as the medium you select for your message.

For example, funding organizations often prescribe the general

content and length for proposals, and some organizations set

length limits on other documents. See selecting the medium

and “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

1041

selecting the medium Selecting the most appropriate medium (or channel) for

communicating in the workplace depends on a wide range of

factors related to your audience, purpose, and context. Those

factors include the following:

The audience’s preferences and expectations The organization’s practices and policies How widely information needs to be distributed The urgency of the communication The sensitivity or confidentiality required Your own most effective communication style

As this list suggests, choosing the best medium may involve

personal considerations as well as the essential functions of the

medium. If you need to collaborate with someone to solve a

problem, for example, you may find e-mail exchanges less

effective than a phone call or face-to-face meeting. If you need

precise wording or a record of a complex or sensitive message,

however, a written medium is often essential.

Many of the following media and forms of communication

overlap and evolve as technology develops. Understanding their

basic functions will help you select the most appropriate

medium for your needs. See Figure S–1 for a table summarizing

the media discussed in this entry. See also adapting to new

technologies.

1042

FIGURE S–1. Choosing the Appropriate Medium

1043

E-mail E-mail functions as a primary medium to communicate and

share files with colleagues, clients, and customers. Although e-

mail may function as informal notes, e-mail messages should

follow the writing strategy and style described in

correspondence. All e-mail requires special review because

recipients can easily forward messages and attachments and

because e-mail messages are subject to legal disclosure.

Memos Memos are appropriate for internal communication among

members of the same organization, especially those who do not

have ready access to e-mail (for example, employees in

manufacturing or service industries). They use a standard

header and are sent on paper or as attachments to e-mails.

Memos can instruct employees, announce policies, report

results, disseminate information, and delegate responsibilities.

Letters Business letters with handwritten signatures are often

appropriate for formal communications with professional

associates or customers outside an organization. Letters on

organizational letterhead communicate formality, respect, and

authority. Letters are used with job applications, for

recommendations, and in other official and social contexts.

1044

Text and Instant Messages Text messaging, or texting, is the exchange of brief written

messages between mobile phones. Text messaging is effective

for simple messages communicated between people on the

move or in nontraditional work spaces.

Instant messaging (IM) on a computer or handheld device is

an efficient way to communicate brief written exchanges in real

time with coworkers, suppliers, and customers. Instant

messaging requires that recipients are ready and available to

participate in an immediate exchange of messages.

Phone Calls and Voice Messages Phone calls are best used for exchanges that require substantial

interaction and the ability of participants to interpret each

other’s tone of voice. They are useful for discussing sensitive

issues and resolving misunderstandings, although they do not

provide the visual cues present during face-to-face meetings. Be

careful when using a cell phone in public places, and follow

appropriate etiquette and organizational policies. See “Web

Conferences and Videoconferences” on page 491.

Should you need to leave a voice-mail message, it should be

clear and brief. (“I got your package, so you don’t need to call

the distributor.”) For complicated messages, use another

medium, such as e-mail.

1045

Faxes A fax is used when a document — like a drawing or a signed

contract — must be viewed in its original form. Faxing is used

when scanning is not an option or when a faxed document is

requested. Fax machines are often located in shared areas, so

let the intended recipient know before you send confidential or

sensitive information. A cover sheet should include the name of

the recipient and the number of pages in the document.

Meetings and Conference Calls In-person meetings with individuals are most appropriate with

an associate or a client with whom you intend to develop an

important, long-term relationship. A face-to-face meeting may

also be useful to help establish rapport, interview someone on a

complex topic, solve a technical problem, or handle a

controversial issue.

Group or committee meetings may be best for

brainstorming, collaborating on a complex topic, and reaching

decisions. A teleconference (or conference call) among three or

more participants is an inexpensive alternative to face-to-face

meetings requiring travel. The person coordinating the call

should provide an agenda to all the participants and direct the

discussion. For advice on how to record discussions and

decisions, see minutes of meetings.

Web Conferences and Video 1046

Conferences These conferences may be used for committee meetings when

participants are geographically separated, for small groups

working on a specific problem, for numerous participants in

training, or for educational seminars (referred to as webinars).

Participants can be connected through downloaded

applications. Web conferences may be enhanced with phone

connections and video applications, like Google Meet,

GoToMeeting, or WebEx.

More formal videoconferences with high-end equipment

often require professional services. These work best with

participants who are at ease in front of the camera, and such

conferences should be carefully planned, with technical

support staff available.

Web Networking and Promotion A company intranet Web site is ideal for sharing documents and

files — including announcements and policies and procedures

— within an organization. An intranet site can serve not only as

a home base for resources like company directories and

newsletters but also as a place where ideas can be developed

through, for example, discussion boards and wikis.

A company’s public Web site can provide sales and product

information as well as information about an organization and

opportunities to foster contacts with customers and clients.

1047

Such sites may include new-product announcements, press

releases, FAQs, manuals, product or service reviews, blogs and

forums, employment opportunities, and requests for proposals.

See also writing for the Web.

Using social media sites can help individuals and

organizations cultivate professional contacts and promote

products and services. Networks for professionals, such as

LinkedIn, aim to connect individuals and groups with common

interests. Organizations may use social networking sites like

Facebook to market their products and services as well as to

enhance their brand identity. See also job search.

1048

semicolons The semicolon (;) links independent clauses or other sentence

elements of equal weight and grammatical rank when they are

not joined by a comma and a conjunction. The semicolon

indicates a greater pause between clauses than does a comma

but not as great a pause as a period.

Independent clauses joined by a semicolon should balance or

contrast with each other, and the relationship between the two

statements should be so clear that further explanation is not

necessary.

► The new Web site was a success; every division reported increased online sales.

Do not use a semicolon between a dependent clause and its

main clause.

With Strong Connectives In complicated sentences, a semicolon may be used before

transitional words or phrases (that is, for example, namely) that

introduce examples or further explanation. See also transition.

► The press understands Commissioner Curran’s position on the issue; that is, local funds should not be used for the highway project.

1049

A semicolon should also be used before conjunctive adverbs

(therefore, moreover, consequently, furthermore, indeed, in

fact, however) that connect independent clauses.

► The test results are not complete; therefore, I cannot make a recommendation. [The semicolon in the example shows that therefore belongs to the second clause.]

For Clarity in Long Sentences Use a semicolon between two independent clauses connected

by a coordinating conjunction (and, but, for, or, nor, so, yet) if

the clauses are long and contain other punctuation.

► In most cases, these individuals are executives, bankers, or lawyers; but they do not, as the press seems to believe, simply push the button of their economic power to affect local politics.

A semicolon may also be used if any items in a series contain

commas.

► Among those present were John Howard, president of the Omega Paper Company; Carol Delgado, president of Environex Corporation; and Larry Stanley, president of Stanley Papers.

Use parentheses or dashes, not semicolons, to enclose a

parenthetical element that contains commas.

► All affected job classifications (receptionist, assistant,

1050

transcriptionist, and clerk) will be upgraded this month.

Use a colon, not a semicolon, as a mark of anticipation or

enumeration.

► Three decontamination methods are under consideration; a zeolite-resin system, an evaporation system, and a filtration system.

The semicolon always appears outside closing quotation

marks.

► The attorney said, “You must be accurate” ; her client replied, “I will.”

1051

sentence construction DIRECTORY

Subjects Predicates Sentence Types Constructing Effective Sentences

A sentence is the most fundamental and versatile tool available

to writers. Sentences generally flow from a subject to a verb to

any objects, complements, or modifiers, but they can be

ordered in a variety of ways to achieve emphasis. When shifting

word order, however, be aware that it can make a big difference

in the meaning of a sentence.

► He was only the accountant. [suggests importance] ► He was the only accountant. [defines the number]

The most basic components of sentences are subjects and

predicates.

Subjects The subject of a sentence is a noun or pronoun (and its

modifiers) about which the predicate of the sentence makes a

statement. Although a subject may appear anywhere in a

sentence, it most often appears at the beginning: “To increase

sales is our goal.” Grammatically, every sentence, except

1052

commands, must have an explicit subject that agrees with its verb in number.

► These departments have much in common. ► This department has several functions.

The subject is the actor in sentences using the active voice.

► The Webmaster reported an increase in site visits for May.

A compound subject has two or more substantives (nouns or

noun equivalents) as the subject of one verb.

► The president and the treasurer agreed to begin the audit.

Predicates The predicate is the part of a sentence that makes an assertion

about the subject and completes the thought of the sentence.

► Bill has piloted the corporate jet.

The simple predicate is the verb and any helping verbs (has

piloted). The complete predicate is the verb and any modifiers,

objects, or complements (has piloted the corporate jet). A

compound predicate consists of two or more verbs with the

same subject.

► The company tried but did not succeed in that field.

Such constructions help achieve conciseness. A predicate

nominative is a noun construction that follows a linking verb

1053

and renames the subject.

► She is my attorney. [noun] ► His excuse was that he had been sick. [noun clause]

Sentence Types Sentences may be classified according to structure (simple,

compound, complex, or compound-complex); intention

(declarative, interrogative, imperative, or exclamatory); and

stylistic use (loose, periodic, or minor).

Structure A simple sentence consists of one independent clause. At its

most basic, a simple sentence contains only a subject and a

predicate.

► Profits [subject] rose [predicate].

A compound sentence consists of two or more independent

clauses connected by a comma and a coordinating conjunction,

by a semicolon, or by a semicolon and a conjunctive adverb.

► Drilling is the only way to collect samples of the layers of sediment below the ocean floor, but it is not the only way to gather information about these strata. [comma and coordinating conjunction]

► The chemical composition of seawater bears little resemblance to that of river water; the various elements are present in entirely different proportions. [semicolon]

► It was 500 miles to the site; therefore, we made

1054

arrangements to fly. [semicolon and conjunctive adverb]

A complex sentence contains one independent clause and at

least one dependent clause that expresses a subordinate idea.

► The generator will shut off automatically [independent clause] if the temperature rises above a specified point [dependent clause].

A compound-complex sentence consists of two or more

independent clauses plus at least one dependent clause.

► Productivity is central to controlling inflation [independent clause]; when productivity rises [dependent clause], employers can raise wages without raising prices [independent clause].

Intention A declarative sentence conveys information or makes a factual

statement. (“The motor powers the conveyor belt.”) An

interrogative sentence asks a direct question. (“Does the

conveyor belt run constantly?”) An imperative sentence issues a

command. (“Restart in SAFE mode.”) An exclamatory sentence

is an emphatic expression of feeling, fact, or opinion. It is a

declarative sentence that is stated with great feeling. (“The files

were deleted!”)

Stylistic Use A loose sentence makes its major point at the beginning and

then adds subordinate phrases and clauses that develop or

1055

modify that major point. A loose sentence could end at one or

more points before it actually does end, as the periods in

brackets illustrate in the following sentence:

► It went up[.], a great ball of fire about a mile in diameter[.], an elemental force freed from its bonds[.] after being chained for billions of years.

A periodic sentence delays its main ideas until the end by

presenting subordinate ideas or modifiers first.

► During the last century, the attitude of the American citizen toward automation underwent a profound change.

A minor sentence is an incomplete sentence that makes sense

in its context because the missing element is clearly implied by

the preceding sentence.

► In view of these facts, is the service contract really useful? Or economical?

Constructing Effective Sentences The subject-verb-object pattern is effective because it is most

familiar to readers. In “The company increased profits,” we

know the subject (company) and the object (profits) by their

positions relative to the verb (increased).

An inverted sentence places the elements in an unexpected

order, thus emphasizing the point by attracting the readers’

attention.

1056

► A better job I never had. [direct object-subject-verb] ► More optimistic I have never been. [subjective

complement-subject-linking verb] ► A poor image we presented. [direct object-subject-verb]

Use uncomplicated sentences to state complex ideas. If readers

have to cope with a complicated sentence in addition to a

complex idea, they are likely to become confused. Just as

simpler sentences make complex ideas more digestible, a

complex sentence construction makes a series of simple ideas

smoother and less choppy.

Avoid loading sentences with a number of thoughts

carelessly tacked together. Such sentences are monotonous and

hard to read because all the ideas seem to be of equal

importance. Rather, distinguish the relative importance of

sentence elements with subordination. See also garbled

sentences.

LOADED We started the program three years ago, only three members were on staff, and each member was responsible for a separate state, but it was not an efficient operation.

IMPROVED When we started the program three years ago, only three members were on staff, each responsible for a separate state; however, that arrangement was not efficient.

Express coordinate or equivalent ideas in similar form. The

structure of the sentence helps readers grasp the similarity of

its components, as illustrated in parallel structure.

1057

sentence faults A number of problems can create sentence faults, including

faulty subordination, clauses with no subjects, rambling

sentences, omitted verbs, and illogical assertions.

Faulty subordination occurs when a grammatically

subordinate element contains the main idea of the sentence or

when a subordinate element is so long or detailed that it

obscures the main idea. Both of the following sentences are

logical, depending on what the writer intends as the main idea

and as the subordinate element.

► Although the new filing system saves money, many of the staff are unhappy with it. [If the main point is that many of the staff are unhappy, this sentence is correct.]

► The new filing system saves money, although many of the staff are unhappy with it. [If the main point is that the new filing system saves money, this sentence is correct.]

In the following example, the subordinate element overwhelms

the main point.

FAULTY Because the noise level in the assembly area on a typical shift is as loud as a smoke detector’s alarm ten feet away, employees often develop hearing problems.

IMPROVED Employees in the assembly area often develop hearing problems because the noise level on a typical shift is as loud as a smoke detector’s alarm ten feet away.

Missing subjects occur when writers inappropriately assume a

1058

subject that they do not state in the clause. See also sentence

fragments.

INCOMPLETE Your application program can request to end the session after the next command. [Your application program can request who or what to end the session?]

COMPLETE Your application program can request the host program to end the session after the next command.

Rambling sentences contain more information than the reader

can comfortably absorb. The obvious remedy for a rambling

sentence is to divide it into two or more sentences. (See also

run-on sentences.) When you do that, put the main message of

the rambling sentence into the first of the revised sentences.

RAMBLING The payment to which a subcontractor is entitled should be made promptly in order that in the event of a subsequent contractual dispute we, as general contractors, may not be held in default of our contract by virtue of nonpayment.

DIRECT Pay subcontractors promptly. Then, if a contractual dispute occurs, we cannot be held in default of our contract because of nonpayment.

Missing verbs produce some sentence faults.

Faulty logic results when a predicate makes an illogical

assertion about its subject. “Mr. Wilson’s job is a sales

representative” is not logical, but “Mr. Wilson is a sales

representative” is logical. See also logic errors.

1059

sentence fragments A sentence fragment is an incomplete grammatical unit that is

punctuated as a sentence.

FRAGMENT And quit his job.

SENTENCE He quit his job.

A sentence fragment lacks either a subject or a verb or is a

subordinate clause or phrase. Sentence fragments are often

introduced by relative pronouns (who, whom, which, that) or

subordinating conjunctions (although, because, if, when,

while).

A sentence must contain a finite verb; verbals (nonfinite) do

not function as verbs. The following sentence fragments use

verbals (providing, to work) that cannot function as finite verbs.

FRAGMENT Providing all employees with disability insurance.

SENTENCE The company provides all employees with disability insurance.

FRAGMENT To work a 40-hour week.

SENTENCE Most of our employees must work a 40-hour week.

Explanatory phrases beginning with such as, for example, and

similar terms often lead writers to create sentence fragments.

1060

A hopelessly snarled fragment simply must be rewritten. To

rewrite such a fragment, pull the main points out of the

fragment, list them in the proper sequence, and then rewrite

the sentence as illustrated in garbled sentences. See also

sentence construction and sentence faults.

1061

sentence variety Sentences can vary in length, structure, and complexity. As you

revise, vary your sentences so that they do not become

tiresomely alike. See also sentence construction.

Sentence Length A series of sentences of the same length is monotonous, so

varying sentence length makes writing less tedious to the

reader. For example, avoid stringing together a number of

short independent clauses. Either connect them with a

subordinating connective, thereby creating a dependent clause,

or turn some clauses into separate sentences.

STRING The river is 63 miles long, and it averages 50 yards in width, and its depth averages 8 feet.

IMPROVED The river, which is 63 miles long and averages 50 yards in width, has an average depth of 8 feet.

IMPROVED The river is 63 miles long. It averages 50 yards in width and 8 feet in depth.

You can often effectively combine short sentences by

converting verbs into adjectives.

Although too many short sentences make your writing sound

choppy and immature, a short sentence can be effective

following a long one.

1062

► During the past two decades, many changes have occurred in American life — the extent, durability, and significance of which no one has yet measured. No one can.

In general, short sentences are good for emphatic, memorable

statements. Long sentences are good for detailed explanations

and support. Nothing is inherently wrong with a long sentence,

or even with a complicated one, as long as its meaning is clear

and direct. Sentence length becomes an element of style when

varied for emphasis or contrast; a conspicuously short or long

sentence can be used to good effect.

Word Order When a series of sentences all begin in exactly the same way

(usually with an article and a noun), the result is likely to be

monotonous. You can make your sentences more interesting by

occasionally starting with a modifying word, phrase, or clause.

► To salvage the project, she presented alternatives when existing policies failed to produce results. [modifying phrase]

However, overuse of this technique can itself be monotonous,

so use it in moderation.

Inverted word order can be an effective way to achieve

variety, but be careful not to create an awkward construction.

AWKWARD So good sales have never been.

1063

EFFECTIVE Never have sales been so good.

For variety, you can alter normal sentence order by inserting a

phrase or clause.

► Titanium fills the gap, both in weight and in strength, between aluminum and steel.

The technique of inserting a phrase or clause is good for

achieving emphasis, providing detail, breaking monotony, and

regulating pace.

Loose and Periodic Sentences A loose sentence makes its major point at the beginning and

then adds subordinate phrases and clauses that develop or

modify the point. A loose sentence could end at one or more

points before it actually ends, as the periods in brackets

illustrate in the following example:

► It went up[.], a great ball of fire about a mile in diameter[.], an elemental force freed from its bonds[.] after being chained for billions of years.

A periodic sentence delays its main idea until the end by

presenting modifiers or subordinate ideas first, thus holding the

readers’ interest until the end.

► During the last century, the attitude of Americans toward technology underwent a profound change.

1064

Experiment with shifts from loose sentences to periodic

sentences in your own writing, especially during revision.

Avoid the monotony of a long series of loose sentences,

particularly a series containing coordinate clauses joined by

conjunctions. Using subordination not only provides emphasis

but also makes your sentences more interesting.

1065

sequential method of development The sequential, or step-by-step, method of development is

especially effective for explaining a process or describing a

mechanism in operation. (See process explanation.) It is also

the logical method for writing instructions, as shown in Figure

S–2 and Figure I–6.

1066

FIGURE S–2. Sequential Method of Development

The main advantage of the sequential method of

development is that it is easy to follow because the steps

correspond to the process or operation being described. The

disadvantages are that it can become monotonous and does not

lend itself well to achieving emphasis.

1067

Most methods of development have elements of sequence to

a greater or lesser extent. The chronological method of

development, for example, is also sequential: To describe a trip

chronologically, from beginning to end, is also to describe it

sequentially. The cause-and-effect method of development

may contain certain elements of sequence. For example, a

report of the causes leading to an accident (the effect) might

describe those causes in the order they occurred (or their

sequence).

1068

service When used as a verb, service means “keep up or maintain” as

well as “repair.” (“Our company will service your equipment.”)

If you mean “provide a more general benefit,” use serve.

1069

set / sit Sit is an intransitive verb; it does not, therefore, require an

object. (“I sit by a window in the office.”) Its past tense is sat.

(“We sat around the conference table.”) Set is usually a

transitive verb, meaning “put or place,” “establish,” or

“harden.” Its past tense is set.

► Please set the supplies on the shelf. ► The jeweler set the stone carefully. ► Can we set a date for the meeting? ► The high temperature sets the epoxy quickly.

Set is occasionally an intransitive verb.

► The new adhesive sets in five minutes.

1070

shall / will Traditionally, shall was used to express the future tense with I

and we. Today, however, will is the generally accepted term.

Shall is commonly used today only in questions requesting an

opinion or a preference (“Shall we go?”) rather than a

prediction (“Will we go?”). It is also used in statements

expressing determination (“I shall return!”) or in formal

regulations that express a requirement (“Applicants shall

provide a proof of certification.”).

1071

slashes The slash (/) — also called slant line, diagonal, virgule, bar, and

solidus — both separates and shows omission. The slash can

indicate alternatives (“You may reach the customer service

department at 515-678-2278/2279”) or combinations (on/off

switch).

The slash often indicates omitted words and letters:

miles/hour (miles per hour); w/o (without)

In fractions and mathematical expressions, the slash

separates the numerator from the denominator (3/4 for three-

fourths; x/y for x over y).

Although the slash is used informally with dates (5/9/18),

avoid this form in business writing, especially in international

correspondence.

The forward slash often separates items in URLs (uniform

resource locators): inlandchorus.com/programs. The backward

slash is used to separate parts of file names: c:\ myfiles\ reports\

annual18.doc.

1072

so / so that / such Avoid so as a substitute for because. See also as / because /

since.

Do not replace the phrase so that with so or such that.

Such, an adjective meaning “of this or that kind,” should never

be used as a pronoun.

1073

social media Social media refers to Web sites or applications — such as

Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, and Instagram — that allow the

creation of online communities through which individuals and

organizations can create content, interact, and share

information. Accessed through Web browsers or mobile

devices, social-media platforms often incorporate instant

messaging and e-mail components, and many have blogs and

forums that allow for comments, links to other Web sites, and

the collection of information that is of interest to the

community.

Social media plays several vital roles in professional

communication. It can help job seekers establish a professional

presence and network and help companies communicate more

easily with stakeholders.

On an individual level, you can use accounts on sites such as

LinkedIn and Twitter to develop your presence within your field

to connect with colleagues. When you create accounts on these

sites, your profile, including your profile picture, should be

consistent to make it easier for potential employers and

colleagues to find you. Your profile and postings should also be

professional in tone; if you have used social media primarily for

personal reasons, you may wish to create separate accounts that

are focused on your work. You can also use social media for

active networking. Many industries and professional

1074

organizations have established conversations around Twitter

hashtags (such as #SmallBizChat, #IMCchat, and

#womenintech) and meet at regularly scheduled times to

discuss current events and mentoring needs.

Many organizations employ writers to maintain their social-

media accounts in order to connect with their clients, share

information about their products, and reach new customers.

Social media can help organizations promote goodwill, resolve

problems, and obtain near-instant feedback on their products

and services.

Choosing the Appropriate Platforms When you or your organization chooses which social-media

platforms to join, consider both what you hope to accomplish

and which platforms reach more of your target customers or

contacts. For example, a manufacturing company might choose

a platform that focuses on users of products similar to its own,

whereas a service-oriented company might select a platform

that allows users to request and receive immediate assistance. A

small shop might choose several platforms for different

purposes, such as advertising images of its products on a

platform that is heavily image-based while participating in

another platform that allows the owner to build a professional

network.

1075

Two social-media characteristics — status updates and

networks — are particularly useful in the workplace. Status

updates, which include posts on Facebook and tweets on

Twitter, allow individuals or organizations to post brief

announcements or responses to questions. Once these status

updates are published, other accounts can immediately respond

to them. Networks allow one individual or organization to link

its company and products to another individual or organization.

By doing so, the two entities become “connected” in the social-

media community, allowing their posts to be intertwined into a

type of ongoing conversation. Figure S–3 provides an overview

of three popular social-media platforms of interest to

businesses and professionals and shows how each uses status

updates and networks to support its community.

1076

FIGURE S–3. Comparison of Social-Media Platforms

Before selecting a specific social-media platform, consider

the following:

Conversations within social media are impossible to control or pause. You must be willing to respond to the inquiries and comments, positive and negative, of other community members. Social-media platforms may demand significant time from

1077

account holders. Users of many platforms expect quick, ongoing responses and updates. If a crisis occurs, you must be willing and able to monitor the account outside of normal business hours. Communications within a social-media platform might have a wider audience than you intend, even though most platforms allow accounts to limit their audiences.

Writing Style and Privacy Considerations For writing style, follow both the practices of your organization

and the requirements of the selected social-media platform. Pay

close attention to the context, purpose, and audience of your

message, ensuring that your message is clear, precise, and free

of grammatical errors. See proofreading.

Posts in a social-media platform are immediately and often

widely shared among other community participants and

potentially on other, unassociated Web sites. For this reason,

consider both the benefit of your post to your immediate

audience and the potential implications of that post to those

outside your social-media network. Although many platforms

are considered “informal” and used primarily for personal

communication, the ability of writing to be shared throughout a

given network demands that you consider how your

contributions represent you professionally. Organizations often

review the social-media profiles of their applicants as part of

the employment process. Other organizations employ services

1078

to monitor what is said about them online. Many organizations

have policies that prohibit employees from discussing the

workplace, even within a personal social-media account.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Judicious Use of Social Media

✓ Always consider the purpose and suitability of your contributions. Avoid contributions that publicly discuss topics better suited for one-on-one communication or that are considered divisive.

✓ Consider your posts to be available to everyone, and take into account how someone, such as your employer or school, might view your status update or shared picture.

✓ Follow your employer’s policies regarding social media. Attempting to circumvent policies — by using a mobile device to access a blocked site, for example — could result in severe penalties or even termination.

✓ Never comment about a job, an employer, or an instructor. Consider everything that you contribute to a social-media platform as available to the organization or individuals that you might be writing about.

✓ Carefully consider “friend” requests. Before establishing a connection, consider your organization’s policy, your professional relationship, and any potential current or future conflicts of interest.

✓ Have at least one public, professional social-media account, especially if you are searching for jobs. Many employers now search job candidates’ social-media accounts. If they cannot find you online, they may be suspicious that you are hiding something.

✓ Consider also the information in the Ethics Note in blogs and forums as you compose your message.

1079

some / somewhat When some functions as an indefinite pronoun for a plural

count noun or as an indefinite adjective modifying a plural

count noun, use a plural verb.

► Some of us are prepared to work overtime. ► Some people are more productive than others.

Some is singular, however, when used with mass nouns.

► Some sand has trickled through the crack.

When some is used as an adjective or a pronoun meaning “an

undetermined quantity” or “certain unspecified persons,” it

should be replaced by the adverb somewhat, which means “to

some extent.”

1080

some time / sometime / sometimes Some time refers to a duration of time. (“We waited for some

time before making the decision.”) Sometime refers to an

unknown or unspecified time. (“We will visit with you

sometime.”) Sometimes refers to occasional occurrences at

unspecified times. (“He sometimes visits the branch offices.”)

1081

spatial method of development The spatial method of development describes an object or a

process according to the physical arrangement of its features.

Depending on the subject, you describe its features from

bottom to top, side to side, east to west, outside to inside, and so

on. Descriptions of this kind rely mainly on dimension (height,

width, length), direction (up, down, north, south), shape

(rectangular, square, semicircular), and proportion (one-half,

two-thirds). Features are described in relation to one another or

to their surroundings, as illustrated in Figure S–4, which

provides the partial installation requirements for drinking

fountains that comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA). Such descriptions often benefit from visuals, such as

drawings, that can provide overviews and details, as is the case

in Figure S–4.

1082

FIGURE S–4. Spatial Description with Precise Measurements

SOURCE: access-board.gov/ufas-html/fig27a.html. Accessed May 10, 2012.

The spatial method of development might be used for

descriptions of warehouse inventory; proposals for landscape

work; construction-site progress and activity reports; and, in

combination with a step-by-step sequence, many types of

instructions.

1083

spelling Because spelling errors in your documents can confuse readers

and damage your credibility, careful proofreading is essential.

The use of a spell checker is crucial; however, it will not catch

all mistakes. A spell checker or an auto-correct function cannot

detect a spelling error if the error results in a valid word (to

inadvertently typed as too). If you are unsure about the spelling

of a word, consult a dictionary.

1084

spreadsheets A spreadsheet is an interactive computer application for the

organization, analysis, and storage of data in tabular form. (See

also tables.) A typical spreadsheet in Microsoft Excel contains

columns, rows, and cells, as shown in Figure S–5. The columns

from left to right across the top of a spreadsheet are labeled

with letters (A, B, C, and so on), and the rows at the far left of a

spreadsheet are sequenced from top to bottom numerically (1,

2, 3, and so on). A cell is the point at which one column and one

row meet, so it can be identified to match the column and the

number in the row (A1, B2, and so on). The data in the columns

and rows can be sorted (for example, A–Z or Z–A), manipulated

with various mathematical operations, and formatted or printed

as in a word-processing program.

FIGURE S–5. Spreadsheet

Spreadsheet programs like Excel offer a wide variety of

functions, options, and variations, so make use of the tutorials

built into the program for learning spreadsheet capabilities.

1085

Many colleges offer continuing education courses in the use of

spreadsheets, and workplaces often provide courses or experts

within the organization to help employees. The Web offers

many videos and tutorials, but the Microsoft Office Web site for

Excel is a useful starting point to connect with experts and other

users via live chat and blogs (products.office.com/en-us/excel).

Spreadsheets, or sections from them, can be printed and

integrated into reports and other documents, as described in

visuals. See also graphs.

1086

style A dictionary definition of style is “the way in which something

is said or done, as distinguished from its substance.” Writers’

styles are determined by the way writers think and express their

thoughts in writing — the way they use words, sentences,

images, figures of speech, and so on.

A writer’s style is the way his or her language functions in

particular situations. For example, an e-mail to a friend would

be relaxed, even chatty, in tone, whereas a job application

cover letter would be more restrained and formal. Obviously,

the style appropriate to one situation would not be appropriate

to the other. In both situations, the audience, purpose, and

context determine the manner or style the writer adopts.

Beyond an individual’s personal style, various kinds of writing

have distinct stylistic traits, such as business writing style.

Standard English can be divided into two broad categories of

style — formal and informal — according to how it functions in

certain situations. Understanding the distinction between

formal and informal writing styles helps writers use the

appropriate style. However, no clear-cut line divides the two

categories, and some writing may call for a combination of the

two. See also English, varieties of.

Formal Writing Style A formal writing style can perhaps best be defined by pointing

1087

to certain material that is clearly formal, such as scholarly and

scientific articles in professional journals, lectures read at

meetings of professional societies, and legal documents.

Material written in a formal style is usually the work of a

specialist writing to other specialists or writing that embodies

laws or regulations. As a result, the vocabulary is specialized

and precise. The writer’s tone is impersonal and objective

because the subject matter looms larger in the writing than does

the author’s personality. (See point of view.) A formal writing

style does not use contractions, slang, or dialect. Because the

material generally examines complex ideas, the sentence

construction may also be complex.

Formal writing need not be dull and lifeless. By using such

techniques as the active voice whenever possible, sentence

variety, and subordination, a writer can make formal writing

lively and interesting, especially if the subject matter is

inherently interesting to readers. In the following conclusion to

a historical study, a scholar reflects on jargon in business

writing.

► Compared to some of the problems that afflict business and administrative writing — poor organization, obfuscation, and lack of consideration for the reader — phrases such as “as per your request” are a minor ill. It is my own view, however, that texts and teachers should continue to urge students to avoid jargon. People in organizations who face the same situation repeatedly will use similar language to different correspondents; however,

1088

the repeated language can be standard English that is friendly and that makes literal sense. Jargon that is not part of spoken English distances the writer from the reader; jargon that does not make literal sense devalues language as communication.

— Kitty O. Locker, “ ‘As Per Your Request’: A History of

Business Jargon,” Journal of Business and Technical

Communication 1.1

Whether you should use a formal style in a particular instance

depends on your readers and purpose. When writers attempt to

force a formal style where it should not be used, their writing is

likely to fall victim to affectation, awkwardness, and

gobbledygook.

Informal Writing Style An informal writing style is a relaxed and colloquial way of

writing standard English. It is the style found in most personal

e-mail and in some business correspondence, blogs, and

promotional writing. (See also blogs and forums.) There is less

distance between the writer and the reader because the tone is

more personal than it is in formal writing. Consider the

following passage, written in an informal style, from a

nonfiction book on business management.

► Business, like art and science, has been revealed and conceived through the intellect and imagination of people, and it develops or declines because of the intellect and imagination of people.

1089

In fact, there is no business; there are only people.

Business exists only among people and for people.

Seems simple enough, and it applies to every aspect of

business, but not enough businesspeople seem to get it.

Reading the economic forecasts and the indicators and

the ratios and the rates of this or that, someone from

another planet might actually believe that there really are

invisible hands at work in the marketplace.

It’s easy to forget what the measurements are

measuring. Every number — from productivity rates to

salaries — is just a device contrived by people to measure

the results of the enterprise of other people. For managers,

the most important job is not measurement but motivation.

And you can’t motivate numbers.

— James A. Autry, Love and Profit: The Art of Caring

Leadership

As this example illustrates, the vocabulary of an informal

writing style is made up of generally familiar rather than

unfamiliar words and expressions, although slang and dialect

are usually avoided. An informal style approximates the

cadence and structure of spoken English while conforming to

the grammatical conventions of written English.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

1090

Writers who consciously attempt to create a distinctive style usually defeat their purpose. Attempting to impress readers with any specific style (casual, scientific, chatty, formal) can lead to affectation. Business writing need be neither affected nor dull. The key to a clear, direct, and even interesting style is to master basic writing skills and to keep your readers’ needs in mind. What will be both informative and interesting to your readers? When that question is uppermost in your mind as you apply the steps of the writing process, you will achieve an interesting and informative writing style. See “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Developing an Effective Style

✓ Use the active voice — not exclusively but as much as possible without allowing your writing to become awkward or illogical.

✓ Use parallel structure whenever a sentence or list presents two or more thoughts of equal importance.

✓ Vary sentence structure to avoid a monotonous style. ✓ Avoid stating positive thoughts in negative terms (write “40

percent responded” instead of “60 percent failed to respond”). See also ethics in writing, plain language, and positive writing.

✓ Concentrate on achieving the proper balance between emphasis and subordination.

Style guides, such as The Chicago Manual of Style and the

Associated Press Stylebook and Briefing on Media Law, provide

specific and sometimes varied advice for handling issues of

usage, style, and formats for citations, correspondence, and

1091

documents.

1092

subordination Subordination is the use of sentence structure to show the

appropriate relationship between ideas of unequal importance.

► Envirex Systems now employs 500 people. It was founded just three years ago. [The two ideas are equally important.]

► Envirex Systems, which now employs 500 people, was founded just three years ago. [The number of employees is subordinated; the founding date is emphasized.]

► Envirex Systems, which was founded just three years ago, now employs 500 people. [The founding date is subordinated; the number of employees is emphasized.]

Subordination allows you to emphasize your main idea by

putting less important ideas in subordinate clauses or phrases.

DEPENDENT CLAUSE

The regional manager’s report, which covered five pages, was carefully illustrated.

PHRASE The regional manager’s report, covering five pages, was carefully illustrated.

SINGLE MODIFIER

The regional manager’s five-page report was carefully illustrated.

Subordinating conjunctions (because, if, while, when,

although) achieve subordination effectively.

► An increase in local sales is unlikely because the local population has declined.

You may use a coordinating conjunction (and, but, for, nor, or,

1093

so, or yet) to concede that an opposite or a balancing fact is

true; however, a subordinating conjunction can often make the

point more smoothly.

► Although their bank has a lower interest rate on loans, ours provides a wider range of essential services.

The relationship between a conditional statement and a

statement of consequences is clearer if the condition is

expressed as a subordinate clause.

► Because the bill was incorrect, the customer was angry.

Relative pronouns (who, whom, which, that) can be used

effectively in subordinate clauses.

► OnlinePro, which protects computers from malicious programs, makes your system “invisible” to hackers.

Avoid subordinate constructions that overlap and depend on

the preceding construction. Overlapping can make the

relationship between a relative pronoun and its antecedent less

clear.

OVERLAPPING Shock, which often accompanies severe injuries and infections, is a failure of the circulation, which is marked by a fall in blood pressure that initially affects the skin (which explains pallor) and later the vital organs, such as the kidneys and brain.

CLEAR Shock often accompanies severe injuries and infections. Marked by a fall in blood pressure, it is a failure of the circulation, initially to the skin (thus producing pallor) and later to the vital organs like the kidneys, and brain.

1094

Effective subordination can be used to achieve conciseness,

emphasis, and sentence variety.

1095

suffixes A suffix is a letter or letters added to the end of a word to change

its meaning in some way. Suffixes can change the part of speech

of a word.

NO SUFFIX The proposal was thorough. [adjective]

SUFFIX The thoroughness is obvious. [noun]

SUFFIX The proposal thoroughly described the problem. [adverb]

The suffix -like is sometimes added to nouns to make them into

adjectives. The resulting compound word is hyphenated only if

it is unusual or might not immediately be clear (childlike,

lifelike, but dictionary-like, Friedman-like). See hyphens.

1096

surveys (see questionnaires)

1097

synonyms A synonym is a word that means nearly the same thing as

another word does (seller, vendor, supplier). The dictionary

definitions of synonyms are similar, but the connotations may

differ. For example, a seller may be the same thing as a

supplier, but the word supplier does not suggest a retail

transaction as strongly as the word seller does.

Do not try to impress your readers by finding fancy or

obscure synonyms in a thesaurus; the result is likely to be

affectation. See also connotation / denotation and antonyms.

1098

syntax Syntax refers to the way words, phrases, and clauses are

combined to form sentences. In English, the most common

structure is the subject-verb-object pattern. For more

information about the word order of sentences, see sentence

construction, sentence faults, sentence fragments, and

sentence variety.

1099

T

1100

tables A table organizes numerical and verbal data, such as statistics,

into parallel rows and columns that allow readers to make

precise item-to-item comparisons. Overall data/trends,

however, are more easily conveyed in graphs and other visuals.

Table Elements Tables typically include the elements shown in Figure T–1.

FIGURE T–1. Elements of a Table

Table Number Table numbers should be placed above tables and assigned

sequentially throughout the document.

1101

Table Title The title (or caption), which is normally placed just above the

table, should describe concisely what the table represents.

Box Head The box head contains the column headings, which should be

brief but descriptive. Units of measurement should be either

specified as part of the heading or enclosed in parentheses

beneath it. Standard abbreviations and symbols are acceptable.

Avoid vertical or diagonal lettering.

Stub The stub, the left vertical column of a table, lists the items about

which information is given in the body of the table.

Body The body comprises the data below the column headings and to

the right of the stub. Within the body, arrange columns so that

the items to be compared appear in adjacent rows and columns

for ease of comparison. (See Figure T–1.) Where no information

exists for a specific item, substitute a row of dots or a dash to

acknowledge the gap.

Rules Rules are the lines (or borders) that separate the table into its

various parts. Tables should include top and bottom borders.

Tables often include right and left borders, although they may

be open at the sides, as shown in Figure T–1. Generally, include

1102

a horizontal rule between the column headings and the body of

the table. Separate the columns with vertical rules within a

table only when they aid clarity.

Footnotes Footnotes are used for explanations of individual items in the

table. Symbols (such as and ) or lowercase letters (sometimes

in parentheses) rather than numbers are ordinarily used to

indicate table footnotes. Otherwise, numbers might be

mistaken for numerical data or could be confused with the

numbering system for text footnotes. See also documenting

sources.

Source Line The source line identifies where the data originated. When a

source line is appropriate, it appears below the table. Many

organizations place the source line below the footnotes. See also

copyright and plagiarism.

Continuing Tables When a table must be divided so that it can be continued on

another page, repeat the column headings and the table

number and title on the new page with a “continued” label (for

example, “Table 3. [title], continued”).

Informal Tables To list relatively few items that would be easier for the reader to

grasp in tabular form than in running text, you can use an

* †

1103

informal table, as long as you introduce it properly, as shown in

Figure T–2. Although informal tables do not need titles or table

numbers to identify them, they do require column headings

that accurately describe the information listed.

FIGURE T–2. Informal Table

1104

tables of contents A table of contents lists all the major sections of a long

document or Web site in their order of appearance. Tables of

contents allow readers to locate specific information quickly

and easily by referencing section page numbers in printed

documents or portable document format (PDF) files or by

clicking hyperlinks in Web content.

When creating a table of contents, use the major headings

and subheadings of your document exactly as they appear in the

text, as shown in the entry formal reports. (See the table of

contents in Figure F–6.) In print documents, the table of

contents is placed in the front matter following the title page

and abstract, and it precedes the list of tables or figures, the

foreword, and the preface. On large or complex Web sites, the

table of contents typically appears at the top of the first page.

1105

telegraphic style Telegraphic style condenses writing by omitting articles,

pronouns, conjunctions, and transitions. Although

conciseness is important, especially in instructions, writers

sometimes try to achieve conciseness by omitting necessary

words, thus producing misunderstandings. Compare the

following two passages and notice how much clearer the

revised version reads (the added words are italicized).

TELEGRAPHIC Per 5/21 e-mail, 12 instruction booklets/questionnaire enclosed. Report can be complete when above materials received. July filling quickly, so let’s set date. Pls advise.

CLEAR As promised in my May 21 e-mail, enclosed are 12 copies of the instruction booklet and the questionnaire. We can complete the report when we receive the questionnaires. Our July calendar is filling quickly, so please call me to set a meeting date as soon as possible.

Telegraphic style can also produce ambiguity, as the following

example demonstrates.

AMBIGUOUS The director wants report written by New York office.[Does the director want a report that the New York office wrote in the past, or does the director want the New York office to write a report in the future?]

CLEAR The director wants the report that was written by the New York office.

CLEAR The director wants the report to be written by the New York office.

PROFESSIONALISM NOTE

Although you may save yourself work by writing telegraphically, you may produce serious misunderstandings and make your readers work

1106

to decipher your meaning. Professional courtesy requires that you help your reader. Even when text messaging, make sure your reader will understand your meaning.

1107

tenant / tenet A tenant is a person who holds or temporarily occupies a

property owned by another person. (“The tenant was upset by

the rent increase.”) A tenet is an opinion or principle held by a

person, an organization, or a system. (“Competition is a central

tenet of capitalism.”)

1108

tense DIRECTORY

Past Tense Past Perfect Tense Present Tense Present Perfect Tense Future Tense Future Perfect Tense Shift in Tense

Tense is the grammatical term for verb forms that indicate time

distinctions. The six tenses in English are past, past perfect,

present, present perfect, future, and future perfect. Each tense

also has a corresponding progressive form.

TENSE BASIC FORM PROGRESSIVE FORM

Past I began I was beginning

Past perfect I had begun I had been beginning

Present I begin I am beginning

Present perfect I have begun I have been beginning

Future I will begin I will be beginning

Future perfect I will have begun I will have been beginning

Perfect tenses allow you to express a prior action or condition

that continues in a past, present, or future time.

PAST PERFECT I had begun to read the manual when the fire alarm rang.

PRESENT I have begun to write the annual report and will continue for the

1109

PERFECT rest of the month.

FUTURE PERFECT

I will have begun this project by the time funds are allocated.

Progressive tenses allow you to describe some ongoing action or

condition in the past, present, or future.

PAST PROGRESSIVE I was beginning to think we would not finish by the deadline.

PRESENT PROGRESSIVE

I am beginning to be concerned that we will not meet the deadline.

FUTURE PROGRESSIVE

I will be requesting a leave of absence when this project is finished.

Verbs that express mental activity (believe, know, see, and so

on) are generally not used in the progressive.

Past Tense The simple past tense indicates that an action took place in its

entirety in the past. The past tense is usually formed by adding

d or ed to the root form of the verb. (“We closed the office early

yesterday.”)

Past Perfect Tense The past perfect tense indicates that one past event preceded

another. It is formed by combining the helping verb had with

the past-participle form of the main verb. (“He had finished by

1110

the time I arrived.”)

Present Tense The simple present tense represents action occurring in the

present, without any indication of time duration. (“I ride the

train.”)

A general truth is always expressed in the present tense.

(“Time heals all wounds.”) The present tense can be used to

present actions or conditions that have no time restrictions.

(“Water boils at 212 degrees Fahrenheit.”) Similarly, the present

tense can be used to indicate habitual action. (“I pass the coffee

shop every day.”) The present tense is also used for the

“historical present,” as in newspaper headlines (“Dow Jones

Reaches a High for the Year”) or references to an author’s

opinion or a work’s contents—even if it was written in the past

and the author is no longer living. (“Orwell argues for plain

language in his 1946 essay.”)

Present Perfect Tense The present perfect tense describes something from the recent

past that has a bearing on the present—a period of time before

the present but after the simple past. The present perfect tense

is formed by combining a form of the helping verb have with

the past-participle form of the main verb. (“We have finished

the draft and can now revise it.”)

1111

Future Tense The simple future tense indicates a time that will occur after the

present. It uses the helping verb will (or shall) plus the main

verb. (“I will finish the job tomorrow.”) Do not use the future

tense needlessly; doing so merely adds complexity.

Future Perfect Tense The future perfect tense indicates action that will have been

completed at the time of or before another future action. It

combines will have and the past participle of the main verb.

(“She will have driven 1,400 miles by the time she returns.”)

Shift in Tense Be consistent in your use of tense. The only legitimate shift in

tense records a real change in time. Illogical shifts in tense will

only confuse your readers.

1112

text messaging Text messaging, or texting, refers to the delivery or exchange of

brief written messages between mobile phones over cellular

networks. Text messaging is effective for simple messages

communicated between people on the move or in

nontraditional workplaces. (“Client backup servers down.”)

Some text messages can include photographs, video, and other

digital files. As with your workplace e-mail, consider carefully

the content of your messages before sending them. For the real-

time exchange of brief messages, the phone or instant

messaging may be a better choice. See also selecting the

medium.

1113

that / which / who The word that is often overused and can foster wordiness.

However, include that in a sentence if it avoids ambiguity or

improves the pace.

Use which, not that, with nonrestrictive clauses (clauses that do

not change the meaning of the basic sentence).

NONRESTRICTIVE After John left the law firm, which is the largest in the region, he started a private practice.

RESTRICTIVE Companies that diversify usually succeed.

That and which should refer to animals and things; who should

refer to people.

► Dr. Cynthia Winter, who recently joined the clinic, treated a dog that was severely burned.

1114

there / their / they’re There is an expletive (a word that fills the position of another

word, phrase, or clause) or an adverb.

EXPLETIVE There were more than 1,500 people at the conference.

ADVERB More than 1,500 people were there.

Their is the possessive case form of they. (“Managers check

their e-mail regularly.”) They’re is a contraction of they are.

(“Clients tell us they’re pleased with our services.”)

1115

thesaurus A thesaurus lists synonyms and antonyms, which are arranged

alphabetically or retrievable by categories. Thoughtfully used, a

thesaurus can help refine your word choice during revision.

However, the variety of words it offers may tempt you to choose

an inappropriate word for the context or to use an obscure

synonym to impress your readers. (See affectation.) Never use

a word unless you are sure of its meanings; its connotations

might be unknown to you and could mislead your readers.

1116

titles Titles of documents are important because many readers

decide whether to read a report or message, for example, based

on its title. Titles are also crucial for filing and retrieving

documents. For advice on creating and using titles for figures

and tables, see visuals.

Reports and Long Documents Titles for reports, proposals, articles, and similar documents

should identify the document’s topic, reflect its tone, and

indicate its scope and purpose, as in the following:

► “Using Chaos Theory to Evaluate Small-Business Growth Management”

Such titles should be concise but not so short that they are not

specific. For example, the title “Chaos Theory and Small

Businesses” announces the topic and might be appropriate for a

book, but it does not answer important questions that readers of

an article would expect, such as “What does the article say

about the relationship between chaos theory and small

businesses?” and “What aspect of small businesses is related to

chaos theory?”

Avoid titles with such redundancies as “Notes on,” “Studies

on,” or “A Report on.” However, works like annual reports or

feasibility reports should be identified as such in the title

1117

because this information specifies the purpose and scope of the

report. For titles of progress and activity reports, indicate the

dates in a subtitle (“Quarterly Report on Hospital Admission

Rates: January–March 2018”). Avoid using technical shorthand,

such as chemical formulas, and other abbreviations in your

title unless the work is addressed exclusively to specialists in

the field. For multivolume publications, repeat the title on each

volume and include the subtitle and number of each volume.

Do not write titles in sentence form, except for titles of

articles in newsletters, magazines, and similar publications

that ask a rhetorical question: “Is Online Learning Right for

You?”

E-mail, Memos, and Online Postings Subject lines of e-mail messages, memos, and online postings

function as titles and should concisely and accurately describe

the topic of the message. Because recipients often use subject-

line titles to prioritize and sort their correspondence, such

titles must be specific.

VAGUE Subject: Tuition Reimbursement

SPECIFIC Subject: Tuition Reimbursement for Time-Management Seminar

Although the title in the subject line announces your topic, you

should still develop an opening that provides context for the

message. See blogs and forums.

1118

Formatting Titles Use the standards in this section for formatting titles unless you

are following a style that recommends otherwise.

Capitalization Capitalize the initial letters of the first and last words of a title,

as well as all major words in the title. Do not capitalize articles

(a, an, the), coordinating conjunctions (and, but), or short

prepositions (at, in, on, of) unless they begin or end the title

(The Lives of a Cell). Capitalize prepositions in titles if they

contain five or more letters (Between, Since, Until, After).

Italics Use italics or underlining when referring to titles of separately

published works, such as a book, periodical, newspaper,

pamphlet, brochure, legal case, movie, or television series.

► Turning Workplace Conflict into Collaboration [book] by Joyce Richards was reviewed in the New York Times.

Some style guides also recommend italicizing the titles of Web

sites and blogs (but not URLs).

► We will include links to the blog Gizmodo (http://gizmodo.com/) and to Consumer Reports Online (www.consumerreports.org).

Abbreviations of such titles are italicized if their spelled-out

forms would be italicized.

1119

► NEJM stands for the New England Journal of Medicine.

Italicize the titles of CDs, DVDs, plays, long poems, paintings,

sculptures, and long musical works.

Quotation Marks Use quotation marks when referring to parts of publications,

such as chapters of books and articles or sections within

periodicals or blogs.

► Her chapter titled “Effects of Government Regulations on Government Regulation and the Economy was discussed in a recent article, “No-Fault Insurance and Motorcycles?” published on the blog AmericanCycle.

Titles of reports, essays, short poems, short musical works

(including songs), short stories, and single episodes of radio and

television programs are also enclosed in quotation marks.

Special Cases Some titles, by convention, are not set off by quotation marks,

underlining, or italics. Such titles follow standard practice for

capitalization and the practice of the organization.

► Microsoft.com [Web site], Business Writing [college course title], Old Testament, Magna Carta, the Constitution, Lincoln’s Gettysburg Address, the Lands’ End Catalog

The treatment for Internet content, such as individual YouTube

videos, varies among documentation styles. See documenting

1120

sources.

1121

to / too / two To, too, and two are frequently confused because they sound

alike. To is used as a preposition or to mark an infinitive. See

verbs.

► Send the report to the district manager. [preposition] ► I do not wish to attend. [mark of the infinitive]

Too is an adverb meaning “excessively” or “also.”

► The price was too high. [excessively] ► I, too, thought it was high. [also]

Two is a number (two buildings, two concepts).

1122

tone Tone is the attitude a writer expresses toward the subject and

his or her readers. In workplace writing, tone may range widely

—depending on the purpose, situation, context, audience, and

even the medium of a communication. For example, in an e-

mail message to be read only by an associate who is also a

friend, your tone might be casual.

► Your proposal to Smith and Kline is super. We’ll just need to hammer out the schedule. If we get the contract, I owe you lunch!

In a message to your manager or superior, however, your tone

might be more formal.

► Your proposal to Smith and Kline is excellent. I have marked a couple of places where I’m concerned that we are committing ourselves to a schedule that we might not be able to keep. If I can help further, please let me know.

In a message that serves as a report to numerous readers, the

tone would be professional, without the more personal style

that you would use with an individual reader.

► The Smith and Kline proposal appears complete and thorough, based on our department’s evaluation. Several small revisions, however, would ensure that the company is not committing itself to an unrealistic schedule. These revisions are marked on the copy of the report attached to

1123

this message.

The word choice, the introduction, and even the title

contribute to the overall tone of your document. For instance, a

title such as “Ecological Consequences of Diminishing Water

Resources in California” clearly sets a different tone from

“What Happens When We’ve Drained California Dry?” The first

title would be appropriate for a report; the second title would be

more appropriate for a popular blog or newsletter article. See

also blogs and forums, business writing style, and

correspondence.

1124

transition Transition is the means of achieving a smooth flow of ideas

from sentence to sentence, paragraph to paragraph, and

subject to subject. Transition is a two-way indicator of what has

been said and what will be said; it provides readers with

guideposts for linking ideas and clarifying the relationship

between them.

Transition can be obvious.

► Having considered the benefits of a new facility, we move next to the question of adequate staffing.

Transition can be subtle.

► Even if this facility can be built at a reasonable cost, there still remains the issue of adequate staffing.

Either way, you now have your readers’ attention fastened on

the problem of adequate staffing, which is exactly what you set

out to do.

Methods of Transition Transition can be achieved in many ways: (1) using transitional

words and phrases, (2) repeating keywords or key ideas, (3)

using pronouns with clear antecedents, (4) using enumeration

(1, 2, 3, or first, second, third), (5) summarizing a previous

paragraph, (6) asking a question, and (7) using a transitional

1125

paragraph.

Certain words and phrases are inherently transitional.

Consider the following terms and their functions:

FUNCTION TERMS

Result therefore, as a result, consequently, thus, hence

Example for example, for instance, specifically, as an illustration

Comparison similarly, likewise, in comparison

Contrast but, yet, still, however, nevertheless, on the other hand

Addition moreover, furthermore, also, too, besides, in addition

Time now, later, meanwhile, since then, after that, before that time

Sequence first, second, third, initially, then, next, finally

Within a paragraph, such transitional expressions clarify and

smooth the movement from idea to idea. Conversely, the lack of

transitional devices can make for disjointed reading. See also

telegraphic style.

Transition Between Sentences You can achieve effective transition between sentences by

repeating keywords or key ideas from preceding sentences and

by using pronouns that refer to antecedents in previous

sentences. Consider the following short paragraph, which uses

both of those means.

► Representative of many American university towns is Middletown. This Midwestern town, formerly a small farming community, is today the home of a large and

1126

vibrant academic community. Attracting students from all over the Midwest, this university town has grown very rapidly in the last ten years.

Enumeration is another device for achieving transition.

► The recommendation rests on two conditions. First, the department staff must be expanded to handle the increased workload. Second, sufficient time must be provided for training the new staff.

Transition Between Paragraphs The means discussed so far for achieving transition between

sentences can also be effective for achieving transition between

paragraphs. For paragraphs, however, longer transitional

elements are often required. One technique is to use an opening

sentence that summarizes the preceding paragraph and then

moves on to a new paragraph.

► One property of material considered for manufacturing processes is hardness. Hardness is the internal resistance of the material to the forcing apart or closing together of its molecules. Another property is ductility, the characteristic of material that permits it to be drawn into a wire. Material also may possess malleability, the property that makes it capable of being rolled or hammered into thin sheets of various shapes. Purchasing managers must consider these properties before selecting manufacturing materials for use in production.

1127

The requirements of hardness, ductility, and malleability

account for the high cost of such materials.

Another technique is to ask a question at the end of one

paragraph and answer it at the beginning of the next.

► New technology has always been feared because it has at times displaced some jobs. However, it invariably created many more jobs than it eliminated. Almost always, the jobs eliminated by technological advances have been unskilled jobs, and workers who have been displaced have been forced to increase their skills, which resulted in better and higher-paying jobs for them. In view of this history, should we now uncritically embrace new technology?

Certainly technology has given us unparalleled access to

information and created many new roles for employees.

A purely transitional paragraph may be inserted to aid

readability.

► The problem of poor management was a key factor that caused the weak performance of the company.

Two other setbacks to the company’s fortunes also marked

the company’s decline: the loss of many skilled workers

through the early retirement program and the intensification of

the rate of employee turnover.

The early retirement program resulted in engineering staff…

1128

If you provide logical organization and have prepared an

outline, your transitional needs will easily be satisfied and your

writing will have unity and coherence. During revision, look

for places where transition is missing and add it. Look for

places where it is weak and strengthen it.

1129

trip reports A trip report provides a permanent record of a business trip and

its accomplishments. It provides managers with essential

information about the results of the trip and can enable other

staff members to benefit from the information. See also

reports.

A trip report is normally written as a memo or an e-mail and

addressed to an immediate superior, as shown in Figure T–3.

The subject line identifies the destination and dates of the trip.

The body of the report explains why you made the trip, whom

you visited, and what you accomplished. The report should

devote a brief section to each major activity and may include a

heading for each section. You need not give equal space to each

activity—instead, elaborate on the more important ones. Follow

the body of the report with the appropriate conclusions and

recommendations. Finally, if required, attach a record of

expenses to the trip report.

1130

FIGURE T–3. Trip Report (Using E-mail Format)

1131

trouble reports (see incident reports)

1132

try to The phrase try and is colloquial for try to. For business writing,

use try to.

1133

U

1134

unity Unity is singleness of purpose and focus; a unified paragraph

or document has a central idea and does not digress into

unrelated topics.

The logical sequence provided through outlining is essential

to achieving unity. An outline enables you to lay out the most

direct route from introduction to conclusion, and it enables

you to build each paragraph around a topic sentence that

expresses a single idea. Effective transition helps build unity, as

well as coherence, because transitional terms clarify the

relationship of each part to what precedes it.

1135

up Adding the word up to verbs often creates a redundant phrase.

See also conciseness.

1136

usage Usage describes the choices we make among the various words

and expressions available in our language. The lines between

standard English and nonstandard English and between formal

and informal English are determined by these choices. Your

guideline in any situation requiring such choices should be

appropriateness: Is the word or expression you use appropriate

to your audience and your subject? When it is, you are

practicing good usage.

This book contains many entries on specific usage questions.

For a complete list of the usage entries in this book, see

“Commonly Misused Words and Phrases.” Usage entries are

also distinguished by italicized titles (for example, see utilize). A

reputable dictionary is also an invaluable aid in your selection

of the right word.

1137

utilize Do not use utilize as a long variant of use, which is the general

word for “employ for some purpose.” Use will almost always be

clearer and less pretentious. See affectation and plain

language.

1138

V

1139

vague words A vague word is one that is imprecise in the context in which it

is used. Be concrete and specific.

VAGUE It was a good meeting. [Why was it good?]

SPECIFIC The meeting resolved three questions: pay scales, fringe benefits, and workloads.

Some words are vague because they encompass a broad range

of meanings and interpretations (good, bad, real, nice,

important, thing, fine). See also abstract / concrete words and

word choice.

1140

verbals Verbals are verbs used as other parts of speech, such as nouns,

adjectives, and adverbs. Depending on their function in

sentences, verbals are identified as gerunds, infinitives, and

participles.

Gerunds A gerund is a verbal ending in -ing that is used as a noun. A

gerund can be used as a subject, a direct object, the object of a

preposition, a subjective complement, or an appositive.

► Budgeting is a useful managerial skill. [subject] ► I find budgeting difficult. [direct object] ► We were unprepared for their coming. [object of

preposition] ► Seeing is believing. [subjective complement] ► My primary departmental function, programming,

occupies about two-thirds of my time on the job. [appositive]

Only the possessive form of a noun or pronoun should precede

a gerund.

► John’s working has not affected his grades. ► His working has not affected his grades.

Infinitives An infinitive is the bare, or uninflected, form of a verb (go, run,

1141

fall, talk, dress, shout), without the restrictions imposed by

person and number. Along with the gerund and the participle,

it is one of the nonfinite verb forms. The infinitive is generally

preceded by the word to, which, although not an inherent part

of the infinitive, is considered to be the sign of an infinitive. An

infinitive is a verbal and can function as a noun, an adjective, or

an adverb.

► To expand is not the only objective. [noun] ► These are the instructions to follow. [adjective] ► The company struggled to survive. [adverb]

The infinitive can reflect two tenses: the present and (with a

helping verb) the present perfect.

► to go [present tense] ► to have gone [present perfect tense]

The most common mistake made with infinitives is using the

present perfect tense when the simple present tense is

sufficient.

Infinitives formed with the root form of transitive verbs can

express both active and (with a helping verb) passive voice.

► to hit [present tense, active voice] ► to have hit [present perfect tense, active voice] ► to be hit [present tense, passive voice]

1142

► to have been hit [present perfect tense, passive voice]

A split infinitive is one in which an adverb is placed between

the sign of the infinitive, to, and the infinitive itself. Because

they make up a grammatical unit, the infinitive and its sign are

better left intact than separated by an intervening adverb.

However, it may occasionally be better to split an infinitive than

to allow a sentence to become awkward, ambiguous, or

incoherent.

AMBIGUOUS She agreed immediately to deliver the specimen to the lab. [This sentence could be interpreted to mean that she agreed immediately.]

CLEAR She agreed to immediately deliver the specimen to the lab. [This sentence is no longer ambiguous.]

Participles A participle is a verb form that functions as an adjective.

Present participles end in -ing.

► Declining sales forced us to close one branch office.

Past participles end in -ed, -t, -en, -n, or -d.

► What are the estimated costs? ► Repair the bent lever. ► Return the broken part. ► What are the metal’s known properties?

1143

► The story, told many times before, was still interesting.

The perfect participle is formed with the present participle of

the helping verb have plus the past participle of the main verb.

► Having gotten [perfect participle] a large bonus, the smiling [present participle], contented [past participle] sales representative worked harder than ever.

A participle cannot be used as the verb of a sentence.

Inexperienced writers sometimes make that mistake, and the

result is a sentence fragment.

For information on participial and infinitive phrases, see

phrases.

1144

verbs DIRECTORY

Types of Verbs Forms of Verbs Properties of Verbs

A verb is a word or group of words that describes an action

(“The copier jammed at the beginning of the job”), states how

something or someone is affected by an action (“He was

disappointed that the proposal was rejected”), or affirms a state

of existence (“She is a district manager now”).

Types of Verbs Verbs are either transitive or intransitive. A transitive verb

requires a direct object to complete its meaning.

► They laid the foundation on October 26. [Foundation is the direct object of the transitive verb laid.]

► Rosalie Anderson wrote the treasurer a memo. [Memo is the direct object of the transitive verb wrote.]

An intransitive verb does not require an object to complete its

meaning. It makes a full assertion about the subject without

assistance (although it may have modifiers).

► The engine ran. ► The engine ran smoothly and quietly.

1145

A linking verb is an intransitive verb that links a complement to

the subject.

► The carpet is stained. [Is is a linking verb; stained is a subjective complement.]

Some intransitive verbs, such as be, become, seem, and appear,

are almost always linking verbs. A number of others, such as

look, sound, taste, smell, and feel, can function as either linking

verbs or simple intransitive or transitive verbs. If you are

unsure about whether one of those verbs is a linking verb, try

substituting seem; if the sentence still makes sense, the verb is

probably a linking verb.

► Their antennae feel delicate. [Seem can be substituted for feel — thus, feel is a linking verb.]

► Their antennae feel delicately for their prey. [Seem cannot be substituted for feel; in this case, feel is a simple intransitive verb.]

Forms of Verbs Verbs are described as being either finite or nonfinite.

Finite Verbs A finite verb is the main verb of a clause or sentence. It makes

an assertion about its subject and often serves as the only verb

in its clause or sentence. (“The telephone rang, and the

receptionist answered it.”) See also sentence construction.

1146

A helping verb (sometimes called an auxiliary verb) is used in

a verb phrase to help indicate mood, tense, and voice. (“The

phone had rung.”) Phrases that function as helping verbs are

often made up of combinations containing the sign of the

infinitive, to (for example, am going to, is about to, has to, and

ought to). The helping verb always precedes the main verb,

although other words may intervene. (“Machines will never

completely replace people.”)

Nonfinite Verbs Nonfinite verbs are verbals — verb forms that function as

nouns, adjectives, or adverbs.

A gerund is a noun that is derived from the ing form of a

verb. (“Seeing is believing.”) An infinitive, which uses the root

form of a verb (usually preceded by to), can function as a noun,

an adverb, or an adjective.

► He hates to complain. [noun, direct object of hates] ► The valve closes to stop the flow. [adverb, modifies closes] ► This is the proposal to consider. [adjective, modifies

proposal]

A participle is a verb form that can function as an adjective.

► The rejected proposal may be resubmitted when the client’s concerns are addressed. [Rejected is a verb form that is used as an adjective modifying proposal.]

1147

Properties of Verbs Verbs must (1) agree in person with personal pronouns

functioning as subjects, (2) agree in tense and number with

their subjects, and (3) be in the appropriate voice. See also

agreement.

Person is the term for the form of a personal pronoun that

indicates whether the pronoun refers to the speaker, the person

spoken to, or the person (or thing) spoken about. Verbs change

their forms to agree in person with their subjects.

► I see [first person] a yellow tint, but she sees [third person] a yellow-green hue.

Tense refers to verb forms that indicate time distinctions.

The six tenses are past, past perfect, present, present perfect,

future, and future perfect.

Number refers to the two forms of a verb that indicate

whether the subject of a verb is singular (“The copier was

repaired”) or plural (“The copiers were repaired”).

Most verbs show the singular of the present tense by adding -

s or -es (he stands, she works, it goes), and they show the plural

without -s or -es (they stand, we work, they go). The verb to be,

however, normally changes form to indicate the singular (“I am

ready”) or plural (“We are ready”).

Voice refers to the two forms of a verb that indicate whether

1148

the subject of the verb acts or receives the action. The verb is in

the active voice if the subject of the verb acts (“The bacteria grow”); the verb is in the passive voice if it receives the action

(“The bacteria are grown in a petri dish”).

1149

very The use of intensifiers like very is tempting, but the word can

usually be deleted.

When you do use intensifiers, clarify their meaning.

► Web sales were very strong; they were up 43 percent this month.

1150

via Via is Latin for “by way of.” The term should be used only in

routing instructions.

► The package was shipped via FedEx.

1151

visuals Visuals can express ideas or convey information in ways that

words alone cannot by making abstract concepts and

relationships concrete. Visuals can show how things look

(drawings, photographs, maps), represent numbers and

quantities (graphs, tables), depict processes or relationships

(flowcharts, Gantt charts, infographics, schematic diagrams),

and show hierarchical relationships (organizational charts).

They also highlight important information and emphasize key

concepts.

Many qualities of good writing — simplicity, clarity,

conciseness, directness — are equally important when creating

and using visuals. Presented with clarity and consistency,

visuals can help readers focus on key portions of your

document, presentation, or Web site. Be aware, though, that

even the best visual will not be effective without context, which

is often provided by the text that introduces the visual and

clarifies its purpose.

The following book entries are related to specific visuals and

their use in printed and online documents, as well as in

presentations (see that entry for presentation graphics).

drawings maps

flowcharts organizational charts

formal reports photographs

global graphics spreadsheets

1152

graphs tables

infographics writing for the Web

layout and design

Selecting Visuals Consider your audience and your purpose carefully in selecting

visuals. You would need different illustrations for an

automobile owner’s manual or an auto dealer’s Web site, for

example, than you would for a technician’s diagnostic guide.

Figure V–1 can help you select the most appropriate visuals,

based on their purposes and special features. Jot down visual

options as you consider your scope and organization.

1153

1154

1155

FIGURE V–1. Chart for Choosing Appropriate Visuals

ETHICS NOTE

Visuals have the potential for misleading readers when data are selectively omitted or distorted. For example, Figure G–8 (page 242) shows a graph that gives a misleading impression of investment returns because the scale is compressed, with some of the years selectively omitted. Visuals that mislead readers call the credibility of you and your organization into question — and they are unethical. The use of misleading visuals can even subject you and your organization to lawsuits.

Integrating Visuals with Text After selecting your visuals, carefully integrate them with your

text. The following guidelines will improve the effectiveness of

your visuals by describing how to position and identify them

consistently and uniformly.

Begin by considering the best locations for visuals during the

outlining stage of your draft. At appropriate points in your

outline, either make a rough sketch of the visual, if you can, or

write “illustration of . . . ,” noting the source of the visual and

enclosing each suggestion in a text box. You may also include

sketches of visuals in your thumbnail pages, as discussed in

layout and design. When writing a draft, place visuals as close

as possible to — but following — the text where they are

1156

discussed; in fact, no visual should precede its first text

mention. Refer to graphics (such as drawings and photographs)

as “figures” and to tables as “tables.” Clarify for readers why

each visual is included in the text. The amount of description

you should provide will vary, depending on your readers’

backgrounds. For example, nonexperts may require lengthier

explanations than experts need.

ETHICS NOTE

Obtain written permission to use copyrighted visuals in works that you intend to publish in print or online — including images and multimedia material from Web sites. Acknowledge all quoted or borrowed material in a source line below the caption for a figure and in a footnote at the bottom of a table. Use a site’s “Contact Us” page to request approval. Acknowledge your use of any material from the public domain (thus uncopyrighted), such as demographic or economic data from government publications and Web sites, with a source line. See also copyright, documenting sources, and plagiarism.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Creating and Integrating Visuals CREATING VISUALS

✓ Keep visuals simple. Include only information needed for discussion in the text, and eliminate unneeded labels, arrows, boxes, and lines.

✓ Position the lettering of any explanatory text or labels

1157

horizontally; allow adequate white space within and around the visual.

✓ Specify the units of measurement used, make sure relative sizes are clear, and indicate distance with a scale when appropriate.

✓ Use consistent terminology; for example, do not refer to the same information as a “proportion” in the text and a “percentage” in the visual.

✓ Define abbreviations the first time they appear in the text and in figures and tables. If any symbols are not self-explanatory, label them, as in Figure G–13 (page 246).

✓ Give each visual a caption or a concise title that clearly describes its content, and assign figure and table numbers if your document contains more than one illustration or table.

INTEGRATING VISUALS

✓ Clarify for readers why each visual is included in the text, and provide an appropriate description.

✓ Place visuals as close as possible to the text where they are discussed but always after their first text mention.

✓ Allow adequate white space around and within each illustration. ✓ Refer to visuals in the text of your document as “figures” or

“tables” and by their figure or table numbers. ✓ Consider placing lengthy or detailed visuals in an appendix,

which you refer to in the body of your document. ✓ In documents with more than five illustrations or tables, include a

section following the table of contents titled “List of Figures” or “List of Tables,” which identifies each by number, title, and page number.

✓ Follow the editorial guidelines or recommended style manual when preparing visuals for a publication.

1158

voice In grammar, voice indicates the relation of the subject to the

action of the verb. When the verb is in the active voice, the

subject acts; when it is in the passive voice, the subject is acted

upon.

ACTIVE David Cohen wrote the newsletter article. [The subject, David Cohen, performs the action; the verb, wrote, describes the action.]

PASSIVE The newsletter article was written by David Cohen. [The subject, the newsletter article, is acted upon; the verb, was written, describes the action.]

The two sentences say the same thing, but each has a different

emphasis: The first emphasizes the writer (David Cohen); the

second emphasizes what was written (the newsletter article). In

business writing, it is often important to emphasize who or

what performs an action. Further, the passive-voice version is

indirect because the performer of the action generally follows

the verb instead of preceding it. Because the active voice is

more direct, more concise, and easier for readers to

understand, use the active voice unless the passive voice is

more appropriate, as described on later in this section. Whether

you use the active voice or the passive voice, be careful not to

shift voices within a sentence.

Using the Active Voice 1159

Improving Clarity The active voice improves clarity and avoids confusion,

especially in instructions and policies and procedures.

PASSIVE Sections B and C should be checked for errors. [Have they been checked? Who should check them?]

ACTIVE Check sections B and C for errors. [The performer of the action, you, is understood: (You) Check the sections.]

Active voice can also help avoid dangling modifiers.

PASSIVE Hurrying to complete the work, the cables were connected improperly. [Who was hurrying? The implication is that the cables were hurrying.]

ACTIVE Hurrying to complete the work, the technician connected the cables improperly. [Here, hurrying to complete the work properly modifies the performer of the action: the technician.]

Highlighting Subjects One difficulty with passive sentences is that they can bury the

performer of the action within expletives and prepositional

phrases.

PASSIVE It was reported by the testing staff that the new model is defective.

ACTIVE The testing staff reported that the new model is defective.

Sometimes writers using the passive voice fail to name the

performer — information that might be missed.

PASSIVE The error was discovered yesterday.

ACTIVE The attending physician discovered the error yesterday.

Achieving Conciseness

1160

The active voice helps achieve conciseness because it

eliminates the need for an additional helping verb as well as an

extra preposition to identify the performer of the action.

PASSIVE Arbitrary changes in policy are resented by employees.

ACTIVE Employees resent arbitrary changes in policy.

The active-voice version takes one verb (resent); the passive-

voice version takes two verbs (are resented) and an extra

preposition (by).

Using the Passive Voice The passive voice is sometimes effective or even necessary.

Indeed, for reasons of tact and diplomacy, you might need to

use the passive voice to avoid an implied accusation.

ACTIVE Your staff did not meet the sales quota last month.

PASSIVE The sales quota was not met last month.

ETHICS NOTE

Be careful not to use the passive voice to evade responsibility or to obscure an issue or information that readers should know, as in the following examples.

► Several mistakes were made. [Who made the mistakes?] ► It has been decided. [Who has decided?]

See also ethics in writing.

1161

When the performer of the action is either unknown or

unimportant, use the passive voice. (“The copper mine was

discovered in 1929.”) When the performer of the action is less

important than the receiver of that action, the passive voice is

sometimes more appropriate. (“Ann Bryant was presented with

a Sales Award by the president.”) Even in such cases, another

verb may enable you to use the active voice. (“Ann Bryant

received a Sales Award from the president.”)

When you explain an operation in which the reader is not

actively involved or when you describe a process or a

procedure, the passive voice may be more appropriate. In the

following example, anyone — it really does not matter who —

could be the performer of the action.

► Area strip mining is used in regions of flat to gently rolling terrain, like that found in the Midwest. Depending on applicable reclamation laws, the topsoil may be removed from the area to be mined, stored, and later reapplied as surface material during reclamation of the mined land. After the removal of the topsoil, a trench is cut through the overburden to expose the upper surface of the coal to be mined. The overburden from the first cut is placed on the unmined land adjacent to the cut. After the first cut has been completed, the coal is removed.

Do not, however, simply assume that any such explanation

should be in the passive voice; in fact, as in the following

example, the active voice is often more effective.

1162

► In the operation of an internal combustion engine, an explosion in the combustion chamber forces the pistons down in the cylinders. The movement of the pistons in the cylinders turns the crankshaft.

Ask yourself, “Would it be of any advantage to the reader to

know the performer of the action?” If the answer is yes, use the

active voice.

1163

W

1164

wait for / wait on Wait on should refer to the activities of hospitality and service

employees. (“We need extra staff to wait on customers.”)

Otherwise, use wait for. (“Be sure to wait for Ms. Garcia’s

approval.”) See also idioms.

1165

Web design (see writing for the Web)

1166

when / where / that When and if (or if and when) is a colloquial expression that

should not be used in writing.

In phrases using the where ... at construction, at is unnecessary

and should be omitted.

Do not substitute where for that to anticipate an idea or a fact to

follow.

1167

whether Whether communicates the notion of a choice. The use of

whether or not to indicate a choice between alternatives is often

redundant.

The phrase as to whether is clumsy and redundant. Either use

whether alone or omit it altogether.

1168

while While, meaning “during an interval of time,” is sometimes

substituted for connectives like and, but, although, and

whereas. Used as a connective in that way, while often causes

ambiguity.

Do not use while to mean although or whereas.

Restrict while to its meaning of “during the time that.”

► I’ll have to catch up on my reading while I am on vacation.

1169

who / whom Who is a subjective case pronoun, and whom is the objective

case form of who. When in doubt about which form to use,

substitute a personal pronoun to see which one fits. If he, she,

or they fits, use who.

► Who is the training coordinator? [You would say, “She is the training coordinator.”]

If him, her, or them fits, use whom.

► It depends on whom? [You would say, “It depends on them.”]

1170

who’s / whose / of which Who’s is the contraction of who is. (“Who’s scheduled today?”)

Whose is the possessive case of who. (“Consider whose budget

should be cut.”)

Normally, whose is used with persons, and of which is used

with inanimate objects.

► The employee whose car had been towed away was angry. ► The report recommended over 100 changes, more than

half of which the client approved.

If of which causes a sentence to sound awkward, whose may be

used with inanimate objects. (Compare: “The business the

profits of which steadily declined” versus “The business whose

profits steadily declined.”)

1171

word choice Mark Twain once said, “The difference between the almost

right word and the right word is . . . the difference between the

lightning-bug and the lightning.” The most important goal in

choosing the right word in business writing is the preciseness

implied by Twain’s comment. Vague words and abstract words

defeat preciseness because they do not convey the writer’s

meaning directly and clearly.

VAGUE It was a productive meeting.

PRECISE The meeting resulted in the approval of the health-care benefits package.

In the first sentence, productive sounds specific but conveys

little information; the revised sentence says specifically what

made the meeting “productive.” Although abstract words may at

times be appropriate to your topic, using them unnecessarily

will make your writing difficult to understand. See abstract /

concrete words.

Being aware of the connotations and denotations of words

will help you anticipate reactions of your audience to the words

you choose. (See connotation / denotation.) Understanding

antonyms (fresh/stale) and synonyms (notorious/infamous)

will increase your ability to choose the proper word. Make other

usage decisions carefully, especially in technical contexts, such

as average / median / mean and biannual / biennial.

1172

Although many entries throughout this book will help you

improve your word choices and avoid impreciseness, the

following entries should be particularly helpful:

affectation euphemisms

biased language idioms

buzzwords jargon

clichés logic errors

conciseness vague words

A key to choosing the correct and precise word is to keep

current in your reading and to be aware of new words in your

profession and in the language. In your quest for the right word,

use a reputable and current dictionary. See also English as a

second language and plain language.

1173

writing a draft You are well prepared to write a rough draft when you have

established your purpose and readers’ needs, considered the

context, defined your scope, completed adequate research,

and prepared an outline (whether rough or developed). (See

also audience and outlining.) Writing a draft is simply

transcribing and expanding the notes from your outline into

paragraphs, without worrying about grammar, refinements of

language, or spelling. Refinement will come with revision and

proofreading. See also “Five Steps to Successful Writing.”

Writing and revising are different activities. Do not let

worrying about a good opening slow you down. Instead,

concentrate on your ideas — now is not the time to polish or

revise. Do not wait for inspiration — treat writing a draft as you

would any other on-the-job task.

WRITER’S CHECKLIST

Writing a Rough Draft

✓ Resist the temptation of writing first drafts without planning. ✓ Use an outline (rough or developed) as a springboard to start and

to write quickly. ✓ Give yourself a set time in which you write continuously,

regardless of how good or bad your writing seems to be. But don’t stop if you are rolling along easily — keep your momentum.

✓ Start with the section that seems easiest. Your readers will neither know nor care which section was written first.

1174

✓ Keep in mind your readers’ needs, expectations, and knowledge of the subject. Doing so will help you write directly to your readers and suggest which ideas need further development.

✓ When you come to something difficult to explain, try to relate the new concept to something familiar to readers, as discussed in figures of speech.

✓ Routinely save your draft to your local drive, a company network, an external hard drive, or the cloud.

✓ Give yourself a small reward — a short walk, a snack, a brief chat with a friend, an easy task — after you have finished a section.

✓ When you return to your writing, reread what you have written. Doing so can return you to a productive frame of mind.

1175

writing for the Web This entry is intended to help you contribute content for your

company’s or organization’s Web site. For questions about the

appropriateness of content you plan to post, check with your

Webmaster or manager to determine if your content complies

with your organization’s Web policy. On campus, consult your

instructor or campus computer support staff about standards

for posting Web content. See also blogs and forums, content

management, and FAQs.

Crafting Content for Your Site Most readers scan Web pages for specific information, so state

your important points first, before providing detailed

supporting information. Keep your writing style

straightforward and concise, and use plain language as much

as possible. Use the following techniques to make your content

more accessible to your audience. See also conciseness.

Text Content Break up dense blocks of text by dividing them into short

paragraphs so that they stand out and can be quickly scanned

and absorbed. Focus each passage on one facet of your topic.

Where necessary, include links to more detailed secondary

information.

Headings Use informative topic headings for paragraphs or sections to

1176

help readers decide at a glance whether to read a passage.

Headings also clarify text by highlighting structure and

organization. They signal breaks in coverage from one topic to

the next as well as mark transitions between topics. Set off

headings in boldface or another text style, such as a different

color, on a separate line directly above the text they describe, or

in the left margin directly across from the text. See also layout

and design.

Lists Use bulleted and numbered lists to break up dense paragraphs,

reduce text length, and highlight important content. Do not

overuse lists, however. Lists without supporting explanatory

text lack coherence.

Keywords To help search engines and your audience find your site, use

terms that highlight content in the first 50 or so words of text for

each new topic.

WITHOUT KEYWORDS

We are proud to introduce a new commemorative coin honoring our bank’s founder and president. The item will be available on this Web site after December 3, 2018, which is the 100th anniversary of our first deposit.

WITH KEYWORDS

The new Reynolds commemorative coin features a portrait of George G. Reynolds, the founder and president of Reynolds Bank. The coin can be purchased after December 3, 2018, in honor of the 100th anniversary of Reynolds’s first deposit.

For more about search engine optimization (SEO), Google

AdWords, and Internet marketing tools, visit

1177

moz.com/beginners-guide-to-seo.

Directional Cues Avoid navigational cues, such as “on the next page,” that make

sense on the printed page but not online. Instead, position links

so that they are tied directly to the content to which they

pertain, such as the Back to Top links on pages that are several

screens long.

Graphics Graphics provide information that text alone cannot; they also

provide visual relief. Use only visuals that are appropriate for

your audience and purpose. Avoid overusing complex graphs

and animation that can clutter or slow access to your site. Work

with the site Webmaster to optimize all graphics for speed of

access. Ask about the preferred file-compression format for

your visuals. Also consider giving visitors a graphics-free option

for quicker access to your content.

Fonts Font sizes and styles affect screen legibility. Because screens

display fonts at lower resolutions compared to printed text, sans

serif fonts often work better for online text passages. Do not use

ALL CAPITAL LETTERS or boldface type for blocks of text,

because they slow the reader. For content that contains special

characters (such as mathematical or chemical content), consult

your Webmaster about the best way to submit the files for

HTML (hypertext markup language) coding, or post them as

1178

portable document format (PDF) files.

Using Links Use internal links to help readers navigate the information on

your site. If text is longer than two or three screens, create a

table of contents of links at the top of the Web page, and link

each item to the relevant content further down the page. Use

external links to enrich coverage of your topic with information

from outside your site and to help reduce content on your page.

When you do, consider placing an icon or a text label next to the

link to inform users that they are leaving the host site. Avoid too

many links within text paragraphs because they can distract

readers, make scanning the text difficult, and tempt readers to

leave your site before reaching the end of your page.

Links to outside sites can expand your content. However,

review such sites carefully before linking to them. Is the site’s

author or sponsoring organization reputable? Is its content

accurate, current, and unbiased? Does the site date-stamp its

content with notices such as, “This page was last updated on

January 1, 2018”? Link directly to the page or specific area of an

outside site that is relevant to your users, and be sure that you

provide a clear context for why you are sending your readers

there. For more advice on evaluating Web sites, see page 461.

Posting an Existing Document If you post an existing document to a Web site, try to retain the

1179

original sequence and layout of the document. If, for example,

you shorten or revise an existing document for posting to the

Web, add a notice informing readers how it differs from the

original.

Before posting the document publicly, review it offline to

ensure that it is the correct version and that all links work and

go to the right places. Consider creating a “single-file version”

of the content (a version formatted as a single, long Web page)

for readers who will print the content to read offline. See also

proofreading and repurposing.

Convert documents such as reports, flyers, and brochures to

PDF files to make sure your electronic documents look identical

to your printed documents. Readers can view a PDF file online,

download it, or print it in whole or in part. Using specialized

PDF software, you can create sophisticated forms, add

signatures and watermarks to documents, and password-

protect sensitive files.

ETHICS NOTE

Keep a record of how and where you find content online, be it text, images, tables, streaming video, or other material. Seek approval from the copyright holder before using any such information. Besides being legally—and ethically—required, documenting your sources bolsters the credibility of your site. To document your sources, either provide links to your source or use a citation, as described in documenting sources. See also copyrights, patents, and trademarks and

1180

plagiarism.

Protecting User Privacy Ensure that your content is consistent with your site’s privacy

policies for site users. A site’s privacy statement informs visitors

about how the site sponsor handles solicited and unsolicited

information, its policy on the use of cookies, and its policy on

handling security breaches.

Writing for a Global Audience When you write for an international audience, eliminate

expressions and references that make sense only to someone

familiar with American English. Express dates, clock times, and

measurements consistent with international practices. For

visuals, choose symbols and icons, colors, representations of

human beings, and captions that can be easily understood, as

described in global communication and global graphics. See

also biased language, English as a second language, and

idioms.

1181

Y

1182

“you” viewpoint The “you” viewpoint places the reader’s interest and perspective

foremost. It is based on the principle that most readers are

naturally more concerned about their own needs than they are

about those of a writer or a writer’s organization. See audience

and persuasion.

Using the words you and your rather than we, our, I, and

mine can help convey the “you” viewpoint. Consider the

following sentence.

► We must receive your signed approval before we can process your payment.

Even though the sentence uses your twice, the words in italics

suggest that the point of view centers on the writer’s need to

receive the signed approval in order to process the payment.

(See also refusal letters.) Consider the following revision,

written with the “you” viewpoint.

► So you can receive your payment promptly, please send your signed approval.

In some instances, you may need to avoid using the

pronouns you and your to achieve a positive tone and maintain

goodwill. Notice how the first of the following examples (with

your) seems to accuse the reader; the second (without your)

uses positive writing to emphasize a shared goal— meeting the

1183

client’s needs.

ACCUSATORY Your budget makes no allowance for setup costs.

POSITIVE The budget should include an allowance for setup costs to meet all the concerns of our client.

By considering the readers’ interests as you write, you can

achieve your purpose not only in correspondence but also in

proposals, reports, and presentations.

1184

your / you’re Your is a possessive pronoun (“your wallet”); you’re is the

contraction of you are (“You’re late for the meeting”).

1185

Index Words and phrases in bold type indicate main alphabetical

entries. Usage terms appear in italic type.

a / an, 1, 42–43 a few / few, 190 a lot, 1 a while / awhile, 46 abbreviations, 2–5

a / an, use with, 1 acronyms and initialisms, 2, 3, 10 audience and, 2 capitalization of, 68 commas with, 89 in e-mail, 2, 169 in figures and tables, 542 in instant messaging and live chat, 2, 263 in international correspondence, 273 italics with, 289 of Latin words, 4–5, 166–67, 179 list of, in reports, 201 for measurements, 3–4 for names and titles, 4 for organization names, 3 periods with, 3, 376 and plain language, 386 plurals of, 3, 36 postal, 312 scholarly, 4–5

1186

spelling out, 2–3, 183 in tables, 516 in titles of works, 524 writer’s checklist for, 2–3

above, 5 absolutely, 5 absolute phrases, 86 absolute words, 13–14, 178 abstract / concrete words, 5–6

ethics in writing and, 180 figures of speech and, 191 gobbledygook and, 235 and word choice, 549–50

abstract nouns, 24, 350 abstracts, 6–8

vs. executive summaries, 182 in formal reports, 200, 205 in grant proposals, 237–38 samples of, 7, 205

Academia.edu, 358, 360 academic titles, 4 accept / except, 8 acceptances / refusals (for employment), 8–9. See also employment process

professionalism and, 8 samples of, 9

accident reports. See trouble reports accordingly. See conjunctive adverbs accuracy. See also proofreading

in correspondence, 117, 168

1187

in executive summaries, 182–83 of instructions, 266 in minutes of meetings, 333 in note-taking, 350 in résumés, 467

accusative case. See objective case acknowledgments, 10

form letters for, 196–97 sample of, 10

acronyms and initialisms, 2, 3, 10. See also abbreviations action verbs

pronoun case and, 69 in résumés, 481

active listening, 317–18 active voice, 543–45. See also voice

for clarity, 544 for conciseness, 99, 545 for emphasis, 173 in formal style, 511 infinitives and, 534 for instructions, 264 naming the actor, 538, 543 for plain language, 386 in sentence construction, 494

activity reports. See progress and activity reports actually, 447 ad hoc, 10 adapt / adept / adopt, 11 adapting to new technologies, 11

for forms, 224

1188

for infographics, 258–60 for layout and design, 311 for presentations, 399 for research, 460 for résumés, 482–83 for revision, 98

addresses, e-mail, 169, 478 addresses, street

commas with, 88 in letters, 312 numbers in, 355 in résumés, 478

addresses, Web. See URLs adept / adopt / adapt, 11 adjective clauses, 15, 176 adjectives, 12–15. See also adverbs; modifiers

absolute words, 13–14 articles as, 12, 42 commas with, 14, 87–88 comparison of, 13–14 with count nouns, 174 demonstrative, 12–13, 175 descriptive, 12 gerunds as, 537 in idioms, 394 indefinite, 13 infinitives as, 534 irregular, 13 limiting, 12, 42 as modifiers, 338

1189

nouns as, 14, 351, 391 numbers as, 13 order for, 15 participles as, 535, 537 phrases as, 381 placement of, 14 possessive, 13, 175 relative, 98 types of, 12–13 verbals as, 533 verbs as, 15, 499

adjustment messages, 15–18 context in, 104 professionalism and, 18 samples of, 16–17

Adobe PDF files, 482, 552 adopt / adapt / adept, 11 advanced search, 458 adverbs, 18–20. See also adjectives; modifiers

commas with, 19, 87 comparison of, 20 conjunctive, 19 gerunds as, 537 in idioms, 394 infinitives as, 534 intensifiers, 267, 339 irregular, 20 as modifiers, 338 nouns as, 351 numbers as, 13

1190

phrases as, 381 placement of, 20 with prepositions, 394 and split infinitives, 534–35 types of, 19 verbals as, 533

advertisements, job, 297–98 advertising. See promotional writing affect / effect, 20 affectation, 21

abbreviations and, 2 allusions and, 29 buzzwords as, 64 ethics in writing and, 21 foreign words as, 21, 196 formal style as, 110, 511 as gobbledygook, 235 legal terms as, 122 nominalizations as, 348 wordiness as, 98

affinity, 21 aforementioned, 5 aforesaid, 5, 21 agenda, for meetings, 326–27

sample of, 327 agreement, 22–27. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; subject-verb agreement

in gender, 22, 25–26, 227, 413 in number, 22, 26–27, 352–53, 413–14 in person, 22, 537–38

1191

of pronoun and antecedent, 22, 25–27, 414 of subject and verb, 22–24, 494, 537–38 with this / that / these / those, 12–13

aircraft, italics for names of, 289 all ready / already, 27 all right, 28 all together / altogether, 28 all-capital letters. See also capitalization

in e-mail, 169 for emphasis, 173, 308–9 in Web design, 552

allegedly / supposedly, 27 allude / elude / refer, 28 allusion / illusion, 28 allusions, 28–29, 273 alot / a lot, 1 already / all ready, 27 alright / all right, 28 also, 29 altogether / all together, 28 ambiguity, 29–30

commas for preventing, 85 incomplete comparisons, 30 misplaced modifiers, 30, 339–40 prepositional phrases and, 381–82 in pronoun references, 29, 409 in telegraphic writing, 519 using that for, 522 word choice and, 30, 75

American Psychological Association. See APA documentation

1192

AmeriCorps, 300 among / between, 48 amount / number, 30 ampersands, 30–31

in APA citations, 136 in company names, 3, 30–31

an. See a / an analogy, 191

definition by, 124 in description, 128

and both . . . , 53, 102 commas with, 85, 90 with etc., 179 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 27 subject-verb agreement with, 25

and/or, 31 anecdotes, 285 annotated bibliography, 51 annual reports, 31–35

design of, 34 mission statements in, 335–38 sections in, 31–33 titles for, 523 writer’s checklist for, 35

anonymous. See unknown authors antecedents. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement

compound, 27 implied, 410 pronouns and, 410, 414

1193

references to, 29, 410 antonyms, 35

in thesaurus, 523 word choice and, 549

anxiety, presentation, 402–3 APA documentation, 133–42. See also documenting sources

for articles in periodicals, 138 for books, 137–38 documentation models, 137–40 for electronic sources, 147–50 in-text citations, 136–37 for miscellaneous sources, 139 for multimedia sources, 138–40 sample pages, 141–42

apologies. See adjustment messages apostrophes, 35–36

in contractions, 35, 105 showing possession, 35, 70, 391

appendixes, 36 for business plans, 61 for formal reports, 202 for grant proposals, 240 for proposals, 418, 423 visuals in, 543

applicant tracking systems (ATSs), 482 application cover letters, 36–41. See also application genres

professionalism and, 37 résumés and, 466 samples of, 38–40

application forms, 301

1194

application genres, 301–3. See also job search ethics in writing and, 302, 303 writer’s checklist for, 302

appositives, 42 capitalization of, 67 case of, 42, 70, 412 commas with, 86 gerunds as, 533–34 nouns as, 351

arguments, loaded, 322 articles (a / an / the), 42–43

a / an, 1, 42–43 count nouns with, 175 definite, 42–43 indefinite, 1, 42–43 telegraphic style and, 518 the, 42

articles in periodicals (print and electronic). See also newsletter articles; periodicals

abstracts of, 6–8 APA documentation of, 138 capitalization in titles of, 67, 102 CMS documentation of, , 146–47, 148 databases and indexes for, 458–59 evaluating, 462 MLA documentation of, 138, 139 quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525

as / because / since, 43–44 as / like, 316 as much as / more than, 44

1195

as such, 44 as / than, and pronoun case, 69, 71 as to whether, 548 as well as, 44 ASCII résumés, 482–83 assure / insure / ensure, 267 attachments

e-mail, 169, 171 for grant proposals, 240

attributive adjectives, 14 audience, 44–46

abbreviations and, 2–3 for abstracts, 7 appropriate language for, 385–86 assessing, xviii–xix, 45, 109–10, 393 for brochures, 55 for business plans, 59–60 for correspondence, 109–10 defining terms for, 45, 124, 234–35 drafting and, 550 global, 228–29 goodwill and, 111–13 for instructions, 264 layout and design and, 306 multiple, 45–46, 60 for newsletters, 347 online professional profiles, 358, 360 pace and, 268 for presentations, 396 for promotional writing, 409

1196

for proposals, 416–17 revision and, 484 for sales letters, 486 selecting the medium for, 488–89 for social media, 505 tone and, 526 usage and, 531 for visuals, 539 for Web content, 551 writing style and, 109–10, 510 “you” viewpoint for, 554

augment / supplement, 46 author-date method of documentation. See APA documentation authors, documenting. See corporate authors; multiple authors; unknown authors auxiliary verbs. See helping verbs average / median / mean, 46 awhile / a while, 46 awkwardness, 47

writer’s checklist for, 47 back matter, for formal reports, 202 background

in business plans, 61 in formal reports, 200 opening with, 284 in résumés, 472, 476–77

bad / badly, 48 bad-news patterns

in correspondence, 115, 269 cultural differences in, 269

1197

positive writing and, 390 for refusals, 8, 449–52 for resignation letters, 463 samples of, 115

balance / remainder, 48 bar graphs. See graphs barely, 161 basis

of classification, 130 of comparison, 92

bcc: notations, 171, 315 because / since / as, 43–44 because, reason is, 447 because of / due to, 165, 185 behavior during interviews, 279 beside / besides, 48 between / among, 48 between you and me, 49, 394 bi- / semi-, 49 biannual / biennial, 49 biased evidence, 321 biased language, 49–50. See also sexist language

ethics in writing and, 180–81 professionalism and, 50

bibliographies, 50–51. See also documenting sources abbreviations in, 3 annotated, 51 in CMS style, 134, 143–44, 153 in formal reports, 202 for research, 459

1198

sample, 153 biennial / biannual, 49 bifold brochure, 56–57 bilingual writers. See English as a second language blind-copy notations (bcc:), 171, 315 block quotations

APA style for, 136–37, 446 MLA style for, 154

blogs and forums, 51–53. See also writing for the Web APA documentation of, 139 CMS documentation of, 149 MLA documentation of, 157 ethics in writing and, 53 functions of, 51–53, 492 social media and, 504 subject lines of, 524

board of directors, in annual report, 33 body

of application cover letters, 41 of feasibility reports, 189–90 of formal reports, 201–2, 212–16 of grant proposals, 238–39 of letters, 314–15 of presentations, 397–98 of proposals, 418 of reports, 454 of tables, 516

body depictions, for global graphics, 233 body movement, in presentations, 402, 403 boilerplate material, 106–7, 422

1199

boldface. See also typography for emphasis, 173, 309 in Web design, 552

books APA documentation of, 137–38 capitalization in titles of, 67, 102 catalogs for, 458 CMS documentation of, 144–46 evaluating, 462 italics for titles of, 289–90, 443, 524 MLA documentation of, 155–56

both . . . and, 53, 102 both / as well as, 44 box heads, in tables, 516 boxes

in forms, 222 for organizational charts, 364 in page design, 311

brackets, 53–54 for parenthetical items, 54, 374 in quotations, 445 with sic, 54, 445

brainstorming, 54–55 for job searching, 293 for mission statements, 337 during presentations, 399 for research, 456 for résumés, 477 sample of, 55

brand, personal, 295, 297

1200

brochures, 55–59 APA documentation of, 140 bifold, 56–57 CMS documentation of, 151 designing, 56–57 italics for titles of, 287, 524 MLA documentation of, 158 repurposed content for, 454–55 with sales letters, 487 samples of, 57–58 trifold, 56 writer’s checklist for, 58–59

budget, in proposals, 239 buffer, for bad news, 114, 449 bulleted lists. See lists business description, in business plans, 60–61 business letters. See correspondence; letters business names. See organization names business plans, 59–64 business writing style, 63, 184. See also style

contractions and, 105 ethics in writing and, 63 formal and informal, 510–12 plain language and, 385–86 standard vs. nonstandard English, 177

but, comma with, 85, 90 buzzwords, 64

as affectation, 21 as gobbledygook, 235

callouts. See labels

1201

campus career services, 296 can / may, 65 cannot, 65 capital / capitol, 65 capitalization, 65–68. See also all-capital letters

of abbreviations, 68 of adjectives of origin, 15 after colons, 66, 83 of complimentary closings, 66, 315 after dashes, 120 of events and concepts, 67 of group names, 66 in lists, 320 of organization names, 67 of place names, 66–67 of professional and personal titles, 67 of proper nouns, 66, 350 in quotations, 66, 444–45 of salutations, 66 in sentences, 66 in subject lines, 67, 117 of titles of works, 67, 524

capitol / capital, 65 captions, with visuals, 311, 380 cardinal numbers, 13, 121 career counselors, 296 case, 68–71, 412–13

agreement and, 22 of appositives, 42, 70, 412 objective, 69–70, 412–13

1202

possessive, 70, 391–92, 412 subjective, 69, 412 tests for determining, 42, 70–71, 413

case histories, 487 case statement, in grant proposals, 238 catalog, library, 458 categories

for blogs and forums, 51–53 for FAQs, 186

cause definition by, 125 false, 72, 321

cause-and-effect method of development, 71–73, 331 cc: notations, 169, 171, 315–16 cell phones, 490, 522 center on, 73 centuries, format for writing, 121–22 chalkboards, 399 channel, 488. See also selecting the medium chapters and sections

in annual reports, 32–33 in business plans, 60 capitalization in titles of, 68 in feasibility reports, 188–90 in formal reports, 200–2 in grant proposals, 236–40 numbers for, 355 quotation marks for titles of, 289, 443, 525 in résumés, 478–82 in sales proposals, 421–23

1203

in tables of contents, 200 charts. See also visuals

in annual reports, 34 flowcharts, 193–95, 541 organizational, 364, 541 in presentations, 399, 401 for procedures, 389–90

chat sessions, online, 79. See also instant messaging and live chat check boxes, in forms, 222–23 checklist of the writing process, xxv–xxvi. See also writer’s checklists Chicago Manual of Style (CMS). See CMS documentation choppy writing, 499 chronological method of development, 73, 331

sample of, 74 chunking. See paragraphs circular definitions, 123 circumlocution, 98 citation management software, 458–59 citations, in-text. See also documenting sources

APA style, 134, 136–37, 141 CMS style, 134–35, 143–44 in formal proposals, 418 in grant proposals, 238 MLA style, 135, 154, 159 sample pages, 141, 152–53, 159

cite / sight / site, 73 claims

adjustment messages for, 15–18

1204

in complaint message, 94–95 clarity, 75

active voice for, 544 in business writing style, 63 commas for, 88 conciseness and, 63, 75, 97–99 in correspondence, 116–17 defining terms for, 122–23, 124 grammar and, 236 hyphens for, 252 in instructions, 264–65 plain language for, 385–86 semicolons for, 493 transitions for, 527–29 word choice and, 549

classification, 130–32. See also division-and-classification method of development

sample of, 131 clauses, 75–76. See also dependent clauses; independent clauses; sentence construction

adjective, 176 commas with, 85 missing subjects in, 497 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 465–66

clichés, 76–77 and figures of speech, 191 as gobbledygook, 235 in résumés, 479

climactic order, for emphasis, 172 clip-art images, 164

1205

closed-ended questions, 223–24 closings. See also conclusions

for adjustment messages, 18 for application cover letters, 41 for bad-news letters, 114–15 for correspondence, 110–11, 315 for e-mail, 169–70 for international correspondence, 269, 273 for meetings, 330 for presentations, 398 for refusals, 452

cloud computing, 483 clustering, 54–55

sample of, 55 CMS documentation, 134, 143–53. See also documenting sources

for articles in periodicals, 146–47 for books, 144–46 documentation models, 144–51 for electronic sources, 147–50 footnotes and endnotes, 135–36, 143–44, 150 for miscellaneous sources, 150–51 for multimedia sources, 147–50 sample pages, 152–53

coherence, 77 clarity and, 75 outlining and, 365 in paragraphs, 371 plain language and, 385–86 pronoun references and, 410–11 unity and, 531

1206

collaborative writing, 77–79 brainstorming and, 54–55 coherence in, 77–78 conflict and, 78 outlining for, 365 professionalism and, 78–79 for proposals, 416, 421 purpose in, 435 reviewing, xxiii, 78 schedule for, 243, 244 team tasks in, 77–79 technology for, 79 wikis for, 79 writer’s checklist for, 79

collection letters, 79–82 form letters for, 197 samples of, 80–81

collective nouns, 350 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 26, 351 subject-verb agreement with, 24, 351

colloquialisms in informal writing, 511 as nonstandard English, 177 quotation marks and, 443

colons, 82–84 capitalization after, 66, 83 in citations, 82–83 for enumeration, 493 before lists, 82, 84, 320 with numbers, 82–83

1207

with quotation marks, 83, 444 in salutations, 82–83, 312, 314 in sentences, 82 in titles, 82–83 unnecessary, 83–84

color in brochures, 59 in global graphics, 232, 234 in graphs, 243 in maps, 325 in page design, 310

column graphs. See graphs columns

in newsletters, 347 page design for, 310 in tables, 516–17

commands, 264, 340. See also imperative mood comma splice, 84, 485 commas, 84–90

with addresses, 88 with adjectives, 14, 87 for clarifying, 88 in compound sentences, 495 with conjunctive adverbs, 19, 89 for contrasting, 88 with dashes, 120 in dates, 88, 121 for enclosing elements, 85–86, 120 with interjections, 268 for introducing elements, 86–87

1208

for items in series, 87–88, 90 for linking clauses, 19, 85, 89 with names, 89 with nonrestrictive elements, 465–66 with numbers, 88–89 for omissions, 88 with other punctuation, 89 with parentheses, 374 with quotation marks, 87, 376, 444 unnecessary, 90

common knowledge, 385 common / mutual, 341 common nouns, 66, 350 communication

global, 228–32, 268–73 listening, 317–18 nonverbal, 402 selecting the medium for, xviii, 488–92 social media for, 504–7

company description and strategy, in business plans, 60–61 comparative form

absolute words and, 13–14, 178 of adjectives, 13–14 of adverbs, 20

compare / contrast, 90–91 comparison, 91

with absolute words, 13–14, 178 basis of, 92 incomplete, 30 like and as for, 316

1209

comparison method of development, 91–93, 331 samples of, 92–93

complaint message, 94–95. See also adjustment messages; refusals

sample of, 94 complement / compliment, 95 complements, 95–96. See also objective complements; subjective complements

linking verbs and, 536 sentence construction and, 494 types of, 96 verbals as, 176

complex sentences, 172, 494 compliment / complement, 95 complimentary closings, 66, 315 components, definition by, 125 compose / constitute / comprise, 96 compound sentences, 172, 495 compound words, 97

antecedents, 27 case of, 412–13 commas with, 90 hyphens for, 97, 251 plurals of, 97, 352 possessive, 97, 391 predicates, 90 pronoun case and, 70–71 subjects, 493 subject-verb agreement with, 24–25

compound-complex sentences, 495

1210

comprise / compose / constitute, 96 computer technologies. See adapting to new technologies conciseness, 97–99. See also wordiness

in abstracts, 8 active voice for, 545 in blogs and forums, 52 in brochures, 56 clarity and, 63, 75 in executive summaries, 182–83 functional shifts and, 225 in instructions, 264 in international correspondence, 268–69 in minutes of meetings, 333 overdoing, 2, 98 subordination for, 513 telegraphic style, 518–19 writer’s checklist for, 98–99 “you” viewpoint and, 110

conclusions, 99–102. See also closings in abstracts, 6–8 false, 72 for feasibility reports, 190 for formal reports, 201, 217–18 for grant proposals, 239 in incident reports, 256 for newsletter articles, 346 for progress reports, 406 for proposals, 418, 423, 433 for reports, 454 samples of, 100, 217–18, 433

1211

summary of, 284 for trip reports, 529

concrete nouns, 350 concrete words. See abstract / concrete words conditional statements, 513 conference calls, 491 confidentiality

blogs and forums and, 52 e-mail and, 168 forms and, 220, 222 instant messaging and live chat, 263

conflict in collaborative writing, 78 in meetings, 329–30

conjugation of verbs, 538 conjunctions, 102–3. See also coordinating conjunctions; correlative conjunctions; subordinating conjunctions

and subject-verb agreement, 24 telegraphic style and, 518 types of, 102–3

conjunctive adverbs for comma splices, 84 commas with, 19, 89 in compound sentences, 495 for linking clauses, 19, 75–76, 103 list of common, 19, 89, 103 for run-on sentences, 377 semicolons with, 19, 492

connotation / denotation, 103 of synonyms, 515, 523

1212

of visuals, 232–33 word choice and, 549

consensus, 103 consequently. See conjunctive adverbs consistency

in document naming, 133 in format, 415 in repetition, 453 in résumés, 466–67, 482 for visuals, 401, 542 in voice, mood, tense, 521

constitute / comprise / compose, 96 contacts, personal and professional

lists of, 263 networking and, 296

content management, 454–55 context, 103–5

and adapting to new technologies, 11 in application cover letters, 41 assessing, xviii–xix, 104–5, 393 in bad-news patterns, 114–16 design and, 306 in forewords, 200 for form letters, 197 in formal reports, 200 global communication and, 228–29 global graphics and, 232 listening and, 317 for mission statements, 335–38 online professional profiles, 360

1213

in openings, 105, 117 for proposals, 103–4, 416 purpose and, 435 in refusals, 450 repurposing for, 197, 455 scope and, 487 selecting the medium and, 488–92 signaling, 105 for social media, 505 style and, 510 tone and, 526 for visuals, 232–33, 539

continual / continuous, 105 continuing pages

for letters, 316 for press releases, 403 for tables, 517

continuous / continual, 105 contractions, 105

apostrophes in, 35, 105 in global communication, 269, 273

contrast commas for, 88 dashes for, 120

contrast / compare, 90–91 conversational style, 63

in blogs and forums, 51–53 in correspondence, 109 in informal writing, 511–12 nonstandard English, 177–78

1214

cookies, 553 co-ops. See internships and co-ops coordinate nouns, possessive case of, 392 coordinate series, 87 coordinating conjunctions, 102

for comma splices, 84 commas with, 85, 90 in compound sentences, 495 for linking clauses, 75–76, 85, 102 list of, 85, 102 for run-on sentences, 377 semicolons with, 493 in subordination, 513–14

copy notations (cc:, bcc:), 169, 171, 315–16 copyleft Web material, 107, 384 copyrights, patents, and trademarks, 106–9. See also documenting sources

alternative forms of, 107 ethics in writing and, 53, 106, 107, 180 exceptions to, 106–7 permissions and, 106–7, 201 plagiarism and, 384–85 repurposing and, 107, 455–56 for visuals, 164, 380, 542

corporate authors APA documentation of, 137, 139 CMS documentation of, 145, 148 MLA documentation of, 155

corporate names. See organization names corporate reports. See annual reports

1215

correlative conjunctions, 102 double negatives and, 161 in parallel structure, 372

correspondence, 109–17. See also e-mail; letters; memos; selecting the medium

acceptances / refusals (for employment), 8–9 accuracy in, 117, 168 acknowledgments, 10 adjustment messages, 15–18 APA documentation of, 140 application cover letters, 36–41 bad-news patterns for, 114–16 clarity in, 116–17 closings, 114–15 CMS documentation of, 148–49, 151 collection letters, 79–82 complaint message, 94–95 cover messages, 117–18 e-mail, 168–71 emphasis in, 116–17 employment offers and, 8–9, 281 ethics in writing and, 171 form letters, 196–98 good-news patterns for, 113–14 goodwill and, 111–13 headings in, 116–17 inquiries and responses, 260–62 international, 268–73 letters, 311–16 lists in, 116

1216

memos, 330–31 MLA documentation of, 157–58 names and titles in, 4, 314 openings, 115–16, 283–84 order-of-importance method of development for, 361–63 outlining for, 365 point of view in, 387 reference letters, 447–49 refusals, 449–52 for reports, 454 resignation letters, 463 sales letters, 486–87 thank-you letters, 276, 281 transmittals, 117–18 writer’s checklists for, 112–13, 117

cost analysis, in sales proposals, 422 sample of, 428

count nouns, 350 adjectives and, 13 articles with, 175 subject-verb agreement and, 23

cover messages (or transmittals), 117–18. See also application cover letters

context in, 105 for e-mail attachments, 169 for faxes, 491 for formal reports, 198, 203 for grant proposals, 237 for meeting agendas, 327 for questionnaires, 438, 441

1217

for résumés, See also application cover letters for sales proposals, 421–22, 424 samples of, 118, 203, 328, 424, 438

credible / creditable, 118 critique, 118 cultural differences. See also global communication; global graphics; international correspondence

as context, 105 in directness of messages, 113–14, 228–29, 269 international correspondence and, 268–73 listening and, 317 visuals and graphics and, 232–34

currency, of sources, 457 curriculum vitae, 466n. See also résumés cutaway drawings. See drawings -d endings, 520, 535 dangling modifiers, 119

active voice for, 544 ambiguity and, 30 phrases as, 382–83

dashes, 120–21 for emphasis, 120, 173 for enclosing elements, 120, 493 vs. hyphens, 251

data, 121 data, numerical. See numerical data databases, 458–59

CMS documentation of, 143 for employment, 297 MLA documentation of, 155

1218

for periodicals, 458–59 résumés for, 482 search strategies, 457–58, 460

dates, 121–22 apostrophes in, 35 capitalization of, 67 commas in, 88, 121 format for writing, 88, 121–22 on forms, 222, 224 in headers or footers, 248, 309 in international correspondence, 121, 273 in letters, 312 numbers in, 354, 355 plurals of, 36 publication, 199 slashes in, 503 in subtitles, 199, 524

datum, 121 days. See dates de facto / de jure, 122 deceptive language, avoiding, 180, 390 decimal numbering system

for headings, 251 for outlines, 366

decimals commas with, 89 numerals for, 354 periods with, 89, 376

declarative sentences, 495 decreasing order-of-importance method of development, 333,

1219

363 sample of, 362

defective / deficient, 122 defining terms, 122–23. See also definition method of development; definitions

audience and, 44–46, 124, 234–35 in executive summaries, 182–83 glossaries for, 234–35 plain language and, 385–86

definite articles, 42–43 definite / definitive, 123 definition method of development, 124–26, 331 definitions. See also defining terms; word meanings

by analogy, 124 by cause, 125 circular, 123 by components, 125 by exploration of origin, 125–26 extended, 124 formal and informal, 123 in glossaries, 234–35 is when / is where, 123 negative, 123, 126 opening with, 285

definitive / definite, 123 deletions. See omissions delivery schedules, in sales proposals, 422

sample of, 428 delivery techniques, for presentations, 401–2 demonstrative adjectives, 12–13

1220

and agreement in number, 12–13, 26 with count nouns, 175

demonstrative pronouns, 411 denotation, 48, 103 dependent clauses, 75

and sentence structure, 494 subordinating conjunctions with, 102 subordination of, 513–14

description, 126–28 samples of, 126–27, 508 spatial method of development for, 508–9 of vendor, in sales proposals, 423

descriptive abstracts, 6–8 descriptive adjectives, 12, 14 descriptors, in electronic résumés, 482 design. See layout and design design patents, 107 desktop publishing software, 309, 347 detail

in description, 126–28 opening with, 285

development. See grant proposals; methods of development dialectal English, 177–78 dictionaries

APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 146 MLA documentation of, 156 for research, 459 for usage, 531 for word choice, 549–50

1221

differ from / differ with, 128 different from / different than, 128 difficult personalities, 329 digital object identifier. See DOI (digital object identifier) digital (and print) portfolios, 301–2 direct address, 128

comma with, 86, 128 for emphasis, 173

direct objects, 356 as complements, 96 gerunds as, 533 nouns as, 351 pronoun case and, 70 transitive verbs and, 356, 536 verbals as, 175

direct quotations. See quotations direct statements

for emphasis, 173 for plain language, 385

directional cues, in Web design, 552 discreet / discrete, 129 disinterested / uninterested, 129 division-and-classification method of development, 129–32, 333 document capture and linking, 133 document design. See layout and design document management, 132–33

systems for, 132–33 documenting sources, 133–60. See also APA documentation; citations, in-text; CMS documentation; MLA documentation

1222

abbreviations for, 4–5 APA style, 137–42 bibliographies and, 50–51 CMS style, 143–53 common knowledge, 385 copyright and, 107 drawings and, 164 ethics in writing and, 542 footnotes and endnotes, 143–44 in formal reports, 202 MLA style, 154–60 note-taking and, 349 paraphrasing and, 373, 385 photographs and, 380, 542 plagiarism and, 134, 385 in presentation slides, 399, 542 in proposals, 418 purposes of, 133–34 quotations and, 134, 444, 446 samples of, 141–42, 152–53, 159–60 style manuals for, 134–36 in tables, 517, 542 for Web content, 553

DOI (digital object identifier) APA citation of, 137 CMS citation of, 143

domain names, 461 dots. See ellipses double negatives, 161–62, 390 drafting. See writing a draft

1223

drawings, 162–65. See also visuals ethics in writing and, 164 functions of, 540 samples of, 162–64 writer’s checklist for, 165

due to / because of, 165, 185 dummy, in page design, 311 each, 166

pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 25, 166, 413 subject-verb agreement with, 23, 25, 166, 413

each other, 412 economic / economical, 166 -ed endings, 520, 535 edited collections

APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 145 MLA documentation of, 156

editing. See also proofreading; revision proofreaders’ marks for, 414–15 writer’s checklist for, xxv–xxvi

editions, book APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 145 MLA documentation of, 155

educational material, copyright and, 106 effect. See cause-and-effect method of development effect / affect, 20 e.g. / i.e., 166–67 either . . . or

as correlative conjunction, 102

1224

in parallel structure, 372 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 27 subject-verb agreement with, 24–25

electronic résumés, 297, 482–83 electronic sources. See also Internet research

APA documentation of, 138–40 CMS documentation of, 147–50 MLA documentation of, 157–58

elegant variation, 21 ellipses, 167

periods as, 375 in quoted material, 445

elliptical constructions, commas with, 88 elude / refer / allude, 28 e-mail, 168–71. See also correspondence

abbreviations in, 2, 169 accuracy in, 168 addresses, 169, 478 APA documentation of, 139, 140 attachments, 169, 171 bad-news patterns for, 115 closings for, 169–70 CMS documentation of, 148–49 confidentiality and, 168 design and, 169–70 for form letters, 196–98 functions of, 168, 489–90 hyphens in, 253 interviewing by, 275 managing, 171

1225

for memos, 330–31 MLA documentation of, 157 netiquette, 169 for newsletters, 347 openings for, 115–16, 283 overload, 171 professionalism and, 168, 169–70 for research, 456–57 responding to, 169, 171 for résumés, 478, 482–83 salutations for, 169–70 samples of, 530 signature blocks for, 170 social media and, 504 subject line of, 67, 117, 169, 524 vs. text messaging, 522 tone for, 526 writer’s checklists for, 171

emoticons, 169 emphasis, 172–73

active voice for, 173 clarity and, 75, 116–17 climactic order for, 172 colons for, 82 conjunctions for, 102 in correspondence, 116–17 dashes for, 120, 173 direct statements for, 173 ethics in writing and, 180–81 figures of speech for, 192

1226

intensifiers for, 173, 267 italics for, 287 pace and, 368 parallel structure for, 371–73 position for, 172 repetition for, 173, 453 in résumés, 467 sentence construction and, 172, 493, 499 subordination for, 513 typography for, 173, 308–9 word order and, 493

employment agencies, 298–99 employment process. See also online professional profile

acceptances / refusals, 8–9 application cover letters, 36–41 applications genres, 301–3 internships and co-ops, 299–300 job descriptions, 291–93 job interviews, 276–86 job searches, 293–303 reference letters, 447–49 resignation letters, 463 résumés, 466–83 returning job Seekers, 477 salary negotiations, 280 service internship and “gap year” opportunities, 300 social media review and, 505 volunteering, 295, 476–77

enclosure notations, 169, 315–16 encyclopedias

1227

APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 146 MLA documentation of, 156 for research, 459

end notations, in correspondence, 315–16 end punctuation. See sentence endings endnotes. See footnotes / endnotes English, varieties of, 177–78

colloquial, 177 dialectal, 177–78 localisms, 178 nonstandard, 177 slang, 178 standard, 177, 510

English as a second language, 174–77 adjective clauses, 176 articles, 175 count nouns, 174 gerunds and infinitives, 175–76 mass nouns, 174 present perfect tense, 176–77 progressive tenses, 177

ensure / assure / insure, 267 entry lines and fields, in forms, 222–23 enumeration

colons with, 493 for transitions, 371, 527, 528

equal / unique / perfect, 178–79 -er / -est endings, 13, 19 -es endings

1228

for plurals, 352, 354, 391 for verbs, 352–53, 538

-ese endings, 21 ESL. See English as a second language essays, quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525 -est endings, 13–14, 20 etc., 179 ethics in writing, 179–81

affectation and, 21 bcc: notations and, 171 for blogs and forums, 53 for boilerplate content, 422 copyright and, 106, 107 documenting sources and, 202, 553 for drawings, 164 euphemisms and, 179–80, 181 for FAQs, 185 for formal reports, 202 for forms, 220–21 graphs and, 241, 539 for incident reports, 256 for instant messaging and live chat, 263 I / we usage, 63, 388 job applications and, 302, 303 logic errors and, 320 for note-taking, 349 paraphrasing and, 373 passive voice, 179–80, 545 persuasive writing and, 378 photographs and, 380–81

1229

plagiarism and, 202, 349, 380–81 positive writing and, 390 for presentation slides, 399 for promotional writing, 409 for questionnaires, 441, 457 for quotations, 443, 444 for reference letters, 449 for repurposed content, 385, 455–56 for research, 457 for résumés, 467 for sales letters, 487 for sales proposals, 421, 422 for visuals, 539, 542 for Web content, 553 writer’s checklist for, 180–81

ethnic groups bias toward, avoiding, 50 capitalization of names of, 66

euphemisms, 181 as affectation, 21 ethics in writing and, 179, 181 as gobbledygook, 235

evaluating sources, 461–62. See also evidence every

pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 25 subject-verb agreement with, 25

everybody / everyone, 181–82 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 25, 181–82 subject-verb agreement with, 181

everyday / every day, 182

1230

evidence biased or suppressed, 321 evaluating, 71–72, 462

except / accept, 8 exclamation marks, 182

commas with, 89 for interjections, 182, 268

exclamatory sentences, 495 executive summaries, 182–83

in formal reports, 201, 207–8 in proposals, 422, 425 samples of, 207–8, 425 writer’s checklist for, 183

experimentation, and technology, 11 explanations

in adjustment messages, 18 in bad-news patterns, 114

explanatory notes, in formal reports, 201 expletives, 183

wordiness and, 98 explicit / implicit, 184 exploded-view drawings. See drawings exploration of origin, definition by, 125–26 exposition, 184 extended definitions, 124 external proposals, 418–23 external Web sites, 52, 491–92 eye contact, in presentations, 402, 403 Facebook, 297, 358, 492, 504–6 fact, 185

1231

facts, vs. opinions, 185, 321 fair use, 106 fallacies. See logic errors false cause, 72, 321 false impressions

and ethics in writing, 179–80 and job applications, 302

FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), 185–87 ethics in writing and, 185 writer’s checklist for, 186–87

fault, admitting. See adjustment messages faxes, 491 feasibility reports, 187–90

sample of, 188–89 titles for, 523–24

few / a few, 190 fewer / less, 190 figuratively / literally, 190 figures, list of, 200, 543. See also numbering; visuals figures of speech, 178, 191–92 file sharing, 79 films

APA documentation of, 139 capitalization in titles of, 67, 102 CMS documentation of, 149 italics for titles of, 289, 524 MLA documentation of, 157

financial statements, 33, 62 fine, 192 finite verbs, 534

1232

first / firstly, 192 first names, in correspondence, 170, 273, 314 first person, 377

antecedents and, 414 in narration, 342 point of view, 386–88

first words. See capitalization Five Steps to Successful Writing, xvii–xxiii. See also writing process flames, e-mail, 169 flip charts, 399 flowcharts, 193–95, 541. See also visuals

samples of, 193–95 fonts, 307, 552. See also typography footers. See headers and footers footnotes / endnotes. See also documenting sources

in CMS style, 135, 143–44 in formal reports, 201 for graphs, 246 for tables, 517

for example vs. e.g. / i.e., 166–67 in sentence fragments, 498

forced choice questions, 224 forceful / forcible, 195 foreign words in English, 195–96. See also Latin words

affectation and, 21, 196 italics for, 196, 287

foreword / forward, 196 forewords, in formal reports, 200

1233

form letters, 196–98 professionalism and, 197

formal definitions, 123 formal internal proposals, 417–18 formal reports, 198–219. See also report elements; reports

abstracts of, 6–8, 200 back matter, 202 body of, 201–2 ethics in writing and, 202 format for, 198–99 front matter, 199–201 functions of, 454 sample of, 203–19 technology for, 202

formal style, 510–11. See also style as affectation, 21 in business writing, 63 in correspondence, 109–10, 273

format, 220. See also chapters and sections; layout and design for activity reports, 406 for business letters, 311–16 for business plans, 60 consistency in, 415 for external proposals, 418 for formal reports, 198–99 for memos, 331–32 for mission statements, 337–38 for newsletters, 347 for résumés, 478–82 templates for, 220, 312

1234

for titles of works, 524–25 former / latter, 220 forms, 220–24. See also application genres

ethics in writing and, 220, 222 samples of, 221

forums, Web. See blogs and forums fractions

numerals vs. words, 354–55 slashes in, 503

fragments. See sentence fragments Frequently Asked Questions. See FAQs front matter, for formal reports, 199–201 full adjustments, 17–18 full justification, 309 full-block-style letter, 312

sample of, 313 full-scale introductions, 286 functional résumé, 479

sample of, 474 functional shift, 224–25 funding. See grant proposals further. See conjunctive adverbs fused sentences, 377, 485 future perfect tense, 520, 521 future progressive tense, 520 future tense, 521 Gantt charts, 243, 244 gap year. See service internship and “gap year” opportunities garbled sentences, 226. See also mixed constructions gathering information. See research

1235

gender, 227. See also sexist language agreement in, 22, 25, 227, 413 in global graphics, 232–34 of nouns and pronouns, 227 unknown, in salutations, 312, 314

general and specific methods of development, 227–28, 333 samples of, 227–28

generalizations, sweeping, 320–21 genre. See selecting the medium geographic features

capitalization of, 67–68 maps for, 323–25, 540

gerund phrases, 383–84 gerunds, 533–34, 537

object of, and pronoun case, 70 possessive pronouns with, 392

gestures cultural differences in, 232–33 in presentations, 402

global communication, 228–32. See also cultural differences; international correspondence

context and, 228–29 idioms and, 254 punctuation for, 234 visuals and graphics for, 232–34 Web content and, 553 writer’s checklist for, 232

global graphics, 232–34 samples of, 233

glossaries, 234–35

1236

in formal reports, 202 in instructions, 264 in proposals, 416

goals. See also purpose in business plans, 61 career, 293 in mission statements, 335–38

gobbledygook, 235 as affectation, 21 ethics in writing and, 180

good / well, 235 good-news patterns, 113–14

samples of, 113 goodwill, establishing

with acknowledgment, 10 with adjustment messages, 15–18 blogs and forums for, 51–53 in closings, 114–15 in correspondence, 111–13 in refusals, 8, 450 social media for, 504 writer’s checklist for, 112–13 “you” viewpoint for, 554

Google, 460 government agencies

invitation for bids from, 418, 420–21 job searches and, 298–99

government publications APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151

1237

MLA documentation of, 158 as public domain, 107

grammar, 235–36 grammar checkers, 414, 485 grant proposals, 236–40. See also proposals

writer’s checklist for, 240 graphics. See visuals graphs, 240–47. See also visuals

for annual reports, 34 for brochure, 56 ethics in writing and, 241, 539 functions of, 540–41 for presentations, 401 for project schedules, 243, 244 samples of, 241–46 vs. tables, 240, 516 writer’s checklist for, 246–47

had / have, 500, 520, 535 handbooks

for research, 459 for technological tools, 11

hardly, 20, 161 hardware, adapting to new, 11 have / had, 500, 520, 535 he / him / his, 68–71, 377, 412–13 he / she, 248. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; sexist language headers and footers, 248–49

on continuing pages, 316 in page design, 309

1238

samples of, 249, 316 headings, 249–51

in brochures, 56 in correspondence, 116–17, 312 in document design, 309 in forms, 222 in instructions, 265 italics for, 290 levels of, 249, 251, 366 in meeting minutes, 333 in newsletters, 347 numbering, 251 in outlines, 366 parallel structure for, 372 in résumés, 478 in sales proposals, 422 sample of, 250 style for, 249 in tables, 516 in tables of contents, 200, 518 in trip reports, 529 typography for, 308 in Web design, 551 writer’s checklist for, 251

headlines in blogs and forums, 53 in form letters, 197 in résumés, 478–79

help menus and manuals, 11. See also instructions helping verbs, 384, 494, 537

1239

highlighting devices. See layout and design; typography hooks, in openings, 286 however. See conjunctive adverbs how-to guides, 11. See also instructions humor

in global communication, 269 malapropisms, 323 quotation marks and, 444

hyperbole, 191 hyperlinks. See links hyphens, 251–53

clarity and, 252 for compound words, 97, 251 with modifiers, 252 with numbers, 122, 252–53 with prefixes, 252, 392–93 with suffixes, 252 for word division, 253

I between you and . . . , 49, 394 in business writing style, 63, 388 vs. me, 68–71 me / my / mine, 377, 412–13 in résumés, 481 vs. you, 111–12

icons, 310–11, 541 idioms, 254, 269, 394 i.e. / e.g., 166–67 -ies endings, for plurals, 352, 354 if and when, 547

1240

IFB. See invitation for bids illusion / allusion, 28 illustrations. See visuals IM. See instant messaging and live chat image, business

brochures for promoting, 55–58 in mission statements, 335–38 in newsletters, 346 in press releases, 403–5 visuals and, 34

imperative mood, 340 for conciseness, 99 for instructions, 264 for nonsexist language, 248

imperative sentences, 495. See also commands impersonal point of view, 387 implicit / explicit, 184 imply / infer, 254 in / into, 255 in order to, 255 in regard to, 452 in terms of, 255 incidence / incident, 255 incident / incidence, 255 incident reports, 256

sample of, 257 increasing order-of-importance method of development, 333, 363 indefinite adjectives, 13 indefinite articles, 1, 42–43

1241

indefinite pronouns, 411 one, 357 possessive case of, 392 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 413 subject-verb agreement with, 22, 413

independent clauses in comma splices, 84 connecting with comma and coordinating conjunction, 85 connecting with conjunctive adverb and semicolon, 19, 89, 103, 492 in run-on sentences, 377, 485 and sentence structure, 495

indexes to periodicals, 458–59. See also subject directories indexing, 202, 256

for formal reports, 202 sample of, 160 technology for, 160, 202

indicative mood, 99, 340 indirect objects, 96, 356

as complements, 96 nouns as, 351 pronoun case and, 70

indirect quotations, 442, 445. See also quotations indiscreet / indiscrete, 258 infer / imply, 254 infinitive phrases, 383 infinitives, 534–35

with helping verbs, 537 split, 534–35 subject of, and pronoun case, 70

1242

to as sign of, 383, 534, 537 infographics, 258–60

sample of, 259 writer’s checklist for, 260

informal definitions, 123 informal internal proposals, 417 informal reports, 454 informal style, 511–12. See also business writing style; style informal tables, 517 information sources. See research information technology (IT) specialists, 11 informational brochures, 55–59 informational interviews, 296. See also interviewing for information informative abstracts, 6–8

sample of, 7 informative writing, 184 -ing endings

gerunds, 383–84, for present participles, 535

initialisms. See acronyms and initialisms initials, 315, 376 inquiries and responses, 260–62

for job searches, 301 samples of, 261, 262 for unsolicited proposals, 421

inside / inside of, 263 inside address, 312–13 instant messaging and live chat, 263. See also text messaging.

abbreviations in, 3, 263

1243

ethics in writing and, 263 functions of, 490 social media and, 504 writer’s checklist for, 263

Institutional Review Board (IRB), 457 instructions, 264–67

chronological order for, 73 context of, 104 for forms, 222–23 infographics for, 258–60 plain language for, 264 point of view in, 386–88 procedures as, 289–90 sample of, 266 sequential method of development for, 264, 501–2 testing, 266 visuals for, 162–65, 265 warnings in, 182, 265 writer’s checklist for, 267

insure / ensure / assure, 267 intensifiers, 267–68

adverbs as, 339, 367 for emphasis, 173 overuse of, 5, 99, 267 really and actually, 447 very, 538

intensive pronouns, 411 interface, 268 interjections, 268

commas with, 268

1244

exclamation marks with, 182 internal proposals, 417–18

sample of, 419–20 internal Web sites, 52, 491–92 international correspondence, 268–73. See also global communication

bad-news patterns for, 114–16 context and, 228–29 cultural differences and, 228–29, 269 dates in, 121, 273 euphemisms and, 181 figures of speech and, 192 good-news patterns for, 113–14 idioms and, 254, 269 indirect style for, 229, 269 plain language for, 385–86 punctuation for, 234 salutations for, 234 samples of, 270–72 visuals and graphics for, 240–42 writer’s checklist for, 273

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) symbols. See ISO symbols International System of Units (SI), 4 Internet. See blogs and forums; Internet research; online postings; URLs; Web design; Web sites; writing for the Web Internet research, 460–61. See also electronic sources; library resources; research

evaluating sources, 462 for job searches, 296

1245

primary research, 456–57 search engines, 460 subject directories, 461 writer’s checklist for, 460

internships and co-ops, 299–300 interrogative adverbs, 19 interrogative pronouns, 411 interrogative sentences, 436, 495. See also questions interrupting elements, commas with, 86 interviewing for a job, 276–82. See also employment process

application cover letters, 36–41 follow-up procedures, 8–9, 281 listening, 279, 317–18 professionalism and, 279 résumés and, 466 salary negotiations and, 280–81 sample thank-you note, 282

interviewing for information, 273–76 for annual reports, 33 for job searches, 296 listening, 275, 317–18 for newsletter articles, 344 professionalism and, 274–75 questionnaires and, 437 for research, 457 writer’s checklist for, 275–76

interviews APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151 MLA documentation of, 158

1246

in-text citations. See citations, in-text intranet, 52, 491–92 intransitive verbs, 305, 536–37 introductions, 283–86. See also openings

conclusions and, 101–2 context in, 105 for feasibility reports, 198–99 for grant proposals, 237–38 for newsletter articles, 346 for presentations, 396–98 for process explanations, 405 for progress reports, 406 for proposals, 417 for reports, 201, 209–11, 454 sample of, 209–11 setting tone with, 526

introductory elements. See also sentence openings commas with, 86–87 dangling modifiers as, 119 wordiness and, 99

inverted sentences for emphasis, 496 subject-verb agreement and, 25 for variety, 500

investigative reports, 287 sample of, 288

invitation for bids, 418. See also requests for proposals IRB (Institutional Review Board), 457 irregardless, 453 is when / is where, 123

1247

ISO symbols for flowcharts, 193–95 for global communication, 234 samples of, 195, 233

it as expletive, 183 and its, 377, 411 as subject, 494

IT (information technology) specialists, 11 italics, 287–90

for emphasis, 173, 287, 309 for foreign words, 195–96, 287 for proper names, 289 for subheadings, 289 for titles of works, 287–88, 524–25 for words, letters, and numbers, 289

its / it’s, 290 jammed modifiers. See stacked modifiers jargon, 291

as affectation, 21 buzzwords as, 64 ethics in writing and, 179 as functional shift, 224–25 in global communication, 269 as gobbledygook, 235 vs. plain language, 385–86

job applications. See application genres; job search; résumés job descriptions, 291–93

in résumés, 481 sample of, 292

1248

writer’s checklist for, 293 job interviews. See interviewing for a job job search, 293–3. See also employment process; interviewing for a job

advertisements, 297–98 application cover letters, 36–41 application genres, 301–3 campus career services, 296 employment agencies, 298–99 ethics in writing and, 303 informational interviews, 296 inquiries, 301 internships and co-ops, 299–300 networking, 296 online professional profile, 358–61 online resources for, 482–83 personal brand and branding, 295, 297 professionalism and, 297, 302 research for, 297 résumés, 466–83 service internship and “gap year” opportunities, 300 social media for, 504–7 trade and professional listings, 298 writer’s checklist for, 302

job titles capitalization of, 68 in résumés, 479

journals. See articles in periodicals; periodicals justification, in page design, 309 key terms. See also keyword searches

1249

defining, 122–23 for indexing, 256 repetition of, 173, 453, 527 in résumés, 306, 482 in Web content, 551–52

keys (legends) for graphs, 246 for maps, 325 for symbols, 193, 542

keyword searches. See also key terms for catalogs and databases, 457–58 for job listings, 298 for search engines, 460 for technical help, 11

kind / type / sort, 12–13, 27 kind of / sort of, 12–13, 27, 304 know-how, 304 labels

for drawings, 165 for flowcharts, 193 for forms, 223 for graphs, 243, 246–47 for maps, 323 for photographs, 380

language. See also English as a second language; word choice biased, 49–50 deceptive, 180, 390 plain, 385–86 pretentious, 21 sexist, 26, 49–50, 248, 413–14

1250

Latin words. See also foreign words in English abbreviations for, 4–5, 166–67, 179 ad hoc, 10 de facto / de jure, 122 quid pro quo, 442 via, 538

latter / former, 220 lay / lie, 305 layout and design, 305–11. See also format; Web design

for annual reports, 34 for blogs, 52 for brochures, 55–59 captions, 311 color in, 310 columns, 310 for e-mail, 169–70 ethics in writing and, 179 for FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), 185 for forms, 222–23 headers and footers, 248–49, 309 headings, 249, 309 for instructions, 265 justification in, 309 for letters, 311–16 for lists, 309 medium and, 455 for newsletters, 347 page-design elements and, 309–10 persuasion and, 378 for presentation visuals, 399

1251

for promotional writing, 409 for résumés, 466–67 rules for, 311 templates for, 220 thumbnails and, 311 typography and, 307–9 of visuals, 310–11, 542 white space and, 310, 311 writing process and, xxii

lectures, MLA documentation of, 158. See also presentations left-justified margins, 309 legal cases, italics for titles of, 287, 524 legal terms

as affectation, 21 de facto / de jure, 122 ethics in writing and, 180 party, 375 vs. plain language, 385–86 quid pro quo, 442

legalese, 235 legends. See keys (legends) lend / loan, 311 length

of business plans, 60 of mission statements, 338–39 of paragraphs, 369 of résumés, 467 of sentences, 172, 499

less / fewer, 190 letterhead stationery, 311–12, 490

1252

letters, 311–16. See also correspondence; salutations body of, 314–15 closings for, 315 formatting, 312 functions of, 490 headings in, 222 openings for, 114–15, 283, 312, 314 samples of, 313

letters of the alphabet capitalization of, 68 italics for, 289 in outlines, 365–66 plurals of, 36

library resources, 457–60. See also Internet research; research catalogs, 458 databases and indexes, 458–59 library homepage, 457–58 reference works, 459

lie / lay, 305 -like, 514 like / as, 316 limiting adjectives, 12, 42 line drawings. See drawings line graphs. See graphs LinkedIn.com, 295–97, 301, 358, 360, 492, 504–7 linking verbs, 69, 536–37 links

in blog writing, 53 in electronic résumés, 483 in Web content, 552–53

1253

listening, 317–18 in interviews, 275, 279 in meetings, 328

list-hosting service, 347 lists, 318–20

of abbreviations and symbols, in reports, 201 in brochures, 56, 57 bulleted, 116, 318, 319–20 colons before, 82, 83, 319 consistency in, 319 contact, 263 in correspondence, 116 in document design, 309 of figures and tables, 200, 543 formatting for, 320 in inquiries, 261 in instructions, 265 numbered, 318, 376 parallel structure for, 372 periods in, 376 in presentations, 319, 401 sample of, 319 in Web design, 455, 551 writer’s checklist for, 319–20

literally / figuratively, 190 literature review, in grant proposals, 238 litotes, 192 live chat. See instant messaging and live chat loaded arguments, 322 loaded sentences, 496

1254

loan / lend, 311 localisms, 178 logic errors, 320–22

biased or suppressed evidence, 321 double negatives and, 161–62 ethics in writing and, 320 fact vs. opinion, 185, 321 false cause, 72, 321 lack of reason, 320 loaded arguments, 322 mixed constructions, 338 non sequiturs, 321 in sentence construction, 498 sweeping generalizations, 320–21

long quotations. See block quotations long variants, 21, 235 loose / lose, 322 loose sentences, 495 -ly endings, 20, 252 magazines. See articles in periodicals; periodicals mailing lists, 347, 486 malapropisms, 323 manuals

for research, 459 for technological tools, 11

maps, 323–25. See also visuals in brochure, 56 functions of, 540 sample of, 324 writer’s checklist for, 324–25

1255

margins for brochures, 58 for letters, 312–13 in page design, 309

market analysis and strategy, in business plans, 61 marketing. See promotional writing marketing plan, in business plans, 62 mass nouns, 350

articles and, 175 subject-verb agreement and, 23

may / can, 65 maybe / may be, 325 me

between you and . . . , 49, 394 vs. I, 68–71 and my / mine, 68–71, 377, 412–13

mean / average / median, 46 measurements

abbreviations for, 3–4 average / median / mean, 46 in global communication, 273 numerals vs. words, 354–55 subject-verb agreement with, 23 units of, 3

media, social. See social media media / medium, 325 median / mean / average, 46 medium. See selecting the medium medium / media, 325 meetings, 325–30. See also minutes of meetings

1256

agendas for, 326–27 attendees, 326 closing, 330 conducting, 328–30 conference calls for, 491 conflict in, 329 face-to-face, 491 functions of, 491 planning for, 325–37 purpose of, 325–26 smartphones and, 330 technology for, 490–92 writer’s checklist for, 330

memos, 330–31. See also correspondence bad-news patterns for, 115 chronological order for, 73 as cover letters, 198, 203 format for, 331 functions of, 490 openings for, 115–16, 283–84 order-of-importance method of development for, 361–63 professionalism and, 331 protocols for sending, 331 samples of, 74, 203, 332, 362, 379, 438 subject line of, 67, 114, 524 tone for, 526 transmittals, 117–18

metaphors, 192 metasearch engines, 460 methods of development, 331, 333

1257

cause-and-effect, 71–73 chronological, 73 clarity and, 75 comparison, 91–93 definition, 124–26 division-and-classification, 129–32 general and specific, 227–28 order-of-importance, 361–63 for organization, 363–64 sequential, 501–2 spatial, 508–9 writing process and, xxi–xxii

metonyms, 192 metric system, 3–4 milestones, in business plans, 61 mind mapping, 54 minor sentences, 496 minutes of meetings, 333–35. See also meetings

assigning responsibility for, 327 chronological order for, 73 sample of, 334 writer’s checklist for, 334–35

misplaced modifiers, 30, 339–40, 383 Miss / Mrs. / Ms., 341 mission statements, 335–38

in business plans, 61 sample of, 336

mixed constructions, 338. See also garbled sentences MLA documentation, 135–36, 154–58 See also documenting sources

1258

for articles in periodicals, 156–57 for books, 155–56 documentation models, 154–58 for electronic sources, 157 in-text citations, 154 for miscellaneous sources, 158 for multimedia sources, 157–58 sample pages, 159–60, 219 works-cited list, 135–36, 160

mobile phones, 490, 522 Modern Language Association. See MLA documentation modified-block-style letter, 312 modifiers, 338–40. See also adjectives; adverbs

ambiguous use of, 29–30 dangling, 119 hyphens with, 252 misplaced, 30, 339–40 order of, 14 redundant, 97 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 465–66 sentence construction and, 493–94 squinting, 340 stacked (jammed), 14, 339

money, numbers for, 354–55 months. See dates mood, 340–41

helping verbs and, 537 imperative, 340 indicative, 340–41 subjunctive, 340–41

1259

more / most for comparison, 13, 20, 178 subject-verb agreement with, 23

more than / as much as, 44 moreover. See conjunctive adverbs movies. See films Ms. / Miss / Mrs., 313, 341 multilingual writers. See English as a second language multimedia sources

APA documentation of, 138–40 CMS documentation of, 147–50 MLA documentation of, 157–58

multiple audiences, 45–46. See also audience multiple authors

APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 144 MLA documentation of, 155

multiple books by same author APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 145–46 MLA documentation of, 156

multiple-choice questions, 223 multivolume works

APA documentation of, 137 CMS documentation of, 145 MLA documentation of, 156

musical works, titles of italics for, 289, 525 quotation marks for, 443, 525

mutual / common, 341

1260

names and titles. See also organization names; proper nouns abbreviations for, 3 capitalization of, 67 commas with, 89 first names, 170, 313–14 initials for, 315, 376 in international correspondence, 269, 273 in letters, 313–14, 315 Ms. / Miss / Mrs., 313–14, 341 on title pages, 199 unknown, 314

naming conventions for documents, 133 narration, 342

sample of, 343 narrative section. See also body

in annual reports, 32–33 in grant proposals, 238–39

National Institute of Standards and Technology, 4 nationalities, capitalization names of, 66 nature, 342 navigational cues, in Web design, 552 needless to say, 344 negative definitions, 123, 126 negative messages. See bad-news patterns negatives, double, 161–62, 390 neither . . . nor, 348

as correlative conjunction, 102 double negatives and, 161 in parallel structure, 372 pronoun-antecedent agreement with, 27

1261

subject-verb agreement with, 24 netiquette, 169 networking, 296, 491–92, 504–5 nevertheless. See conjunctive adverbs news releases. See press releases newsletter articles, 344–46. See also articles in periodicals

sample of, 345 titles for, 524 writer’s checklist for, 345–46

newsletters, 346–47 blogs as, 52 format and design for, 308, 347 professionalism and, 347

newspapers. See articles in periodicals; periodicals no, comma with, 85–86 no one / not one, 348 nominalizations, 348 nominative case. See subjective case non sequiturs, 321 none, 348 nonfinite verbs, 537 nonrestrictive elements, 465–66. See also parenthetical elements

commas with, 85, 465–66 which with, 465–66, 522

nonstandard English, 177 nonverbal communication, 401–3 nor / or, 348

and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 26 and subject-verb agreement, 24–25

1262

not double negatives and, 161–62 in verb phrases, 384

not only . . . but also, 102, 372 notes section, in formal reports, 201 note-taking, 349–50

in active listening, 318 drafting and, 550 ethics in writing and, 349 for interviews, 274–75, 276 for minutes of meetings, 327, 333–35 paraphrasing, 373 plagiarism and, 349 for presentations, 403 quotations and, 444 for research, 455–56, 458–59 writer’s checklist for, 349–50

nouns, 350–52 abstract, 350 as adjectives, 14, 351, 391 collective, 24, 350, 351 common, 66, 350 compound, 391 concrete, 350 coordinate, 392 count, 13, 23, 174, 350 functions of, 351 gender of, 227 gerunds as, 537 mass, 23, 174, 350

1263

as objects, 356 participles as, 537 phrases as, 381, 384 plurals of, 352, 391 possessive case of, 70, 392, 534 pronouns modifying, 413 proper, 66, 350 as subjects, 494 types of, 350 verbals as, 533

number (grammar), 352–53. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; subject-verb agreement number (word)

vs. amount, 30 subject-verb agreement with, 23

numbered lists. See lists numbering

in decimal headings, 251, 366–67 for figures, 200, 355 for maps, 323 in outlines, 366 for photographs, 380 for tables, 200, 355, 516

numbers, 353–55. See also measurements; numerical data in addresses, 355 as adjectives, 13 cardinal, 13, 121 for chapters and volumes, 355 colons with, 82–83 commas with, 88–89

1264

in dates, 355 for figures and tables, 355 fractions, 354 hyphens with, 122, 252–53 italics for, 289 measurements, 354 money, 354–55 numerals vs. words, 13, 353–54 ordinal, 13, 121 for pages, 355 in parentheses, 355, 374 percentages, 354, 375 periods with, , 375–76 plurals of, 39, 354 slashes with, 503 for time, 355

numerical data in grant proposals, 239 in graphs, 240–47, 540 in tables, 516, 540

object of preposition, 356 gerunds as, 533 no colon before, 83 nouns as, 351 pronoun case and, 70, 393–94

objective case, 69–70, 412–13 objective complements, 96, 351 objectives

in grant proposals, 238–39 opening with, 284

1265

in résumés, 478–79 objects, 356. See also direct objects; indirect objects; object of preposition observation, in research, 457 of

possessive case using, 391 redundant use of, 263, 367, 395 with this kind / these kinds / that type / those types, 12, 26

of which / who’s / whose, 548–49 OK / okay, 356 omissions

apostrophes for, 35 commas for, 88 ellipses for, 167, 445 ethics in writing and, 181 slashes for, 503 telegraphic style and, 518

on / onto / upon, 357 one, 63, 357 one another, 412 one of those . . . who, 357 online chat sessions, 79 online forms. See forms online postings. See also blogs and forums

APA documentation of, 139 CMS documentation of, 148 MLA documentation of, 157

online professional profile, 358–61 audience and purpose, 358, 360 experience, education, and skills, 361

1266

personal identifying information, 360 sites for, 358, 360 writing style for, 360–61

online resources. See Internet research; Web sites online tutorials, 11 only, 20, 361 open-ended questions, 223 openings. See also introductions

for adjustment messages, 15, 17 for application cover letters, 40–41 for bad-news letters, 114–15 for correspondence, 115–16 good news in, 113–14 hooks in, 286 for international correspondence, 269 for investigative reports, 287 for refusals, 451 routine, 283 for sales letters, 487

opinions conflicting, 378 vs. facts, 185, 321 point of view for, 387

or / nor, 348 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 26 and subject-verb agreement, 24–25

oral presentations. See presentations order-of-importance method of development, 333, 361–63 ordinal numbers, 121

as modifiers, 13

1267

spelling out, 353 organization, 363–64. See also methods of development

coherence and, 77 for document management, 133 for job searching, 294 outlining, 364–67 paragraphs and, 369 for presentations, 396–98 for résumés, 466–67, 478–82 for sales proposals, 421–23 writer’s checklist for, xxv

writing process and, xxi–xxii organization description, in grant proposals, 239 organization names

abbreviations of, 3 ampersands in, 3, 30–31 capitalization of, 67 as singular nouns, 351 on title pages, 199–200, 422

organizational charts, 364, 541 sample of, 364

organizational newsletters, 346 organizational sales pitch, in proposals, 423

sample of, 432 origins, definitions exploring, 125–26 our / ours, 377, 412 outcomes, in grant proposals, 238–39 outlining, 364–67

abstracts and, 8 brainstorming and, 54

1268

for clarity, 75 coherence and, 77 drafting and, 365, 370, 550 headings in, 249–51 and method of development, 333 for mission statements, 337 numbers in, 251 for organization, 363–64, 365 parallel structure for, 366 types of, 365, 370 unity and, 531 visuals in, 366, 542 writing process and, xxii

outside [of], 367 over [with], 367 overview, in presentations, 396–97 ownership. See possessive case pace, 368

clarity and, 75 in presentations, 402 regulating, 255, 500

page design. See layout and design page numbers, 355

in formal reports, 200 in headers or footers, 248, 309

paintings, italics for titles of, 289, 525 pamphlets

APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151 italics for titles of, 287, 524

1269

MLA documentation of, 158 panels, brochure, 56–57 paragraphs, 368–71

coherence in, 77, 371 drafting, 370, 550 in e-mail, 169 functions of, 368 length of, 369 outlining, 365, 370 topic sentence of, 368–69 transitions and, 528–29 unity in, 371, 531 in Web content, 551

parallel structure, 371–73 with both . . . and, 53 faulty parallelism, 372–73 for headings, 251 in lists, 319 for nonsexist language, 50 in outlines, 366 in sentence construction, 496

paraphrasing, 373 in active listening, 318 documenting sources and, 134, 385 ethics in writing and, 373 indirect quotations as, 442 in meeting minutes, 333 note-taking and, 349–50

parentheses, 373–74 brackets within, 53–54

1270

commas with, 89, 374 for enclosing elements, 120, 493 numbers in, 355, 374 periods with, 374, 376

parenthetical citations. See citations, in-text parenthetical elements

brackets for, 54, 374 capitalization of, 68 commas with, 85, 465 dashes for, 120, 493 nonrestrictive elements as, 465 parentheses for, 373–74, 493 for sentence variety, 495

part-by-part method of comparison, 92–93 partial adjustments, 18 participial phrases, 382 participles, 535, 537 parts of speech, 374–75 party, 375 passive voice, 545–46

vs. active voice, 544 bad news and, 116 in business writing, 63 ethics in writing and, 179–80, 545 infinitives and, 534 responsibility and, 179–80, 545 wordiness of, 99, 545–46

past participles, 535 past perfect tense, 520 past progressive tense, 520

1271

past tense, 176–77, 520 patents, 107–8 PDF files, 482 Peace Corps, 300 people / persons, 378 per, 375 percent / percentage, 375 percentages, numbers in, 354 perfect / equal / unique, 178–79 perfect participles, 535 perfect tense, 520 periodic sentences, 495, 500–1 periodicals. See also articles in periodicals

currency of, 457 indexes to, 458 italics for titles of, 289, 443, 524–25

periods, 375–77 with abbreviations, 3 commas with, 89 with ellipses, 167 with parentheses, 374, 376 period faults, 376–77 with quotation marks, 376, 444 for run-on sentences, 388

permissions, for copyrighted material, 53, 106–8, 201, 542 person, 377. See also point of view

agreement in, 22, 537–38 in narration, 342 point of view and, 386–87 pronouns and, 414

1272

person / party, 375 personal brand, and job search, 295, 297 personal communications

APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 148–49 MLA documentation of, 158

personal identifying information, 360 personal / personnel, 377 personal names and titles. See names and titles personal pronouns, 413–14

antecedents and, 413–14 in business writing, 63 forms of, 377 point of view and, 386–88

personalities, difficult, 329 personification, 192 persons / people, 378 persuasion, 378

in application cover letters, 36–37 in business plans, 60 ethics in writing and, 378 in grant proposals, 236, 238 in inquiry letters, 260 in openings, 286 in promotional writing, 409 in proposals, 416, 417 in résumés, 467 sample of, 379

photographs, 378–81. See also visuals for annual reports, 33

1273

ethics in writing and, 380–81 functions of, 540

phrases, 381–84 commas with, 85 functions of, 381 gerund, 383–84 infinitive, 383 noun, 384 participial, 382–83 prepositional, 381–82 restrictive and nonrestrictive, 465 verb, 384

pictorial symbols. See symbols picture graphs. See graphs pie graphs. See graphs place names. See geographic features plagiarism, 384–5. See also copyrights, patents, and trademarks

consequences of, 202 documenting sources and, 134 ethics in writing and, 202, 349, 385 note-taking and, 349 repurposing and, 455–56

plain language, 385–86 clarity and, 75 for instructions, 265 point of view and, 386–88 for policies and procedures, 388–90 positive writing and, 390 for Web content, 551 writer’s checklist for, 386

1274

plain-text résumés, 482–83 planning, in collaborative writing, 78–79. See also outlining; preparation plant patents, 107 plays, titles of

capitalization of, 67, 102 italics for, 289, 525

plurals. See also number (grammar) of abbreviations, 3, 36 apostrophes for, 36 of compound words, 97, 352 of foreign words, 196 of nouns, 352 of numbers, 36, 354 possessive case of, 70, 391

podcasts APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 149 MLA documentation of, 158

poems, titles of italics for, 289, 525 quotation marks for, 525

point of view, 386–88. See also “you” viewpoint for business writing, 63 consistent use of, 75, 371 for correspondence, 111–12 ethics in writing and, 388 in narration, 342 person and, 377

policies and procedures, 388–90

1275

decimal number heads for, 366–67 policies, 388 procedures, 389–90 sample of, 389 for social media, 506–7

politeness in correspondence, 112 in global communication, 269 in job interviews, 279 in meetings, 329

portfolios, for résumés, 481–82 position, and emphasis, 172 position descriptions. See job descriptions positive writing, 390

for defining terms, 123 for double negatives, 162 ethics in writing and, 390 in job applications, 302 and plain language, 386 “you” viewpoint, 554

possessive adjectives, 13, 175 possessive case, 391–92

apostrophes for, 35, 391–92 for compound words, 97 of nouns, 70, 391–92 of plurals, 70 of pronouns, 70, 392, 412

post hoc, ergo propter hoc, 321 postal abbreviations, 312 posting to the Web. See blogs and forums

1276

practicing, for presentations, 401, 402–3 predicate adjectives, 14–15 predicate nominative, 494 predicates, 494

complements in, 96 preface, in formal reports, 200–1 prefixes, 392–93

affectation and, 21 hyphens with, 252, 392–93

preparation, 393 analyzing audience needs, 45, 393 for annual reports, 33–34 determining purpose, 434–35 determining scope, 488 for information interviews, 274 for job interviews, 276–78 for research, 456 writer’s checklists for, xxv, 393 writing process and, xviii–xix

prepositional phrases, 381–82 commas with, 90 as modifiers, 394 objects and, 356 overuse of, 382 showing possession, 392

prepositions, 393–95. See also object of preposition agreement in number and, 12–13, 26 at end of sentences, 394 errors with, 395 in idioms, 254

1277

in titles, 394 present participle, 535 present perfect tense, 521

infinitives and, 534 present progressive tense, 520 present tense, 520–21

infinitives and, 534 for instructions, 264

presentation software, 399 presentations, 395–403

anxiety and, 402–3 audience for, 396 delivery techniques for, 401–2 ethics in writing and, 399 infographics for, 258 lists in, 318–20, 400 order-of-importance method of development for, 361–63 practicing, 401 professionalism and, 399 purpose of, 395–96 slides in, 399 structuring, 396–98 technology for, 399 typography for, 400–1 visuals for, 399 writer’s checklists for, 401–2, 403

press releases, 403–5 sample of, 404 writer’s checklist for, 404–5

pretentious language. See affectation

1278

previews, in introductions, 286 primary research, 456–57 principal / principle, 405 privacy statements, for Web sites, 553 problem statement

opening with, 284 in presentations, 396 in proposals, 416, 417, 422

procedures. See policies and procedures process explanation, 405. See also writing process

flowcharts for, 193–95, 541 instructions, 264–67 sequential method of development for, 501

product description in brochures, 57 in business plans, 60–61 in sales letters, 486 in sales proposals, 422, 426 sample of, 426

professional brand, and job search, 296, 297 professional journals, job listings in, 298 professional organizations, online, 298 professionalism notes

acceptances / refusals, 8 adjustment messages, 18 biased language, 50 collaborative writing, 78–79 e-mail, 168 federal job applications, 483 form letters, 197

1279

interviewing for a job, 278 interviewing for information, 274–75 job search, 295, 297 memos, 331 newsletters, 347 presentations, 399 proofreading, 414 résumés, 479, 482 smartphones and meetings, 330 style, 512 telegraphic style, 519

progress and activity reports, 406–8 samples of, 407–8 titles for, 523–24

progressive tense, 520 project description

in grant proposals, 238 in sales proposals, 422

project management, for proposals, 416 projection, in presentations, 402 promotional writing, 409

blogs and forums, 51–53 brochures, 55–59 business plans, 59–62 ethics in writing and, 409 newsletters, 347 press releases, 403–5 sales letters, 486–7 sales proposals, 421–23

pronoun reference, 29, 409–10. See also antecedents

1280

pronoun-antecedent agreement, 22, 25–27. See also agreement with collective nouns, 26, 351 with compound antecedents, 27 with data / datum, 121 with each / every, 25, 166 with everybody / everyone, 26, 181–82 in gender, 25–26, 227, 413 with he / she, 227 with indefinite pronouns, 413 with none, 348 in number, 26–27 with possessive pronouns, 412–13 with this / that / these / those, 12, 26

pronouns, 410–14. See also personal pronouns; pronoun- antecedent agreement

as adjectives, 13 for business writing, 63 case of, 68–71, 412–13 compound, 71, 413 demonstrative, 411 gender of, 25, 227, 413 indefinite, 392, 411 intensive, 411 interrogative, 411 number and, 26–27, 413–14 as objects, 69 person and, 377, 414, 537 personal, 411 plurals of, 352–53 point of view and, 386–88

1281

possessive, 70, 392, 534 reciprocal, 412 reflexive, 411 relative, 411 sexist language and, 25, 50, 248, 413 as subjects, 69, 494 telegraphic style and, 518 for transitions, 527

proofreaders’ marks, 414 proofreading, 414–15

application cover letters, 41 e-mail, 168 professionalism and, 414 proofreaders’ marks, 414 résumés, 467 revision and, 485 writer’s checklist for, 415

proper nouns, 350 capitalization of, 66 italics for, 289

proposals, 415–33. See also grant proposals; sales proposals appendixes for, 36 audience and purpose for, 416 business plans as, 59–62 conclusions, 99–102 context in, 104, 416 cover messages for, 117–18 documenting sources in, 418 ethics in writing and, 421, 422 executive summaries in, 182–83

1282

external, 418–23 feasibility reports for, 187–90 formal, 417–18 informal, 417 internal, 417–18 persuasive writing for, 416, 417 project management for, 416 research, 236–40 sales, 421–23 samples of, 100, 419–20, 424–33 solicited and unsolicited, 418–21 titles for, 523 writer’s checklist for, 417

pseudo- / quasi-, 434 psychological sales points, 486 public domain, 107, 455–56 publication dates. See also dates

in headers or footers, 248, 309 in report titles, 199–200, 524

punctuation, 434 apostrophes, 35–36 brackets, 53–54 colons, 82–84 commas, 85–90 dashes, 120–21 ellipses, 167 exclamation marks, 182 for global communication, 234 hyphens, 251–53 parentheses, 373–74

1283

periods, 375–77 question marks, 436–37 quotation marks, 444 semicolons, 492–93 slashes, 503

purpose, 434–35 audience and, 44–46 of brochures, 56 for business plans, 59–60 clarity and, 75 design and, 306 establishing, xviii, 393 for feasibility reports, 187 of introductions, 286 of listening, 317 of meetings, 325–26 for presentations, 395–96 of proposals, 416 repurposing, 455–56 scope and, 487–88 selecting the medium and, 488 for social media, 505 style and, 109, 510 tone and, 526 unity and, 531 visuals and, 539

quasi- / pseudo-, 434 question marks, 436–37

commas with, 89 questionnaires, 437–42. See also forms

1284

ethics in writing and, 441, 457 sample of, 438–40 writer’s checklist for, 441–42

questions in forms, 223–24 frequently asked (FAQs), 185–87 in inquiry letters, 260–61 for interviewing for information, 274 in job-application forms, 303 in job interviews, 279–80 punctuation for, 436–37 for questionnaires, 441, 442 for research, 457 rhetorical, 397, 485, 524 for transitions, 527, 528 wording, 223–24

quid pro quo, 442 quotation marks, 442–44. See also quotations

for direct quotations, 442–43 ethics in writing and, 443 punctuation with, 182, 444, 493 for titles of works, 289, 443, 525 for words and phrases, 443

quotations, 444–46. See also citations, in-text; documenting sources

block, 136, 154, 446 capitalization of, 66, 443 colons with, 83, 444 commas with, 87, 89, 444 direct, 442–43, 444

1285

ellipses for omissions in, 167, 445 ethics in writing and, 443, 444 incorporating into text, 446 indirect, 442, 445 inserting words into, 53–54, 445 long, 136, 154, 446 in note-taking, 348, 349, 455–56 opening with, 285–86, 396–97 paraphrasing, 373, 385 periods in, 376, 444 plagiarism and, 384, 444 question marks with, 437 quotation marks with, 442–44 within quotations, 444 semicolons with, 444, 493 sic for errors in, 54, 445

racial groups, capitalization names of, 66 radio programs

APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 149–50 MLA documentation of, 158 quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525

ragged-right margins, 309 raise / rise, 447 rambling sentences, 497–98 ranked-choice questions, 223 readers, 447. See also audience really, 447 reason is [because], 447 reasoning. See logic errors

1286

reciprocal pronouns, 412 recommendation letters. See reference letters recommendation reports, 187, 287 recommendations

in abstracts, 6–8 in conclusions, 99–100 in cover message, 422 in feasibility reports, 190 opening with, 284 in reports, 201, 217–18, 454 samples of, 100, 217–18

recruitment firms, 299 redundancy. See also repetition

eliminating, 97, 98–99 of and, 263, 367, 395 one and, 357 reason is [because], 447 up and, 395, 531

refer / allude / elude, 28 reference letters, 447–49

ethics in writing and, 449 sample of, 448

reference works, 459 abbreviations in, 4–5

references. See also reference letters in job applications, 302 in résumés, 467, 481–82

references list (APA), 134. See also APA documentation; documenting sources

documentation models for, 134

1287

in formal reports, 202 in grant proposals, 238 sample page, 142

reflexive pronouns, 411 refusals, 449–52

bad-news patterns for, 114–15 context and, 104 for employment offers, 8–9 samples of, 9, 450–51

regarding / with regard to, 452 regardless, 453 regionalisms, 177 rejections. See bad-news patterns; refusals relative adjectives, 98 relative pronouns, 411

in adjective clauses, 176 for connecting clauses, 76 in sentence fragments, 498 subject-verb agreement with, 23 in subordination, 513 wordiness and, 98

religious groups capitalization of names of, 66

remainder / balance, 48 repetition, 453

for emphasis, 173, 453 for transitions, 453, 527 wordiness from, 98–99, 454

report elements, 454. See also layout and design; reports abstract, 6–8, 200, 205

1288

appendixes, 36, 202 back matter, 202 bibliography, 50–51, 202 body, 201–2, 212–16 conclusion, 99–102, 201, 217–18 cover message, 117–18, 198, 203 executive summary, 182–83, 201, 207–8 explanatory notes, 201 foreword, 200 front matter, 199–201 glossary, 202, 234 headers and footers, 248–49, 309 headings, 249, 309 index, 202, 256, 258 introduction, 201, 209–11, 283–86 list of abbreviations and symbols, 201 list of figures and tables, 200 page numbers, 200 preface, 200–1 problem statement, 284 recommendations, 201, 217–18 references / works-cited list, 202, 219 samples of, 203–19 table of contents, 200, 206, 518 text, 201 title, 523–24 title page, 199–200, 204 visuals, 310–11, 380–81

reports, 454. See also report elements activity, 406

1289

annual, 31–35 APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 151 feasibility, 187–90 investigative, 287, 288 MLA documentation of, 158 progress, 406, 407 pronoun usage in, 63 quotation marks for titles of, 525 recommendation, 187, 287 tone for, 526 trip, 529

repurposing, 455–56 boilerplate material, 106–7 ethics in writing and, 455–56 for form letters, 197–98

reputation, personal, 295 requests for proposals, 236–40, 418. See also invitation for bids research, 456–62. See also documenting sources; Internet research; library resources

for collaborative writing, 78 ethics in writing and, 457 evaluating sources, 461–62 formal reports of, 198–219 interviews, 273–76 for job interviews, 277 methods of, xx–xxi for newsletters, 344, 347 note-taking for, 349–50 observation, 457

1290

for presentations, 395 primary, xx, 456–57 for promotional writing, 409 proposals, 236–40 questionnaires for, 437–42 reference works for, 459–60 secondary, xx–xxi, 457 strategies, 457–60 technology for, 458, 460 writer’s checklist for, xxv writing process and, xx–xxi

resignation letters, 463, 464, 465 samples of, 464, 465

respective / respectively, 463–64 response letters. See inquiries and responses responses

to e-mail, 169, 171 in form design, 223–24 to inquiries, 260–62 to job-interview questions, 279–80

responsibility ethics in writing and, 179–81, 545 in procedures, 389–90 statement of, in sales proposals, 423, 431

restrictive and nonrestrictive elements, 465–66. See also parenthetical elements résumés, 466–83. See also online professional profile

application cover letters and, 36–41, 466 background and, 472, 476–77 in business plans, 62

1291

electronic, 482–83 e-mail and, 482–83 ethics in writing and, 467 length of, 467 organization for, 478–82 plain-text, 482–83 posting online, 297 professionalism and, 479, 482 for returning job Seekers, 477 salary negotiations and, 482 samples of, 468–72, 473–76 scannable, 483 sections in, 478–82

return address, in letters, 312 returning job Seekers, 477 reviewing, xxi, 78 revision, 484–85

in collaborative writing, 78 proofreading and, 415 writer’s checklists for, xxvi 484–85 writing process and, xxiii

RFP. See requests for proposals rhetorical questions, 485

opening with, 397, 485 in titles, 485, 524

rise / raise, 447 roman numerals, in outlines, 366 rules

in page design, 311 in tables, 516–17

1292

run-on sentences, 377, 485 -s endings

for plurals, 352, 354, 391 for verbs, 352–53, 538

salary negotiations acceptances / refusals (for employment) and, 8–9 job applications and, 302 job interviews and, 280 research for, 299 résumés and, 482

sales brochures, 55–59 sales letters, 486–87

ethics in writing and, 487 form letters for, 197 writer’s checklist for, 487

sales proposals, 421–23 conclusions for, 99–102, 423 ethics in writing and, 421, 422 repurposed content for, 422, 455 sample of, 424–33 structure for, 421–23

salutations in business letters, 312, 314 capitalization in, 66 colons in, 82–83 commas in, 89 for e-mail, 169 first names in, 170, 273, 314 in form letters, 197, 198 for international correspondence, 273

1293

for unknown gender, 314 sans serif typeface, 308, 552 scarcely, 161 schedules

charting, 243 chronological order for, 73, 74 for collaborative writing, 79, 243 delivery, in sales proposals, 422, 428 sample of, 244 work, in grant proposals, 239

scholarly abbreviations, 4–5 scope, 487–88

determining, xix–xx, 393 in introduction, 284

screening in maps, 324–25 in page design, 310

sculptures, italics for titles of, 289, 525 search engines, 460–61 search tools, 132 second pages. See continuing pages second person, 377. See also “you” viewpoint

antecedents and, 414 point of view, 386–88

secondary research, 457 sections. See chapters and sections selecting the medium, 488–92

repurposed content and, 455 scope and, 488 technology for, 491

1294

writing process and, xx -self / -selves, 411 semi- / bi-, 49 semicolons, 492–96

for comma splices, 84 in compound sentences, 495 with conjunctive adverbs, 19, 89 for items in series, 87–88, 89 for linking independent clauses, 19, 492 with quotation marks, 444, 493 for run-on sentences, 377 with transitions, 492–93

sentence construction, 493–96. See also sentence faults; sentence types

clauses, 75–76 coherence and, 386 effective, 496 elliptical, 88 emphasis and, 172–73, 493 in formal style, 510 for global communication, 269 predicates, 494 prepositions and, 394 stylistic use, 495–96 subjects, 494 subject-verb-object pattern, 496 variety in, 499–501

sentence endings in lists, 319 within parentheses, 374, 376–77

1295

prepositions at, 394 punctuation for, 182, 376–77, 436–37

sentence faults, 497–98 comma splices, 84 faulty logic, 498 faulty subordination, 497 fragments, 498–99 garbled sentences, 226 loaded sentences, 496 missing subjects, 497 missing verbs, 498 mixed constructions, 338 period faults, 376–77 rambling sentences, 497–98 run-on sentences, 377, 485

sentence fragments, 498–99 with participles, 535 period faults, 376–77

sentence openings. See also introductory elements also at, 29 commas with, 86 conjunctions as, 102 dangling modifiers at, 119 numbers at, 353

sentence outlines, 365 sentence types

complex, 495 compound, 495 compound-complex, 495 declarative, 495

1296

emphasis and, 172–73 exclamatory, 495 imperative, 495 interrogative, 495 loose, 495, 500–1 minor, 496 periodic, 495, 500–1 simple, 172, 494

sentence variety, 172–73, 499–501. See also sentence types; subordination sequential method of development, 333, 501–2

in flowcharts, 193–95 in instructions, 264 in narration, 342 sample of, 501

series of items commas with, 87–88, 90 etc. with, 179 parallel structure for, 372–73 question marks with, 436 semicolons with, 87, 493

serif typeface, 308 service, 502 service internship and “gap year” opportunities, 300 service marks, 108–9 set / sit, 502 sexist language, 49–50. See also biased language

imperative mood for avoiding, 248 Ms. / Miss / Mrs., 314, 341 occupational descriptions and, 49–50

1297

parallel terms for avoiding, 50 pronoun usage and, 50, 248 and pronoun-antecedent agreement, 25–26, 413

shading. See screening shall / will, 502–3, 521 she / he, 248. See also pronoun-antecedent agreement; sexist language she / her / hers, 68–71, 377, 412–13 shifts

functional, 224–25 in mood, tense, or voice, 521

ships, italics for names of, 289 short stories, quotation marks for titles of, 525 SI (International System of Units), 4 sic, 5, 54, 445 sight / site / cite, 73 signatures

for e-mails, 170 for letters, 315 for memos, 331

similes, 192 simple sentences, 172–73, 494 since / as / because, 43–44 single-source publishing, 454n sit / set, 502 site / cite / sight, 73 site preparation, in sales proposals, 422–23

sample of, 429 slang

as nonstandard English, 178

1298

quotation marks and, 443 slashes, 503 slides, for presentations, 399

sample of, 400 so / so that / such, 503 social media, 504–7

and job search, 295, 297 online professional profile, 358–61 photographs (personal) and, 360 platform selection for, 504–5, 506 and professional networking, 492 writer’s checklist for, 506–7 writing style and privacy, 505–7

software. See adapting to new technologies solicited proposals, 418, 420–21 solutions, in sales proposals, 422

sample of, 427 some / somewhat, 507 some time / sometime / sometimes, 507 songs. See musical works, titles of sort / kind / type, 12–13, 26–27 sort of, 12–13, 26–27, 304 source lines, for visuals, 246, 517, 542 sources, citing. See citations, in-text; documenting sources sources, of information. See research spacing

for brochures, 58 for forms, 224 for letters, 312, 314–15 white space, 310, 312

1299

spam, e-mail, 168, 169 spatial method of development, 333, 508–9

sample of, 508 specific-to-general method of development, 228, 333

sample of, 228 speeches, MLA documentation of, 158. See also presentations spell checkers, 414, 485, 509 spelling, 509

hyphens and, 253 split infinitives, 534–35 squinting modifiers, 340 stacked modifiers, 14, 235, 339 standard English, 177, 510. See also grammar; usage statement of need, in grant proposals, 238 statistics. See numerical data status reports. See progress and activity reports status updates in social media, 504–5 steps. See instructions; process explanation; sequential method of development stereotypes. See biased language; sexist language stockholders statement, in annual reports, 32 stubs, in tables, 516 style, 510–12. See also business writing style; plain language; telegraphic style

professionalism and, 512 writer’s checklist for, 512

style manuals, 133–36 stylistic use, in sentence construction, 495–96 subheadings. See headings subject directories, 461

1300

subject lines capitalization in, 67, 117 for e-mail, 117, 169, 524 in letters, 314 for memos, 117, 524 for trip reports, 529

subjective case, 69, 412–13 subjective complements, 96

gerunds as, 533 nouns as, 351 pronouns as, 69 subject-verb agreement with, 23

subjects, 494. See also subject-verb agreement active-voice naming, 545 compound, 494 gerunds as, 533 missing, 497, 498 nouns as, 351

subject-verb agreement, 22–27, 537–38. See also agreement with abstract nouns, 24 with collective nouns, 24, 351 with compound subjects, 24–25 with data / datum, 121 with each / every, 23, 166 with everybody / everyone, 181–82 with indefinite pronouns, 23, 413 with intervening words and phrases, 22 with inverted word order, 23 with measurements, 23 with none, 348

1301

with nor / or, 348 with number, 23 with one of those . . . who, 357 with subjective complements, 23 with this / that / these / those, 12–13 with titles of works, 24 with who / which / that, 23–24

subject-verb-object pattern, 496 subjunctive mood, 340–41 subordinate clauses, 75–76. See also dependent clauses subordinating conjunctions

for connecting clauses, 75–76, 102–3 list of common, 103 in sentence fragments, 498 for subordination, 513–14

subordination, 513–14 bad news and, 114–15 for clarity, 75 for comma splices, 84 for conciseness, 98 effective, 75–76, 496 faulty, 497–98 vs. parentheses, 374 for sentence variety, 500–1, 513–14

subscription newsletters, 346 substantives, 494 such / so / so that, 503 such as, in sentence fragments, 498 suffixes, 514

affectation and, 21

1302

hyphens with, 252 summaries

abstracts and, 6–8 in annual reports, 32 in conclusions, 99–100, 101 executive, 182–83 in grant proposals, 237 in meeting minutes, 333 for note-taking, 349, 444 opening with, 284 in résumés, 479 for transitions, 527

superlative form of adjectives, 13 of adverbs, 20

supplement / augment, 46 supporting documents, 62. See also appendixes supposedly / allegedly, 27 surveys. See questionnaires sweeping generalizations, 320–21 symbols

in flowcharts, 193–95 functions of, 541 for global communication, 232–34 for graphs, 245, 247 keys for, 542 list of, in reports, 201 proofreaders’ marks, 414–15 samples of, 195 standardized, 193–95, 233

1303

in tables, 516 synonyms, 514–15

coordinated, 97 for defining terms, 123 repetition and, 453 in thesaurus, 523 word choice and, 549

syntax, 515 tables, 516–18. See also visuals

for comparisons, 93 functions of, 540 vs. graphs, 240, 516 informal, 517–18 list of, 200, 543 numbering, 200, 355, 516 samples of, 93, 517 screening (shading) in, 310

tables of contents, 518 for FAQs, 186 in formal reports, 200, 206 parallel structure for, 372 sample of, 206

taglines, in résumés, 467, 478 sample of, 471

tags, Web, 53 team writing. See collaborative writing technical terminology

affectation and, 21 ethics in writing and, 180 in global communication, 269

1304

in glossaries, 234–35 in instructions, 264 jargon, 291 plain language for, 385–86 in proposals, 416 word choice and, 549

technology. See adapting to new technologies teleconferences, 491 telegraphic style, 518–19

caution with, 98 in instructions, 264 professionalism and, 519

telephone calls, 275, 491 television programs

APA documentation of, 140 CMS documentation of, 149–50 italics for titles of, 289, 525 MLA documentation of, 158 quotation marks for titles of, 443, 525

templates, 312 temporary employment agencies, 298–99 tenant / tenet, 519 tense, 519–21, 538. See also verbs; voice

helping verbs and, 537 for infinitives, 534 in narration, 342 shifts in, avoiding, 521

testing. See usability testing text. See body text messaging, 490, 522

1305

than / as, and pronoun case, 69, 71 thank-you notes, 276, 281 that

with indirect quotations, 442, 445 with one of those . . . , 357 as pronoun, 411 for restrictive clauses, 466

that / those and agreement in number, 12, 23, 24, 26 as demonstrative adjectives, 12 as demonstrative pronouns, 411

that / where, 547 that / which / who, 24, 522 the, 12, 42 then. See conjunctive adverbs there, as expletive, 183 there / their / they’re, 522–23 therefore. See conjunctive adverbs thesaurus, 523 they / them / their / theirs, 68–71, 377, 412–13 third person, 377

antecedents and, 414 in narration, 342 point of view, 386–87

this / these and agreement in number, 12–13, 26 as demonstrative adjectives, 12–13 as demonstrative pronouns, 411 pronoun references with, 410

thumbnails, in page design, 311

1306

thus. See conjunctive adverbs time

in global communication, 269, 273 numbers for, 355

title page in formal reports, 199–200, 204 in grant proposals, 237 in sales proposals, 422 sample of, 204

titles, 523–25. See also names and titles capitalization of, 67, 524 colons in, 82–83 in headers or footers, 248, 309 italics for, 287, 289, 524–25 for memos, e-mails, and online postings, 524 for newsletter articles, 345 prepositions in, 394 question marks in, 436 quotation marks for, 289, 443, 525 for reports, 199–200, 204, 523–24 rhetorical questions in, 485, 524 setting tone with, 523, 526 special cases, 525 subject-verb agreement with, 24

to in prepositional phrases, 383 as sign of infinitive, 383, 534, 537

to / too / two, 525–26 tone, 526

in abstracts, 6

1307

for adjustment messages, 15 for annual reports, 34 for collection letters, 82 for complaints, 94 context and, 104 for correspondence, 109–12 for e-mail, 526 goodwill and, 111–12 for incident reports, 256 for memos, 526 for refusals, 451 for reports, 526 of titles, 523, 526 writer’s checklist for, 112 “you” viewpoint and, 554

topic outlines, 365, 370 topic sentences, 368–69

paragraph unity and, 371 placement of, 369

topics in headers or footers, 248, 309 in headings, 249 in indexes, 160

trade journals, job listings in, 298 trademarks, 108–9 training requirements, in sales proposals, 423

sample of, 430 trains, italics for names of, 289 transition, 527–29

for clarity, 75

1308

for coherence, 77, 371 commas with, 85–86 conjunctions as, 102–3 enumeration for, 371, 527, 528 methods of, 527 in narration, 342 between paragraphs, 528–29 in presentations, 398 in process explanations, 405 for quotations, 446 repetition for, 453, 527 semicolons with, 492–93 telegraphic style and, 518 unity and, 531 for Web content, 551 words and phrases for, 528

transitive verbs, 356, 536 transmittals. See cover messages (or transmittals) trip reports, 529

chronological order for, 73 sample of, 530

trouble reports. See also incident reports chronological order for, 73

try to, 529 tutorials, online and video, 11 Twitter, 297, 504–7 two / to / too, 525–26 type / sort / kind, 12–13, 26 typographical errors, 414, 485 typography, 307–9

1309

for brochures, 58–59 for emphasis, 173, 308 ethics in writing and, 178 for presentation visuals, 399 for résumés, 482–83 typeface and type size, 307–8 in Web design, 552

underlining for emphasis, 173 for italics, 289

understatement, 192 uninterested / disinterested, 129 unique / perfect / equal, 178–79 United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO), 107–8 unity, 531

in paragraphs, 371 transitions and, 529

unknown authors APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 147 MLA documentation of, 157

unpublished data, APA documentation of, 150 unsolicited proposals, 421 up, 395, 531 upon / on / onto, 357 uppercase. See all-capital letters URLs

hyphens in, 253 slashes in, 503

us / our / ours, , 377, 412

1310

usability testing for forms, 220 for global graphics, 234 for instructions, 266

usage, 531 clarity and, 75 grammar and, 235–36

user manuals, 11 utility patents, 108 utilize, 532 vague words, 533

clichés as, 76 as gobbledygook, 235 and word choice, 549–50

vendor description, in sales proposals, 423 sample of, 432

verbals, 533–35 gerunds, 383–84 infinitives, 534–35 as nonfinite verbs, 537 participles, 535 in sentence fragments, 498–99

verbs, 536–38. See also mood; subject-verb agreement; tense; voice

action, 69, 481 as adjectives, 14, 499 agreement with subject, 22–27, 537–38 finite and nonfinite, 537 forms of, 537 in idioms, 394

1311

intransitive, 305, 536–37 linking, 536 missing, 498 mood of, 340–41 phrases as, 381–84, 384 plurals of, 352 as predicates, 494 properties of, 537–38 tense of, 519–21 transitive, 356 types of, 536–37 voice of, 543–46 weak, 348

version management, 132 very, 538 via, 538 video résumés, 302 video tutorials, 11 videoconferencing, 491 videos

APA documentation of, 139 CMS documentation of, 149 MLA documentation of, 157

vision statements, in business plans, 61 visual logic, in page design, 309 visuals, 538–43. See also labels; numbering

for annual reports, 34 APA documentation of, 139 boxes for, 311 captions for, 311, 380

1312

CMS documentation of, 150 copyright and, 164, 380, 542 for description, 128 distortion in, 242, 539 drawings, 160–65, 540 ethics in writing and, 399, 539, 542 flowcharts, 193–95, 541 for global communication, 228–32 graphs, 232–34, 540 guidelines for selecting, 540–41 icons, 310–11, 541 indexing, 256 infographics, 258–60 for instructions, 162–65, 265 integrating with text, 539–40 in layout and design, 310–11 list of figures and tables, 200, 543 maps, 323–25, 540 MLA documentation of, 149 for newsletters, 346, 347 organizational charts, 364, 541 outlining and, 366, 539 photographs, 378–81, 540 for presentations, 399–401 source lines for, 246–47, 517, 543 in spatial method of development, 508–9 symbols, 541 tables, 516–18, 540 types of, 539 for Web design, 552

1313

writer’s checklist for, 542–43 voice, 538, 543–46. See also active voice; passive voice

active, 543–44 ethics in writing and, 545 helping verbs and, 537 passive, 545–46 in presentations, 402–3 shifts in, avoiding, 544

voice mail, 490 volunteer work

and job search, 294 on résumés, 471

wait for / wait on, 547 warnings, in instructions, 182, 265 was / were, 340–41 we

in business writing style, 63, 388 weak verbs, 348. See also nominalizations; voice Web addresses. See URLs Web conferencing, 491 Web design. See also layout and design; writing for the Web

for forms, 220–24 headings for, 551 icons, 310–11 links in, 552–53 lists for, 551 posting documents, 553 for résumés, 482–83 typography for, 308, 552

Web forums. See blogs and forums

1314

Web logs. See blogs and forums Web research. See Internet research Web sites. See also blogs and forums; Internet research; writing for the Web

APA documentation of, 138 CMS documentation of, 148 copyright and, 106–7 currency of, 457 evaluating, 462, 553 FAQs on, 185–87 functions of, 492 as information sources, 273–76, 457 internal and external, 52 italics for titles of, 289 résumés on, 298–99, 482–83

well / good, 235 were / was, 340 when / where / that, 547 when and if, 547 where . . . at, 547 where / that, 547 whether, 547–48 whether . . . or, 102 which

for nonrestrictive clauses, 466, 522 as pronoun, 411 subject-verb agreement with, 25 vs. who / that, 23, 522

while, 548 white space, in page design, 310, 312. See also spacing

1315

whiteboards, 399 who

with one of those . . ., 357 who / that / which, 24, 411, 522

who / whom, 411, 548 whole-by-whole method of comparison, 92 who’s / whose / of which, 548–49 Wikipedia

copyright and, 106–7, 384–85 as information source, 458

wikis CMS documentation of, 148 for collaborative writing, 79 MLA documentation of, 157

will / shall, 502–3, 521 with regard to / regarding, 452 word choice, 549–50

abstract / concrete words, 5–6 in adjustment messages, 17 affectation and, 21 ambiguity and, 30 buzzwords, 64 clichés, 76 colloquialisms, 177 connotation / denotation and, 103 deceptive language and, 180 ethics in writing and, 180 figures of speech, 192–93 for global communication, 269 gobbledygook, 235

1316

idioms, 254 jargon, 291 localisms, 178 malapropisms, 323 in mission statements, 337–38 outdated words, 21 slang, 178 standard vs. nonstandard English, 177 thesaurus for, 523 tone and, 526 usage conventions and, 236, 531 vague words, 533

word divisions, hyphens in, 253 word meanings. See also definitions

capitalization and, 65 connotation / denotation in, 103

word order. See also sentence construction emphasis and, 496 and sentence variety, 500 subject-verb-object pattern, 496 syntax, 515

wordiness. See also conciseness as affectation, 21 causes of, 98 as gobbledygook, 235 of passive voice, 99, 544 rambling sentences, 497 that and, 522

word-processing software. See adapting to new technologies words used as words

1317

italics for, 289 plurals of, 36

work plan, in sales proposals, 422 workflow management, 132 works-cited list (MLA), 135. See also documenting sources; MLA documentation

documentation models for, 154–58 in formal reports, 202, 219 in grant proposals, 238 samples of, 160, 219

writer’s checklists abbreviations, 2–3 annual reports, 35 awkwardness, eliminating, 47 brochures, 58–59 collaborative writing, 79 conciseness, 98–99 correspondence, 112–13, 117 drawings, 165 e-mail, 169, 171 ethics in writing, 180–81 evaluating sources, 462 executive summaries, 183 FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), 186–87 global communication, 232 goodwill, establishing, 112–13 grant proposals, 240 graphs, 246–47 headings, 251 infographics, 260

1318

instant messaging and live chat, 263 international correspondence, 273 interviewing for information, 275–76 job applications, 302 job descriptions, 293 lists, 319 maps, 323–25 meetings, 330 minutes of meetings, 334–35 netiquette, 169 newsletter articles, 345–46 note-taking, 349–50 plain language, 386 preparation, 393 presentations, 400–1, 403 press releases, 404–5 proofreading, 415 proposals, 417 questionnaires, 441–42 research, 460, 462 revision, 484–85 sales letters, 487 for social media, 506–7 style, 512 tone, 112–13 visuals, 542–43 writing a draft, 550 writing process, xxv–xxvi

writing a draft, 550. See also writing process collaborative writing and, 79

1319

conclusions, xxiii, 99–102 introductions, xxii–xxiii, 283–86 mission statements, 337 outlining, xxii, 364–67 visuals and, 542 writer’s checklists for, xxv–xxvi, 550–54

writing block, in forms, 223 writing for the Web, 551–53. See also blogs and forums; Web design

ethics in writing and, 553 technology for, 554

writing line, in forms, 223 writing process

drafting, xxii, 550 organization, xxi, 363–64 preparation, xviii-xx, 393 research, xx–xxi, 456–62 reviewing, xxiii, 78 revision, xxiii, 484–85 steps to success in, xvii–xviii writer’s checklist for, xxv–xxvi

writing style. See business writing style; style years. See dates yes, comma with, 85 “you” viewpoint, 554

audience and, 45 in business writing style, 63 in correspondence, 111–12 in FAQs, 186–87 in form letters, 197

1320

in persuasive writing, 378 you / your / yours, 68–71, 377, 412–13 your / you’re, 554

1321

Commonly Misused Words and Phrases A a / an a lot above absolutely accept / except ad hoc adapt / adept / adopt affect / effect affinity all ready / already all right all together / altogether allegedly / supposedly allude / elude / refer allusion / illusion also amount / number and/or as / because / since as much as / more than as such as well as augment / supplement average / median / mean

1322

awhile / a while

B bad / badly balance / remainder beside / besides between / among between you and me bi- / semi- biannual / biennial both . . . and

C can / may cannot capital / capitol center on cite / sight / site compare / contrast complement / compliment compose / constitute / comprise consensus continual / continuous credible / creditable critique

D

1323

data de facto / de jure defective / deficient definite / definitive differ from / differ with different from / different than discreet / discrete disinterested / uninterested due to / because of

E each economic / economical e.g. / i.e. equal / unique / perfect etc. everybody / everyone everyday / every day explicit / implicit

F fact few / a few fewer / less figuratively/literally fine first / firstly forceful / forcible

1324

foreword / forward former / latter

G good / well

H he / she

I imply / infer in / into in order to in terms of incident/incidence indiscreet / indiscrete inside / inside of insure / ensure / assure interface its / it’s

K kind of / sort of know-how

L

1325

lay / lie lend / loan like / as literally/figuratively loose / lose

M maybe / may be media / medium Ms. / Miss / Mrs. mutual / common

N nature needless to say none nor / or

O OK / okay on / onto / upon one one of those . . . who only outside [of] over [with]

1326

P party per percent / percentage personal / personnel persons / people principal / principle pseudo- / quasi-

Q quid pro quo

R raise / rise really reason is [because] regarding / with regard to regardless respective / respectively

S service set / sit shall / will so / so that / such some / somewhat

1327

some time / sometime / sometimes

T tenant / tenet that / which / who there / their / they’re to / too / two try to

U up utilize

V very via

W wait for / wait on when / where / that whether while who / whom who’s / whose / of which

Y

1328

your / you’re

1329

Model Documents and Figures by Topic Use the following list as a quick reference for finding selected

samples of business writing and visuals by topic. See also the

complete Contents by Topic on the inside front cover of this

book. For additional models, see the LaunchPad Solo for

Professional Writers at launchpadworks.com/.

Business Writing Documents and Elements A–1 Informative Abstract (from a Report)

B–2 Front and Back Panels of a Bifold Brochure

B–3 Center Panels of a Bifold Brochure

F–1 Feasibility Report

F–5 Headline Lead

F–6 Formal Report

I–1 Incident Report

I–2 Index Entry (with Main Entry, Subentries, and Sub-

subentries)

I–6 Illustrated Instructions

1330

I–10 Investigative Report

J–1 Job Description

M–6 Mission Statement

N–2 Newsletter Article

P–3 Procedures Chart

P–5 Press Release

P–6 Progress Report (Using Letter Format)

P–7 Activity Report (Using E-mail Format)

P–8 Special-Purpose Internal Proposal

P–9 Sales Proposal

S–2 Sequential Method of Development

S–5 Spreadsheet

T–3 Trip Report (Using E-mail Format)

Design and Visuals D–2 Illustrated Description

D–3 Classification

1331

D–10 Conventional Line Drawing

D–11 Exploded-View Drawing

D–12 Cutaway Drawing

F–2 Flowchart Using Labeled Blocks

F–3 Flowchart Using Pictorial Symbols

F–4 Common ISO Flowchart Symbols (with Annotations)

F–7 Form (for a Medical Claim)

G–5 Graphics for U.S. (left) and Global (right) Audiences

G–6 International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

Symbols

G–7 Double-Line Graph (with Shading)

G–8 Distorted and Distortion-Free Expressions of Data

G–9 Bar Graph (Quantities of Different Items During a Fixed

Period)

G–10 Bar (Column) Graph (Showing the Parts That Make Up the

Whole)

G–11 Gantt Chart Showing Project Schedule

1332

G–12 Pie Graph (Showing Percentages of the Whole)

G–13 Picture Graph

H–1 Header and Footer

H–2 Headings Used in a Document

I–3 Infographic

L–1 Primary Components of Letter Characters

L–2 Type Sizes (6- to 14-Point Type)

L–5 Bulleted List in a Paragraph

M–1 Map

O–3 Organizational Chart

T–1 Elements of a Table

T–2 Informal Table

V–1 Chart for Choosing Appropriate Visuals

Correspondence A–4 Acknowledgment

A–5 Adjustment (When Company Takes Responsibility)

1333

A–6 Partial Adjustment

C–3 First-Stage Collection Letter

C–4 Second-Stage Collection Letter

C–5 Third-Stage Collection Letter

C–9 Complaint Message (Sent as E-mail)

C–12 A Direct-Pattern Message (Good News)

C–13 A Courteous Indirect-Pattern Message (Bad News)

C–14 Cover Message

E–1 E-mail Signature Block

G–3 Ineffective Global Business Communication

G–4 Effective Global Business Communication

I–4 Inquiry

I–5 Response to an Inquiry

I–7 Inappropriate International Correspondence (Draft Marked

for Revision)

I–8 Appropriate International Correspondence

1334

L–3 Full-Block-Style Letter (with Letterhead)

L–4 Alternative Headers for the Second Page of a Letter

M–4 Typical Memo Format (Printed or Attached to E-mail)

R–1 Reference Letter (Printed on Letterhead Stationery)

R–2 Refusal with Low Stakes

R–3 Refusal with High Stakes

S–1 Choosing the Appropriate Medium

Job Search and Application A–2 Acceptance (for Employment)

A–3 Refusal (for Employment)

A–7 Partial Job Ad (Description and Requirements)

A–8 Application Cover Letter (Graduate Applying for a Graphic

Design Job)

A–9 Application Cover Letter Sent as an E-mail (College Student

Applying for an Internship)

A–10 Application Cover Letter (Applicant with Years of

Experience)

I–9 Follow-up Correspondence

1335

O–1 Online Profile

R–4 Resignation Letter (to Accept a Better Position)

R–5 Resignation Memo (Under Negative Conditions)

R–6 Student Résumé (for an Entry-Level Position)

R–7 Résumé (Highlighting Professional Credentials)

R–8 Recent Graduate Résumé (for Graphic Design Job)

R–9 Résumé (Applicant with Management Experience)

R–10 Résumé (Experienced Applicant Seeking Career Change)

R–11 Advanced Résumé (Combining Functional and

Chronological Elements)

Presentations and Meetings M–2 Meeting Agenda

M–3 E-mail Announcing a Meeting with an Attached Agenda

M–5 Minutes of a Meeting (Partial Section)

P–4 Presentation Slides

Research and Documentation D–4 APA Sample Page (from a Report)

1336

D–5 APA Sample List of References

D–6 CMS Sample Page (from a Report)

D–7 CMS Sample Bibliography

D–8 MLA Sample Page (from a Report)

D–9 MLA Sample List of Works Cited

Q–1 Questionnaire

Q–2 Long Quotation (APA Style)

Organization, Writing, and Revision C–2 Chronological Method of Development

C–6 Whole-by-Whole Method of Comparison

C–7 Part-by-Part Method of Comparison

C–10 Conclusion

D–1 Simple Description

D–3 Classification (Tools Placed into Categories)

G–1 General-to-Specific Method of Development

G–2 Specific-to-General Method of Development

1337

N–1 Narration from an Accident Report

O–2 Decreasing Order-of-Importance Method of Development

P–1 Persuasive Memo

S–1 Choosing the Appropriate Medium

S–3 Comparison of Social-Media Platforms

S–4 Spatial Description with Precise Measurements

1338

Digital resources to enhance your professional writing course

LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing offers

online tutorials on today’s most relevant digital

writing topics, from content management to

personal branding. Students develop the

writing skills they need to succeed both in the

classroom and in the workplace and can

explore today’s technologies in clickable,

assignable learning sequences organized by popular

professional writing topics. Walk through various report styles

to see how medium affects message, or discover ways to use

free online tools for presentations, collaboration, multimodal

editing, and more. Get all our great resources and activities in

one fully customizable space online; then use our tools with

your own content.

LaunchPad Solo for Professional Writing can be packaged at a

significant discount with The Business Writer’s Handbook.

Digital Tips provide step-by-step guidance on how to use technology to support workplace writing, including synchronizing data, assessing software and hardware,

1339

creating templates, and organizing productive online meetings. Sample documents provide a wide range of effective professional writing models for students to emulate, including emails, résumés, cover letters, reports, proposals, brochures, and questionnaires. Tutorials walk students through maximizing free online tools to access projects across platforms, design dynamic presentations, develop podcasts, manage their personal brand, and build common citations in APA and MLA styles. Adaptive quizzing for targeted learning, skills practice, and grammar help. LearningCurve, a game-like adaptive quizzing program, helps students focus on the writing and grammar skills with which they need the most help. When they get a question wrong, feedback tells them why and links them to additional instruction.

Order ISBN 978-1-319-23939-8 to package LaunchPad Solo for

Professional Writing with The Business Writer’s Handbook to

ensure your students can take full advantage.

Students who rent or buy a used book can purchase access and

instructors can request access at launchpadworks.com.

1340

1341

目录

About This Book 2 Cover Page 2 Inside Front Cover 3 Halftitle Page-1 14 About the Authors 15 Title Page 17 Copyright Page 18 Contents 20 Preface 21 Five Steps to Successful Writing 33 Checklist of the Writing Process 47 Halftitle Page-2 50

A 51 a / an 52 a lot 53 abbreviations 54

Using Abbreviations 54 Forming Abbreviations 56

Names of Organizations 56 Measurements 57 Personal Names and Titles 57 Common Scholarly Abbreviations and Terms 58

above 60 absolutely 61 abstract / concrete words 62 abstracts 63

Types of Abstracts 63 Writing Strategies 65

accept / except 66 acceptances / refusals (for employment) 67 acknowledgments 69

1342

acronyms and initialisms (see abbreviations) 70 active voice (see voice) 71 ad hoc 72 adapt / adept / adopt 73 adapting to new technologies 74 adjectives 76

Limiting Adjectives 76 Articles 76 Demonstrative Adjectives 77 Possessive Adjectives 78 Numeral Adjectives 78 Indefinite Adjectives 78

Comparison of Adjectives 79 Placement of Adjectives 79 Use of Adjectives 80

adjustment messages 83 Full Adjustments 86 Partial Adjustments 87

adverbs 88 Types of Adverbs 89 Comparison of Adverbs 90 Placement of Adverbs 91

affect / effect 92 affectation 93 affinity 95 agreement 96

Subject-Verb Agreement 97 Compound Subjects 101 Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement 102

Gender 102 Number 103 Compound Antecedents 105

allegedly / supposedly 106 all ready / already 107

1343

all right 108 all together / altogether 109 allude / elude / refer 110 allusion / illusion 111 allusions 112 also 113 ambiguity 114 amount / number 116 ampersands 117 and / or 118 annual reports 119

Structure and Parts 119 Financial Highlights 120 Statement to Shareholders 121 Narrative Section 121 Financial Statement 122 Board of Directors and Company Officers 122

Preparing the Report 123 Design and Visuals 124

antonyms 126 apostrophes 127

Showing Possession 127 Indicating Omission 127 Forming Plurals 127

appendixes 129 application cover letters 130

Opening 135 Body 135 Closing 136 Proofreading and Follow-up 136

appositives 138 articles 139 as / because / since 142 as much as / more than 143

1344

as such 144 as well as 145 audience 146

Analyzing Your Audience’s Needs 146 Writing for Varied and Multiple Audiences 147

augment / supplement 149 average / median / mean 150 awhile / a while 151 awkwardness 152

B 153 bad / badly 154 balance / remainder 155 beside / besides 156 between / among 157 between you and me 158 bi- / semi- 159 biannual / biennial 160 biased language 161

Sexist Language 161 bibliographies 163 blogs and forums 165

Organizational Uses 166 Writing Style 166

both . . . and 169 brackets 170 brainstorming 171 brochures 174

Types of Brochures 174 Designing a Brochure 174

Cover Panel 177 First Inside Panel 178 Subsequent Panels 178

bulleted lists (see lists) 180 business plans 181

1345

Purposes and Audience 181 Format, Length, and Sections 182 Company Description and Strategy 183

Business Description 183 Vision and Mission Statements 183 Goals and Milestones 184 Management and Key Team Members 184

Market Analysis and Strategy 185 Marketing Plan 185 Financial Analysis 186 Supporting Documents 186

business writing style 188 buzzwords 190

C 191 can / may 192 cannot 193 capital / capitol 194 capitalization 195

Proper Nouns 195 Common Nouns 196 First Words 196 Specific Groups 197 Specific Places 197 Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts 198 Titles of Works 198 Professional and Personal Titles 199 Abbreviations and Letters 199 Miscellaneous Capitalizations 199

case 201 Subjective Case 202 Objective Case 203 Possessive Case 204 Appositives 204 Determining the Case of Pronouns 205

1346

cause-and-effect method of development 207 Evaluating Evidence 207 Linking Causes to Effects 209

center on 210 chronological method of development 211 cite / sight / site 214 clarity 215 clauses 217 clichés 219 coherence 220 collaborative writing 221

Tasks of the Collaborative Writing Team 221 Planning 222 Research and Writing 222 Reviewing 223 Revising 223

Using Collaborative Writing Software 224 collection letters 226 colons 230

Colons in Sentences 230 Colons with Salutations, Titles, Citations, and Numbers 231 Punctuation and Capitalization with Colons 231 Unnecessary Colons 232

comma splice 233 commas 234

Linking Independent Clauses 235 Enclosing Elements 235 Introducing Elements 237

Clauses and Phrases 237 Words and Quotations 238

Separating Items in a Series 239 Clarifying and Contrasting 240 Showing Omissions 240 Using with Numbers and Names 240

1347

Using with Other Punctuation 242 Avoiding Unnecessary Commas 243

compare / contrast 245 comparison 246 comparison method of development 247 complaints 251 complement / compliment 254 complements 255 compose / constitute / comprise 257 compound words 258 conciseness 259

Causes of Wordiness 259 conclusions 263 conjunctions 268 connotation / denotation 270 consensus 271 context 272

Assessing Context 273 Signaling Context 274

continual / continuous 276 contractions 277 copyrights, patents, and trademarks 278

Copyrights 278 Permissions 279 Exceptions 279

Patents 281 Trademarks 282

correspondence 284 Audience and Writing Style 285 Openings and Closings 286 Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint 287 Direct and Indirect Patterns 290

Direct Pattern 290 Indirect Pattern 292

1348

Clarity and Emphasis 295 Lists 296 Headings 296 Subject Lines 297

cover messages (or transmittals) 299 credible / creditable 301 critique 302

D 303 dangling modifiers 304 dashes 305 data 308 dates 309 de facto / de jure 311 defective / deficient 312 defining terms 313 definite / definitive 315 definition method of development 316

Extended Definition 316 Definition by Analogy 317 Definition by Cause 317 Definition by Components 318 Definition by Exploration of Origin 318 Negative Definition 319

description 321 design (see layout and design) 325 differ from / differ with 326 different from / different than 327 direct address 328 discreet / discrete 329 disinterested / uninterested 330 division-and-classification method of development 331

Division 331 Classification 332

document management 336

1349

Document-Management Systems 336 documenting sources 339

APA Documentation 342 APA In-Text Citations 343 APA Documentation Models 344 APA Sample Pages 351

CMS Documentation 355 CMS Footnotes and Endnotes 355 CMS Documentation Models 357 CMS Sample Pages 371

MLA Documentation 375 MLA In-Text Citations 375 MLA Documentation Models 376 MLA Sample Pages 383

double negatives 388 drawings 390 due to / because of 395

E 396 each 397 economic / economical 398 editing (see revision and proofreading) 399 e.g. / i.e. 400 ellipses 401 e-mail 403

Review and Confidentiality 403 Writing and Design 406

emphasis 410 Achieving Emphasis 410

Position 410 Climactic Order 410 Sentence Length 411 Sentence Type 411 Active Voice 412 Repetition 412

1350

Intensifiers 412 Direct Statements 413 Long Dashes 413 Typographical Devices 413

English as a second language 414 Count and Mass Nouns 415 Articles and Modifiers 415 Gerunds and Infinitives 417 Adjective Clauses 418 Present Perfect Verb Tense 418 Present Progressive Verb Tense 419

English, varieties of 420 Colloquial English 420 Dialectal English 421 Localisms 421 Slang 421

equal / unique / perfect 423 etc 424 ethics in writing 425 euphemisms 429 everybody / everyone 430 everyday / every day 431 exclamation marks 432 executive summaries 433 expletives 435 explicit / implicit 436 exposition 437

F 438 fact 439 FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) 440

Questions to Include 441 Organization 441 Placement 442

feasibility reports 444

1351

Report Sections 447 Introduction 447 Body 447 Conclusion 447 Recommendation 447

few / a few 448 fewer / less 449 figuratively / literally 450 figures of speech 451

Types of Figures of Speech 452 fine 454 first / firstly 455 flowcharts 456 footnotes (see documenting sources) 460 forceful / forcible 461 foreign words in English 462 foreword / forward 463 form letters 464

When to Use Form Letters 464 Writing Form Letters 465 Repurposing Form Letters 466

formal reports 467 Front Matter 469

Title Page 469 Abstract 470 Table of Contents 470 List of Figures 471 List of Tables 471 Foreword 471 Preface 472 List of Abbreviations and Symbols 472

Body 472 Executive Summary 472 Introduction 473

1352

Text 473 Conclusions 473 Recommendations 473 Explanatory Notes 473 References (or Works Cited) 474

Back Matter 475 Appendixes 475 Bibliography 475 Glossary 475 Index 475

Sample Formal Report 476 format 510 former / latter 511 forms 512

Choosing Paper or Digital 514 Designing a Form 515

Entry Lines and Fields 516 Sequencing Entries 516

Writing Questions 517 forums (see blogs and forums) 520 fragments (see sentence fragments) 521 functional shift 522

G 523 garbled sentences 524 gender 526 general and specific methods of development 527

General to Specific 528 Specific to General 528

global communication 530 global graphics 536 glossaries 540 gobbledygook 541 good / well 542 grammar 543

1353

grant proposals 545 Cover Message 546 Title Page 546 Application Form 547 Introduction 547 Literature Review 548 Project Narrative 548

Project Description 548 Project Outcomes 549 Budget Narrative 550 Task Schedule 550

Organization Description 550 Conclusion 551 Attachments 551

graphs 553 Line Graphs 553 Bar Graphs 555 Pie Graphs 558 Picture Graphs 559

H 563 he / she 564 headers and footers 565 headings 567

General Heading Style 567 Decimal Numbering System 569

hyphens 570 Hyphens with Compound Words 570 Hyphens with Modifiers 570 Hyphens with Prefixes and Suffixes 571 Hyphens and Clarity 571 Other Uses of the Hyphen 572

I 574 idioms 575 illustrations (see visuals) 577

1354

imply / infer 578 in / into 579 in order to 580 in terms of 581 incident / incidence 582 incident reports 583 indexing 586 indiscreet / indiscrete 588 infographics 589 inquiries and responses 593 inside / inside of 597 instant messaging and live chat 598 instructions 600

Writing Instructions 600 Illustrating Instructions 603

insure / ensure / assure 606 intensifiers 607 interface 608 interjections 609 international correspondence 610

Cultural Differences in Correspondence 610 Cross-Cultural Examples 611

interviewing for information 618 Determining the Proper Person to Interview 618 Preparing for the Interview 618 Conducting the Interview 619 Expanding Your Notes Soon After the Interview 620 Interviewing by Phone or E-mail 620

interviewing for a job 623 Before the Interview 623 During the Interview 627

Behavior 628 Responses 629 Salary 630

1355

Conclusion 632 After the Interview 632

introductions 636 Routine Openings 637 Opening Strategies 637

Objective 638 Problem Statement 638 Scope 638 Background 639 Summary 639 Interesting Detail 640 Definition 640 Anecdote 641 Quotation 641 Forecast 642 Persuasive Hook 642

Full-Scale Introductions 642 investigative reports 644 italics 647

Foreign Words and Phrases 647 Titles 647 Proper Names 648 Words, Letters, and Figures 648 Subheads 649 Exceptions 649

its / it’s 650 J 651

jargon 652 job descriptions 653 job search 656

Networking and Informational Interviews 660 Campus Career Services 661 Strategic Web Searches 662 Social Media 663

1356

Job Advertisements 663 Trade and Professional Journal Listings 665 Employment Agencies (Private, Temporary, Government) 665 Internships and Co-ops 667 Service Internship and “Gap Year” Opportunities 668 Direct Inquiries 669 Other Application Genres 670

K 674 kind of / sort of 675 know-how 676

L 677 lay / lie 678 layout and design 680

Design Principles 681 Grouping 681 Contrast 682 Repetition 682

Typography 682 Typeface and Type Size 683 Type Style and Emphasis 685

Page-Design Elements 685 Justification 686 Headings 686 Headers and Footers 686 Lists 687 Columns 687 White Space 688 Color 688

Visuals 688 Icons 689 Captions 689 Rules 689

Page Layout and Thumbnails 690 lend / loan 691

1357

letters 692 Letter Format 692 Heading 695 Inside Address 695 Salutation 696 Subject Line 696 Body 697 Complimentary Closing 698 Writer’s Signature Block 698 End Notations 698 Continuing Pages 699

like / as 701 listening 702

Fallacies About Listening 702 Active Listening 702

Step 1: Make a Conscious Decision 703 Step 2: Define Your Purpose 703 Step 3: Take Specific Actions 703 Step 4: Adapt to the Situation 704

lists 706 logic errors 709

Lack of Reason 709 Sweeping Generalizations 709 Non Sequiturs 710 False Cause 710 Biased or Suppressed Evidence 711 Fact Versus Opinion 711 Loaded Arguments 711

loose / lose 713 M 714

malapropisms 715 maps 716 maybe / may be 719 media / medium 720

1358

meetings 721 Planning a Meeting 721

Determine the Purpose of the Meeting 721 Decide Who Should Attend 722 Choose the Meeting Time 722 Choose the Meeting Location 722 Establish the Agenda 723 Assign the Minute-Taking 726

Conducting the Meeting 726 Deal with Conflict 727 Close the Meeting 729

memos 730 Memo Format 730

methods of development 733 minutes of meetings 735 mission statements 738

Writing a Mission Statement 739 Format and Length 742

mixed constructions 743 modifiers 744

Stacked (Jammed) Modifiers 745 Misplaced Modifiers 745 Squinting Modifiers 746

mood 748 Ms. / Miss / Mrs. 750 mutual / common 751

N 752 narration 753 nature 757 needless to say 758 newsletter articles 759 newsletters 763

Types of Newsletters 763 Developing Newsletters 764

1359

nominalizations 767 none 768 nor / or 769 note-taking 770 nouns 772

Types of Nouns 772 Noun Functions 773 Collective Nouns 774 Plural Nouns 775

number (grammar) 777 numbers 778

Numerals or Words 778 Plurals 779 Measurements 780 Fractions 780 Money 780 Time 781 Dates 781 Addresses 781 Documents 782

O 783 objects 784 OK / okay 785 on / onto / upon 786 one 787 one of those . . . who 788 online professional profile 789

Choosing the Appropriate Site 791 Writing Style and Tips 792

Personal Information and Overview 793 Experience, Education, and Skills 794

only 795 order-of-importance method of development 796

Decreasing Order 798

1360

Increasing Order 798 organization 800 organizational charts 801 outlining 802

Advantages of Outlining 802 Types of Outlines 803 Creating an Outline 803

outside [of] 807 over [with] 808

P 809 pace 810 paragraphs 811

Topic Sentence 811 Paragraph Length 812 Writing Paragraphs 813 Paragraph Unity and Coherence 815

parallel structure 816 Faulty Parallelism 817

paraphrasing 819 parentheses 820 parts of speech 822 party 823 per 824 percent / percentage 825 periods 826

Periods in Quotations 826 Periods with Parentheses 826 Other Uses of Periods 827 Period Faults 828

person 829 personal / personnel 830 persons / people 831 persuasion 832 photographs 835

1361

phrases 838 Prepositional Phrases 839 Participial Phrases 840

Dangling Participial Phrases 841 Misplaced Participial Phrases 841

Infinitive Phrases 841 Gerund Phrases 842 Verb Phrases 843 Noun Phrases 843

plagiarism 844 Citing Sources 844 Common Knowledge 845

plain language 846 point of view 848 policies and procedures 851

Policies 851 Procedures 852

positive writing 854 possessive case 856

Singular Nouns 856 Plural Nouns 857 Compound Nouns 857 Coordinate Nouns 857 Possessive Pronouns 858 Indefinite Pronouns 858

prefixes 859 preparation 860 prepositions 861

Prepositions at the End of a Sentence 862 Prepositions in Titles 862 Preposition Errors 863

presentations 864 Determining Your Purpose 864 Analyzing Your Audience 865

1362

Gathering Information 865 Structuring the Presentation 866

The Introduction 866 The Body 868 Transitions 868 The Closing 869

Using Visuals 870 Flip Charts 871 Whiteboards or Chalkboards 871 Presentation Software 871

Delivering a Presentation 874 Practice 874 Delivery Techniques That Work 875 Presentation Anxiety 877

press releases 878 principal / principle 881 process explanation 882 progress and activity reports 883

Progress Reports 883 Activity Reports 885

promotional writing 888 pronoun reference 890 pronouns 892

Case 894 Gender 896 Number 897 Person 897

proofreading 899 proposals 901

Proposal Strategies 902 Audience and Purpose 902 Project Management 903

Proposal Context and Types 903 Internal Proposals 904

1363

Informal Internal Proposals 904 Formal Internal Proposals 904

External Proposals 908 Solicited Proposals 909 Unsolicited Proposals 910 Sales Proposals 910

pseudo- / quasi- 936 punctuation 937 purpose 938

Q 940 question marks 941 questionnaires 943

Selecting the Recipients 949 Preparing the Questions 949

quid pro quo 952 quotation marks 953

Direct Quotations 953 Words and Phrases 954 Titles of Works 954 Punctuation 955 Direct Quotations 953

quotations 957 Indirect Quotations 957 Deletions or Omissions 958 Inserting Material into Quotations 959 Incorporating Quotations into Text 960

R 961 raise / rise 962 readers 963 really 964 reason is [because] 965 reference letters 966 refusal letters 969 regarding / with regard to 974

1364

regardless 975 repetition 976 reports 978 repurposing 980

Repurpose for the Context 981 Repurpose for the Medium 981

research 983 Primary Research 984 Secondary Research 985 Library Research Strategies 986

Online Catalogs (Locating Library Holdings) 987 Online Databases and Indexes (Locating Articles) 987 Reference Works 989

Web Research Strategies 990 Search Engines 990 Web Subject Directories 992

Evaluating Sources 992 resignation letters 996 respective / respectively 1000 restrictive and nonrestrictive elements 1001 résumés 1003

Sample Résumés 1004 Analyzing Your Background 1017 Returning Job Seekers 1019 Organizing Your Résumé (Sections) 1020

Heading 1021 Job Objective vs. Headline 1022 Qualifications Summary 1023 Education 1024 Employment Experience 1024 Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities 1026 Honors and Activities 1027 References and Portfolios 1027

Digital Formats and Media 1028

1365

E-mail–Attached Résumés 1028 Applicant Tracking System Résumés 1028 Plain-Text Résumés 1029 Scannable Résumés 1030 Web-Posted Résumés 1030

revision 1032 rhetorical questions 1034 run-on sentences 1035

S 1036 sales letters 1037 scope 1041 selecting the medium 1042

E-mail 1044 Memos 1044 Letters 1044 Text and Instant Messages 1045 Phone Calls and Voice Messages 1045 Faxes 1046 Meetings and Conference Calls 1046 Web Conferences and Video Conferences 1047 Web Networking and Promotion 1047

semicolons 1049 With Strong Connectives 1049 For Clarity in Long Sentences 1050

sentence construction 1052 Subjects 1052 Predicates 1053 Sentence Types 1054

Structure 1054 Intention 1055 Stylistic Use 1056

Constructing Effective Sentences 1056 sentence faults 1058 sentence fragments 1060

1366

sentence variety 1062 Sentence Length 1062 Word Order 1063 Loose and Periodic Sentences 1064

sequential method of development 1066 service 1069 set / sit 1070 shall / will 1071 slashes 1072 so / so that / such 1073 social media 1074

Choosing the Appropriate Platforms 1075 Writing Style and Privacy Considerations 1078

some / somewhat 1080 some time / sometime / sometimes 1081 spatial method of development 1082 spelling 1084 spreadsheets 1085 style 1087

Formal Writing Style 1088 Informal Writing Style 1089

subordination 1093 suffixes 1096 surveys (see questionnaires) 1097 synonyms 1098 syntax 1099

T 1100 tables 1101

Table Elements 1101 Table Number 1101 Table Title 1102 Box Head 1102 Stub 1102 Body 1102

1367

Rules 1102 Footnotes 1103 Source Line 1103 Continuing Tables 1103

Informal Tables 1104 tables of contents 1105 telegraphic style 1106 tenant / tenet 1108 tense 1109

Past Tense 1110 Past Perfect Tense 1110 Present Tense 1111 Present Perfect Tense 1111 Future Tense 1112 Future Perfect Tense 1112 Shift in Tense 1112

text messaging 1113 that / which / who 1114 there / their / they’re 1115 thesaurus 1116 titles 1117

Reports and Long Documents 1117 E-mail, Memos, and Online Postings 1118 Formatting Titles 1119

Capitalization 1119 Italics 1119 Quotation Marks 1120 Special Cases 1120

to / too / two 1122 tone 1123 transition 1125

Methods of Transition 1125 Transition Between Sentences 1126 Transition Between Paragraphs 1127

1368

trip reports 1130 trouble reports (see incident reports) 1132 try to 1133

U 1134 unity 1135 up 1136 usage 1137 utilize 1138

V 1139 vague words 1140 verbals 1141

Gerunds 1141 Infinitives 1142 Participles 1143

verbs 1145 Types of Verbs 1145 Forms of Verbs 1146

Finite Verbs 1146 Nonfinite Verbs 1147

Properties of Verbs 1148 very 1150 via 1151 visuals 1152

Selecting Visuals 1153 Integrating Visuals with Text 1156

voice 1159 Using the Active Voice 1160

Improving Clarity 1160 Highlighting Subjects 1160 Achieving Conciseness 1161

Using the Passive Voice 1161 W 1164

wait for / wait on 1165 Web design (see writing for the Web) 1166

1369

when / where / that 1167 whether 1168 while 1169 who / whom 1170 who’s / whose / of which 1171 word choice 1172 writing a draft 1174 writing for the Web 1176

Crafting Content for Your Site 1176 Text Content 1176 Headings 1177 Lists 1177 Keywords 1177 Directional Cues 1178 Graphics 1178 Fonts 1178

Using Links 1179 Posting an Existing Document 1180

Y 1182 “you” viewpoint 1183 your / you’re 1185

Index 1186 Commonly Misused Words and Phrases 1322 Model Documents and Figures by Topic 1330 Inside Back Cover 1339 Back Cover 1341

1370

  • About This Book
    • Cover Page
    • Inside Front Cover
    • Halftitle Page-1
    • About the Authors
    • Title Page
    • Copyright Page
    • Contents
    • Preface
    • Five Steps to Successful Writing
    • Checklist of the Writing Process
    • Halftitle Page-2
  • A
    • a / an
    • a lot
    • abbreviations
      • Using Abbreviations
      • Forming Abbreviations
        • Names of Organizations
        • Measurements
        • Personal Names and Titles
        • Common Scholarly Abbreviations and Terms
    • above
    • absolutely
    • abstract / concrete words
    • abstracts
      • Types of Abstracts
      • Writing Strategies
    • accept / except
    • acceptances / refusals (for employment)
    • acknowledgments
    • acronyms and initialisms (see abbreviations)
    • active voice (see voice)
    • ad hoc
    • adapt / adept / adopt
    • adapting to new technologies
    • adjectives
      • Limiting Adjectives
        • Articles
        • Demonstrative Adjectives
        • Possessive Adjectives
        • Numeral Adjectives
        • Indefinite Adjectives
      • Comparison of Adjectives
      • Placement of Adjectives
      • Use of Adjectives
    • adjustment messages
      • Full Adjustments
      • Partial Adjustments
    • adverbs
      • Types of Adverbs
      • Comparison of Adverbs
      • Placement of Adverbs
    • affect / effect
    • affectation
    • affinity
    • agreement
      • Subject-Verb Agreement
      • Compound Subjects
      • Pronoun-Antecedent Agreement
        • Gender
        • Number
        • Compound Antecedents
    • allegedly / supposedly
    • all ready / already
    • all right
    • all together / altogether
    • allude / elude / refer
    • allusion / illusion
    • allusions
    • also
    • ambiguity
    • amount / number
    • ampersands
    • and / or
    • annual reports
      • Structure and Parts
        • Financial Highlights
        • Statement to Shareholders
        • Narrative Section
        • Financial Statement
        • Board of Directors and Company Officers
      • Preparing the Report
        • Design and Visuals
    • antonyms
    • apostrophes
      • Showing Possession
      • Indicating Omission
      • Forming Plurals
    • appendixes
    • application cover letters
      • Opening
      • Body
      • Closing
      • Proofreading and Follow-up
    • appositives
    • articles
    • as / because / since
    • as much as / more than
    • as such
    • as well as
    • audience
      • Analyzing Your Audience’s Needs
      • Writing for Varied and Multiple Audiences
    • augment / supplement
    • average / median / mean
    • awhile / a while
    • awkwardness
  • B
    • bad / badly
    • balance / remainder
    • beside / besides
    • between / among
    • between you and me
    • bi- / semi-
    • biannual / biennial
    • biased language
      • Sexist Language
    • bibliographies
    • blogs and forums
      • Organizational Uses
      • Writing Style
    • both . . . and
    • brackets
    • brainstorming
    • brochures
      • Types of Brochures
      • Designing a Brochure
        • Cover Panel
        • First Inside Panel
        • Subsequent Panels
    • bulleted lists (see lists)
    • business plans
      • Purposes and Audience
      • Format, Length, and Sections
      • Company Description and Strategy
        • Business Description
        • Vision and Mission Statements
        • Goals and Milestones
        • Management and Key Team Members
      • Market Analysis and Strategy
      • Marketing Plan
      • Financial Analysis
      • Supporting Documents
    • business writing style
    • buzzwords
  • C
    • can / may
    • cannot
    • capital / capitol
    • capitalization
      • Proper Nouns
      • Common Nouns
      • First Words
      • Specific Groups
      • Specific Places
      • Specific Institutions, Events, Concepts
      • Titles of Works
      • Professional and Personal Titles
      • Abbreviations and Letters
      • Miscellaneous Capitalizations
    • case
      • Subjective Case
      • Objective Case
      • Possessive Case
      • Appositives
      • Determining the Case of Pronouns
    • cause-and-effect method of development
      • Evaluating Evidence
      • Linking Causes to Effects
    • center on
    • chronological method of development
    • cite / sight / site
    • clarity
    • clauses
    • clichés
    • coherence
    • collaborative writing
      • Tasks of the Collaborative Writing Team
        • Planning
        • Research and Writing
        • Reviewing
        • Revising
      • Using Collaborative Writing Software
    • collection letters
    • colons
      • Colons in Sentences
      • Colons with Salutations, Titles, Citations, and Numbers
      • Punctuation and Capitalization with Colons
      • Unnecessary Colons
    • comma splice
    • commas
      • Linking Independent Clauses
      • Enclosing Elements
      • Introducing Elements
        • Clauses and Phrases
        • Words and Quotations
      • Separating Items in a Series
      • Clarifying and Contrasting
      • Showing Omissions
      • Using with Numbers and Names
      • Using with Other Punctuation
      • Avoiding Unnecessary Commas
    • compare / contrast
    • comparison
    • comparison method of development
    • complaints
    • complement / compliment
    • complements
    • compose / constitute / comprise
    • compound words
    • conciseness
      • Causes of Wordiness
    • conclusions
    • conjunctions
    • connotation / denotation
    • consensus
    • context
      • Assessing Context
      • Signaling Context
    • continual / continuous
    • contractions
    • copyrights, patents, and trademarks
      • Copyrights
        • Permissions
        • Exceptions
      • Patents
      • Trademarks
    • correspondence
      • Audience and Writing Style
      • Openings and Closings
      • Goodwill and the “You” Viewpoint
      • Direct and Indirect Patterns
        • Direct Pattern
        • Indirect Pattern
      • Clarity and Emphasis
        • Lists
        • Headings
        • Subject Lines
    • cover messages (or transmittals)
    • credible / creditable
    • critique
  • D
    • dangling modifiers
    • dashes
    • data
    • dates
    • de facto / de jure
    • defective / deficient
    • defining terms
    • definite / definitive
    • definition method of development
      • Extended Definition
      • Definition by Analogy
      • Definition by Cause
      • Definition by Components
      • Definition by Exploration of Origin
      • Negative Definition
    • description
    • design (see layout and design)
    • differ from / differ with
    • different from / different than
    • direct address
    • discreet / discrete
    • disinterested / uninterested
    • division-and-classification method of development
      • Division
      • Classification
    • document management
      • Document-Management Systems
    • documenting sources
      • APA Documentation
        • APA In-Text Citations
        • APA Documentation Models
        • APA Sample Pages
      • CMS Documentation
        • CMS Footnotes and Endnotes
        • CMS Documentation Models
        • CMS Sample Pages
      • MLA Documentation
        • MLA In-Text Citations
        • MLA Documentation Models
        • MLA Sample Pages
    • double negatives
    • drawings
    • due to / because of
  • E
    • each
    • economic / economical
    • editing (see revision and proofreading)
    • e.g. / i.e.
    • ellipses
    • e-mail
      • Review and Confidentiality
      • Writing and Design
    • emphasis
      • Achieving Emphasis
        • Position
        • Climactic Order
        • Sentence Length
        • Sentence Type
        • Active Voice
        • Repetition
        • Intensifiers
        • Direct Statements
        • Long Dashes
        • Typographical Devices
    • English as a second language
      • Count and Mass Nouns
      • Articles and Modifiers
      • Gerunds and Infinitives
      • Adjective Clauses
      • Present Perfect Verb Tense
      • Present Progressive Verb Tense
    • English, varieties of
      • Colloquial English
      • Dialectal English
      • Localisms
      • Slang
    • equal / unique / perfect
    • etc
    • ethics in writing
    • euphemisms
    • everybody / everyone
    • everyday / every day
    • exclamation marks
    • executive summaries
    • expletives
    • explicit / implicit
    • exposition
  • F
    • fact
    • FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)
      • Questions to Include
      • Organization
      • Placement
    • feasibility reports
      • Report Sections
        • Introduction
        • Body
        • Conclusion
        • Recommendation
    • few / a few
    • fewer / less
    • figuratively / literally
    • figures of speech
      • Types of Figures of Speech
    • fine
    • first / firstly
    • flowcharts
    • footnotes (see documenting sources)
    • forceful / forcible
    • foreign words in English
    • foreword / forward
    • form letters
      • When to Use Form Letters
      • Writing Form Letters
      • Repurposing Form Letters
    • formal reports
      • Front Matter
        • Title Page
        • Abstract
        • Table of Contents
        • List of Figures
        • List of Tables
        • Foreword
        • Preface
        • List of Abbreviations and Symbols
      • Body
        • Executive Summary
        • Introduction
        • Text
        • Conclusions
        • Recommendations
        • Explanatory Notes
        • References (or Works Cited)
      • Back Matter
        • Appendixes
        • Bibliography
        • Glossary
        • Index
      • Sample Formal Report
    • format
    • former / latter
    • forms
      • Choosing Paper or Digital
      • Designing a Form
        • Entry Lines and Fields
        • Sequencing Entries
      • Writing Questions
    • forums (see blogs and forums)
    • fragments (see sentence fragments)
    • functional shift
  • G
    • garbled sentences
    • gender
    • general and specific methods of development
      • General to Specific
      • Specific to General
    • global communication
    • global graphics
    • glossaries
    • gobbledygook
    • good / well
    • grammar
    • grant proposals
      • Cover Message
      • Title Page
      • Application Form
      • Introduction
      • Literature Review
      • Project Narrative
        • Project Description
        • Project Outcomes
        • Budget Narrative
        • Task Schedule
      • Organization Description
      • Conclusion
      • Attachments
    • graphs
      • Line Graphs
      • Bar Graphs
      • Pie Graphs
      • Picture Graphs
  • H
    • he / she
    • headers and footers
    • headings
      • General Heading Style
      • Decimal Numbering System
    • hyphens
      • Hyphens with Compound Words
      • Hyphens with Modifiers
      • Hyphens with Prefixes and Suffixes
      • Hyphens and Clarity
      • Other Uses of the Hyphen
  • I
    • idioms
    • illustrations (see visuals)
    • imply / infer
    • in / into
    • in order to
    • in terms of
    • incident / incidence
    • incident reports
    • indexing
    • indiscreet / indiscrete
    • infographics
    • inquiries and responses
    • inside / inside of
    • instant messaging and live chat
    • instructions
      • Writing Instructions
      • Illustrating Instructions
    • insure / ensure / assure
    • intensifiers
    • interface
    • interjections
    • international correspondence
      • Cultural Differences in Correspondence
      • Cross-Cultural Examples
    • interviewing for information
      • Determining the Proper Person to Interview
      • Preparing for the Interview
      • Conducting the Interview
      • Expanding Your Notes Soon After the Interview
      • Interviewing by Phone or E-mail
    • interviewing for a job
      • Before the Interview
      • During the Interview
        • Behavior
        • Responses
        • Salary
        • Conclusion
      • After the Interview
    • introductions
      • Routine Openings
      • Opening Strategies
        • Objective
        • Problem Statement
        • Scope
        • Background
        • Summary
        • Interesting Detail
        • Definition
        • Anecdote
        • Quotation
        • Forecast
        • Persuasive Hook
      • Full-Scale Introductions
    • investigative reports
    • italics
      • Foreign Words and Phrases
      • Titles
      • Proper Names
      • Words, Letters, and Figures
      • Subheads
      • Exceptions
    • its / it’s
  • J
    • jargon
    • job descriptions
    • job search
      • Networking and Informational Interviews
      • Campus Career Services
      • Strategic Web Searches
      • Social Media
      • Job Advertisements
      • Trade and Professional Journal Listings
      • Employment Agencies (Private, Temporary, Government)
      • Internships and Co-ops
      • Service Internship and “Gap Year” Opportunities
      • Direct Inquiries
      • Other Application Genres
  • K
    • kind of / sort of
    • know-how
  • L
    • lay / lie
    • layout and design
      • Design Principles
        • Grouping
        • Contrast
        • Repetition
      • Typography
        • Typeface and Type Size
        • Type Style and Emphasis
      • Page-Design Elements
        • Justification
        • Headings
        • Headers and Footers
        • Lists
        • Columns
        • White Space
        • Color
      • Visuals
        • Icons
        • Captions
        • Rules
      • Page Layout and Thumbnails
    • lend / loan
    • letters
      • Letter Format
      • Heading
      • Inside Address
      • Salutation
      • Subject Line
      • Body
      • Complimentary Closing
      • Writer’s Signature Block
      • End Notations
      • Continuing Pages
    • like / as
    • listening
      • Fallacies About Listening
      • Active Listening
        • Step 1: Make a Conscious Decision
        • Step 2: Define Your Purpose
        • Step 3: Take Specific Actions
        • Step 4: Adapt to the Situation
    • lists
    • logic errors
      • Lack of Reason
      • Sweeping Generalizations
      • Non Sequiturs
      • False Cause
      • Biased or Suppressed Evidence
      • Fact Versus Opinion
      • Loaded Arguments
    • loose / lose
  • M
    • malapropisms
    • maps
    • maybe / may be
    • media / medium
    • meetings
      • Planning a Meeting
        • Determine the Purpose of the Meeting
        • Decide Who Should Attend
        • Choose the Meeting Time
        • Choose the Meeting Location
        • Establish the Agenda
        • Assign the Minute-Taking
      • Conducting the Meeting
        • Deal with Conflict
        • Close the Meeting
    • memos
      • Memo Format
    • methods of development
    • minutes of meetings
    • mission statements
      • Writing a Mission Statement
      • Format and Length
    • mixed constructions
    • modifiers
      • Stacked (Jammed) Modifiers
      • Misplaced Modifiers
      • Squinting Modifiers
    • mood
    • Ms. / Miss / Mrs.
    • mutual / common
  • N
    • narration
    • nature
    • needless to say
    • newsletter articles
    • newsletters
      • Types of Newsletters
      • Developing Newsletters
    • nominalizations
    • none
    • nor / or
    • note-taking
    • nouns
      • Types of Nouns
      • Noun Functions
      • Collective Nouns
      • Plural Nouns
    • number (grammar)
    • numbers
      • Numerals or Words
      • Plurals
      • Measurements
      • Fractions
      • Money
      • Time
      • Dates
      • Addresses
      • Documents
  • O
    • objects
    • OK / okay
    • on / onto / upon
    • one
    • one of those . . . who
    • online professional profile
      • Choosing the Appropriate Site
      • Writing Style and Tips
        • Personal Information and Overview
        • Experience, Education, and Skills
    • only
    • order-of-importance method of development
      • Decreasing Order
      • Increasing Order
    • organization
    • organizational charts
    • outlining
      • Advantages of Outlining
      • Types of Outlines
      • Creating an Outline
    • outside [of]
    • over [with]
  • P
    • pace
    • paragraphs
      • Topic Sentence
      • Paragraph Length
      • Writing Paragraphs
      • Paragraph Unity and Coherence
    • parallel structure
      • Faulty Parallelism
    • paraphrasing
    • parentheses
    • parts of speech
    • party
    • per
    • percent / percentage
    • periods
      • Periods in Quotations
      • Periods with Parentheses
      • Other Uses of Periods
      • Period Faults
    • person
    • personal / personnel
    • persons / people
    • persuasion
    • photographs
    • phrases
      • Prepositional Phrases
      • Participial Phrases
        • Dangling Participial Phrases
        • Misplaced Participial Phrases
      • Infinitive Phrases
      • Gerund Phrases
      • Verb Phrases
      • Noun Phrases
    • plagiarism
      • Citing Sources
      • Common Knowledge
    • plain language
    • point of view
    • policies and procedures
      • Policies
      • Procedures
    • positive writing
    • possessive case
      • Singular Nouns
      • Plural Nouns
      • Compound Nouns
      • Coordinate Nouns
      • Possessive Pronouns
      • Indefinite Pronouns
    • prefixes
    • preparation
    • prepositions
      • Prepositions at the End of a Sentence
      • Prepositions in Titles
      • Preposition Errors
    • presentations
      • Determining Your Purpose
      • Analyzing Your Audience
      • Gathering Information
      • Structuring the Presentation
        • The Introduction
        • The Body
        • Transitions
        • The Closing
      • Using Visuals
        • Flip Charts
        • Whiteboards or Chalkboards
        • Presentation Software
      • Delivering a Presentation
        • Practice
        • Delivery Techniques That Work
        • Presentation Anxiety
    • press releases
    • principal / principle
    • process explanation
    • progress and activity reports
      • Progress Reports
      • Activity Reports
    • promotional writing
    • pronoun reference
    • pronouns
      • Case
      • Gender
      • Number
      • Person
    • proofreading
    • proposals
      • Proposal Strategies
        • Audience and Purpose
        • Project Management
      • Proposal Context and Types
      • Internal Proposals
        • Informal Internal Proposals
        • Formal Internal Proposals
      • External Proposals
        • Solicited Proposals
        • Unsolicited Proposals
        • Sales Proposals
    • pseudo- / quasi-
    • punctuation
    • purpose
  • Q
    • question marks
    • questionnaires
      • Selecting the Recipients
      • Preparing the Questions
    • quid pro quo
    • quotation marks
      • Direct Quotations
      • Words and Phrases
      • Titles of Works
      • Punctuation
      • Direct Quotations
    • quotations
      • Indirect Quotations
      • Deletions or Omissions
      • Inserting Material into Quotations
      • Incorporating Quotations into Text
  • R
    • raise / rise
    • readers
    • really
    • reason is [because]
    • reference letters
    • refusal letters
    • regarding / with regard to
    • regardless
    • repetition
    • reports
    • repurposing
      • Repurpose for the Context
      • Repurpose for the Medium
    • research
      • Primary Research
      • Secondary Research
      • Library Research Strategies
        • Online Catalogs (Locating Library Holdings)
        • Online Databases and Indexes (Locating Articles)
        • Reference Works
      • Web Research Strategies
        • Search Engines
        • Web Subject Directories
      • Evaluating Sources
    • resignation letters
    • respective / respectively
    • restrictive and nonrestrictive elements
    • résumés
      • Sample Résumés
      • Analyzing Your Background
      • Returning Job Seekers
      • Organizing Your Résumé (Sections)
        • Heading
        • Job Objective vs. Headline
        • Qualifications Summary
        • Education
        • Employment Experience
        • Related Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities
        • Honors and Activities
        • References and Portfolios
      • Digital Formats and Media
        • E-mail–Attached Résumés
        • Applicant Tracking System Résumés
        • Plain-Text Résumés
        • Scannable Résumés
        • Web-Posted Résumés
    • revision
    • rhetorical questions
    • run-on sentences
  • S
    • sales letters
    • scope
    • selecting the medium
      • E-mail
      • Memos
      • Letters
      • Text and Instant Messages
      • Phone Calls and Voice Messages
      • Faxes
      • Meetings and Conference Calls
      • Web Conferences and Video Conferences
      • Web Networking and Promotion
    • semicolons
      • With Strong Connectives
      • For Clarity in Long Sentences
    • sentence construction
      • Subjects
      • Predicates
      • Sentence Types
        • Structure
        • Intention
        • Stylistic Use
      • Constructing Effective Sentences
    • sentence faults
    • sentence fragments
    • sentence variety
      • Sentence Length
      • Word Order
      • Loose and Periodic Sentences
    • sequential method of development
    • service
    • set / sit
    • shall / will
    • slashes
    • so / so that / such
    • social media
      • Choosing the Appropriate Platforms
      • Writing Style and Privacy Considerations
    • some / somewhat
    • some time / sometime / sometimes
    • spatial method of development
    • spelling
    • spreadsheets
    • style
      • Formal Writing Style
      • Informal Writing Style
    • subordination
    • suffixes
    • surveys (see questionnaires)
    • synonyms
    • syntax
  • T
    • tables
      • Table Elements
        • Table Number
        • Table Title
        • Box Head
        • Stub
        • Body
        • Rules
        • Footnotes
        • Source Line
        • Continuing Tables
      • Informal Tables
    • tables of contents
    • telegraphic style
    • tenant / tenet
    • tense
      • Past Tense
      • Past Perfect Tense
      • Present Tense
      • Present Perfect Tense
      • Future Tense
      • Future Perfect Tense
      • Shift in Tense
    • text messaging
    • that / which / who
    • there / their / they’re
    • thesaurus
    • titles
      • Reports and Long Documents
      • E-mail, Memos, and Online Postings
      • Formatting Titles
        • Capitalization
        • Italics
        • Quotation Marks
        • Special Cases
    • to / too / two
    • tone
    • transition
      • Methods of Transition
      • Transition Between Sentences
      • Transition Between Paragraphs
    • trip reports
    • trouble reports (see incident reports)
    • try to
  • U
    • unity
    • up
    • usage
    • utilize
  • V
    • vague words
    • verbals
      • Gerunds
      • Infinitives
      • Participles
    • verbs
      • Types of Verbs
      • Forms of Verbs
        • Finite Verbs
        • Nonfinite Verbs
      • Properties of Verbs
    • very
    • via
    • visuals
      • Selecting Visuals
      • Integrating Visuals with Text
    • voice
      • Using the Active Voice
        • Improving Clarity
        • Highlighting Subjects
        • Achieving Conciseness
      • Using the Passive Voice
  • W
    • wait for / wait on
    • Web design (see writing for the Web)
    • when / where / that
    • whether
    • while
    • who / whom
    • who’s / whose / of which
    • word choice
    • writing a draft
    • writing for the Web
      • Crafting Content for Your Site
        • Text Content
        • Headings
        • Lists
        • Keywords
        • Directional Cues
        • Graphics
        • Fonts
      • Using Links
      • Posting an Existing Document
  • Y
    • “you” viewpoint
    • your / you’re
  • Index
  • Commonly Misused Words and Phrases
  • Model Documents and Figures by Topic
  • Inside Back Cover
  • Back Cover